JP2023156745A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of setting a stack pointer and executing an initialization process for determining a clearing range of a RAM in an efficient and simple configuration.SOLUTION: A main RAM 4203 includes a game area intended for games and an out-of-region area not intended for games. Further, a stack provided in the game area is utilized by a process pertaining to the game area, and a stack provided in the out-of-region area is utilized by a process pertaining to the out-of-region area. When a process pertaining to the out-of-region area is called, a stack pointer of a stack provided in the out-of-region area is set. When power is turned on, a CRC of a designated region is calculated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 117

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine has been known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally has a gaming area in which game balls fired onto the gaming board can roll, and a starting area provided in this gaming area. , a symbol display device, and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as the game ball passing through the starting area (the game ball enters the starting hole) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to display the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, special symbols to be described later) is displayed in a variable manner on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (so-called "jackpot"). ”).

Furthermore, conventionally, a pachinko game machine is known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to separate and use ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a gaming area that contains programs and data related to processing related to gaming, and an area outside the area that contains data related to processing other than gaming, and the RAM The game area is divided into a gaming area that includes work areas related to gaming-related processing, and an extra-area area that includes working areas related to non-gaming processing, and a ROM gaming area and RAM gaming area. The area is assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In addition, some of the registers used for data calculation and storage are provided for each bank, and a stack pointer that indicates the current operation position in the stack, which is a memory area for temporarily holding data, is also provided for each bank. set for each

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, and further setting registers and stacks separately, when executing a program in a pachinko machine, you can switch banks and change the playing area. The processing to be used and the processing to use the outside area can be managed separately, and processing related to games and processing other than gaming can be separated so that the programs and data to be used are not mixed up.

JP 2021-53443 Publication

However, the setting of the stack pointer in the initialization process is performed for the gaming area of RAM by the process (program) related to bank 0, and for the area outside the RAM area, the stack pointer is set by switching from bank 0 to bank 1. Although it is necessary to perform a process (program) related to this, there has been no consideration given to an efficient and concise configuration of the process of setting the stack pointer and the timing and order of bank switching. Furthermore, when clearing the RAM in the initialization process, no consideration has been given to an efficient and simple configuration for the process of determining the range.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to efficiently and simply configure the initialization processing that sets the stack pointer provided for each bank and determines the clear range of RAM. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment) includes arithmetic processing for controlling game operations and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming. and a storage means for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area, and furthermore, the stack provided in the gaming area is used for processing related to the gaming area, and the stack is used in the non-gaming area. The stack provided in the non-gaming area is used by the process related to the non-gaming area, and when the process related to the non-gaming area is called for the first time, the stack of the stack provided in the non-gaming area is used. set pointer,
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
If the CRC values do not match as a result of the comparison process, and if a setting change is instructed when the power is turned on, set the first address of the clear range to be set in the event of an abnormality to the first address of the clear range. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, initialization processing such as setting of a stack pointer provided for each bank and bank switching for that purpose can be performed with an efficient and simple configuration.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, and (B) an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving setting processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a pre-read per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a flowchart showing a pre-read performance pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the jackpot type look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead play form to a time-saving win look-ahead play form. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the machine according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko game machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram of the various registers which the main CPU of the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention has. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an overview of main RAM clear processing in a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an overview of main RAM clear processing in a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an overview of external interrupt processing related to power outage detection in a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing main control main processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing main control main processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing main control main processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows designated area CRC inspection processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the starting state check process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart showing specified range clear processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the outside designated area clearing process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the data storage process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change confirmation process performed in the pachinko gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change confirmation process performed in the pachinko gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power interruption determination process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power interruption setting process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows designated area CRC generation processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display monitor total division process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the outside RAM clear check process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart showing main control command transmission and reception processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control command transmission start process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart showing external maskable interrupt processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing system timer interrupt processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal state monitoring process performed in the pachinko gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart showing abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game LED lighting data output process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information update process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the performance control command transmission process performed in the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a limiter frequency|count update process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of V prize winning device release control processing in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the effect of bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 6th pachinko game machine is seen diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in the 6th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the presentation flow in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon collection order scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for showdown reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a fan preview determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the western mode and the eastern mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) illustrating the presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (Part 2) for explaining a pseudo continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (No. 3) for explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of the road to the ultimate battle in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a lotus flower preview performance in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a battle reach effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a block diagram explaining the structure of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the performance button device in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal outputted to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric accessory in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of the operation details of the normal electric accessory in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a right-handed play instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving management processing in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game state setting process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game state control process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the presentation flow of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the start time determination table of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table at the time of final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for window preview in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the reservation notice performance pattern determination table of the reservation change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a winning notice performance pattern determination table for the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of the performance stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 3) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-read effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the 1st normal game state in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance and door performance in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the production of a Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating selection of a production stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance when Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of a continuous battle in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state related setting table in the 8th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of an opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving management processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit winning number update process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game closure in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during opening of a small winning game in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of limiter information update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in the 8th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the presentation flow of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining a battle performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the ending performance in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image explaining a preview performance in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning type determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a game state related setting table in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading special symbols in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the 2nd starting opening in the 9th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the B time-saving game state transition determination process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game closure in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game opening in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol per end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of system timer interruption processing in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of sub-control circuit processing in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a BONUS state effect in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning type determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state related setting table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the normal game state in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the RUSH gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the 2nd starting opening in the 10th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game stop command determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game return processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game stop function initial value setting process in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the B time-saving game state transition determination process in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the C time-saving game state transition determination process in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game closure in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small winning game in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game stop function setting process in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game stop data update processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game stop data update processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the production mode determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a telop effect pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of the first game stop notice end determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 10th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 10th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 10th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-read performance determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the performance flow of the performance mode in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the time chart of the game stop notice by the game stop command in the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating card performance in the chance performance mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the RUSH entry performance in the chance performance mode in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining a look-ahead effect in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the tenth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image of game stop notification in the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a small winning type determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state related setting table in the 11th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the RUSH gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the 2nd starting opening in the 11th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game stop command determination table in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return process in the 11th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function initial value setting process in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving management processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the B time-saving game state transition determination process in the 11th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the C time-saving game state transition determination process in the 11th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game closure in the 11th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small winning game in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol per end processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function setting process in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game stop data update processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game stop data update processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the performance mode determination table in the 11th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a telop effect pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first game stop notice end determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pre-read performance determination process in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a gaming state transition diagram showing the transition of gaming states in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the performance flow of the performance mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the time chart of the game stop notice by the game stop command in the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a card performance in a chance performance mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the RUSH entry performance in the chance performance mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a look-ahead effect in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a general effect mode, an omen effect mode, and a mode transition effect in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the eleventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image of game stop notification in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process, which will be described later, are displayed. (hereinafter also referred to as "regular symbol lottery") results are finalized. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is variable. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the display is on hold; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. This is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as not being displayed, and variable display of the first special symbol being suspended. In addition, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. This is true if all certain requirements are met, such as display being withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the game is on hold, and that the first hold is a hold on the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the item is on hold, and that the first hold is the hold on the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. A center accessory 115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 120, a general prize opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting opening 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the first special symbol hit determination process when the first special symbol starting condition (also referred to as "first special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a grand prize opening 131, a count switch 132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a special electric accessory 133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

Moreover, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is a prize opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side region 107, for example. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, Various random values, such as a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination for the second special symbol, and a random value for performance selection for the second special symbol, are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side area 106 (more specifically, on the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147 made of a blade member, for example, called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 147. . The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. In addition, the movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the large winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning ports 122, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6, described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 300. The performance accessory group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (for example, see FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time saving notification display section 168.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 It becomes easier for the game ball to enter (pass) the prize.

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 displays the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when normal symbol start information, that is, variable display is pending. It is equipped with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 Alternatively, a variable display of the first special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishment, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h that constitute the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the second special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 Alternatively, a variable display of the second special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishing, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that constitute the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol pending display section displays the number of variable displays of special symbols that are pending (hereinafter referred to as the "number of pending special symbols") when special symbol start information, that is, variable displays are pending. It includes a first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first special symbol is displayed after the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the second special symbol is displayed after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Probability change notification display section)
The probability change notification display section 167 can be turned on during execution of probability change control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probability variation control is being executed, but, for example, the display unit 167 may be turned on so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probability variation control is being executed. The fact that this is being executed may be kept secret.

However, when the power is cut off while variable probability control is being executed, data indicating that variable probability control is being executed will not be lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the probability change control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the probability change notification display section 167 lights up in such a manner that it can be visually recognized that the probability change control is being performed.

Note that even if it is hidden before the power is turned off whether or not the probability change control is being executed, the probability change notification display section 167 is turned on when the power is turned on. The system is configured so that it can be recognized that variable probability control is being executed.

(Display section for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display section 168 includes, for example, a first time-saving notification display section 168a and a second time-saving notification display section 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display sections 168 is limited to this. Not limited.

Although details will be described later, the time-saving gaming state includes an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state. For example, it is configured such that it is possible to grasp which time-saving game state the game is in by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display section 168a and the second time-saving notification display section 168b.

The time saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time saving control being executed. By lighting or extinguishing the lights in a manner that makes it impossible to visually determine whether or not they are being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or in a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), It may be hidden so that the fact that time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control that is being executed cannot be recognized from the outside. In particular, although it may be possible to determine from the appearance whether or not the time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to determine from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. By keeping the type of time-saving control hidden, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power is cut off while time saving control is being executed, the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later, will prevent data indicating that time saving control is being executed, as well as data indicating the type of time saving control being executed. does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the time saving control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the time saving notification display section 168 is displayed in such a manner that it is possible to visually understand that the time saving control is in progress and the type of time saving control that is being executed. turns on or off.

Note that even if the time-saving control is being executed before the power is turned off, or the type of time-saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In such a case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be visually recognized.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, a time saving notification display section 168, a normal electricity solenoid 148, a special electricity solenoid 135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141, a passage gate switch 127, a count switch 132, and a general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include "special symbol games" that use special symbols and "normal symbol games" that use regular symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole 120, 140, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state is treated as one special symbol game. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is After the result of the processing is derived, when the small winning game state is controlled, the period until the end of the small winning gaming state is one special symbol game.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 133 is operated to keep the jackpot 131 open for a predetermined period of time (for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning a prize in the jackpot 131 is relatively high. It will be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is carried out when there is a winning (passing) to the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, and the special symbol winning process. This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of the starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as voices and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state where there is no jackpot is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. In addition, if it is not a jackpot but a time-saving win, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting award process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 (for example, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol design, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for performance selection) Various data such as various random values such as numerical values, etc.) are held until the starting conditions of the special symbol are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140 between when the special symbol starts winning and until the special symbol's starting conditions are met. A pre-read judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern based on the start information obtained prior to the special symbol winning judgment process. It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140 is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and performs a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute production control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). Becomes an open state where (passage) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)), and is a performance that changes the winning probability of "normal symbol". , the variable display time of the normal symbol, or/and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of the normal symbol, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range ( A soft random number method may be used that generates a random number within a certain range (range), or a hard random number method may be used that extracts a random number from a counter in a random number generator in which the random number is updated at a predetermined period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot gaming state is divided into a low probability state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be broadly classified.

The high-probability gaming state includes a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Although it is not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. It may also be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state includes an A-time-saving gaming state, a B-time-saving gaming state, and a C-time-saving gaming state.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, when the jackpot gaming state has ended and the variable display of special symbols has started in a non-high probability gaming state (i.e., a gaming state where the probability change flag is off), or when the RAM has been cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the time-saving game state can be entered, and a specified number of special symbol games are executed. , When the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of "time-saving winning" is derived. When the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times determined by winning the "Time-saving win" or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state C ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, if a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the time-saving game state C continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the main CPU 201 controls to internally activate any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally operating the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Operating in parallel is called "executing in parallel." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in a stacked manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even if a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed overlappingly, the player understands that the game is being controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving gaming states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained.

Even when controlled in the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state (A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C working-time saving gaming state), and high-accuracy gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to shift to any of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state (for example, high-precision time-saving gaming state). However, the time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the jackpot gaming state ends is limited to the A-time-saving gaming state.

When controlled to be in a high-precision gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high-precision gaming state to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, there is no transition to the high-precision gaming state unless the game goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it cannot shift to the A time saving gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if the control is in either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, once the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the normal gaming state will be entered. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between time-saving game states will be explained.

When the A time saving gaming state is controlled, the number of times that can be executed in the A time saving gaming state is set to be less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. There is no transition to the time-saving gaming state. Further, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the B working time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", the conditions for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state are met, so the A-time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state may overlap. . However, as mentioned above, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the C time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state.

When controlled in the B time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is established, and the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state are Can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state is established, and the C-time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state are Can overlap.

In addition, details regarding the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

The first pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (eg, firing mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variable flag is on (in this example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variable control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, approximately 1/76 at setting 2, Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

Note that, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values. For example, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/160, and when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/240. There is. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the number of set time saving times) may be varied depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times will be set as the number of time saving times, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times will be set as the number of time saving times. You can also do this.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery targets, but small wins may be included in the lottery targets. When a small win is included in the lottery target, the small win probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the lottery, the small hit will only be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You can also make it wet. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The short-time winning probability and the small winning probability when the lottery includes the above-mentioned short winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, but they are not limited to this, and may vary depending on the setting value. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is shown for example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time-saving hit" is based on the random numerical value for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball enters the starting opening 120, 140. , is a table that is referred to when determining a "jackpot" or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting opening 120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether it is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, similar to the hit determination process for the first special symbol. ” is decided. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it is a win. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

As described above, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process), It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( It becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data) by simply increasing the width of the judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state This will effectively extend the period, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" can be won regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Fig. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Fig. 10) is determined. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, an area of 0 to 7. It consists of a 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. , area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol. corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. , area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the display mode of the LEDs (display mode of time-saving win) led to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the second special symbol and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the display mode of the LEDs (jackpot display mode) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area from among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", the display manner of the LEDs (the display manner of loss) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

FIG. 12(B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of decorative patterns that is derived when the variable display of decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 stops, in response to a pattern designation command. be done. Note that the "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 12(B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In addition, since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled to display the special symbol being displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display performance in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol being variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 include a left pattern consisting of 9 symbols 1 to 9, and a middle pattern consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern. , the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving win. By stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in this embodiment, odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, a small win symbol is added to the symbols constituting the middle symbol. (a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops displaying the medium symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can understand that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 determines the stop mode of the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets the left symbol and the right symbol to an odd number as the stop mode of the decorative symbol, for example. It is stopped at a symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time-saving symbol. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as you can see from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case where the symbol command is ``zA1'' or ``zA6'' (when the selected symbol command is ``z0'', ``z1'' or ``z7''), the number of time savings set is greater, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 selects, for example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. to stop at an even number of odd-numbered symbols.

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 selects, for example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Stops at an even number of even symbols. In addition, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"), There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the even-numbered symbols (matched), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set to ON).

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" '', the expected value of the probability change flag being set on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", it is more advantageous for the player than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lose"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a random spot. The loose pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the stop mode of the decorative symbols according to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is "zA1", the left symbol "2", the middle symbol "Time-saving", and the right symbol "4") is Although shown as an example, the stop mode shown in the column of the stop mode of the decorative pattern in FIG. 12(B) is just an example, and is not limited thereto.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the high-precision gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C-time-saving gaming state. You can also do this.

In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery when the probability change flag is on, and forcibly changes the display mode of a loss to the special symbol display section even if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win". 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on, time-saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, "time-saving winning" is not included in the lottery result (result of special symbol winning judgment processing). A determination process may be performed. In this case, time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination when the probability change flag is off, and time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned when the probability change flag is on. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is off, the width of the random number assigned to the time-saving hit judgment value data is changed to the loss judgment value data, jackpot judgment value data, or loss judgment value instead of the time-saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both data and jackpot judgment value data.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, control the machine to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

The time-saving performance in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in A-time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 determines the state of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the state of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 13.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. The winning/losing judgment value data is determined based on the random number value (the winning/losing judgment is performed), and the winning/losing (“time saving win”, “big hit” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the value data, and the type of display mode (time saving type or jackpot type) to be derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot".

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state may be set higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time savings in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 etc. are intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot gaming state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). .

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hits A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in Figure 15 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be either a short-time hit or a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 140. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S96 in FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is extracted, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and does not set the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, if the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the time saving flag is on, regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be made to be different in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming states. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". It is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

The B time-saving gaming state starts, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change starts. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling variation is "lose", the display mode of "lose" is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, changing the decorative pattern to a special symbol) to show the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been met (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or an effect in which both of these are performed. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the transition to the B time-saving game state is not made.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variation flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is controlled unless the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". In a pachinko game machine where the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small win", the small win display mode The B time-saving game state may be started when the is drawn on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small winning game state ends. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small win is displayed on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. , the above-mentioned display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. Note that in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may vary depending on the setting value. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot", the game is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, the ceiling counter is activated by the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). If a switch other than that (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or if the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of winning a normal symbol, a predetermined It is reset when the following conditions are met. Then, if updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko gaming machine instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 Update the ceiling counter (+1). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if a special symbol is displayed variablely, but for example, if it is a ST machine or a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag will not be updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after turning off. In addition, in the case of a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so if the ceiling counter is updated at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a specification in which the main CPU 201 performs a high probability rolling lottery, when the sub CPU 301 receives the command sent from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 produces an effect that suggests winning the high probability rolling lottery or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform a performance that suggests a transition from a state to a low-probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting point of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, and it becomes more interesting. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of gameplay. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, by displaying a countdown effect or a fake countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Additionally, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of special symbols after the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the time or end of the process.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 controls the variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of the process.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') '') is started, or when the B time saving final variation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving winning". In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are that a time-saving win is won (a time-saving win where the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7", or "z8"), and the display mode of the time-saving win is a special symbol. It is to be derived (determined and displayed) on the display sections 163 and 164. Furthermore, even if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the C-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and In the case where the C time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit"), the C time-saving game do not move to the state. In addition, if the condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C-time saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 will not make the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Control is executed to derive the display mode of to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

In addition, the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state are determined in response to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met. The prescribed number of C time savings, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time saving gaming state, starts variable display of the special symbol for the number of time saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving final variation"). It may be set when the C time saving final variation is completed, or when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time saving game state may be any time between the start of the C time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending condition for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending condition for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the fact that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the information may include that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that a time-saving fall lottery has been conducted and that the time-saving fall lottery has been won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process in S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit determination table includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data for each time saving type. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 79. Then, the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

As described above, in this example, among the non-time saving gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A working time saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16) Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the regular symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 will , "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz5" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol randomness of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. Thereafter, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command that is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the variable display start process of normal symbols in S293 of FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a waiting time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. It is decided to be 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed to the non-time-saving game state. Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the state A, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the most advantageous mode is the most unfavorable mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (that is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process that is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later). referenced in the following). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and selects the normal symbol effect based on the gaming state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied]
In the above explanation, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saver win" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You can do it like this.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Duplication of time-saving gaming states]
When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are provided, the time-saving gaming states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving winning", the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state will overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed overlappingly, or the time-saving game states may not overlap (that is, the "time-saving hit" is ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap, the prescribed number of A time saving gaming states, which is the end condition for the A working time saving gaming state, is set to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game states overlap, a mode in which the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode of repeatedly executing time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate.If the time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C. Possible modes include a mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed overlappingly, and a mode in which the B-time saving game state is executed in a layered manner when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which time-saving game state C is superimposed on first time-saving game state]
If you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the time-saving win on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and adopts as the time-saving number the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, and the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving game state is greater than the number of time savings that can be executed based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 201 executes the A time saving win. While maintaining the time-saving performance of the game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-savings in the time-saving game state A is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 200, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of time savers that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case of the number of times, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from here on is as long as a "jackpot" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, the appearance of the number of working hours and the time-saving performance is This is the same as the case where the A time-saving gaming state is continued without winning.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time saving win" is won in the A time saving gaming state and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the A While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled until the number of time-savings set based on the "time-saving win" is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 20, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case that the time saving performance of the time saving game state A is maintained, the number of time saving times from this point on is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the A time-saving gaming state, after that, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two. A variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode of executing B time saving gaming state overlapping C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the following, the case where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be explained. .

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving games in C-time saving game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and if the prescribed number of B-time-saving games is 200, then C-time saving game state While maintaining the time-saving performance of , the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving gaming state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the prescribed number of B time-savings is greater than the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. In this case, while maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state C, the number of time saving times from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small win display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", a loss display format is derived. . When the small win display mode is derived, the small win game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving flag on even during the small win game state.

Next, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final variation, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are different. A case where this holds true will be explained. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being drawn to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

First, if control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when this is done, the control is already in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived, the greater of the prescribed number of time saving times of B and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is used up. Control to a time-saving gaming state.

Next, when control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when the B time-saving game state is not yet controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state while satisfying the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, deriving the display mode of a jackpot, deriving a display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, the time saving game state is controlled until the larger of the prescribed number of time saving times B and the number of time saving times in the time saving game state C is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed are satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be ended.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the sub CPU 301 executes the B time-saving game that is performed when only the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied. A special display performance that is different from the transition display performance and the C time-saving shift display performance that is performed when only the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied may be performed. In addition, instead of this, for example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state is maintained, a B time saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state is maintained, a C time saving transition display effect is performed. Either one of the B time saving transition display performance and the C time saving transition display performance may be performed with priority.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts the B time-saving game. To control a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when executing multiple time-saving gaming states at the same time]
Above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the first time-saving gaming state, and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a superimposed manner on the C time-saving gaming state have been explained.

If the specification is such that a plurality of time-saving gaming states can be executed in parallel, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack may be different, but it is not possible to make the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack to be the same. preferable.

For example, if the specification is such that the C time saving game state can be executed overlapping the first time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the first time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state be the same. In addition, if the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be executed overlapping the C time saving gaming state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state be the same.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in succession, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later on top of the time-saving gaming state that has been executed first is, for example, It may be provided with one time-saving performance that is the same as the current time-saving gaming state and another time-saving performance that is different from this one time-saving performance. Then, when executing a time-saving game state over the time-saving game state that has been executed first, the first time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If you do not want to repeat this, you may activate other time-saving abilities.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow the B time saving gaming state to be executed in the C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state can be set to the same time saving performance as the C time saving gaming state, and this one time saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances are provided with other time-saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time-saving game state, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance is activated. may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. A possible mode (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode") is possible in which a hit determination process is performed and the time-saving gaming states are not executed overlappingly even if the time-saving gaming states overlap. In the latter mode, even if you win a time-saving win in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, you can ignore this and repeat the C-time-saving gaming states. There are two possible modes: a mode in which it is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B-time saver game state is not executed again. Below, the above two modes considered as the latter mode will be explained.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the time-saving game state C is not executed in combination with the time-saving game state 1]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving gaming state based on the "time saving winning" unless the last special symbol in the first time saving gaming state is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "time saving final variation"). Control is performed to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if a "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first time saving gaming state is Different controls can be executed depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends and the case where one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the main CPU 201, after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit, changes the time-saving game state C. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the display mode per time-saving is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, when the display mode per time-saving is derived and the one time-saving gaming state ends. When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed before the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the first time saving gaming state without controlling to the C time saving gaming state. End the time-saving gaming state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode per time saver before the end process of one time saver game state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saver game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling to the C-time-saving game state, if the end processing of the first time-saving game state has not been processed at the time when the display mode per time-saving game is derived, If the end processing of the first time-saving game state has already been performed, control is performed to the time-saving game state C.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which B time-saving game state is not executed in combination with C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss", the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of time-saving games in the C-time saving gaming state is exhausted. The time saving game state C is controlled until the game is completed.

However, when the remaining time saving number of the C time saving gaming state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the B time saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving gaming state is performed after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B time saving gaming state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for activation. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. will be provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power cutoff process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power cutoff process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demonstration display command when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S73), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75. Move.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S74), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75. Move.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is such that when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is the second special symbol to be processed. ) is YES, the first special symbol is the processing target. In addition, when the control state number is not "0", the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S81), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S83. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S83 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S83 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S84 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S85 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S87 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S88 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but if it is a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol win is included. If the result of the determination process is a small win, a small win flag is set on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. It should be noted that the time saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that the game is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process to judge or determine the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, time-saving hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S94) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, etc. Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) (see S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S100, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S111), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S122, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S128), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S129). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S86) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S131, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). Note that the special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process in S151, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in a stacked manner when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state. Incidentally, when shifting to the high probability gaming state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in each of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state.

When the transition conditions to the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and/or the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied, a time-saving counter is set for the time-saving gaming state in which the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the time-saving counter reaches 0 ( The time-saving game state may be ended when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set time-saving number (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (if NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and starts the process with the counter. Return to the update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S164.

Note that the C time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when a B time saving counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with 2 bits, for example, and when the C-time-saving gaming state is executed overlappingly with the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first, it is set to "time-saving mode = 3". Furthermore, when the B time saving game state is executed over the time saving game state which is being executed first, "time saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S166.

The B time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the C working time saving gaming state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process. , returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S164, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S166, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when executing a plurality of time-saving gaming states in a stacked manner, it is not limited to just stacking two time-saving gaming states, but may execute three or more time-saving gaming states in a stacking manner. In this case, as mentioned above, the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state do not overlap, so the case where three or more time saving gaming states overlap means that the A working time saving gaming state or the B working time saving gaming state and two This corresponds to the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter updating process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Fig. 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. Details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, if the time saving counter is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process in S184, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

Note that if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, they should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some kind of problem may occur when executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time saving counter or the time saving counter is 1 or more even though S183 is YES, , abnormality processing such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. In addition, instead of or in addition to this abnormality processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset. The counter, the B time saving counter, and the C time saving counter may be made consistent.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) for the time saving shift command. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and transfers the process to the counter determination process (Fig. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (NO in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process in S193, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process in S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S202), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and converts the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 36). ). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S202), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the B time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 2, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

Note that the number of time saving times set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (NO in S206), that is, if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving shift process and transfers the process to the counter determination process ( (see Figure 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time saving flag is on (YES determination in S206), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time saving times to be set in the C time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process in S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time saving times set in the C time saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S211).

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

When S211 is YES, the probability change flag is off and, for example, when the time-saving game state B is executed in a state in which the time-saving game state C is executed first (the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value) ), or when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state where the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state has been executed first (if you win the "time saving winning"). do.

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and also sets the time saving gaming state determined in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S211), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-savings (NO in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of time-savings, the main CPU 201 The setting process is ended and the process returns to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is larger than the new number of time saving times (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, the B time saving gaming state may be executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is executed first. If the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly in the current state, the current time saving counter value (i.e. remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number, whichever is greater, will be reset as the new time saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to manage that two time saving game states are being executed internally in a superimposed manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are being executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is the same as the above two time-saving gaming states that are being executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states is included. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are executed simultaneously without internally managing the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed simultaneously (i.e., without providing a B-time-saving counter and a C-time-saving counter), The current time saving counter value and the new time saving number, whichever is larger, may be reset as the new time saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is executed when S211 is NO, that is, when the non-time-saving gaming state is transferred to the B-time-saving gaming state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is the process that is performed when the game is moved to and executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, the number of time saving times and the time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S207) are set. After executing the process in S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 executes the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the completion of the small winning gaming state. It's good to do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, B time-saving game It is preferable to perform transition processing to the state. This is because when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made, and while the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation, the other special symbol is variable. This is because when the display is started, the variable display of the other special symbol will no longer be able to benefit from the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of special symbols is not performed in a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in pachinko gaming machines where special symbols can be variably displayed with such long fluctuations, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling fluctuation. As a result, even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation, a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state can be avoided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B-time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B-time-saving gaming state is replaced with the process related to the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state. Although the process is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to this (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is given priority over the B time saving control mode determining process (S205), which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. It may also be done by

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35). I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, even if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving game state may not be made, but the transition to the B time saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving gaming state just when the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter reaches the ceiling value. Processing will be carried out.

Further, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is a transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko game machine such as the first pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above, , the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0), regardless of the setting value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value may be overlooked by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, no matter what setting value is set, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, but by It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the setting value.

[1-6-18. Variations related to time-saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is replaced with the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time-saving gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time-saving gaming state (time-saving hit flag) are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made; When the time saving winning flag is on, the game is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order of transition to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state C The time-saving management process can be performed in various variations without being limited to the above-mentioned decision as to whether the transition flag is separate or common.

For example, the execution timing of the time-saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when fluctuation is stopped, the processing at the time of transition is set to give priority to the B-time-saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C-time-saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of fluctuation stop, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation stops, and when the ceiling is reached, it is confirmed that the "time saving hit" is not won, and then the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made. good.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0, and in other cases, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the time-saving counter. It is best not to subtract .

[1-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning hole is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major prize opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 131 has not elapsed (NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S293 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), random numbers for determining the hit of the normal symbol are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, 0 to 79. Normal symbol per judgment value data (in case of non-time saving gaming state). The probability of winning a normal symbol is determined by the number of judgment value data for a normal symbol relative to the total random number of random numbers for determining a winning of the normal symbol, so for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in a non-time-saving gaming state where time-saving control is not executed, whereas in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed, it is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 1,000 msec. It only runs for a short time. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S301). After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port. After executing the process in S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process in S305, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the settings can be changed; and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Note that details of the setting control process in S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is allowed (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S331), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S333), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are used. is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change process (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process (S371) at the time of power failure recovery.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is on (YES in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power interruption. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process in S381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values for normal symbols (random values for determining hit of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. . In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 for normal symbols that are held until the starting conditions for the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4). In the ball passage detection process, whether or not there is a free space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is extracted. It is also determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that no game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random number for the first special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the first special symbol). Various random numerical values, such as random numerical values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on winnings in the first starting hole 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting memory that holds various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120 until a starting condition is satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (if NO in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process in S394, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28), the random number value extracted in S392 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, perform the hit determination process, etc. It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the random number value is extracted in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the special symbol hit determination process is started. In view of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform it, for example, around the time before and after the process of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command for the first special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol by 1, variation pattern information for the first special symbol (i.e., variation pattern command for the special symbol), etc. The winning command for the first special symbol that has been reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 detects a game ball.

If it is determined that a game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (NO in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting port winning detection process and changes the process to the switch input detection process (FIG. 51). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (YES in S398), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random number for the second special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the second special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winning. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winnings in the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 140 in a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special memory area (1) for holding various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 140 until starting conditions are met. It has a symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). . In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (NO in S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and changes the process to the switch input detection process ( (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the pending number of second special symbols. After executing the process in S401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numerical values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the second special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when a backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the appearance of the display effect that is output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined. The mode of sound production, etc. is determined.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301, as one of the various processes performed in the performance mode determination process, for example, creates a production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "sub variation") of a sub variation production corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "performance pattern"), a pre-read performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern for a pre-read performance (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read performance pattern"), etc. In addition, in the performance mode determination process, for example, the performance mode of a countdown performance that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the performance mode of the B time-saving game state transition performance that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is determined. Processing and the like are also performed to determine various performance aspects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern or a character performance patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation performance, expectations for the result of the special symbol hit determination process change as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the special symbol stops, depending on the sub-variation performance pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, the sub-variable performance patterns include short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc. is included. As mentioned above, time-saving hits A, B, and C are reaches where the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in Figure 28) indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be both a short-time hit and a jackpot.

Note that, for example, if the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 will prioritize execution of one of the effects. good.

The pre-read performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the pre-read determination process. The look-ahead performance is a performance that indicates the level of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is performed when in a pending state (i.e., after winning a prize at the first start opening 120, starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on the winning result). This is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 before the special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead performance, when in the hold state, the look-ahead judgment is performed as time passes (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information that was held in advance), depending on the look-ahead performance pattern that is executed. It is possible to indicate that the level of expectation regarding the outcome of the treatment is maintained or increased.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the special symbol hit judgment process. A look-ahead expected value performance pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process being a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is included. That is, in the look-ahead presentation, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the type of result of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. It is. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process (S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later) (Reference) is carried out. Specific examples of the per-reading type performance pattern, the pre-reading expected value performance pattern, the per-reading type performance pattern determination process, and the pre-reading expected value performance pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table (detailed explanation is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the time saving flag is off (normal gaming state). This sub-variable effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation performance pattern determination table in a gaming state where the time-saving flag is on (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), but the explanation will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A sub-variation effect pattern (indicated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variable performance pattern includes short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E. There is.

The time-saving wins A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving win as described above, and are also reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit-type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15, Figure 54, and (See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "jackpot" (Figure 15 reference). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. This is a form of reach production that makes it difficult to grasp whether there is a Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but is displayed only if it is a jackpot or "time-saving hit". (See Figure 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the determined sub variation effect pattern to be displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a prefetch per-type performance pattern determination process and a prefetch expected value performance pattern determination process, which are performed as the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes the first special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), and the A first sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3), and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) contain various information related to the extracted random number value. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state). It may be made to be carried out, or it may be made to be carried out for the second special symbol.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 includes a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first holding area as areas for displaying held images. A second reservation area corresponding to the sub-reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. [Table referenced in pre-reading type performance pattern determination processing]
The table referred to in the prefetch type performance pattern determination process will be explained.

By the way, the format of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed with the determined look-ahead effect type effect pattern includes a time-saving look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a jackpot. This includes a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form that shows the possibility of a short-time hit and a jackpot.

The look-ahead hit type performance pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead look to a time-saving win look-ahead look, or from a common win look-ahead look to a jackpot look ahead look. This is a production pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 55 is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table. FIG. 55 shows only the prefetch target variation patterns among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a pre-reading type performance pattern determination table. Note that these tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the per-reading type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the pre-read per type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the pre-read per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table in FIG. 56 and determines the pre-reading type effect pattern. To be more specific, as shown in the pre-read per-type performance pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for convenience, the "pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number" is shown as "SASPT number", and the "pre-reading per type effect pattern" is shown as "SAS effect pattern". The random number value 1 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "55", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "77", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “A” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving win. When a pending image is displayed in the time-saving look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “B” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “C” is , Indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a common winning look-ahead presentation format, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a jackpot.

For example, if the look-ahead performance pattern is determined to be "07H", the common win system look-ahead performance form "C" is displayed in the third holding area, and also in the second holding area after shifting from the third holding area. A common winning look-ahead presentation form "C" is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common winning look-ahead presentation form "C" changes to the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form "A", and in the first holding area, the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form "A" is displayed.

Further, when the pre-reading per-type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning-type pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third holding area. Then, when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common winning look-ahead performance form "C" changes to the jackpot look-ahead performance form "B", and the shift from the second holding area and the second holding area changes. After that, in the first holding area, a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the pre-read per type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E). In addition, in this example, there is a pattern in which the jackpot type look-ahead performance form "B" changes to the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form "A", and the pattern changes from the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form "A" to the long-short hit look-ahead performance form "B". Patterns that change to are not included in the type effect pattern per look-ahead, but these patterns may be included in the type effect pattern per look-ahead.
B) A look-ahead performance pattern for time-saving winnings (for example, a look-ahead performance pattern for a time-saving win) in which a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time it is suspended, and the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter. "09H").
B) A look-ahead jackpot performance pattern in which a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the performance form does not change after that, and the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed (for example, look-ahead winning type performance pattern “17H”) ).
c) At the time of suspension, a common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead win type performance pattern "24H").
d) A look-ahead common winning performance pattern B (for example, a look-ahead winning type performance pattern “12H”) that is displayed in a common win type look-ahead performance form at the time of suspension and then changes to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form.
e) At the time of suspension, the common winning type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and after that the performance form does not change, and the common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed. pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-reading type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. ) to determine. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random value 1 for sub-performance selection, A pre-read per type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and the look-ahead winning type performance pattern in which it changes to the jackpot type look-ahead performance form "B" after that is not shown. In this way, the sub-CPU 301 may determine the pre-read winning type presentation pattern that changes from the short-time winning pre-read presentation form "A" to the jackpot-based pre-read presentation form "B". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form "B" is a jackpot-based look-ahead performance that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a jackpot (that is, it may be a loss), as described above. However, in addition to this, a jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance mode may be displayed that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot confirmation. In this case, the pre-reading type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type effect patterns f) to h).
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern A in which a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form “A”, jackpot type look-ahead presentation form “B”, common winning look-ahead presentation form “C”, etc.) are displayed, and then , A look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern B that changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
H) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form “A”, common winning look-ahead presentation form “C”, etc.) are displayed, and then jackpot type look-ahead presentation form “B” is displayed, and then the look-ahead jackpot confirmation performance pattern C changes to the jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the short-time winning look-ahead performance form “A”, the jackpot look-ahead performance form “B”, and the common winning look-ahead performance form “C”, the common winning look-ahead performance form “C” is suspended. Although "C" is displayed most frequently, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form “A” may be the highest, and at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of the jackpot-type look-ahead presentation form “B” may be the highest. You can do it like this. Furthermore, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the common win type look-ahead presentation form "C" may be the lowest.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all “pre-fetch performance type performance pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but this is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number It may also be possible not to allocate a random number value for sub-performance selection only to (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. [Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process]
Next, a table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be explained.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of a win) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed according to the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot).

When a pending image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is normally represented by a triangle, may be changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the retained image is a square, and the highest when the retained image is a star.

In addition, when a pending image is displayed as a jackpot-type look-ahead effect, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, may be changed to a color such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

Although the details will be described later, in the case where a pending image is displayed as a common winning look-ahead effect that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, the pending image can be used as an expected value for a jackpot, for example. It may be expressed by both the color indicating the level and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving win, or it may be expressed by a dedicated common win system look-ahead presentation form.

A pending image in which look-ahead presentation is performed can change from a presentation form with a relatively low expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value, but the expected value may change from a presentation form with a relatively high expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value. It is preferable not to change to a low performance form. Also, when changing the presentation form of the held image, it is not necessarily necessary to change it one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." , for example, it may be changed to "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Further, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the square or blue, which has the lowest expected value, but may start from a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (reservation correspondence) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, similarly to FIG. 56.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of notes (holding support) in FIG. 57, " 0" to "5" indicate the high expected value for winning (time-saving winning, jackpot). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". ”.

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (hold support) column of FIG. 57, " 0'' to ``5'' are referred to as expected value levels ``0'' to ``5''.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of win) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the pre-read expected value performance pattern is, for example, the number of reservations, as shown in the pre-read expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection. The random number value 2 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command, for example. Note that in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the case where the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". . For example, if the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area. The expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, if the look-ahead expected value production pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, the expected value level is "2" in the second holding area, and the expected value level is changed from the second holding area to the first holding area. When shifting to the area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the sub CPU 301 selects the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58). ), a look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value performance pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate. It is.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose", the selection rate of look-ahead expected value production patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) will be increased, etc. Although the distribution is biased, the distribution is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, by distributing the distribution evenly.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to a specific "ahead expected value performance pattern". It is also possible to not allocate the random value 2 for sub-effect selection only to `` (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific ``look-ahead expected value effect pattern'' to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending target for pre-reading is not present, that is, whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed for the current pending. If there are a plurality of pending images, the pre-reading effect may be performed on a plurality of pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only on one pending image.

If the pre-read effect is being executed for the current hold (NO in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not executed for the current hold (YES in S3002), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not a prefetch target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In addition, in this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the upper limit number that can be reserved. If it is a prefetch target (YES in S3003), it may be determined whether the number of reservations including the prefetch target is larger than the pending number. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination processing. In this process, the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined by referring to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination processing. In this process, the pre-reading type effect pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined by transmitting winning/losing information of special symbols from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of winning) determination process. In this process, a look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of a win) is determined by referring to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of a win) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when a loss occurs) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when a loss occurs) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading effects, examples of expansion of pre-reading effects]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead presentation, it is not only interesting to see whether the form of the pending image changes to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect or a time-saving look-ahead effect, but also the expected value of a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to increase the interest by performing new performances that have never been seen before. Note that the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, but may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, regarding the form of the held image performed as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the held image displayed within the range of the first sub-holding area (4) to the first sub-holding area (1)), the first starting port 120 The form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the time of starting the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined to a variation pattern in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead time-saving winning effect pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54), and the variation in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. When compared with the probabilities determined for the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead performance while suppressing a drop in the expected value of a hit, increasing the interest. It is possible to increase it.

Note that the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a gaming state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, normal gaming state, low probability time-saving gaming state), it is possible to win a "time-saving hit" in the special symbol winning determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead performance is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead performance is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when executing the C-time-saving gaming state over the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. In any case where the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the possibility that the number of time saving times will increase is low. Therefore, by making sure that the player does not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving win" in the A-time-saving gaming state, the disappointment caused to the player by winning the "time-saving win" is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and it is necessary to ensure that the look-ahead effect is not performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state and the high-accuracy low time-saving game state. It's okay. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot type reach. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the pre-reading performance using the pre-reading jackpot performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot-based reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-based reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and the look-ahead time short hit performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56) '') and the pre-read common winning effect pattern (for example, the pre-read effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variable effect pattern. A common reach (for example, sub variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed as a common reach.

Further, a production pattern may be provided in which a short-time winning type reach is executed, and after a loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving winning type reaching, a jackpot type reaching is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not a jackpot-type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when common reach E is executed in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the starting information for which the look-ahead effect has been executed, common reach C and After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is performed, there is no transition to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the presentation common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the presentation common to the short time winning reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is executed, the shift to the time-saving hit type reach C does not occur.

By the way, in this embodiment, the prefetch effect is performed only for one pending image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 will Do not perform look-ahead effects. Note that even if the machine is a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of pending images, if a jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect.

For example, an arbitrary hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold whose variable display of special symbols starts after this first hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") ), and if a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H" in Fig. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect in this second suspension will be meaningless. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

Furthermore, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect has not been executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect will not be executed for the second hold. You may or may not need to do so.

Further, even when a fake jackpot look-ahead performance (for example, look-ahead hit type performance pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to perform the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving look-ahead performance (for example, the look-ahead performance pattern "05H" in Figure 56) is being executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It's okay. This is because even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the first pachinko game machine does not include a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Even when the winning look-ahead performance is being executed, the jackpot look-ahead performance or the time-saving win look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when a prize is won in the first starting opening 120 and the starting information is suspended during execution of a jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform a pre-reading performance regarding this suspension.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), when the jackpot display mode is derived, If there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute a pre-reading performance for the specific hold after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this hold is referred to as a "specific hold"), and even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 executes the C time-saving game based on the "time-saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving gaming states are not executed in duplicate when the time-saving gaming states overlap, and if the control is made to the A-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is set to "time-saving winning". ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead performance pattern and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern. Here, first, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 60, in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 stores the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area where the reservation information is stored, as indicated by triangles. A pending image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pending image") is displayed. Moreover, when no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the reservation image, but displays only the frame of the reservation area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that reservation information has been newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white (expected value level "0"). The color of the held image that is displayed is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 60(b) is changed. This is an image showing that the color changes from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 60(c) is , is an image showing that the color changes from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 60(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(e), and the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 60(e) is changed. , is an image showing that the color changes from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th area 410.

Furthermore, the color of the pending image indicating the expected value for the jackpot (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, the jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance form can be used to change the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a prefetch effect that changes the effect form. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.

[1-10-2. Specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern]
Next, a specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. It should be noted that the look-ahead time saving hit type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. 56. Furthermore, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for time saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shapes of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular (expected value level "0"), and the shapes shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are triangular (expected value level "0"). The shape of the retained image is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 61(b) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 61(c) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 61(d) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 61(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 61(e) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the 0th area 410, the circle changes to a star (expected value level "5").

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) that indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the following look-ahead effect may be used. It may also be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a short-time winning look-ahead look to a jackpot look-ahead look.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win-based look-ahead performance to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead common winning performance pattern]
Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 62, in which a pre-reading effect is performed using a common pre-reading effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading per-type effect pattern.

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits that indicate the possibility of both jackpots and time-saving hits. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a pre-read effect type to a pre-read effect type jackpot type. Changes in the look-ahead production format for common winning systems include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving hit, jackpot), and a change to make it clear whether the type of win is a jackpot or a time-saving hit. is included. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to “43H” in FIG. 57.

In this example, as a common win-based look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is expressed by displaying.

In FIG. 62(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors and shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit). . In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or when the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and the image is displayed as a white triangle. The expected value for a short hit increases in the order of ``star''.

In this example, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is The format of the retained image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 62(b) is , is an image showing that the yellow pentagon has changed to the green hexagon (expected value level "3") when being shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 62(c) is , when shifted to the first holding area 411, from a green hexagon (a common winning look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``3'') to a rainbow triangle (a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``5'') This is an image showing the change.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates the expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that shows the expected value for the jackpot. , a pre-read common winning effect pattern indicating an expected value for a win (big hit or time-saving win). Then, when a look-ahead effect is executed using the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, the player is given an interesting idea of whether the pending image will change into a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Note that the format of the pending image that shows the expected value for time savings does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star." Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → red triangle (jackpot type look-ahead performance form)" or "green hexagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → It may be changed to a triangular star (a time-saving look-ahead production form). Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily have to start from the blue rectangle with the lowest expected value, but may start from the red circle, for example.

Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 62, the common winning system look-ahead performance format is changed to change the expected value from which any winning (jackpot or time-saving hit) is derived, or to change the expected winning from an unknown state to a jackpot. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU 301 may execute the prefetch effect shown below, for example. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot look-ahead performance form, and then further changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-4. Variations of the common winning look-ahead production format]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common winning look-ahead presentation form that indicates the possibility of both jackpot and time-saving winning does not necessarily include the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time-saving winning. It is not limited to the form expressed by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win-based look-ahead performance format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both jackpots and time-saving hits, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for both jackpots and short-time wins, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance format in the future. The player can now play the game with a sense of anticipation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, with pending images changing from the dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to the jackpot look-ahead performance form. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a process in which Note that the look-ahead per-type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

Further, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to “31H” in FIG. 57 or 58.

In FIG. 63(a) and FIG. 64(a), a normal pending image in which no prefetch effect is performed is displayed in the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412, and the third pending area 413 and the second pending area 412 are displayed. No pending image is displayed in the 4 pending area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIGS. 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the pending image shown in the third holding area 413 is a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form, and is, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and the dedicated common winning system that was displayed in the third reservation area 413 in FIG. 63(b) This is an image showing that the prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing the form.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and the dedicated This is an image showing that the common winning look-ahead presentation form has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 in the same form.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 63(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form changes to a red triangle (expected jackpot value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the pending status is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 64(c) is This is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it changes from the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form to a white circle (expected value level of time saving per win "4").

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form, the dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form can be changed to the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form. It is possible to make the player find it interesting to see how the game will change, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs the "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out and the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 120) If a game ball enters the starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4), for example, three prize balls will be paid out, and if a game ball enters the general winning hole 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls will be paid out. The prize ball is paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 67 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 67), and notes.

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large winning opening for small winnings, FIG. 67 also describes an abnormal winning error in the large winning opening for small winnings for convenience. Moreover, in FIG. 67, the big winning hole 131 is described as the big winning hole for jackpot.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole or the big winning hole for small winnings, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the abnormal error in entering and discharging the big winning hole, the vibration sensor will be activated for a predetermined period of time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error when the sensor is on for a long time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot, and the probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In addition, abnormality in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot, will be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure this.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the winning slot, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning slot abnormal prize winning error" from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6 for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output outside the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. Output. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small wins). be done.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). In other words, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) is used to control the execution of the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal that is output during the small winning game control process different from the signal that is output when the small winning game control process is not in progress, the small winning pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information can be It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state by controlling the main CPU (the functions of the A time saving gaming state, B Although the explanation has been made on the assumption that the function of the time-saving gaming state and the function of the C-time saving gaming state are installed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one function (for example, the function of the A time saving gaming state) is installed among the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the functions of the B working time saving gaming state, and the functions of the C time saving gaming state, and the other functions ( For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the function B for the time-saving gaming state and the function for the time-saving gaming state C). In addition, two of the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state (for example, the A working time saving gaming state function, and the B working time saving gaming state function or the C working time saving function) It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is equipped with only the function of the game state) and not equipped with other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the time-saving game state C).

In addition, in a pachinko game machine such as a pachinko game machine called an ST machine, in which the probability change flag is set to on with a 100% probability after the end of the jackpot game state, A time-saving game state function, B time-saving game state function It may be configured such that neither the function of 1 nor the function of the time-saving gaming state C is installed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine will be explained. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

Furthermore, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko game machine, The explanation shall be made using different symbols and step numbers than the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example, A pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting hole and the second starting hole. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

Note that the various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) are the same as the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 4). Although there are some things in common, I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general winning opening 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric winning opening. It includes an object unit 1145, a small winning unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects winning (passage) of game balls to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 1122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected by the passing gate switch 1127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The suspended normal symbol start information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131, a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. , special electric accessories 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 1115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 1140A and a second starting port 1140B are arranged in the gaming area 1105, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and/or the second starting opening 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later) detect winning (passage) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131, there are two vertically flowing paths 1107a and 1107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 1131 is sent to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow route 1107a land in the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a. In addition, the game balls that flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but did not enter the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 1145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the downward flow path 1107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 1147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 1140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, such as a blade member, called a so-called electric tulip, may be used. Furthermore, the movable member includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate this small hit shutter 1153.

By moving the small win shutter 1153 back and forth in the front and back direction, the small win shutter 1153 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small win large win opening 1151 and a game ball can enter the small win large win opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 1151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 1145 in the lower flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 1151, the player enters the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side, so it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 1151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 and the big winning opening for small winning 1151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the jackpot jackpot 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 1122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2. A reservation display section 1166 for special symbols, a display section 1167 for probability change notification, a display section 1168 for short-time notification, a solenoid 1148 for normal electricity, a solenoid 1135 for special electricity, a solenoid 1154 for small hit, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big winning port count switch 1132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 1123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 can be accessed by the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the gaming parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 1082 that makes the game balls fire. A firing device 1006 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. Although the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a probability-variable control but time-saving control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability change control is not executed but the time saving control is executed. It is now possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described below), that is, when a game ball enters the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "time saving win", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of the lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "small win", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the first special symbol hit determination process. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with the data, relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “small hit” and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “jackpot” The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. Ru.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it has not been won. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time-saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) other than the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( or larger), it becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is overlapped, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will actually change. This will make it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving win" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbols based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 executes the selected symbol command ``z10'' is selected as the symbol designation command, and ``zA8'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to enable the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this example, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 71), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 71) is determined. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. Further, in the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following (When executing the hit type determination process in S1036 of FIG. 78). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving hit display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the win game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, the winning judgment process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to one time as the mode of the small winning gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 1164, and then displays the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it is possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", after the end of the small win game state, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. Among the flags, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag to ON, and it is decided to set the probability variation number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. decided on. In addition, as for the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the jackpot game state. In addition, as for the mode of the subsequent gaming state, in either case, it is decided to set only the time-saving flag of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON. Further, the number of times to save time is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control the time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the mode of time saving control in the high accuracy time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state. .

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the winning game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 73.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Win/loss determination value data is determined based on the random number value for jackpot determination (performing win/loss determination), and a win/loss (“time-saving win,” “small win,” “big hit,” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. A selected symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, time saving type, jackpot type) derived to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 74 and 75 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the second special pattern when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S1037 in FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the read-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a prefetch effect if the prefetch flag is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may also make the determination.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or a low-accuracy time-saving game state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the prefetch flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Determined by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in Figure 75, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 74. The expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time is larger than that in the determined case. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection for each set value, the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined can be made different. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 74) for low start, and for example, in the high accuracy time saving game state, the high accuracy In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figures 74 and 75 indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 86), etc.) ), below, the special symbol control process will be explained anew, including the same process as the process performed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is kept constant. If the value is "0" for more than a certain period of time, a transmission reservation process for a demonstration display command regarding the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives a demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a demonstration display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in a normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and a gaming state where right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). , high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1003, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1004, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1006, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S1007, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1009, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1010, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S1011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S1006 or S1009 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S1028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 if the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 if it is called in S1006, and calls it in S1009. If it has been called, the process returns to S1010, and if it has been called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1031), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is NO) (judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1032), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1033, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination process is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) and using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, a jackpot, or a loss. It is determined whether there is. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the small winning flag is turned off at the start of the small winning gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

In the above special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the random value for reach determination or/and the random number for performance selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In game states where right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see FIG. 75) ), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S1037, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. Ru. After executing the process in S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1024) will be performed. After executing the process in S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process in S1040, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1041, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process in S1052, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1053), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol performance stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1055, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process in S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (YES determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process in S1058, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot (YES determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S1060, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). Return to

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process in S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process in S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1065, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1067, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1068, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process (S1077) of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151), and the external terminal board 1184. jackpot signal setting process (S1078), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting process (S1080), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S1081) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1026) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S1092, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 1151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1028) will be performed. After executing the process in S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S1107, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The big prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process in S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening for the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 1131 for jackpot and the big winning hole 1151 for small winning. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is performed. After executing the process in S1110, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1112, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1121), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1121), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter (for example, big winning hole count switch 1132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70 for both) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole is used. etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is not the maximum winning number (if S1122 is NO), the main CPU 1201 , the process moves to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is determined as YES) , the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is NO), the main CPU 1201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning). After executing the process in S1124, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1125, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1126, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1131), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, you can set or reset the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, number of times the big winning hole is opened). A process is performed to set or reset the values of counters, large winning opening winning counters, ceiling counters, etc.). In addition, both the special symbol suspension flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is set on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set on. As a result, the ceiling counter will not be updated in the high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is on. After executing the process in S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small win rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the first starting hole is set in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 will not be in the open state, so the frequency with which the second starting port 1140B will be in the open state in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that in the game where the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 1151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the game ball stops showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are performed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts (see Figure 75), so large The winning frequency of game balls into the winning hole 1151 is increased compared to other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is in an open state due to the execution of electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning in the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 1151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. If a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls will be paid out, but the second starting port 1140A does not contain any balls that are hit to the right and are distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a. Only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered a regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-hit game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is changed. When drawn out, the normal electric accessory 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140B, thereby potentially opening the large winning opening 1151 for small winning. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), so if the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, Even if it does, the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than in the game state in which time saving control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

In addition, the third pachinko gaming machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting slot 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state through the first route is to pay out a large amount of game balls as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. Or configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which game balls can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( (See FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing prize opening 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2160 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2. A reservation display section 2166 for special symbols, a display section 2168 for short-time notification, a solenoid 2148 for normal electricity, a solenoid 2135 for special electricity, a solenoid 2154 for V attacker, a solenoid 2159 for V shutter, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process based on the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "time-saving hit," a "big hit," or a "loss." In addition, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be a "time saving win", a "big hit", or a "accessories opening win".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120, such as "time-saving hit" and "jackpot". ” or the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment determined as “loss” and the corresponding judgment value data (“time-saving hit judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) The relationship with In addition, as data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a jackpot determined as a "time saving hit", "big hit", or "accessories opening hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", "accessories release hit judgment value data") is specified. There is.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 will issue a selection symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows, for example. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the subsequent gaming state (more specifically, (time saving flag and time saving end conditions). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving game state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot game state. "L" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display frequency of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. Note that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the control is made to the jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, it is determined to set the time saving flag to ON, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object released", if the control is not made to the jackpot gaming state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot gaming state. Not only that, but also the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing control based on the opening of the accessory, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the opening of the accessory.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the jackpot gaming state aspect and the subsequent gaming state aspect as described above. Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, It is also possible to use different conditions. For example, all of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state may be different. Only one of the time-saving gaming states, the time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state, may be different. Also, only one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. , only one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C may be different. That is, the ending condition of at least one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" is changed to the ending condition of at least one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It may be made different depending on the game state.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection extracted when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular gaming mode, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly ever land in the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is “time-saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to the second special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number value for performance selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 generates a variation pattern of the second special symbol as an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

Although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is on or If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 2201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 92 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted, but similarly to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demonstration display command when both the number of first special symbols on hold and the number of second special symbols on hold are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. Note that the third pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, so the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005. Move.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2005. Move to.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is determined as YES), in the special symbol management process, when S2003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S2004 is determined as YES, the processing target is the second special symbol. Special symbols are to be processed. Further, if the control state number is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a jackpot, or a role opening hit. After executing the process in S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S2024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot game control start setting processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if NO in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the special symbol has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2061. Move.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening the accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and a transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. That will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is not performed in the first pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. ~ There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. Although the process of S192 is performed, the third pachinko game machine differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191 because it is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (eg, per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91), so the player can understand that the jackpot game control process is executed. As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. That will happen. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. 100 (YES in S2095), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or the V attacker count switch counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. At step 2153 (see FIG. 88), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134. .

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the end of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is in the open state, the specific area is also in the open state, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short period of time and for a predetermined period after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short period of time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area where it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Additionally, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z3" with a 15% selection rate and "z4" with a 50% selection rate. "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) in the third opening mode. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and a selection rate of 10%. A selection rate of 10R normal jackpot A is determined, and a selection rate of 50% determines a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, the opening may be opened in response to the winning of a game ball into the grand prize opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be opened only once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may also be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until the target is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the jackpot gaming state is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number (for example, a special symbol hit determination Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time saving win/loss determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to execute time saving control using a random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

Furthermore, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit/loss determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens passes through the V winning opening 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only special figure shortening control is performed out of special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, for example, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened because the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory object is derived during execution of the time saving control. However, if the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate even after the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is closed. Continuously execute time saving control.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time-saving probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process. The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and receive rewards (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media held by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). (i.e., the action to pay out the game media to the player) or the action to pay out the game media when the winning combination (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of the game media (i.e., the action to pay out the game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below like in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other pachinko gaming machines such as pachislot, etc. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, a performance that involves a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop using the reel. Note that the symbol "stop" includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted either way. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., or touch.

In a pachinko game machine, the administrator of the game machine may set the performance etc. by operating the performance button, but there are cases where the machine is operated so that the player starts playing after setting the performance button. be. In this case, it is conceivable that the operation by the administrator will eventually become the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachi-slot, an administrator may play a 2-bet game, and in a state where a BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, a player may play a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the 2-bet game may be played by the administrator of the gaming machine, so the game played by the administrator (for example, 2-bet games) A bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc. may be operations for a player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the main CPU controls the player's playing method by notifying whether the player is playing right-handed or left-handed. It may be possible to notify that it is unintended by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the main CPU may manage the player's playing method, such as the player's push order (assist), but if the player's playing method is not the intended one, errors, warnings, etc. The fact that the game is unintended may be notified under the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on one board. In pachislot, there may be no payout control board, but payout may be controlled by a main control board, or may be separated into a main control board and a payout control board.

Additionally, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing that houses the equipment necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the casing, the outer frame and base door are regarded as the casing, and the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door, and tray unit is regarded as the casing. is possible. Note that there may be a unit, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc. in which various control boards are provided between the case and the door or between the frame and the door, and the door, frame, case, etc. In addition, various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, etc. may be present.

[H. Third embodiment]
Next, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be explained with reference to the drawings. The invention described in the first embodiment (first to third pachinko machines) and the second embodiment (enclosed type gaming machine) is applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment described below. It can be applied to

The configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. This configuration is similar to the first pachinko machine shown in FIG. For example, the main control circuit 4200, main CPU 4201, main ROM 4202, main RAM 4203, setting key insertion slot 4174, setting key 4174a, RAM clear switch 4176, and power switch 4095 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment are They respectively correspond to the main control circuit 200, main CPU 201, main ROM 202, main RAM 203, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, and power switch 95 of the pachinko machine. Therefore, here, the configuration different from the first pachinko machine and the configuration related to the invention of the present application will be explained.

<Various registers possessed by the main CPU>
Here, various registers included in the main CPU 4201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 109. Note that FIG. 109 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 4201.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), the main CPU 4201 has extension registers (Q register, U register), general purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) as main registers. register), flag register (F register), index register (IX register, IY register), and stack pointer (stack pointer SP).

The main CPU 4201 also has sub-registers such as an extension register (Q' register), general-purpose registers (A' register, B' register, C' register, D' register, E' register, H' register, L' register), It has a flag register (F' register) and index registers (IX' register, IY' register). Note that each of the above-mentioned main register and sub-register is composed of a 1-byte register.

Further, in this embodiment, a B register and a C register are used as a pair register (BC register), and a D register and an E register are used as a pair register (DE register). Furthermore, in this embodiment, an H register and an L register are used as a pair register (HL register).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to control the processing by switching between two banks (bank 0 and bank 1), and regarding the above-mentioned main register and sub-register, the main register and sub-register of bank 0 are also controlled. , a main register and a sub-register of bank 1 are prepared, and by switching banks, the registers used and referenced by program instructions are switched between the registers of bank 0 and the registers of bank 1.

Note that in the program of this embodiment, address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. For example, when the main CPU 4201 is reset, the start address (upper side) "F0" H of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 0 is set in the Q register, and when switching banks and using bank 1, , the start address (upper side) "F2" H of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 1 may be controlled (processed) to be set in the Q register.
In addition to using the Q register as the upper address data, you can also set the start address (upper side) "F0" H of the main RAM 4203 in a register other than the Q register (for example, the H register), and Control (processing) may be performed so that the start address (upper side) "F2" H of the main RAM 4203 is set in a register other than the above (for example, the D register).
In particular, when referring to the gaming area and the area outside the main RAM 4203, if you want to refer to the upper address of the gaming area, use an instruction that uses the Q register (specific register) to refer to the area. When referencing the upper address of the outer area, you may control the reference using an instruction that uses a register other than the Q register.In this case, before or after switching to bank 1, the Q Control (processing) may be performed so that the start address (upper side) "F2" H is set in a register other than the register.
In addition, in the program of this embodiment, the start address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203 is set in the Q register in response to excessive control (processing) of referencing and writing to the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 4203. It is desirable to set "F0" H or "F2" H.
For example, if the start address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203 is to refer to and write to the area with "F0" H many times, set "F0" H in the Q register, and If the number of times of processing to refer to and write to the area whose start address (upper side) is "F2"H is large, "F2"H is set in the Q register.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an interrupt page address register (I register), a memory refresh register (R register), a program counter (PC), an interrupt permission register 1, and an interrupt permission register 2, which are composed of 1-byte registers, are provided. , as a control register.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109(B), predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing, etc. is set in each bit of the F register and F' register of the flag registers. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the operation result is "0" in the operation result determination process. Specifically, if the calculation result is "0", data "1" is set in bit 6, and if the calculation result is not "0", data "0" is set in bit 6. In the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 4201 refers to bit 6 data "0"/"1" to determine the calculation result.

Further, a parity flag or an overflow flag is set in bit 2 (D2) of the flag register. For example, when used as a parity flag, when a logical operation is executed, the number of bits "1" in the destination where the operation result is stored is counted, and if the total is an odd number, it is set to "0". , if the number is even, set "1". When used as an overflow flag, the overflow flag is set when an overflow occurs when a signed arithmetic operation is executed.

Further, each bit (for example, bit 2) of the flag register can be controlled to be set to the value of another register by a predetermined instruction.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory map") of the main ROM 4202 and main RAM 4203 included in the main control circuit 4200 (microprocessor) will be described. Note that FIG. 110(A) shows the memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 110(B) shows the structure of the built-in ROM of the entire memory, and FIG. 110(C) shows the memory map of the entire memory. The configuration of the built-in RAM is shown. The built-in ROM in FIG. 110(A) corresponds to, for example, the main ROM 4202 in FIG. 108, and the built-in RAM in FIG. 110(A) corresponds to the main RAM 4203 in FIG. 108.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 200, as shown in FIG. areas are arranged in this order with an unused area in between. Here, the function registers include two types of built-in registers: a first register used for setting the operation of each peripheral function, and a second register for monitoring and controlling.

In the memory map of main ROM 4202, as shown in FIG. The gaming area)), the outside area, and other areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order. Further, there may be an unused area of a predetermined size between the gaming area and the outside area, and in this example, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided.

Note that the program area (gaming area) stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 4201 in various control processes related to the progress of the game and the gameplay. The data area (gaming area) contains various data used by the main CPU 4201 in various control processes related to game progress and gameplay (for example, data tables such as a jackpot lottery data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands), etc.) are stored.

In other words, the gaming area, which consists of a program area (gaming area) and a data area (gaming area), contains information necessary for control processing (processing related to gaming) related to the games actually played by players at the gaming parlor. Various programs and various data are stored.

Furthermore, control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect the gameplay) that are not directly involved in the games played by the players (game progress and gameplay) are stored in the outside area. For example, programs and data used in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001, control programs used in checksum generation processing at the time of power outage, sum check processing at the time of power outage recovery (power recovery), etc. and data, as well as anti-fraud programs and necessary data.

In the memory map of the main RAM 4203, as shown in FIG. The working area)), the outside area (that is, the work area (outside area)), and the stack area (outside area) are arranged in this order at predetermined addresses, respectively. Further, like the main ROM 4202, there may be an unused area of a predetermined size between the gaming area and the outside area, and in this example, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided.

The work area (gaming area) and the stack area (gaming area) contain various data (various disturbances) determined by the execution of control programs related to games (game progress and gameplay) played by players. numerical values, jackpot determination results, etc.) are temporarily stored.

Further, the work area (area outside the area) and the stack area (area outside the area) are work areas for various processes that are not directly involved in the game (game progress and gameplay) performed by the player. In this embodiment, the work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area) are used to perform various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player, such as sum check processing. .

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly involved in the games played by the players are stored in the main ROM 4202 in the gaming area. The data is stored in an out-of-area area located at a different address. Further, various processes that are not directly related to the games played by such players are performed in the main RAM 4203 using an extra-regional area located at a different address from the gaming area.

With this configuration of the main ROM 4202, programs and data that are unnecessary for the actual game played by the player can be placed in an area outside the area, thereby avoiding pressure on the capacity of the gaming area. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by switching banks, processing related to bank 0 and processing related to bank 1 can be switched. Using the programs and data stored in the gaming area of the main RAM 4203, calculation processing for controlling the gaming operations performed by the player is performed while temporarily using the gaming area of the main RAM 4203. That is, the process related to bank 0 can also be called the process related to the gaming area. Further, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 0 described in FIG. 109.

On the other hand, the processing related to bank 1 uses the program and data stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202, while temporarily using the outside area of the main RAM 4203, and directly applies to the game played by the player. Perform unrelated processing (arithmetic processing for processing other than gaming). In other words, the process related to bank 1 can also be called the process related to the area outside the area. Further, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 1 described with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing related to bank 0 (processing related to the gaming area) is started by a program stored in the program area (gaming area) of the main ROM 4202, and in this processing, the processing related to the data area (gaming area) of the main ROM 4202 is started. ), and further uses the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203 to refer to and update the data. Data may also be referenced.

Similarly, processing related to bank 1 (processing related to the outside area) is started by a program stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202, and in this process, data stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202 is Furthermore, data is referenced and updated using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203, but data stored in the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203 can also be referenced. be.

To switch from bank 0 processing to bank 1 processing, for example, it is done by calling a predetermined subprogram with a specific call instruction, and to return from bank 1 processing to bank 0 processing, for example, as described above This is done by calling a specific return instruction in a predetermined subprogram called by a specific call instruction.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(C), one area starting from address "F000" H in the main RAM 4203 is used as a work area (gaming area); however, this form is not an example. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples. For example, the area starting from "F000"H is set as the first work area (game area), and the area starting from "F100"H is set as the second work area (game area). It can also be divided into multiple parts for use.

Further, FIG. 110 schematically shows areas in the memory, and the configuration of the present invention is not limited to the illustrated addresses or the apparent size (capacity) of each area.

<Interrupt permission register>
Here, interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 shown in FIG. 109 will be explained in more detail.

The value of the interrupt permission register 1 determines whether to enable or disable maskable interrupts that can be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for a specific interrupt factor using an interrupt factor mask. This is used to restore the value of the interrupt permission register 1 after non-maskable interrupt processing that cannot be controlled so that no interrupt processing is performed.

Regarding the interrupt permission register 2, in addition to returning from non-maskable interrupt processing as described above, after executing a call instruction for processing related to an outside area (hereinafter referred to as "outside area processing call instruction"). , when an instruction to return from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the gaming area (hereinafter referred to as "gaming area processing return instruction") is issued, the value previously stored in the interrupt permission register 2 is copied to interrupt permission register 1 (returning the value of interrupt permission register 2 to interrupt permission register 1).

Additionally, when a non-maskable interrupt is accepted, or when an out-of-area area processing call instruction is executed, the value of interrupt permission register 1 is cleared (the value becomes "0"), and as a result, the value is maintained for a period of time. , maskable interrupts are disabled.

Furthermore, the value of interrupt permission register 2 is stored in the parity/overflow flag of the flag register (F register) by a predetermined instruction, and the value of interrupt permission register 2 can be referenced or temporarily saved. I can do it.

Furthermore, when the interrupt permission instruction is executed, the value of the interrupt permission register 1 becomes "1" indicating that the interrupt is permitted, and at the same time, the value of the interrupt permission register 2 also becomes the value "1" indicating that the interrupt is permitted. In this way, when the interrupt enable instruction is executed, maskable interrupts are enabled. Furthermore, when the interrupt disable instruction is executed, the value of the interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", which indicates that interrupts are disabled, and at the same time, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0", which indicates that interrupts are disabled.

<Clear processing regarding main RAM gaming area and outside area>
Next, an overview of clearing processing of the main RAM 4203 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. The clearing range of the main RAM 4203 in the clearing process is determined according to the startup state, and the startup state is determined based on the operation of the setting key 4174a and the RAM clear switch 4176 when the power is turned on. This process will be explained in detail in the startup state check process (FIG. 118), which will be described later.

The clear range of the main RAM 4203 at startup is determined according to the startup state shown in FIG. 111(A). As shown in FIG. 111(A), this startup state determines whether or not there is an error in the main RAM 4203 ("Main RAM Error" column in FIG. 111(A)), and the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine ( 111(A) ("Operation at power-on" column), and whether settings were changed at the time of the previous power outage ("Recovery from power outage during setting change" column in FIG. 111(A)) determined by multiple patterns based on To determine whether there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, calculate the CRC for the specified area of the main RAM 4203 before and after power-on, compare the calculated CRC values, and if the two values are different, It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203.

The first pattern (No. 1) in FIG. 111(A) is that there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is "A", and there is no power failure recovery during setting changes (X pattern). Here, the operations when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine are represented by "A" to "D", and these are the operation pattern "A" when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 111(B). ～Corresponds to “D”.

Pattern "A" in FIG. 111(B) is a state in which the power is not turned on, the setting key 4174a is not turned on (that is, it remains in the off state), and the RAM clear switch 4176 is not turned on (that is, the RAM clear switch 4176 is not turned on). , remains off), and turns on the power switch 4095. This operation can be performed at the start of normal business operations, or in situations where a restart is required due to a problem such as a voltage drop or a momentary power outage.

Pattern "B" is performed by turning on the setting key 4174a (for example, inserting it into the setting key slot 4174 and turning it in a predetermined direction) without turning on the RAM clear switch 4176 while the power is not turned on. This is an operation to turn on the power switch 4095 (while keeping it off). This operation is normally performed to perform setting confirmation processing.

Pattern "C" is an operation in which the RAM clear switch 4176 is turned on and the power switch 4095 is turned on without turning on the setting key 4174a when the power is not turned on. This operation is normally performed to clear the main RAM 4203.

Pattern "D" is an operation in which the setting key 4174a is turned on and the RAM clear switch 4176 is turned on and the power switch 4095 is turned on while the power is not turned on. This operation is normally performed to change settings.

As mentioned above, the operation when turning on the power is one of patterns "A" to "D", and in the case of the first pattern in FIG. 111(A), " ○" is placed to indicate that the operation of pattern "A" is being performed, and the other patterns "B" to "D" are marked with an X.

In the case of the first pattern in FIG. 111(A), the activation state is determined to be "recovery from power failure" and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of power failure recovery. This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In the present application, after the clear range is set as the RAM clear range at the time of power recovery, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs processing in accordance with the power recovery.

The second pattern (No. 2) in FIG. 111(A) shows that there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is "B", and there is no power failure recovery during setting changes (X pattern).

In the case of the second pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "setting confirmation" and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of power failure recovery. This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In the present application, after the clear range is set as the RAM clear range at power failure recovery in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs setting confirmation processing.

The third pattern (No. 3) in FIG. 111(A) shows that there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is "C", and there is no power failure recovery during setting changes (X pattern).

In the case of the third pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "RAM clear" and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of setting change. This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In the present application, after the clear range is thus set to the RAM clear range at the time of setting change, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs processing in accordance with power recovery.

The fourth pattern (No. 4) in FIG. 111(A) shows that there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is "D", and there is no power failure recovery during setting changes (X pattern).

In the case of the fourth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "setting change" and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of setting change. In the present application, after the clear range is set as the RAM clear range at the time of setting change, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs setting change processing.

The fifth pattern (No. 5) in FIG. 111(A) is "ANY", where there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203 and the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko machine can be any of "A" to "D". , this is a pattern (indicated by a circle) in which there is a power failure recovery during a setting change.

In the case of the fifth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "setting change" and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of setting change. In this way, if the power is restored during a setting change, as long as there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, no matter what operation was performed when the pachinko machine was powered on, the RAM at the time of the setting change will be cleared within the clear range. A clear range will be set. In this pattern, state information representing the operation of the setting key 4174a and RAM clear switch 4176 before the power cut is set, and after the power is turned on, the operation of the setting key 4174a and the RAM clear switch 4176 before the power cut is reproduced.

This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In the present application, after the clear range is set as the RAM clear range at the time of setting change, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs setting change processing.

The sixth pattern (NO. 6) in FIG. 111(A) shows the clear range when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 and the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is "D". Further, in this pattern, "ANY" indicating that it does not matter whether or not the recovery is from a power outage during a setting change is indicated.

In the case of the sixth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the activation state is determined to be "RAM abnormality 1", and the clear range is the abnormal RAM clear range. This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In the present application, after the clear range is set as the abnormal RAM clear range in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs a setting change process.

The seventh pattern (No. 7) in FIG. 111(A) shows the clear range when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 and the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko game machine is any one other than "D". There is. Further, in this pattern, as in the sixth pattern, "ANY" indicating that it does not matter whether or not it is a recovery from a power outage during a setting change is indicated.

In the case of the seventh pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "RAM abnormality 2" and the clear range is set to the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality, but in the end it is impossible to return to the game. Error processing will be performed and the game will stop.

The startup state shown in FIG. 111(A) is intended to identify the status when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and the clearing range of the main RAM 4203 is determined according to this startup state. Here, the clear range set at the time of power loss recovery is the clear range set when the startup state is power loss recovery (i.e., "RAM clear range at power loss recovery"), and the clear range set when the settings are changed. The clear range that is set is the clear range that is set when the startup state is a setting change (ie, "RAM clear range when setting change").

Furthermore, even if the main CPU 6101 performs power recovery processing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the "RAM clear range upon power recovery" is set as the clear range. Not exclusively. For example, in the first pattern of FIG. 111(A), the "RAM clear range at power failure recovery" is set as the clear range, and after the clear range is cleared, the power failure recovery process is performed. In this pattern, the "RAM clear range when changing settings" is set as the clear range, but after the clear range is cleared, the power failure recovery process is performed.

In addition, the "RAM clear range at the time of abnormality", "RAM clear range at the time of setting change", and "RAM clear range at the time of power failure recovery" can each be set to clear ranges as shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is also possible to design at least two of the clear ranges to be the same clear range.

Next, an overview of each clear range will be explained with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112(A) shows an example of the RAM clear range during abnormality. In this embodiment, the abnormal RAM clear range for the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 is from the top address (“F000”H) to the middle of the stack area (gaming area). Since the main RAM has been determined to be abnormal, all work areas are cleared. Also, since the stack area is used in order from address "F200" H in the direction of decreasing address value, here, in order to protect the stack area in use, we will clear up to address "F1FC" H and clear the stack area. I try not to clear everything. The stack area includes, for example, an area that stores the return address of a called program, and by not clearing this area, the return address is protected.

The RAM clear range in the event of an abnormality regarding the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is from the top address (“F210”H) to the front of the stack area (outside area). That is, all of the work area (area outside the area) is cleared. In addition, in this example, as mentioned above, since a 16-byte unused area is provided, the start address of the area outside the area is "F210" H, which is the final address of the gaming area plus 16 bytes ( The same applies to the areas outside the area in FIGS. 112(B) and 112(C)). In addition, regarding the clearing range of the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203, the lower 1 byte (i.e., ``00'' The judgment is based on H).

FIG. 112(B) shows an example of the RAM clear range when changing settings. In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when changing the settings for the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 is from the address (“F003”H) to the middle of the stack area (gaming area). Since it is determined that it is time to change the settings, the work area is configured not to clear the setting values related to the settings change, which are reserved for 3 bytes from the start address ("F000"H). Also, since the stack area is used in order from address "F200" H in the direction of decreasing address value, here, in order to protect the stack area in use, we will clear up to address "F1FC" H and clear the stack area. I try not to clear everything. The stack area includes, for example, an area that stores the return address of a called program, and by not clearing this area, the return address is protected.

The RAM clear range when changing settings for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is from the address (“F232”H) to before the stack area (outside area). In the work area (outside area), data related to performance display, etc. is left without being cleared. Regarding the clearing range of the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203, the lower 1 byte (i.e., "03" The judgment is based on H).

FIG. 112C shows an example of the RAM clear range upon recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, the RAM clear range for the game area of the main RAM 4203 upon recovery from a power failure is to clear 9 bytes from the address ("F07B"H). Since it is determined that the time has come to recover from the power outage, most of the work area and the entire stack area are left uncleared in order to maintain the game state etc. before the power outage. The portion to be cleared is, for example, data such as a game abnormality detection flag. Regarding the RAM clear range when recovering from a power failure, since the stack area is not the target of clearing, it is necessary to intentionally leave a part of the stack area as in the above-mentioned RAM clear range during abnormality and setting change RAM clear range. In this case, it is possible to control the program so that the process of securing the return address for the program is not performed.

The RAM clear range for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 at the time of power recovery is from the address (“F232”H) to before the stack area (outside area). In the work area (outside area), data related to performance display, etc. is left without being cleared. Regarding the clearing range of the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203, the lower 1 byte (i.e., "7B" The judgment is based on H).

As mentioned above, when determining each clear range, the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 is determined based on the lower 1 byte of the start address of the clear range of the corresponding gaming area. , the process of referring to each condition to determine which clear range is to be cleared is omitted. In addition, since the lower 1 byte of the start address of the clear range of the gaming area is intentionally set to be different for each clear range, the lower 1 byte determines the clear range of the area outside the main RAM 4203. can do.

As mentioned above, in the present application, it is possible to set the clear range of an area other than for games (area outside the area) according to the clear range of the area for games (game area). The clear range of the area is information specifying the clear range of the gaming area, and is, for example, the lower 1 byte of the start address of the clear range of the gaming area.

Note that the address values used in FIG. 112 are for illustrative purposes only, and the arrangement and size of each area in the main RAM 4203 and each clear range can be set in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 112, the clearing process for the gaming area and the outside area is performed in synchronization with the startup of the pachinko machine (approximately at the same timing) based on the comparison result of the CRC values for the gaming area and the outside area. ) is done. That is, in the specified range clearing process shown in FIG. 119 (which will be explained in detail later), the outside specified area clearing process shown in FIG. Returning to the range clearing process, the gaming area is cleared.

<External interrupt processing related to power outage detection>
Next, an overview of external maskable interrupt processing when a power outage is detected in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113.

When the main CPU 4201 receives an interrupt request signal from an external terminal (XINT terminal) via the parallel input port of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the main CPU 4201 inputs the setting area associated with this external terminal. Start the program with the entry address as the start address. This program is an external maskable interrupt process shown in FIG. 131, which will be described later. This setting area also includes data indicating the priority order of interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored on the upper bit side of the setting area, the data indicating the priority is stored on the lower bit side, and at least one bit of "0" is stored between the entry address and the data indicating the priority. Placed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a timer interrupt signal is received from a timer counter (for example, timer counter PTC2) of a pachinko gaming machine, a program is started whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this timer counter. do. This program is a system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later. This setting area also includes data indicating the priority order of interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored on the upper bit side of the setting area, the data indicating the priority is stored on the lower bit side, and at least one bit of "0" is stored between the entry address and the data indicating the priority. Placed.

In this way, the above-mentioned setting area is provided for each interrupt cause such as an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal) or a timer interrupt from a timer counter, and the data stored in the corresponding setting area is used to control the interrupt. The entry address of the processing program to be executed accordingly and the priority of the interrupt are defined.

When the above-described external maskable interrupt processing is started, the main CPU 4201 checks a predetermined address of the input port to determine whether or not a power outage signal has been received. This process is a process for determining whether the interrupt cause is a power outage. When a power outage signal is received, the interrupt mask register is updated with an interrupt cause mask as shown in FIG. 113(A), and a predetermined Masks interrupt factors.

Here, in the interrupt mask register, the interrupt cause mask shown in FIG. 113(A) is used to specify, for example, an interrupt whose interrupt factor is a timer counter (timer counter interrupt) and a power outage interrupt in the initial setting after power-on. Corresponding bits (for example, bit position 2 and bit position 3 of bits 0 to 7) are set to "0" so as to accept an interrupt (power interruption) that is a cause of the interrupt. In the external maskable interrupt processing described above, when a power outage occurs, "1" is set in bit position 2 and bit position 3 of the interrupt mask register, respectively.

In this way, by setting "1" to bit position 2 and bit position 3 of the interrupt mask register, the main CPU 4201 is controlled from now on so as not to accept timer counter interrupts and power cut interrupts (i.e. , the external maskable interrupt processing in FIG. 131 and the system timer interrupt processing in FIG. 132 are controlled so that they are not newly started).

Next, in external maskable interrupt processing, an XINT detection flag is set, and a status indicating that a power outage has occurred is set. Thereafter, in the power outage determination process (step S4015 in FIG. 115, FIG. 124) called in the main control main process described later, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred by referring to the contents of this XINT detection flag. , If a power outage has occurred, a power outage setting process is executed.

FIG. 113(B) shows interrupt initial setting data stored in a program management area that stores information necessary for main control circuit 4200 to execute a program. This data stores interrupt priority settings.

FIG. 113(C) shows the priority order for each interrupt factor when the set value is "01". As shown in FIG. 113(B), when the interrupt priority setting value is bit "01", the timer counter interrupt (timer counter PTC2 interrupt) is Interrupts are set to have a higher priority than other interrupts (by interrupts). Note that this priority order is changed in accordance with the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to specify the setting contents of this priority order by a program.

In addition, in the interrupt mask register of FIG. 113(A), each bit is associated with an interrupt factor, but here, from bit position 0 to bit position 5, the interrupt factors shown in FIG. 113(C) are They are mapped in descending order of priority. That is, bit position 0 of the interrupt mask register is associated with the interrupt of timer counter PTC0, bit position 1 is associated with the interrupt of timer counter PTC1, and bit position 2 is associated with the interrupt of timer counter PTC2. Bit position 3 is associated with an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal), bit position 4 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0, and bit position 5 is associated with an asynchronous serial Interrupts due to transmission/reception 1 are associated. Note that bit position 7 and bit position 6 are unused.

As described above, this embodiment assumes that timer counter interrupts and power failure interrupts occur, but as described above, at least interrupts due to multiple timer counters, interrupts due to multiple asynchronous serial transmission/reception, and XINT terminal It is possible to respond to factors related to external interrupts input from the computer.

By using this kind of configuration that uses interrupt factor masks, it is possible to restrict the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so there is no need to write branch instructions for processing that assumes the other interrupts. As a result, the program structure can be simplified and its size can be reduced.

In addition, by using a configuration that uses an interrupt factor mask, it is possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so it is possible to immediately execute processing related to a power outage after a power outage is detected. In addition, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order with respect to processing by other interrupts.

In this way, depending on the bit position where "1" is set in the interrupt mask register, it is possible to adjust whether or not to detect the occurrence of each interrupt factor. After execution, it is also possible to control the interrupt processing related to a specific interrupt factor to be allowed.

[Main control main processing]
Next, main processing (main control main processing) controlled by the main CPU 4201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. Note that FIGS. 114 to 116 are flowcharts showing the procedure of main control main processing.

First, the main CPU 4201 starts processing for bank 0, and determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S4001). In step S4001, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the power outage signal bit is "0" (YES in step S4001), the main CPU 4201 determines that a power outage is being detected, and performs the determination process in step S4001. repeat.

In step S4001, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the power outage signal bit is not "0" (NO in step S4001), the main CPU 4201 determines that power outage is not being detected and proceeds to step S4002.

Next, in step S4002, the main CPU 4201 performs processing for setting the stack pointer (of bank 0) related to the gaming area. Here, for example, the final address of the stack area (gaming area) shown in FIG. 110(C) +1 is set in the stack pointer SP. During the subsequent processing, if the stack is used in bank 0, after subtracting 1 from the stack pointer SP, store the register value etc. at that address, and thereafter use the stack area (gaming area) in the same way. The areas with the largest address value are used in order from the area with the smallest address value.

Next, in step S4003, the built-in registers are initialized. Here, for example, the built-in registers are initialized by referring to the built-in register initial setting data table. Further, the start address (upper side) "F0" H of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 0 is set in the Q register.

After that, in step S4004, the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 4174a inserted into the setting key insertion slot 4174 are stored (for example, in the E register), and these states are stored later. You can check this using the startup status check process.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs wait processing (step S4005). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a startup wait process on the sub control circuit 6300 side. The startup waiting time (wait period) is approximately 12000 msec. Also, during this startup waiting time, the main CPU 4201 performs processing for checking the generation of an interrupt request signal (XINT), processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and processing for outputting a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This processing is performed using a timeout register. Also, even when interrupts are disabled, for example, the timer count of the timer counter PTC2 is controlled to be updated, and the PTC2 timeout flag register is used to determine with one instruction whether or not a PTC2 timeout has occurred, and the processing is continued. By branching, it is also possible to perform control such that the process branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether or not a timer interrupt has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs RAM access settings (step S4006). In this process, the main CPU 4201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 4203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs designated area CRC inspection processing (step S4007). This process is called by an out-of-area processing call instruction to perform processing related to bank 1 (out-of-area area processing). There, the main CPU 4201 performs a CRC check on the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 4203, and when the processing is completed, returns with a gaming area processing return command, so that the subsequent processing is the processing related to bank 0 ( processing of the gaming area). Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Note that the CRC check is, for example, a process in which data in a designated area is divided by a specific predetermined value and the remainder is used as a value for checking whether or not there is an abnormality. This check value is calculated at different times, and if they do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (an abnormality has occurred in the position or value of the data).

Next, in step S4008, the main CPU 4201 performs startup state check processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 determines the clearing range of the main RAM 4203 based on the CRC check result and the operation of a predetermined key when the power is turned on. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4009, the main CPU 4201 performs specified range clear processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 clears the specified range of the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 4203. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4010, the main CPU 4201 sets (in the HL register, for example) the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the area outside the main RAM 4203, and refers to this HL register. , stores data for initialization at power-on in the work area.

Next, in step S4011, the main CPU 4201 uses the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S4010 to set data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area. Furthermore, in this process, interrupts are set to be disabled at the start of the process, and at the end of the process, the interrupt prohibition/enabled state at the start of the process is restored. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4012, the main CPU 4201 performs setting change confirmation processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs control to update or change settings when the setting key 4174a is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 4174 and is in the "on" state. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4013, the main CPU 4201 performs game return processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" when the gaming machine is powered on (at startup), and if it is not "on", it If it is "on", it is determined that RAM clear (backup clear) has been specified and the game is restarted. In order to do this, perform initial setting processing when clearing the backup.

Next, in step S4014, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. This process disables maskable interrupts. Also, as described above, both the value of interrupt permission register 1 and the value of interrupt permission register 2 are set to "0".

In this process, the main CPU 4201 executes the interrupt disable instruction, and as a result, the value of the interrupt permission register 1 becomes "0" and the value of the interrupt permission register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disabling instruction is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S4015, the main CPU 4201 performs power interruption determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 determines whether a power outage is detected (that is, whether or not XINT is detected), and if a power outage is detected, performs power outage setting processing. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4016, the main CPU 4201 performs initial random value update processing. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of updating the initial value random number for special symbol determination.

After this, in step S4017, the main CPU 4201 performs performance display monitor total division processing. This process becomes a process related to bank 1 (outside area process) by being called by an out-of-area area process call command. The main CPU 4201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the main RAM 4203 work area (outside area). Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4018, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt permission processing. This process enables maskable interrupts. Also, here, as described above, both the value of interrupt permission register 1 and the value of interrupt permission register 2 are set to "1".

Next, in step S4019, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203 (current interrupt counter count value) is "0". Determine whether Note that the value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 for each system timer interrupt process (see step S4402 in FIG. 133), and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", the determination in step S4019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", the determination in step S4019 is "YES". The determination is "NO".

In step S4019, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in step S4019), the main CPU 4201 returns the process to step S4014 and performs the processes from step S4014 onwards. .

On the other hand, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4019 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in step S4019), the main CPU 4201 performs timer counter update processing in step S4020. In this process, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (the value of the interrupt counter) is performed three times. Through this processing, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main processing is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, a 6 msec interrupt prohibition period (processing period from step S4014 to step S4018) is provided before execution of various processing related to game control to be described later. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The value may be set to .

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing (step S4021). In this process, the main CPU 4201 mainly performs command transmission/reception processing for payout control. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs special symbol control processing (step S4022). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a control process for the special symbol game. Note that the special symbol control process is similar to the process described with reference to FIG. 26 and the like.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S4023). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. Note that the normal symbol control process is similar to the process described with reference to FIG. 43 and the like.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs game operation display unit control processing (step S4024). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, second special symbol display LED, normal symbol display LED, pending display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs game information data generation processing (step S4025). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs control processing for external terminal board pulse signals, processing for setting output data, and the like. Thereafter, in step S4026, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of generating a sight-fire test signal. Note that the sight-firing test signal generation process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs port output processing (step S4027). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of setting (transferring) output data to an output port and a process of outputting the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs status monitoring processing (step S4028). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs firing position determination processing (if there is a change in the firing position, performs transmission reservation processing of a firing position command), game abnormality detection determination processing (if there is an abnormality, reservation for transmission of a game abnormality detection command), processing), and performs a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, performs a transmission reservation process of a payout abnormality detection command).

After the process in step S4028, the main CPU 4201 returns the process to step S4014 and performs the process from step S4014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main processing of this embodiment, after startup and before executing the wait processing (step S4005), the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the state information of the setting key 4174a are saved (step S4005). S4004). If such processing is provided, for example, even if the setting key 4174a is operated (turned on/off) in the setting key insertion slot 4174 during the wait period, the status information at the time of power-on is not stored. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operating status of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the operating status of the setting key 4174a at the time of startup can be grasped more reliably, and operations on the gaming machine can be accurately identified. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the main control main processing, before executing various processing related to gaming control (processing after step S4020), a 6 msec interrupt prohibition period (processing period from step S4014 to step S4018) is set. ), and power outage processing (step S4015), initial value random number updating processing (step S4016), performance display monitor total division processing (step S4017), etc. are performed within the interrupt prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball payout performance of the game and values that are totaled throughout the game is performed in the interrupt-prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt-prohibited section, game management becomes easier, the processing performed by the main control circuit 4200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 4200 is reduced. be able to.

[Specified area CRC inspection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the designated area CRC inspection process (step S4007 in FIG. 114) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the designated area CRC inspection process.

As mentioned above, the designated area CRC inspection process is called by the out-of-area process call command, so it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is stored in the out-of-area area of the main ROM 4202. The stored program uses a work area (outside area) and a stack area (outside area), which are areas outside the main RAM 4203. However, in this process, the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 is also referred to for CRC calculation.

First, in step S4041, the main CPU 4201 performs a stack pointer setting process (of bank 1) related to the outside area. Here, for example, the final address of the stack area (outside area) shown in FIG. 110(C) +1 is set in the stack pointer SP. During subsequent processing, if the stack is used in bank 1, after subtracting 1 from the stack pointer SP, the register value etc. is stored at that address, and thereafter the stack area (outside area) is Areas with larger address values are used in order from smaller areas.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is started, the main control main processing shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 is first started, and stack pointer setting processing related to the gaming area is first performed (step S4002). Regarding the outside area as well, stack pointer setting processing regarding the outside area is performed in the designated area CRC inspection process that is executed for the first time after the gaming machine is started. In this way, the stack pointer for the gaming area is set when processing the gaming area, and the stack pointer for the outside area is set when processing the outside area, thereby preventing coding mistakes. It can be prevented.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs designated area CRC calculation processing in step S4042. This process is performed in the main RAM 4203's gaming area (work area (gaming area) and stack area (gaming area)) and outside area (working area (outside area), and stack area (outside area)). ) is used to perform a CRC calculation on the data.

Next, in step S4043, the main CPU 4201 obtains the CRC calculation result regarding the designated area at the time of power outage. This process reads the stored CRC calculation result at the time of power outage from the main RAM 4203. The CRC calculation result at the time of power outage is the result of CRC calculation performed on the data in the specified area when the power outage was detected. For example, after the CRC calculation, it is stored in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203. be done. The process of performing CRC calculation at the time of power outage will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4044, the main CPU 4201 compares the CRC calculation result calculated in step S4042 with the CRC calculation result at the time of the power outage (immediately before) obtained in step S4043, and in step S4045, (for example, A flag "1" indicating that there is a backup error is set as an initial value in the register.

Next, in step S4046, the main CPU 4201 determines the comparison result of the CRC calculation result performed in step S4044, and if there is a mismatch (YES in step S4046), it determines that there is a backup abnormality. The process then proceeds to step S4051. The flag "1" is set in the B register as is the initial value.

If it is determined in step S4046 that the comparison results of the CRC calculation results match (NO in step S4046), the main CPU 4201 sets a flag "2" in the B register indicating that no power outage has been detected in step S4047. Set.

Next, in step S4048, the main CPU 4201 acquires a power cut flag indicating whether or not a power cut has been performed, and in step S4049, based on the power cut flag, the main CPU 4201 determines whether a power cut has been performed or not. Determine whether Here, if it is determined that a power outage has not been performed (NO in step S4049), the main CPU 4201 determines that no power outage has been detected, and proceeds to step S4051. The flag "2" (indicating that no power interruption has been detected), which was set in step S4047, is set in the B register.

If it is determined in step S4049 that a power cut has been performed (YES in step S4049), the main CPU 4201 sets a flag "0" in the B register indicating that there is no abnormality.

Next, in step S4051, the main CPU 4201 stores the verification result (flag) stored in the B register as a "CRC verification result" in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203, and further, in step S4052 , clear the power interruption execution flag.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return command, and the processing is switched from processing related to the area outside the area to processing related to the gaming area.

In this way, in the specified area CRC inspection process, the stack pointer SP related to bank 1 is set when processing for the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 is performed for the first time after the power is turned on, so that the initialization process is efficient. And it will be executed with a simple configuration.

[Startup status check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the activation state check process (step S4008 in FIG. 114) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the startup state check process. In this process, the startup state is determined depending on whether there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation of the setting key 4174a and the RAM clear switch 4176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not settings were changed at the time of the previous power cut. is determined, and the clear range of the main RAM 4203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined activation state.

First, in step S4071, the main CPU 4201 acquires the CRC verification result stored in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203. This CRC verification result may include, for example, in the specified area CRC inspection process described above, there is a backup abnormality (flag "1"), no power outage detected (flag "2"), or no abnormality (flag "0"). is set.

Next, in step S4072, the main CPU 4201 sets the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range as the initial value of the RAM clear range (for example, HL register).

Next, in step S4073, the main CPU 4201 refers to the CRC verification result obtained in step S4071 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. If there is an abnormality (YES in step S4073), step S4077 If there is no abnormality (NO in step S4073), in step S4074, the start address of the RAM clear range at the time of setting change is set in the HL register.

After step S4074, in step S4075, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the current process is a power failure recovery during a setting change based on the previous state information of the RAM clear switch 4176. If it is not a recovery from a power interruption during a setting change (if NO in step S4075), the process advances to step S4077, and if it is a recovery from a power interruption while a setting is being changed (if a YES judgment is in step S4075), in step S4076, (for example, , the previous state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the state information of the setting key 4174a are set in the E register. This process rewrites the current status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the status information of the setting key 4174a to the previous information (before recovery from power failure). If there is, we will continue to change the settings this time.

After step S4076, or in the case of a YES determination in step S4073 or in the case of a NO determination in step S4075, the main CPU 4201 proceeds to step S4077, where the main CPU 4201 displays the current state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the state of the setting key 4174a. Based on the information, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is on and the setting key 4174a is on. If both are on (YES in step S4077), the process ends.

As described above, if the main RAM is abnormal (YES in step S4073) and the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" and the setting key 4174a is "on" during the power-on operation, The start address of the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality is set in the RAM clear range, and after the YES determination in step S4077 ends this process, the clear process is performed based on the clear range (see FIGS. 119 and 120). ), and then a setting change process is performed (see FIGS. 122 and 123). This activation state is "RAM abnormality 1" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the sixth pattern.

In addition, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4073 is NO), and if the power failure recovery is not performed during the setting change (if step S4075 is NO), and if the RAM is cleared during power-on operation, When the switch 4176 is "on" and the setting key 4174a is "on", the RAM clear range start address at the time of setting change is set in the RAM clear range, and after this process is completed through a YES determination in step S4077. , a clearing process is performed based on the clear range (see FIGS. 119 and 120), and then a setting change process is performed (see FIGS. 122 and 123). This activation state is "setting change" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the fourth pattern.

Furthermore, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4073 determines NO) and if the power failure recovery is being performed while changing settings (if step S4075 determines NO), in step S4076, the operation at power-on is performed. , the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" and the setting key 4174a is "on", so the RAM clear range start address at the time of setting change is set as the RAM clear range, and after a YES determination in step S4077, this address is set. After the process is finished, clearing is performed based on the clear range (see FIGS. 119 and 120), and then setting change processing is performed (see FIGS. 122 and 123). This activation state is "setting change" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the fifth pattern.

In step S4077, if both the RAM clear switch 4176 and the setting key 4174a are not turned on (NO in step S4077), the process advances to step S4078.

Next, in step S4078, the main CPU 4201 refers to the CRC verification result and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. If there is an abnormality (YES in step S4078), the main CPU 4201 proceeds to step S4079, where: Performs game return impossible error processing. In the game return impossible error process, the WDT clear process and the restart process are repeated in an infinite loop, and, for example, the performance display monitor 6170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and the game is stopped. In this case, as mentioned above, the RAM clear range at the time of an abnormality is set as the clear range, but it is also possible to clear this clear range (RAM clear range at the time of an abnormality) here, or clear the range. Alternatively, the game may be stopped as is.

In this way, if the main RAM is abnormal (YES in step S4073) and both the RAM clear switch 4176 and the setting key 4174a are not in the "on" state during the power-on operation , the start address of the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality is set in the RAM clear range, and after a YES determination in step S4078, the game return impossible error process is performed as described above. This activation state is "RAM abnormality 2" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the seventh pattern.

If there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203 (NO in step S4078), it is determined in step S4080 whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on".

In step S4080, if the state of RAM clear switch 4176 is "ON" (YES in step S4080), the process ends.

In this way, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if the determination is NO in step S4078), and if the RAM clear switch 4176 is "ON" in the operation at power-on (if the determination is YES in step S4080), The RAM clear range start address at the time of setting change is set in the RAM clear range, and after this process is completed through a YES determination in step S4080, the clear process is performed based on the clear range (FIGS. 119 and 120). (see), and then power-off recovery processing is performed. This activation state is "RAM clear" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the third pattern.

In this case, when the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and setting key 4174a is set in step S4076, a YES determination is made in step S4077, so it can be said that this is not a power failure recovery during setting change. Furthermore, if the setting key 4174a is also in the "on" state, a YES determination is made in step S4077, so it can be said that the setting key 4174a is in the "off" state here.

In step S4080, if the state of the RAM clear switch 4176 is "off" (NO in step S4080), in step S4081, the start address of the RAM clear range upon power recovery is set in the HL register, and the process is started. finish.

In this way, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if NO in step S4078) and if RAM clear switch 4176 is not "ON" during the power-on operation (if NO in step S4080), the RAM The start address of the RAM clear range at the time of recovery from power failure is set in the clear range of , and after this process is completed, the clear process is performed based on the clear range (see FIGS. 119 and 120). This startup state is "recovery from power failure" or "setting confirmation" shown in FIG. 111(A), and corresponds to the first pattern or the second pattern. Note that here, similarly to the above, when the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and setting key 4174a is set in step S4076, a YES determination is made in step S4077, so it can be said that this is not a power failure recovery during setting change. .

As described above, there are the first pattern and the second pattern shown in FIG. 111(A) as the startup state in which the RAM clear range start address at the time of power failure recovery is set in the RAM clear range. In the pattern, the setting key 4174a is in the "off" state and the RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "off" state, while in the second pattern, the setting key 4174a is in the "on" state and The RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "off" state, and subsequent processing is determined based on these differences. That is, the startup state of the first pattern is "recovery from power failure", and after the clearing process based on the clear range, the power failure recovery process is performed, and the startup state of the second pattern is "setting confirmation". After clear processing based on the clear range, setting confirmation processing is performed (see FIGS. 122 and 123).

[Specified range clear processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the designated range clearing process (step S4009 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specified range clearing process.

First, in step S4101, the main CPU 4201 saves information such as the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 4174a to the stack. These pieces of information are realized, for example, by saving data in the E register and D register to the stack.

Next, in step S4102, the main CPU 4201 uses the value of the register in which the RAM clear range start address (lower address) is set as RAM clear range determination data, and uses the gaming area (work area (gaming area) )). In this embodiment, as explained in connection with the startup state check process in FIG. The corresponding RAM clear range start address is set, and when clearing the area outside the main RAM 4203, by referring to the lower part of the RAM clear range start address stored in the HL register, the address shown in FIG. This eliminates the need to make such judgments.

In addition, in this embodiment, by passing only the lower order of the RAM clear range start address stored in the HL register, the area of the main RAM 4203 is The outside area (work area (outside area)) is also configured to be able to clear ranges according to the corresponding conditions. For example, when clearing the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 (the area starting with address "F07B"H) under certain conditions, by passing "7B"H, which is the lower-order data of the address, the main RAM 4203 can be cleared. In the area outside the area, an area corresponding to the "7B"H data is determined, and control can be performed to clear the determined area.

In addition, here, the RAM clear range determination data is stored in the gaming area (work area (gaming area)) of the main RAM 4203, but this is because the data cannot be stored in a register and passed. be. When an out-of-area area processing call instruction is issued, the bank 0 is switched to the bank 1 as shown in FIG. 109, and the registers are also switched accordingly.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs out-of-area specified area clearing processing in step S4104. This process is called by an out-of-area processing call instruction to perform processing related to bank 1 (out-of-area area processing). The designated outside area clearing process clears the designated range of the outside area of the main RAM 4203 based on the lower address of the register in which the RAM clear range start address is set, as described above. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Note that the designated area clearing process outside the area called here does not execute an interrupt disable instruction or an interrupt enable instruction, but it does not execute an interrupt disable instruction or an interrupt enable instruction, but the data storage process called in step S4011 of the main control main process shown in FIG. 115 (FIG. 121 If the configuration executes interrupt disable instructions and interrupt enable instructions, as in (see), the predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called, similar to this data storage process. Can be configured.

In other words, the value of interrupt enable register 2 is saved before the interrupt disable instruction, and after the predetermined processing executed after the interrupt disable instruction is completed, data is stored from the saved value of interrupt enable register 2. Determine the interrupt control state at the time the process is called, and if interrupts are enabled, execute an interrupt enable instruction; otherwise, terminate with interrupts disabled. I can do it.

Next, the main CPU 4201 returns to the process related to bank 0 (gaming area process), and in step S4105 sets the size of the RAM clear range (for example, the size of the RAM clear range at the time of power failure recovery).

Next, in step S4106, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the RAM clear range start address is the start address of the RAM clear range at power loss recovery, and if it is the start address of the RAM clear range at power loss recovery (step If YES in S4106), the process advances to step S4109.

On the other hand, if it is not the first address of the RAM clear range at the time of power loss recovery (NO in step S4106), in this case, it is different from the RAM clear range at the time of power loss recovery, so in step S4107, Set the final address in the RAM clear range as the RAM clear range final address. The RAM clear range final address set here becomes the final address of the gaming area of the main RAM 4203, but consideration is given so as not to clear the used stack in the stack area (gaming area). For example, in the stack area (gaming area), the stack is used in order from the stack with the largest address value to the stack with the smallest address value, but the address obtained by subtracting 4 from the final address of the stack area (gaming area) is cleared in RAM. This is set as the final address of the range, and a predetermined byte (for example, 4 bytes) of stack is secured without being cleared. As a result, the return address of the called program, saved data, etc. are protected.

After that, in step S4108, the size of the RAM clear range when the power is not restored is calculated from the RAM clear range start address (lower address) stored in step S4102 and the RAM clear range end address set in step S4107. After that, the process advances to step S4109.

Next, the main CPU 4201 clears the RAM clear range in step S4109. In this process, for example, the start address of the RAM clear range to be cleared that is stored in the HL register and the size of the clear range calculated in step S4105 or the size of the clear range calculated in step S4108 are used. When specified, all bytes of data in that range are set to "00"H.

Next, in step S4110, the main CPU 4201 restores information such as the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 4174a from the stack. These pieces of information are stored in, for example, the E register or the D register (see step S4101).

By such specified range clearing processing, the clearing range (lower address) in the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 is effectively used to determine the clearing range in the area outside the main RAM 4203, improving the efficiency of the processing. At the same time, it is possible to simplify the structure of the program and further reduce the size of the program.

[Specified area outside area clearing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the outside specified area clearing process (step S4104 in FIG. 119) called in the specified range clearing process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure for clearing the designated area outside the area.

As mentioned above, the specified outside area clearing process is called by the outside area processing call command, so it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is executed in the outside area of the main ROM 4202. This program is stored in the main RAM 4203 and uses a work area (outside area) and a stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of the main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4121, the main CPU 4201 acquires RAM clear range determination data stored in the gaming area (work area (gaming area)) of the main RAM 4203. This RAM clear range determination data is data stored by the main CPU 4201 in step S4102 of FIG. 118.

Next, in step S4122, the main CPU 4201 saves the acquired RAM clear range determination data (for example, to the E register). Thereafter, in step S4123, the main CPU 4201 sets the start address of the RAM clear range in the event of an abnormality in the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 (for example, in the HL register) in order to compare with the RAM clear range determination data acquired in step S4121. .

Next, in step S4124, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range set in the HL register with the RAM clear range determination data. If the address matches the lower address of the first address (YES in step S4124), the process advances to step S4128.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear range determination data does not match the lower address of the abnormal RAM clear range start address (NO determination in step S4124), in step S4125, it is compared with the RAM clear range determination data acquired in step S4121. Therefore, the start address of the RAM clear range when changing settings in the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 is set in the HL register.

Next, in step S4126, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the start address of the RAM clear range at the time of setting change set in the HL register with the RAM clear range determination data, and the RAM clear range determination data If the address matches the lower address of the clear range start address (YES in step S4126), the process advances to step S4128.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear range judgment data does not match the lower address of the RAM clear range start address at the time of setting change (if NO in step S4126), in step S4127 it is compared with the RAM clear range judgment data obtained in step S4121. In order to do this, the start address of the RAM clear range at the time of power failure recovery in the area outside the main RAM 4203 is set in the HL register, and the process advances to step S4128.

In step S4128, the size of each RAM clear range is calculated, and then, in step S4129, clearing of the RAM clear range is executed for the area outside the main RAM 4203. In this process, for example, if you specify the start address of the RAM clear range to be cleared that is stored in the HL register and the size of the RAM clear range calculated in step S4128, all bytes of data in that range will be cleared. Set to "00"H.

Next, in step S4130, the main CPU 4201 restores the RAM clear range determination data saved in step S4122 from the E register (for example, to the A register).

Next, in step S4131, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the first address of the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality with the RAM clear range determination data, and the RAM clear range determination data is compared with the lower address of the first address of the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality. If they do not match (NO in step S4131), the process advances to step S4134. Note that the determination in step S4131 is substantially the same as that in step S4124.

If the RAM clear range determination data matches the lower address of the abnormal RAM clear range start address (YES in step S4131), in step S4132, the performance stored in the main ROM 4202 (for example, in the HL register) is determined. Sets the display monitor control initial table address.

Next, in step S4133, the main CPU 4201 executes table data setting processing. This process refers to the HL register representing the address of the performance display monitor control initial table stored in the main ROM 4202 and stores the initial value related to the control of the performance display monitor in the work area (of the main RAM 4203). be. The initial values related to the control of the performance display monitor include, for example, the blinking switching timing of the LED, the number of blinking repetitions, and the like.

In step S4134, the main CPU 4201 sets (in the HL register, for example) the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the main ROM 4202.

Next, in step S4135, the main CPU 4201 executes table data setting processing. This process refers to the HL register representing the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the main ROM 4202 and stores the power-on initialization data in the work area (of the main RAM 4203). It is. The data for initialization at power-on includes, for example, the multiplication result of the blinking switching timing of the LED and the number of blinking repetitions.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return command, and the processing is switched from processing related to the area outside the area to processing related to the gaming area.

In this way, in the designated area clearing process outside the area, the clearing range related to the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 is determined using the clearing range related to the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 determined in the startup state check process shown in FIG. is determined, the clearing process of the main RAM 4203 is executed with an efficient and simple configuration.

[Data storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the data storage process (step S4011 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of data storage processing. When called from the main process, for example, the address of the data table for initialization at power-on is set in the HL register. Note that in this embodiment, this data storage process is called at several places including step S4011 in FIG. However, by calling with the above-mentioned specific call command, it can be configured to be executed as a process related to bank 1 (process related to an area outside the area). In addition, when the data storage process is executed as a process related to bank 0 (processing related to the area within the area), for example, the Q register contains the start address (upper side) of the area address of the main RAM 4203 "F0". By setting H, in data storage processing, the processing target area in the area of the main RAM 4203 can be specified only by the start address (lower side) of the processing target area, and the processing target area The length of the instruction related to this can be made shorter (compared to specifying the address using 4 bytes (upper side + lower side)). Similarly, when data storage processing is executed as a process related to bank 1 (processing related to an area outside the area), for example, the first address (upper side) of the outside address of the main RAM 4203 "F2" H is set in the Q register. By setting this, a processing target area in an area outside the main RAM 4203 can be specified only by the start address (lower side) of the processing target area.

First, in step S4151, the main CPU 4201 saves the value of the interrupt permission register 2 to a register (for example, the parity/overflow flag of the flag register F). As mentioned above, the value of the interrupt permission register 2 becomes "0" when an interrupt disabling instruction is issued, and the information before that is lost, so this value is saved at this timing.

Next, the main CPU 4201 issues an interrupt disabling instruction in step S4152. As a result, if interrupts are not disabled at the start of data storage processing, maskable interrupts are disabled from this interrupt disabling instruction until an interrupt enable instruction is issued in step S4162, which will be described later. Next, in step S4153, the main CPU 4201 saves the data of the register (flag register F) that stores the value of the interrupt permission register 2 in the stack.

Next, in step S4154, the main CPU 4201 refers to the HL register and obtains data at the address stored in the HL register. As described above, when the process is called from the main process, the power-on initialization data table is acquired.

Next, in step S4155, the main CPU 4201 determines the size of the data related to the clearing process from the data acquired in step S4154, and if the size is 0 and it is determined that there is no clearing process (NO in step S4155). ), the process advances to step S4158.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the size of the data related to the clearing process is not 0 and there is a clearing process (YES in step S4155), in step S4156, the lower order of the storage target area address is determined from the data acquired in step S4154. The storage target area is cleared in step S4157. Note that the start address of the storage target area is specified by combining the upper part of the preset address (for example, "F0" H) and the lower part of the storage target area address obtained in step S4156. The storage target area is cleared using the start address of , and the size of the data related to the clearing process acquired from the power-on initialization data table. Here, the clearing process is repeated in a predetermined unit, for example, 1 byte, and each time the clearing process is performed, the storage target area address to be cleared is shifted, and the size of the data related to the clearing process is subtracted by 1 byte. be done.

In step S4158, the main CPU 4201 determines the size of data related to set processing (storage processing) from the data acquired from step S4154, and if the size is 0 and it is determined that there is no set processing (step S4158 is NO). In the case of determination), the process advances to step S4160.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the size of the data related to the set process is not 0 and there is a set process (YES in step S4158), the storage data is stored in the storage target data in step S4159. This process specifies the start address of the storage target area by acquiring the lower part of the storage target area address from the data acquired in step S4154, in combination with the upper part of the preset address, and further, by acquiring the lower part of the storage target area address from the data acquired in step S4154. This is executed by obtaining the data to be stored from the data that was created.

Next, in step S4160, the main CPU 4201 restores the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of interrupt permission register 2, which was saved in the stack in step S4153.

Next, in step S4161, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value of the interrupt permission register 2 stored in the flag register, which is the data restored in step S4160, is "0". If it is determined that (YES in step S4161), it is determined that interrupts were disabled before the interrupt disabling instruction was executed in the process, and the process ends without executing the interrupt enable instruction.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the interrupt permission register 2 is "1" (NO in step S4161), it is determined that interrupts were enabled before the interrupt disable instruction was executed in the process, In step S4162, an interrupt permission instruction is executed and the process ends.

Through this data storage process, the interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 become "0" with the interrupt disable instruction in step S4152, and the interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 become "0" with the interrupt enable instruction in step S4162. 1", but if interrupt permission register 2 is "0" at the time of calling the data storage process (that is, if interrupts are disabled at the time of calling the data storage process), step S4162 is not executed. First, the interrupt permission register 2 is maintained at "0".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the value of interrupt permission register 1 and the value of interrupt permission register 2 are the same at the time of calling the data storage process, but if a non-maskable interrupt occurs or When the data storage process is called in the process, it is possible that the value of the interrupt permission register 1 becomes "0" and the value of the interrupt permission register 2 becomes "1" at the time of calling the data storage process. However, even in such a case, it is necessary to save the values of interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2, respectively, and restore these register values after clearing the area and setting the data. By doing so, it is possible to return to the original interrupt enabled or interrupt disabled state when the data storage process is completed.

In this embodiment, the data storage processing program shown in FIG. 121 has the characteristics of a common module (general-purpose module) that is called to perform area clearing processing and data setting at various locations.

With such a data storage processing configuration, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called. More specifically, when a predetermined process such as clearing a predetermined area or setting data is called, the interrupt control state at the time of the call is saved, and the called process is executed with interrupts disabled. After that, when returning to the caller, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing. It is possible to maintain the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings normally without being aware of it.

In addition, in a program for such data storage processing, the control of the interrupt control state, the processing of clearing a predetermined area, and the processing of setting data to the predetermined processing are written together, which improves management and processing. This will further improve efficiency.

[Setting change confirmation process]
Next, the setting change confirmation process (step S4012 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. Note that FIGS. 122 and 123 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process.

First, in step S4181, the main CPU 4201 acquires the state information of the setting key 4174a at startup (stored in the E register, for example), and determines whether or not the operation of the setting key 4174a is "on". judge. If the operation of the setting key 4174a is "off" (NO in step S4181), the process ends.

In step S4181, if the operation of the setting key 4174a is "ON" (YES in step S4181), in step S4182, the main CPU 4201 changes the setting change status area of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203. , state information of the setting key 4174a at startup, and state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup. Note that the status information saved here is used in the activation status check process shown in FIG. 118 to determine whether or not a power outage occurred during the previous setting change.

Next, in step S4183, the main CPU 4201 sets a setting operation command and executes an effect control command transmission process. Through this process, the setting operation command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 6300.

Next, in step S4184, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred, and if it is determined that an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred (YES in step S4184), the main CPU 4201 interrupts Execute the configuration process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interrupt request signal (XINT) is not generated (NO in step S4184), it is determined whether or not a PTC2 timeout has occurred, and if it is determined that no PTC2 timeout has occurred (step S4185). If the determination is NO), the process advances to step S4184, and it is determined again whether or not an interrupt request signal (XINT) has been generated.

If it is determined in step S4185 that a PTC2 timeout has occurred (YES in step S4185), the main CPU 4201 performs input port reading processing in step S4186.

Next, in step S4188, the main CPU 4201 outputs a security signal to the output port, and in step S4189, sets a set value (for example, in the A register).

Next, in step S4190, the main CPU 4201 sets setting display data in the A register based on the setting display data table and the setting value set in step S4189, and then, in step S4191, the main CPU 4201 sets the setting display data in the A register. Based on this, a display LED data set is performed, and in step S4192, a performance LED common set is performed.

Next, in step S4193, the main CPU 4201 performs WDT clear processing and WDT restart processing.

Next, in step S4194, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is "off", and if it is determined that it is "off" (YES in step S4194), that is, at the time of startup, If the RAM clear switch 4176 is not operated and is in the off state, this operation is determined to be a setting confirmation operation, and the process advances to step S4197.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" (NO in step S4194), that is, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is operated and is in the on state at the time of startup, this Assuming that the operation is a setting update operation, it is determined in step S4195 whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is being operated. In step S4195, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is not operated (NO in step S4195), the process advances to step S4197.

On the other hand, in step S4195, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is operated (YES in step S4195, for example, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is pressed), in step S4196, the RAM clear switch 4176 is Change the setting value according to the operation and update the setting value.

Thereafter, in step S4197, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not the setting key 4174a has been operated to "off", and if it is "on" (NO in step S4197), that is, the setting key 4174a has been operated to "off". If it remains "on", the process returns to step S4184, where it is again determined whether an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, if the setting key 4174a is operated to "off" (YES in step S4197), it is determined that the setting change process has been completed, and in step S4198 the setting change status area (the relevant work area) and terminate the process. Note that by clearing the settings change status area in step S4198, if the status information saved here is referred to in the startup status check process shown in FIG. If it is determined that this has not occurred and the processing in step S4198 is not performed due to a power outage or the like, in the startup state check process shown in FIG. 118, it is determined that a power outage occurred during the previous setting change. Also, here, the setting change status information is loaded into a register (for example, A register) in preparation for the next game return process.

[Power outage determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the power failure determination process (step S4015 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power outage determination process.

First, in step S4211, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not XINT has been detected, and if it is determined that it has not been detected (NO determination in step S4211), that is, if a power outage has not been detected, Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that XINT has been detected (YES in step S4211), power interruption setting processing is executed in step S4212. Note that the power outage determination process will be described in detail later.

Further, in this process, XINT detection is performed by referring to an XINT detection flag, and this XINT detection flag is set when an external maskable interrupt process, which will be described later, detects a power outage.

[Power cutoff setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the power outage setting process (step S4194 in FIG. 122, step S4212 in FIG. 124) called in the setting change confirmation process and the power outage determination process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power cutoff setting process.

First, the main CPU 4201 clears the XINT detection flag in step S4231. Here, the XINT detection flag is a flag that is set when an external maskable interrupt process, which will be described later, detects a power outage, as described above.

Next, in step S4232, designated area CRC generation processing is performed. This process is called by an out-of-area processing call instruction to perform processing related to bank 1 (out-of-area area processing). The main CPU 4201 then generates a CRC for the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 and the area outside the main RAM 4203, and when the processing is completed, returns with a gaming area processing return command, so that subsequent processing is performed using bank 0. (gaming area processing). Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S4233, the main CPU 4201 performs RAM access prohibition processing to prohibit access to the main RAM 4203 by transmitting a RAM access prohibition command to a predetermined register.

[Specified area CRC generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the designated area CRC generation process (step S4232 in FIG. 125) called in the power cutoff setting process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the designated area CRC generation process.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the designated area CRC generation process is called by the out-of-area area process call instruction, so it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is executed outside the area of the main ROM 4202. The program is stored in the area and uses the work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are areas outside the main RAM 4203. However, in this process, as described later, the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 is also referred to for CRC calculation.

First, in step S4251, the main CPU 4201 stores a power outage detection flag in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs designated area CRC calculation processing in step S4252. This process is executed, for example, by using a CRC16 calculation register and writing data to be calculated into the CRC16 calculation register. Furthermore, the calculation target includes most of the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 4203. Note that in this embodiment, this specified area CRC generation process is basically a process related to bank 1 and is called by an out-of-area area process call command, but as described above, regarding CRC calculation, It is configured to include the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 as a calculation target.

Next, in step S4253, the main CPU 4201 stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) in (eg, HL register).

Finally, the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return command, and the processing is switched from processing related to the area outside the area to processing related to the gaming area.

[Performance display monitor aggregation division processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the performance display monitor total division process (step S4017 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display monitor total division processing.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the performance display monitor total division process is called by the out-of-area area process call command, so it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is stored in the area of the main ROM 4202. The program is stored in an external area and uses a work area (outside area) and a stack area (outside area) which are outside areas of the main RAM 4203.

First, the main CPU 4201 executes out-of-area RAM clear check processing in step S4271. Note that this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4272, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the display data switching flag 1 area (for example, in the A register), and in step S4273, the value set in the A register is other than the section A flag value (0). (In other words, 299 items have been reached).

If it is determined in step S4273 that the section A flag value is other than (0) (YES in step S4273), it is assumed that 299 pieces have been reached, and the process advances to step S4280.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4273 that the section A flag value is (0) (NO in step S4273), it is determined that 299 has not been reached, and the process proceeds to step S4272, where the total out counter value and the interval A judgment value.

Next, in step S4275, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the difference between the total out counter value and the section A determination value is less than 299, and if it is determined that the difference is less than 299 (step S4275 If the determination is YES), the process advances to step S4285. If it is determined that the difference between the total out counter value and the section A judgment value is not less than 299 (NO in step S4275), the process advances to step S4276, where the section B flag value is set in the display data switching flag 1 area. Set.

Next, the main CPU 4201 sets "0" in the normal prize ball number counter area in step S4278, and sets "0" in the normal out counter area in step S4279.

Next, the main CPU 4201 executes calculation work target acquisition processing 5 in step S4284, and then the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return instruction, and the processing starts from the processing related to the area outside the area. , the process is switched to processing related to the gaming area.

If it is determined in step S4273 that the value of the A register is other than the interval A flag value (0) (YES in step S4273), it is assumed that 299 items have been reached, and the process proceeds to step S4280, where the total out Compare the counter value and the section transition determination value.

Next, in step S4281, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the difference between the total out counter value and the section transition determination value is less than 60,000, and if it is determined that the difference is less than 60,000 (step S4281 If the determination is YES), the process advances to step S4285. If it is determined that the difference between the total out counter value and the section transition determination value is not less than 60,000 (NO in step S4281), the process advances to step S4282, where the value of the display data switching flag 1 area is corrected ( That is, 1 is added (however, if the specified upper limit is reached, no addition is made). After that, the process advances to step S4284.

In step S4275, if it is determined that the difference between the total out counter value and the section A judgment value is less than 299 (when step S4275 is YES), or in step S4281, the total out counter value and the section transition judgment value If it is determined that the difference between Call the determined target module.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return command, and the processing is switched from processing related to the area outside the area to processing related to the gaming area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the out-of-area RAM clear check process is performed at the beginning of the performance display monitor aggregation/division process, so that when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the performance display monitor-related Clear the area.

In this embodiment, as explained with reference to FIGS. 112, 119, and 120, when the pachinko gaming machine is started, the clearing process of the gaming area and the area outside the area is synchronized (approximately at the same timing). However, in addition to such clearing processing, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 after the pachinko gaming machine is started, the area related to the performance display monitor is asynchronously cleared at that point. ing. With this configuration, the function of the performance display monitor can be continuously maintained, and abnormal displays by the performance display monitor can be effectively avoided.

[Outside RAM clear check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the out-of-area RAM clear check process (step S4271 in FIG. 127) called in the performance display monitor total division process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the extra-area RAM clear check process.

In addition, as mentioned above, the out-of-area RAM clear check process is called by the performance display monitor total division process called by the out-of-area area process call command, so it is a process related to bank 1, and this process is executed. The program for this purpose is a program stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202, and utilizes the work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are the outside areas of the main RAM 4203. .

First, in step S4301, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the initialization flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 (for example, in the HL register). Next, in step S4302, it is determined whether the value of the HL register and the initial flag value are the same, and if it is determined that they are different (NO in step S4302), the process advances to step S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the HL register and the initial flag value are the same (YES in step S4302), the contents of the division task transition state area are set (for example, in the A register) in step S4303. , In step S4304, it is determined whether the value of the A register is within a normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4304 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (NO determination in step S4304), the process advances to step S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the A register is within the normal range (YES in step S4304), the contents of the display content pointer area are set (for example, in the A register) in step S4305. , In step S4306, it is determined whether the value of the A register is within a normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4306 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (NO determination in step S4306), the process advances to step S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the A register is within the normal range (YES in step S4306), in step S4307, the contents of the display data switching flag 1 area are transferred (for example, to the A register). In step S4308, it is determined whether the value of the A register is within a normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4308 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (NO determination in step S4308), the process advances to step S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the A register is within the normal range (YES in step S4308), the process ends.

In the case of NO determination in step S4302, in the case of NO determination in step S4304, in the case of NO determination in step S4306, or in the case of NO determination in step S4308, the main CPU 4201 arranges the memory in the area outside the main RAM 4203 in step S4309. Clear the area related to the performance display monitor. Next, in step S4310, the main CPU 4201 performs initial settings for performance display monitor control based on the performance display monitor control initial table and the like, and then ends the process.

[Main control command transmission/reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main control command transmission/reception process (step S4021 in FIG. 116) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main control command transmission/reception processing.

First, in step S4331, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not XINT has been detected, and if it has been determined that it has been detected (YES in step S4331), that is, if a power outage has been detected, the process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that XINT is not detected (NO in step S4331), a main control command control state number is set (in the A register, for example) in step S4332. Here, in the main control command control state number, "0" represents the main control command transmission start value, "1" represents the payout communication mode reception value, and "2" represents the payout communication event reception value. The main control command control state number is set in each of the main control command transmission start processing, the payout communication mode reception process, the payout communication event reception process, etc.

Next, in step S4333, the main CPU 4201 selects a process according to the main control command control state number. This process, for example, refers to the payout communication control branch table that defines the address (program start address) of the process according to the main control command control state number, and controls the main control command set in the A register. This is to find the address of the process according to the state number.

Next, in step S4334, the main CPU 4201 refers to the receive FIFO status check value of the status register (for example, a register for asynchronous serial transmission/reception), determines whether a receive FIFO error has been detected, and If it is determined that no error has been detected (NO in step S4334), it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the process advances to step S4336.

If it is determined in step S4334 that a receive FIFO error has been detected (YES in step S4334), it is determined that there is an abnormality, and in step S4335 a command to clear the receive FIFO is sent to a predetermined command register. and clears the receive FIFO.

Next, in step S4336, the main CPU 4201 uses the address selected in step S4333 to call the corresponding process (that is, the process according to the main control command control state), and then ends the process. The corresponding processing is, for example, main control command transmission start processing, payout communication mode reception processing, or payout communication event reception processing.

In the main control command transmission/reception process shown in FIG. 129, in order to continue the process regardless of the presence or absence of received data, the reception FIFO is cleared in accordance with the result of error detection in the reception FIFO in step S4334. For example, if there is received data and there is no error in the receive FIFO, get normal data and call the selected process, and if there is no receive data and there is no error in the receive FIFO, get 0 data. Call the selected process, and if there is received data and there is an error in the receive FIFO, clear the receive FIFO, get 0 data, call the selected process, and if there is no receive data and there is an error in the receive FIFO. If there is an error, the reception FIFO is cleared, 0 data is obtained, and the selected process is called.

[Main control command transmission start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 130, in the main control command transmission/reception processing under the control of the main CPU 4201, the main control command transmission start processing (FIG. 129 Step S4336) will be explained. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main control command transmission start processing.

First, in step S4351, the main CPU 4201 sets (saved) the startup information stored in the startup information area of the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 (for example, in the A register), and in step S4352, sets (saved) the startup information stored in the startup information area of the gaming area of the main RAM 4203. clear.

Next, in step S4353, the main CPU 4201 refers to the A register and determines whether there is activation information. If it is determined that there is startup information (if YES in step S4353), the process advances to step S4361, and if it is determined that there is no startup information (if NO in step S4353), in step S4354, the main RAM 4203 is Set the size of the payout management counter area in the gaming area (for example, B register). Here, the size of the payout management counter area is, for example, 15, and this is the number of entries for the number of prize balls to be managed (for example, the number of prize balls 1 to 15).

Next, in step S4355, the main CPU 4201 obtains the start address of the payout management counter area, sets the address of its 15th byte (lowest byte) in (for example, HL register), and in step S4356, If the entry value (counter value) corresponding to the address set in the register is "0", leave it as is, otherwise subtract "1", and change the predetermined flag depending on whether the subtraction was successful or not. let

In this process, there is a counter value that indicates whether there is a payout for each prize ball (if 15 balls are awarded 3 times, the counter value is 3), and if the counter value can be subtracted, a flag is set, and if the counter value is "0", then the counter value is 3. If so, control is performed so that it is performed in one process (one instruction) so that it remains "0".

Next, in step S4357, the main CPU 4201 determines whether there is a counter value of an entry corresponding to the determination target address in the payout management counter area. This determination is made by referring to the above-mentioned predetermined flag indicating whether or not "1" has been subtracted from the counter value in step S4356. If it is determined that there is a counter value (YES in step S4357), that is, if "1" has been subtracted, the process advances to step S4360.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no counter value (NO in step S4357), that is, if "1" has not been subtracted, the process advances to step S4358, where the counter value of the next entry is referenced. The address of the HL register is subtracted as follows. For example, if the address of the HL register is the 15th byte (the lowest byte), it is changed to the 14th byte (one byte higher than the lowest byte).

Next, in step S4359, the main CPU 4201 determines whether processing has been performed on the payout management counter area of all entries (for example, 15 entries defined as the size of the payout management counter area), and If the entry process is completed (YES in step S4359), the process advances to step S4360. On the other hand, if the processing of all entries has not been completed (NO in step S4359), the process advances to step S4355 and the subsequent processing is repeated in order to perform processing regarding the next address in the payout management counter area.

If the determination in step S4353 is YES, or if the determination in step S4359 is YES, the process advances to step S4360, where the main CPU 4201 generates a main control command, as described above. In this embodiment, the payout management counter area has 15 entries, and these correspond to counters related to the number of prize balls 1 to 15. If it is determined in step S4357 that the entry corresponding to the determination target address has a counter value, a main control command for the number of payouts corresponding to the number of prize balls of the entry corresponding to the determination target address is generated.

Next, in step S4361, the main CPU 4201 transmits a main control command to, for example, a data register for asynchronous serial transmission and reception. When the main control command is executed when step S4361 and step S4353 are YES, it is the main control command based on the startup information, and when it is executed after step S4360, it is the main control command generated in step S4360. This is the main control command.

Next, in step S4362, the main CPU 4201 sets the main control command in the main control command transmission area. This process is for determining whether or not normal communication has been performed. For example, in the payout communication mode reception process, if the two's complement value of the received command and the value set in the main control command transmission area are added and the result is 0, it is determined that normal communication has been performed, and If there is no main control command, control is performed to perform main control command reproduction processing.

Next, in step S4363, "1" is added to the value of the main control command control state number field, and the process ends.

[External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, external maskable interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 131. This process is called based on the external maskable interrupt entry address (program address) defined in the setting area corresponding to this interrupt when an external interrupt input from the XINT terminal occurs. be. Note that FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external maskable interrupt processing.

First, in step S4381, the main CPU 4201 saves a protection register (eg, AF register) to the stack. Next, in step S4382, the main CPU 4201 inspects the power interruption signal bit position of the input port, and if no power interruption is detected (NO in step S4382), the process advances to step S4385. On the other hand, if a power outage is detected (YES in step S4382), an interrupt cause mask is set in the interrupt mask register in step S4383 to prevent interrupt processing from occurring in subsequent processing. Next, in step S4384, the XINT detection flag is set and updated to indicate that a power outage has occurred.

Next, in step S4381, the main CPU 4201 restores the protection register saved in step S4381.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 132. This process is called when a timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) occurs, based on the PTC2 timeout interrupt entry address (program address) defined in the setting area corresponding to this interrupt. This is executed, for example, at a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle). Note that FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of system timer interrupt processing.

First, in step S4401, the main CPU 4201 saves a protection register (eg, AF register) to the stack. Next, in step S4402, the main CPU 4201 adds "1" to the value of the interrupt counter area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs processing to read the state of the input port in step S4403, and performs switch input detection processing in step S4404. Note that the switch input detection process will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs game LED lighting data output processing in step S4405. Note that the game LED lighting data output process will be explained in detail later. Next, the main CPU 4201 performs winning information command setting processing in step S4406. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a transmission reservation process for the production control command (winning information command).

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs performance display monitor control processing (outside area) in step S4407. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a process for updating the display content of the performance display monitor 6170, and the like. Also, since this process is called by an out-of-area area process call instruction, it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the out-of-area area of the main ROM 4202. Therefore, a work area (outside area) and a stack area (outside area), which are areas outside the main RAM 4203, are used.

Next, in step S4408, the main CPU 4201 restores the contents of the protection register saved in step S4401 from the stack, and then, in step S4409, enables interrupts.

In this embodiment, as described above, after the power interruption interrupt (XINT) occurs, the interrupt factor is masked, so there is no need to provide processing that takes the occurrence of power interruption into account in the system timer interrupt processing, and as a result, , the processing becomes simpler and the program size can also be saved.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the switch input detection process (step S4404 in FIG. 132) called by the system timer interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of switch input detection processing.

First, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal state monitoring processing in step S4421. Note that details of the abnormal state monitoring process will be explained later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs normal symbol related check processing in step S4422. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a check process for the first starting opening winning ball switch 6044a, the passing ball switch 6043a, and the second starting opening winning ball switch 6045a (normal electric accessory 6046). In this check process, if the on-edge of the first starting opening winning ball switch 6044a or the on-edge of the passing ball switch 6043a is detected, random number acquisition processing, random number transfer processing, etc. are performed. In addition, in this check process, if the on-edge of the second starting opening winning ball switch 6045a is detected, depending on the situation, updating processing of the normal electric accessory winning counter, winning invalidation processing, etc. are performed.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a special symbol related check process in step S4423. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of checking the count switch 6132, the first starting port switch 6121, and the second starting port switch 6141. In this check process, if the on-edge of the count switch 6132 is detected, the special electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation process, etc. are performed depending on the situation. In addition, in this check process, if the on-edge of each starting opening winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and a pre-reading effect is implemented, the transmission reservation process of the specific pending addition command is executed. It will be done. On the other hand, in this check process, if the on-edge of each starting opening winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the pre-reading performance is not performed, a reservation process for sending a pending addition command is performed. .

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs touch state signal check processing in step S4424. This process determines whether there is a change in the touch state from the input port information, and if there is a change in the touch state, distinguishes whether the touch state is on or off. Separately, a predetermined flag is set.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs prize ball related switch check processing in step S4425. In this process, the main CPU 4201 updates the data (designated prize ball management counter) stored in the payout management table at the time of prize ball.

Thereafter, in step S4426, an out pitch related switch check process is performed. This process, for example, determines from the input port information whether or not a signal indicating that the outlet switch of the outlet 178 of the first pachinko game machine has detected the passing of a game ball is supplied, and if the signal is supplied. If not, the process ends, and if the signal is supplied, "1" is added to the out pitch number management counter stored in the out pitch number management counter area. After step S4426, the process ends.

[Abnormal state monitoring processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the abnormal state monitoring process (step S4421 in FIG. 133) called in the switch input detection process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of abnormal state monitoring processing.

First, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area) in step S4441. Since it is called by the out-of-area area processing call instruction, it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the out-of-area area of the main ROM 4202, and is a program stored in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 4203. The work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are areas outside the area, are used. Note that details of the abnormal state monitoring process (outside area) will be explained later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs input port valid edge information reflection processing in step S4442. This process extracts valid edges from edge information of input ports (0 to 3) using predetermined mask data, and sets (reflects) input port valid edge information.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs gaming machine abnormality detection information reflection processing in step S4443. This process updates the gaming machine abnormality detection flag from the gaming machine abnormality detection flag area stored in the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 and the out-of-area gaming machine abnormality detection flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203. This is set in the gaming machine abnormality detection flag area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs security signal request setting in step S4444. This process updates and sets the security signal request flag from the security signal request flag stored in the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 and the outside security signal request flag stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203. It is.

Next, in step S4445, the main CPU 4201 refers to the door/frame open/close state flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 to determine whether the door/frame is open (for example, the base door 6003 and/or or whether the glass door 6004 is open. If the door or frame is not open (NO in step S4445), the process ends; if the door or frame is open (YES in step S4445), the magnetic sensor is initialized in step S4446. , and then terminates the process.

With this processing, regarding abnormal winnings, taking into account that winnings are greatly related to game progress, the processing to detect the abnormality is a process related to the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203, and the processing to reflect the detection result is changed to the main RAM 4203. The processing is related to the gaming area. Furthermore, regarding an abnormality in the gaming machine, the processing for detecting the abnormality and the synthesis of the detected contents are performed in the processing related to the area outside the main RAM 4203.

[Abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the abnormal state monitoring process (outside area) (step S4441 in FIG. 134) called in the abnormal state monitoring process controlled by the main CPU 4201 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area).

Abnormal condition monitoring processing (outside area) As mentioned above, since it is called by the out-of-area area processing call command, it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is executed in the out-of-area area of the main ROM 4202. The program is stored in the area and uses the work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are areas outside the main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4461, the main CPU 4201 clears the out-of-area security signal request flag area located in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 4203. Thereafter, in step S4462, the out-of-area gaming machine abnormality detection flag area located in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 4203 is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs input port enable setting in step S4463. This process is a process of setting data "FF" H in all input port valid edge mask areas arranged in the area outside the main RAM 4203.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt cycle timer counter update processing in step S4464.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal state monitoring preprocessing in step S4465. In this process, the door/frame open/close status flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is referenced to determine whether the door/frame is open (for example, if the base door 6003 and/or glass door 6004 are open). If it is determined that the door/frame is open, the magnetic sensor bit of the input port is reset with respect to the abnormality detection information (buffer area of the input port). As a result, the detection level of the magnetic sensor is turned off, and abnormality detection by the magnetic sensor is no longer performed. Thereafter, abnormality detection information is set in the monitored and corrected input value area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing in step S4466.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs induced magnetic field monitoring processing in step S4467. In this process, it is determined whether or not the induced magnetic field is being detected, and if the induced magnetic field is not being detected, the process ends. On the other hand, if the induced magnetic field is being detected, clear the input port valid edge mask, set "FF" H in the out-of-area security signal request flag area, and set the induced magnetic field detection information bit in the out-of-area gaming machine abnormality detection flag area. is set to on (“1”).

Next, in step S4468, the main CPU 4201 performs normal electric accessory illegal winning processing. This process determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 146 as shown in the first pachinko game machine is in operation (based on the data in the ordinary electric accessory operating signal management data area). However, for example, if it is determined that the winning prize monitoring counter is in operation, an inactive prize monitoring counter value (for example, 18) is set, and the winning prize monitoring counter value in working order remains at its original value. Here, when it is detected that a game ball enters the second starting port 140, if the result of subtracting "1" from the active prize monitoring counter value is "0", it is assumed that an abnormality has been detected. A request flag is set in the out-of-area security signal request flag area, and a request flag is set in the out-of-area game abnormality detection flag area. After this, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory 146 is in operation (based on the data in the normal electric accessory in operation flag area), and if it is in operation, on the condition that it is within the winning validity period, Clear the bit position of the start port 2 switch of the input port valid edge mask.

When the normal electric accessory 146 is not in operation, the winning prize monitoring counter value for the activated prize (for example, 4) is set, and the prize winning monitoring counter value for the non-activated prize is kept at its original value. Here, when it is detected that a game ball enters the second starting port 140, if the result of subtracting "1" from the non-operating winning monitoring counter value is "0", it is assumed that an abnormality has been detected. A request flag is set in the out-of-area security signal request flag area, and a request flag is set in the out-of-area game abnormality detection flag area. After this, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory 146 is in operation (based on the data in the normal electric accessory in operation flag area), and if it is in operation, on the condition that it is within the winning validity period, Clear the bit position of the start port 2 switch of the input port valid edge mask.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs special electric accessory illegal winning processing in step S4469. This process includes the special electric accessory 1 fraudulent winning process and the special electric accessory 2 fraudulent winning process, and both of them, like the above-mentioned normal electric accessory fraudulent winning process, are activated winning monitoring counter, An abnormality is detected based on the winning monitoring counter for non-operation, etc., and when an abnormality is detected, a request flag is set in the out-of-area security signal request flag area, and a request flag is set in the out-of-area game abnormality detection flag area. set.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 terminates this processing in response to a gaming area processing return command, and the processing is switched from processing related to the area outside the area to processing related to the gaming area.

[Game LED lighting data output processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the game LED lighting data output process (step S4405 in FIG. 132) called by the system timer interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Note that FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gaming LED lighting data output processing.

Game LED lighting data output processing controls the output of LED data and LED common data for an LED that serves both as an LED for displaying symbols (gaming LED) and an LED for displaying performance (performance LED). This is the process of The LED data of the gaming LED is set, for example, in the gaming operation display unit control process called in the main control main process (step S4024 in FIG. 116), and the LED data of the performance LED is set, for example, in the performance LED called in the system timer interrupt process. It is set in the performance display monitor display process (not shown) called in the display monitor control process (outside area) (step S4407 in FIG. 132).

First, the main CPU 4201 sets a refresh value (for example, an 8-bit bit string “00000000”) to the address of the output port 12 in step S4481.

Note that the output port 12 is an LED data output port regarding an LED that serves both as an LED for displaying symbols (gaming LED) and an LED for displaying performance (performance LED). Further, an output port 11, which will be described later, is a port for outputting LED common data regarding the LED.

Next, in step S4482, "1" is added to the gaming LED common value (LED common data) in the gaming LED common area (area for storing LED common data of gaming LEDs) in the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 to update it. At this time, the address of the gaming LED common area is set to, for example, the address of the HL register, and the gaming LED common value is calculated.

However, if the updated value is greater than or equal to the specified value (maximum value), it is set to "0". In addition, the updated value is stored in the address area indicated by the specified register (for example, HL register) in the game LED common area, and is also stored in another register (for example, A register). Ru.

For example, the specified value (maximum value) mentioned above is that the range of the gaming LED data area (area for storing LED data of gaming LEDs) in the gaming area is "4", and the range of the performance LED data area ( If the range of the LED data storage area of the performance LED is "4", then 4+4-1=7, and here, when the gaming LED common value is "1", this value is less than the maximum value. Therefore, the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "2", and the value of the A register is also set to "2". Also, at this time, when the gaming LED common value is "7", this value is greater than the maximum value, so the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "0", and the value of the A register is also " 0”.

Such processing in step S4482 is executed by one process (one instruction).

Next, in step S4483, the main CPU 4201 divides the value of the A register by the range of the game LED data area (for example, "4" if there are 4 data), stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in another Store in a register (eg, B register). Furthermore, correction is performed by adding "1" to the value of the B register.

For example, as a result of the process in step S4482, if the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "6" and the value of the A register is set to "6", then 6÷4=1 and the remainder is 2. Therefore, "1" is stored in the A register, "2" is stored in the B register, and further correction is performed to add "1" to the B register, resulting in the value of the B register becomes "3". In this way, the value of the B register takes on values from "1" to "4".

Next, in step S4484, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value of the A register is the gaming LED common value. This determination can be made, for example, by determining whether the value stored in the A register is "0" or "1", and if the value of the A register is "0", that value is the game LED common value. , if the value of the A register is "1", that value becomes the performance LED common value. If it is determined to be the game LED common value (YES in step S4484), the process advances to step S4487. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the performance LED common value (NO in step S4484), the value in the range of the performance LED data area (for example, "4") is added to the value in the B register in step S4485. , correct the value of the B register. As a result, the value of the B register will take a value between "5" and "8".

Next, in step S4486, the main CPU 4201 sets the address of the performance LED common area (area for storing LED common data of the performance LEDs) in the area outside the main RAM 4203 in the HL register.

Next, in step S4487, the main CPU 4201 sets the initial value of the dynamic lighting common data (for example, an 8-bit bit string "10000000") in the A register. The dynamic lighting common data is common data for performing dynamic lighting as a lighting method for an LED. Dynamic lighting is a lighting method that realizes lighting of an LED by blinking the LED at a high speed at a constant frequency.

Next, the main CPU 4201 corrects the dynamic lighting common data set in the A register in step S4488.

This process, for example, shifts the dynamic lighting common data (8-bit bit string) stored in the A register to the left by 1 bit, and sets the bit value at the left end to the right end. Next, in step S4489, the address of the HL register is corrected to select the dynamic lighting common data area.

Next, in step S4490, the main CPU 4201 determines whether processing has been performed a predetermined number of times corresponding to the value of the B register. If the process has not been performed the predetermined number of times (NO in step S4490), the process returns to step S4488 and repeats the process.

Through this processing, for example, if the initial value of the dynamic lighting common data (8-bit bit string "10000000") is stored in the A register, and the value of the B register is "1", the contents of the A register will be "00000001" and the value of the B register is "2", the contents of the A register will be "00000010", and from then on, the value of the A register will be shifted according to the value of the B register, and the value of the B register will be shifted. If the value is the maximum "8", the contents of the A register return to the original value "10000000".

If it is determined in step S4490 that the process has been performed a predetermined number of times (YES in step S4490), in step S4491, the LED data specified by the address indicated by the HL register is set in the H register. . For example, if the address indicated by the HL register is the performance LED data area, the ratio segment upper output driver buffer area, the identification segment lower output driver buffer area, the identification segment upper output driver buffer area, etc., depending on the value of the B register. Data from one of the areas is set in the H register. In addition, if the address indicated by the HL register is the gaming LED data area, depending on the value of the B register, gaming LED data 1 area (data area related to special symbol 1 display LED), gaming LED data 2 area (special data area related to the symbol 2 display LED), game LED data 3 area (data area related to the variable rate status LED, time saving status notification LED), game LED data 4 area (data area related to the round display LED, firing position notification LED), etc. Data from one of the areas is set in the H register.

Next, in step S4492, the main CPU 4201 sets the dynamic lighting common data stored in the A register to the L register.

Next, the main CPU 4201 sets the value of the HL register in the output port 11 and the output port 12 in step S4493.

[Game status information update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the game status information update process will be explained. This process is a process called in the game return process (step S4013 in FIG. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201. In addition, this process includes a special symbol game determination process (not shown, but the first A special symbol game end process (not shown; however, the special symbol game end process of FIG. 31 described in the first pachinko game machine) is called from a process similar to the special symbol game determination process in FIG. 30 described in the pachinko game machine. Processing similar to ) is also called. Note that FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming state information update process.

First, in step S4511, the main CPU 4201 performs a gaming state specification parameter setting process, and in step S4512, the address located in the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203 and where the production variation number counter value is stored is registered. (for example, the HL register).

Next, in step S4513, the main CPU 4201 distributes (1 byte) data in the area indicated by the address stored in the HL register by the specified bit position, and sets the respective values in the H register and the L register. . Further, the upper bit of each register is set to "0", and the value of the HL register is set as a 2-byte command.

This process processes a 1-byte value for a command. For example, if you specify bit position ``6'' for data of a 1-byte bit string ``11001001'', the 6th bit will be stored in the H register. As a result of dividing the boundaries, the most significant bit, the 7th bit "1", is extracted, and data "00000001" with all the upper bits set to "0" is set, and the L register is filled with data starting from the 0th bit. After the 6th bit "1001001" is extracted, data "01001001" with the upper bit (7th bit) set to "0" is set.

Such processing in step S4513 is executed by one process (one instruction).

Next, in step S4514, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the HL register in the parameter area for displaying the number of performance fluctuations as a 2-byte command, and in step S4515, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the HL register as a 2-byte command, and in step S4515, sets the contents of the HL register as a 2-byte command. Set counter value.

Next, in step S4516, the main CPU 4201 doubles the value of the HL register, thereby shifting all the values of the H and L registers to the left by 1 bit, and then shifts only the L register to the right by 1 bit. This makes the value of the HL register a 2-byte command.

For example, if the value of the HL register is the bit string "0000100111001001", doubling it will result in "0001001110010010". Here, the H register has a bit string "00010011", and the L register has a bit string "10010010". Then, when the L register is shifted to the right by one bit, the bit string becomes "01001001". As a result, the value of the HL register becomes the bit string "0001001101001001".

Next, in step S4517, the main CPU 4201 sets the value of the HL register in the parameter area for displaying the number of probability fluctuations arranged in the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 4203. If the upper 8 bits (H register generated in step S4516) and lower 8 bits (L register generated in step S4516) of the parameter area for displaying the number of variable state fluctuations are respectively defined as a management table of a predetermined command. , In the program that acquired the table, for example, acquire the bit string "00010011" of the H register and the bit string "01001001" of the L register, remove the first "0" from the value of the L register, and then Connecting the registers and filling their upper bits with "0" results in the original HL register bit string "0000100111001001".

[Production control command sending process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the production control command transmission process will be described. This process is executed as a setting change confirmation process under the control of the main CPU 4201 (step S4183 in FIG. 122). Note that FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the production control command transmission process. In addition, the production control command transmission process is called from various programs, and in that case, the address of the table according to the purpose is set, but when executed from the setting change confirmation process, for example, the setting in the HL register is set. The address of the operation command management data table is set.

First, the main CPU 4201 saves the value of the interrupt permission register 2 to a register (for example, the parity/overflow flag of the flag register F) in step S4531. As mentioned above, the value of the interrupt permission register 2 becomes "0" when an interrupt disabling instruction is issued, and the information before that is lost, so this value is saved at this timing.

Next, the main CPU 4201 issues an interrupt disabling instruction in step S4532. As a result, if interrupts are not prohibited at the start of the production control command transmission process, maskable interrupts are prohibited from this interrupt prohibition command until an interrupt permission command is issued in step S4541, which will be described later. Next, in step S4533, the main CPU 4201 saves the data of the register (flag register F) that stores the value of the interrupt permission register 2 in the stack.

Next, in step S4534, the main CPU 4201 refers to the HL register and sets the data (command type code in the first byte) at the address stored in the HL register (for example, in the A register). Also, at this time, the address stored in the HL register is incremented by "1".

Next, in step S4535, the main CPU 4201 checks the bit position of the transmission FIFO trigger level flag in the STU2 (asynchronous serial communication) command status register, and determines whether the transmission FIFO trigger level is 128 bytes or more.

Since the transmission FIFO trigger level is limited to less than 128 bytes, if it is determined that the transmission FIFO trigger level is 128 bytes or more (YES in step S4535), the process proceeds to step S4539 to end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transmit FIFO trigger level is less than 128 bytes (NO in step S4535), in step S4536, the command type set in the A register is determined for the STU2 (asynchronous serial communication) data register. Outputs code (or command parameter work area).

Next, in step S4537, the main CPU 4201 sets (in the A register, for example) the data at the address stored in the HL register (command parameter work area included in the command management data table). Also, after this set, the address stored in the HL register is incremented by "1".

Next, in step S4538, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the 1-byte data set in the A register in step S4537 is an end code. If it is determined that the data in the A register is an end code (YES in step S4538), the command transmission process has ended, and the process advances to step S4539. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the A register is not an end code (YES in step S4538), the process advances to step S4535 and repeats the processes from step S4535 to step S4538 in order to transmit the next command.

In step S4539, the main CPU 4201 restores the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of interrupt permission register 2, which was saved in the stack in step S4533.

Next, in step S4540, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value of the interrupt permission register 2 is "0" or not. It is determined that the interrupt was disabled before the interrupt disable instruction was executed, and the process is terminated without executing the interrupt enable instruction.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the interrupt permission register 2 is "1" (NO in step S4540), it is determined that the interrupt was enabled before the interrupt disable instruction was executed in the process, In step S4541, an interrupt permission instruction is executed and the process ends.

Through this processing of the production control command transmission process, the interrupt permission register 1 and the interrupt permission register 2 are set to "0" by the interrupt prohibition instruction in step S4532, and the interrupt permission register 1 and the interrupt permission register 2 are set to "0" by the interrupt permission instruction in step S4541. Both are "1", but if the interrupt permission register 2 is "0" at the time of calling the data storage process (that is, if interrupts are disabled at the time of calling the data storage process), step S4541 It is not executed, and the interrupt permission register 2 remains at "0".

The mechanism for managing the interrupt disabled state of data storage processing is similar to the data storage processing described with reference to FIG. 121, and the same effects as the data storage processing can be obtained with this processing as well. can.

Furthermore, in the production control command transmission process of FIG. 138, due to the above-described configuration, there is no need to prepare a ring buffer for transmitting production control commands, and for this purpose, processing for managing the ring buffer (for example, There is no need to perform processing for managing writing and reading from the ring buffer. This allows the size of the program to be significantly reduced.

Further, when securing a ring buffer in the main RAM 4203 or the like depending on the model, it is possible to eliminate the process of adjusting the size of the ring buffer.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, these configurations and processes are merely illustrative, and the technical idea of the present invention can be realized with various other configurations and methods. I can do it. In addition, although the technical idea of the present application is mainly applied to pachinko gaming machines in the above, it can also be applied to pachislot machines and the enclosed gaming machine described as the second embodiment. .

[5. First embodiment of fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, a fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fourth pachinko game machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine like the third pachinko game machine. It is a pachinko game machine. The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine differ from the third pachinko game machine in the basic specifications of playability, and accordingly, the various components arranged in the game area are different. The configuration is partially different.

Note that the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, do not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel; This is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

First, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described, and then the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Hereinafter, when describing the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and the configuration and the second embodiment will be explained. A detailed explanation of the process will be omitted.

<First embodiment of fourth pachinko gaming machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 139, a game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Like the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 3010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 3100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 139, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a first passage gate 3126A and a second pass gate 3126A. The configuration and arrangement of the passage gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the normal electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). ing. The first passage gate 3126A is equipped with a first passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 140 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A.

(Second passing gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145, which will be described later, in the right side area 107, and is arranged so that only game balls hit to the right can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is equipped with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 140 described later) that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery and a variable display of the normal symbols are performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, a prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be activated when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A, 3126B, and the state may be shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

This also applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko game machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko game machine described above.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 3120 is located in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A (that is, directly below the first passage gate 3126A), and is at a distance of approximately one game ball from the first passage gate 3126A. are placed close to each other with a distance between them. Furthermore, the first starting port 3120 is arranged in such a way that it is difficult for game balls to enter the game ball due to a game nail or the like, except for game balls that have passed through the first passage gate 3126A.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the first special symbol, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) are paid out. Become.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A is set to be the distance of approximately one game ball, but it may be the distance of approximately 1 to 2 game balls. Originally, the shorter the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A, the better; however, in order to make the functions of the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A independent, It is desirable to leave a distance of at least one game ball between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A.

In this way, by arranging the first starting port 3120 directly below and close to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. The start time of variable display of normal symbols triggered by the passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, and the start of the variable display of special symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120. Adjustment can be made with the timing (variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

In addition, by arranging the first starting port 3120 in such a way that it is difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passage gate 3126A to enter, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, but the variable display of the special symbol. Variable display of special symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate 3120, and normal display triggered by the passage of a game ball into the first passage gate 3126A. It can be operated as a set with variable display of symbols.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 3140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can enter (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter).

When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the second special symbol, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Become.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 includes a winning hole where a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory unit 3145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the object 3146, and is arranged in the right side area 107. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned winning a prize opening is set as the 2nd starting opening 3140, and the above-mentioned switch is set as the 2nd starting opening switch 3141.

The ordinary electric accessory 3146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 3147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 140 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 3147. The ordinary electric accessory 3146, that is, the shutter 3147 for ordinary electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general electricity shutter 3147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed in front of the entrance of the second starting port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 3140. It consists of When the general electricity shutter 3147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance equal to or longer than the diameter of the game ball to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140. The plate-shaped entering ball guiding portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and directs the received game ball to the first ball. 2 to the starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the general power shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball and prevents the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140. The plate-shaped ball entering guiding part that prevents the ball from entering is buried in the surface of the game panel 3100 and allows the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107 to flow downward without receiving it. Note that instead of the general power shutter 3147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a large winning hole 3131, a large winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 140 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the large winning hole 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. It is an integrated unit. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged below in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 3131 is arranged in the right side area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to arrange a grand prize opening into which a game ball hit to the left can enter, or to arrange a grand prize opening into which a game ball can enter at the upper part of the center accessory 115. You may also do so.

The big winning hole 3131 is a winning hole that is opened so that up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. be. When a game ball enters this big prize opening 3131, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The big winning opening 3131 shifts from the closed state to the open state through the first route when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived, and the special symbol determination process. The V attacker 3152 is opened by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result is "accessory object opening hit", and the game ball that enters the opened V attacker 3152 enters the V prize opening in the V attacker 3152. This is the second route when you win a prize.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 that operates the special electric shutter 3134 (see FIG. 140 described later). The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, has an open state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131, and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the big prize opening 3131 opens, accepts the game ball flowing down to the right area 107, and sends the received game ball to the big prize opening 3131. Induce. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the big winning hole 3131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 3131.

(V prize winning device)
The V prize winning device 3150 is provided on the downstream side of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right side area 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 3151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter into the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 3151, and this V attacker 3152. A V attacker solenoid 3154 that is activated to open and close the opening/closing winning opening 3151, a V attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning opening 3151, and a A V winning opening 3155 through which the entered game ball can pass, a V winning opening switch 3156 that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the V winning opening 3155, and a game entering the inside of the V winning device 3150 from the opening/closing winning opening 3151. A loss port 3157 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning port 3155 can pass through, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155 by operating the V shutter 3158. It is equipped with a V-shutter solenoid 3159. Note that the V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The V attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and it moves the V attacker 3152 forward to create a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening/closing prize opening 3151. , is configured to be able to move the V attacker 3152 backward and enter the game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151 or to easily shift to the open state.

The opening/closing winning hole 3151 is a winning hole that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 when a "accessory object is released", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter per opening. It becomes. When a game ball enters this opening/closing prize opening 3151, the value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The V winning hole 3155 becomes an opportunity to be controlled into a jackpot game state via the second route described above, on the condition that a game ball passes within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 3152 opens it. It is a prize opening.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155 is the first round, and the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 is set as the first round. Afterward (second round and onwards), a round game is executed in which the big prize opening 3131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued, even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 3155 (from the second round onward), A round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from a closed state to an open state may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 3157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 3155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 3157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the losing port 3157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 3155, the game ends without being controlled to a jackpot gaming state. becomes.

The V-shutter 3158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 3155 by the operation of a V-shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 140 described later), and a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 3155. It operates between an open mode that allows (or facilitates) passage of the ball.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 140 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 140, like the first pachinko game machine, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the game according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine includes a general electric solenoid 3148, a special electric solenoid 3135, a V attacker solenoid 3154, a V shutter solenoid 3159, a first starting port switch 3121, a second The configurations of the starting port switch 3141, first passing gate switch 3127A, second passing gate switch 3127B, big winning port count switch 3132, V attacker count switch 3153, and V winning port switch 3156 are partially different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Furthermore, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine does not execute probability change control, the probability change notification display section 167 in the first pachinko game machine is not provided. Furthermore, as will be described later, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. A reservation display section 162 for normal symbols, a reservation display section 165 for a first special symbol, and a reservation display section 166 for a second special symbol are also not provided.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 3147. When the normal power solenoid 3148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 3147 is moved forward to open the second starting port 3140, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 3147 is moved backward and the second starting port 3140 is closed.

(Special electric solenoid)
The special electric solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates a special electric shutter 3134 consisting of an opening/closing door. When the special electric solenoid 3135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it causes the special electric shutter 3134 to fall forward and the big prize opening 3131 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize it (OFF). ), the special electric shutter 3134 is inverted backward, and the big prize opening 3131 is closed.

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The V-attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-attacker 3152. When the V attacker solenoid 3154 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the V attacker 3152 is moved backward and the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energizing ( If it is OFF), the V attacker 3152 is advanced forward to close the opening/closing prize opening 3151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 3158. When the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the V-shutter 3158 is moved backward and the V-winning port 3155 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 3158 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 3155. In this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is activated 200 msec after the opening/closing winning port 3151 is opened to open the V winning port 3155. In other words, the V winning hole 3155 becomes open 200 msec after the opening/closing winning hole 3151 is opened.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 3121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120. When the first starting port switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the first special symbol, and transfers the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the first special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the first special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of predetermined prize balls (for example, 3 game balls). .

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 3141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140. When the second starting port switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the second special symbol, and transfers the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the second special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). .

(1st passage gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first passage gate switch 3127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbol to the normal symbol hit determination process. Ordinarily, the variable display process of the symbols is performed.

(Second passage gate switch)
The second passage gate switch 3127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B. When the second passage gate switch 3127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbol to the normal symbol hit determination process. Ordinarily, the variable display process of the symbols is performed.

Note that when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A, and when the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the second passage gate switch 3127B. This means that the same normal symbol hit determination process is performed regardless of the difference. Furthermore, even if passage of the game ball to the passage gates 3126A, 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "passage gate switches 3127A, 3127B" as appropriate), the prize The ball is not ejected.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 3132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131. When the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process for game balls (gaming balls).

(V attacker count switch)
The V attacker count switch 3153 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151. When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the open/close winning slot 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls). The processing may be instructed to the payout/emission control circuit 400. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 3152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 3154 and the opening-closing prize opening 3151 is closed, even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing prize opening 3151 has not elapsed. will be done.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 3156 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155. When the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 3152 is released, the main CPU 201 controls the transition to the jackpot game state. It turns out. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155 is detected by the V winning hole switch 3156, the prize ball is not paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 141 to 151. Note that the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, there are prepared a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed. It is possible to proceed with the game in the state or time-saving game state. In addition, in the first embodiment of this fourth pachinko gaming machine, probability change control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, probability change flag is set to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. may be executable.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as will be described in detail later, the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the number of consecutive jackpots is When a predetermined limiter number of times is reached, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the gaming state to which the game state shifts after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode for left-handed hitting and right-handed hitting changes as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode.

[5-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 141 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 3120, such as "jackpot", "accessory release hit", or " The range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined for "Time-saving hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("Jackpot determination value data", "Accessories release hit determination value data", "Time-saving hit determination value data") ) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 3140, a random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" or "accessory opening hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "accessories release hit determination value data") is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 141, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a “big hit,” “accessory release hit,” or “time-saving hit.” Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the process is determined to be a "big hit" or "accessory object release hit."

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. Further, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, it may be configured such that "accessory object release hit" is not determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "time-saving win" be determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, other requirements can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "loss", then the first special symbol It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination made in the second special symbol hit determination process is more advantageous than the determination made in the hit determination process. Further, when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time saving hit" may be determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "accessory object release hit" be determined when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, other requirements can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening a role object may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. It is better to make it . In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that, for example, the time-saving winning probability be a common probability for all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the winning rate of the V winning device 3150 can be changed by changing the opening time of the V attacker 3152 for each set value. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. In other words, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 3155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 3152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving is continued. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 142 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and the second starting hole 3140 and the aforementioned judgment value data. This table is referred to when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command".

The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 142, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3. In this case, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, and the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" is selected as the symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selection symbol command is determined according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , "z6" < "z5" < "z4".

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected symbol ``z7'' is selected as the command, and ``zA3'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 "z8" is selected as the command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if the hit determination value data for the second special symbol is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 , selects "z9" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (FIG. 12(A) described in the first pachinko game machine). ) A special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to (see ) is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 140) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 have a display mode for time-saving hit, a display mode for jackpot, and a display mode for accessory release hit based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Alternatively, the display mode of a loss is derived. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 143 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 143 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 143(a) is an example of a hit type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is not activated (limiter function not activated), and FIG. 143(b) is an example of the hit type determination table when the limiter function is activated (limiter function is not activated). This is an example of a hit type determination table that is referred to when the function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 143, the hit type determination table includes, for the selected symbol command, the opening mode when the accessory is released, the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (the time saving flag and the number of time saving times). ), the opening mode per opening of the accessory, and the number of limiters at the time of the first hit are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and, based on the selected symbol command, determines the opening mode when the accessory is released, the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and time saving number), Determine the release mode and limiter number of times each accessory is released.

The "opening mode when the accessory is released" indicates the opening mode of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 (opening mode of the V winning device 3150) that is opened when the "accessory is released". The "first opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is opened for a short time (in this embodiment, for example, 200 msec), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the V winning hole 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening/closing winning hole 3151 is opened, so the opening/closing winning hole 3151 opens in the first opening mode, and the game ball Even if the ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155, and from this point of view, the opening mode is disadvantageous for the player. Furthermore, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is open for a long time (for example, 18,000 msec), which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is opened in the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening/closing prize opening 3151, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning opening 3155, and from this point of view, the game is This is an advantageous opening mode for people.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 short, and the "second opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long, but the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long. The opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is made approximately the same in the "opening mode" and the "second opening mode", and the V shutter 3158 is easier to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" ( It may be configured such that by opening the V winning hole 3155, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning hole 3155.

"Aspect of jackpot game state" indicates the opening mode of the jackpot opening 3131 that is opened at the time of "jackpot", and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds of jackpot. In addition to the number of jackpot rounds, the opening time per round and the jackpot openings to be opened may be determined.

"Subsequent gaming state mode" indicates the gaming state mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and means the setting of the "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times." In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "limiter number of times" indicates the limiter number of times set when there is a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, or C time-saving gaming state). The limiter number is subtracted each time the state shifts to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and when the limiter number = 0, the limiter function is activated and the winning type is determined as shown in FIG. 143(b). The table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z4 to z6" corresponding to "accessory object release hit", the main CPU 201 selects "accessory object release hit". When the "first opening mode" which is disadvantageous for the player is determined as the "winning opening mode", and the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to the "accessory object opening" is determined as the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, , the "second opening mode" which is advantageous for the player is determined as the "opening mode for opening the accessory".

In this embodiment, as described above, in the second special symbol hit determination process, either "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" is determined. Then, when a "accessory object opening hit" is determined as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball is placed in the opening/closing prize opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the prize opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, even if a "accessory object release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the "first release mode" that is disadvantageous for the player is determined, and the jackpot from the second route is It is difficult to shift to a gaming state. Therefore, the opening of the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated as substantially the same as a loss. Incidentally, a hit in which an accessory is released triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated in the same way as a loss, but will be referred to in switching the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "accessory object release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the "first Although the configuration is such that only the "opening mode" is determined, it may be configured such that a "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player is determined. When configured in this way, it is desirable that the setting is such that the "second opening mode" which is advantageous to the player is more difficult to select than the "first opening mode" which is disadvantageous to the player. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 143(a), when the selected symbol command is "z1 to z3" corresponding to "jackpot" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 turns on the time saving flag. It is decided to set the time saving number to 100 times. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number to 5 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number of times to 3 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number of times to 3 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. .

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the number of rounds and the limiter number are set differently depending on the selected symbol command. Thereby, it is possible to vary the profits given to the player depending on the type of jackpot (symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag. The user decides to set the time saving number to 1.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit", compared to the "jackpot" as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a time-saving gaming state of an extremely short period is determined. That will happen.

The winning type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 143(b) is different from the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 143(a). The setting of "number of times" is different, but the setting of "opening mode when accessory object is released" and "mode of jackpot game state" are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 143(b), since the limiter function is activated, the "limiter number of times" is naturally not set.

As shown in FIG. 143(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the jackpot game state is controlled. Therefore, the time saving flag and the number of time saving times are set as in FIG. 143(a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "big hit" or "accessory release hit", any selected symbol command However, as for the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time saving flag is set to OFF and the number of time saving times is not set. That is, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state shifts to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
144 to 147 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 144 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 145 is a C time-saving game in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the state. Further, FIG. 146 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 144 to 147 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for reach determination, the random value for performance selection, and the special symbol The variation pattern of the symbol is associated with the variable display time of the special symbol. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 144 to 147 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 144 to 147 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the result of the determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection.

Furthermore, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 3120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 3140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

The jackpot type reach and jackpot type normal reach shown in the "Remarks" column of Figures 144 to 147 indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). This is a reach production. The chance variation is a variation performance that indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 144(1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 144(2) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the normal gaming state. It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table T2 of , and a variation pattern table T3 of special symbols shown in FIG. 144(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one, two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 144 (1) is created after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the initial value fluctuation pattern table), and the "permission release per" After the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol hit determination process is performed after the limiter function is activated and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs. This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1), which will be described later.

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 144 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” for “accessory object opening” is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 144 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z6” for “accessory object release hit”. .

In the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 144 (1) to (3), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the special symbol is variable. Variation pattern "01H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation A") where the display time is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and variation pattern "02H" where the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation B") is selected.

The details will be described later using FIG. 168, but in the normal game state, chance variation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. The chance variation B, in which the starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening mode and is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is that the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. It tends to be in an open state.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 144(1) to (3), the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. The chance variation B in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state is configured such that it is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table T1 < special symbol variation pattern table T2 < special symbol variation pattern table T3. has been done.

Therefore, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player, but as described above in FIG. In addition, since the selection symbol command is configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is the most selected. It is structured so that it is difficult to

(Change pattern table of special symbols in C time-saving game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 145 (1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a symbol variation pattern table C2 and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 145(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the C time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one, or may be two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 145 (1) is used for the first special symbol after the transition from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state, or in response to the selection symbol command “z4” for “accessory release hit”. This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the symbols are stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 145 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z5” for “accessory object release hit”. .

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 145 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z6” for “accessory object release hit”. .

Also in the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 145(1) to (3), the 1. If the result of the hit judgment process for the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol "chance variation A" and the variable display time of the special symbol is the normal symbol. Any variation pattern with "chance variation B" that is shorter than the variable display time of is selected.

Although the details will be described later using FIG. 169, even in the time saving game state C, the chance fluctuation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state and is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the second starting port 3140 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. tends to be an advantageous opening mode.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the C time-saving game state shown in FIGS. 145 (1) to (3), the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. In the time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode. Chance fluctuation B is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3. It is configured.

Therefore, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player, but as described above in FIG. As shown in the figure, the selection symbol command is configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is the most It is structured so that it is difficult to select.

The variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 144 and the variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of special symbols in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 145 are based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Although they are common, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "accessory opening hit". That is, in the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 144, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object release hit", the main CPU 201 selects the second special symbol. The variation pattern is determined to be a long variation effect with an extremely long variation time of, for example, 500,000 msec or 600,000 msec. This means that in the normal gaming state, basically no game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 3140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous person even if the player wins a prize, but it is not always necessary to do this.

Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 144 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 145 are common. may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in A time-saving gaming state or B time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 146 is a variation pattern table selected when being controlled to the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state.

The special symbol variation pattern table A is configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short, except when the result of the hit determination process is a "jackpot". As a result, in the A time-saving gaming state or the B-time saving gaming state, the game ball can be transferred to the jackpot gaming state via the second route by passing through the V winning opening 3155 in the opening/closing winning opening 3151 in a short time. I can do it.

(Special symbol variation pattern table after limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the second starting port 3140 is opened in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state. The configuration is such that the chance variation B that is likely to be selected is always selected.

When chance variation B is selected in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game state will easily shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball will enter the second starting port 3140. By entering the ball into the starting hole 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to a jackpot game state.

For this reason, even if the consecutive games in the time-saving gaming state end due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit judgment process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state becomes "time-saving winning", it will not be possible to play again. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 is configured such that chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". It may be configured such that chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

In addition, after the limiter function is activated and after the transition to the normal gaming state and after the first hit determination process of the first special symbol is completed, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1) From this, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 144(1) is selected.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 147(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1), and is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1). , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 is configured such that when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. It is not limited to the first time, but for example, in a case where a special symbol reservation function is provided, it may be a variable pattern table that is selected based on the hit determination processing of the special symbol up to the fourth time, or it may be selected based on the hit determination process of the special symbol up to the fourth time, or up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times. The variable pattern table may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the special symbol is determined based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. It is composed of a plurality of chance variation group A, in which the variable display time of the symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, and a plurality of chance variation B groups, in which the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols. Good too.

[5-3-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 148 is an example of the normal symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a ``normal symbol hit'' or ``loss'' by lottery based on the above.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 148 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the normal symbol hit determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”). They are defined in correspondence.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 148 and determines normal symbol hit determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for winning determination is between 0 and 89, and stores the winning/losing determination value data. It is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 89, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 89, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to “normal "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, among the normal gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A time-saving gaming state (the selection shown in FIG. 148) rate (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the normal gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[5-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 149 is an example of the normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data mentioned above and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A, 3126B. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "Normal symbol hit selection symbol command". "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

In the normal symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 149, the normal symbol hit judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits are associated. It is stipulated that Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 149 and determines the normal symbol hit select symbol command based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 149, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29. If the random number of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and when the random number of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99. If either is the case, "fz3" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits", the win/loss judgment value data (normal symbol hit judgment processing (result) and the symbol random value of the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 148) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. Thereafter, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 149) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[5-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 150 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table determines the normal electric role as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits which is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Reference is made when determining the opening pattern of object 3146.

In the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 150, the game state, the normal symbol per selection symbol command, and the opening pattern as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 150 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 based on the gaming state and the normal symbol winning select symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 regardless of which normal symbol winning selection symbol command is the normal symbol winning selection command. The opening pattern is determined to have a first opening time of 200 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, the first opening time may be varied depending on the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. For example, in the normal game state, if the selection symbol command for normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 200 msec for the first opening time, and the normal symbol hit pattern command is "fz1". When the time selection symbol command is "fz2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 250 msec for the first opening time, and when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3", it is normal The opening pattern that is the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146 may be set to 300 msec for the first opening time, and the second opening time may be set to 0 for any normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second release time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2500 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second release time of 2500 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 3000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. It is determined that the first opening time is 2500 msec, there is no wait time, and there is no second opening. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the same normal symbol hit selection symbol command (for example, "fz1") is used, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to differ depending on the gaming state. ing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous mode is the disadvantageous mode. The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 3140 when the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is released.

If the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the most advantageous among the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. The degree becomes an advantageous aspect.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is " Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the case of "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 151 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 151 includes the gaming state, the random value for selecting a normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time. Note that the random number value for normal symbol performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and changes the normal symbol variation based on the gaming state and the random value for normal symbol production selection extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. The pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol are determined. When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols to the sub CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 151, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be 10,000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, the time required until the normal electric accessory 3146 is released is the shortest among the game states.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols is fixed to 10000 msec in the normal game state and the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 144 to 146, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", as described above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is The longer chance fluctuation A has a variable display time of 13000 msec, which is longer than 10000 msec, and the chance fluctuation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, has a variable display time of 9000 msec, which is shorter than 10000 msec. Although details will be described later using FIGS. 168 and 169, from the relationship between the game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol, the normal electric role as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 The object 3146 opening pattern (the opening mode of the second starting port 3140) will change.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are performed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process are partially different, other processes are the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the switch input detection process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine include the same processes as the processes performed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (FIG. 42) , FIG. 164), etc.) In the following, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 152, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S3001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S3001.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S3002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S3002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display (NO determination in S3003), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol does not start the variable display (NO determination in S3004), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is to start variable display (YES in S3004), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display (YES in S3003), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 153. After executing the process of S3003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S3001 to S3005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is determined as YES), in the special symbol management process, when S3003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S3004 is determined as YES, the processing target is the second special symbol. Special symbols are to be processed. Moreover, when the control state number is not 0 (when S3002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 153 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S3011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S3011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 152).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S3011), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S3012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S3013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3014.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S3014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3015.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S3015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S3016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S3017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S3018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S3019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S3020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 164.

After completing the processing of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 152). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S3021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 141) is referred to and the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area is used to determine the special symbol hit. be exposed. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a role release hit, or a time saving hit. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a role release hit. After executing the process in S3022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "design designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 142) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area. be done. After executing the process in S3023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, the winning type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S3023) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 143). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 that was opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and accessory openings, but there may be only one type of jackpot and/or accessory opening. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of types of time saving. After executing the process in S3024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, a special symbol variation pattern table in any one of FIGS. 144 to 147 is determined according to the gaming state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referred to, and the type of special symbol, the hit of the special symbol, etc. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. After executing the process in S3025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 144 to 147) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025). After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process in S3026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols starts, the ceiling counter update process that adds 1 to the ceiling counter and the time saving number counter A time saving counter update process of subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to the specified number of times, and the time saving identification identifies the B time saving gaming state. Set the number = 2 and control the transition to the B time saving gaming state. Further, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled.

In addition, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a 1-type and 2-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time-saving management performed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine The processing also differs from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first embodiment of the pachinko game machine No. 4, the game is not controlled to a high-precision game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. The process of S192 is performed, but in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the process is different in that the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191 because the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state as described above. . In the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38), the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled by the ceiling flag that is turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (see S208) without performing the process of S202. will be held. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S3027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S3014 in FIG. 153) is performed. That will happen. After executing the process in S3028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the remaining number of time savings, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process in S3029, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3030.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S3030, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

Note that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S3030) and the transmission reservation process of the special symbol production start command (S3031)) during the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do it inside.

[5-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3025 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 154) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the limiter activation flag is on (S3025-1). In S3025-1, if the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter activation flag is on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2, and if it determines that the limiter activation flag is not on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter activation flag" is a flag that counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and is activated when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number. , is turned on in the limiter number update process (see FIG. 158), which will be described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=0. In S3025-2, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-3, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-5. Move.

Unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (increases by 1) when the variable display of special symbols starts, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is entered. This is a counter for controlling the In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is performed, the ceiling counter is not incremented yet in the "time saving management process" of S3027, so the ceiling counter = 0. The case means the time when the first variable display of the special symbol starts in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag and moves the process to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 147(1) as a specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. In addition, as shown in the modification, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 147(2) may be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small hit symbol switching information to be described later is set to 0, and from the next time onward, the special symbol change pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG. Preparations are made so that the variation pattern table T1 is selected.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 determines which of the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state is being controlled the current gaming state. Then, information on the gaming status (time saving identification number) is acquired.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 displays information on the symbol that was previously displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 when it was determined that the first special symbol was a "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process. (hereinafter referred to as "small hit symbol switching information").

"Small winning symbol switching information" is updated by overwriting one piece of information in the overwriting process of the small winning symbol switching information (see S3062 in FIG. 157), which will be described later. When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a "accessory release hit" and the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, the small hit symbol switching information = 0 is stored and the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, small hit symbol switching information = 1 is stored, and the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is stopped. When it is stopped and displayed, small hit symbol switching information = 2 will be stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one fluctuation pattern table from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the acquired gaming state information and small winning symbol switching information.

Specifically, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0, as shown in FIG. 144 (1). The special symbol variation pattern table T1 is determined, and when the small winning symbol switching information according to the selection symbol command “z5” is 1, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 144 (2) is determined and selected. When the small hit symbol switching information corresponding to the symbol command “z6” is 2, a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 144(3) is determined.

In addition, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, if the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0, the special The symbol variation pattern table C1 is determined, and when the small hit symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command "z5" is 1, the special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 145 (2) is determined, and the selected symbol If the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the command "z6" is 2, a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 145(3) is determined.

In addition, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 146 without depending on the small hit symbol switching information. do.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of special symbol and win/loss information (big hit, accessory release hit, and time-saving hit) as a result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 acquires the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table determined in S3025-4 or S3025-7 above, and determines the type of special symbol, win/loss information, random number for reach determination, and effect selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value.

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

If it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S3041), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S3041), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S3015 in FIG. 153) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S3042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S3043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S3051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S3051), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S3052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S3052), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S3052), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time-saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of times updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the first route to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as will be described later, when transitioning from the second route to the jackpot gaming state, the limiter number of times will be updated in the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 161) (see S3096). Further, details of the limiter number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. After executing the process in S3053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game control start setting processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 140) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S3054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3055.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S3054, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 3131 (S3056), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3057), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S3058), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S3059), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S3060). Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 153) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S3061, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a hit in the opening of the accessory, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time-saving hit or a loss (if the determination is NO in S3061), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the special symbol has been released (YES in S3061), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S3062. Move.

In S3062, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected symbol command when it is determined that the first special symbol is a "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process, and when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects a small hit symbol. The switching information is overwritten with "0" and updated, and when the selected symbol command is "z5", the small hit symbol switching information is overwritten and updated with "1", and when the selected symbol command is "z6", the small winning symbol is Overwrite the switching information with "2" and update. Note that when it is determined as a "accessory opening hit" as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the process moves to S3063 without overwriting the small hit symbol switching information. After executing the process in S3062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory opening. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per accessory item opening, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 140) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S3063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 3150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 3150 that is set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S3064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), and processing to set a gaming state specification parameter (S3067). ), and a transmission reservation process (S3068) of a start display command per accessory release. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 153) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S3069 that it is not time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that it is time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 143, determines the mode of the gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) based on the selection symbol command "z7" for time saving, and executes the determined game. Sets state aspect data. Specifically, the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to 1, and the time saving identification number for identifying the C time saving gaming state is set to 3. It should be noted that the time saving identification number is set to 1 when shifting to the A time saving gaming state, and is set to 2 when shifting to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hit type determination table includes two hit type determination tables depending on whether the limiter function is activated or not, but regarding the time saving hit, the limiter function is disabled regardless of whether the limiter function is activated. Refer to the hit type determination table during operation. After executing the process in S3070, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157) will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-1). In S3053-1, if it is determined that the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-2, and if it is determined that it is not in the A-time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-5. Move.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count and updates it. After executing the process in S3053-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the limiter count=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter number of times is 0, it moves the process to S3053-4, and if it is determined that the limiter number of times is not 0, it ends the limiter number of times updating process and executes the process in a special manner. The process returns to the symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157).

Here, if it is determined that the limiter number of times = 0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state has reached the limiter number of times.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter activation flag. After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the limiter number of times at the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 143(a), determines the limiter number based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined limiter number. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S3072). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S3072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Also, various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area are cleared. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S3074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 157).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S3081), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S3081), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. (maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is disadvantageous for the player, an opening pattern is set in which the opening is performed only once for a maximum of 200 msec, and when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, Set the opening pattern to open only once for a maximum of 1800 msec. Note that the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, the opening may be performed twice for a maximum of 900 msec each time, or the first opening may be performed, for example. It may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time, for example, for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns.

In addition, in S3082, the main CPU 201 determines the operating mode of the V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 3155, and sets the determined operating mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, an operating mode is set in which the V winning port 3155 is opened 200 msec after the V winning device 3150 is opened. After executing the process in S3082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 3155 is performed. After executing the process in S3083, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S3017 in FIG. 153) will be held. After executing the process in S3084, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 161, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S3091), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S3091), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 when the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 140), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3092), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3093.

On the other hand, in S3092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S3092), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (ie, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 160) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S3093), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 153).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 3150 has elapsed (YES in S3093), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3094.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 3150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 3151). After executing the process in S3094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 3155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 3156). In addition, the above specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 3150. For example, the above specified time may be within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 3152 starts. can do.

If it is determined in S3095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3096.

In S3096, the main CPU 201, as in S3053 above, subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state. After executing the process in S3096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the V winning game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 140) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 143), so the player cannot perform the jackpot game control process. As in the case where the game is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S3097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S3097, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 3152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S3095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S3098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 3152 operates) (S3100), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), a process of setting parameters for specifying the gaming state (S3103), and a process of reserving transmission of the V hit start display command (S3104). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), after this special symbol game determination process is completed, the big winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 153) is performed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined in S3095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. After executing the process of S3105, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

[5-4-11. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S3111), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S3111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S3112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S3113), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114), the jackpot end process (see S3020 in FIG. 153) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. It happens. After executing the process in S3114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S3116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S3113), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S3117, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of the big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the big winning hole 3131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot and the jackpot game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot 3131 is set as the jackpot to be opened. The V winning game control is started when the V win is detected, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived, and the V winning is detected. In this case, the V winning device 3150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 3151) may be selected instead of the big winning hole 3131 as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S3118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3119.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 3131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major winning hole 3131, the number of prize balls when winning to the grand prize opening 3131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 3131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases in which the big prize opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the big prize opening 3131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process in S3119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 3131 or the V winning device 3150 is generated. After executing the process in S3120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121), after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the big winning opening opening control process (see S3019 in FIG. 153) will be held. After executing the process in S3121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

[5-4-12. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S3131), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 153). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S3131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 140) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning hole counter counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 3131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3132), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3133.

On the other hand, in S3132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number (YES in S3132), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S3119 in FIG. 162) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 3131 has not elapsed (NO in S3133), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 153).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 3131 has elapsed (YES in S3133), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 3131. After executing the process in S3134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3135), after the completion of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process (S3018 in FIG. 153) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S3135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S3141), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 152). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S3141), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags are set and the values of various counters (for example, a ceiling counter, a round counter, a big winning slot prize counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process in S3142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the jackpot ends. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the ON/OFF state of the limiter activation flag, and if the limiter activation flag is OFF, determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. If the activation flag is on, a hit type determination table shown in FIG. 143(b) is determined. Then, referring to the determined winning type determination table, the mode of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) is determined, and data of the determined gaming state mode is set. Specifically, when the limiter activation flag is off, the time saving flag is set to 1 (time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to 100, and the A time saving game state is identified. The time saving identification number = 1 is also set. Further, when the limiter activation flag is on, the time saving flag is set to 0 (the time saving flag is turned off), and the time saving number counter is set to 0 and the time saving identification number is set to 0. After executing the process of S3143, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 153), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 152). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 165, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 165 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 165 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S3291).

If it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (if NO in S3291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21). Move.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S3291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S3292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processing from S3293 onwards based on the control state number read in the processing at S3292.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S3293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3294.

In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", and ``Symbol variation pattern determination processing'' and ``normal pattern time saving management processing'' are performed, and then a process for setting the control state number of the normal pattern to ``1'' is performed. In addition, if the random number value etc. for hit determination of the normal symbol is not extracted (when various random number values are not stored in the normal symbol determination area), the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination process, etc., and it waits for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for determination, win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "loss") is determined.

In the normal symbol determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol stored in the determination area.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined normal symbol, and causes the normal symbol display section 161 to start variable display of the normal symbol.

In the normal pattern time saving management process in the normal pattern variable display start process, it is determined whether the time saving number counter is 1 or more, and if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter. As a result of the subtraction, if the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed. In addition, if the time saving number counter is not 1 or more, the current regular time saving management process is ended, and even if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, the result of subtraction from the time saving number counter is 0. If not, the current time-saving management process for ordinary figures is ended without clearing the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C, 1 is subtracted from the time saving counter at the start of variable display of normal symbols. However, only when the C time-saving gaming state is in effect, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving number counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and in the case of the A-time saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state, the normal symbol is displayed. The configuration may be such that 1 is not subtracted from the time saving counter at the start of the variable display.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process for normal symbols. This process of S3294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is changed to " 2”. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S3295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3296.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the regular symbol (for example, a hit or loss of the regular symbol). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to " 3”. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 in the normal symbol game determination process, with reference to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S3296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3297.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S3297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end processing, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in the above S3293 to S3296 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

As mentioned above, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed in the gaming state when setting the variable display time of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is opened) in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S3293. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is determined based on the gaming state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variable display of the normal symbol ends) in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295 above. It will be decided. Therefore, if the gaming state is changed while the variable display of normal symbols is being performed, the normal symbol will be A hit determination and an opening pattern for the normal electric accessory 146 are determined.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that it is equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until a start condition is met. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection processing and the ball passing detection processing are partially different. In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a big winning opening count switch 3132, a V attacker count switch 3153, and a V winning opening switch 3156 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Some of these processes have been added because of the current situation.

First, the main CPU 201 executes the first starting opening winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process in S3381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3382.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 3121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first starting port 3120. set, and it is determined whether or not there is a free area in one first special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one first special symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a first special Various random values such as the random value of the symbol, the random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random value for production selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the various extracted random values are combined into one first Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one first special symbol determination area, the first starting opening winning detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes the second starting opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process in S3382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3383.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 3141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 3140. set, and it is determined whether or not there is a free area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one second special symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a second special symbol start information, Various random numbers such as the random number of the symbol, the random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, the random number for production selection of the second special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the various extracted random numbers are combined into one second Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one second special symbol determination area, the second starting opening winning detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, only one first special symbol determination area and one second special symbol determination area are provided. First, it does not include a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area (4) for holding special symbol starting information until a starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S3383). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S3383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S3384). In the big winning hole passage detection process, when the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects that the game ball enters the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information according to the big winning hole 3131, and A grand prize opening counter for counting the winning number of game balls into the grand prize opening 3131 is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S3384, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V attacker passage detection processing (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, when the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 3132, the main CPU 201 generates payout information according to the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning hole 3151). At the same time, 1 is added to the V attacker winning counter for counting the number of winning game balls entered into the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning opening 3151) and updated. After executing the process in S3385, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3386.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing (S3386). In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155 is detected by the V winning hole switch 3156, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passage flag. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155, the payout information is not set. After executing the process in S3386, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area is detected. Determine whether there is free space. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one normal symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for hit determination for a normal symbol, a random symbol number for a normal symbol, and a normal symbol as starting information for a normal symbol). , etc.), and the extracted various random values are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passage detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the normal symbol, only one normal symbol determination area is provided, and the normal symbol is used to hold the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied. It does not have a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4).

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 167 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the regular game mode in the A time-saving game state and the B-time saving game state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode for left-handed hitting and right-handed hitting changes as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, and in the A time saving gaming state and B time saving gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second starting port 3140. The transition of the game state is triggered by the entry of the game ball. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the gaming state is shifted when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 or a gaming ball enters the second starting port 3140. . In the following, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the first starting port 3120 in the normal gaming state, and that the game ball has entered the second starting port 3140 in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state. An explanation will be provided as a premise.

As shown in FIG. 167, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, it is determined to be a "big hit," "accessory release win," or "time saving win" (see FIG. 141).

In the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and the "accessory object release hit" is determined, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. When the number does not pass through the V winning hole 3155, the game state is not changed and the normal game state is maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and it is determined that a "accessory object has been released", the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning port 3151) is not suitable for the player. Since the opening mode is disadvantageous, it is extremely difficult to shift to a jackpot gaming state. For this reason, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "accessory object release hit" is determined, the normal game state is maintained without substantially changing the game state. .

After shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the A time-saving gaming state.

The A time saving gaming state is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "Completion of 100 time saving times (see FIG. 143)" and "Transition to the jackpot gaming state" as the end condition of the A time saving gaming state. There is.

Here, "100 time saving times completed" means "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of special symbols and the variable display of normal symbols is counted 100 times".

In addition, in this embodiment, "the number of time saving times 100 times" is defined as "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times"; The variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times. Alternatively, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times. It is also possible to use only ``koto''.

Then, when the time-saving gaming state A shifts to the jackpot gaming state (consecutive games during the time-saving gaming state A), the limiter number is counted, and if the limiter number has been reached, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state and the limiter number is reached. If not, the game returns to the A time-saving game state.

Further, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "time-saving hit" is determined, the state shifts to the C-time-saving game state.

The C time saving gaming state is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "One time saving number completed (see FIG. 143)" and "Transition to the jackpot gaming state" as the end condition of the C time saving gaming state. There is.

Here, "one time saving number completed" means that either of the following conditions is met: "The variable display of the special symbol is counted once" or "The variable display of the normal symbol is counted once." It means that. In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of time saving times" is counted when a special symbol or a normal symbol is variablely displayed, and if the state has not been shifted to the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed or when the first variable display of normal symbols is performed, the C time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state.

Further, after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state C to the jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the time-saving gaming state A after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, in the normal game state, when the number of variable display times of special symbols (for example, ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), the normal game state shifts to the B time-saving game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, either of the following conditions is satisfied as the end condition of the B-time saving gaming state: "End of variable display of special symbols a specified number of times (for example, 1212 times)" and "Transition to jackpot gaming state" That's what it's set up to be.

In the B time-saving game state, when "the end of the variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times" is established, the B time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. Further, after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state B to the jackpot gaming state, the game will shift to the time-saving gaming state A after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, three time-saving game states are provided as the time-saving game state: A time-saving game state, B-time saving game state, and C-time saving game state, but A time-saving game state is not provided, and A time-saving game state is not provided. It may be configured with two time-saving game states: a game state and a time-saving game state C.

[5-6. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". By adjusting, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric accessory 3146 can be made different. An example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 will be explained below.

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

168 and 169 show the fluctuation and stoppage of the normal symbol display section 161, the fluctuation and stoppage of the first special symbol display section 163, the operation and stoppage of the normal electric solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric accessory 3146, The transition of the gaming state is illustrated in the upper and lower parts.

Furthermore, FIGS. 168 and 169 are based on the assumption that the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol win" and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving win." In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state is fixed at 10000 msec (10s) as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 151.

In addition, in FIGS. 168 and 169, as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. ”, and an advantageous opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long is shown as “long opening”. Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed in response to the "time saving win" is shown as "stop with C time saving symbol".

FIG. 168(a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 144, and determines that the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 168(a), since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG. As an opening mode of the accessory 3146, "short opening" is performed in the normal game state.

FIG. 168(b) shows that in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 144, and determines that the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 168(b), since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed.

Here, FIG. 168(b) shows the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit in the C time saving game state, and one normal electric accessory The operation (one opening) of the solenoid 3148 is illustrated. In addition, when "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command in the C time-saving game state, the normal power solenoid 3148 is activated twice with a wait time in between. This also applies to FIG. 169(b), which will be described later.

FIG. 169(a) shows that in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state C in FIG. This is an example of a time chart when a long "chance fluctuation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 169(a), when a special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (end of the number of time savings once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (after the variation of the normal symbols ends), the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction. Shifting to gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG. As an opening mode of the accessory 3146, "short opening" is performed in the normal game state.

FIG. 169(b) shows that in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state C in FIG. This is an example of a time chart when a short "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), when the special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (the number of time savings ends once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the variation of the normal symbols ends). Shifting to gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``one time-saving number completed'', is defined as ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once''. In addition to ``, the condition is that ``the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once''. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 169(a), when transitioning to the C time-saving game state after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game ball is hit right as an unintended game, and the game ball is Even if it passes through the second passage gate 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is an unintended "long open". can be prevented from occurring.

In this way, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol hit determination process is determined based on the gaming state when the normal symbol is variablely displayed (when the normal symbol starts changing). Therefore, the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 will be determined based on the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends). Changing or maintaining the game state while the display is being displayed gives new interest, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", The game state can be changed and maintained while the normal symbols are intentionally displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is variable for the normal symbol. A variation pattern table for a plurality of special symbols with different selection rates, ``Chance Variation A'' which is longer than the display time, and ``Chance Variation B'', where the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is provided. Since the special symbol variation pattern table is switched according to the changing conditions, the switching of the special symbol variation pattern table can also be interesting, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the predetermined change condition is based on the information of the symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 (small hit symbol switching information) when it is determined that it is a "accessory release hit". Since the special symbol fluctuation pattern table can be switched, it is possible to make the player more interested in the "accessory opening hit" and the small winning symbol switching information, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. It is easy to shift to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route. In particular, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is configured to be able to substantially shift to a jackpot game state. For this reason, as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, the value of the "long opening" that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is made more interesting. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a limiter function is provided, but even if the consecutive winnings in the A time-saving gaming state are ended due to the activation of the limiter function and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the normal gaming state after the activation of the limiter function In the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 147 is selected. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 147 is a specific variation pattern table in which the advantageous chance variation B in which "long release" is likely to be performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is likely to be selected in the normal game state. For this reason, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", it is possible to transition to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again. , it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``end of the number of time-savings once'', is ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once'', and the variable display of the special symbol is Since it is configured so that the game state can be changed by subtracting the number of time-savings when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be "time-saving hit" is increased. Also, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the time-saving gaming state is always controlled, and it is possible to maintain the gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``one time-saving number completed'', includes ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once'', and ``the normal symbol display is counted once''. "The variable display is counted once" is also a condition, so even if you unintentionally hit the ball to the right as a game in the C time-saving game state and let the game ball pass through the second passing gate 3126B, the normal symbol will not be counted. At the start of the variable display, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state, and it is possible to prevent an unintended "long release" from being performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, since the second passage gate 3126B is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right side area 107, it happens that in the C time-saving game state, the second passage gate 3126B Even if the game ball flows down the right side area 107 and passes through the second passage gate 3126B, the game ball can be prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric accessory 3146.

Moreover, in this embodiment, by arranging the first starting port 3120 directly below and close to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. When the game ball passes through the first passage gate 3126A, the normal symbols start to fluctuate, and the special symbols start to fluctuate when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. Adjustment can be made with the timing (variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

[6. Second embodiment of fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passing gates) and the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols are provided for a predetermined number of times. They differ in that they are equipped with a hold function that holds them until the end of the game, and in the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state.

Hereinafter, in describing the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers will be used for the same components as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. A detailed explanation of its configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 170, a game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Similarly to the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine, this game board unit 4010 is also arranged so that the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) is located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2). (see).

FIG. 170 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 4100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 170, the game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The difference is that the second passage gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not provided in the right side area 107.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the reason why the second passage gate 3126B is not provided in the right side area 107 is that it is equipped with a hold function that holds the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. In order to prevent the game ball hit to the right from passing through the second passing gate 3126B and storing the number of reservations for only the normal symbols, making it impossible to adjust the variable display time of the normal symbols and special symbols. It is.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 170, the LED unit 160 is equipped with a normal symbol reservation display section 162, a first special symbol reservation display section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166. But there are differences.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
The control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is also different from the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (FIG. 140). The configuration of the second passage gate switch 3127B that detects passage is deleted, and the normal symbol reservation display section 162, the first special symbol reservation display section 165, and the second special symbol reservation display section 166 in the first pachinko game machine are removed. Since only the above configuration has been added, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since the main RAM 203 has a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the main RAM 203 stores the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. A normal symbol starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4) for storing up to a predetermined number of special symbol starting information, and a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area for storing starting information of special symbols up to a predetermined number It has a special symbol start storage area (4), and a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the special symbol is mainly changed in order to synchronize the variation time between the special symbol and the normal symbol. The variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for normal symbols, etc. are different.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, either of the following conditions is satisfied: "100 time-savings completed" and "transition to jackpot gaming state" as conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state A. However, the "time saving number 100 times end" is set to "the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" without counting the variable display of the normal symbol. Similarly, as the end condition for the C time-saving gaming state, it is set that either of the conditions "end of the number of time-saving games 1" and "transition to the jackpot gaming state" is satisfied, but "the number of time-saving games 1" is satisfied. ``end of round'' is set to ``the variable display of the special symbol is performed once'' without counting the variable display of the normal symbol.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a special symbol hit determination table (FIG. 141), a special symbol determination table (FIG. 142), and a hit type determination table of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Since it is common to the table (FIG. 143), normal symbol hit determination table (FIG. 148), normal symbol determination table (FIG. 149), and normal symbol hit type determination table (FIG. 150), detailed explanation will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 171 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 172 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the special symbol variation pattern table in the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state is the same as the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so a description thereof will be omitted. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for performance selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display of the special symbol. It is associated with time.

The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table according to the gaming state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and production selection. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the random number value. After determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Remarks" column of FIGS. 171 and 172, "Special electric accessory opening end time" and "Special figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "special electric accessory opening end time" means the opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 that is opened when the "accessory object is released". As explained in the hit type determination table of FIG. 143, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "accessory object opening hit", in this embodiment, the opening/closing prize is determined as the disadvantageous "first opening mode". Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric accessory opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the special symbol management process shown in FIG. 153 with respect to the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it means the time from when the special symbol variable display start process (special symbol control state number=0) of FIG. 154 is performed until the special symbol game end process of FIG. 159 is performed.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state and C time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table TC1 shown in FIG. 171 is created after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared, or when the first symbol is changed according to the selected symbol command "z4" for "accessory object opening". This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 171 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” of “accessory object release hit” is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 171 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" of "accessory object opening" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 171, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec). ) Any of the above fluctuation patterns "Chance fluctuation A" of the fluctuation pattern "01H" and "Chance fluctuation B" of the fluctuation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. is selected.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as well as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time saving game state, due to the relationship with the variable display time of the normal symbols, , Chance variation A is such that the second starting port 3140 is likely to be opened in an unfavorable opening mode due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146, and short chance variation B is an opening mode in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146. It's easy to become.

Also, the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 171 (1) to (3) have a selection rate of chance variation A and chance variation B, similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. are different. Chance fluctuation B in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state and C time-saving gaming state is that special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3. They are arranged in order to make them easier to select.

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, but as described above, as a selection symbol command, , "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "special symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 171 (1) to (3) is Focusing on it, it has the following characteristics.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance fluctuation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process is such that its "special symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec". A variable display time for special symbols is set.

In addition, the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined that it is a "accessory object opening hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process is such that the "special symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec". A variable display time for special symbols is set.

In other words, the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process, and the "Accessory release" pattern in the first special symbol hit determination process. The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol variation pattern (0BH) when it is determined to be a "hit" is the same time.

Here, the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process, and the "accessory object" in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the fourth pachinko game machine, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when it is determined that the game is an "open hit" is a special symbol fluctuation pattern that corresponds to "substantially a special symbol loss." The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the special symbol variation patterns (01H, 0BH) that substantially correspond to a special symbol loss all have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Special symbol variation pattern table after limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 172 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 172(1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the second starting port 3140 is opened in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state. The configuration is such that the chance variation B that is likely to be selected is always selected.

Similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when chance variation B is selected in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball enters the second starting port 3140. It becomes easier to ball. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game state will easily shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball will enter the second starting port 3140. By entering the ball into the starting hole 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to a jackpot game state.

For this reason, even if the consecutive games in the time-saving gaming state end due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit judgment process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state becomes "time-saving winning", it will not be possible to play again. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 is configured such that chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". It may be configured such that chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 147(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 147(1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured such that when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol variation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are variation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. Not limited to the first time, but for example, when special symbol start information is reserved up to a specific number of reservations (for example, 4 pieces) in response to the special symbol reservation function, a hit determination process for special symbols up to a specific number of reservations is performed. The variable pattern table may be selected based on the above, or may be the variable pattern table selected based on the hit determination process of special symbols up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the special symbol is determined based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. It may also be configured with a plurality of chance variation group A, in which the variable display time of the symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and a plurality of chance variation group B, in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. good.

[6-3-2. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 173 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 173 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 173 includes the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. The random number value for performance selection, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for normal symbol performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and extracts the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and the information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. The variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined based on the random number value for selecting the normal symbol presentation. When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 173, "gaming state at the end of variable display", "normal electric accessory release end time", and "normal figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "gaming state at the end of the variable display" means the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may be different from the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts. Note that the "gaming state at the end of variable display" also includes A time-saving gaming state and B time-saving gaming state, but since they have little to do with the gameplay of this embodiment, their explanations are omitted in the notes. There is.

"Normal electric accessory opening end time" means the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (first opening time + wait time + second opening time). In the normal game state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 150, only the first opening time of 200 msec is the normal electric accessory. This is the opening end time. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 150, the first release time and wait time One of 2500 msec, 4600 msec, and 5600 msec, which is the sum of the second opening time, is the normal electric accessory opening end time.

"Normal symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 165 with respect to the start information of one normal symbol.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if we pay attention to the "normal symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 173, it has the following features. ing.

When the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process is The variable display time of the normal symbols is set so that the "common symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" when the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the common symbols is the normal gaming state.

In addition, when the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the normal symbols (02H ), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" regardless of the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, if the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal gaming state, in the normal symbol hit determination process. Even if it is determined that it is a "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 will be a disadvantageous opening mode, as shown in FIG. 150. Furthermore, the fact that the winning determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss" also causes the normal electric accessory 3146 to not operate, which is naturally disadvantageous for the player.

For this reason, if the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, even though it is determined as a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process, the variable display of the normal symbols ends. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the gaming state at the time becomes the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the normal symbol hit determination process. is a variation pattern of normal symbols that corresponds to "substantially losing normal symbols" which is disadvantageous to the player. The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all the normal symbol variation patterns corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

Comparing the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 with the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Special symbol processing end time (13,500 msec) (see Figures 171 and 172) and "Normal symbol processing end time (13,500 msec)" (see Figure 173) in the variation pattern of normal symbols that corresponds to "substantially normal symbol loss" ) are configured so that they are the same time.

As a result, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, even if a hold function is provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the shift in the variable display start time of normal symbols and special symbols is suppressed. can do.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are different from those in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Other processing is the same, except that the process for performing a hold function that holds the starting information of special symbols up to a predetermined number, and that the time saving number is not subtracted when variable display of normal symbols is performed. The process for performing this hold function is the same as in the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but the differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special pattern variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 154) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), the special symbol The special symbol hit determination process is performed using the starting information (random value for special symbol jackpot determination, etc.) stored in the symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After performing the "starting information shift process", a special symbol hit determination process (S3022) will be performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", if the special symbol variable display start process targets the first special symbol, the first special symbol start information shift process is performed in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203. The stored starting information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area ( 1) - Shift to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used instead of the first special symbol starting memory area (1) to the first special symbol starting memory area (4). The starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are shifted in the same way as when the first special symbol is targeted for processing.

(Normal pattern control processing)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 166) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area. If there is, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed. However, in the normal symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, after performing the normal symbol start information shift process, similar to the above-mentioned "special symbol start information shift process", If various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, a normal symbol hit determination process will be performed. In addition, in the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 165), the "normal symbol time saving management process" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection processing)
The switch input detection process (see FIG. 166) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine includes first starting opening winning detection processing (S3381), second starting opening winning detection processing (S3382), and ball passing detection processing (S3387). ), processing is performed to store the extracted start information in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Starting memory area (1) to second special symbol starting memory area (4), first special symbol starting memory area (1) to first special symbol starting memory area (4), normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal The starting information is stored while referring to the free space in the symbol starting storage area (4). This is similar to the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 174 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 174 shows the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display section 161, the operation and stop of the normal electric solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric accessory 3146, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display section 163, and the game state. The transitions are illustrated above and below.

In addition, in FIG. 174, as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 150, the disadvantageous opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state where the opening time is short (200 msec) is referred to as "short opening". , and an advantageous opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed in response to the "time saving win" is illustrated as "stop with the C time saving symbol", and the opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 that is opened when the "accessories opening win" is achieved. is shown as "accessory opening end time".

In the period (A) of FIG. 174, the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are shown, and when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol display section 161 displays the "normal symbol". The variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "loss" has started, and the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to "accessory object opening hit" has started in the first special symbol display section 163. Further, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state has shifted from the C time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to the "accessory object release hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponds to the "special electric The ``special symbol processing end time'' added to the ``accessory release end time'' is set to the same time as the ``ordinary symbol processing end time'' for the normal symbol.

Therefore, at the time of (a) in Figure 174, since the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol and the "regular symbol processing end time" for the normal symbol are set to the same time, the second time The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed are approximately synchronized.

In the period (A) of FIG. 174, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal symbol display section 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit", and the first special symbol In the display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving win" has started.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended. Afterwards, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol in FIG. As shown in the per-symbol type determination table, "short release" in the normal game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol The "normal pattern processing end time" which is the "normal electric accessory release end time" which is the "short release" time added to the "normal electric accessory release end time" is set to the same time as the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol. .

Therefore, even at the time (c) in Figure 174, since the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol and the "regular symbol processing end time" for the normal symbol are set to the same time, the third time The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed are approximately synchronized.

At the time (c) in FIG. 174, when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, in the normal symbol display section 161, the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" is started, and the first special In the symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving win" has started. Further, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state has shifted from the C time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In the period (d) of Fig. 174, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance fluctuation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol win". , the variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

At the time (e) in FIG. 174, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the gaming state changes to the C time-saving gaming state. As shown in the type determination table per normal symbol in FIG. 150, "long release" in the C time-saving game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

As described above, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, a special symbol corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" is added. The "special symbol processing end time" in the variation pattern (01H, 0BH) and the "normal symbol processing end time" in the variation pattern of the normal symbol that corresponds to "substantially normal symbol loss" are now the same time. (Figs. 171 to 173). Thereby, even if a holding function is provided to hold the starting information of the normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is possible to suppress the difference in the timing of fluctuations between the normal symbols and the special symbols until a jackpot is achieved.

<Modified example of the fourth pachinko game machine>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the game balls flowing down from the left side area 106 directly pass through the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 while colliding with the game nails. / Constructed to allow ball entry. However, in order to pass/enter the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120, the game ball must enter a sorting device (for example, a so-called croon), and be directed to a specific outlet by the sorting device. It may be configured such that only the distributed game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115 is used as a sorting device, and the game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be sorted to a plurality of outlet ports (not shown) by the sorting device, and the game balls are distributed to a specific outlet port. It may be configured such that only the distributed game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. In particular, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the holding function is not provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the first passing gate per unit time Even if the rate of balls passing through/entering the first starting port 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is reduced, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by using the distribution device.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbol is variablely displayed, the variable display time of the special symbol is predetermined in the special symbol variation pattern table. However, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. You may. For example, when "chance fluctuation B" of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol is calculated which is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol - 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of chance variation B. In addition, if "chance fluctuation A" of the special symbol disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol is calculated which is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of chance variation A. Particularly, when a hold function is provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is effective because the end timing of the variable display time of the normal symbols and special symbols can be adjusted in real time.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 3126B is provided in the right side area 107 of the game board unit 3010, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide the second passage gate 3126B in the right side area 107 of the game board unit 3010.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbols are displayed variably, the time saving number is subtracted to make it possible to shift from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. However, similar to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, after the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the number of time-saving games can be subtracted and the time-saving game state can be changed to the normal game state. good.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the number of consecutive jackpots is Although the present invention is provided with a "limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the jackpot game state is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined limiter number of times is reached, the limiter function may not be provided.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, the "accessory object release hit" is determined. However, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, it may be configured such that "accessory object release hit" is not determined.

(others)
In the fourth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the fourth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[7. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called Type 1 pachinko game machine, but whereas the first pachinko game machine had a gameplay mainly based on a "special symbol game" using special symbols, the fifth pachinko game machine The pachinko game machine of No. 5 is different in that the gameplay is mainly a "normal symbol game" using normal symbols, and accordingly, the configurations of various members are partially different.

Further, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not have two types of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. Not yet. For this reason, there is no concept of "priority variable machine," "sequential variable machine," or "simultaneous variable machine," as described above. Note that, similarly to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, two types of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) may be provided.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted. .

[7-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 175, the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 5010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 175 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100, various members are arranged on the game panel 5100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 5100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 175, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine mainly has a first passage port 5126A, a second passage port 5126B, The configuration and arrangement of the starting port 5140, the normal electric accessory unit 5145, and the special electric accessory unit 5130 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage port 5126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). ing. Further, the first passage port 5126A is provided with a first passage switch 5127A (see FIG. 176 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. Then, the game balls that have passed through the first passage port 5126A flow down the channel on the back side of the game panel 5100 and are discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Second passage gate)
The second passage opening 5126B is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 5145, which will be described later, in the right side area 107, and is arranged so that only game balls hit to the right can pass through. Further, the second passage port 5126B is provided with a second passage switch 5127B (see FIG. 176 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the second passage port 5126B. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B flows down the right side area 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 5145.

When a game ball passes through the first passing port 5126A or the second passing port 5126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing port 5126A, 5126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery or a variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when a game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage port switch 5127A detects a game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three When the game ball (game ball) is paid out and the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), the prize ball is not paid out. There is.
Note that when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out, or when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A, the prize balls are paid out. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

(starting port)
The starting port 5140 is arranged in the right side area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). Further, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B is arranged below the starting port 5140 so that the ball can enter the starting port 5140. Further, the starting port 5140 is provided with a starting port switch 5141 that detects entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of special symbols, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 5145 is a unit body that integrates a starting port 5140, a starting port switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140, and a normal electric accessory 5146. 107.

The ordinary electric accessory 5146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 5147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 5148 (see FIG. 176 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 5147. The normal electric accessory 5146, that is, the shutter 5147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the starting port 5140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the starting port 5140. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the starting port 5140. There is. When the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to a non-contact area of the game ball, which is a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball, and reaches the starting port 5140. The plate-like ball guide section moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to the game ball contact point located at a distance equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and flows down to the right area 107. The game ball is received and the received game ball is guided to the starting port 5140. On the other hand, when the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part moves to the game ball contact area and prevents the game ball from entering the starting port 5140, preventing the board-shaped ball from entering. The guide part is buried in the game panel 5100, does not receive the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and does not prevent the game balls from flowing down. Note that instead of the general power shutter 5147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be used.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 5130 is a unit body that integrates the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole count switch 5132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131, and the special electric accessory 5133. . The special electric accessory unit 5130 is arranged below in the right side area 107. Note that the special electric accessory unit 5130 may be arranged below the first passage port 5126A or above the center accessory 115.

The big winning hole 5131 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. The big winning hole 5131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" or "small win" is derived. The big prize opening 5131 allows up to a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter when the game is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, and when a game ball enters the big winning opening 5131, , prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to the big winning hole 5131 will be paid out.

The special electric accessory 5133 includes a protruding plate-type special electric shutter 5134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 5135 that operates the special electric shutter 5134 (see FIG. 176 described later). The special electric accessory 5133, that is, the special electric shutter 5134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 5131. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof portion that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the outlet 178 side. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof is buried in the game panel 5100, the big prize opening 5131 is opened, and the game balls flowing down the right area 107 and rolling onto the roof. Game balls can enter the ball. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electric shutter 5134 has a gently sloped plate-shaped roof, and when the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the game ball can roll on the roof. Because of this configuration, even if the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning opening 5131 is opened for an extremely short time, one or more game balls rolling on the roof will be thrown into the big winning opening. 5131 to allow the game ball to enter the big prize opening 5131.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 176 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 176, like the first pachinko game machine, the fifth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the fifth pachinko game machine includes a special symbol display section 5160, a special symbol reservation display section 5161, a normal electric solenoid 5148, a special electric solenoid 5135, a starting opening switch 5141, a first passage opening switch 5127A, The configurations of the second passage port switch 5127B and the big winning port count switch 5132 are partially different. Further, since the fifth pachinko game machine does not execute probability change control, the probability change notification display section 167 in the first pachinko game machine is not provided. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the special symbol display section 5160 is composed of an LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h, which correspond to the special symbol display section 5160 of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5).

When the conditions for starting variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol starting conditions") are met, all or part of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h that constitute the special symbol display section 5160 are turned on or off alternately or A variable display of special symbols that repeatedly turns on and off begins. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived.

(Special design reservation display section)
When the special symbol start information, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is pending, the special symbol pending display section 5161 displays the number of pending special symbol variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol pending number"). ), and the LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol reservation display section 5161 is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b, which correspond to the first special symbol reservation display section 165 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. (see 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbol is on hold" means that the special symbol startup condition is satisfied after the passing of the game ball to the startup port 5140 is detected and the special symbol startup information is extracted. Refers to the state up to.

Similar to the first special symbol reservation display section 165 of the first pachinko game machine, the special symbol reservation display section 5161 displays the number of reservations for a variable display of special symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b. Display.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The normal electricity solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it moves the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the starting port 5140, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the normal power solenoid 5148, (If it is OFF), the normal power shutter 5147 is moved backward and the starting port 5140 is closed.

(Special electric solenoid)
The special electric solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special electric shutter 5134. When the special electric solenoid 5135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the special electric shutter 5134 is moved backward to open the big prize opening 5131, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized (ON), the special electric solenoid 5135 is turned OFF. ), the special electric shutter 5134 is moved forward to close the big prize opening 5131.

(starting port switch)
The starting port switch 5141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140. When the starting port switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, random value for performance selection, etc.), The payout/launch control circuit 400 uses the extracted special symbol starting information for special symbol hit determination processing, performs special symbol variable display processing, and performs payout processing for a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). You will be given instructions.

(1st passage switch)
The first passageway switch 5127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passageway 5126A. When the first passing port switch 5127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passing port 5126A, the main CPU 201 outputs normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, normal symbol performance) Random numbers for selection, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbols is used for the normal symbol hit determination processing, variable display processing of the normal symbols, and predetermined prize balls (for example, 3 game balls). This will instruct the payout/fire control circuit 400 to perform the payout process.

(Second passage port switch)
The second passage port switch 5127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B. When the second passing port switch 5127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passing port 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.) However, the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is used for the normal symbol hit determination process, and the normal symbol variable display process is performed. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B is detected by the second passage port switch 5127B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is not instructed to perform the process of paying out the prize ball.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 5132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131. When the big winning hole count switch 5132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131. (for example, 15 game balls) is instructed to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 175) is a device similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, but the display area of the display device 7 variably displays presentation identification symbols corresponding to the special symbols in the normal gaming state. The difference is that, instead of, in the normal game state, performance identification symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are variably displayed.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 177 to 184. Note that the fifth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, there are prepared a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode. Although the fifth pachinko game machine does not execute the B time saving gaming state, it may be possible to execute the B time saving gaming state.

[7-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 177 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the starting hole 5140, "big hit", "small hit", or "time-saving hit" is determined. The range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“jackpot judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data”, “time-saving winning judgment value data”) are defined in association with each other. ing. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 177, when a game ball enters the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process based on a special symbol hit determination process using a special symbol jackpot determination random value. The result is determined as a “big hit,” “small hit,” or “time-saving win.”

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and a "small win" is determined, and the state shifts to a small win game state, the game ball can enter the large winning hole 5131, and a predetermined number of It is possible to pay out game balls (for example, 150 balls). Further, even if a "time saving win" is determined, the game can be shifted to the C time saving game state and the game ball can be entered into the starting port 5140 again.
Therefore, if the game ball enters the starting port 5140, the game ball will be paid out in response to a "big hit" or "small hit", so in the normal gaming state, the starting port 5140 is opened. In this way, a game is played in which the goal is to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when a special symbol hit determination process is performed. In the case where a "loss" is determined, it is preferable to specify that a "small win" or "time saving win" is determined with a higher probability than a "loss".

In addition, when the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the small win probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the small hit probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the jackpot probability may be set at a low setting. The high setting may have a higher probability, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the small winning probability may be higher at a high setting than a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that, for example, the time-saving winning probability is a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 178 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 178 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" and " This table is referred to when selecting the "Symbol Designation Command".

The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of hit when the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is a hit, and the "design designation command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol that is determined according to the winning type. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 178, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 issues "z3" as the selection symbol command. , and select "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when short-time hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues "z5 ” and select “zA3” as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol, which is derived to the special symbol display section 5160 (see FIG. 176) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, in accordance with the selection symbol command. This is the table that will be used. In addition, the special symbol display section 5160 derives a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[7-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 179 is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 179 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 179, the winning type determination table includes the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, and the gaming state (time saving flag and time saving number) for the selected symbol command. are associated.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, and gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) based on the selection symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", the state transition of the big winning opening 5131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. For one round, when the opening time during which the grand prize opening 5131 is open has elapsed or when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening 5131, the grand prize opening 5131 is opened. to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends.

"Aspects of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening state of the jackpot opening 5131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, it indicates the number of rounds and the opening time per round in the jackpot gaming state. ing. The number of openings may be determined so that the grand prize opening 5131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round, or a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided and the grand prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, one round ends when 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 for one round, and every time 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, 15 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131. The game ball (prize ball) is set to be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 179, when the selected symbol command "z1" corresponding to "jackpot" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, 10 rounds are determined, and 10 rounds x 10 pieces x 15 prize balls = 1500 game balls can be paid out, and when the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds x 10 pieces x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the "small winning game state", the state transition of the big prize opening 5131 from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of opening times. For one small winning game state, when a predetermined number of openings ends or a prescribed number of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, One small winning game state ends.

"Small winning gaming state mode" indicates the opening state of the large winning opening 5131 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of openings and the opening time in the small winning gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of big winning holes may be provided and the big winning hole to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big winning opening 5131 for one small winning gaming state, one small winning gaming state ends and the gaming balls enter the big winning opening 5131. It is set so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out every time the ball is played. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 179, when the selected symbol command "z3, z4" corresponding to "small hit" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the number of openings is determined to be 10 or 8, 10×15 prize balls=150 game balls can be paid out.

Furthermore, the opening time for one round in the small winning gaming state (for example, 0.15 seconds) is set shorter than the opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 29 seconds), and It can be said that the big winning hole 5131 is opened in the "first opening mode" which is advantageous in this case, and the big winning hole 5131 is opened in the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. Furthermore, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small winning gaming state (for example, 150) is greater than the total number of gaming balls that can be paid out in one small winning gaming state (for example, 1500 or 600 balls). It can be said that the jackpot gaming state is an "advantageous special gaming state" and the small winning gaming state is a "disadvantageous special gaming state" than the jackpot gaming state.

"Game state mode" indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state or after the time saving hit, and indicates the settings of the "time saving flag" and the "number of time saving times." In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving gaming state is executed and the type of the time saving gaming state to be executed. The time saving flag = 0 indicates the normal gaming state, and the time saving flag = 1 indicates the A time saving gaming state. The time saving flag=3 indicates the C time saving gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the B time-saving game state is not executed, when the B time-saving game state is made executable, the time-saving flag=2 indicates the B time-saving game state.

Further, the "time saving number" is the number of times the special symbol hit determination process is performed in the time saving gaming state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed. This time saving number is subtracted when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and when the time saving number = 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIG. 179, when the selected symbol command is "z1, z2" corresponding to "jackpot" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sets "A" indicating the time-saving gaming state as a "time-saving flag". 1" is determined, and "10 times" is determined as the "time saving number".

As shown in FIG. 179, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets "3" as the "time-saving flag" indicating C time-saving gaming state. ” is determined, and “1 time” is determined as the “time saving number”.

As shown in FIG. 179, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 determines "1 time" as the "time-saving number". It is composed of

In this embodiment, when there is a jackpot, 10 times is determined as the time saving number, and when there is a time saving hit, the time saving number is determined to be 1. This is because the "jackpot" is determined as the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The probability of being determined is low and the situation is premium, so by shifting to the A time saving gaming state 10 times as the time saving number after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while being controlled to the A time saving gaming state 10 times. , it is configured so that it can shift to more small winning game states. That is, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time saving times, it is possible to shift from the time saving gaming state to the small winning gaming state, and to make it possible to pay out many game balls.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to "jackpot", the same as when the selected symbol command "z5" corresponds to "time-saving hit", " It may be configured such that "one time" is determined as "the number of time saving times".

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 180 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko game machine. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 180 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 180, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for performance selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variable display time. It is being Note that the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Further, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 180 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 180, and determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random value for effect selection. Determine. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 180 is referred to regardless of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (A-time-saving gaming state, C-time-saving gaming state). Depending on the situation, the referenced variation pattern table may be different.

After determining the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

The "rewind performance" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 180 means that the common "bonus time basic performance (special performance)" performed over multiple small win game states This is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that this will continue. The "rewind performance" and the "bonus time basic performance" will be described in detail later using FIG. 201. "Full rotation reach" is an effect that notifies you in advance that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. "Jackpot notification reach" is a production that suggests that the result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. Specifically, three decorative symbols consisting of the words "Invincible" are aligned. There will be a production of whether or not. "Short variation" is a short variation in the variable display time of special symbols, but while the shortening variation and small hit game state are being performed, in terms of production, "Bonus time basic production or Bonus time specialization" A special performance will be held.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 180, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display for performing "rewind effect" are shown. The time is configured to be determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display time for performing "full rotation reach" or "jackpot notification reach" are determined. It is configured to

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display time for performing "shortening variation" or "jackpot notification reach" are determined. It is configured to

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is likely to be determined, and the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is determined. The configuration is such that a short variable display time is determined by Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the special symbol, it is possible to shift the small winning game state for a plurality of times in a short time.

In addition, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the "reach for jackpot notification", when the A time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state is being executed, a performance corresponding to the lottery of the special symbol is performed. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the variation pattern of the special symbol for performing the "reach for jackpot notification" is determined. However, a "loss" is set as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the variation pattern of the special symbol to perform the "reach for jackpot notification" is set. It may also be configured such that it is determined.

[7-3-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 181 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination disturbance extracted when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery based on the numerical value.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 and determines win/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 97, and stores the win/loss determination value data. It is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 97 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time saving gaming state (selection rate shown in FIG. 181) is the highest among the normal gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. .

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[7-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 182 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A, 5126B. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the determining "normal symbol hit selection symbol command".

"Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182 corresponds to the normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is hit. It is specified and specified.

In addition, the "Reference" column in Figure 182 is the combined selection rate of the selection rate for normal symbol hit determination in the normal game state (see Figure 181) and the selection rate for the "Select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol". This is illustrated as a "normal symbol" which is determined to be a "normal symbol hit" in the normal gaming state, and which the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal power shutter 5147) opens advantageously in the normal gaming state as described later. This is for explaining the ``total selection rate in the normal gaming state'' when the winning selection symbol command fz1'' is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182, and determines the normal symbol win selection symbol command based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the win/loss determination value data of the normal symbol, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 162. ``fz1'' is selected as the normal symbol random number value from 163 to 65535, and ``fz2'' is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

As shown in the "Reference" column of FIG. 182, the selection rate of the normal symbol hit judgment value data in the normal gaming state is "98/100" (see FIG. 181), and the selection rate of the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is "98/100" (see FIG. 181). The selection rate of ``fz1'' is approximately ``1/402.06'', and the ``total selection rate in the normal gaming state'' is used to ultimately determine the ``selected symbol command fz1 when hitting a normal symbol'' in the normal gaming state. is set to approximately "1/410.3".

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when winning a normal symbol", the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning/losing judgment value data) is used regardless of the gaming state It is configured to be selected based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 181) and determines the normal symbol win determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 182) is referred to and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[7-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 183 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 183, the game state, the normal symbol win select symbol command, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 183 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 based on the gaming state and the normal symbol winning select symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 3000 msec. decide. Further, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 100 msec, no wait time, and no second opening time.

Therefore, even in the normal game state, if the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" is selected, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined, and the game ball to the starting port 5140 is It is now possible to enter the ball.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" is selected in the normal gaming state, an opening waiting time of a predetermined time (for example, 10000 msec) is set before the first opening is performed. It's okay. By setting this opening standby time, it is possible to secure time for executing a promotion effect (for example, a display displaying ``Aim to the right!'') that urges the player to enter the normal electric accessory 5146. I can do it. By executing this promotion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which a game ball is not entered into the normal electric accessory 5146 even though the selection symbol command "fz1" is selected when a normal symbol hits. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec and the wait time is 500 msec. , the second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the first opening time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 500 msec. The time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the same normal symbol hit selection symbol command (for example, "fz2") is used, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is configured to differ depending on the gaming state. ing.

In the case of the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined regardless of which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, and the opening pattern to the starting port 5140 is determined. Game balls can be entered.

In addition, even if the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" is selected in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5000 msec. ) may be set.

[7-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 184 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 184 is extracted when the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. The random number value for normal symbol performance selection, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated with each other. Further, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 184 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 184, and based on the gaming state, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect. Then, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "long release" shown in the "Select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" in FIG. 184 refers to an advantageous release pattern (see FIG. 183) in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is long (see FIG. 183). The form refers to the symbol selection command "fz1" when a normal symbol hits in the normal game state, and the symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2" when a normal symbol hits in the A time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state. In addition, "short release" refers to an unfavorable release pattern in which the release time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is short (see FIG. 183), and in this embodiment, the selection symbol command "fz2" is used when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state. , and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

"Normal reach" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 184 suggests that the normal symbol hit selection symbol command fz1, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal game state, may have been determined. It is a performance that Moreover, "super reach" is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the normal symbol hit selection symbol command fz1, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal game state, has been determined. Moreover, "special reach" is an effect that suggests that there is an extremely high possibility that the selection symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal gaming state, has been determined. That is, "normal reach", "super reach", and "special reach" are performances that suggest the possibility that "long open" has been decided in the normal gaming state, and it is possible for the game ball to enter the starting port 5140. It can be said that this is a performance that hints at what is to come.

Further, the "normal variation" is a normal variation in the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the "shortened variation" is a variation in the variable display time of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 184, in the normal gaming state, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data", and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1". When this is the case, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data" and the symbol command selected at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", "normal variation", "normal reach" ”, “Super Reach” or “Special Reach”, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the regular symbols are determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, if the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data is "normal symbol loss judgment value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" is performed. The variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

Further, in the case of the A time-saving game state or the time-saving game state C, the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing the "shortening variation" are configured to be determined.

In the case of the A time saving game state or the time saving game state C, a short variable display time is determined as the variable display time of the normal symbol, so that when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory 5146 can be activated quickly to increase the rate of game balls entering the starting port 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include a special symbol control process carried out in S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23); Although the normal symbol control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 185, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S5001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S5001.

In S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S5002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S5002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol does not start variable display (NO determination in S5003), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). return.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is to start variable display (YES in S5003), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

In S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 186. After executing the process of S5003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S5001 to S5004) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 185) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 186 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S5021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S5021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 185).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S5021), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5022.

In S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S5022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5023. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S5023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S5022.

In S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5024.

In S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S5024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 188. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5025.

In S5025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S5025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5026.

In S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S5026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5027.

In S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S5027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S5028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

After completing the processing of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 185). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004 if the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S5007 if it is called in S5006, and calls it in S5009. If it has been called, the process returns to S5010, and if it has been called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 187, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S5031), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 186). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S5031), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5033.

In S5033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. In this process, the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (2) to special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0). The starting information stored in is shifted to the special symbol starting storage area (1) to special symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S5033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination process is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 177) and using the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area (0). . In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a small hit, or a jackpot. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S5034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5035.

In S5035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 178) is referred to, and the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) is used to perform the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "design designation command". ” is determined. After executing the process in S5035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S5035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 179). In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of winnings, but there may be one type of jackpot, one type of small winning, and multiple types of time saving winnings. It's good to have different types. After executing the process in S5036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 180) is referred to, and the special symbol is selected based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random value for performance selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0). A variable pattern and a variable display time of special symbols are determined. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 180 is referred to regardless of the gaming state, but the variation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the gaming state. After executing the process in S5037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5038.

In S5038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol display section 5160. start. The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S5038, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs time saving termination management processing. In the fifth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the time saving number is subtracted "when the variable display of special symbols is started." In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter, and when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag is cleared and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled. After executing the process in S5039, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5040.

In S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 186) (see S5024) will be performed. After executing the process in S5040, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5041.

In S5041, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S5041, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5042.

In S5042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S5042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5043.

In S5043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol variation pattern command. The special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S5042) and the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation processing (S5043)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if NO in S5051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 186). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S5051), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5052.

In S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S5015 in FIG. 186) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S5052, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5053.

In S5053, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S5053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5054.

In S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S5071), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S5071), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5072.

In S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S5072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S5072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S5072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5078.

In S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S5073, if it is determined that there is no small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if NO in S5073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S5073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S5074 that it is not time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5074 that it is time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5075.

In S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an A time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time saving flag and determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is 1. If it is determined that it is not in the A time saving gaming state, the process moves to S5076 to perform the C time saving state setting process, and if it is determined that it is in the A time saving gaming state, the C time saving state setting process is not performed. The process then moves to S5077. Through this processing, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the determination of "time-saving win" can be made invalid.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs C time saving state setting processing. In this C time saving state setting process, with reference to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set the data regarding the gaming state. Specifically, the time saving flag indicating the C time saving game state is set to 3 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to 1. After executing the process in S5076, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077.

In S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, a signal is generated and updated via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 176) or the island computer (not shown). In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S5078, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the jackpot opening 5131 to be opened (S5080), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

In S5082, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 186) will be held.

In S5083, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing (S5083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter when there is a jackpot. In addition, when a small hit occurs, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter is not performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot start display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win start display command when it is a small win. The jackpot start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After executing the process of S5084, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S5071 to S5084) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 189) will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko game machine.

In S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S5092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5093.

In S5093, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S5094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 189).

[7-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S5101), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 186). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S5101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening opening/closing execution count counter value. The big winning opening opening/closing execution counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the small win game control process. This corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the process is opened. The counted value of the big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter (big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S5102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the grand prize opening opening/closing execution number counter value is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table of FIG. 179, the upper limit of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and the upper limit of the number of openings in the small winning gaming state is 8. times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of opening/closing operations of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S5103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5104.

In S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 186) is performed. (see S5028) will be performed. After executing the process in S5104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5105.

In S5105, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win end display command when it is a small win. The jackpot end display command or small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of opening/closing operations of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S5103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening/closing execution count counter value. After executing the process in S5107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5108.

In S5108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning hole 5131 is determined when the jackpot game control process is being executed, and the big winning hole 5131 is determined when the small winning game control process is being executed. After executing the process in S5108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 5131, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 5131, the maximum number of balls entering the grand prize opening 5131, the number of prize balls when entering the grand prize opening, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 5131 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening 5131 is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the big prize opening 5131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process in S5109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 29,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,500 msec or a maximum of 2,000 msec when executing the small win game control process. is set to The maximum number of balls entering the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to a maximum of 10 balls when executing the small win game control process, for example. The number of prize balls when the ball enters the big winning hole 5131 is set to, for example, 15 balls. However, the values set or set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning hole opening/closing control process to open the big winning hole 5131. After executing the process in S5110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5111.

In S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S5027 in FIG. 186) will be performed. After executing the process in S5111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5112.

In S5112, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S5112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5113.

In S5113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

[7-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S5121), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 186). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S5121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5122.

In S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of balls that have entered. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 5132 (see FIG. 176), which counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole, is the value of the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole. . It should be noted that the big winning hole winning counter value counted by the big winning hole counting switch 5132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S5122, if the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening 5131 is not the maximum winning number, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5123, and if the number of gaming balls that entered the grand prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of winning balls. If it is determined that the winning number is the winning number, the process moves to S5128-1.

In S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S5124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S5128-2. .

In S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 5131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S5109 in FIG. 191) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 5131 has not elapsed (NO in S5123), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 5131 has elapsed (YES in S5123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5124.

In S5124, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5125.

In S5125, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S5125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S5026 in FIG. 186) will be performed. After executing the process in S5125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5126.

In S5126, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S5126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5127.

In S5127, if the main CPU 201 is in the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, the transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

In S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5128-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-3.

In S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process, the jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 186) will be held. After executing the process in S5128-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-4.

In S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S5128-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

If it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S5131), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 185). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S5131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5132.

In S5132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state (big winning opening number counter value, big winning opening winning counter value, etc.), time saving hit flag, small winning flag, jackpot flag, symbol confirmed number counter Processing is performed to clear the values, etc. After executing the process in S5132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs A time saving state setting processing. In this A time saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set aspect data. Specifically, regardless of whether the selected symbol command for time saving is "z1" or "z2", the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to 1. Set 10. After executing the process in S5132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 190 is performed. After executing the process of S5134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 186).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 194, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 194 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S5300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the normal symbol waiting time is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5301.

In S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S5301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S5310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S5301.

In S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5320.

In S5320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S5320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". ”. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S5330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, an opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric accessory 5146 is set with reference to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. Determine the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time), and set the determined opening pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S5340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S5340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. When the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S5350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning termination process, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S5310 to S5340 above and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). .

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S5300 to S5350) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 194) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 195, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S5311).

If it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 194). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5312.

In S5312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S5312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5313.

In S5313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol miss”). After executing the process in S5313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5314.

In S5314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process in S5314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5315.

In S5315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. ), the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined based on the random number values for selecting the normal symbols stored in the memory. After executing the process in S5315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5316.

In S5316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S5316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5317.

In S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 194) is performed. (see S5320) will be performed. After executing the process in S5317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5318.

In S5318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[7-5. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 196, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S5500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5510.

Note that the above-described initialization process (S5500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S5510 to S5580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S5510, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 176). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 176) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5530.

In S5530, sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 176). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5550.

In S5550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 176). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5560.

In S5560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 176). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5570.

In S5570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 176). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[7-5-1. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 196) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, a performance pattern that defines the display performance to be displayed on the display device 7, the sound performance to be output from the speaker 32, etc. is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S5531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5535.

In S5535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5536.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 196).

[7-5-2. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 198, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5531 during the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 197) will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S5531-1 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-3.

In S5531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of determining a variation effect of the identification symbol for effect. This "fluctuation presentation of performance identification symbols" is a performance that variably displays the performance identification symbols in a predetermined variation manner as a performance that suggests that the "long open" of the normal electric accessory 5146 has been decided. . When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to long opening".

The "opening pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening" is, as mentioned above, the selection symbol command "fz1" when a normal symbol hits in the normal gaming state, the normal symbol in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state. These are the winning symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2".

If it is determined in S5531-3 that the command is an "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not the "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-5.

In S5531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a starting port opening effect determination process. This "starting port opening performance" is a performance that notifies that the "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 has been performed and it is now possible to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S5531-5 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-11.

In S5531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This "special performance" is a variable display of special symbols, a background performance performed during the small winning game state, and is a common performance performed over a plurality of small winning game states. This special performance includes a "bonus time basic performance" and a "bonus time specialized performance." The sub CPU 301 refers to the gaming state, and when it is in the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time basic performance" and "bonus time special performance" are provided. ``time basic performance'' is determined, and when it is in the A time-saving game state, a ``bonus time special performance'' is determined. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-7, the sub CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process that determines the special symbol variation effect during the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation performance determination process, a performance pattern for performing a "rewind performance" is determined when it is a "variation pattern command per time saving" so as to correspond to the performance in "Notes" in FIG. 180, When it is a "jackpot variation pattern command", a production pattern for performing "full rotation reach" or "jackpot notification reach" is determined, and when it is a "small win variation pattern command", a "shortened variation" or "jackpot variation" is determined. Determine the performance pattern for conducting “Notification Reach”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-8, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S5531-8 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-10.

In S5531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This process is the same as S5531-6 above, and when in the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time basic performance" is determined, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time specialized performance" is determined. do. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big hit start display command".

If it is determined in S5531-10 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs bonus time special performance determination processing to determine the "bonus time special performance". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-12, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S5531-12 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-14.

In S5531-13, the sub CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process to set the gaming state according to the type of the gaming state designation command. Specifically, if it is a gaming state designation command indicating a normal gaming state, normal gaming state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a gaming state designation command indicating an A time-saving gaming state, it is set to A time-saving gaming. The state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if the game state designation command indicates the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

In S5531-14, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. After that, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of S5084, ends the production pattern determination process, and returns the process to the production mode determination process (see FIG. 197).

The above-mentioned "basic bonus time performance or special bonus time performance (special performance)", "rewind performance", and "starting port opening performance" will be described in detail later using FIG. 201.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the transition of the gaming state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 199 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the regular game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first passage port 5126A, a "normal symbol hit" is determined by a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination), and a normal electric win is determined. By determining the normal symbol winning selection symbol command fz1 corresponding to the "long open" of the object 5146 (probability of about 1/420.3), the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting port 5140, starting information of the special symbol is extracted. In this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, the special symbol determination area (0) of the relevant determination, the four special Starting information is stored in the symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4), and a total of five special symbol drawings (special symbol winning determination) will be performed.

When it is determined as a "jackpot" with a first probability (probability of approximately 1/319) by the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination), a transition is made to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, in a 10-round jackpot game state, 1500 game balls can be paid out, and in a 4-round jackpot game state, 600 game balls can be paid out. It is composed of

When it is determined as a "small win" with a second probability (probability of about 1/1.64) by special symbol lottery (special symbol win determination), a transition is made to a small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, 150 game balls can be paid out in the small winning game state. It should be noted that the gaming state does not shift after shifting to the small winning gaming state.

When it is determined as a "time-saving win" with a third probability (probability of about 1/2.59) by special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination), the state shifts to C-time saving game state.

After transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the game shifts to A time-saving gaming state. This time-saving gaming state A is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "Completion of 10 time-saving games (see Figure 179)" and "Transition to jackpot gaming state" as the end condition of the time-saving gaming state A. ing.

The C time saving gaming state is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "One time saving number completed (see FIG. 179)" and "Transition to jackpot gaming state" as the end condition of the C time saving gaming state. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the counting of the "time saving number" is performed when the variable display of the special symbol starts, but it may be performed when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In the A time-saving game state and the time-saving game state C, the "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed (see Fig. 183), so it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the special symbol is displayed again. You can take part in the lottery.

In this embodiment, a loss is not determined in the special symbol lottery, and when a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, one of a "big hit", "small win", or "time saving win" is determined. If a "big hit" or "small win" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is given, and if a "time-saving hit" is determined, the time-saving game state C is entered. Then, the game ball can be entered into the starting port 5140 again, and the "bonus time" can be further extended. In addition, as described above, it may be configured such that "loss" is determined with a relatively low probability in the special symbol lottery.

By the way, the A time-saving game state is set so that the number of time-savings is greater than that in the C time-saving game state. Therefore, if a "time-saving win" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the A-time-saving gaming state, the player will be transferred from the A-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state due to the determination of the "time-saving winning". In this case, there is a possibility that the number of time saving operations that could be executed may be reduced, and as a result, the player may be disadvantaged.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko game machine, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the A-time-saving game state, a process (shown in FIG. 189) that invalidates the "time-saving win" determination is performed. By executing the process of S5075), control is performed so as not to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state. Therefore, even if a ``time-saving win'' is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the current time-saving game state A can be continued to be executed.

In addition, if the starting information that determines the "time-saving hit" remains in the pending memory after the end of the A-time-saving gaming state, C is based on the starting information that determines the "time-saving winning". Since it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state, even when shifting to the A-time-saving gaming state, the possibility that the time-saving gaming state will continue again is maintained.

In addition, if a "time saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the C time saving gaming state, the new C time saving gaming state is configured to be executed repeatedly, as in the first pachinko gaming machine. Ideally, this is the case, but in order to simplify the control process, it may be configured such that the determination of the C time saving win is invalidated during the C time saving gaming state, similar to the A time saving gaming state.

The fifth pachinko game machine has two time-saving game states, A time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, but like the first pachinko game machine, A time-saving game state It may be provided with three time-saving gaming states: state B, time-saving gaming state B, and time-saving gaming state C.

[7-7. Bonus time explanation]
As described above, a "bonus time" is provided when a game ball enters the starting port 5140. The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be explained. FIG. 200 is an example of an explanatory diagram illustrating bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, in FIG. 200, from the top, "judgment order" of the special symbol lottery, "applicable" indicating the special symbol determination area (0), and "" indicating the special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) The starting information stored in the "relevant" and "suspended memories" is shown as a "circle". In addition, the "circle" in the starting information is "small" when the starting information determines a small hit, "time" when the starting information determines a time-saving hit, and the starting information for determining a jackpot. Sometimes "large" is illustrated.

In FIG. 200(a), a "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and a "small hit" is determined in all special symbol drawings. This is an example of when

As shown in FIG. 200(a), if a "small win" is determined in all the special symbol drawings, a total of five small win games have been played and the bonus time has ended. In the case shown in FIG. 200(a), small winning games x 5 times = 150 x 5 = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In FIG. 200(b), the "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, and a "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the fifth special symbol. This is an example of what happens after that.

As shown in FIG. 200(b), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and a small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, "small win" is determined. It is determined that the game has won a time-saving game, and after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state C.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the fifth special symbol is drawn, "applicable" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (blank data) (all starting information of "relevant" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" is consumed) ), when five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in the "applicable" and "holding memory" with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger. That will happen.

As shown in FIG. 200(b), in the lottery for the 6th and 7th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 8th special symbol, It is determined that "time saving win" is achieved again, and after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the state shifts to C time saving game state.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the 8th special symbol is drawn, the starting information has already been stored in "Applicable" and "Pending Memory 1", and "Pending Memory 2 to 4" are default data (blank data). When three or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, three pieces of starting information will be newly stored in the "hold memories 2 to 4" with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger.

Thereafter, in the lottery of the 9th to 13th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, a small win game is carried out, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 200(b), small winning games x 11 times = 150 x 11 = 1650 game balls can be paid out.

In FIG. 200(c), the "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the fifth special symbol. This is an example after the

As shown in FIG. 200(c), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, " ``Jackpot'' is determined, and after the jackpot game state ends, a shift is made to the time-saving game state A.

As mentioned above, the time saving game state A is set to the number of time saving times of 10 (see FIG. 179, etc.), and the time saving game state A can be continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. In the A time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball cannot enter the starting port 5140 again. It becomes possible.

Then, if the 5th special symbol lottery is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state ends, the A time-saving gaming state is entered, and the 6th to 15th 10 special symbol drawings are performed in the A time-saving gaming state. I will do it.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols in the A time-saving game state, it is determined that the ``time-saving win'' is won. However, as mentioned above, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the time-saving gaming state A, the process of invalidating the "time-saving win" determination (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 189) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to continue to execute the A time saving gaming state without shifting from the A working time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

The 16th to 19th special symbols are drawn based on the starting information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining pending information") stored in "holding memories 1 to 4" after the end of the A time-saving gaming state. It is a lottery of designs.

In the lottery for the 19th special symbol based on the remaining pending information, it is determined that it will be a "short time win". The lottery for this 19th special symbol is carried out in the normal gaming state after the A time-saving gaming state has ended, so after the "time-saving win" is determined, the C This will shift to a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the time-saving gaming state A ends, it is possible to continue the time-saving gaming state again based on the remaining pending information, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in gaming due to the end of the time-saving gaming state A. can do.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery of the 19th special symbol, "applicable" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (blank data), so five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140. Therefore, with the time-saving gaming state C as a trigger, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in the "applicable" and "pending memory".

Thereafter, in the lottery of the 20th to 24th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, a small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 200(c), if the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol lottery is "10R", jackpot game (10R) x 1 time = 1500 x 1 = "1500 pieces", A total of ``4,500'' game balls can be paid out by adding ``small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20'' = ``3,000 pieces''. In addition, if the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol lottery is "4R", the jackpot game (4R) x 1 time = 600 x 1 = "600 pieces" and the small win game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000", a total of "3600" game balls can be paid out.

In this manner, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, if a "time saving win" is determined in the special symbol lottery, the "bonus time" can be extended. This makes it possible to make the end time of the "bonus time" variable, allowing the player to enjoy seeing how long the bonus time lasts, thereby further increasing the interest of the game. Note that the condition for ending the bonus time is that "a small hit is determined five times in a row in the special symbol lottery."

[7-8. Bonus time production]
Next, the production of "Bonus Time" will be explained. FIG. 201 is an example of a display image explaining the bonus time performance in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Production when the time is shortened during bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of FIG. 201 are examples of display images illustrating the effect when "time saving hit" occurs during bonus time, and the above-mentioned FIG. 200(b) This corresponds to the lottery of the first to sixth special symbols.

FIG. 201(a-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and is a drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 200(b) mentioned above. This corresponds to

The "bonus time basic performance" is a performance that is commonly performed during the variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or C time-saving game state and during the small winning game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic performance" receives a gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, and when the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state is in effect, the special symbol variation pattern command is executed. This is the effect that is performed when the small winning start display command is received in the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a-1), as a "bonus time basic effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and "bonus time" is displayed at the upper center of the display area. , "Right hit" is displayed on the upper right side of the display area to inform you of the legal game mode. Further, a predetermined character image is displayed in the center of the display area, and the "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are displayed in the lower right part of the display area.

Here, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R in accordance with the bonus time ending condition that "small wins are determined 5 times in a row in the special symbol lottery." It is something. In addition, the "total number of rounds" displays the total number of times the game has been controlled in the small win gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The “obtained points” are displayed as the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening 5131.

FIG. 201(b-1) is an example of a display image of a "rewind effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a time-saving hit is determined by a special symbol lottery. This corresponds to the lottery of the fifth special symbol in (b).

The "rewind performance" is a performance that is performed when a time-saving special symbol variation pattern command is received (see Figure 180), and the bonus time basic performance is rewound and there is a possibility that the small win game state will continue further. This is a performance that suggests that there is. As shown in FIG. 201(b-1), as a rewind effect, a display is performed as if the video of the basic bonus time effect up to now is being rewound.

FIG. 201(c-1) is an example of a display image of the "starting port opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 201(b-1) is performed. .

The "starting port opening performance" is a performance that notifies that the game ball can enter the starting port 5140. Specifically, the "starting opening opening effect" is performed when the variable display of special symbols per time saving is finished and a gaming state designation command indicating the C time saving gaming state is being received, or when the game ball is in the second passing gate. 5126B, and a normal symbol winning selection symbol command is received in which the long release of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed. As shown in FIG. 201(c-1), as a starting hole opening effect, a display saying "Aim for the chance starting hole!" is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has entered the starting hole 5140. Note that "right-handed hitting" is still displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

FIG. 201(d-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the starting port 5140 again, and is similar to the above-mentioned figure. This corresponds to the sixth special symbol lottery of 200(b).

As shown in FIG. 201(d-1), after the "starting hole opening effect", when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again, the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "basic bonus time effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed incremented (rewinded), and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, the ``rewind effect'' when a short-time win is determined can notify the player that the bonus time has been extended, allowing the player to enjoy seeing how long the bonus time will last and making the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

(Production when hitting the jackpot during bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of FIG. 201 are examples of display images that explain the performance when a "big hit" occurs during bonus time, and are shown in FIG. 200(c) above. This corresponds to the lottery of the 1st to 16th special symbols.

FIG. 201(a-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 200(c) described above This corresponds to The display contents such as “number of remaining rounds”, “bonus time”, “right-handed hit”, “total number of rounds”, and “obtained points” shown in Figure 201 (a-2) are the same as in Figure 201 (a-1). It is.

FIG. 201(b-2) is an example of a display image of "Jackpot Notification Reach" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a jackpot is determined by a lottery of special symbols, This corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in (c).

"Reach for jackpot notification" is a performance that is performed when a fluctuation pattern command of a special jackpot symbol is received (see Figure 180), and is a performance that determines whether or not the three decorative symbols consisting of the words "Invincible" are aligned. It is. As shown in FIG. 201 (b-2), when there is a jackpot, three decorative symbols "Invincible", "Invincible", and "Invincible" are all stopped and displayed as a result of the reach for jackpot notification. Note that when it is not a jackpot, decorative symbols such as "invincible", "x", and "invincible" are stopped and displayed as a result of the reach for jackpot notification.

FIG. 201(c-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and shows the 6th to 15th special symbols in FIG. 200(c) mentioned above. This corresponds to a lottery.

The "bonus time special performance" is a performance that is commonly performed in the jackpot game state, during variable display of special symbols in the A time-saving game state, and during the small-win game state in the A time-saving game state. More specifically, the "bonus time special performance" is a special symbol display when a jackpot start display command is received, and when a gaming state designation command indicating A time saving gaming state is received and the A time saving gaming state is in effect. This is a performance that is performed when a variable pattern command is received and when a small hit start display command is received in the A time-saving gaming state.

As shown in Figure 201 (c-2), "Invincible mode" is displayed in the center of the display area as a "bonus time special effect", and the regular gaming mode is announced in the upper right corner of the display area. ``Right-handed'' is displayed. Continuing from the "basic bonus time performance", the "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are displayed at the bottom right of the display area. This "total number of rounds" displays the total number of rounds controlled in the small winning gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning hole 5131 in the jackpot game state is displayed.

FIG. 201(d-2) is an example of a display image of "Bonus Time Basic Performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the A time-saving game state ends and there are four pieces of remaining pending information. , corresponds to the lottery of the 16th special symbol in FIG. 200(c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 201 (d-2), in the "basic bonus time performance" after the bonus time special performance, the "number of remaining rounds", "total number of rounds" and The "obtained points" are continuously displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has resumed.

In addition, for the "remaining number of rounds", "4R" is displayed corresponding to 4 remaining pending information, and if there are 3 remaining pending information after the end of A time-saving gaming state, "3R" is displayed, If there are two remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "2R" is displayed, and if there is one remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "1R" is displayed, and the time-saving gaming state A is displayed. If there is no remaining pending information after the end of the process, "End" will be displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time special performance" that is performed during the jackpot and during the A time-saving gaming state makes it possible to create a guarantee period that the bonus time will not end, allowing the player to enjoy the bonus time with peace of mind and enjoy it even more. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the main game in the normal gaming state is not a "special symbol game" consisting of a lottery of special symbols, but a "normal symbol game" consisting of a lottery of ordinary symbols, and a special In the symbol lottery, it is possible to treat the special symbol lottery as a "bonus time", which is an opportunity to receive a payout of a predetermined number of game balls, without determining the "loser", creating a new game experience that has never existed before. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a "time-saving win" is determined in the special symbol lottery, the system shifts to the time-saving gaming state (C-time-saving gaming state), and the game ball can enter the starting port 5140 again, extending the bonus time. I can do it. Thereby, the end time of the bonus time can be made variable, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the performance is performed when a small hit is determined by the lottery of special symbols and shortening fluctuations of the special symbols are performed, and when the small win game state is controlled. The performance is a common "special performance (bonus time basic performance or bonus time specialized performance)", and the performance that covers continuous shortening fluctuations and small winning game states is also a common "special performance (bonus time basic performance or bonus time special performance)". Because of the special performance), it is possible to perform multiple small winning game states as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a "time-saving hit" is determined by a lottery of special symbols, and when a variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the basic bonus time effect is rewound, and the small win game state is further improved. A ``rewind effect'' is performed to suggest that there is a possibility that the event may continue. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game even when the special symbols are being displayed variably.

<Modified example of the fifth pachinko game machine>
Next, a modification of the embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 201 etc., as a bonus time performance, when a variable display of special symbols per time saving is performed, the bonus time basic performance is rewinded as a "rewind performance". The configuration is such that the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewinded) in the next bonus time basic performance, but the "number of remaining rounds" is not displayed in the bonus time basic performance. The "maximum number of rounds" will be displayed as the number of times the small winning game state can be executed, and the maximum number of rounds will be added as "maximum round number additional effect" when the variable display of special symbols for short winnings is being performed. It may be configured to perform a similar performance.

In addition, as a basic bonus time performance, a battle performance will be performed in which ally characters and enemy characters fight, and the bonus time ending condition is ``5 consecutive small wins in the special symbol lottery''. The HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, and each time the enemy character attacks the ally character and is controlled to the small winning game state, the HP is subtracted by 1. It may be configured to perform an effect such that the character's HP is recovered.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to perform both the bonus time basic performance and the bonus time specialized performance as bonus time special performances. It may be configured as a performance that is summarized as a basic performance. In this case, when in the jackpot gaming state, the "jackpot medium performance" for the jackpot gaming state can be executed, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "remaining round number" of the bonus time basic performance is added to the "time saving" for the A time-saving gaming state. The number of rounds may be added, or "HOLD" or "STOP" may be displayed in the "number of remaining rounds".

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 179, when there is a time saving hit, one time is determined as the number of time saving times, but it may be configured so that the number of time saving times is determined to be two or more times. . Furthermore, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of special symbols (multiple types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to the time saving per are provided and the number of times of the plurality of types of time saving is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time-savings, it is possible to shift from the time-saving gaming state to a more small winning gaming state and to make it possible to pay out many game balls.

Further, the fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine, but like the third pachinko game machine, it is configured as a pachinko game machine called a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. Good too. In the fifth pachinko game machine, when configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, a specific area and a non-specific area are provided inside the big winning hole 5131 (or other big winning hole to be added), and the game The jackpot game state may be controlled by the ball passing through a specific area.

(others)
In the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the fifth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[8. 6th pachinko game machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained. The sixth pachinko game machine, like the second pachinko game machine, is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. However, the sixth pachinko game machine differs from the second pachinko game machine in the basic specifications of playability, and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are partially different.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted. .

The sixth pachinko game machine is a "simultaneous variable machine" that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be a "priority variable machine" in which any one of the starting conditions is satisfied with priority, or a "sequential variable machine" in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the winning order including the first starting port and the second starting port. It may be.

[8-1. Exterior configuration]
The external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As shown in FIG. 202, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from that of the first pachinko game machine in that the effect button device 6310 (first effect operation section 6311) provided on the upper plate 51 is The configuration is different.

The production button device 6310 is an operation device that allows the player to perform operations regarding production. In particular, the performance button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured to be able to change its operation mode, and the performance function can be improved by changing the operation mode of the performance button device 6310.

Below, changes in the operation mode of the production button device 6310 will be explained.

[8-2. Operation mode of production button device]
FIG. 203 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 203(a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the first operation mode as an initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the first operation mode of the production button device 6310 is such that the first production operation section 6311 that can be operated by the player is located on the top side. When the performance button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first performance operation section 6311.

FIG. 203(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the second operation mode changed from the first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 203(b), in the second operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 is rotated approximately 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side by a drive device such as a motor, and the player The operation mode is such that the operable second performance operation section 6312 is located on the front side. When the performance button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player can perform an operation of pressing down the second performance operation section 6312 diagonally.

FIG. 203(c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), in the third operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second production operation section 6312 is turned toward the top side. The operating mode is located at When the performance button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, the player can press the second performance operation section 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 203(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 203(d), the fourth operation mode of the production button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second production operation section 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive section 6313. When the production button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, the player can press the second production operation section 6312 that protrudes upward directly downward.

FIG. 203(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 203(e), in the fifth operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 rotates to about 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second production operation section 6312 protrudes. The operation mode is such that it collapses backwards. When the production button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second production operation section 6312, which has fallen toward the rear, toward the front.

Furthermore, the production button device 6310 has a built-in vibrating device (not shown), and the production button device 6310 is configured to be able to vibrate. Therefore, in more detail, the presentation mode of the presentation button device 6310 can be configured from a combination of the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

Note that the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is not limited to the above-mentioned operation mode and the number of changes thereof. For example, the operation mode may be such that the production button device 6310 moves back and forth, left and right, or may be such that it simply protrudes upward. Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 does not need to include a vibration device and does not need to vibrate.

[8-3. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 204, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 6010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 204 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100, various members are arranged on the game panel 6100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 6100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 204, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine mainly includes a ball passage 6108, a deceleration wall part 6109, and a game area 105. A center accessory 6115 arranged approximately in the center of The configuration and arrangement of the unit 6145, the jackpot accessory unit 6130, and the small win accessory unit 6150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is arranged in the right side area 107, and is composed of a flat plate section tilted downward, on which the game ball can roll. The plate portion of this ball passage 6108 is made of transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is textured. By applying texture to the ball path 6108, it is possible to slow down the rolling game balls, and by applying texture to the transparent resin, the light emitted from LEDs etc. is reflected diffusely, making it a decorative item. It can also enhance your sexuality. Note that the ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-transparent member instead of being formed of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is disposed above the ball passage 6108, and is a surface processed portion in which the surface of the game panel 6100 is textured. In addition to being able to slow down the rolling game balls by the deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100, the game panel 6100 is made of transparent resin so that light is emitted from LEDs, etc. Light is reflected diffusely, and it can also enhance decorativeness.

(center role)
The center accessory 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 6100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

The center accessory 6115 is equipped with a warp entrance 117, a chance entrance 119 on the stage 118, like the first pachinko game machine, but unlike the first pachinko game machine, there is a circular shape on the front side of the display device 7. It also includes a performance division section 6116.

The effect division part 6116 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, partitions the display area of the display device 7, and has an upper display area 7a inside the effect division part 6116 as a display area of the display device 7. is formed.

Further, in the display area of the display device 7, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, while the special symbols are being variably displayed, presentation identification symbols (for example, decorative symbols) are variably displayed to display the special symbols. Displaying the result of the hit determination process, a performance image according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a pending image showing the pending status of variable display of the special symbol, etc. or display.

(1st starting port)
The first starting opening (middle) 6120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to hit to the right to enter). It has become. When a game ball enters the first starting port (middle) 6120A, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121A (see FIG. 205 described later).

The first starting port (right) 6120B is arranged in the right side area 107 and is provided in a normal electric utility unit 6145, which will be described later. (It is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball.) When a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121B.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port (middle) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B are also collectively referred to as "first starting ports 6120A, 6120B", and the first starting port switch 6121A and the first starting port The switches 6121B are also collectively referred to as "first starting port switches 6121A, 6121B."

When the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first starting ports 6120A, 6120B is detected by the first starting port switches 6121A, 6121B, the starting information of the first special symbol (random value for jackpot determination, random symbol number, A random value for selecting a first performance, a random value for selecting a second performance, etc.) are extracted, and the starting information of the extracted first special symbol is suspended up to the "first pending number (for example, 4 pieces)". The suspended first special symbol starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Further, when game balls enter the first starting ports 6120A, 6120B, a first number of prize balls (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B is not limited to this.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 6140 is located in the right area 107 and below (downstream side) of the normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later, and allows entry of game balls hit to the right (game balls hit to the left). (difficult or impossible to enter the ball). When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 6141 (see FIG. 205 described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting port 6140 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 6145 (first starting port (right) 6120B) to the first starting port (right) 6120B. is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 enters the first starting port (right) 6120B provided on the upstream side before reaching the second starting port 6140, and the ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B provided on the upstream side. It is difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 6140. This also applies when the first starting port (right) 6120B is in the time-saving game state where it is likely to be in the open state.

When the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second starting port 6140 is detected by the second starting port switch 6141, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted second special symbol ( (Random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, random value for first performance selection, random value for second performance selection, etc.) up to the "second pending number (for example, 2 pieces)" that is smaller than the first held number. It will be put on hold. The suspended second special symbol starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a second number of prize balls (for example, one) smaller than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the number of pending game balls for which starting information is held is smaller than when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, and the ball is paid out. The number of prize balls is also set to be small. However, settings are made so that the same number of pending balls and the same number of prize balls are obtained when game balls enter the second starting port 6140 and when game balls enter the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. Alternatively, it may be set so that when game balls enter the second starting port 6140, the number of reserved balls or the number of prize balls is larger.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 6126 is located in the right side area 107 above the normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. Further, the passage gate 6126 is provided with a passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 205 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the passage gate 6126. Then, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 6126 flows down the right side area 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 6145.

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 6126 is detected by the passing gate switch 6127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted normal symbol (random value for determining whether the normal symbol hits, the symbol of the normal symbol) is extracted. random numbers, etc.) are held up to a third holding number (for example, 4). The suspended normal symbol starting information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process (normal symbol lottery) when the normal symbol starting condition is established. Further, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, the game ball is configured not to be paid out. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, it may be configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gate 6126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. Here, the condition for transition to the jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but when the stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, It is possible to operate the conditional device but not to operate the accessory continuous operating device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 205 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is located in the right area 107 above (upstream side) of the second starting port 6140 and below the passage gate 6126, so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. It is located in The normal electric accessory unit 6145 includes a first starting opening (right) 6120B, a first starting opening switch 6121B that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening (right) 6120B, and a normal electric accessory 6146. It is an integrated unit body.

The ordinary electric accessory 6146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 6147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 6148 (see FIG. 205 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 6147. The normal electric accessory 6146, that is, the shutter 6147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B, and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which entering the ball is impossible or difficult.

The general electricity shutter 6147 is composed of a flat roof portion that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140 side. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the open mode, the general electricity shutter 6147 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first starting port (right) 6120B is in the open state, and the game ball flowing down the right side area 107, The game ball rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the closed mode, the general electricity shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100, the first starting opening (right) 6120B closes, and the game ball is not allowed to enter the first starting opening (right) 6120B. Ball becomes impossible or difficult. Further, when the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 is guided to the second starting opening 6140 or the small winning accessory unit 6150 described later. Note that instead of the general power shutter 6147 that can move back and forth in the front-rear direction, a blade member called a so-called electric chew that can move in the left-right direction may be used.

(Jackpot accessory unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is located in the right area 107 and above the passage gate 6126. The jackpot accessory unit 6130 integrates a first jackpot 6131, a first jackpot count switch 6132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first jackpot 6131, and a jackpot accessory 6133. It is a unit body.

The first big winning hole 6131 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the first big winning opening 6131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. be. When the first big prize opening 6131 is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state, game balls up to a first specified number (for example, 10 balls) can enter the first big prize opening 6131. When a ball is played, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 are paid out.

The jackpot accessory 6133 includes a protruding plate-type jackpot shutter 6134 that can move forward and backward in the front and rear directions, and a jackpot solenoid 6135 (see FIG. 205 described later) that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. The jackpot accessory 6133, that is, the jackpot shutter 6134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first jackpot 6131, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy for the game ball to enter the first jackpot 6131. and a difficult closed state.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is composed of a flat plate-shaped roof that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the passage gate 6126 side. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the open state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first jackpot opening 6131 is in the open state, and the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and the jackpot shutter 6134 are buried in the game panel 6100. The game ball rolling above can enter the first grand prize opening 6131. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the jackpot shutter 6134 protrudes from the gaming panel 6100 and the first jackpot opening 6131 becomes closed, making it impossible or impossible for the game ball to enter the first jackpot opening 6131. It becomes difficult. Further, when the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 is guided to the passage gate 6126 on the downstream side.

In the "jackpot game state" in which the jackpot accessory 6133 is operated, the state transition of the first jackpot 6131 from the closed state to the open state is performed until the maximum number of rounds. For one round, the maximum opening time for which the first big prize opening 6131 is open has elapsed, or the first prescribed number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 6131. Then, the first big prize opening 6131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends. Every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 is paid out, so the jackpot game state is a state in which a large number of game balls are paid out. This is a gaming state that makes it possible to pay out .

(Small winning accessory unit)
The small winning accessory unit 6150 is located in the right side area 107 above the second starting port 6140 and below the normal electric accessory unit 6145. The small winning accessory unit 6150 integrates a second big winning opening 6151, a second big winning opening count switch 6152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning opening 6151, and a small winning accessory 6153. It is a unit body.

The second big winning hole 6151 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the second big prize opening 6151 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win" is derived. It is. The second big prize opening 6151 allows game balls up to a second specified number (for example, 4 balls) to enter the second big prize opening 6151 when the small winning game state is controlled. When the ball enters, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 are paid out.

The small winning accessory unit 6150 includes a protruding plate type small winning shutter 6154 that can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and a small winning solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 205 described later) that operates the small winning shutter 6154. The small winning accessory unit 6150, ie, the small winning shutter 6154, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 6151, and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the second large prize opening 6151. The device is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state.

The small hit shutter 6154 is composed of a flat plate-shaped roof that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140 side. When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the open state, the small winning shutter 6154 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the second large prize opening 6151 is in the open state, and the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 and the small winning The game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 can enter the second grand prize opening 6151. When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the small winning shutter 6154 protrudes from the game panel 6100, the second big winning opening 6151 is in the closed state, and the game ball is not allowed to enter the second big winning opening 6151. possible or difficult. Further, when the small hit shutter 6154 is in the closed mode, the game ball rolling on the small hit shutter 6154 is guided to the second starting port 6140 on the downstream side.

In the "small winning game state" in which the small winning accessory unit 6150 operates, the state transition of the second large prize opening 6151 from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of openings. For one small winning game state, a predetermined number of openings is completed, or a second specified number (for example, 4 pieces) smaller than the first specified number (for example, 10 pieces) of the jackpot game state is played. When the ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, the second big winning hole 6151 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one small winning game state ends. Every time a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 6151, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 6151 (for example, Since 14 game balls are paid out, the small winning game state is a game state in which it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second specified number (for example, 4 pieces) of the small winning game state is set to be smaller than the first specified number (for example, 10 pieces) of the small winning game state. The second specified number may be set to be the same as the first specified number in the jackpot gaming state, or may be set to be larger than the first specified number in the jackpot gaming state. However, it is desirable to set the second specified number of pieces in the small winning game state to 10 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 6151 (for example, 14 pieces) is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131 (for example, 15 pieces). , The number of prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 6151 may be set to be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131, or it may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131. You may. However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls according to the second grand prize opening 6151 to 15 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first big winning hole 6131 and the second big winning hole 6151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this. The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

[8-4. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 205 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 205, like the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the sixth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has a general power solenoid 6148 connected to the main control circuit 200, a jackpot solenoid 6135, a small win solenoid 6155, and a first starting port switch 6121A. , 6121B, the configurations of the second starting port switch 6141, the passing gate switch 6127, the first big winning port count switch 6132, and the second big winning port counting switch 6152 are partially different.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 6147. When the normal power solenoid 6148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the normal power shutter 6147 is moved backward to open the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the main CPU 201 turns on the power. If this is not done (if it is OFF), the normal power shutter 6147 is moved forward to close the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(Jackpot solenoid)
The jackpot solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. When the jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the jackpot shutter 6134 is moved backward to open the first jackpot opening 6131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the jackpot solenoid 6135, (If it is OFF), the jackpot shutter 6134 is moved forward to close the first jackpot opening 6131.

(Solenoid for small hit)
The small hit solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small hit shutter 6154. When the small win solenoid 6155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the small win shutter 6154 is moved backward, the second large prize opening 6151 is opened, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the small winning shutter 6154 is advanced forward to close the second large winning opening 6151.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting ports 6121A and 6121B are penetrating proximity switches that detect the entry of game balls into the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. The first starting port switch 6121A detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (middle) 6120A, and the first starting port switch 6121B detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (right) 6120B. do.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 6141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port switch 6140.

(passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 6127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the passage gate switch 6126.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 6132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 6131. When the first big winning hole count switch 6132 detects the entry of game balls into the first big winning hole 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole, and also counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process for the first prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) according to 6131.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 6152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151. When the second big winning hole count switch 6152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering per one small winning game state, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process for the second prize balls (for example, 14 game balls) corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151.

[8-4-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a presentation button device 6310 are further provided.

(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button device 6310. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button device 6310 or vibrating the production button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button device 6310 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button device 6310. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button device 6310, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

(Production button device)
As shown in FIG. 203, the production button device 6310 includes a first production operation section 6311, a second production operation section 6312, and an operation drive section 6313 as external components. 1 operation part detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball on the 1 production operation part 6311, the 2nd operation part detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball on the 2nd production operation part 6312, and the operation of the game ball on the operation drive part 6313. A third operation part detection switch for detecting a third operation part detection switch, a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive part 6313, a button solenoid for protruding the second production operation part 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body. It is composed of

[8-5. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 206 to 216. Note that the sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, there is a "normal gaming state" in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, a "high-precision time-saving gaming state" in which a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a high-probability gaming state. The main CPU 201 provides a "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which both the game state and the non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are controlled. It is possible to advance the game in any one of the game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

Further, in the embodiment, the first starting hole and the second starting hole are collectively referred to as a "starting hole", and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as a "special symbol". The hit determination process for the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol lottery" and the hit determination process for the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol lottery". Together with the lottery, it is also referred to as the "special design lottery."

[8-5-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 206 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 206 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by lottery.

The special symbol hit determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting port), probability variable flag (whether or not probability variable control is executed), and the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140. The random numerical value for jackpot judgment extracted (obtained) based on "judgment value data", "small hit determination value data", and "loss determination value data") are defined in association with each other. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65,536.

As shown in FIG. 206, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, based on the probability change flag and the random value for jackpot determination of the special symbol, A "jackpot" or "loss" is determined as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the probability variation flag is 1 (when probability variation control is being executed), the probability variation flag is 0 (when probability variation control is being executed). , a random number value for jackpot determination is specified so as to determine a "jackpot" with a high selection rate.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines the lottery result of the second special symbol as " Determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Here, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the variable probability flag is 1, the random value for jackpot determination is specified so that a "jackpot" is determined with a higher selection rate than when the variable probability flag is 0. However, the random number value for determining a jackpot is defined so that the selection rate for determining a "small hit" is the same regardless of the probability change flag.

Note that when the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the small win probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the small hit probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the jackpot probability may be set at a low setting. The high setting may have a higher probability, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the small winning probability may be higher at a high setting than a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 207 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 207 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for selecting "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

"Selected symbol information" is symbol information for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the winning type when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the display is stopped.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole) and the symbol randomness of the special symbol extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140. Numerical values, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbols to be stopped are defined in association with each other. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 207, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 controls the special symbol when the winning/losing judgment value data is the jackpot judging value data. Based on the symbol random number, select the selected symbol information "z1" with a selection rate of 30/100, select the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100, and select the selected symbol with a selection rate of 40/100. Select information “z3”. Then, when the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and the selected symbol information " When "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z4" when the win/loss judgment value data is the loss judgment value data. Then, "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z5" when the win/loss determination value data is the jackpot determination value data, "zA5" will be selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z6" when the win/loss determination value data is the small hit determination value data. , "zA6" will be selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z7" when the win/loss judgment value data is the loss judgment value data, "zA7" will be selected as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the sixth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 205) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions based on symbol information. Further, a display mode for a jackpot, a display mode for a small win, or a display mode for a loss is derived in the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 based on the special symbol lottery results. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[8-5-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 208 is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 208 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The winning type determination table is a table that determines "aspects of the jackpot gaming state", "aspects of the small winning gaming state", and "aspects of the subsequent gaming state (probability change flag, probability change number of times, time saving flag, time saving number of times)" .

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 6131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot game state are predefined, and the opening mode of the first jackpot 6131 is as follows: It shows the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be determined, or the closing time (round interval time) of each round may be determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

"Opening mode of small winning game state" indicates the opening mode of the second big prize opening 6151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are predefined, and the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning gaming state is predetermined. Shows the number of openings. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each number of openings may be determined.

Here, the maximum opening time for one round in the small winning gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds), and the jackpot gaming In the state, the first big prize opening 6131 is opened by the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 6151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said to be open.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 3R x 10 balls (first prescribed number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 450) is smaller than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state. The total number of game balls that can be paid out in the gaming state (for example, 1 small hit x 4 balls (second specified number) x 14 balls (number of prize balls) = 56 balls) is set to be smaller, and the jackpot game It can be said that it is a "first special game" where the state is advantageous, and a "second special game" where the small win game state is lower in profit than the jackpot game state.

"Subsequent mode of gaming state" indicates the mode of gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and indicates the settings of "probability change flag", "probability change number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times".

The "probability variable flag" is a flag that indicates whether it is a low probability gaming state or a high probability gaming state, and probability variation flag = 0 indicates "low probability gaming state", and probability variation flag = 1 indicates "high probability gaming state". indicates the status. Further, the "variable probability count" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the high probability gaming state, that is, the number of variable displays of the special symbol.

"Time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether it is a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and time-saving flag = 0 indicates "non-time-saving gaming state", and time-saving flag = 1 indicates "time-saving gaming state". It shows. Moreover, the "time saving number of times" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the time saving game state, that is, the number of variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the "time saving number" is a different number of time saving times depending on the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot (whether it is a "normal gaming state" or an "other" gaming state). The winning type determination table is configured so that the winning type can be determined.

As shown in FIG. 208, the winning type determination table includes "opening mode of jackpot gaming state", "opening mode of small winning gaming state", and "opening mode of small winning gaming state" for the selected symbol information, and " A "probability variable flag", a "probability variable number", a "time saving flag", and a "time saving number" are defined in association with each other.

Based on the selected symbol information, the main CPU 201 determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state", the "opening mode of the small winning gaming state", the "probable variable flag", the "probable variable number of times", the "time saving flag", and the "time saving number of times". and decide. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol information is "z4" or "z7"), the appearance of the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are determined, it is not originally provided in the winning type determination table of FIG. 208. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that if the special symbol lottery result is a "loss", neither the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined. , is shown in FIG. 208 for convenience.

When a “jackpot” is determined as the lottery result for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 208 before starting the jackpot game state, and selects the selected symbol corresponding to the jackpot for the first special symbol. When the information is "z1", "10R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state", and when the selected symbol information is "z2" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state" is determined. ", and when the selected symbol information is "z3" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, "3R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot game state", and the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined. When the selected symbol information corresponding to ``z5'' is selected, ``2R'' is determined as the ``opening mode of the jackpot game state''.

Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. ``1'' indicating a high probability gaming state is determined, ``120 times'' is determined as the ``probability variable number of times'', ``1'' indicating a time saving gaming condition is determined as the ``time saving flag'', and ``1'' is determined as the ``time saving number of times''. 100 times. In addition, when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, "1" indicating a high probability gaming state is determined as the "probability variation flag", and "120 times" is determined as the "probability variation number". Then, "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is determined as the "time-saving flag". Then, if the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the normal gaming state, "100 If the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the normal gaming state, "10000 times" is determined as the "time saving number".

Further, when a "small win" is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 208 and selects the selected symbol information "z6" before starting the small win game state. ”, “6 times” is determined as the “opening mode of the small winning game state”.

In addition, after the small hit gaming state ends, the mode of the subsequent gaming state is not determined even if the selected symbol information "z5" corresponds to the small winning of the second special symbol. That is, the gaming state will not shift (change) when the small winning gaming state is triggered.

In this way, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot gaming states are finished, the game shifts to the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" in which both the time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are executed. Therefore, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, it is possible to increase the chance of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state again (providing a so-called opportunity to play consecutive games) and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, the number of variable probability of the high probability gaming state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect to move to a jackpot game state by the time the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the variable number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the time saving number (100) is set to be shorter than the probability variation number (120). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the first half (1 to 100 times) of the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" will be entered, and if the state does not shift to the jackpot game state again, the second half (101 to 120 times), it is possible to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state".

In particular, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the latter half of the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," the expected value of the number of game balls paid out relative to the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1, as will be described later. You can enter the "small hit RUSH". Here, if the number of variable times (120 times) in the high-precision gaming state is not set to a number that guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state, each time the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the number of variable displays, Generally, the expected value of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state (the so-called expected value of consecutive wins) decreases, and the interest in the game decreases. However, in this embodiment, the expected value of entering the "small hit RUSH" increases as the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the variable number of times, so the expected value of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state increases. The decrease is compensated for by the expected value reaching the "small hit RUSH", and it is possible to maintain the improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the right-handed game is considered to be a regular gaming mode. When you are in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" when playing, the number of time-saving gaming states (10,000 times) becomes the jackpot gaming state. It is set to the number of times that migration is guaranteed. For this reason, when you are in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" (especially the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state"), the second It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player expect to win the special symbol jackpot.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the game ball is in the non-time saving game state where the player is hitting right, that is, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol. The main opportunity is when you are in a non-time-saving gaming state. For this reason, in the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" that can be transitioned to in the latter half after the end of the jackpot gaming state, that is, the "small winning RUSH", the payout of game balls is expected, and the transition to the next jackpot gaming state is delayed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect a guaranteed jackpot with the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal gaming state", the time saving number of time saving gaming states ( 100 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees transition to a jackpot gaming state. This is because when in the "normal game state", left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and entering the game ball into the second starting port 6140 is not recognized as a game feature of this embodiment. This is because it corresponds to "an irregular jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, when the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal gaming state" (if it is an irregular jackpot) time), the same number of times as the time saving number of time saving gaming states (100 times) is set as the time saving number of time saving gaming states (100 times) that is set after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol. However, it may be set to a smaller number of times than the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, or the time-saving flag and the number of time-savings may not be set (the number of time-savings may not be set). (It may be set to 0 times.)

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the transition of the gaming state explained in FIG. 208 will be summarized and explained. FIG. 209 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the "normal gaming state", and "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" '', right-handed playing is considered a legal game mode.

(Normal gaming state)
In the normal game state in which the player is left-handed, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A (see FIG. 204).

In the normal gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol ends. Afterwards, the game will move to a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the number of time-savings is set to "100 times" and the number of probability variations is set to "120 times."

(Highly accurate time-saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy time-saving game state in which the ball is hit to the right, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the passage gate switch 6126, and the time-saving game state is controlled, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the normal The accessory 6146 opens the first starting opening (right) 6120B, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting opening (right) 6120B (see FIG. 204).

In the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (right) 6120B, the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol After the end of the game, the number of time-saving games, the number of probability changes, etc. are reset, and the game returns to a high-probability time-saving game (so-called consecutive games).

Here, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, since the time-saving game state is controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the first starting port (right) is opened. ) It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140 provided on the downstream side of 6120B. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140, and the first starting port ( Right) The first special symbol lottery will be held when the game ball enters 6120B.

In the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a jackpot and the number of drawings of the special symbol reaches the set time-saving number (100 time-saving times completed), the control of the time-saving gaming state ends. , the game will shift to a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state."

(Highly accurate non-time saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed, since the time-saving gaming state is not controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the normal electric shutter 6147 is closed. The game ball rolling upward is guided to the small winning accessory unit 6150 or the second starting opening 6140, and the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the second big winning opening 6151 or the second starting opening 6140. (See Figure 204).

For this reason, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port (right) 6120B, and A second special symbol lottery will be held triggered by the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140.

In the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, when a "small hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 6140, the second big winning opening 6151 is in an open state. Therefore, each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 are paid out. In the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 206, the probability of being judged as a ``small hit'' is higher than that of being judged as a ``lose'', which will be described later. ``HIT RUSH'' is executed, and the number of game balls acquired increases.

In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140, the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol ends. Afterwards, the game will move to a ``high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'' in which the number of time-savings is set to ``10,000'', which guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state, and the variable probability is set to ``120''.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a jackpot, and the number of special symbol draws after the end of the jackpot game state for the first special symbol is the set probability variation number (120 probability variation number completion) When this happens, the control of the high-precision gaming state ends and the game returns to the "normal gaming state" in which left-handed hitting is performed.

(Low accuracy time saving gaming state)
In the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state where you hit right, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" that transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, it is not judged as a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol When the number of drawings of the special symbol after the end of the gaming state reaches the set probability variable number (120 times of probability variation ends), the game state is transferred.

In the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled similarly to the high-accuracy time-saving game state, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the first starting port ( It is configured so that the right) 6120B is in an open state and a game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B (see FIG. 204).

Since the time-saving game state is controlled in the low-accuracy time-saving game state as well as the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the second special event triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140 It has become difficult to hold a lottery for the symbols, and a lottery for the first special symbol will be held when a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

Even if you shift to this low-probability time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of time-saving games is "9880", so it is guaranteed that the time-saving gaming state will not end and you will shift to the jackpot gaming state again. There is.

In this way, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 204), the lottery contents of special symbols (see FIG. 206), the rules for transition to the gaming state (see FIG. 208), etc. are organically linked. , it is possible to create unprecedented gameplay and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," in which right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode, are collectively referred to as " This is also called the "right-handed game state."

[8-5-5. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIGS. 210 to 212 are examples of variation pattern tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 210 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 211 is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example. Further, FIG. 212 shows the right-handed game state (any of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state") in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 210 to 212 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the "special symbol variation pattern" of the sixth pachinko gaming machine includes a "first half variation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the variable display of the special symbol, and a "second half variation pattern" corresponding to the second half of the variable display of the special symbol. It is composed of two combinations. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern may be combined into one variation pattern. Further, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are collectively referred to as a "variation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 210, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), winning/losing lottery result of the special symbol, and first starting hole 6120A, 6120B. Or, the first performance selection random value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. ” are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for first performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 210 shows the contents of the performance for the sake of clarity.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the random number value for one performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol, and When based on ball entry, the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

Here, the "pseudo series" shown in the "Remarks" column of Fig. 210 means that while the special symbol is being variably displayed, the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This shows a ``pseudo-continuous effect'' in which decorative patterns that have been temporarily stopped are displayed again in a variable manner. Note that the "temporary stop display" refers to a mode in which the decorative patterns are slightly swayed or deformed to make it appear to the player that the decorative patterns are stationary. This pseudo-continuous performance can be performed multiple times, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous performance is performed is indicated as "pseudo-continuous X times". Furthermore, the term "pseudo-continuation incitement" refers to a performance that incites whether or not a pseudo-continuation performance will be performed. "NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Moreover, the "long variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long.

“The road to the decisive battle” and “The road to the final battle” are specific performances of the same type, and the players are required to operate the performance button device 6310 a predetermined number of times, and the “road to the ultimate battle” is the same type of performance. It is a performance to collect "character icons". The "number of icons in the first half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed until the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle is performed. The path to the final battle, the path to the ultimate battle, character icons, etc. will be described in detail later using FIGS. 251 to 253.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the symbol, the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time corresponding to any of the following are determined: "Normal variation", "Pseudo consecutive X times", "Road to decisive battle", and "Road to ultimate decisive battle" be done.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 210, in "pseudo consecutive X times",
The random number value for the first effect selection is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "pseudo series 1 time"<"pseudo series 2 times"<"pseudo series 3 times".

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 210, in "Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the final battle",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Road to the Decisive Battle"<"Road to the Final Battle".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time is set to be extremely long is determined.

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when it is in the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and when left-handed hitting is being performed, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140. Although it is difficult or impossible to do so, if the game ball is hit right-handed as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140. However, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 210, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long. Since the first half variation pattern of the "long variation" is determined, the number of draws of the second special symbol per unit time is extremely small, and the structure is such that there is no real benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. .

(Second half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 211, the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state includes the first half variation pattern number, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the first starting opening 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140. The random value for second performance selection obtained based on the ball entering the second half, the "second half variation pattern number" indicating the second half variation pattern, and the "second half variable display time" of the special symbol in the second half variation pattern are associated. ing. Note that the random number value for selecting the second performance is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 211 shows the contents of the performance for the sake of clarity.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the second half variation pattern of the special symbol and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are determined. When the main CPU 201 determines the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, the main CPU 201 determines the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the first special symbol, When based on ball entry, the second half variation pattern and second half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 creates a special symbol variation pattern that is a combination of the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern so that the type of special symbol can be identified. Send the command to sub CPU 301. Specifically, a 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 83H00H00H) consisting of "83H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" is sent as the "first special symbol variation pattern command". , A 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 84HF1H00H) consisting of "84H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" is transmitted as "second special symbol variation pattern command". When the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the total variable display time by adding up the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

Here, "None" shown in the "Remarks" column in Figure 211 means that the second half variation pattern and second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined, and the second half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. If not, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. Further, "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach", and "big battle reach" are reach effects that suggest that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot in the normal game state. The "second half number of icons" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle is performed. The confrontation reach, character icon, etc. will be described in detail later.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 211, when based on the entry of game balls into the first starting holes 6120A and 6120B, the second half variation pattern of the first special symbol is "None ( A second half variation pattern and a second half variable display time corresponding to any one of "first half variation only)", "normal reach", "ninja reach", "confrontation reach", and "big battle reach" are determined.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 211, in "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach", and "big battle reach",
The random value for selecting the second performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"NinjaReach"<"ConfrontationReach"<"Big Battle Reach".

Furthermore, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. Not determined. Therefore, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation" which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in right-handed game mode)
FIG. 212(a) shows a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine (any one of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state") This is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols. FIG. 212(b) is an example of the second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This table is not determined as a variable display time, and there is no need to provide this table, but it is shown for convenience in order to make it clear that the second half variation pattern of special symbols and the second half variable display time are not determined in a right-handed game state. be.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the winning/losing lottery result of the special symbol, and the first starting The first performance selection random value obtained based on the ball entering the openings 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variation pattern number" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. "first half variable display time".

When in the right-handed game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. The first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the lottery result and the first performance selection random number value. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol, and When based on ball entry, the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and does not execute the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. A special symbol variation pattern command combined with the default latter half variation pattern number (00H) shown is transmitted to the sub CPU 301. Then, when the game is in a right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "battle challenge", "battle reach", "door opening performance" and "eye opening performance" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. This is a reach effect that suggests that the result may be a jackpot. Moreover, the "ultra shortening variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, a first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortening variation", "battle challenge", and "battle reach" are determined. Therefore, the "battle challenge" and the "battle reach" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot in the right-handed game state.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. 212(a), in "Battle Challenge" and "Battle Reach",
The random number value for the first performance selection is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "battle challenge"<"battlereach".

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, a first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortened variation", "door opening effect", and "eye opening effect" are determined. Therefore, the "door opening effect" and the "eyes opening effect" are also reach effects that suggest that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot in the right-handed game state.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. 212(a), in the "door opening effect" and the "eyes opening effect",
The random value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "door opening performance"<"eyes opening performance".

Furthermore, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. The first half fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the first half variation pattern of "super shortening variation" is determined without determining the first half variation pattern for performing the reach effect.

Therefore, when in the right-handed gaming state, unlike the normal gaming state, the number of draws for the first special symbol and the number of draws for the second special symbol per unit time are increased, and in the right-handed gaming state, the player It is structured in such a way that there is a practical benefit to striking.

Here, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, is mainly triggered by the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the right-handed gaming states, In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to be determined as a "small win" (see Figure 206), and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", the second big prize opening 6151 immediately shifts to the open state. (See FIG. 212). Therefore, in the highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a "small win RUSH" that increases the rate of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 per unit time.

[8-5-6. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 213 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 213 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" based on the lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 213 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 213 and determines win/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has a hit determination random value of 0, and determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "lose" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is one of 1 to 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 98, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". Hit judgment value data” is determined. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "lose" when the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

[8-5-7. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 214 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command".

"Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214 corresponds to the normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the symbol command to select when the normal symbol is hit. It is specified and specified.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214, and determines the normal symbol win selection symbol command based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the win/loss determination value data of the normal symbol, for example, the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is won is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49. ``fz1'' is selected as the normal symbol random value, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 50 and 100, "fz2" is selected as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when winning a normal symbol", the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning/losing judgment value data) is used regardless of the gaming state The system is configured to select a "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 213) and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 214), the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[8-5-8. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 215 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 215 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 (normal electric shutter 6147) according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning.

In the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 215, the game state, the selection symbol command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 215 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 based on the gaming state and the normal symbol winning select symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric accessory 6146. Then, 210 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an unfavorable opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined and the opening pattern is transferred to the first starting port (right) 6120B. It is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2" in the time-saving gaming state. , 5820 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the opening pattern to the first starting port (right) 6120B is determined. Game balls can be entered.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6146 is configured so that it is opened only once, but it is configured so that a wait time is set and multiple openings are performed. You may.

[8-5-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 216 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 216 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 216 corresponds to the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time. It is attached.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 216, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol based on the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. The variable display time of the symbol is determined.

After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this embodiment, a relatively short variable display time of normal symbols is determined so that the number of drawings of normal symbols per unit time becomes large. In particular, in the time-saving gaming state, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "hit", it is possible to immediately shift the first starting port (right) 6120B to the open state, and the It is possible to increase the rate of game balls entering the first starting port (right) 6120B.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and normal symbol control processing performed during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although the control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, The same processing as that performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 217, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S6001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S6001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S6001. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is kept constant. If the value is "0" for more than a certain period of time, a transmission reservation process for a demonstration display command regarding the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

Although the sixth pachinko game machine is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. It is considered a special design. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters and the like regarding the main special symbols, audio effects, etc. regarding the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

In S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6001.

If it is determined in S6002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S6002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S6003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S6002.

In S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After executing the process in S6003, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6004.

In S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S6004, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6005.

In S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6004.

If it is determined in S6005 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (if NO in S6005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S6006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S6005.

In S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After executing the process in S6006, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S6005), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6007.

In S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S6007, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6008.

In S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6007.

If it is determined in S6008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S6008), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6009.

In S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After executing the process in S6009, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6010.

In S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S6010, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6011.

In S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6010.

If it is determined in S6011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S6011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S6011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6012.

In S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After executing the process of S6012, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S6001 to S6012) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[8-6-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6003, S6006, S6009, and S6012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 217) will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S6006 or S6009 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S6012, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 218 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S6021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S6021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 217).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S6021), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6022.

In S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S6022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6023. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processing from S6023 onwards based on the control state number read out in the processing of S6022.

In S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6024.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S6024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6025.

In S6025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S6025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6026.

In S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S6026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6027.

In S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S6027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S6028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 226.

After completing the processing of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 217). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004 if the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S6007 if it is called in S6006, and calls it in S6009. If it has been called, the process returns to S6010, and if it has been called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 219, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

If it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S6031), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S6031), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S6032 is NO) (judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S6032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S6032), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6033.

In S6033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. In the shift processing of the starting information of the first special symbol that targets the first special symbol, since the number of pending special symbols is 4, the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is The stored starting information is shifted to the first special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol determining area (0). Shift to the symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, in the shift processing of the start information of the second special symbol whose processing target is the second special symbol, since the number of pending second special symbols is two, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (1 ) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1). do. After executing the process in S6033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 206) is referred to, and the game status (presence or absence of probability variable flag) and the random value for special symbol jackpot determination stored in the special symbol determination area (0) are determined. Based on this, special symbol hit determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the small hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. After executing the process in S6034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6035.

In S6035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 207) is referred to, and the determination result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process described above and the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) are determined. Based on this, "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine a stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S6035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (small hit or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined according to the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determining process (S6035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 208). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be one type of jackpot, or there may be multiple types of small winnings. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, time-saving wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S6036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the first half fluctuation pattern determination process is performed, and then the second half fluctuation pattern determination process is performed.

In the first half variation pattern determination process, in the normal gaming state, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols shown in FIG. 210 is determined, and in the right-handed gaming state, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols shown in FIG. 212(a) is determined. The determination result (win or loss) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process and the random number value for first performance selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0) are determined by referring to the first half variation pattern table of the determined special symbol. Based on this, the first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

In the second half variation pattern determination process, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol second half variation pattern table shown in FIG. 211 is referred to, and the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process and the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process are determined. The second half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result (win or loss) and the second performance selection random number stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In addition, in the right-handed gaming state, a default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern is not executed is determined. After executing the process in S6037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, when in the normal gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern tables in FIGS. 210 and 211 are referred to, and the first half variable display time and second half variation pattern determination process of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is performed. A total variable display time is calculated by adding up the second half variable display time of the second half variation pattern determined in . In addition, when in the right-handed gaming state, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time by referring to the first half variation pattern table shown in FIG. 212(a). . Then, the calculated total variable display time is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 are caused to start variable display of the special symbol. The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S6038, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6039.

In S6039, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving probability variation count subtraction processing. In this process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag=1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Note that if the probability variation flag=1, the number of probability variations is not subtracted. Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag=1 (time saving gaming state), and if the time saving flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the number of time saving times. Note that if the time saving flag = 0, the number of time saving times is not subtracted.

In S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 218) (see S6024) will be performed. After executing the process in S6040, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6041.

In S6041, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6041, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6042.

In S6042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S6042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6043.

In S6043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the symbol designation command transmission reservation processing, the transmission reservation processing of the symbol designation command determined in S6035 is performed. In addition, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process is a combination of the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of the special symbol can be known. I do. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interruption-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S6042) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S6043)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIGS. 220 and 221 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S6051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S6051), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S6052), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S6052), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a symbol confirmation time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, a predetermined special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 stop variable display of the special symbol. . The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S6053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6054.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may vary depending on the type of hit or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a loss, the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, The second symbol confirmation time may be shorter than the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 24 msec). In particular, when creating a small win RUSH as in the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the pattern confirmation time extremely short in the case of a small win.

In S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S6025 in FIG. 218) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S6054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6055.

In S6055, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6056.

In S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of guaranteed changes or the number of time reductions, but the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions can be determined by the number of guaranteed symbols counter. May be managed. After executing the process in S6056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is a small hit.

In S6057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is not a small hit (NO determination in S6057), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is a small hit (YES determination in S6057), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6058.

In S6058, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process in S6058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is a jackpot.

In S6059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S6059), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

On the other hand, in S6059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is a jackpot (YES determination in S6059), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6060.

In S6060, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S6060, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6061.

In S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S6061), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218). Return to

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S6061), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6062.

In S6062, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S6062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process in S6063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6064.

In S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot or small hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed, and this other special symbol is Even if the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a small hit, the other special symbol will be forced to stop due to a loss. After executing the process in S6064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6065.

In S6065, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6066.

In S6066, the main CPU 201 performs symbol confirmation time setting processing for the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the other special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 stop variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6066, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6067.

In S6067, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6068.

In S6068, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6069.

In S6069, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S6034 in FIG. 219) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being displayed variably, a process is performed to forcibly stop the variable display of the other special symbol due to a loss.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

If it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S6071), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S6071), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6072.

In S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S6072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S6072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S6072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S6073, if it is determined that there is no small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if NO in S6073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S6073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 205) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S6075, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the first big winning hole 6131 to be opened (S6077), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

In S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 218) will be held.

In S6080, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters, such as a probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number, when there is a jackpot. In addition, at the time of a small hit, the process of clearing various flags and various counters, such as a probability variation flag, a probability variation number, a time saving flag, and a time saving number, is not performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot start display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win start display command when it is a small win. The jackpot start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After executing the process of S6081, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In S6082, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state transition determination processing. This gaming state transition determination process includes a "low-probability gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a low-probability gaming state, and a "non-time-saving gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a non-time-saving gaming state. Both processes are performed. After executing the process in S6082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6083.

In the low probability gaming state transition determination process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, then it is determined whether the probability variation number = 0. However, if the probability variation count=0, the probability variation flag=0 (low probability gaming state) is set, and the state is shifted from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state. Further, if the probability variation flag = 0, the low probability gaming state transition determination process is terminated, and if the probability variation count = 0, the low probability gaming state transition determination process is terminated while the probability variation flag = 1 is held.

In the non-time saving game state transition determination process, it is determined whether the time saving flag = 1 (time saving gaming state), and if the time saving flag = 1, then it is determined whether the number of time saving times = 0. If the number of time-saving games is 0, the time-saving flag is set to 0 (non-time-saving gaming state), and the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, if the time-saving flag = 0, the non-time-saving game state transition determination process is ended, and if the time-saving number of times is not 0, the non-time-saving game state transition determination process is ended while the time-saving flag = 1 is held.

In S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 223. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S6071 to S6081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 222) will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S6092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6093.

In S6093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6094.

In S6094, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 222).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 219) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[8-6-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6026 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S6101), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S6101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6102.

In S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter value corresponds to the count value that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the count value that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the small win game control process. This corresponds to a count value that counts the number of times the control process is opened. In addition, the big winning a prize opening number of times counter value is stored in the big winning a prize opening number of times counter in main RAM203. After executing the process in S6102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the grand prize opening number counter value is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 208, the upper limit of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 3, 5, or 10 rounds, and the opening of the small winning gaming state The upper limit of the number of times is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the grand prize opening number counter value is the upper limit value (YES in S6103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6104.

In S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 218) is performed. (see S6028) will be performed. After executing the process in S6104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6105.

In S6105, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command as a sending reservation process of the jackpot end display command if it is after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and if it is after the end of the small win gaming state. A transmission reservation process for an end display command is performed (S6106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the grand prize opening number counter value is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S6103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6107.

In S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S6107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6108.

In S6108, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a big winning hole to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the first big winning hole 6131 is selected when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the second big winning hole 6151 is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. be done. After executing the process in S6108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls in the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the grand prize opening, etc. are set. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S6109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 28000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 100 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and to 4 at the maximum when the small winning game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the grand prize opening is set to 15 for the first grand prize opening 6131, and 14 for the second grand prize opening 6151. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning hole opening setting process to open the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151). After executing the process in S6110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6111.

In S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S6027 in FIG. 218) will be performed. After executing the process in S6111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6112.

In S6112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

[8-6-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6027 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning a prize opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S6121), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 218). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S6121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the grand prize opening counter that counts the number of winning game balls that enter the grand prize opening is the maximum number of winning balls. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6123 if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 6131, second grand prize opening 6151) is not the maximum number of winning balls. If it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) is the maximum winning number, the process moves to S6128-1.

In S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S6124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S6128-2. .

In S6123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S6109 in FIG. 224) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 6131, second grand prize opening 6151) has not elapsed (if NO in S6123), the main CPU 201 controls the opening of the grand prize opening. The release control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) has elapsed (YES in S6123), the main CPU 201 performs processing. is moved to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151). After executing the process in S6124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6125.

In S6125, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S6125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S6026 in FIG. 218) will be performed. After executing the process in S6125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6126.

In S6126, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S6126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6127.

In S6127, if the main CPU 201 is in a jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, the transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S6127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151). After executing the process in S6128-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6128-3.

In S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process, the jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 218) will be held. After executing the process in S6128-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6128-4.

In S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S6128-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6128-5.

In S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

[8-6-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S6028 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S6028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

If it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S6131), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 217). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S6131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6132.

In S6132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state (big winning opening number counter value, big winning opening winning counter value, etc.), small winning flag, jackpot flag, symbol confirmed number counter value, special Processing to clear the symbol pause flag etc. is performed. After executing the process in S6132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6133.

In S6133, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state setting processing. In this game state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 208 is referred to, and the probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number are set based on the selected symbol information. Specifically, as shown in the hit type determination table of FIG. 208, after the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol ends, the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state) is set, and the probability variation count = 120. Then, the time saving flag is set to 1 (time saving gaming state), and the number of time saving times is set to 100. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol ends, the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state) is set, the probability variation number of times = 120, the time saving flag = 1 (time saving gaming state), If the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the normal gaming state, set the time saving number = 100, and if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the normal gaming state, the time saving number is set to 100. Set the number of times = 10000. In addition, after the end of the small winning game state, none of the data of the probability change flag, the number of probability changes, the time saving flag, and the number of time saving times are set. That is, the gaming state will not shift (change) when the small winning gaming state is triggered. After executing the process in S5133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 223 is performed. After executing the process of S6134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 227, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 227 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S6300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the normal symbol waiting time is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6301.

In S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S6301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S6310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S6301.

In S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 228. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6320.

In S6320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S6320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

It should be noted that the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol may vary depending on the type of hit or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and in the time-saving gaming state, the second symbol confirmation time is shorter than the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec). 132 msec). In particular, when creating a small hit RUSH like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time extremely short in the time-saving gaming state.

In S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S6330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146.

In the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146, the normal electric accessory 6146 is released based on the game state and the selection symbol command when hitting a normal symbol with reference to the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 215. Determine the pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) and set the determined opening pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S6340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S6340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S6350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning termination process, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S6310 to S6340 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S6300 to S6350) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 227) will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 228, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S6311).

If it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 227). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6312.

In S6312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S6312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6313.

In S6313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol miss”). After executing the process in S6313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6314.

In S6314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process in S6314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6315.

In S6315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. A variable pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process in S6315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6316.

In S6316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S6315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S6316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6317.

In S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 227) (see S6320) will be performed. After executing the process in S6317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6318.

In S6318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Small hit RUSH]
In the above-mentioned sixth pachinko game machine, it is possible to realize a "small hit RUSH". Below, the mechanism of small hit RUSH will be explained.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the frequency of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 is different from that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). As a result, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning RUSH that can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 204, the game ball hit right almost passes through the passage gate 6126 and the normal electric accessory unit 6145. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, it is difficult for the general electricity shutter 6147 to be in the open mode (see FIGS. 213 to 215), and the general electricity shutter 6147 is in a closed state in which it protrudes from the game panel 6100, and guides the game ball rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 to the second big prize opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140.

Therefore, if the second big winning hole 6151 is open, the game ball hit right will be guided to the normal electricity shutter 6147 and can enter the second big winning hole 6151. Every time a game ball enters this second big prize opening 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a stop display is displayed indicating a small hit with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see Figure 206). Not only is the mode derived, but as shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state (see FIG. 212(a)), a super-shortened variation with an extremely short variable display time is executed. The frequency of game balls entering the big prize opening 6151 is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state).

In this way, in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a small hit RUSH in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. It becomes.

On the other hand, in a gaming state where the time-saving gaming state is controlled (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the normal power shutter 6147 is likely to be in an open state buried in the gaming panel 6100 (see FIGS. 213 to 215). , most of the game balls hit right enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second grand prize opening 6151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning in the second grand prize opening 6151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example.

In this way, in the game state where the time-saving gaming state is controlled (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the gaming value paid out (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) for the number of balls fired per unit time is The expected value is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered to be the regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, the game ball hit right will be placed in the second starting hole. It becomes possible for the game ball to enter 6140. However, as described above, as shown in the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 210), when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, the variation of the special symbol Since the first half fluctuation pattern of the "long fluctuation" whose display time is set to be extremely long is determined, the number of drawings of the second special symbol per unit time is extremely small, and the actual profit that the player makes when playing right in the normal gaming state. It is configured so that it does not.

In this embodiment, the small hit RUSH is configured in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols can be performed without executing electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the first starting port (right) 6120B by activating the normal electric accessories 6146. A small hit RUSH may be made in the highly accurate time-saving gaming state that is executed.

[8-8. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 229 is an example of the production flow in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 230 is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

(Production flow in normal gaming state)
In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is performed, a game ball can enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, and the first special symbol can be displayed with variable display of decorative symbols, display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, etc. A change effect on the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. is performed. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of three main patterns: a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and a sub pattern that is much smaller than the main pattern. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to these.

Furthermore, in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the game is mainly about collecting "character icons" and aiming for a jackpot.

When a game ball enters the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 (``start of variation of all symbols'').

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform any of the following preview effects: ``line preview'', ``button challenge preview'', and ``cherry blossom accumulation notice''. Note that other advance notices may be possible.

"Speech preview" is, for example, a preview performance in which one of multiple characters is displayed, and the displayed character's dialogue suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. .

A "button challenge notice" is, for example, a predetermined number of "character icons" by operating the performance button device 6310 multiple times (sequentially hitting), or the expected level of jackpot (for example, intense heat), and the contents of the developing reach (for example, This is a preview performance that displays whether or not a "character icon" indicating SP) can be obtained. Please note that you may not be able to obtain any of the icons from the "Button Challenge Preview".

In the "cherry blossom accumulation notice", for example, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 204), and the cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages. This is a preview performance. Then, when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or a "yakuza icon" indicating that it will develop into a "path to the ultimate battle" will be displayed, and a "yakuza icon" will be displayed. and develops into ``The Road to the Final Battle''. These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to three levels over the relevant change or multiple changes due to pre-reading. The number of character icons is set to increase. The content of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 246 and 247.

Then, when the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 ("5 character icons acquired"), the game progresses to "the road to a decisive battle."

After all the symbols start to fluctuate, after the left and right symbols temporarily stop and display ("left and right symbols temporarily stop"), will it be a "lose" where all the symbols stop and display, or will it be a "pseudo-continuous inciting effect"? It is possible to perform either “Normal Reach” or “Normal Reach”.

The ``pseudo-continuous stimulation effect'' is a performance in which the right symbol, which has been temporarily stopped and displayed, is displayed in a variable manner again (the right symbol slides), and whether or not the ``character icon'' stops at the position of the middle symbol is stimulated. Then, when the "character icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the above-mentioned "pseudo continuous performance" is performed, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle symbol, it becomes a "lose". In addition, multiple "character icons" can also be stopped at the position of the middle pattern.

"Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are the same type of symbol, for example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it becomes a "loss", and when the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in "Normal reach", if the middle symbol does not stop and display and the "character icon" stops at the middle symbol position, it will develop into a "pseudo continuous effect", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, "Ninja reach" will occur. ”.

"Ninja Reach" is a reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach, and is, for example, a reach performance in which a ninja character tries to stop the left and right symbols and the same type of middle symbol. In "Ninja Reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it becomes a "lose", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same kind of symbol as the left and right symbols, it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in "Ninja Reach", when the middle symbol is not stopped and displayed and the "Great Decisive Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it develops into "Great Decisive Battle Reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and a "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 (5 character icons acquired), the "pseudo continuous effect" ” without doing so, it develops into ``the road to a decisive battle.''

"Road to the Decisive Battle" and "Road to the Goku Decisive Battle" refer to the same type of identification in which the player operates the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times and collects up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." This is a production of The "road to the decisive battle" and "the road to the ultimate decisive battle" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 251 to 253.

"Road to the Decisive Battle" is a performance in which the player operates the production button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons" since five character icons have already been acquired. be.

"Road to the Final Battle" is a performance in which the player operates the performance button device 6310 10 times to collect 10 "character icons" since no character icons have been acquired yet.

If the number of "character icons" collected in "Road to the decisive battle" or "Road to the final battle" is less than 10 ("obtained less than 10 character icons"), it will develop into "showdown reach" and collect If there are 10 "character icons" ("obtain 10 character icons"), it will develop into "Great Battle Reach".

"Confrontation Reach" is a reach performance that has higher expectations for a jackpot than Ninja Reach. For example, if an ally character faces off against an enemy character, it will be a "jackpot" if they win, and a "lose" if they lose. It is. Furthermore, in "Showdown Reach", a reach effect will be performed using the "character icons" collected in "Road to Battle". In addition, in the "showdown reach", when the "big battle icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the "showdown reach" develops into the "big battle reach". This "confrontation reach" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 254 and 255.

"Great Decisive Battle Reach" is a reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot among the reach performances in the normal game state. For example, if your army and the enemy army face off and your army wins, it will be a "jackpot", and your army will It is a reach performance where if the player is defeated, it is a "lose".

(Production flow in right-handed game state)
Among the right-handed game states, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and "low-accuracy time-saving game state," the game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is The first special symbol is given priority, and the first special symbol is subjected to variable display of decorative symbols, display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, change performance of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310, etc. In addition, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", a game ball can enter the second starting port 6140, and the second special symbol is given priority as the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. It performs variable displays of decorative patterns, display effects of characters, etc., voice effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, and the like. In addition, in the right-handed game state, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is being displayed variably, the special symbol that is being variably displayed is made to correspond to the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. It's okay.

When a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" or "low-accuracy time-saving game state", all the decorative patterns are disjointed and fluctuate at high speed in the display area of the display device 7. Start displaying ("Start variation of all symbols"). In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a disjoint manner in the display area of the display device 7 at high speed ("all symbols ”).

When all the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform either a "prediction inside a jewel" or a "lotus flower notice".

The "prediction inside the jewel" is, for example, a preview performance that displays the degree of expectation of a jackpot (for example, extreme heat) in the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 204).

The "lotus flower preview" is, for example, a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the opening of the bud suggests that the event will develop into a "door opening performance." The display of the buds can be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations due to pre-reading, and the display of the buds is continued even when the small winning game state is being played. The content of this "lotus flower preview" will be described in detail later using FIG. 256.

In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it is possible to perform a reach effect of "battle challenge" or "battle reach."

In the "Battle Challenge", the performance button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (see FIG. 203(d)), and the second performance operation section 6312 protruding upward is operated once (one blow) to create a performance role. When the object group 58 (see FIG. 204) falls, it is a reach effect in which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot.

In "Battle Reach", an ally character and an enemy boss face off, and each time the ally character attacks, the production button device 6310 changes (grows) in its operation mode, and the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes (grows). This is a ready-to-win performance in which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot when the user performs the operation and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 204) falls. The content of this "battle reach" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 257 and 258.

In addition, in the ``high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state'', it is possible to perform a reach effect such as a ``door opening effect'' or an ``eyes opening effect''.

The "door opening performance" is a reach performance in which the door gradually opens by operating the performance button device 6310 a plurality of times (sequentially hitting), and when the door is completely opened, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot.

The "eye opening effect" is a reach effect in which the ally character gradually opens his or her eyes, and if the eye opening is successful, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot.

The above-mentioned "development" includes displaying information necessary for the progress of a game or performance, or the progress of the game or performance itself, and includes the progress of the game or performance directly or indirectly. It is a concept that includes. In addition, in "development" that displays information necessary as the game or performance progresses, predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) may be displayed, or the displayed development information may be added or subtracted. It is a concept that also includes doing.

[8-9. Sub control circuit]
In order to execute the above effects, the control contents of the sub control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 231 to 240.

[8-9-1. Normal game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 231 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Design production pattern" is information that mainly determines the variation mode of the decorative pattern for the special symbol, related display effects such as characters, audio effects, change effects in the operation mode of the production button device 6310, etc. means. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, various display effects such as a preview presentation pattern can be executed in a superimposed manner.

In addition, the symbol production patterns in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine include a "pre-reach production pattern" that corresponds to the first half variation pattern of the special symbol, and a "reach production pattern" that corresponds to the second half variation pattern of the special symbol. It is composed of a combination of.

As shown in FIG. 231, the symbol production pattern determination table in the normal gaming state displays the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and the character icon described later in the second half of the first special symbol. The "second half number of icons" and "pre-reach production pattern" are associated, and the "second half variation pattern number", "second half number of icons", and "reach production pattern" of the first special symbol variation pattern command are associated with each other. are associated. Note that when the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "performance end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach performance pattern is executed as the ready-to-reach performance pattern.

In this embodiment, by combining the first half variation pattern number (09H to 10H) and the second half variation pattern number (14H to 16H, 24H to 26H), the reach of "the road to the decisive battle" or "the road to the final battle" is determined. After executing any of the pre-effect patterns 9 to 32, any of the reach effects patterns 4 to 8 and 12 to 16 of "confrontation reach" or "big decisive battle reach" can be executed. Also, pre-reach production patterns 9 to 32 of "Road to decisive battle" or "Road to ultimate decisive battle" and reach production patterns 4 to 8, 12 to 16 of "Confrontation reach" or "Great decisive battle reach" are " Since it is determined based on the "number of icons in the second half", the performances of both are related by the "number of icons in the second half", and if the number of icons in the second half is 10, reach performance patterns 8 and 16 of "Great Battle Reach" are executed, If the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, reach effect patterns 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 of "confrontation reach" can be executed.

In the symbol performance pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the second special symbol, all the variable pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby performance pattern".

This "standby performance pattern" is a decorative pattern in which the three main symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are kept on standby (stopped display) without being fluctuated and displayed, while the sub symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. This will only cause the display to blink. Even if this standby performance pattern is executed, the so-called irregular fluctuation can be quietly ended without the player paying attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

[8-9-2. Right-handed game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol production pattern determination table for determining a symbol production pattern in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 232 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table for the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 232, the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the right-handed gaming state includes the special symbol variation pattern command (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), selection rate (first random number), "Design production pattern" are associated with each other.

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, , has been replaced with selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 233 to 240 and the like. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, the first symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, but the first symbol production pattern and When both of the second symbol production patterns are executed at the same time (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time), the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" '', priority is given to the execution of the first symbol production pattern, and in the ``high-precision non-time-saving gaming state'', priority is given to the execution of the second symbol production pattern. ,

[8-9-3. Normal game state second half icon number determination table]
The second half icon number determination table for determining the second half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 233 is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the determination of the number of second-half icons is performed prior to determining the symbol production pattern (see FIG. 231) in the normal game state.

"Number of icons in the second half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "The Road to the Decisive Battle" and "The Road to the Final Battle," and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 10. However, the number is not limited. Further, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the "number of icons in the first half", which will be described later, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half"="number of icons in the first half"+α holds true.

As shown in FIG. 233, the second half icon number determination table associates the variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (second random value), and the "second half icon number". It is being

In this embodiment, when the "Great Battle Reach (Reach effect pattern 8, 16: see FIG. 231)" is performed corresponding to the second half variation pattern numbers (16H, 26H), the maximum number of second half icons is 10. The second half icon number determination table is configured such that the number of icons is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in "Road to the Decisive Battle" or "Road to the Final Battle", the "Great Decisive Battle Reach" will take place.

[8-9-4. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon number determination table for determining the first half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 234 is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "normal variation" and "pseudo continuous effect", and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 5, but the number is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first half icon number determination table associates the winning command (first half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (third random value), and the "first half icon number". ing.

Here, the "first special symbol winning command" refers to information for increasing the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, and fluctuation pattern information for the first special symbol ( In other words, it is a command including a first special symbol variation pattern command) and the like. This first special symbol winning command is scheduled to be sent when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and the production control command is sent during the next system timer interrupt process. In the process (see S322 in FIG. 45), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. This also applies to the "second special symbol winning command" described later (see S403 in FIG. 52).

In this embodiment, when "Road to the decisive battle" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern number (09H to 0FH), the number of first half icons is set so that the maximum number of five icons is determined as the first half icon number. A decision table is configured. As a result, when five character icons are finally displayed in the "normal variation" or "pseudo continuous effect", the "road to the decisive battle" will take place.

[8-9-5. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon display scenario determination table for determining the first half icon display scenario in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 235 is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half icon display scenario" refers to information that determines the display trigger, display timing, and number of character icons to be displayed, such as where, when, and how many of the character icons in the first half are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 235, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol (first half variation pattern number), the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fourth random number), "First half icon display scenario" is associated with the first half icon display scenario.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Moreover, "the said fluctuation|variation" is the variation display of the decorative pattern performed based on the lottery of the special symbol regarding the starting information which was the object of determination of the first half icon display scenario, and the lottery.

In this embodiment, the first-half icon display scenario is configured such that when one to three pseudo-continuous performances are performed, one or more character icons can be displayed each time the pseudo-continuous performance is performed. Thereby, it is possible to create an expectation that character icons will be added each time a pseudo continuous effect is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured such that one or more character icons can be displayed in the "cherry blossom accumulation preview" or "button challenge preview" before the pseudo continuous effect is performed. There is. The "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" have different execution timings, and both are configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. Normal game state first half icon collection order scenario determination table]
The first half icon collection order scenario determination table for determining the first half collection order scenario in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 236 is an example of the first half icon collection order scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half collection order scenario" refers to information that determines in what display order character icons of the type corresponding to the number of first half icons are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 236, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the "first half collection order scenario". are associated with each other.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half set order scenario" is illustrated for reference. Character icons A to E in "Western Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in "Eastern Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "F" to "J". It shows. Further, as will be described in detail later using FIG. 245, "A" and "F", "B" and "G", "C" and "H", "D" and "I", "E" and " The display positions of "J" correspond and have similar roles.

The last number of the first half set order scenario shown in FIG. 236 indicates "first half icon number" - "display order pattern", and for first half set order scenario 1-1, "first half icon number 1" - " This indicates "display order pattern 1".

In this embodiment, as the "display order pattern" of the first half set order scenario,
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from A (F) upwards (see Figure 245), such as "A → B → C → D → E (F → G → H → I → J)""Pattern1"
Characters are arranged in order from D (I) downwards, such as "D→C→B→A→E (I→H→G→F→J)", with E(J) at the end (see Figure 245). "Display order pattern 2" in which icons are displayed,
After displaying D (I) such as "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)", return to A (F) and move upward from A (F). "Display order pattern 3" in which character icons are displayed in order (see Figure 245);
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from E (J) down (see Figure 245), such as "E → D → C → B → A (J → I → H → G → F)" Pattern 4". Note that the number and order contents of display order patterns are not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, "display order pattern 1" is a normal display order pattern, "display order pattern 2" is a display order pattern that improves the expectation of a jackpot, and "display order pattern 3" is a pseudo consecutive pattern. "Display order pattern 4" is a display order pattern that suggests that a battle will be performed, ``display order pattern 4'' is a display order pattern that suggests that a decisive battle path or a final battle path will be performed. In this manner, in this embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed can give interest to the future game content and further improve the interest of the game.

[8-9-7. Normal game state cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table]
A cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table for determining cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 237 is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 237, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table is determined by the "winning command of the first special symbol (first half fluctuation pattern number)", the "pending number of first special symbols", and the first half icon display scenario. The "number of character icons displayed" (see FIG. 235) displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the selection rate (sixth random number), and the "cherry blossom accumulation notice presentation pattern" are associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table, "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation notice production pattern" is illustrated for reference. Further, "the variation" refers to a special symbol lottery for the starting information for which the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined, and a variable display of decorative symbols performed based on the lottery. "Preliminary variation" refers to a variation display of a decorative pattern that is started before "the variation in question". Regarding this advance fluctuation, it is executed multiple times depending on the number of reservations of the first special symbol, and if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is 4, advance fluctuation will be executed three times from the next fluctuation, If the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 3, two preliminary variations will be executed from the next variation, and if the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 2, one preliminary variation will be executed from the next variation. will be executed. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a maximum of two advance fluctuations can be executed, but the configuration may be such that a maximum of three preliminary fluctuations can be executed.

As mentioned above, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a notice that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" will be displayed. This is the content that will be carried out. Therefore, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" consists of a staged effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages and an icon display effect that displays icons.

The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 204) of the display device 7, but the cherry blossoms are not accumulated. It is also possible to perform a failed preview performance (Sakura accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0). As a result, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the cherry blossom accumulation notice as a whole and add interest to whether or not cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, the "yakuza icon" is expected to be displayed each time the stage performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice develops (in the order of cherry blossom accumulation stage 1 notice < cherry blossom accumulation stage 2 notice < cherry blossom accumulation stage 3 notice). The cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table is configured such that the number of characters and the number of displayed "character icons" increases. As a result, it is possible to add interest to the progress of the stage presentation (the accumulation of cherry blossoms) and to further improve the interest of the game. In particular, since the stage performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance fluctuation and the fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game over a plurality of fluctuations.

[8-9-8. Showdown Reach Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying a support icon in a confrontation reach in a normal game state will be explained. FIG. 238 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Support icon display scenario" is the display content displayed by the support icon in response to the player's operation of the performance button device 6310 in the confrontation reach, and is associated with the number of operations of the performance button device 6310 and the display content. This refers to information determined by Further, the "support icon" of the confrontation reach will be described in detail later using FIGS. 254 and 255.

As shown in FIG. 238, the support icon display scenario determination table includes the reach effect pattern corresponding to the confrontation reach (see FIG. 231), the determined number of second-half icons, the selection rate (seventh random value), and " "Support icon display scenario" is associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, a "support icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Here, "line" refers to the character's dialogue that is displayed according to the support icon, "opportunity" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot, and "fierce" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot. is displayed with extremely enthusiastic characters, indicating that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than that of ``opportunity''. Furthermore, "LED" refers to the LED group 46 emitting a predetermined light, and "big battle" refers to the display of a "big battle icon." The content displayed by the "support icon display scenario" is not limited to the above, but includes "Change of pending image" which changes the display mode of the pending image, and "Change of pending image" which causes the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 204) to fall. Characters such as "Accessories for performance" and "Change of performance button" for changing the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "big battle icon" is always displayed when reach effect patterns 6, 7, 14, and 15 develop from confrontation reach to big decisive battle reach. has been done. As a result, when the "Big Decisive Battle Icon" is displayed as the support icon for the Confrontation Reach, you can perform the Great Decisive Battle Reach.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower preview decision table for right-handed game mode]
A lotus flower preview determination table for determining a lotus flower preview in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 239 is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 239, the lotus flower notice determination table includes the "second special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)", "pending number of second special symbols", and selection. The rate (eighth random number) is associated with the "lotus flower preview production pattern."

As mentioned above, the "lotus flower preview" is a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the opening of the bud suggests that it will develop into a "door opening performance." The buds can be displayed over multiple fluctuations (prior fluctuations).

Furthermore, the lotus flower preview performance patterns include a "lotus flower success notice" preview performance pattern and a "lotus flower failure notice" preview performance pattern. In the "Lotus Flower Success Notice" preview performance pattern, buds will be displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower notice performance pattern is determined, triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol, and It has a production pattern where the buds open. In addition, in the preview performance pattern of "Lotus flower failure notice", the bud will be displayed from the next variation (pre-variation) after the lotus flower preview production pattern is determined by the winning command of the second special symbol, and the corresponding bud will be displayed. The production pattern is such that the buds disappear when fluctuations occur.

In this embodiment, when the "door opening effect" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern number (41H, 45H), the preview effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" is determined at a predetermined selection rate. The lotus flower preview decision table is configured. As a result, the door opening effect will be performed after the lotus flower success notice is given.

[8-9-10. Jackpot game state fan preview decision table]
A fan notice determination table for determining a fan notice in a jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 240 is an example of a fan preview determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is such that in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, a fan falls from the display area of the display device 7, This is a preview that suggests whether or not the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area is a jackpot depending on the color of the fan. That is, in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, this is a notice that suggests a so-called pending series of wins. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the "fan notice" is performed only in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the "fan notice" is also performed in the jackpot game state of the second special symbol. You may.

In addition, the "folding fan notice" indicates that the number of second special symbols on hold is the upper limit of two (starting information is stored in each of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) and (2)). ). Incidentally, it may be configured such that the "folding fan notice" is performed regardless of the number of second special symbols on hold.

As shown in FIG. 240, the fan preview determination table includes the starting information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) and the second special symbol starting memory. The starting information (jackpot information, round information) stored in areas (1) to (2), the selection rate (9th random number), and the "fan preview production pattern" are associated.

Also, the jackpot information means a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot, and the round information means a symbol random number value for determining the number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In addition, the fan preview performance patterns are "White Fan Notice" where a white fan falls, "Red Fan Notice" where a red fan falls, and "Rainbow Fan" where a rainbow-colored fan falls. There are two types of preview performance patterns: ``Notice'' and ``Golden Fan Notice,'' in which a golden folding fan falls.

In this embodiment, the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Preview" suggests that jackpot starting information of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area, and " In the preview effect pattern of ``Rainbow fan preview'', the lotus flower preview determination table is configured to suggest that the 10R jackpot starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, in the preview production pattern of "Golden Fan Preview", the Lotus Flower Preview Determination Table is configured so as to suggest that the 2R jackpot starting information is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area. .

Therefore, the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" and the notice performance pattern of "Rainbow Fan Notice" are fan notices that suggest the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the notice performance pattern of "Golden Fan Notice" It can be said that this is a fan preview that suggests a jackpot with the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, when jackpot starting information is stored in both the first special symbol starting storage area and the second special symbol starting storage area, "golden fan" indicating a jackpot of the second special symbol is used. In order to make it possible to determine the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" or the "Rainbow Fan Notice" that suggests the jackpot of the first special symbol, even though the notice performance pattern of "Notice" could not be determined, the lotus A flower notice determination table is configured.

[8-9-11. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 241, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S6500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S6500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S6510 to S6580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S6510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the production button device 6310 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the production button device 6310, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the production button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310. Furthermore, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information, and inputs the operation information according to the current situation such as the production. Set the reception time to allow the input operation information, the validity period to invalidate the input operation information, and the invalidation period to invalidate the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the production button device 6310 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6530.

In S6530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 205). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6550.

In S6550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 205). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6560.

In S6560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 205). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6570.

In S6570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 205). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6580.

In S6580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 205). The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the production button device 6310 or vibrating the production button device 6310 based on a message (production button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[8-9-12. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 241) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this process, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are determined based on the command sent from the main CPU 201. A performance pattern is determined. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 243 and 244. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6537.

In S6537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 241).

[8-9-13. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 243 and 244, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6531 in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 242) will be described. FIGS. 243 and 244 are flowcharts showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "first special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S6531-1 that it is a "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of pending first special symbols and performs a first pending update display process for updating and displaying a pending image corresponding to the number of pending first special symbols. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-3.

In S6531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state".

If it is determined in S6531-3 that the game is in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs first half icon number determination processing to determine the first half icon number in the normal gaming state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value with reference to the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs icon scenario determination processing. In this icon scenario determination process, both the first half icon display scenario determination process that determines the first half icon display scenario and the first half set order scenario determination process that determines the first half set order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the first half icon display scenario is determined.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, determine the first half set order scenario.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half collection order scenario determination process are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs cherry blossom accumulation notice determination processing to determine the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal gaming state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination process, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shown in FIG. A cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined based on the number of icons displayed and the sixth random number. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-7, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "second special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S6531-7 that it is a "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-10.

In S6531-8, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of second special symbols on hold and performs a second pending update display process for updating and displaying the pending image corresponding to the number of second special symbols on hold. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs lotus flower preview determination processing to determine the lotus flower preview in the right-handed game state.

In the lotus flower notice determination process, the lotus flower notice determination table shown in FIG. Determine the flower preview performance pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big winning opening command".

If it is determined in S6531-10 that the command is a "winning command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "winning command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-20.

In S6531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs fan preview determination processing to determine the fan preview in the jackpot game state.

In the fan advance notice determination process, it is first determined whether or not it is a jackpot game state with the first special symbol, and if it is not a jackpot game state with the first special symbol, the fan advance notice determination process is ended. Next, if the first special symbol is in a jackpot game state, it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is 2, which is the upper limit, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 2, which is the upper limit. If not, the fan advance notice determination process ends. Then, when the first special symbol is in a jackpot game state and the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two, the fan notice determination table shown in FIG. 240 is referred to, and the first special symbol starting memory is A fan preview presentation pattern is determined based on the starting information stored in the area, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area, and the ninth random number value. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S6531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-30.

In S6531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a second half icon number determination process to determine the second half icon number in the normal gaming state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 233 is referred to, and the second half icon number is determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-22.

In S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol presentation pattern determination processing to determine a symbol presentation pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-23.

In the symbol production pattern determination process, first, the gaming state is referred to, and if it is a normal gaming state, the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231 is determined, and if it is a right-handed game state, the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 232 is determined. decide.

When the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231 is determined, the determined symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231 is referred to, and if it is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is Based on the command and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above, a pre-reach performance pattern and a reach performance pattern are determined. Further, if it is a normal game state and the variable pattern command is the second special symbol, a standby performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when a ready-to-win effect pattern is determined, the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. , determine the support icon display scenario.

When the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 232 is determined, the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine.

In S6531-23, the sub CPU 301 performs other preview performance pattern determination processing to determine a dialogue preview and a button challenge preview. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In addition, in the dialogue announcement in the announcement performance pattern determination process, in order to suggest the possibility of a jackpot based on the character's dialogue displayed, a dialogue announcement determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined Based on the selection rate (10th random number, etc.), a dialogue preview performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above is referred to, and the number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge preview according to the first half icon display scenario. If so, a first button challenge preview performance pattern in which the number of character icons to be displayed is displayed is determined. In this first button challenge preview production pattern, the number of character icons displayed is displayed as the player operates the production button device 6310 multiple times, but if the player does not operate the production button device 6310 Even in this case, the number of character icons to be displayed is displayed after the reception time of the production button device 6310 ends.

On the other hand, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge preview due to the first half icon display scenario, the character icon indicating the expected level of jackpot and the content of the developing reach will not be displayed. The second button challenge preview production pattern is created based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (11th random value, etc.) so that it can be displayed with reference to a button challenge preview determination table (not shown). Determine. In this second button challenge preview performance pattern, character icons are displayed as the player operates the performance button device 6310 multiple times. In addition, in the second button challenge preview performance pattern, if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the text icon is not displayed, but after the reception time for the performance button ends, the text icon is displayed. You can do it like this.

In S6531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S6531-30 that it is a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-40.

In S6531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed according to the type of the pattern designation command. Further, when the type of symbol designation command is a command corresponding to a jackpot symbol, jackpot round number data is set. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S6531-40 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-50.

In S6531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern stop process to stop displaying the decorative pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command".

If it is determined in S6531-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-60.

In S6531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot performance determination process to determine a jackpot performance pattern for performing the jackpot performance. In this jackpot effect determination process, a jackpot effect pattern is determined according to the jackpot round number data set in S6531-31. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S6531-60 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-70.

In S6531-61, the sub CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-62.

In S6531-62, the sub CPU 301 performs performance mode determination processing to determine the performance mode.

In this production mode determination process, when the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is set, "battle mode" is set as the production mode, and when the "high-precision non-time-saving game state" is set, the "golden hour mode" is set as the production mode, When in the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "dream mode" is set as the performance mode. Furthermore, when in the "normal gaming state", the game alternately shifts between the "Western mode" and the "Eastern mode" based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number, etc.). In addition, when in the "normal game state", the transition between "Western mode" and "Eastern mode" will be made based on a predetermined number of changes in the special symbol, not based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number, etc.). It may be configured as follows. In addition, in the normal game state, the present invention is not limited to the two production modes of "Western mode" and "Eastern mode", but may be configured to allow transition to three or more production modes. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

In S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S6531-70 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-73.

In S6531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display performance pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display performance pattern for performing the performance during standby of the game. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-72.

In S6531-73, the sub CPU 301 performs a production button initialization command that instructs the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the production button device 6310 to the first operation mode as the initial operation mode (see FIG. 203(a)). processing. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

The production button initialization process is configured to be performed when a "demonstration display command" is received, but in addition to this, at least a "special symbol winning command" and a "special symbol fluctuation pattern command" are executed. , "Special symbol production stop command" or "Jackpot start display command" may also be configured to be performed when any one of the commands is received.

Further, the production button initialization process may be configured to be performed depending on the current gaming state and various commands. For example, the production button initialization process is performed regardless of the gaming state when a "demonstration display command" is received, but in the normal gaming state, "special symbol winning command", "special symbol fluctuation pattern command", or "special symbol It may also be configured to be performed when any one of the commands ``production stop command'' is received. In particular, since the average fluctuation time of the special symbols and the like vary depending on the gaming state, and the frequency of operation of the production button device 6310 differs, the production button device 6310 can be initialized while taking into account the gaming state.

In S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 242).

[8-10. Performance contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images of "Western mode" and "Eastern mode" in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 245 is an example of the normal display image of the West mode and the East mode in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 245(a) is an example of the normal display image of the West mode in the normal gaming state. As an example, FIG. 245(b) is an example of a normal display image in the East Army mode in the normal game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 204, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the performance section 6116, which is an annular structure, is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and , an upper display area 7a is formed as a display area of the display device 7. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in this upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 245(a), in the normal display image of the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the left side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol. A pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayable. Also, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. The sub-symbol 6072A is configured to be small and displayable. In the normal gaming state, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the left symbol 6071L, middle symbol 6071C, right symbol 6071R, and first sub-symbol 6071A are variablely displayed, but the second special symbol is When variable display is performed, only the second sub-symbol 6072A is variable displayed.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed according to the number of reserved first special symbols. Special 1 first pending image 6072a showing that starting information is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (1); Special 1 showing that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) Second pending image 6072b, special first third pending image 6072c indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (3), starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4) A special first and fourth pending image 6072d is configured to be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of reserved second special symbols is not displayed, numbers etc. that display the number of reserved second special symbols are also configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image in the Western Army mode, a Western Army icon display area 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. The Western Army icon display area 6074L displays an icon A display image 6074a indicating that character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war), and a character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army participates in the war). An icon B display image 6074b indicating that character icon C (for example, Western Army General C participating in the war), an icon C display image 6074c indicating that character icon C (for example, Western Army General D participating in the war), and character icon D (for example, Western Army General D participating in the war) were displayed. An icon D display image 6074d indicating that a character icon E (for example, General E of the Western Army participating in the war) is displayed is configured to be displayable. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the Western army icon display section 6074L corresponding to that character icon is displayed in a lit state.

As shown in FIG. 245(b), in the normal display image of the East Army mode in the normal game state, as in the West Army mode, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6071R, the first sub symbol 6071A, the 2 sub-symbol 6072A, special 1 first reserved image 6072a, special 1 second reserved image 6072b, special 1 third reserved image 6072c, and special 1 fourth reserved image 6072d are configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image in the East Army mode, an East Army icon display area 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. This Eastern Army icon display area 6074R includes an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (for example, Eastern Army General F participates in the war) is displayed, and a character icon G (for example, Eastern Army General G participates in the war). An icon G display image 6074g indicating that a character icon H (for example, General H of the Eastern Army participates in the war) is displayed, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that a character icon H (for example, General H of the Eastern Army participates in the war), and a character icon I (for example, General I of the Eastern Army participates in the war) are displayed. An icon I display image 6074i indicating that a character icon J (for example, General J of the Eastern Army participating in the war) is displayed is configured to be displayable. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the Eastern Army icon display section 6074R corresponding to that character icon is displayed in a lit state.

In this embodiment, in the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-mentioned "first half icons", and the icon display image lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section 6074L. The number corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above. In addition, in the Togun mode in the normal game state, the character icons F to J correspond to the "first half icons", and the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the Togun icon display section 6074R is the same as described above. This corresponds to the "number of icons in the first half".

In this embodiment, the Western army icon display section 6074L and the East army icon display section 6074R are configured using the display device 7 as predetermined display images, but LEDs for effect that can individually light up multiple locations are used. A display device may be provided separately, and an LED display device for presentation may be used.

(Production of cherry blossom accumulation notice)
Next, the presentation of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be explained. FIGS. 246 and 247 are examples of display images illustrating the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In the explanation of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 245 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, and may interfere with the explanation of the effect. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 6071A and the second sub-symbol 6072A, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described in FIGS. 248 to 258.

Using Figures 246 and 247, a staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is carried out in two stages: a preliminary change and the start of the change, and a cherry blossom accumulation that displays "two character icons" in the change. 2-stage notice - A cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the YK7 notice performance pattern (see Figure 237), or a staged display that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, is performed in two stages: preliminary fluctuation and the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation. , An example of the presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the YK24 notice presentation pattern (see FIG. 237), which displays the "yakuza icon" with this variation, will be explained.

FIG. 246(a) is an example of a display image when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state when the number of reserved first special symbols is two. Further, as shown in FIG. 246(a), none of the icon display images is lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section.

FIG. 246(b) is an example of a display image when variable display of decorative symbols is started as preliminary variation from the state of FIG. 246(a). As shown in FIG. 246(b), when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the preliminary variation. The desired display image will be produced.

FIG. 246(c) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 246(b) and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. As shown in FIG. 246(c), when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a 1-level accumulation image indicating that the cherry blossoms have been accumulated by 1 level is displayed in the upper display area 7a, and then a decorative pattern is displayed. Performs a stop display. In addition, if the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a, but the cherry blossom accumulation notice fails to accumulate the cherry blossoms (cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0), one stage of accumulation will be carried out in the upper display area 7a. The image will not be displayed.

FIG. 246(d) is an example of a display image when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the state shown in FIG. 246(c) or as the variation. As shown in FIG. 246(d), when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a. The desired display image will be produced.

FIG. 247(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state shown in FIG. 246(d). As shown in FIG. 247(e), when cherry blossoms are newly drawn into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulation image indicating that two levels of cherry blossoms have been accumulated is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 247(f) is an example of a display image when character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war) is displayed from the state of FIG. 247(e) as a result of a button challenge notice or the like. As shown in FIG. 247(f), when character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army joins the war) is displayed by a button challenge notice that is different from the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the icon A display image is displayed in the Western Army icon display area. It is lit up, and "One Person Gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a two-stage accumulated image and a character image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 247(g) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in FIG. 247(g), at a predetermined timing such as before the reach, the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released, and a display is performed in which the cherry blossoms cover the entire display area. Note that the timing at which the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely changed as appropriate.

FIG. 247 (h-1) is an example of a display image when a "yakuza icon" is displayed after the cherry blossoms are released, indicating that the path will lead to the ultimate battle. As shown in Figure 247 (h-1), in the case of Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2nd Stage Notice - YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "yakuza icon" indicating that the path will progress to the ultimate battle will be displayed. Is displayed. After that, the road to the ultimate battle will be staged.

FIG. 247 (h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the cherry blossoms are released. As shown in FIG. 247 (h-2), in the case of cherry blossom accumulation stage 2 notice - YK7, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army joins the war) and character icon C ( For example, two character icons for Western Army General C (participating in the war) are displayed. Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit and displayed in the western army icon display section, and "3 people gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, in FIGS. 246 and 247, an example of the production of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the notice performance patterns of the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage notice - YK7 and the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage notice - YK24 has been described, but other cherry blossom accumulation notice performances are described. The same applies to the preview effect pattern (see FIG. 237).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation preview of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change), and the display It is possible to arouse interest in the results and further improve the interest in the game.

(Pseudo continuous performance)
Next, the performance of the "pseudo continuous performance" will be explained. FIGS. 248 to 250 are examples of display images illustrating the pseudo continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 248 to 250, two pseudo-continuous performances are performed, and five character icons are displayed, which corresponds to the first half icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see FIG. 235), which progress to a decisive battle. An example of pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. Furthermore, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo-continuous effect explained using FIGS. 248 to 250 is based on the first half set order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the display order pattern 1.

FIG. 248(a) is an example of a display image when all the decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 248(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the Western Army icon display section are lit up, and "2 people are gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a. Displayed.

FIG. 248(b) is an example of a display image when the left symbol is temporarily stopped and then the right symbol is also temporarily stopped.

FIG. 248(c) is an example of a display image when the right symbol, which has been temporarily stopped and displayed, starts variable display again (right symbol sliding) from the state of FIG. 248(b).

FIG. 248(d) is an example of a display image when the first pseudo-continuous stimulation effect is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol. As shown in Figure 248(d), when the right symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a display indicating whether or not "Character Icon C (Western Army General C Participates in War)" is displayed at the center symbol is displayed. It will be done.

FIG. 249(e) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo-coupling effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 249(e), when the pseudo-coupling effect is successful and the "character icon C (Western Army General C participates in the war)" stops at the middle symbol position, the icon C display image is displayed in the Western Army icon display area. is lit up, and "3 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, if the first pseudo-continuation incitement effect fails, "Character icon C (Western army general C participation)" will be erased, the right symbol will temporarily stop displaying a different type of symbol from the left symbol, and then all The decorative pattern will stop displaying and it will be a "lose".

FIG. 249(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon is stopped at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 249(f), "Pseudo × 1 time" indicating the first pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the first pseudo continuous effect, and all the decorations of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed. The symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 249(g) is an example of a display image when the second pseudo-coupling effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 249(g), when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (Western Army General E participates in the war)" appear at the center symbol. ” will be displayed to indicate whether or not to stop.

FIG. 249(h) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo-coupling effect is successful. As shown in Figure 249 (h), when the "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (Western Army General E participates in the war)" stop at the position of the middle symbol, the Western Army icon display area appears. The icon D display image and the icon E display image are displayed with lighting, and "5 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

Also, when the second pseudo-coupling effect fails, "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (Western Army General E participates in the war)" are deleted, and the right symbol is the same as the left symbol. A temporary stop will be displayed with the symbol, and a normal reach will be performed.

FIG. 250(i) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon is stopped at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 250(i), "Pseudo × 2 times" indicating the second pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the second pseudo continuous effect, and all decorations of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed. The symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 250(j) is an example of a display image when all the icon display images are lit in the Western Army icon display area and the "road icon" is displayed, which indicates that the road will develop into a decisive battle. . As shown in FIG. 250(j), after the second pseudo-sequence performance started, all the icon display images were lit up in the Western Army icon display area, indicating that it would develop into a decisive battle. A “road icon” will be displayed. After that, the road to the final battle will be staged.

In addition, in FIGS. 248 to 250, an example of the pseudo continuous effect corresponding to the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39 and the first half set order scenario 5-1 has been described, but other first half icon display scenarios (see FIG. 235) ) and other first-half set order scenarios (see FIG. 236).

In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment is based not only on whether or not re-variation is performed, but also on the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-variation, the type of character icons, the display order of character icons, etc. It is possible to add new interest to the game and further improve the interest in the game.

(Production of the road to the decisive battle)
Next, I will explain the production of ``The Road to the Decisive Battle.'' FIGS. 251 and 252 are examples of display images illustrating the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 251 and 252, pre-reach production patterns 9 and 12, which are productions of the road to the decisive battle that are developed from the Western army mode, and in which 8 character icons are displayed and develop into a confrontation reach. , 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see FIG. 231).

Here, the road to the decisive battle is a performance that aims to have the player operate the performance button device 6310 a first number of times and collect 10 character icons by the end of a predetermined time. An "operation performance time" is set in which the performance button device 6310 can be operated one number of times. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) includes a reception time of 3 seconds for the production button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result, and the production button is operated 5 times as the first number of operations. In order to be able to operate the device 6310, the "operation presentation time for the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds. The configuration of the operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle, the reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be described in detail later using FIG. 259.

As shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, in the performance of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western Army mode, it is assumed that all icon display images in the Western Army icon display area are lit. Therefore, near the Western Army icon display section, a text image of "Western Army Unite" is displayed, indicating that all the icon display images of the Western Army icon display section are lit. Furthermore, in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a ``countdown display image'' is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the ``operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle'' ends. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310 (see FIG. 259), but instead of the countdown display image, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310. A number image indicating the number of operations may be displayed.

FIG. 251(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the effect button device 6310. As shown in FIG. 251(a), when it is possible to operate the performance button device 6310, there is a performance button image for prompting the player to operate the performance button device 6310, and a performance below the performance button image. A gauge image indicating the reception time of the button device 6310 is displayed. The same is true for the production of the road to the final battle.

FIG. 251(b) is an example in which "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 251(b), when the "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed, the icon H display image is illuminated in the Eastern Army icon display area, and the character icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. "6 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number.

FIG. 251(c) is an example of a display image when the second operation of the production button device 6310 is possible.

FIG. 251(d) is an example of a display image when "Approaching!?" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the production button device 6310 is operated for the second time. This "Approaching!?" icon is an icon that corresponds to a so-called failure without the character icon being displayed, and the selection rate and scenario are adjusted so that a predetermined number of character icons are finally displayed. etc., the displayed icons are adjusted.

FIG. 252(e) is an example of a display image when the third to fourth operations of the production button device 6310 have been completed and it is possible to perform the fifth (final) operation of the production button device 6310. .

FIG. 252(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the fifth time (last time). As shown in FIG. 252(f), when "Character icon G (Eastern Army General G participates in the war)" and "Character icon F (Eastern Army General F participates in the war)" are displayed as the predetermined icons, the East Army icon display area The icon G display image and the icon F display image are displayed with lighting, and "8 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 252(g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image reaches zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

FIG. 252(h) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a character image indicating that the character image will develop into a confrontation reach is displayed. Here, in the confrontation reach, since the effect is performed using the displayed character icons, a character image indicating the number of character icons is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a, as shown in FIG. 252(h). ing. After the display shown in FIG. 252(h) is performed, a confrontation reach effect will be performed.

In addition, in FIGS. 251 and 252, pre-reach performance patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 are shown for the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode. We have explained an example of the corresponding performance of the road to a decisive battle, but we also discuss the performance of the road to a decisive battle developed from the East Army mode, and other pre-reach performance patterns (see Figure 231) that perform the road to a decisive battle. The same is true.

In this way, the performance of the road to the decisive battle of this embodiment is a performance in which the player aims to collect 10 character icons by operating the performance button device 6310 by the end of a predetermined time, and the player It is possible to encourage the players to actively participate in the game, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

(Production of the road to the final battle)
Next, I will explain the production of ``The Road to the Final Battle.'' FIG. 253 is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of the road to the ultimate battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 253 is a production of the path to the final battle that is developed from the Western Army mode, and is a pre-reach production pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and the final battle progresses to the final battle (see FIG. 231). We will explain an example of the production of the road to the final battle that corresponds to.

Here, the path to the ultimate battle is a specific performance similar to the path to the decisive battle, and the player is made to operate the performance button device 6310 a second number of times until the predetermined time period ends. This is a performance aimed at collecting character icons, and an "operation performance time" is set during which the performance button device 6310 can be operated a second number of times. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) includes a reception time of 3 seconds for the production button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result, and the second operation is performed more often than the first operation. The "operation performance time for the road to the final battle" is set to 40 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated 10 times.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the performance of the road to the ultimate battle developed from the Western army mode, the "operation performance time of the road to the ultimate battle" is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. A "countdown display image" is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the end. In addition, in this embodiment, the "countdown display image" suggests the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310, but instead of the countdown display image, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310. Images may also be displayed.

FIG. 253(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the effect button device 6310. At the start of the performance of the road to the final battle, the icon display image lit and displayed in the western army icon display section continues to be displayed until the performance of the road to the final battle is started. In FIG. 253(a), character icon A has already been displayed by the time the presentation of the road to the ultimate battle begins, and the icon A display image continues to be lit in the western army icon display area.

FIG. 253(b) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon D is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 253(b), when "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon H (Western Army General H participates in the war)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the Western Army icon display area The icon D display image of and the icon H display image of the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up, and "3 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 253(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the production button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In FIG. 253(c), all the icon display images in the Western Army icon display area and the East Army icon display area are lit.

FIG. 253(d) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a character image indicating that the game will develop into a big decisive battle reach is displayed. At this time, the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. After the display shown in FIG. 253(d) is performed, a big decisive battle reach effect will be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 253, there is a pre-reach production pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and progresses to the great decisive battle, which is the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode. Although we have explained an example of the corresponding path to the final battle, we also provide the path to the ultimate battle developed from the East Army mode, and other pre-reach performance patterns that perform the path to the great decisive battle (Figure 231). The same applies to (see).

In this embodiment, in the presentation of the road to the decisive battle or the presentation of the road to the decisive battle, the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the Western army icon display section and the East army icon display section is set to It corresponds to the number of pieces.

(Direction of confrontation reach)
Next, the performance of "Confrontation Reach" will be explained. FIGS. 254 and 255 are examples of display images illustrating the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Examples of performances corresponding to reach performance patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see FIG. 231) in which a confrontation reach is performed after eight character icons are displayed will be described using FIGS. 254 and 255.

FIG. 254(a) is an example of a display image when the confrontation reach is started. As shown in FIG. 254(a) (and FIG. 252(h)), in the upper display area 7a, a text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the presentation of the road to the decisive battle and the road to the final battle continues. is displayed.

FIG. 254(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display device 7. . Note that the decorative pattern is displayed in a small movement at the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to spoil the presentation of the character.

FIG. 254(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted and displayed to the number of support icons. As shown in FIG. 254(b), in the upper display area 7a, a text image indicating 8 character icons, ``8 people in progress,'' is converted and displayed as ``support x 8'' as the number of support icons. An image is rendered. Note that when "9 people are gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of nine character icons, the display is converted to "support x 9" as the number of support icons. The image will be rendered.

FIG. 254(c) is a display image when an enemy character appears, and is an example of a display image when eight character icons are converted and displayed as eight support icons, following FIG. 254(b). It is.

FIG. 254(d) is an example of a display image when a friendly character is confronting an enemy character, and is an example of a display image when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. As shown in FIG. 254(d), in the upper display area 7a, there is a text image of "PUSH" for prompting the player to operate the performance button device 6310, and a character image of "PUSH" that prompts the player to operate the effect button device 6310 and a character image that has already been displayed on the road to the decisive battle or the ultimate decisive battle. A support icon consisting of a face image (for example, the face of General A of the Western Army) corresponding to the displayed character icon is displayed.

FIG. 255(e) is a display image when an ally character is confronting an enemy character, when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. This is an example of a display image. In FIG. 255(e), when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated, and the words "Opportunity" are displayed as a predetermined effect result. Note that what is displayed as a predetermined performance result is not limited to "opportunity", but also "dialogue", "opportunity", "extreme heat", and "LED" based on the support icon display scenario (see Figure 238). ” or “Great Battle Icon” can be displayed.

FIG. 255(f) is a display image when an ally character is confronting an enemy character, and when the production button device 6310 is operated and the "big battle icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. This is an example of a display image. After the display shown in FIG. 255(f) is performed, a big decisive battle reach effect will be performed.

FIG. 255(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character and displays the final result. As shown in FIG. 255 (h-1), if the ally character wins, it becomes a jackpot, and as shown in FIG. 255 (h-2), if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

In addition, in FIGS. 254 and 255, examples of performances corresponding to reach performance patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14, in which a confrontation reach is performed, have been described, but an example of a performance in which a confrontation reach is performed after nine character icons are displayed is explained. The same applies to the effects of other reach effect patterns (see FIG. 231).

In this way, the performance of the confrontation reach in this embodiment can be performed according to the number of character icons collected up to the confrontation reach (direction of the road to the decisive battle or road to the final battle), and is more It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production of lotus flower preview)
Next, I will explain the production of ``Lotus Flower Preview''. FIG. 256 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the lotus flower preview in the sixth pachinko game machine.

An example of presentation of a lotus flower notice corresponding to the notice presentation pattern of a success notice of a lotus flower (see FIG. 239) will be described with reference to FIG. 256.

FIG. 256(a) is an example of a display image when a bud is displayed in advance variation in the "golden hour mode" which is a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 256(a), in the "Golden Hour Mode" which is a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the character image "Golden Hour" indicating the Golden Hour mode and the A count display image "beads" that cumulatively counts the number of game balls that enter the first prize opening 6131 and the second prize winning opening 6151 and are paid out, and an operation instruction image "beads" for making a right-handed hit. "Right-handed" is displayed.

FIG. 256(b) is an example of a display image when the buds continue to be displayed although the preliminary variation has ended. Furthermore, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the previous change will continue to be displayed when the change starts.

Here, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the preliminary fluctuation will continue to be displayed from the preliminary fluctuation to the small winning gaming state to the fluctuation, even if the preliminary fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a small win. Therefore, in the lotus flower preview performance of this embodiment, the lotus flower can be continuously displayed without interrupting the performance by using the small winning game state that is easy to shift to when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140. You can enjoy flower forecasts.

FIG. 256(c) is an example of a display image when the buds are displayed as open when the fluctuation is started and a predetermined time has elapsed. When this bud opens, it is suggested that the "door opening effect" shown in FIG. 256(d) will develop.

In addition, in FIG. 256, an example of the performance of the lotus flower notice corresponding to the notice performance pattern of the notice of success of the lotus flower was explained. The same goes for the production of flower announcements.

(Battle reach performance)
Next, the production of "Battle Reach" will be explained. FIGS. 257 and 258 are examples of display images illustrating the battle reach effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 257 and 258, the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode in the first symbol production patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 (see FIG. 232). An example of the corresponding battle reach performance will be explained.

FIG. 257(a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance performance performed when a battle reach is started. In battle reach, it is possible to perform a button promotion chance effect first.

As shown in FIG. 257(a), above the display area of the display device 7, "button operation icons" indicating the operation mode of the production button device 6310 are scrolled from left to right. Further, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a “performance button state image” indicating the current state of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is displayed.

FIG. 257(b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is stopped and displayed and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes.

As shown in FIG. 257(b), in the upper display area 7a, a button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the production button device 6310 is displayed in a stopped state. Correspondingly, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a performance button state image indicating the state of the third operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 257(c) is an example of a display image when an ally character and an enemy boss are facing off.

As shown in FIG. 257(c), a button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the production button device 6310 is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 257(d) is an example of a display image when an attack of an ally character hits an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 257(d), when the attack of an ally character hits the enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level, indicating the fourth operation mode of the production button device 6310. The button operation icon changes to "Lv4 One-Blow" and is displayed. Note that if the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy boss or the enemy boss attacks the ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

Continuing from FIG. 257(d), FIG. 258(e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes.

As shown in FIG. 257(e), since the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the button operation icon for "Lv4 blow", the production button is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. The effect button state image indicating the state of the fourth operation mode of the device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 258 (f-1) shows a case where the confrontation between an ally character and an enemy boss is repeated, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player operates the production button device 6310. This is an example of a display image.

FIG. 258 (f-2) shows a case where the confrontation between an ally character and an enemy boss is repeated, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fifth operation mode, and the player operates the production button device 6310. This is an example of a display image.

FIG. 258 (g-1) shows that the player operates the performance button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 258 (f-1) or FIG. 258 (f-1), and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 204) This is an example of a display image showing that the player has fallen (not shown) and has won a jackpot.

In FIG. 258 (g-2), the player operates the performance button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 258 (f-1) or FIG. 258 (f-1), and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 204) This is an example of a display image indicating that the object did not fall (not shown) and was a loss.

In addition, in FIG. 257 and FIG. 258, an example of the presentation of battle reach corresponding to the first symbol presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 has been explained. The same applies to the corresponding battle reach performance.

In this way, in the battle reach production of this embodiment, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is changed according to the result of the content of the production, so that the production that the player will directly operate from now on Changes in the operation mode of the button device 6310 (growth of the effect button) can generate new interest and further improve the interest of the game.

[8-11. Composition of operation performance time and reception time]
Next, the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle, the reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be explained. FIG. 259 is an example of a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation performance time and the reception time of the performance button device in the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 259(1) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle.

As shown in FIG. 259 (1), the time required for one operation of the production button device 6310 in the production of the road to the decisive battle is a reception time of 3 seconds and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result. The "operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated five times. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, the maximum number of operations of the performance button device 6310 is controlled by the "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle" ends. That's what you're suggesting. Although the number of operations differs, this is the same in the production of the road to the final battle.

Furthermore, if the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time, a predetermined icon will be continuously displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and if the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time. Otherwise, a predetermined icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time until the end of the display time.

Regarding the production button device 6310, when the production button device 6310 is operated during such reception time, the reception time ends and a predetermined image is displayed (a predetermined production is performed) from the time of operation. The production is called a ``single operation production,'' and the same applies to the production of the road to the ultimate battle.

FIG. 259 (2a) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the reception time for one-time operation performance.

As shown in FIG. 259 (2a), the reception time of the performance button device 6310 for one-time operation performance is from the reception time to the first period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) of the performance button device 6310. The second period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as the "invalid start period" in which the operation of the production button device 6310 is determined to be invalid. The period from the "invalid start period" to the "invalid end period" is set as the "invalid end period" to be determined, and the period from the "invalid start period" to the "invalid end period" is set as the "valid period" in which the operation of the production button device 6310 is determined to be valid.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 259 (2b), even if the "invalid start period" and "invalid end period" are not included in the reception time and the period immediately before the start of the reception time is set as the "invalid start period". Alternatively, the period immediately after the end of the reception time may be set as the "invalid termination period." In this case, the reception time directly corresponds to the "valid time".

In contrast, even if the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time, the reception time does not end and the production button device 6310 can be operated multiple times during the reception time. For example, the structure of the reception time is different for "button challenge notice, door opening performance, battle reach when the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 finally becomes the third operation mode (Lv 3 consecutive hits)".

FIG. 259(3) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the reception time for the continuous hit operation performance.

As shown in Figure 259 (3), the "start invalid period", "end invalid period", and "valid period (initial)" are set in the reception time of the multiple-hit operation performance, because the one-time operation performance is It is the same as the structure of reception hours.

Then, when the production button device 6310 is operated within the "valid period (initial period)", the sub CPU 301 determines that the operation of the production button device 6310 is invalid for a predetermined period after the operation. is newly set.

This "operation invalid period" is set to a different period by the sub CPU 301 depending on the content of the performance triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310. For example, when the performance progresses, the performance button device 6310 vibrates, and a third period (for example, 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) is set as the "operation invalid period". On the other hand, when the performance is not progressing, the performance button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period shorter than the third period (for example, 4 frames, 4/4 60 seconds, etc.) is set.

In this way, in the repeated press operation performance, different periods are set depending on the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310, so that the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310 can be performed reliably. be able to.

[8-12. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates “external information 1” to “external information 8” in the gaming state specification parameter setting process, and sends the generated “external information 1” to “external information 8” to the external terminal board 184. It will be output. The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8." ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 260 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 65), from each channel "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security" signals are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in terms of output conditions for the "external information 3" signal output from the connector CH3. Below, conditions for outputting "external information 3" will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 260, "external information 3" includes, in addition to "outputting during all jackpots, during probability fluctuations, and during time saving" similar to the first pachinko machine, "external information 3" includes "outputting during all jackpots, during probability fluctuations, and during time saving", as well as "outputs when fluctuations start during probability fluctuations". A new output condition has been added to "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol".

Here, in the "simultaneous variation machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, a specific time-saving game state consisting of a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state Although the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has started from the gaming state, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game is started using the special symbol whose variable display has ended first. An error case may occur in which the state is shifted to the normal gaming state and a special symbol whose variable display ends later is determined to be a jackpot, loss, etc. in the normal gaming state. By adding the above-mentioned new output conditions to "External Information 3", the occurrence of the above error case has been eliminated, and in "simultaneous variation machine", the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive wins triggered by a specific gaming state etc. can be measured accurately. This will be specifically explained using a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal as an example.

FIG. 261 is an example of a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 261 shows the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol, the output and stop of the external information 3, and the transition of the gaming state vertically.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the specific gaming states, the first special symbol starts variable display at the 119th rotation after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Thereafter, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display at the 120th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state.

The variable display of the second special symbol ends before the first special symbol, and the display is stopped. When this second special symbol is stopped, the gaming state shifts from the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

The first special symbol is variably displayed from the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state.

Even if the external information 3 shifts from the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is Output continues until the variable display ends.

Thereby, even if the first special symbol of the 119th rotation results in a jackpot, it can be counted as the number of jackpots triggered by a specific gaming state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 209 etc., the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 204), the lottery contents of special symbols (see FIG. 206), and the rules for transition to the gaming state (See Figure 208) etc., and at the end of all the jackpot gaming states, a transition is made to the "(first half) high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" where the expectation of successive jackpots is high, and the high-accuracy gaming state is When the state ends and the expectation level of winning a series of jackpots becomes low, it is transferred to the "(second half) high-precision non-time-saving gaming state: small hit RUSH", and the shifted "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state: small winning RUSH" In this game, not only can you expect the payout of the game ball, but you can also expect the jackpot of the second special symbol that guarantees the transition to the next jackpot game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and making the game even more enjoyable. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 229 etc., when the yakuza icon is displayed by making a cherry blossom accumulation notice, it develops into a presentation of the road to the ultimate battle, and a pseudo consecutive presentation is performed. When 5 character icons are collected by doing so, it will develop into a production of the road to the decisive battle. Then, when it develops into a production of the road to the final battle or a production of the road to the decisive battle, a specific production of the same type (a production aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be executed. Therefore, various performances can be associated with each other to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the 6th pachinko machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a staged effect in which cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step, and the accumulated cherry blossoms are released and a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" are displayed. It consists of an icon display effect that displays. The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation. In addition, the staged presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation preview is set such that the more cherry blossoms accumulate, the more expected the ``yakuza icon'' will be displayed and the number of ``character icons'' displayed will increase.
For this reason, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change). It is possible to arouse interest in the displayed results and further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo continuous effect" is such that when any of the plurality of character icons stops, the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, one or more character icons are displayed. It is possible to collect. Then, when five character icons are collected, the process develops into a production of the road to the decisive battle. Further, the content of the future game is suggested by the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order of collection (display order) of character icons, etc.
For this reason, the "pseudo-continuous effect" of this embodiment does not simply depend on whether or not re-variation is performed, but also the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-variation, the type of character icons, and the order in which the character icons are displayed. It is possible to add new interest to the game, etc., and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "performance of the road to the decisive battle" and the "performance of the road to the ultimate decisive battle" are performed by the player operating the production button device 6310 until the predetermined time period ends. It is a performance where you can aim to collect character icons. Then, when 10 character icons are collected, it will develop into a big decisive battle reach with the highest expectation of jackpot. Further, it is also possible to suggest the content of the future game based on the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
Therefore, the "performance of the road to the final battle" and "performance of the road to the final battle" of this embodiment encourage the player to actively participate in the game (operate the performance button device 6310), and make the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, "showdown reach" converts the character icons collected up to the showdown reach (direction of the road to the decisive battle or road to the final battle) into support icons, and the production button device By operating 6310, it is possible to produce effects using support icons.
Therefore, in the "confrontation reach" of the present embodiment, operation performance can be performed using the icons collected up to the confrontation reach, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable over the advance fluctuation and the fluctuation, and even if the advance fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a small hit, the "lotus flower notice" is It is configured to be displayed continuously from the winning game state to the fluctuation.
For this reason, the "lotus flower preview" of this embodiment uses a small winning game state that is easy to shift to when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, so that the lotus flower can be continuously displayed without interrupting the performance. You can enjoy flower forecasts.

Furthermore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "battle reach" is a performance in which the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is changed depending on the result of the performance content.
For this reason, the "battle reach" of this embodiment arouses new interest in the change in the operation mode (growth of the production button) of the production button device 6310, which the player will directly operate from now on, and makes the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

(others)
In the sixth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[9. 7th pachinko machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko game machine will be explained. The seventh pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The seventh pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of playability, performance content, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

Note that, like the third pachinko gaming machine, the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second It is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of special symbols are established with priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in describing the seventh pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and a detailed explanation of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[9-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 262, the game board unit 7010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 7010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 262 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 7010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 includes a game panel 7100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 7100, and on the front side of the game panel 7100, there is a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 262, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 7010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine mainly has a passage gate 7126, a second starting port 7140, and a normal electric The configuration and arrangement of the accessory unit 7145, the first special electric accessory unit 7130, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 7120 located in the gaming area 105 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 7140, it will be explained again using a different code from the first pachinko game machine.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 7126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 7145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows a game ball hit to the right to pass through (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot pass through). ing. The passage gate 7126 is equipped with a passage gate switch 7127 (see FIG. 263 described later) that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, it is used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, a prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gate 7126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. On the premise that the condition device is operating (the special symbol that becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, the accessory continuous operation device is activated, and a jackpot game state is established. It may also be possible to move to .

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 7120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 7120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 7121 (see FIG. 263 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 7120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 7140 is located in the right area 107 and below (downstream side) a passage gate 7126 which will be described later, and is also provided in a normal electric accessory unit 7145 which will be described later. is allowed to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 7140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 7141 (see FIG. 263 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting port 7140 is arranged below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 7126 is connected to the normal electric accessories 7140, which will be described later. When the game ball is in operation, the game ball can enter the second starting port 7140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting port (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is located in the right side area 107 and below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates a second starting port 7140, a second starting port switch 7141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140, and a normal electric accessory 7146. It is.

The ordinary electric accessory 7146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 7147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 7148 that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 7147 (see FIG. 263 described later). The normal electric accessory 7146, that is, the shutter 7147 for general electric power, has an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 7140 or is easy to enter, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 7140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 7147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and a flat ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 7140. It consists of When the general power shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in a region facing the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 7140. , the flat plate-shaped entering ball guide part is buried in the surface of the game panel 7100 and allows the game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 to flow downward without receiving them. On the other hand, when the general power shutter 7147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 7140. Without being obstructed, the flat plate-like entrance ball guide portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100, receives the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received game balls to the second starting port 7140. In addition, instead of the above-mentioned ordinary power shutter 7147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 7146 enters the prescribed number of normal electric game balls (for example, 1 ball) while the second starting port 7140 is in the open state, the open time has not elapsed. In both cases, the second starting port 7140 is closed.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 7130 is arranged below (downstream) in the right side area 107 than the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150, which will be described later. Note that the first special electric accessory unit 7130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150, which will be described later. It may be provided in the left side area 106.

The first special electric accessory unit 7130 includes a first big winning hole 7131 and a first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see FIG. 263 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 263 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134.

The first big winning hole 7131 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 7131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 7 ) is specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first big prize opening 7131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. , A game in which the second grand prize opening 7151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and the player enters the opened second major prize opening 7151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole in the second big winning hole 7151.

The first special electric shutter 7134 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 7131, and a first large winning opening 7131, by the operation of a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 263 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 7131.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the first big prize opening 7131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the 1st prize winning opening 7131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the first big winning hole 7131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 7131. Become.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 7150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126 and the normal electric accessory unit 7145 in the right side area 107. Note that the second special electric accessory unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least either the passage gate 7126 or the normal electric accessory unit 7145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The second special electric accessory unit 7150 has a second grand prize opening 7151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter into the second special electric accessory unit 7150, and a second special prize winning opening 7151 that allows a game ball to enter the second special electric accessory unit 7150. A second big prize opening count switch 7152 that detects the entry of a ball, a second special electric shutter 7154 that can open and close the second big winning hole 7151, and a second special electric shutter 7154 that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to win the second big prize. A second special electric solenoid 7155 that opens and closes the winning opening 7151 (see FIG. 263 described later), a V winning opening 7156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 7151 can pass, and a game ball entering the V winning opening 7156. A V-winning port switch 7157 that detects passing, a losing port 7158 through which game balls that did not enter the V-winning port 7156 among the game balls that entered the second large winning port 7151 can pass, and a V-winning port 7156. It is a unit body that integrates a V-shutter 7159 that opens and closes, and a V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 263 described later) that operates this V-shutter 7159 to open and close the V-winning port 7156.

The second big winning hole 7151 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 7151 in one small winning is the second big winning hole 7151. stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the second big winning hole are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions.The second special electric shutter 7154 is moved forward by the operation of the second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 263, which will be described later). A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to advance and enter the second grand prize opening 7151, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 7151 by moving the second special electric shutter 7154 backward. The ball is configured to be able to transition between a possible or easy open state.

The V winning hole 7156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 7159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot game state through the above-mentioned second route when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 7156 After passing (second round and thereafter), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 7131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled via the second route, the second jackpot 7151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 7156 (after the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 7131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 7131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 7158 is configured so that the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 but did not pass through the V winning hole 7156 enters (passes through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 7158 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the second big winning opening 7151 pass through the losing opening 7158 and no gaming balls pass through the V winning opening 7156, the game ends without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. becomes.

The V shutter 7159 is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning hole 7156 and in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass a game ball into the V winning hole 7156 by the operation of a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 263 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between an open state and an open state through which a ball can pass (or easily).

[9-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 263 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 263, like the first pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the seventh pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 7148, a first special electric solenoid 7135, a second special electric solenoid 7155, and a V-shutter solenoid 7160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 7121, the second starting port switch 7141, the passing gate switch 7127, the first big winning port count switch 7132, the second big winning port counting switch 7152, and the V winning port switch 7157 are partially different. There is.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 7147. When the normal power solenoid 7148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 7147 is moved forward to open the second starting port 7140, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 7147 is moved backward and the second starting port 7140 is closed.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134, which is an opening/closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the first special electric shutter 7134 is tilted forward, the first big prize opening 7131 is opened, and the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not executed (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 7134 is inverted backward and the first big prize opening 7131 is closed.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154. When the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 7154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 7151, and the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 7151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159. When the V-shutter solenoid 7160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-shutter 7159 is moved backward and the V-winning port 7156 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 7159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 7156. In addition, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 7151, and opens the V winning opening 7156. That is, the V winning hole 7156 is in an open state from the time when the second big winning hole 7151 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, it also passes through the V winning hole 7156 in principle.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 7121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120 is detected by the first starting port switch 7121, the main CPU 201 assumes that the first starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first The judgment start conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 7121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 7141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140.

When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140 is detected by the second starting port switch 7141, the main CPU 201 determines that the second starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the second special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (second special symbol starting storage area (1) to second special symbol starting storage area (1) to The judgment start conditions for the second special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the second special symbol hit determination process and the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the second starting port switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 performs a process of paying out a prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the second starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 7127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126.

When the passage gate switch 7127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning (judgment processing) and variable display of normal symbols. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126 is detected by the passage gate switch 7127, the prize sphere is not paid out.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 7132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131. When the first big winning hole count switch 7132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls that enter the first big winning hole 7131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 7152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 7151. When the second big winning hole count switch 7152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 7151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the second big winning hole 7151, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the big prize opening.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 7157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156. When the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 7157, the prize ball is not paid out.

[9-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[9-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 264 to 276. Note that the seventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed, and the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this seventh pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and even if it is possible to execute probability variable control by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, for example. good.

In this embodiment, in a general normal gaming state (first normal gaming state to be described later), left-handed playing is, in principle, the legal gaming mode, and in time-saving gaming state A and time-saving gaming state B, playing right-handed is the normal gaming mode. It is considered as a mode. In addition, when the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state are not distinguished, the A working time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state are collectively simply referred to as the "time saving gaming state". The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is considered to be a normal game mode.

[9-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 264 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 264 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 7120, a jackpot determined as a "jackpot" or "loss" is recorded. The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 7140, the data used for determining the jackpot determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" is used. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 264, when a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/199.8, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8, a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and a "loss" otherwise.

Note that the range (width) of random numbers determined as a "jackpot", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if the "small hit" is determined, It is possible to set a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the judgment made in the hit judgment process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the judgment made in the hit judgment process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, the "time-saving hit" which directly shifts to the time-saving gaming state (C-time saving gaming state) without shifting to the jackpot gaming state ” may be determined.

Further, when the seventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at high setting than at low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or the small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 7156 for each setting value, the V winning opening 7156 It is also possible to change the rate of passage to, or change the number of time saving continuations for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 7156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving is continued. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[9-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 265 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 265 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbols of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed.

The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of hit when the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is a hit, and the "design designation command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol that is determined according to the winning type. This is a command to specify the pattern that will be stopped and displayed.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140. is defined in association with the "select symbol command" and the "symbol designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 265, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 89. At times, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selection symbol command is "z2" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. ” < “z1”.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command as a selection symbol command. "z3" is determined, and "zA3" is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command is "z3" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. ” = “z5” < “z4”.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 executes the selected symbol command ``z6'' is determined as the symbol designation command, and ``zA4'' is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command is " The configuration is such that they are easily determined in the order of ``z6'' = ``z8'' < ``z7''.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol command", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, although the description is omitted in the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 has a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 263) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed using the selection symbol command. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to the following. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[9-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 266 is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 266 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The win type determination table is a table that determines the operation details of a win, and includes "aspects of the jackpot gaming state", "aspects of the small winning gaming state", and "aspects of the subsequent gaming state (time saving flag, A time saving end condition)" This is a table that determines ``.

As shown in FIG. 266, the winning type determination table includes "aspects of jackpot gaming state", "aspects of small winning gaming state", and "aspects of subsequent gaming state (time saving flag, A "Time-saving termination condition)" is associated with the event.

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 7131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot game state are predefined, and the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 7131 is as follows: It shows the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

In addition, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol commands z6 to 8" of the small win of the second special symbol enters the second big prize opening 7151 that was opened during the small win game state. This is the opening mode when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 and shifts to the jackpot gaming state through the second route, and then shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When transitioning to the jackpot game state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 7151 during the small winning gaming state is the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 (second round After the second round), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 7131 is opened. In addition, when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 7151 opened during the small winning gaming state does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, the transition to the jackpot gaming state does not occur, and the mode of the subsequent gaming state also changes. It will not be decided.

"Opening mode of small winning game state" indicates the opening mode of the second big prize opening 7151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are predefined, and the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning gaming state is predetermined. Shows the number of openings. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each number of openings may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 5R x 7 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 525) is smaller than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state. The total number of game balls that can be paid out in a winning game state (for example, one small hit x 10 balls (second prescribed number) x 10 balls (number of prize balls) = 100 balls) is set to be smaller, and the jackpot It can be said that the gaming state is a "first special gaming state" which is advantageous, and the small winning gaming state is a "second special gaming state" where the profit is lower than the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and The first big prize opening 7131 is opened in the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and the second big prize opening 7151 is opened in the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

``Subsequent gaming state mode'' indicates the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and indicates the settings of the ``time saving flag'' and the ``A time saving end condition.'' In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning ("normal gaming state" or "time saving gaming state") when a jackpot or small hit is determined, the "time saving flag" and "A time saving end" are set. The settings for "Conditions" are configured differently.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving gaming state is executed and the type of the time saving gaming state to be executed.The time saving flag = 0 indicates the normal gaming state, and the time saving flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state. ”, and the time saving flag=2 indicates “B time saving gaming state”. In addition, in this embodiment, although the C time-saving game state is not executed, when the C time-saving game state is made executable, the time-saving flag=3 indicates the C time-saving game state.

"A time saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time saving gaming state as a time saving gaming state, and in the A time saving gaming state, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When either of the "total time saving number of special symbols" of the total number of times that the game was played and the "time saving number of the second special symbol" of the total number of times that the second special symbol was variably displayed in the A time saving gaming state is established, The time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, in all the time-saving gaming states (A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state), a transition to the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is set as a "time-saving common end condition". Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, when the "A time-saving end condition" or the "common time-saving end condition" is satisfied, the time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state.

Here, as the "A time saving end condition", in addition to the "number of time saving times of the second special symbol", the "total number of time saving times of special symbols", which is the cumulative number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol, is also a condition. During the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, the start information of the first special symbol may be stored up to the number of reserved first special symbols (for example, 4), and the normal gaming state This is to avoid a phenomenon in which it becomes impossible to receive a profit in the time-saving gaming state equal to "the number of times of saving time of the second special symbol" when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state. For this reason, the "total time saving number of special symbols" is at least the safe number of times (e.g. 2 times).

In this way, even if the "total time saving number of special symbols" which is the cumulative total of the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol in addition to "the number of time saving times of the second special symbol" is set, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular game mode. In the time-saving gaming state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, but it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 7140. Except for the aspect, the condition of "total time saving number of special symbols" is not satisfied, and the time saving game state ends when the condition of "second special symbol time saving number of times" is satisfied.

In addition, the "A time saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition "second special symbol time saving number" without providing the "special symbol total time saving number" condition.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, the time saving flag, and the A time saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 266, in the normal game state, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process, the selection symbol command "z1" which is selected at 90% is used to select the symbol after the jackpot game state ends. As the "first A time saving end condition", an A time saving end condition is determined that either "special symbol total time saving number" = 7 times or "second special symbol time saving number" = 1 time is satisfied. It is easily structured. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, a "second A time-saving ending condition" that is more advantageous to the player than the "first A time-saving ending condition" is set as "special symbol". It is configured such that the A time saving end condition is determined on the condition that either of the following is satisfied: ``Total number of time saving times'' = 11 times and ``Second special symbol number of time saving times'' = 5 times.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the A time saving game state in the time saving gaming state in more detail, "special symbol total time saving number = 7" and "second special symbol time saving number = 1" are determined as the A time saving end condition. The time-saving gaming state when the time-saving game is performed is also referred to as the "first time-saving gaming state", and when "special symbol total time-saving number = 11" and "second special symbol time-saving number = 5" are determined as the A time-saving end condition. The time-saving gaming state is also referred to as a "second time-saving gaming state." Further, the B time-saving game state is also referred to as a "third time-saving game state." In addition, as mentioned above, since the "A time saving end condition" may not include the condition of "total time saving number of special symbols" but only the condition of "the number of time saving times of the second special symbol", The first time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when "the number of time-savings of the second special symbol = 1" is determined, and the second time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when "the number of time-savings of the second special symbol = 5". It may also be a time-saving gaming state when it is determined. In addition, when the "first time-saving gaming state" and "second time-saving gaming state" are not clearly distinguished, they are also referred to as "A time-saving gaming state", and "A time-saving gaming state" and "B-time saving gaming state ( When not clearly distinguished from the third time-saving gaming state), it is also referred to as the "time-saving gaming state."

[9-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
267 and 268 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 267 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 268 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. , the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 267 and 268 shows the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, the content of performance execution, etc. for the sake of convenience.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in either FIG. 267 or FIG. 268 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. Based on the result of the determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation display time are determined.

Furthermore, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 7120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 7140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(2) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the normal gaming state. It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table T2 of , and a variation pattern table T3 of special symbols shown in FIG. 267(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one, two or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal gaming states in detail, the normal gaming state in which left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode is referred to as the "first normal gaming state", and when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main gaming state is The normal game state (that is, the second special stored in the time-saving game state) during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the RAM 203 The normal gaming state in which the reserved number of symbols is being used up is referred to as the "second normal gaming state."

The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal gaming state, and is a variation pattern table that is selected during the first normal gaming state, and after the seventh pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after the special symbol fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the first normal game state starts (i.e., the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 267 (3) described later). This is a variation pattern table selected in the general performance state (after transition from T3).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 267(2) is a variation pattern table dedicated to the second special symbol selected during the second normal game state, and selected during the "continuous battle" described later. This is a variation pattern table.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 267(3) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times after the first normal gaming state is started. This is a variation pattern table that is selected during the limited performance state until the variation display is performed.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 267(1) to (3) will be described in detail later using FIG. 269.

Here, in the first normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined. (The variable display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, in preparation for the case where the game ball irregularly enters the second starting port 7140, a variation pattern of the second special symbol is defined.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 267(1), as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is The variable display times of the symbols are all set to the same time (for example, 15000 ms). However, as will be described later, even if the same second special symbol is displayed for a variable display time, different effects are performed.

In this embodiment, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the normal gaming state, the special symbol hit determination processing Regardless of the result (win or loss), the symbol confirmation time is all set to the same time (for example, 540 ms).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268 (1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268 (2) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state. There are four variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table J2 of , a variation pattern table J3 of special symbols shown in FIG. 268(3), and a variation pattern table J4 of special symbols shown in FIG. 268(4). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268 (1) is a fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern selected at the time of the "chance to enter the Sengoku period" to be described later. It's a table.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 268 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of "chance to enter the Sengoku period". It is a pattern table.

Here, in cases other than the final change of the first time-saving gaming state, the first special where both the conditions of "second special symbol time-saving number = 1" and "special symbol total time-saving number = 7" are not satisfied. This is limited to when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner (because when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the "second special symbol time saving number = 1" is established and becomes the final variation), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 is , is a variation pattern table dedicated to the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is not determined.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 268 (3) is a fluctuation pattern table selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is described later as "Sengoku Time". This is a variation pattern table selected when ``.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 268 (4) is a fluctuation pattern table selected at the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and at the time of "Sengoku time" described later. This is a variation pattern table selected for.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the same fluctuation pattern table is determined in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, It may be configured such that different variation pattern tables are determined.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J4 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 268 (1) to (4) will be described in detail later using FIG. 269.

In the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268 (1), except when a jackpot is achieved as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the variation display time of the special symbol is extremely short. If the first variable display time (for example, 200ms) is determined and a jackpot is achieved as a result of the first special symbol's hit determination process, the second variable display time (for example, 89000ms). Further, at the final change of the first time-saving game state, the special symbol is configured to have an extremely long symbol determination time (for example, 89000 ms).

This will be described in detail later using FIG. 275, but by determining the variable display time of the special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time, the time-saving game state can be quickly ended, and the normal electric power accessory 7146 can be Since the specified number of symbols for use is set to 1, etc., in the first time-saving game state, the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol is not accumulated, and the hit determination process for the second special symbol (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is performed. can be done only once.

In addition, as the "A time saving end condition", the "total number of special symbols time saving" is set to be greater than or equal to the total number of "second special symbol time saving number" and "first special symbol pending number (for example, 4 pieces)". (See FIG. 266), at the final change of the time-saving game state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the "total time-saving number of special symbols" is established. This corresponds to when the game is played in an irregular manner.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although the display time is configured to be determined as a variable display time (for example, 200 ms), the display time may be configured to be determined at different times, or only a portion may be configured to be different. . For example, if a jackpot is achieved as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be a long variable display time A (for example, 89000 ms), and the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. If the result is a small hit, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be a short variable display time B (for example, 300ms), and if the second special symbol is a loss as a result of the hit determination process. may be configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely short variable display time C (for example, 200 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268 (3), if the second special symbol has a small hit as a result of the hit determination process, the special symbol has a shorter variation display time. 3 (eg, 2000 ms) or a fourth variable display time (eg, 5000 ms, 12000 ms) that is longer than the third variable display time. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268 (3), when it is based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is quickly ended. In order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner from next time onwards, a third variable display time (for example, 2000 ms), which is a short variable display time of the special symbol, is determined.

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268 (3), if the second special symbol has a small hit as a result of the hit determination process, the special symbol fluctuation display time is Although the third variable display time or the fourth variable display time is determined, the third variable display time may be the same as the first variable display time (for example, 200 ms). , the fourth variable display time may be the same as the second variable display time (for example, 89000 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J4 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268(4), the varying display time of the special symbol is the same as the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268(3). However, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a loss as a result of the hit determination process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured such that the contents to be executed are different.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a loss, the symbol of the special symbol is confirmed. It is configured such that a longer symbol determination time (for example, 15,000 ms) is determined as the time than when a jackpot or small hit occurs as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, in the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, a long symbol confirmation time (for example, 15,000 ms) is determined when a loss occurs as a result of the special symbol hit determination process. The reason for this configuration is to display the gaming results (payouts, number of consecutive wins, etc.) in "Sengoku Time" at the end of "Sengoku Time", which will be described later, when a long symbol confirmation time is displayed. .

[9-3-5. Transition diagram of special symbol fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 269 is an example of a transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 269 shows that in the first normal game state, left-handed play is performed as a regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed play is performed as a regular game mode. An example of a time transition diagram is shown, and irregular game modes are excluded.

(Normal gaming state after power-on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after the power is turned on after initialization, as described above, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) is selected.

In the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140, and the game ball enters the first starting port 7120. As a result, a hit determination process for the first special symbol (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the normal gaming state)
In the normal gaming state, if the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process and the selection symbol command "z1" is determined, the "second special symbol time saving number" = The game shifts to a first time-saving gaming state in which one game is determined. When a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in this first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268(1) is selected.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if the game ball does not enter the second starting port 7140 and there is a reserved number of the first special symbols, the special symbol fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 268 (2) When table J2 is selected and a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 after the reserved number of first special symbols is exhausted, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268 (1) is selected. Become.

After the first time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols should not be stored, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 275. Therefore, after the first time-saving game state ends, the first normal game state is entered, and from the start of the first normal game state until the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches 20, FIG. 267 The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in (3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner exceeds 20 rotations after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variable pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) is selected.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving gaming state)
In the time-saving gaming state, if the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process and the selection symbol command "z1" is determined, the "second special symbol time-saving number" = A transition is made to a second time-saving gaming state in which five times are determined. When a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 during this second time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 268 (3) is selected.

When the final variation of the second time-saving game state is reached, the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 268 (4) is selected.

After the second time-saving gaming state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored, so after the second time-saving gaming state ends, the second normal gaming state is entered. Ru. Then, during the second special symbol control period in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 267(2) is selected.

After the second normal gaming state ends (that is, after the reserved number of second special symbols is used up), the transition is made to the first normal gaming state, and after the first normal gaming state starts, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 267(3) is selected until the number of rotations reaches 20.

Then, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner exceeds 20 rotations after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variable pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) is selected.

(When the selected symbol command "z2-5" is determined)
There is a case where a jackpot is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the selection symbol command "z2" is determined, and a case where a jackpot is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the selection symbol command "z3" is determined. ~5'' is determined, the transition will be made to the second time-saving gaming state, which is the same as the case where the selected symbol command ``z1'' is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state. omitted.

(When the selected symbol command "z6-8" is determined)
If it is determined as a small hit as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, so the selected special symbol changes. The pattern table will be different.

Here, the reason why the second special symbol was determined to be a small hit as a result of the hit determination process is based on the premise that the time-saving gaming state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 7140 was controlled. . When transitioning to the small winning gaming state, the "time saving common ending condition" is established as described above, and the time saving gaming state is once ended (the same applies when shifting to the jackpot gaming state). Then, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the state shifts to a jackpot game state, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the state shifts to a second time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game does not shift to the jackpot game state, but shifts to the normal game state.

If it is determined as a small win as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process and the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, after the small win gaming state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols will be reduced. Since it is generally stored, after the end of the time-saving gaming state, a transition is made to the second normal gaming state. Then, during the second special symbol control period in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 267(2) is selected.

After the second normal gaming state ends (that is, after the reserved number of second special symbols is used up), the transition is made to the first normal gaming state, and after the first normal gaming state starts, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 267(3) is selected until the number of rotations reaches 20.

Then, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner exceeds 20 rotations after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variable pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1) is selected.

If a small hit is determined as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state, so the above-mentioned This is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, and the explanation will be omitted.

(When transitioning to B time-saving gaming state)
As will be described later, after the number of variable displays of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times) in the normal game state, the game shifts to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Here, the "B time saving end condition" of the B time saving gaming state is conditional on either of "special symbol total time saving number" = 11 times and "second special symbol time saving number" = 5 times, This is set to be the same as the exclusive condition for ending the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when shifting to the B time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state), the special symbol variation pattern table will shift in the same way as when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state.

[9-3-6. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 270 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prereading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 7120 or the second starting port 7140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 270(1) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the game state as special symbol pre-reading related data.

As shown in FIG. 270(1), in the normal gaming state, both the pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and the pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 270(2) is an example of the structure of a pre-read command as the analyzed information by analyzing the starting information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 270 (2), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

“Parameter 1” is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or loss based on the random value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 270 (3) is an example of the setting table for parameter 1. It is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special symbol (selected symbol) when it is stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value. This is an example of a setting table.

"Parameter 3" is the fluctuation information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for production selection. This is an example of the setting table No. 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[9-3-7. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 271 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 271 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is based on the normal symbol hit determination random value obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in Figure 271, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination corresponds to the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). It is specified and specified. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 271 and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 271, and if the obtained random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 1 and 65535, it is determined as a "normal symbol hit". It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol loss" and determines the winning determination value data of the normal symbol as "normal symbol losing determination value data". do.

In this way, in this embodiment, "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and "normal symbol hit" is determined more easily than "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. In addition, it is desirable that the configuration is such that "normal symbol winning" is determined more easily than "normal symbol losing" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal symbol winning" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00. do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but as will be described later. By varying the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 7146 according to the gaming state, the profit level given to the player is varied depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving game state in A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), "normal symbol per" The selection rate may be made different.

[9-3-8. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 272 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data".

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”), the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol selection symbol data. are defined in association with each other. Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 and determines the normal symbol selection symbol data based on the normal symbol per determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49, and selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data. If the symbol random number value is between 50 and 99, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol data. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol data, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data (normal symbol win/loss judgment processing) is used regardless of the gaming state. The normal pattern selection pattern data is configured to be selected based on the pattern random value of the normal pattern (result) and the pattern random value of the normal pattern. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 271), and based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value, the normal symbol win determination value data. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 272), the normal symbol selection symbol data is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the normal symbol selection symbol data are determined together. You can do it like this.

[9-3-9. Opening pattern determination table for ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 273 is an example of the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory in the seventh pachinko game machine. Note that the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 273 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory is determined according to the gaming state and the normal symbol selection symbol data when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process (in the case of a normal symbol hit). This is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 7146.

In the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 273, the gaming state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 are defined in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146" is the "first opening time" in the first open state of the second starting port 7140, and the "first opening time" in the first closed state of the second starting port 7140. "first wait time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, "second waiting time" in the second closed state of the second starting port 7140, 2. It consists of an "ending time" in which the starting port 7140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric accessory 7146 is ended. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be configured so that the open state and closed state can be repeated three or more times, or it can consist of only one open state. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, an "opening time" for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 7140 may be provided before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 273 and determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 based on the gaming state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146, it transmits an opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to have a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Furthermore, according to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H02H) of 7146 is configured such that the first opening time is 5400 ms, the first waiting time is 120 ms, the second opening time is 72 ms, and the ending time is 12 ms.

As described above, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 differs depending on the gaming state, and when the normal symbol is won in the normal gaming state, the game ball enters the second starting port 7140. A "disadvantageous opening mode (also referred to as "short opening")" in which it is difficult to open is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving gaming state, a "disadvantageous opening mode" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140 is determined. An advantageous opening mode (also referred to as "long opening") is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 is activated, the specified number of ordinary electric accessories is set to one, and while the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 is activated ( When one game ball enters the second starting port 7140 (while the second starting port 7140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 ends (when the second starting port 7140 is closed). ). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second starting port 7140 for one normal symbol, and even if there is a remaining open time of 5400 ms in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting Port 7140 will be closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) are the same time-saving game state, and are the same. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is determined, but it is different between A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 may be determined.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 may be varied depending on the normal pattern selection pattern data. However, in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the normal gaming state, it becomes a group of "unfavorable opening modes" than the case of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state, and in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state, in the normal gaming state. It is desirable that the group be in an "advantageous opening mode" group compared to the case of normal symbols.

[9-3-10. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 274 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 274 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 274 associates the gaming state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 274 shows the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol for the sake of clarity.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the gaming state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 274, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be 408 ms. It is configured. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol confirmation time for the normal symbols is determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the gaming state or the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbols are all determined to be the same, but they may vary depending on the normal symbol selection symbol data. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time for all the same normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time for the normal symbols are determined, but depending on the normal symbol selection symbol data, different normal symbols are displayed. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol are determined. Furthermore, the A time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state, second time saving gaming state) and B time saving gaming state (third time saving gaming state) have different variable display times of normal symbols, symbols of normal symbols. It may be configured such that a fixed time is determined.

Next, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 266 mentioned above, the variation pattern table J1 of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 268, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272, and the normal electric combination shown in FIG. An example of the operation content of the normal electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state will be described with reference to the object opening pattern determination table, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 274, and the like.

[9-3-11. Operation details of the normal electric accessory in the first time-saving game state]
FIG. 275 is an example of the operation details of the normal electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 275, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126 in the first time-saving game state, the first fluctuating display of normal symbols is started. At this time, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 274, the normal symbol is changed in the normal symbol display section 161 for a fluctuation display time of 408 ms, and then the normal symbol is stopped for a symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. Display (design confirmation) is performed.

When the first normal symbol has been confirmed and the normal symbol has been won, long opening is determined as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 with reference to the opening pattern determination table for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 273. is determined, and the second starting port 7140 remains open for up to 5400 ms.

Since the specified number of ordinary electric accessories 7146 for ordinary electricity is one, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory ends, and the second starting port 7140 becomes closed.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, an extremely short first variable display time is displayed in the second special symbol display section 164 with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed for 200 ms.

When the fluctuation of the second special symbol ends, the "time saving number of the second special symbol = 1" as the A time saving end condition is established, and the first time saving game state ends and the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the first time-saving game state can be quickly ended.

Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmed) with an extremely long symbol confirmation time of 89000 ms.

In addition, in the symbol confirmation of the second special symbol with an extremely long symbol confirmation time of 89,000 ms, an effect (boss battle effect) related to the determination result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed on the display device 7, as will be described later. .

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 and the operation of the normal electric accessory ends, if the number of reserved ordinary symbols is stored, the second operation will be started immediately after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory ends. The fluctuating display of normal symbols starts. That is, in the first time-saving game state, the second variable display of the normal symbols and the variable display of the second special symbols can be started at approximately the same time.

Then, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first time-saving gaming state is performed by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The symbol confirmation (stop display) of the normal symbol is performed for a confirmation time of 540 ms.

Here, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the following relational expression holds true: first variable display time (200 ms) of the second special symbol in the first time-saving gaming state ≦ variable display time (408 ms) of the normal symbol. Therefore, even if you are in the first time-saving gaming state when the second fluctuating display of normal symbols starts, by the time the second fluctuating display of regular symbols ends, the gaming state is already in the normal gaming state ( This means that the game has been shifted to the first normal gaming state.

Therefore, even if the symbol confirmation of the second normal symbol is completed and the normal symbol has been won, by referring to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 273, A short release (72 ms) is determined as the release pattern of the object 7146, and it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140.

In this way, in this embodiment, by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time, the first time-saving game state is quickly ended, and the normal electric accessory 7146 is Since the specified number of electronics is 1 and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, the first time-saving game state is controlled. When the second special symbol starts storage area of the main RAM 203, the gaming state is controlled such that the start information of the second special symbol is not stored (the number of reserved second special symbols is not stored), and the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is The special symbol can be displayed only once.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state is controlled, the start information of the second special symbol can be stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special symbols is The game state (which can be stored) will be controlled.

[9-3-12. Right-handed hitting instruction period setting table]
FIG. 276 is an example of a right-handed play instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction period setting table shown in FIG. 276 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 276, the "right-handed hitting instruction conditions" for instructing right-handed hitting include the first right-handed hitting instruction condition "under control of jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state", and the second right-handed hitting instruction. Three conditions are set: "during control of the time-saving gaming state" and "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

The first right-handed instruction condition, ``while controlling the jackpot game state or the small win game state,'' is a condition that is satisfied during the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game state or the small win game state.

"Under control of time-saving gaming state" as the second right-handed instruction condition is a condition that is satisfied during the period from "time-saving start condition" to "time-saving end condition." In addition, the time-saving game state here does not distinguish between the A-time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state) and the B-time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). This also applies to "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

In addition, the "time saving start condition" refers to the end of the jackpot game state (including the end of the jackpot game state after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 from the small win game state). In addition, the "time saving end condition" refers to either the start of the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol in the final variation of the time saving gaming state, the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the end of the small winning gaming state.

"During the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state" as the third right-handed instruction condition, if the number of reserved second special symbols is stored at the end of the time-saving gaming state, This is a condition that is satisfied during the period until the variable display of all the second special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved second special symbols is completed (until the number of reserved second special symbols is exhausted). In addition, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stored after the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state ends, the third right-handed instruction condition will not be satisfied, and the right-handed instruction will not be executed. It won't happen.

Then, when any one of the first right-handed hitting instruction condition to the third right-handed hitting instruction condition is satisfied, a right-handed hitting instruction is notified to the player to play right-handed hitting.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing and normal symbol control performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although some of the processing is different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot gaming state end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 290 ), etc.) In the following, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 277, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S7001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S7001.

In S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S7001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S7008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S7004, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S7005. Move.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S7007, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7006. Move to.

In S7005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) to the second special The starting information stored in the symbol starting storage area (3) will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special The starting information stored in the symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S7007, the main CPU 201 stores special symbol startup information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol startup storage area and second special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 278. After executing the process of S7003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S7001 to S7008) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is stored as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 7120 or the second It may be a sequential variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting hole 7140.

[9-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 277) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 278 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this special symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the special symbol management process, and will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 277), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If determined, the process moves to S7012.

In S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S7012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S7013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S7012.

In S7013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S7013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 279. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7014.

In S7014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S7014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 281. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7015.

In S7015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S7015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7016.

In S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game state setting process. This process of S7016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small winning game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7017.

In S7017, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game state control processing. This process of S7017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this small win game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7018.

In S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S7018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 288. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7019.

In S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S7019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 289. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7020.

In S7020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S7020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 290.

After completing the processing of S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 277). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 279, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "0", the process moves to S7022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a hit determination of the special symbol is performed, and win/loss determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process in S7022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "selection symbol command" and a "design designation command" are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S7023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this winning type determination process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process of S7023 with reference to the winning type determining table shown in FIG. 266. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of time reductions etc. based on the gaming state at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming state, winning gaming state data indicating the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win is stored in the main RAM 203. Set in the state area at the time of winning. After executing the process in S7024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 is determined according to the gaming state, and the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table is referred to. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 280. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing that sets the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S7025 is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S7026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7027.

In S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 278) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S7027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7028.

In S7028, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7029.

In S7029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process of S7029, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7030.

In S7030, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S7023 is performed. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S7029) and the special symbol performance start command transmission reservation process (S7030)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[9-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 280, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 279) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process moves to S7025-2, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). Then, the process moves to S7025-4.

In S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol control period is in progress after the end of the time saving game state. More specifically, in the second normal gaming state (when the flag is on during the special 2 control period) after the time-saving gaming state ends, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 has been stored. It is determined whether or not the special symbol control process is performed when the start information of the second special symbol is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-3, and if it is not in the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state. If determined, the process moves to S7025-4.

In S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 267(2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs an effect variation counter update process of subtracting 1 from the effect variation counter in the main RAM 203 and updating it. Here, the "performance variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) when the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state ends, as will be described later. Further, after the backup of the seventh pachinko game machine is cleared, the effect variation counter is also cleared, and the effect variation counter becomes 0.

In S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the performance variation counter in the main RAM 203 is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the effect variation counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7025-6, and if it determines that the effect variation counter does not equal 0, the process proceeds to S7025-7.

In S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1).

In S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 267(2).

In S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9. is moved to S7025-12.

In S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025-10, and the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that it is not the final variation, the process moves to S7025-11.

In S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 268(1).

In S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 268(2).

In S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in special symbols is the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-13, and determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If so, the process moves to S7025-14.

In S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 268(4).

In S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 268(3).

In S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S7022, and the special symbol determination. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value for reach determination and the random value for performance selection as starting information of the special symbol shifted to area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 281, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S7042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol symbol determination time setting processing that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol determination time setting process, the symbol determination time of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern tables of FIGS. 267 and 268, in the normal gaming state, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be the first symbol confirmation time of 540 ms, and the first symbol confirmation time is 540 ms. When it is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely long second symbol confirmation time of 89000 ms, and at the time of the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be the third symbol confirmation time of 15000 ms, and if it is in a time-saving game state other than the above, the symbol of the special symbol is The confirmation time is determined to be the fourth symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S7042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols is finished, a ceiling counter updating process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and a time saving counter updating process of subtracting 1 from the time saving number counter are performed. When this ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag indicating the B time saving gaming state is set to 2 (time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to the specified number of times, and the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled. . Further, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the time saving flag is cleared (setting the time saving flag = 0), and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 282. After executing the process in S7043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7044.

In S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S7015 in FIG. 278) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S7044, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7045.

In S7045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. The special symbol performance stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7046.

In S7046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

[9-4-6. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 281) will be described. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter update process to update the time-saving counter. In particular, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the "time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is divided into a "first time saving counter" corresponding to the total number of time saving times of special symbols and a "second time saving counter" corresponding to the number of time saving times of the second special symbol. They are different in that they are composed of two types: ``counter''. Details of this time saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 283. After executing the process in S7043-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing to update the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process is a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off, and is the same as the ceiling counter update process shown in FIG. 35 of the first pachinko game machine. . After executing the process in S7043-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition determination processing to determine transition to the B time saving gaming state. This time saving transition determination process is a process for preparing to turn on the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag to transition to the B time saving gaming state when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 599 times). This is similar to the time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 37 for the Pachinko gaming machine No. 1. However, since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, the time saving transition determination process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and turns the probability variation flag on and off. The determination is determined as "the probability variable flag is off." After executing the process in S7043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process to transition to the B time saving gaming state. This time saving transition process is a process of transitioning to the B time saving gaming state when the ceiling flag is on, and is similar to the time saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S7043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-5.

However, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko game machine is different from the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko game machine.
The first difference is that the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag The on/off determination is determined as "the probability variable flag is off."
Also, as a second difference, in the seventh pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, the determination of whether the time-saving hit flag is on or off is all determined as "the time-saving winning flag is off."
The third difference is the setting contents set in the B time saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38). In the B time saving control mode determination process of the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the time saving flag = 2 indicating the B time saving gaming state is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the A time saving ending condition of the second time saving gaming state is set. "First time saving counter = 11 (special symbol total time saving number = 11)" and "Second time saving counter = 5 (second special symbol time saving number of times = 5)" are determined so as to have the same ending condition. Note that the number of times of time saving may be determined for the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter so that the ending condition is different from the A time saving ending condition of the second time saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether either the "first time saving counter" or the "second time saving counter" is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving counter is equal to 0, it moves the process to S7043-6, and if it determines that the time saving counter does not equal 0, it moves the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes a "first time-saving counter", a "second time-saving counter", a "time-saving counter" for identifying whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, or the B-time-saving gaming state. Clear (set to 0) the "A time-saving flag" for distinguishing the A time-saving gaming state from the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. After executing the process in S7043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether the number of pending second special symbols>0 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to ( 3)) is determined whether the start information of the second special symbol is stored in any of the items. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of second special symbols on hold is >0, it moves the process to S7043-8, and if it determines that the number of second special symbols on hold is not >0, it moves the process to S7043. Move to -10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag that identifies whether or not it is in the "second normal gaming state", and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it is in the second normal gaming state. It is shown that. After executing the process in S7043-8, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In particular, in this embodiment, it is possible to identify whether the normal gaming state is the "first normal gaming state" or the "second normal gaming state" by turning on or off the flag during the second control period. A gaming state specification command can be generated. After executing the process in S7043-10, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a time-saving shift command when shifting to the time-saving gaming state. Note that the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7043-11, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 281).

[9-4-7. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 282) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on (the time saving flag is other than 0). If the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving flag is on, it moves the process to S7043-22, and if it determines that the time saving flag is not on, it ends the current time saving counter update process.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 and updates it. After executing the process in S7043-22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-23.

In S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether the start information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is the start information of the second special symbol.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the information is the start information for the second special symbol, it moves the process to S7043-24, and if it determines that the information is not the start information for the second special symbol, it executes the current time saving counter update process. finish.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 and updates it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 284, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process moves to S7052.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot. When the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S7054, and when it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S7061.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal depending on the type of special symbol) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 263 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. Thereafter, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S7054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7055.

In S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of rounds. After executing the process of S7055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7056.

In S7056, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process in S7056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7057.

In S7057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counters (the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter). After executing the process in S7057, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7058.

In S7058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7059.

In S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (see S7018 in FIG. 278) will be performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7059.

In S7060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

In S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small hit. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a small hit, the process moves to S7063, and when it determines that there is no small hit (that is, a loss), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7071.

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In this process, an external signal (for example, a small win signal, etc.) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 263 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win occurs. Thereafter, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184.
After executing the process in S7063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7064.

In S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit value of the number of openings. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of small winning openings set in this process is, for example, 16 times. After executing the process in S7064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs small win status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing the process in S7065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7066.

In S7066, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that a small hit has been made, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counters (the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7066, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7067.

In S7067, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7068.

In S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small hit game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 278) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process in S7068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

In S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 284) will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S7072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7073.

In S7073, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the start information stored in the special symbol determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state specification parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is referred to, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (3) is ), when the start information of the second special symbol is not stored in any of them (the number of pending second special symbols=0), the flag is turned off during the special second control period.

In S7074, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 284).

[9-4-10. Small hit game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the small hit game state setting process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing an example of the small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small hit game state setting process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "3", the process moves to S7082.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 266, and determines the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small winning game state, and also determines the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151, and also determines the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151. The operating mode of the shutter 7159 is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the operating mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to be an operating mode that causes the V winning opening 7156 to be in an open state from the time when the second large winning opening 7151 is opened. After executing the process of S7082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7083.

In S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second big prize opening opening/closing control process. In this second big prize opening opening/closing control process, opening/closing pattern data (for example, opening time, wait time, , maximum number of openings, etc.). Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process in S7083, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7084.

In S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening opening/closing control processing. In this V winning opening opening/closing control process, operation pattern data (for example, opening time, wait time, maximum number of openings, etc. of the V winning opening 7156) for opening and closing the V winning opening 7156 based on the determined operating mode of the V shutter 7159 sequence control data). Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the process in S7084, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7085.

In S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S7085), after the completion of this small win game state setting process, the small win game state control process (see S7017 in FIG. 278) will be held. After executing the process in S7085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7086.

In S7086, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the small hit game state control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing an example of the small winning game state control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small hit game state control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "4", the process moves to S7092.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines the number of game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 7151 (the number of game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 7151 It is determined whether the number of winnings) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, the value of the second big winning hole counter counted by the second big winning hole count switch 7152 (see FIG. 263) is changed to the value of the maximum winning number of the second big winning hole 7151 defined in advance (for example, 10 ).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings in the second grand prize opening 7151 is not the maximum number of winnings, the process moves to S7093, and in S7092, the number of winnings in the second grand prize opening 7151 is the maximum number of winnings. If it is determined that there is, the process moves to S7094.

In S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether all the opening modes of the second grand prize opening 7151 have been completed. In this process, it is determined whether the control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 286) has ended.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that all the opening modes of the second big prize opening 7151 have not been completed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278). If it is determined in S7093 that all opening modes of the second big prize opening 7151 have been completed, the process moves to S7094.

In S7094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the second grand prize opening 7151. After executing the process in S7094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7095.

In S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 7156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 7157).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S7097, and if it determines in S7095 that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7105.

In S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal depending on the type of special symbol) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 263 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. Thereafter, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S7097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7098.

In S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. After executing the process in S7098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the second big prize opening 7151 (that is, the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), which is first executed based on the small hit, is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the jackpot game state that is executed when it is determined that the V winning prize has been detected (YES in S7095) starts from the second round game. After executing the process in S7099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7100.

In S7100, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process in S7100, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7101.

In S7101, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counters (the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter). After executing the process in S7101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7102.

In S7102, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7103.

In S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big prize opening preparation process (FIG. 278) will be performed. After executing the process in S7103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing the process in S7105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7106.

In S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 285 is performed. After executing the process of S7106, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

[9-4-12. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the grand winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "5", the process moves to S7112.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S7112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value, it moves the process to S7114, and if it determines in S7113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value, it moves the process to S7113. is moved to S7117.

In S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 278) is performed after the big winning opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process in S7114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7115.

In S7115, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7115, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S7117, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7118.

In S7118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the first big winning hole 7131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, if the jackpot game control process is started because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the first big winning hole 7131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened, and the special symbol hit determination process is started. If the result is a small win and the jackpot game control process is started by detecting a V win, select the second big win hole 7151 instead of the first big win hole 7131 as the big win hole to be opened. You may. After executing the process in S7118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7119.

In S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 7131, the maximum number of winnings to the first big winning hole 7131, etc. are set. Note that this does not mean to exclude cases where the first big prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the first big prize opening 7131 as separate processes. After executing the process in S7119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs release control data generation processing. In this process, opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 7131 is generated based on the information set in the big winning hole related various setting process of S7119. Then, control based on the generated release control data is started. After executing the process in S7120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7121.

In S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see Figure 278) will be performed. Become. After executing the process in S7121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7122.

In S7122, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7123.

In S7123, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

[9-4-13. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process moves to S7132.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines that when the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, the number of game balls that entered the first big winning hole 7131 (number of winnings in the first big winning hole 7131) is the maximum winning number. Determine whether it exists or not. In this process, the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see FIG. 263) is changed to the value of the maximum winning number of the first big winning hole 7131 defined in advance (for example, 7 ).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 7131 is not the maximum number of winnings, the process moves to S7133, and in S7132, the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 7131 is the maximum number of winnings. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S7134.

In S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 7131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S7119 in FIG. 288) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 7131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 7131 has elapsed, the process moves to S7134.

In S7134, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the first big prize opening 7131. After executing the process in S7134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7135.

In S7135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see FIG. 288) is performed again. That will happen. After executing the process in S7135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7136.

In S7136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278).

[9-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 278), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process moves to S7142.

In S7142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this special symbol game end setting process, various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process in S7142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7143.

In S7143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the jackpot ends. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the game state data at the time of winning indicating the game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time saving flag and the number of time saving times) is determined, and the data of the determined mode of the game state is set. After executing the process in S7143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7144.

Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the first time saving number counter is set to 7. is set, and the second time saving number counter is set to 1. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z2 to 8", the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the first time saving number counter = 11. and set the second time saving number counter = 5. If the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state, set the time-saving flag = 1 (turn on the time-saving flag) for all selected symbol commands, and set the first time-saving number counter = 7. Then, the second time saving number counter is set to 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to identify the A time saving gaming state in which the first time saving number counter = 7 and the second time saving number counter = 1 are set as the "first time saving gaming state", the A time saving flag = 1, and set the A time saving flag = 2 in order to identify the A time saving gaming state in which the first time saving number counter = 11 and the second time saving number counter = 5 are set as the "second time saving gaming state". do. Then, a gaming state designation command can be generated based on the A time saving flag.

In S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 285 is performed. After executing the process of S7144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 291, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 291, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 291 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S7300).

If it is determined in S7300 that the normal symbol waiting time is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7301.

In S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S7301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S7310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S7301.

In S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S7310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 292. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7320.

In S7320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S7320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec as shown in FIG. 274) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol may vary depending on the type of the normal symbol, or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the fifth symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and in the time-saving gaming state, the sixth symbol confirmation time is shorter than the fifth symbol confirmation time (for example, 132 msec).

In S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S7330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146.

In the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146, the opening pattern determination table for the ordinary electric accessory 7146 shown in FIG. The opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S7340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S7340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second starting port 7140 in accordance with the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S7330, and When a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enters the second starting port 7140, or when all the opening patterns of the normal electric accessories 7146 are completed, the second starting port 7140 is closed. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 7146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S7350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and transfers the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Return to

In this normal symbol winning end processing, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in the above S7310 to S7340 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S7300 to S7350) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 292, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 291) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 292, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S7311).

If it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 291). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7312.

In S7312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S7312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7313.

In S7313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol miss”). After executing the process in S7313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7314.

In S7314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. "Normal symbol selection symbol data" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process in S7314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7315.

In S7315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 274, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time based on the gaming state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. decide. After executing the process in S7315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7316.

In S7316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time determined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S7316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7317.

In S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 291) is performed. (see S7320) will be performed. After executing the process in S7317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7318.

In S7318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-4-17. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The seventh pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a first big winning opening count switch 7132, a second big winning opening counting switch 7152, and a V winning opening switch 7157 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S7381, the main CPU 201 executes the first starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S7381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7382.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 7121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first starting port 7120. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach judgment, a random number value for production selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various obtained random numbers are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting opening 7120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S7382, the main CPU 201 executes a second starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S7382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7383.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 7141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 7140. It is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3).
When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one second special symbol determination area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a winning command for a second special symbol indicating a winning to the second starting opening 7140 and a pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (3), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first special symbol has four first special symbol start storage areas, but the second special symbol does not have three first special symbol start storage areas. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. It should be noted that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed in design as appropriate, but it is desirable that they be 4 or less.

In S7383, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S7383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7384.

In S7384, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 7132 detects that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, the main CPU 201 responds to the first big winning hole 7131. At the same time, 1 is added to the first grand prize opening counter for counting the winning number of game balls into the first grand prize opening 7131 to update it. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning opening 7131 is performed. The first large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S7384, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7385.

In S7385, the main CPU 201 performs second grand prize opening passage detection processing. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 7152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, the main CPU 201 responds to the second big winning hole 7151. At the same time, the second grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the second grand prize opening 7151 is updated by adding one. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the second great winning opening 7151 is performed. The second large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S7385, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7386.

In S7386, the main CPU 201 performs V winning a prize opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 7157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passing flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 7156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process in S7386, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S7387, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126 is detected by the passage gate switch 7127, the main CPU 201 stores an empty space in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to the normal symbol starting storage area (4). Determine whether there is an area.
If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the current first starting opening winning detection process or second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 270. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the transition of the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 294 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As mentioned above, the "first normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, It is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 7140.

The "second normal game state" is a second special symbol that is played based on the second special symbol start information that was stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ends. This is a normal gaming state during the control period (that is, a normal gaming state in which the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the time-saving gaming state is being used up). Here, the second normal game state may be a left-handed game or a right-handed game as a regular game mode, but while the reserved number of second special symbols is used up, the second time-saving game is played again. Since the percentage of pullbacks that are transferred to the state is high (approximately 70%), right-handed hitting is set as the regular game mode (see FIG. 276).

In the time-saving game states consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, it is difficult to enter the first starting port 7120. It is easy for a game ball to enter 7140. As mentioned above, the time-saving gaming state when "the number of time-savings of the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A-time-saving ending condition is called the "first time-saving gaming state", and the "second time-saving gaming state" is defined as the A-time-saving ending condition. The time-saving game state when the special symbol time-saving number of times = 5 is determined is referred to as the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state B is referred to as the "third time-saving game state".

(First normal gaming state transition control)
As shown in FIG. 294, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 264), when a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal gaming state ends, 90% shifts to the first time-saving gaming state according to the selected symbol command, and 10% shifts to the first time-saving gaming state. Transition to the second time-saving game state (see FIGS. 265 and 266).

Although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 due to an irregular playing mode in the first normal gaming state, a "jackpot" is triggered based on the starting information of the second special symbol. ", "Small hit" or "Lose" is determined (see FIG. 264), and when a "Jackpot" is determined, the game shifts to the jackpot game state; when a "small win" is determined, the game shifts to the small win game state. . Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the first normal game state ends, everything shifts to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 266).

Further, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 599 times, the normal game state shifts to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, a “big hit”, “small hit” or “loss” is determined (see FIG. 264), and the starting information of the second special symbol is When a "big hit" is determined based on this, a transition is made to a jackpot gaming state, and when a "small hit" is determined, a transition is made to a small winning gaming state. In particular, in this embodiment, when based on the starting information of the second special symbol, it is determined that there is a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/3 regardless of the gaming state, and the second route from the small winning gaming state is determined. It is configured such that it can shift to a jackpot gaming state through.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, but the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the normal game state remains. There are cases where In such a case, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 264), and when a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or small win is the first time-saving game state, after the end of the jackpot game state, everything shifts to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 266).

In addition, when in the first time-saving game state, if a "lose" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (non-winning), the first normal game is changed from the first time-saving game state. will move to the state.

Furthermore, in the first time-saving game state, when "special symbol total time-saving number = 7 times" is established as A time-saving end condition due to irregular game mode etc., that is, a game ball enters the second starting port 7140. When the "lose" judgment is made seven times (fluctuating display of the first special symbol seven times) based on the starting information of the first special symbol without will move to the state.

(Second and third time-saving gaming state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" occurs based on the starting information of the second special symbol. is determined (see FIG. 264), and when a "big hit" is determined, the game enters a jackpot gaming state, and when a "small win" is determined, a transition is made to a small winning gaming state.

Here, in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, but in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state There is a case where the number of reserved first special symbols stored during the normal game state before transition to the state remains. In such a case, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 264), and when a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot game state.

Then, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot or small winning is the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (Fig. 266 reference).

Also, based on the starting information of the second special symbol, 5 "losing" judgments (fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol 5 times) are performed, or the starting information of the 1st special symbol or the starting of the 2nd special symbol is determined. When 11 "losing" determinations (11 variable displays of special symbols) are made based on the information, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state ends, there is a pending number of second special symbols (the starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203). ), the game shifts to the second normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state ends, there is no pending number of second special symbols (starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203). If the game is not stored (not stored), the game shifts to the first normal game state.

(Second normal gaming state transition control)
In the second normal game state, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 264), and when a "big hit" is determined, a jackpot game state is entered. When a "small win" is determined, the game shifts to a small win game state.

Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal game state ends, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state again (see FIG. 266).

Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols when the second time-saving gaming state ends is exhausted (the starting information of the second special symbols stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 is all "lost") If it is determined that the second normal gaming state is deleted), the second normal gaming state ends and the first normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state.

[9-5-2. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the seventh pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 295 is an example of the production flow of the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko game machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., and a display effect that is output from the speaker 32. A sound effect, a lamp effect emitted from the LED group 46, a performance accessory effect that drives the performance accessory group 58, a change effect in the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of three main patterns: a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and a sub pattern that is much smaller than the main pattern. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to these.

In the embodiment, the performance based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the first special symbol", and the performance based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the second special symbol".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, the performances that can be executed are different between the general performance state and the limited performance state.

In the general production state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol production", As the "second special symbol presentation," at least "normal fluctuation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable.

In addition, in the limited performance state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "step up reach" are configured to be executable as "performance of the first special symbol", and "performance of the second special symbol" is configured to be executable. '', at least ``normal variation'' and ``card performance'' are configured to be executable.

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value of 599 rotations, the "door performance" is configured to be executable. Note that the "door effect" is configured to be executable in other game states as well.

In addition, as a preview performance of the "first special symbol performance" in the first normal game state, a "window notice" is configured to be executable in the variation, and a "pending change notice" and a "pending change notice" as a look-ahead production in the advance variation. "Flash notice" is configured to be executable.

"Normal fluctuation" is a fluctuating performance in which all the decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when you lose in the special symbol lottery. It is.

"Normal Reach", "Super Reach", and "Super Super Reach" are exclusive performances of the first special symbol that can be executed in the normal performance state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol has a possibility of winning the jackpot. It is a suggestive reach performance. "Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it will be a loss, and if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it will be a jackpot. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the medium symbol may not be stopped and displayed and may develop into "Super Reach", and the system is configured so that "Super Reach" can further develop into "Super Super Reach". There is.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 267(1),
Random values for performance selection, etc. are set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "normal reach"<"superreach"<"super super reach".

Further, the "card performance" is a special performance for the second special symbol, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the second special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. The "card performance" is, for example, a performance in which a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly reversed, characters indicating a jackpot or small win are displayed.

Further, "step up reach" is a special performance of the first special symbol that can be executed in the limited performance state, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. For example, in "Step Up Reach", a predetermined character is displayed so that it can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and if it finally grows to STEP 3, it becomes a jackpot, and if it grows only to STEP 1 or STEP 2, it becomes a loss.

"Door performance" is a performance that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, the performance time is undefined (end time is not specified), and it is also a performance that suggests the transition of each game state. . For example, in the "door effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, the door is completely closed, and the door is completely opened again. , it is announced that the background etc. have been changed and the gaming state has been shifted.

In the first normal game state, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value of 599 revolutions, the "door effect" is executed, and from the next special symbol (600 revolutions), the B time-saving game state ( You will be notified that the game has moved to the third time-saving gaming state.

"Window notice" is a performance that foretells a change in the stage, the performance contents of a symbol performance pattern, or the lottery result of a special symbol lottery when a variable display of special symbols is being performed. As an example of the "window preview", a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and predetermined preview contents are displayed in the window.

"Reservation change notice" is an example of a look-ahead performance, in which the lottery result of the special symbol and the change in the special symbol are displayed based on the display mode of the reservation image that indicates the number of reserved special symbols before the special symbol lottery is performed. It is a performance that suggests information.

The "flash notice" is an example of a look-ahead performance, and refers to a performance in which the LED group 46 emits a predetermined light from the time the prize is won to the first start opening 7120 until the fluctuation starts.

(Production in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least "boss battle performance", "super shortening variation", and "door performance" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol performance", and "second special symbol performance" As such, it is configured so that at least "boss battle production" can be executed.

The "ultra-shortened variation" is an effect in which all the decorative patterns start varying and displaying at high speed, and all the decorative patterns stop displaying in an extremely short period of time (for example, 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the first time-saving game state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. "Boss battle production" is, for example, a production in which a boss character appears and the main character and the boss character confront each other, and when the main character wins ("boss battle production (victory)"), it becomes a jackpot or small win, and the main character wins. If the character is defeated ("boss battle production (defeat)"), the game is a loss.

As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state, since "time-saving number of second special symbols = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, the second special symbol is drawn, and a jackpot or If it is a small hit, the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, and if it is a loss, it shifts to the first normal gaming state. Then, in the first time-saving game state, a second special symbol is drawn, and if it is a jackpot or small hit, a "boss battle effect (win)" is executed, and if it is a loss, a "boss battle effect (defeat)" is executed. be done.

In addition, in the first time-saving gaming state, in a case where the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the normal gaming state remains, the first special symbol is drawn and a jackpot is generated. ``Boss battle production (victory)'' is executed, and if you lose, ``super shortening variation'' is executed.

Then, in the first time-saving game state, when "special symbol total time-saving number = 7 times" is established as A time-saving end condition due to irregular game mode etc., that is, the game ball enters the second starting port 7140. When the lottery of the first special symbol is carried out seven times without a lottery, if it is a jackpot, a ``boss battle performance (victory)'' is executed, and if it is a loss, a ``door performance'' is executed. Here, when the "door performance" is executed in the first time-saving game state, it will be notified that the game has moved to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second and third time-saving gaming states)
Other than the final variation of the special symbol in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, at least the "Sengoku time effect" is configured to be executable, and the special symbol in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is In the final variation of the symbols, at least the "Sengoku time effect", the "door effect", and the "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable.

"Sengoku time performance" refers to a series of performances performed from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state, and from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state. The period that spans the winning game state is also referred to as "Sengoku Time." Details of this "Sengoku time effect" will be described later using FIGS. 319 and 320.

"Continuous battle entry performance" is a special performance that can be executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends (Sengoku time is This is a performance that announces that the next consecutive battle reach will be held).

As mentioned above, when the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state ends, if there is a pending number of second special symbols, the state shifts to the second normal gaming state, and the second special symbol is suspended. When there is no number of pieces, the game shifts to the first normal game state. Then, at the time of the final variation of the special symbols in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if there is a pending number of second special symbols, a "continuous battle entry effect" is executed, and the second special symbol is When there is no pending quantity, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it will be notified that the game has moved to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least a "continuous battle performance" is configured to be executable as a "second special symbol performance."

The "continuous battle performance" is a special performance that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. An example of a "continuous battle production" is a production in which a rival character appears and the main character and rival character confront each other up to three times in a row, and if the main character wins in any of the confrontations (" If there is a jackpot or small hit ("continuous battle performance (defeat)"), and the main character is defeated ("continuous battle performance (defeat)"), it is a loss.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the performance shown in FIG. 295, there are various jackpot performances and a plurality of detailed stages that serve as the basis of the performance (the motif of the performance), which will be described in detail later.

[9-6. Sub control circuit]
In order to execute the above effects, the control contents of the sub control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 296 to 308.

[9-6-1. First normal game state symbol production pattern determination table]
The symbol production pattern determination table E1 for determining the symbol production pattern in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 296 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The "performance pattern" refers to information that defines display effects of characters, etc., voice effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In addition, the "design performance pattern" is defined as the variation of the decorative design corresponding to the special design, the related display performance of characters, etc., the audio performance, the change performance of the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. information. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, various display effects such as a preview presentation pattern can be executed in a superimposed manner.

As shown in FIG. 296, the symbol performance pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the performance stage that defines the performance display state, and the normal game state. The number of variable displays of the special symbol counted since the start of the state, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "production stage" is information that defines the performance display state of the production background, motif, etc. For example, "production stage 0" refers to the Yamamura stage in the general production state of the first normal game state. "Production Stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general production state of the first normal game state, and "Production Stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited production state of the first normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general performance state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, It has been replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 298 to 308 and the like. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 296, different symbol production patterns (different productions) can be determined depending on the production stage even for the same special symbol variation pattern command. It is configured.

Furthermore, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 in the first normal gaming state shown in FIG. performance) is configured so that it can be determined. Then, when the special symbol fluctuation display count = 599 and the special symbol lottery is a "lose" (that is, when moving to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), the door production The effect pattern 100 for performing the above is determined. In addition, even if the number of variable display times of the special symbol is 599, if there is a "big hit" or "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the system will not shift to the B time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state). Since the game state shifts to a jackpot game state or a small win game state, a symbol performance pattern for executing a performance suggesting a jackpot or a small win (a card performance in the case of a second special symbol performance) is determined. There is. Note that the performance stage 2 is a dedicated stage in the limited performance state, and the number of variable display of the special symbol never becomes 599, so the performance pattern 100 for executing the door performance is never determined.

[9-6-2. Second normal gaming state start determination table]
The starting time determination table for determining the symbol production pattern determination table when the second normal game state starts will be explained. FIG. 297 is an example of a start time determination table for the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state starts, that is, when the first variable display of the second special symbol in the second normal game state starts, a plurality of symbol production patterns are determined. One symbol production pattern determination table is determined from among the tables, and when starting variable display of the second special symbol thereafter, the symbol production pattern determination table that has already been determined when the second normal gaming state starts will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 297, the table for determining the start time of the second normal game state includes the pending number of second special symbols, the number of hits within the pending number of second special symbols, pullback information, and the symbol presentation pattern. Decision tables E2 to E8 are associated with each other.

Here, "the number of winning pieces within the pending number of second special symbols" refers to the starting information (random number value for jackpot determination ), and since the maximum number of 2nd special symbols on hold is set to 3, at the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (1 is subtracted), the number of 2nd special symbols on hold is 2. is the maximum number.

"Pullback information" refers to fluctuation information that is initially determined to be a jackpot or small hit among starting information including the first fluctuation and pending memory in the second normal gaming state; The information that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the first time is "1", and the first information that is determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the second time is "1". The information that is determined is "2", the information that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the third time is "3", and the information that is determined to be a jackpot or small hit is "3". If it does not exist, it is set to "0".

Then, from the "number of winning pieces within the pending number of second special symbols" and the "pullback information", it is determined that after the end of the current jackpot gaming state (the jackpot gaming state that has transitioned from the small winning state), it will be possible to win the jackpot or small hit again. This means that it is possible to grasp the "pending consecutive stock number" corresponding to the number of times the determination is made.

For this reason, the table for determining the start time of the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. 297 shows the order (number of times) of the variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit in the second normal gaming state. It can be said that the symbol performance pattern determination table for the second normal game state is determined according to the number of reserved continuous stocks.

[9-6-3. Second normal game state symbol production pattern determination table]
The symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal game state will be explained. FIG. 298 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The symbol production pattern determination table E2 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the second special symbol, the pending number of the second special symbol, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

Furthermore, according to the symbol performance pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 298(1), even if the variable pattern command is the same special symbol, the symbols differ depending on the number of pending second special symbols. A performance that is configured to be able to determine a performance pattern (different performance), and when the number of pending second special symbols = 0 (final variation of the second normal game state), a performance that indicates that the second normal game state ends. The symbol presentation pattern R3 to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 298 (2), the symbol presentation pattern determination table E3 in the second normal gaming state is a table determined when the number of consecutive stocks on hold is 0 (pullback information 1) and the number of consecutive stocks is 0. Yes, the second special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E4 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol production pattern determination table E5 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E6 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol production pattern determination table E7 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol production pattern determination table E8 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

According to the second normal game state symbol performance pattern determination tables E2 to E8 shown in FIG. 298, the order of variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit (pullback information), It is configured such that different symbol performance patterns can be determined depending on the number of reserved continuous stocks (“the number of winning symbols within the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol” and “pullback information”).

[9-6-4. First time-saving gaming state symbol production pattern determination table]
The symbol production pattern determination table E9 for determining the symbol production pattern in the first time-saving gaming state will be explained. FIG. 299 is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 299, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated.

Furthermore, according to the symbol performance pattern determination table E9 for the first time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. When it is the first special symbol variation pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 268) corresponding to a loss, the performance pattern 100 for executing the door performance is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol production patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbols determined at the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state are such that the boss battle production is performed over the variation display time of the second special symbol and the symbol confirmation time. configured to run. Similarly, the performance pattern 100 determined at the final variation of the first time-saving game state is configured such that the door performance is executed over the variation display time of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol production pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to the jackpot is configured such that the boss battle production is executed over the variable display time of the first special symbol, and the first time-saving game When the state is at the final change, the boss battle effect is executed again over the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol (the boss battle effect is executed in a loop).

[9-6-5. Symbol production pattern determination table for second time-saving gaming state or third time-saving gaming state]
The symbol production pattern determination tables E10 and E11 for determining the symbol production pattern in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state will be explained. FIG. 300 is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 301 is an example of the symbol performance pattern determination table at the time of the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

(Other than the final change in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
Other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 300 is referred to.

In the symbol production pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 300, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the production stage, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other. ing.

Here, "production stage 30" indicates a male character stage in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 31" indicates a female character stage in the second and third time-saving gaming states. . The "performance stage 30" and "performance stage 31" are stages that can be selected by the player when predetermined selection conditions are met. In addition, in this embodiment, only two stages are provided as the stages selectable by the player in the second and third time-saving gaming states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "production stage 40" indicates a premier stage for a female character that suggests that the number of reserved continuous stocks is 1 or more in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 41" indicates the second and third time-saving game states. Shows the premier stage 1 for a male character that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the time-saving game state, and "production stage 42" is a male character that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Premier stage 2 for characters is shown.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The display is configured such that different background display modes can be determined.

However, the symbol production patterns associated with the symbol production pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although they are different, the presentation mode of the decorative symbols is that, except for some jackpots (movie production of variation pattern command 84H14H), all the decorative symbols begin to display disjointed and high-speed variations, and the left and right symbols temporarily stop in sequence. Without this, a normal variation mode effect is performed in which all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed almost at the same time. This means that even in the symbol production patterns associated with the symbol production pattern determination table E11 in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The same applies except in certain cases.

(At the time of final change in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
At the time of final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 301 is referred to.

The symbol production pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 301 includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the production stage, and the second special symbol The number of pending pieces is associated with the symbol production pattern.

According to the symbol performance pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to determine different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations).

Then, when the special symbol lottery is a "lose" at the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, when the number of reserved second special symbols ≧ 1 (the number of reserved second special symbols (When there is a pending number of pieces), one of the symbol production patterns F10 to F13 that executes a continuous battle entry production after performing a result production showing the game result of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is determined, and when the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is 0 (when there is no number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol), a symbol production that executes a door production after performing a result production. The configuration is such that patterns F20 to F23 are determined. In addition, the production stages 40 to 42 are dedicated stages with a number of reserved continuous stocks, and the special symbol lottery will not be "lost" at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. do not have.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol production patterns F10 to F13 and F20 to F23 that are determined when the special symbol lottery is "lost" at the final change of the second time saving gaming state or the third time saving gaming state are , a result effect is executed while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and a continuous battle entry effect or a door effect is executed while a pattern of the special symbol is being confirmed. You may perform a door effect.

[9-6-6. First normal game state window preview preview performance pattern determination table]
A preview performance pattern determination table for determining a window preview performance pattern in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 302 is an example of a window preview preview effect pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 302, the window preview performance pattern determination table for the first normal game state includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the performance stage that defines the performance display state, The selection rate (second random number) is associated with the preview performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the preview performance pattern 1 is a preview performance pattern in which the characters "Stage Change" indicating a change in stage are displayed, and the display content of the symbol performance pattern is "Reach" indicating a reach. It has a preview performance pattern 2 in which characters are displayed, and a preview performance pattern 3 in which characters ``Super Hot'' are displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as a lottery result of a special symbol. In this embodiment, only three types of preview performance patterns are provided, but the content to be previewed may be subdivided into four or more types of display modes.

Then, when the preview performance pattern 1 in which the characters "Stage Change" indicating a stage change is displayed is determined, the performance stage 0 and the performance stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately changed. It will be possible to switch. In addition, when three or more different stages are provided in the general production state of the first normal game state, they may be switched according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. First normal game state pending change notice pending notice performance pattern determination table]
A pending notice performance pattern determination table for determining a pending notice performance pattern of a pending change notice in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 303 is an example of a reservation notice effect pattern determination table for a reservation change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 303, the reservation notice performance pattern determination table for the reservation change notice in the first normal gaming state is based on the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 270) and the selection rate (third random number value). ) is associated with the pending notice presentation pattern.

As will be described later, when a winning command for a special symbol is received, a pending image in a predetermined display mode is displayed based on the current performance stage and the number of pending special symbols. In this embodiment, when in the general performance state (performance stage 0, 1) of the first normal game state, "normal hold 1" is displayed as a predetermined display mode, and the limited performance of the first normal game state is displayed as a predetermined display mode. When in the state (acting stage 2), "normal hold 2" is displayed as a predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, as a display mode of the pending change notice, when in the general performance state (performance stage 0, 1) of the first normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation information is a message that suggests reach or higher. The first normal When the gaming state is in the limited production state (production stage 2), it can change to "Special Hold 3", which indicates that there is a high possibility of hitting the jackpot as the special symbol variation information and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is composed of In addition, in this embodiment, only three types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the pending change notice, but it is also possible to subdivide the content suggested in advance and provide four or more display modes. good.

For example, in the case of reservation notice performance pattern 10, when winning the first starting opening 7120, "Normal reservation 1" is displayed as the display mode of the reservation image, and due to the change, "Normal reservation 1" changes to "Special reservation 1". The display mode is changed. If it is the hold notice performance pattern 11, "Special hold 1" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first start opening 7120 until the change.

In addition, if it is the hold notice performance pattern 20, when winning the first starting opening 7120, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and due to the change, "normal hold 1" changes to "special hold 2". The display mode is changed. If it is the hold notice performance pattern 21, "Special hold 2" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first start opening 7120 until the change.

In addition, if it is the hold notice effect pattern 30, when winning the first starting opening 7120, "normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and due to the change, "normal hold 2" changes to "special hold 3". The display mode is changed. If it is the hold notice performance pattern 21, "Special hold 3" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first start opening 7120 until the change.

[9-6-8. [First normal game state flash notice winning notice performance pattern determination table]
A winning notice presentation pattern determination table for determining a winning notice presentation pattern of flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 304 is an example of a winning notice presentation pattern determination table for the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 304, the winning notice presentation pattern determination table of the flash notice in the first normal gaming state is based on the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 270) and the selection rate (fourth random number value). ) and the prize-winning preview presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the winning preview performance pattern includes a winning preview performance pattern 1 in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning at the first start opening 7120 until the fluctuation starts, and the first winning preview performance pattern. The winning preview performance pattern 2 is provided in which the LED group 46 emits rainbow-colored light from the time of winning at the starting opening 7120 until the fluctuation starts. In the present embodiment, only two types of winning preview performance patterns are provided, but the suggested content may be subdivided to provide three or more types of winning preview performance patterns.

In this embodiment, when the prize-winning notice performance pattern 1 is determined and the LED group 46 emits white light, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as a lottery result of the special symbol. When the preview effect pattern 2 is determined and the LED group 46 emits rainbow-colored light, it is suggested that a jackpot will be achieved as a result of the special symbol lottery.

[9-6-9. Pre-reading effect prohibition condition setting table]
A pre-read effect prohibition condition setting table for determining whether or not to execute a pre-read effect (pending change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 305 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 305, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both pending change notices and flash notices, and a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of only flash notices. A "first prohibition condition" is set.

Five common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 5, are set. "Common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a pending number of second special symbols, and "common prohibition condition 2" is established when the second special symbol is being controlled (during variable display of the second special symbol). , "Common Prohibition Condition 3" is met within 5 fluctuation displays before and after the stage change, "Common Prohibition Condition 4" is met when the full rotation performance is being displayed, and " "Common prohibition condition 5" is established when the same prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is satisfied, neither the pending change notice nor the flash notice pre-read effect will be executed.

As the first prohibition condition, four prohibition conditions, first prohibition conditions 1 to 4, are set. The "first prohibition condition 1" is established when a prize is won in the first starting opening 7120 when a variation effect other than the normal variation is being performed, and the "first prohibition condition 2" is established when the symbol of the first special symbol The "first prohibition condition 3" is established when a prize is entered at the first starting port 7120 during the period from 1500ms before confirmation to the period during which the symbol is confirmed. The "first prohibition condition 4" is satisfied when a prize is won in the first starting opening 7120 during the demonstration display.

If any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the flash notice will not be executed, but the pending change notice is configured to be executable.

[9-6-10. Small hit performance pattern determination table]
A small win performance pattern determination table for determining a performance pattern in a small win game state will be explained. FIG. 306 is an example of a small winning performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 306, the small hit performance pattern determination table includes a small hit start performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 306(1) and a small hit end performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 306(2). Equipped with a table.

The small hit start performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the small winning start performance pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "small winning start performance pattern" is the performance performed at the start of the small winning game state, and is information that determines the display performance of characters etc., the audio performance, the change performance of the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. means.

In this embodiment, the small win start performance pattern determined when the small win start display command is received is a small win in which the normal character instructs the game ball to pass through the V prize opening 7156 in the small win game state. Starting effect pattern 1, small winning starting effect pattern 10 instructing a male character to pass a game ball to the V winning hole 7156 on background A1 (for example, blue background) in the small winning gaming state, and small winning starting effect pattern 10 in the small winning gaming state. A small hit start effect pattern 11 instructing a male character to pass a game ball with a background A2 (for example, a red background) to the V winning hole 7156, and a female character in a small win game state with a background A1 (for example, a blue background). A small winning start production pattern 20 that instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156, and a female character instructing the female character to pass the background A2 (for example, red background) gaming ball into the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning gaming state. A small winning start performance pattern 21 for instructing is provided.

According to the small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. When in the gaming state (performance stage 20), the small winning start performance pattern 1 is determined as a normal small winning performance.

On the other hand, when in the second time-saving game state, different small hit start performance patterns (different performances) can be determined based on the stages "performance stage 30" and "performance stage 31" selectable by the player. It is composed of
Specifically, when the male character is in the "performance stage 30", the small win start performance pattern 10 or the small win start performance pattern 11 is determined, and when the female character is in the "performance stage 31", the small win start performance is determined. It is configured such that a pattern 20 or a small winning start performance pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, as will be described later, "Production Stage 41" and "Production Stage 42" are transitioned only from "Production Stage 30" for a male character selected by the player, and "Production Stage 40" is for a female character selected by the player. The transition is made only from the character's "performance stage 31." Therefore, when it is "Production stage 41" and "Production stage 42", the small hit start production pattern 10 or the small win start production pattern 11 is determined, similarly to the "Production stage 30" for the male character, and the "Production stage 40'', the small win start effect pattern 20 or the small win start effect pattern 21 is determined, similar to the female character's ``effect stage 31''.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, a different small hit start performance pattern (different performance) can be determined based on the number of reserved continuous stocks.
Specifically, the larger the number of reserved continuous stocks, the easier it is to determine the small hit start effect pattern 11 than the small hit start effect pattern 10 when the male character is in the effect stage (30, 41, 42), and the smaller the female character When the performance stage (31, 40) is, the small win start performance pattern 21 is more easily determined than the small win start performance pattern 20.

Thereby, when in the second time-saving game state, the number of reserved continuous stocks can be suggested by the small winning start performance pattern.

The small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is associated with the production stage after the end.

Here, the "small winning end performance pattern" is a performance that is performed at the end of the small winning game state, and is information that determines the display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, change performance of the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. means. In addition, as described above, the small winning end display command is a command that is sent when the small winning gaming state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning hole 7156 (see S7105 in FIG. 287), This also ends the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, as a small hit end performance pattern, a performance pattern 101 in which a stage change performance to stage 2 is executed after a door performance is executed, and a continuous battle entry performance is executed after a door performance is executed. The performance pattern 102 is also provided.

Then, according to the small winning ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is a reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the winning game state, the performance pattern 102 and the performance stage 10 are determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 101 and the performance pattern 102 determined as the small winning ending performance pattern are performed during the end interval time when the small winning game state has ended, but the performance pattern Part of this may be performed in the variable display of special symbols immediately after the end of the small winning game state. For example, a door effect may be executed during the end interval time of the small win game state, and a stage change effect or a continuous battle entry effect may be performed in the variable display of special symbols immediately after the end of the small win game state.

[9-6-11. V passing performance pattern determination table]
A V passing effect pattern determination table for determining a V passing effect pattern in a small winning game state will be explained. FIG. 307 is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The “V passing performance pattern” is a performance that is performed when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state, and includes changes in the display performance of characters, audio performance, and operation mode of the performance button 54. This refers to information that determines performances, etc.

As shown in FIG. 307, the V passing effect pattern determination table includes the V passing command received from the main control circuit 200 and information on the gaming state at the time of winning (effect stage) when a jackpot or small hit is determined. , the number of reserved continuous stocks, the selection rate (sixth random value), and the V passing performance pattern are associated with each other.

In this embodiment, the V passing effect patterns include a V passing effect pattern 1 in which V is displayed in the normal display mode, a V passing effect pattern 10 in which V is displayed in the first display mode, and a V passing effect pattern 10 in which V is displayed in the first display mode. , a V passing effect pattern 11 that displays "STOCK1" which suggests that the number of pending continuous stock pieces = 1, and a V passing pattern 11 that displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK2" that suggests that the number of pending continuous stock pieces = 2. It includes a performance pattern 12, a V passing performance pattern 20 that displays V in a second display mode, and a V passing performance pattern 21 that suggests that the number of held continuous stocks is ≧1 and displays V in a special display mode.

According to the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. In stage 20), V passing effect pattern 1 is determined as a normal V passing effect.

On the other hand, when in the second time-saving game state, a different V passing performance pattern (different performance) can be determined based on the performance stage.
Specifically, when the male character is in the "performance stages 30, 41, 42", the V passing performance pattern 10, the V passing performance pattern 11, or the V passing performance pattern 12 is determined, and the "performance stages 31, 42" for the female character are determined. 40'', the V passing effect pattern 20 or the V passing effect pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, a different V passing performance pattern (different performance) can be determined based on the number of reserved continuous stocks.
Specifically, in the case of the male character's performance stage (30, 41, 42), when the number of pending series in stock = 1, the V passing performance pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than the V passing performance pattern 10, and the pending series is more likely to be determined than the V passing performance pattern 10. When the stock number≧2, the V passing effect pattern 12 is more easily determined than the V passing effect pattern 10. Further, in the case of the female character's performance stages (31, 40), when the number of reserved continuous stocks≧1, the V passing performance pattern 21 is more easily determined than the V passing performance pattern 20.

As a result, when in the second time-saving game state, the number of pending continuous stocks can be suggested by the V passing performance pattern.

Further, according to the small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 306(1) and the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 307, from the second time saving game state to the small hit game state, A production will be performed based on the same production stage selected in . Thereby, it is possible to perform a series of effects from the second time-saving game state to the small winning game state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Details will be described later using FIGS. 319 and 320.

[9-6-12. Performance stage selection table after jackpot game state ends]
A performance stage selection table for determining the performance stage after the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 308 is an example of the effect stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308, the production stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state includes the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the first time saving stage shown in FIG. 308(1). Two performances: performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state during the gaming state, and performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state during the second time-saving game state shown in FIG. 308 (2) Equipped with a stage selection table.

As shown in FIG. 308 (1), the performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state corresponds to the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win, the winning symbols, and the performance stage. It is attached.

Here, the "selection permission flag ON" shown in FIG. 308 (1) means that the selection permission flag is turned on ( permitted).

According to the performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. When it is "1st special symbol_5R jackpot symbol 1" corresponding to the specified command "zA1", it will shift to the first time-saving game state, so " ``Production Stage 20'' is selected.

According to the performance stage selection table 1 after the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 308 (1), when the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (performance stage 0 to 2), the symbol designation command ~4'', the gaming state at the time of winning is the second normal gaming state (production stage 10), the gaming state at the time of winning is the first time-saving gaming state (production stage 20) In either case, the player can select "Production Stage 30" or "Production Stage 31" because the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state as a so-called first hit or pullback win. Set the "selection permission flag ON" to enable the selection.

As shown in FIG. 308 (2), the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state includes information on the gaming state at the time of winning (production stage) when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win, and the above-mentioned V The passing performance pattern, the number of reserved continuous stocks, and the performance stage are associated with each other.

According to the performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. It's different.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is production stage 30, if the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 10, production stage 30 is selected again (production stage 30 is continued). , When the number of pending continuous stocks = 1 is notified by the V passing performance pattern 11, the production stage 41 is selected, and when the number of pending continuous stocks = 2 is notified by the V passing performance pattern 12, the production stage 42 is selected. .

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 41, if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing performance pattern 10, the performance stage 30 is selected, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is selected according to the V passing performance pattern 11. When =1 is reported, the performance stage 41 is selected (the performance stage 41 is continued), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is reported by the V passing performance pattern 12, the performance stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 42, and the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 10 and the number of pending consecutive stocks = 1, the production stage 41 is selected and the V passing production pattern 10 is used. When the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the production pattern 10 but the number of pending consecutive stocks = 2, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued), and the number of pending consecutive stocks = 1 according to the V passing production pattern 11. When notified, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued).

As a result, the "performance stage 41" which is the premier stage 1 for male characters can suggest at least the number of pending continuous stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving game states, and the "presentation stage 41" which is the premier stage 1 for male characters The “performance stage 42” can suggest that at least the number of reserved continuous stocks≧2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when the effects are being executed on the effect stages 41 and 42, the player can grasp the number of reserved consecutive stocks and can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 31, and the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 20, the production stage 31 is selected (the production stage 31 is continued), and the V passing production When the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 is reported according to the pattern 21, the production stage 40 is selected.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 40, if the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 20 and the number of pending consecutive stocks = 0, the production stage 31 is selected and the V passing production pattern 20 If the number of pending continuous stocks is not notified by the production pattern 20 but the number of pending continuous stocks is ≧1, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued), and the number of pending continuous stocks is ≧1 according to the V passing production pattern 21. Even when notified, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued).

Thereby, the "performance stage 40", which is the premier stage for female characters, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1 in the second and third time-saving game states. Therefore, when the performance by the performance stage 40 is being executed, it is possible to give the player an interest in how many pieces of continuous stock are on hold and how long the performance stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 309, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 309, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S7500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S7500) is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S7510 to S7580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S7510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the production button 54 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. Furthermore, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information, and inputs the operation information according to the current situation such as the production. Set the reception time to allow the input operation information, the validity period to invalidate the input operation information, and the invalidation period to invalidate the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7530.

In S7530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 310. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7550.

In S7550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7560.

In S7560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7570.

In S7570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7580.

In S7580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[9-7-2. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 310, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 309) will be described. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, the mode of display effects displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound effects output from the speaker 32, the mode of operation of the effect button 54, etc. are determined. A pattern is determined. Details of this performance pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 311 to 314. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7534.

In S7534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7537.

In S7537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S7531 above. Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 309).

[9-7-3. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 313, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 310) will be described. FIGS. 311 to 313 are flowcharts showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S7531-1 that it is a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol pending number addition processing, such as adding the pending number of special symbols.

In this special symbol pending number addition process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol winning command" or "second special symbol winning command", and if it is a "first special symbol winning command", then , 1 is added to the number of pending first special symbols in the work RAM 303 (first special symbol pending number counter), and when it is a "second special symbol winning command", the number of pending second special symbols in the work RAM 303 is added. 1 is added to (second special symbol pending number counter). Further, referring to the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the display mode of the pending image is determined based on the current production stage and the pending number of special symbols added this time, and the pending image in the determined display mode is displayed on the display device 7. Determine the hold display pattern to be displayed.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a special symbol "preread command".

If it is determined in S7531-3 that the command is a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-10.

In S7531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process to store the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol pre-read command" or "second special symbol pre-read command", and various parameters of the pre-read command (see FIG. 270) are stored in the main RAM 203. The decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern starting storage area, and the second decorative pattern starting storage area of the work RAM 303 correspond to the special pattern determining area, the first special symbol starting storage area, and the second special pattern starting storage area. Remember.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-5.

In S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect determination process to determine a prefetch effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 314.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S7531-10 that it is a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-20.

In S7531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern.

In this decorative symbol determination process, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the type of symbol designation command and the state information (current gaming state) stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop symbol is It is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303. Further, when the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot or a small win, information on the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to maintain the gaming state at the time of winning. . Furthermore, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not the first normal gaming state (that is, the second normal gaming state or the first to third time-saving gaming states), 1 is set in the consecutive games counter in the work RAM 303. If the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state, the consecutive winnings counter in the work RAM 303 is cleared (set to 0).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S7531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-30.

In S7531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a special symbol pending number subtraction process, such as subtracting the pending number of special symbols.

In this process of subtracting the number of reserved special symbols, it is determined whether it is the "first special symbol variation pattern command" or "second special symbol variation pattern command", and then the "first special symbol variation pattern command" is determined. When , 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when it is a "second special symbol fluctuation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. do. Furthermore, a pending shift display pattern is determined to shift and display the pending image on the display device 7 with respect to the pending image of the special symbol subtracted this time.
Furthermore, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the work RAM 303 are transferred to the special pattern determination area, the first special pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the main RAM 203. 2 Shift in the same way as the special symbol start storage area.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-22.

In S7531-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) etc. stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a frequency counter updating process to update various frequency counters.

In this frequency counter updating process, when in the normal gaming state, 1 is added to and updated to the "normal variation display frequency counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of variable display times of special symbols in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the command is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, and When it is a variable pattern command of 2 special symbols, 1 is subtracted from the "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303.
Additionally, when the first lookahead flag indicating that the pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first lookahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is decremented by 1 and updated to indicate that the flash notice is being executed. When the second prefetch flag indicating , is on, the "second prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that when the first pre-reading number counter becomes 0, the first pre-reading flag is turned off, and when the second pre-reading number counter becomes 0, the second pre-reading flag is turned off.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-23.

In S7531-23, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "first normal gaming status". Determine.

If it is determined in S7531-23 that the game is in the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-26.

In S7531-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a first symbol production pattern determination process to determine a symbol production pattern in the first normal gaming state.

In this first symbol production pattern determination process, after acquiring the first random value, the symbol production pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. A symbol performance pattern is determined based on the performance stage stored in the area, the number of variable displays of the special symbol stored in the normal variable display counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-25.

In S7531-25, the sub CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine a window preview performance pattern for the first normal game state.

In this advance notice performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, the window advance notice advance notice performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. A preview performance pattern is determined based on the performance stage stored in the area and the acquired second random number value. Here, if the preview performance pattern 1 indicating a stage change is determined, the performance stage 0 stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is changed to the performance stage 1, or the performance stage 1 is changed to the performance stage 0. Switch and update.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-26, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "second normal gaming status". Determine.

If it is determined in S7531-26 that the game is in the "second normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the "second normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-29.

In S7531-27, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol production pattern table determination processing to determine a symbol production pattern determination table for the second normal gaming state.

In this symbol performance pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative symbol determination area and the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and the "number of winning pieces within the pending number of second special symbols" and ""Returninformation" is calculated.
Then, with reference to the table for determining the start time of the second normal game state shown in FIG. One of the symbol performance pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the "number of winning pieces within the number of reserved second special symbols" and the "pullback information".
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-28.

In S7531-28, the sub CPU 301 performs a second symbol production pattern determination process to determine a symbol production pattern in the second normal gaming state.

In this second symbol production pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol production pattern determination table determined in S7531-27 above is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern command of the received special symbol and the A symbol production pattern is determined based on the number of second special symbols held in a second special symbol held number counter and the acquired first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-29, the sub CPU 301 performs a third symbol production pattern determination process for determining a symbol production pattern in the time-saving gaming state.

In this third symbol production pattern determination process, first, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and it is determined whether it is the first time-saving game state or the second or third time-saving game state.

In the third symbol performance pattern determination process, in the first time-saving gaming state, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol performance pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. 299 is referred to, and the received special symbol is A symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variable pattern command and the obtained first random number value. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In the third symbol production pattern determination process, if it is the second or third time-saving gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. Here, to determine whether or not it is the final change in the time-saving game state, refer to the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and "second time-saving number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303, and if any of the time-saving number sub-counters = 0. If so, it is determined that it is a final change.

In the third symbol production pattern determination process, in the second and third time-saving gaming states, if the time-saving gaming state is other than the final change, the symbol production pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. A symbol performance pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command and the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In the third symbol production pattern determination process, in the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, the received symbol production pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 300 is referred to. Based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern command, the production stage stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the second special symbol reservation number counter of the work RAM 303. to determine the symbol presentation pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S7531-30 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-32.

In S7531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation end process to end the symbol presentation.

In this symbol production end processing, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, the "first time saving number sub-counter" and the "second time saving number sub counter" are referred to, and whether it is the final change of the first to third time saving gaming states. Determine whether or not. If the change is other than the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, symbol performance execution end data for terminating the execution of the performance according to the performance pattern 100 of the symbol performance pattern and the door performance is created. In addition, in the case of the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, in order to execute the production over the special symbol variation display time and symbol confirmation time, the symbol production is performed without creating symbol production execution end data. Finish the termination process.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-32, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command".

If it is determined in S7531-32 that it is a "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-33. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-40.

In S7531-33, the sub CPU 301 performs an all performance end process to end all performances related to the special symbol lottery, except for some performances such as the background.

In this all performance end processing, all performance execution end data for terminating the execution of all performances related to the lottery of special symbols is created. Even if the symbol performance execution end data is not created in the case of the final variation of the first to third time saving gaming states in S7531-31 above, this all performance execution end data allows the first to third time saving game states to be changed. The execution of the performance based on the symbol performance pattern at the final variation of the final variation of the gaming state is completed.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S7531-40 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-42.

In S7531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win start performance determination process that determines a small win start performance pattern for performing a small win start performance.

In this small hit performance determination process, first, by referring to various parameters stored in the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303, the "pending continuous stock number", which is the number of parameters that will result in a jackpot or small win, is calculated. The calculated "pending continuous stock number" is overwritten and stored in the pending continuous stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
After obtaining the fifth random number value, the small hit start performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of , the number of pending consecutive stocks stored in the pending consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained fifth random value, a small hit start performance pattern is determined. decide.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-42, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "V passing command".

If it is determined in S7531-42 that the command is a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-44.

In S7531-43, the sub CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process to determine a V passing effect pattern for performing a V passing effect.

In this V passing effect determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the number of pending continuous stocks stored in the pending continuous stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired sixth random value, the V passing performance pattern is created. Determine.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-44, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command".

If it is determined in S7531-44 that it is a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-50.

In S7531-45, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the small win end performance.

In this small hit end performance determination process, the small hit end performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a small winning performance pattern and a performance stage are determined. Then, the information on the determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big hit start display command".

If it is determined in S7531-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-52.

In S7531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot start performance. In this jackpot start performance determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the performance pattern of the jackpot start performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-52, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command".

If it is determined in S7531-52 that it is a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-70.

In S7531-53, the sub CPU 301 performs performance stage determination processing to determine the performance stage after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this performance stage determination process, the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to to determine whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the second time-saving gaming state.

In the production stage determination process, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not the second time-saving gaming state (in the case of the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the first time-saving gaming state), the process shown in FIG. 308 ( Referring to the performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in 1), the game state information stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 and the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 are selected. Based on the winning symbols, a production stage (production stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is newly determined.

Here, when a new production stage 20 is determined, the information on the production stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current production stage determination process is ended, and the process is continued in S7531-54. Move to.

In addition, when the selection permission flag is determined to be ON, the operation valid time is set within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state, and the initial selection stage is set as the production stage 30, and the player inputs the operation of the production button 54. The selection stage between a production stage 30 and a production stage 31 is switched each time the selection stage is selected. Then, when the valid operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is turned OFF, the production stage selected as the selected stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined production stage is stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303. Overwrite and store. Note that if the gaming state at the time of winning is the second time-saving gaming state, the selection permission flag will not be turned ON. When this process is completed, the process moves to S7531-54.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and whether the jackpot or small win is determined. The "pending continuous stock number" which is the number of parameters is calculated, and the calculated "pending continuous stock number" is overwritten and stored in the pending continuous stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, referring to the performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. The performance stage is newly determined based on the V passing performance pattern (that has been performed) and the number of pending continuous stocks stored in the pending continuous stock counter of the work RAM 303. Thereafter, information on the newly determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-54.

In S7531-54, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot end performance. In this jackpot end performance determination process, the jackpot is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303, the performance stage newly determined in S7531-53, and the selection permission flag ON/OFF. Determine the performance pattern for the ending performance.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S7531-70 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-80.

In S7531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a state information update process of updating and storing state information indicating the current gaming state in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, depending on the type of the gaming state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-72.

In addition, in the state information update process of this embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state (when the first time-saving gaming state starts), the “first time saving gaming state” of the work RAM 303 is When the ``1 time saving number sub-counter'' = 7 and the ``2nd time saving number sub counter'' = 1 are set and the status information is updated from the normal gaming state to the 2nd time saving gaming state (the 2nd time saving gaming state starts) ), the "first time saving number sub-counter" = 11 and the "second time saving number sub-counter" = 5 are set in the work RAM 303.

In S7531-72, the sub CPU 301 performs production stage transition determination processing to determine whether or not to shift the production stage.

In this production stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the status information stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and the transition from the first to third time-saving gaming states or the second normal gaming state is performed. When the state information is changed to the first normal gaming state (when moving to the first normal gaming state), production stage 2 is determined, and the second and third time-saving gaming states are changed to the second normal gaming state. When the state information is changed to (when moving to the second normal gaming state), the production stage 10 is determined, and when the state information is changed from the first normal gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. (When shifting to the B time-saving game state), the performance stage 30 is determined. Next, with reference to the normal variation display count counter in the work RAM 303, if the special symbol has been varied and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, production stage 0 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S7531-80 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-90.

In S7531-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display performance pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display performance pattern for performing the performance during standby of the game.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).

In S7531-90, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. For example, the cumulative payout information of game balls may be updated in response to reception of the first grand prize opening winning command and the first big winning opening winning command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 310).
[9-7-4. Ahead production decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, details of the look-ahead performance determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 311) will be described. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-read effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7601, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "first normal gaming status". do.

If it is determined in S7601 that the state is the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the "first normal game state", the current pre-read effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIGS. 310 and 311).

In S7602, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch performance prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 305 and determines whether any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7602 that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process moves to S7606.

In S7603, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending change notice effect determination process that determines a pending change notice effect pattern for the pending change notice.

In this pending change notice performance determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, referring to the pending change notice performance pattern determination table for pending change notices shown in FIG. A hold notice performance pattern is determined based on the third random number value. Then, when a pending notice effect pattern for giving a pending change notice is determined, the first prefetch flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 305) is satisfied. (Whether or not the pending change notice is being executed). If the first look-ahead flag has already been set, the currently determined pending notice performance pattern is discarded and the process ends. On the other hand, if the first read-ahead flag is not set, the first read-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first read-ahead flag is turned on), and the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the first pre-reading number counter of the work RAM 303, and this process is ended.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch performance prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 305 and determines whether any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process moves to S7606.

In S7605, the sub CPU 301 performs a winning preview performance determination process that determines a winning preview performance pattern for the flash preview.

In this winning notice performance determination process, after obtaining the fourth random number, the winning notice performance pattern determination table for flash notice shown in FIG. 304 is referred to, and the received pre-read command (see FIG. Based on the fourth random number, a winning notice performance pattern is determined. Then, when a winning notice performance pattern that performs a flash notice is determined, a second look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 305) is met. (Whether a flash notice is being executed or not). If the second look-ahead flag has already been set, the winning preview effect pattern determined this time is discarded and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second pre-read flag is not set, the second pre-read flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second pre-read flag is turned on), and the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the second pre-reading number counter of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7606.

In S7606, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the received prefetch command is a prefetch command for the second special symbol, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 7140 in the first normal gaming state. judge.

In S7606, if it is determined that the received prefetch command is a second special symbol prefetch command, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prefetch command is not a prefetch command for the second special symbol, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIGS. 310 and 311).

In S7607, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of erasing the pre-read information of the first special symbol. In this erasing process, the first pre-reading flag, the second pre-reading flag, the first pre-reading number counter, the second pre-reading number counter, the pending notice presentation pattern, and the winning notice presentation pattern are erased (=0).

Even if a pre-read effect such as a pending change notice or a flash notice is performed in the first normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the execution of the pre-read effect will be stopped. It has become.

[9-8. Performance contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Normal display image)
First, with reference to FIG. 315, the normal display image in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 315 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 315, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, the left pattern 7071L as the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7. A pattern 7071C and a right pattern 7071R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 7072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 7072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. The sub-symbol 7073 is configured to be small and displayable.

In this embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the first normal game state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, the special symbol is A variable display of the first sub-symbol 7072 or the second sub-symbol 7073 is also performed depending on the type. This also applies to the second normal gaming state and the first to third time-saving gaming states. However, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner during the first time-saving game state, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R are not displayed, and the first sub symbol 7072 or the second symbol Only the sub-symbol 7073 will be displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R are composed of numbers "1 to 9" and character symbols, and in the case of a jackpot or small win, all the symbols are the same. It will stop being displayed. On the other hand, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "〇・×・□・△", and even in the case of a jackpot or small win, different symbols are used. The combination is configured to be displayed in a static manner.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of first special symbols can be displayed, and the first special symbol starting storage area ( A first pending image 7074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), a second pending image 7074b indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2), and a first special symbol. A third pending image 7074c indicating that starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth pending image 7074d indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Configured so that it can be displayed. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 7075 indicating that a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is configured to be displayable. In addition, although the pending image corresponding to the pending number of 2nd special symbols is not displayed in this embodiment, it may be comprised so that the pending image corresponding to the pending number of 2nd special symbols can be displayed.

(Card performance and door performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the card effect and door effect when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 316 is an example of a display image illustrating the card performance and door performance in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in the explanation of the card effects, the symbols added in FIG. 315 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, and may interfere with the explanation of the effect contents. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 7072 and second sub-symbol 7073, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 323.

In the left column (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) of FIG. 316, the number of variable display times of the special symbol in the first normal game state is 599, and the second special symbol This is an example of a card performance executed in symbol performance pattern A14 (see FIG. 296) when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In addition, in the right column (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) of FIG. This is an example of a door performance that is performed in performance pattern 100 (see FIG. 296) without performing a card performance when the special symbol lottery result is a loss.

FIG. 316(a) is an example of a display image before starting the variable display of the second special symbol of the 599th rotation in the first normal game state.

FIG. 316(b-1) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 316(b-1), when the pattern presentation pattern A14 (see FIG. 296) is determined and the card presentation is started, the chance card with the words jackpot, small win, and loss written on it is turned over. Then, the cards are shuffled and one of the cards is selected. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 316(c-1) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the performance result of the card performance is displayed. As shown in FIG. 316(c-1), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed, and a performance is performed in which a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed.

FIG. 316(d-1) is an example of a display image in which a jackpot is announced as a lottery result of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. As shown in Figure 316 (d-1), when a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area. It is displayed in a large size in the center of the area, and all the main symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and the player is notified of the jackpot.

FIG. 316(b-2) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the door effect is started without the card effect being executed. As shown in FIG. 316(b-2), when the effect pattern 100 (see FIG. 296) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and the doors remain ajar for a predetermined period of time. There will be a performance that will make the door rattle. Here, the performance pattern of the door performance does not have a defined end time for the performance, and until an instruction to end the performance is given, a performance in which a half-open door rattles is repeatedly performed over a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 316(c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the door performance ends. As shown in FIG. 316 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (when the special symbol production stop command is received), the door is produced to close, and all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. .

FIG. 316(d-2) is an example of a display image when starting the variable display of the 600th rotation special symbol, continuing from FIG. 316(c-2). As shown in FIG. 316(d-2), the door is opened when starting the variable display of the special symbol at the 600th rotation from the first normal gaming state, and the B time saving gaming state ( The fact that the game has moved to the third time-saving gaming state is notified by the background or the like. As described above in S7531-72 of FIG. 316, when the first normal game state shifts to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the male character's performance stage 30 is set as the initial value performance stage. will be determined.

(Chance to enter Sengoku)
Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the performance of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state will be explained. FIG. 317 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 317 shows that when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or small win in the first time-saving game state, symbol production patterns C4 to C7 (see FIG. 299) are executed as a production of a chance to enter the Sengoku period. This is an example of a boss battle performance.

FIG. 317(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 317(a), in the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, there is an operation instruction image for making the player perform a right-handed strike in the upper right of the display area, and an operation instruction image for the Sengoku entry chance in the upper right of the display area. A background of "production stage 20" indicating the stage is displayed.

FIG. 317(b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle performance performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving game state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .

Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 268(1) and 299, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state, is It is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short variation display time (0.2 seconds), and the symbol confirmation time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long symbol confirmation time (89 seconds). seconds).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 317(b), when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time saving game state, the main symbol is not displayed and the variable display of the second sub symbol 7073 is displayed. The display will stop immediately. At this time, the boss battle performance started when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner does not end when the second special symbol stops being displayed, and the boss character continues to be displayed.

FIG. 317(c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle performance performed while the second special symbol is being displayed for confirmation. As shown in FIG. 317(c), when the second special symbol is being displayed, an effect similar to fighting a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect that was started while the second special symbol is being displayed continues. is running.

FIG. 317(d) is an example of a display image when the performance result of the boss battle performance performed while the second special symbol is being displayed as a final symbol is displayed. As shown in FIG. 317(d), when you win the battle with the boss character, you will be notified of a jackpot or small win as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and you will be transferred to a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Become.

Then, at the end of the jackpot game state (including the case of passing through the small win game state) from the first time-saving game state, the selection permission flag is turned ON, allowing the player to select the production stage of Sengoku Time. Become.

(Selection of performance stage by player)
Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the selection of the Sengoku Time performance stage by the player will be explained. FIG. 318 is an example of a display image illustrating the selection of a production stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, as described above in FIG. 308 (1), if the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4" when the gaming state at the time of winning is the first normal gaming state, the winning symbol If the gaming state is the second normal gaming state, or if the gaming state at the time of winning is the first time-saving gaming state, in either case, the second time-saving game will be awarded as a so-called first win or a pullback win. Since the game state is shifted to the game state, it is possible for the player to select the performance stage of Sengoku Time at the end interval when the jackpot game state ends.

FIG. 318(a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku Time production stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 317(a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for making the player perform a right hit, a performance button operation image showing the operation of the performance button 54, and a performance A remaining time image showing the remaining operation effective time of the button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operating method of stage selection using the production button 54, a male character stage (production stage 30) and a female character stage (production stage 30). A stage selection image indicating the selection is displayed.

FIG. 318(b) is an example of a display image when the performance stage of Sengoku Time is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 317(b), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, when the effective operation time of the production button 54 has elapsed (when the remaining time image becomes zero), the selected production The stage will be decided as the production stage of Sengoku Time.

(Sengoku time production)
Next, the Sengoku time effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320. FIG. 319 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku time effect when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 320 is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time effect when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 319(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 319(a), in the Sengoku Time effect in the second time-saving game state, as an example, there is a remaining number image showing the remaining variable display number of Sengoku Time (second time-saving number) in the upper left of the display area. , an operation instruction image for making the player play right-handed, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 319(a), a star-patterned background of the "performance stage 41" indicating the premier stage 1 for the male character (number of pending consecutive stocks=1) is displayed. Furthermore, the "production stage 30" indicating the normal stage of the male character has a plain background.

FIG. 319(b) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, a symbol production pattern) that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This is an example of a display image of the effect executed by P10, P13, and P16 (see FIGS. 300 and 301). As shown in FIG. 319(b), a male character and a star pattern background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 41", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, as a decorative pattern, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols begin to display high-speed fluctuations with all of the symbols disjointed. A normal fluctuation mode effect will be performed in which the stop displays are displayed at approximately the same time.

FIG. 319(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, symbol production patterns P10, P13, This is an example of a display image of the effect executed by P16. As shown in Figure 319(c), the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, and are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols stop at the same symbol. This is displayed to notify that a jackpot or small win has been achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, when there is a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol, the main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area, and are stopped and displayed as separate symbols.

In FIG. 319(d), the male character's performance stage is selected and the Sengoku time performance is performed when the small win game state is started (for example, the performance performed according to the small win start performance pattern 10 (Fig. 306). This is an example of a display image of (see)). As shown in FIG. 319(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character instructs the male character to pass the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 on the background A1 (eg, blue background). At this time, the number of reserved continuous stocks can be suggested in advance by the background A1 (for example, blue background) or the background A2 (for example, red background).

In FIG. 319(e), the male character's performance stage is selected, and the Sengoku time performance (for example, executed by the V passing performance pattern 11 This is an example of a display image of the effect (see FIG. 307). As shown in FIG. 319(e), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state, V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, the reserved consecutive stocks “STOCK1”, which indicates the number of items = 1, can be displayed. In this manner, when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 on the performance stage of the male character, it is possible to notify the number of reserved continuous stocks.

FIG. 320(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time performance in the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 320(a), in the Sengoku Time effect in the second time-saving game state, as an example, there is a remaining number image showing the remaining variable display number of Sengoku Time (second time-saving number) in the upper left of the display area. , an operation instruction image for making the player play right-handed, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 320(a), a heart-patterned background of a "performance stage 40" indicating a premier stage for a female character (number of pending consecutive stocks≧1) is displayed. Further, the "production stage 31" indicating the normal stage of the female character has a plain background.

FIG. 320(b) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, a symbol production pattern) that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This is an example of a display image of the effects executed by P12, P15, and P18 (see FIGS. 300 and 301). As shown in FIG. 320(b), a female character and a heart-shaped background are displayed corresponding to "production stage 40", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, as a decorative pattern, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols begin to display high-speed fluctuations with all of the symbols disjointed. A normal fluctuation mode effect will be performed in which the stop displays are displayed at approximately the same time.

FIG. 320(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, symbol production patterns P12, P15, This is an example of a display image of the effect executed by P18. As shown in Figure 320(c), the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, and are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols stop at the same symbol. This is displayed to notify that a jackpot or small win has been achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, when there is a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol, the main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area, and are stopped and displayed as separate symbols.

In FIG. 320(d), the female character's performance stage is selected and the Sengoku time performance is performed when the small winning game state is started (for example, the performance performed according to the small winning start performance pattern 20 (Fig. 306). This is an example of a display image of (see)). As shown in FIG. 320(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the female character instructs the female character to pass the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 on the background A1 (eg, blue background). At this time, the number of reserved continuous stocks can be suggested in advance by the background A1 (for example, blue background) or the background A2 (for example, red background).

FIG. 320 (e-1) is performed when a game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 in the small winning game state when the production stage of the female character is selected and the number of reserved continuous stocks is 0. This is an example of a display image of a Sengoku time performance (for example, a performance executed by the V passing performance pattern 20 (see FIG. 307)). As shown in FIG. 320 (e-1), if the game ball passes through the V winning a prize opening 7156 when the number of reserved continuous stocks is 0, V can be displayed in the second display mode.

FIG. 320 (e-2) is performed when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 in the small winning game state when the production stage of the female character is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1. This is an example of a display image of a Sengoku time performance (for example, a performance executed by the V passing performance pattern 21). As shown in FIG. 320 (e-2), when the number of reserved continuous stocks is ≧1 and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, V can be displayed in a special display mode.

In this way, on the female character production stage, when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, it is possible to notify that the number of pending consecutive stocks is ≧1 (whether or not there is a pending consecutive stock number).

(Small winning game condition: Punk)
Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the performance performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called puncture) will be described. FIG. 321 is an example of a display image illustrating the performance performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 321(a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku time performance performed when the male character's performance stage is selected and the small winning game state is started. As shown in FIG. 321(a), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 7156, but if the player does not hit right, etc. It is assumed that the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156.

FIG. 321(b) shows a performance performed when the small winning game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning hole 7156 (for example, a performance performed according to the performance patterns 101 and 102 (see FIG. 306)) This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 321(b), at the end interval time of the small winning game state, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time, the doors close. A door performance will be held.

FIG. 321 (c-1) shows a performance that is performed when there is a pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state after the door performance has been performed (for example, a performance performed according to the performance pattern 102). This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 321 (c-1), when there is a pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened and a dedicated stage (direction stage) for continuous battles in the second normal game state is opened. 10) A continuous battle entry effect is performed to notify the transition to step 10).

FIG. 321 (c-2) shows a performance that is performed when there is no pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state after the door performance has been performed (for example, a performance performed according to the performance pattern 101) This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 321 (c-2), when there is no pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened and the seaside stage (performance) of the limited performance state in the first normal game state is opened. A stage change effect is performed to notify the transition to stage 2).

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 322, a description will be given of the effect performed when Sengoku Time ends. FIG. 322 is an example of a display image illustrating the performance when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 322(a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku time effect performed when the variable display of special symbols is started at the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 322(a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to "production stage 30", and in the lower right of the display area, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size. The main symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 322(b) shows the Sengoku Time result presentation (for example, according to the symbol presentation patterns F10 to F13, F20 to F23) that is performed when a loss is determined in the special symbol lottery and a variable display of the special symbol is performed. This is an example of a display image of an effect to be executed (see FIG. 301). As shown in FIG. 322(b), information on the number of jackpots and earned points indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player are displayed as the game results of Sengoku Time, and as soon as the special symbol fluctuation display ends, The main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol that are reduced and displayed at the bottom right of the display area are stopped and displayed as separate symbols.

Figure 322 (c-1) is a display image of a continuous battle entry effect that is performed when the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when there is a pending number of the second special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol ends. This is an example. As shown in FIG. 322 (c-1), during the symbol confirmation display of the special symbol, a continuous battle entry effect that notifies the transition to a dedicated stage for continuous battles (presentation stage 10) in the second normal game state. will be held.

FIG. 322 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the door effect that is performed when the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when there is no pending number of the second special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol ends. It is. As shown in Figure 322 (c-2), while the special symbol is being displayed, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time before closing. A special door performance will be held.

(Continuous battle production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 323 is an example of a display image illustrating the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 323 shows that in the second normal game state, when the second special symbol is a lottery result and the second variation is a hit, the first variation is a continuous battle performance based on the symbol performance pattern R2 (see FIG. 298). , the second variation is an example in which a continuous battle effect is executed using symbol effect patterns R10 and R11 (see FIG. 298).

FIG. 323(a) is an example of a display image when the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state is started. As shown in FIG. 323(a), in the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state, for example, an operation instruction image for making the player perform a right-handed strike is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area; On the left side, 1st to 3rd round display images corresponding to the number of variable display times of the second special symbol are displayed, and in the center of the display area, a background of a dedicated stage for continuous battles (acting stage 10) imitating an arena is displayed. Further, the main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the performance of the continuous battle.

FIG. 323(b) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first variation starts in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 323(b), as a continuous battle performance, a performance in which a main character and a rival character appear and compete against each other (continuous battle performance using the symbol performance pattern R2) is performed.

FIG. 323(c) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 323(c), as a result of the continuous battle, an effect is performed in which the showdown is inconclusive but the main character has the upper hand and the game ends in a draw.

FIG. 323(d) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when variable display of the second special symbol of the second variation starts in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 323(d), as a continuous battle effect, a continuous battle effect is performed in which the main character and the rival character continue to face each other (continuous battle effect based on the symbol effect patterns R10 and R11).

FIG. 323(e) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the second variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 323(e), as a result of the consecutive battles, the showdown is concluded and the main character wins. In addition, the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol that are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are all temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol. Thereafter, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the main symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified of the jackpot or small win.

In this manner, the seventh pachinko gaming machine allows transitions to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state. Since the game is made possible and an appropriate performance is performed according to each game state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the pre-read effect (pending change notice, flash notice) in the first normal gaming state, as explained in FIG. Since the availability is determined, the pre-read effect can be executed at an appropriate timing and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, even when playing in an irregular game mode, the performance is executed according to an appropriate performance pattern in accordance with the transition of the game state due to the irregular game mode. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and improve the gameplay.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 275 etc., the first time-saving game state is quickly ended by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time. In addition, the specified number of normal electric accessories 7146 for normal electricity is set to 1, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol. 2. It is possible to control the first time-saving gaming state in which the number of reserved special symbols is not stored. Further, it is also possible to control a second time-saving game state in which the number of reserved second special symbols is stored.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 317 etc., in the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state, the presentation is performed over the variable display time of the second special symbol and the symbol confirmation time. Since this is executed, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in performance and to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as explained in FIGS. 319 and 320, "Sengoku Time" is a period that extends from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state. Since the performances are performed based on the same performance stage, it is possible to perform a series of performances from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state, which further increases the interest of the game. You can improve your performance. Furthermore, in the Sengoku time performance, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small hit start performance pattern and the V passing performance pattern, thereby making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(others)
In the seventh pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the seventh pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its game performance or control.

[10. 8th pachinko machine]
Next, the eighth pachinko game machine will be explained. The eighth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The eighth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of playability, production contents, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

Note that, like the third pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second special symbol is more effective than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of special symbols are established with priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

In addition, the eighth pachinko gaming machine counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state), and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number (for example, 100 times), , is equipped with a "number of times limiter function" that partially restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, in addition to the "number of times limiter function", the eighth pachinko gaming machine counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out per day is calculated. It also has a "ball output limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game state shifts after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined number of balls are reached (for example, 100,000 balls).

Hereinafter, in explaining the eighth pachinko game machine, the same components as the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[10-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 324, the game board unit 8010 included in the eighth pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 8010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 324 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 8010 included in the eighth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 8010 includes a game panel 8100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 8100, and on the front side of the game panel 8100, a game area 105 where a fired game ball can roll and flow down is provided. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 324, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 8010 included in the eighth pachinko game machine mainly includes a passage gate 8126, a second starting port 8140, and a normal electric The configuration and arrangement of the accessory unit 8145, the first special electric accessory unit 8130, and the second special electric accessory unit 8150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 8120 located in the gaming area 105 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 8140, it will be explained again using a different code from the first pachinko gaming machine.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows a game ball hit to the right to pass through (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot pass through). ing. The passage gate 8126 is equipped with a passage gate switch 8127 (see FIG. 325 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the passage gate 8126. In this embodiment, the passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107, but the passage gate 8126 may also be arranged below the ordinary electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107. good.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, it is used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, a prize ball is not paid out, but it may be a prize opening where a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gate 8126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. On the premise that the condition device is operating (the special symbol that becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, the accessory continuous operation device is activated, and a jackpot game state is established. It may also be possible to move to .

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 8120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 8120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 8121 (see FIG. 325 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 8120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 8140 is located in the right area 107 and below (downstream side) a passage gate 8126 which will be described later, and is also provided in a normal electric accessory unit 8145 which will be described later. is allowed to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 8140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 8141 that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting port 8140 is arranged below (downstream side) of the passage gate 8126, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 8126 is connected to a normal electric accessory 8140, which will be described later. When the game ball is in operation, the game ball can enter the second starting port 8140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 8145 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream side) of the passage gate 8126, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 8145 is a unit body that integrates a second starting port 8140, a second starting port switch 8141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140, and a normal electric accessory 8146. It is.

The ordinary electric accessory 8146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 8148 (see FIG. 325 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 8147. The ordinary electric accessory 8146, that is, the shutter 8147 for ordinary electric power, has an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 8140 or is easy to enter, and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 8140 or in the open state. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 8147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and a flat ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 8140. It consists of When the general power shutter 8147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 8140. , the flat plate-shaped entering ball guide portion is buried in the surface of the game panel 8100 and allows the game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 to flow downward without receiving them. On the other hand, when the general electricity shutter 8147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting port 8140 (for example, the gap between the top of the cap of the game nail and the protective glass 43). ), the flat plate-shaped ball entry guiding portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 8100 and receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 without obstructing the ball entering the second starting port 8140, The accepted game ball is guided to the second starting port 8140. Note that instead of the general power shutter 8147 that can be moved forward and backward in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 8146 enters the prescribed number of normal electric game balls (for example, 1 ball) while the second starting port 8140 is in the open state, the open time has not elapsed. In both cases, the second starting port 8140 is closed.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 8130 is arranged below (downstream) in the right side area 107 than the passage gate 8126, the normal electric accessory unit 8145, and the second special electric accessory unit 8150, which will be described later. Note that the first special electric accessory unit 8130 is provided in the right side area 107 on the upstream side of at least one of the passage gate 8126, the normal electric accessory unit 8145, and the second special electric accessory unit 8150, which will be described later. Alternatively, it may be provided in the left side area 106.

The first special electric accessory unit 8130 includes a first big winning hole 8131 and a first big winning hole count switch 8132 (see FIG. 325 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 8131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 8134 that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 325 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 8134.

The first big winning hole 8131 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 8131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 10 ) is specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first big prize opening 8131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". , A game in which the second grand prize opening 8151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and the player enters the opened second major prize opening 8151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 8156 inside the second big winning hole 8151.

The first special electric shutter 8134 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 8131 by the operation of a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 325 described later), and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the first large prize opening 8131. It is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 8131.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 8134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the first big prize opening 8131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the 1st prize winning opening 8131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the first big winning hole 8131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 8131. Become. Note that instead of the first special electric shutter 8134 described above, a movable member whose lower part is pivoted and can be tilted to either the left or right side may be employed.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 8150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 8126 and the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107. Note that the second special electric accessory unit 8150 may be provided upstream of at least either the passage gate 8126 or the normal electric accessory unit 8145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The second special electric accessory unit 8150 includes a second big prize opening 8151 , a second big winning opening count switch 8152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning opening 8151 , and a second big winning opening 8151 . A second special electric shutter 8154 that can be opened and closed; and a second special electric solenoid 8155 that operates the second special electric shutter 8154 to open and close the second big prize opening 8151 (see FIG. 325 described later); A V winning hole 8156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 8151 can pass, a V winning hole switch 8157 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 8156, and a V winning hole switch 8157 that allows the game ball to pass through the second big winning hole 8151. A loss opening 8158 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning opening 8156 can pass through, a V shutter 8159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 8156, and a V shutter 8159 that operates the V shutter 8159 to open the V winning opening 8156. It is a unit body that is integrated with a V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see FIG. 325 described later) that opens and closes.

The second big winning hole 8151 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 8151 in one small winning is the second big winning hole 8151. stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 8151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 8154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the second special electric shutter 8154 is moved forward by the operation of the second special electric solenoid 8155 (see FIG. 325 described later). A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to advance and enter the second grand prize opening 8151, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 8151 by moving the second special electric shutter 8154 backward. The ball is configured to be able to transition between a possible or easy open state.

The V winning hole 8156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 8159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 8151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 8156 After passing (second round and thereafter), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 8131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled through the second route, the second jackpot 8151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 8156 (from the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 8131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 8131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 8131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 8158 is configured so that game balls that entered the second big winning hole 8151 but did not pass through the V winning hole 8156 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 8158 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, at the time of a small hit, if all of the game balls that entered the opened second grand prize opening 8151 passed through the loss opening 8158 and no game balls passed through the V winning opening 8156, the small winning game state Therefore, the state will not be shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

The V-shutter 8159 is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 8156 and in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the game ball into the V-winning hole 8156 by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see FIG. 325 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between an open state and an open state through which a ball can pass (or easily).

In particular, in the eighth pachinko game machine, even if the same small win (small win game state), the operation mode of the V shutter 8159 (the operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160) changes the game to the V winning hole 8156. We create different types of small wins: "falling small wins" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the ball to pass through, and "V small wins" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156. ing.

[10-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 325 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 325, the eighth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the eighth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the payout/launch control circuit 400. . Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[10-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 8148, a first special electric solenoid 8135, a second special electric solenoid 8155, and a V-shutter solenoid 8160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 8121, second starting port switch 8141, passage gate switch 8127, first big winning port count switch 8132, second big winning port counting switch 8152, and V winning port switch 8157 are partially different. There is.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 8148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 8147. When the normal power solenoid 8148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 8147 is moved forward to open the second starting port 8140, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 8147 is moved backward and the second starting port 8140 is closed.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 8135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 8134, which is an opening/closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 8135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the first special electric shutter 8134 is tilted forward, the first big prize opening 8131 is opened, and the first special electric solenoid 8135 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not executed (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 8134 is inverted backward and the first big prize opening 8131 is closed.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 8155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 8154. When the second special electric solenoid 8155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 8154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 8151, and the second special electric solenoid 8155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 8154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 8151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 8160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 8159. When the V-shutter solenoid 8160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-shutter 8159 is moved backward to open the V-winning port 8156, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 8159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 8156.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 8121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120 is detected by the first starting port switch 8121, the main CPU 201 determines that the first starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first The judgment start conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 8121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 8141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140.

When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140 is detected by the second starting port switch 8141, the main CPU 201 determines that the second starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the second special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (second special symbol starting storage area (1) to second special symbol starting storage area (1) to The judgment start conditions for the second special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the second special symbol hit determination process and the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the second starting port switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 performs a process of paying out a prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the second starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 8127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126.

When the passage gate switch 8127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126, the main CPU 201 acquires the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning (judgment processing) and variable display of normal symbols. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126 is detected by the passage gate switch 8127, the prize sphere is not paid out.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 8132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 8131. When the first big winning hole count switch 8132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first big winning hole 8131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 8152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 8151. When the second big winning hole count switch 8152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 8151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 8151, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the two major winning openings.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 8157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 8156. When the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state. Incidentally, even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 8156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 8157, the prize ball is not paid out.

[10-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[10-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout/launch of game balls, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 has a circuit that can pay out game balls. A payout device 82, a firing device 6 capable of firing game balls, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

Furthermore, the payout/launch control circuit 400 in the eighth pachinko game machine stores the total number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day to a predetermined number of balls to be played (for example, 100,000 balls). When the number of game balls reached (stops the supply of power to the firing solenoid), the firing device 6 stops firing the game balls (stops supplying power to the firing solenoid), and the discharging device 82 stops firing the game balls as a control regarding the game disallowed state by the operation of the "ball output limiter function". Control is performed to prohibit the payout of prize balls. The control regarding this game disallowed state will be described in detail later.

[10-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 326 to 337. Note that the eighth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, there are prepared a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this eighth pachinko game machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential. For example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, as will be described later, as time-saving gaming states that are distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving ending conditions, there is a "special time-saving gaming state" in which the next jackpot is substantially guaranteed, and a "special time-saving gaming state" in which the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. It has a "general time-saving gaming state" in which the jackpot is not guaranteed. In addition, as a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving generation conditions), there is a "A time-saving gaming state" that is triggered by a jackpot and shifts to after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a special symbol that is not triggered by a jackpot. The game mode includes a "B time-saving game state" to which the state shifts after the number of variable display times reaches the ceiling value. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the time-saving transition condition, the "general time-saving gaming state" is composed of the "A time-saving gaming state" consisting of the first time-saving ending condition, The "special time-saving game state" is composed of the "B time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition, or the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the special time-saving gaming state, the general time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, and the B-time-saving gaming state are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as the "time-saving gaming state."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a general normal gaming state (first normal gaming state described later), left-handed playing is, in principle, the legal gaming mode, and in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode. Ru. The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is considered to be a normal game mode.

[10-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 326 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 326 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 8120, a jackpot determined as a "jackpot" or "loss" is recorded. The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 8140, the data used for determining the jackpot determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" is used. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 326, when a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. As for the result of the processing, a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "big hit", a selection rate of approximately 1/36.6 is determined to be a "small hit", and other than that, a "loss" is determined.

Note that the range (width) of random numbers determined as a "big hit" or "small hit", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if a "small hit" is determined, the first It is possible to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, the "time-saving hit" which directly shifts to the time-saving gaming state (C-time saving gaming state) without shifting to the jackpot gaming state ” may be determined.

Further, when the eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 8156 may be changed for each setting value. It is also possible to change the passing rate of the game, or change the time-saving end conditions (number of small winnings, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 8156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 8154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[10-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 327 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 327 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table contains the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140. is defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 327, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is one of 0 to 19. At times, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 20 to 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, regardless of which value the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is. ” is determined, and “zA4” is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 5, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol of the special symbol. ``z5'' is determined as the symbol designation command, and ``zA5'' is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 6 to 75, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 76 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol selection symbol is determined by the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 327. The configuration is such that the relational expression of selectivity of "z1"<"z2"="z3" holds true.

Further, as will be described in detail later using FIG. 329, when small hit judgment value data is obtained and "z5" or "z6" is determined as the selected symbol of the special symbol, the input to the V winning hole 8156 is When a small winning game state is performed as a “V small winning” in which the game ball can pass (or easily), and “z7” is determined as the selected special symbol, the game ball enters the V winning hole 8156. A small winning game state as a "falling small winning" in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass is performed. When a small winning game state as "V small winning" is performed, a game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, thereby transitioning to a jackpot gaming state from the second route. On the other hand, when a small winning gaming state such as a "falling small winning" is performed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state occurs. If the game is not in the time-saving gaming state, the number of small winnings as a time-saving ending condition A to be described later is subtracted, and this becomes an opportunity to end the time-saving gaming state.

In the right column of the special symbol determination table in FIG. 327, each of the special symbols calculated by adding up the "random value for jackpot determination (see FIG. 326)" and the "random symbol value (see FIG. 327)" is displayed. The "total probability" of selected symbols is illustrated for reference. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the total probability of the special symbols selected "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small hit" is approximately 1/48. 2, and the total probability of the special symbol selection symbol "z7" corresponding to the "falling small hit" is approximately 1/152.6. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the special symbol selection symbol "z4" corresponding to the "jackpot" of the first route and the "V small hit" of the second route are selected. The total probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols, that is, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the game state will transition to the jackpot game state via the first route and the second route. The actual probability is set to be approximately 1/41.9.

Although the explanation is omitted in the eighth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 325) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to the selected symbol. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[10-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 328 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 328 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different jackpot type determination tables are referred to depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number of times limiter function (presence or absence of a limiter activation flag described later) and the remaining number of limiter times in the number of times limiter function. That will happen.

The jackpot type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 328(a) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter number of jackpots is not set (when the limiter activation flag=0). That is, this is the jackpot type determination table that is referred to at the time of the first jackpot (so-called first hit) in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state).

The jackpot type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 328(b) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more.

The jackpot type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 328(c) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 328, in the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, "opening mode of jackpot game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first jackpot 8131 opened during the jackpot gaming state and the opening pattern of the first jackpot 8131. The opening pattern of the first big prize opening 8131 includes OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time of each round, closing time of each round, ED waiting time (ending time), etc. In addition, as the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131, the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected symbols z5 to 7 of special symbols" of the small win of the second special symbol is the second big prize opening 8151 opened during the small win game state. This is the opening mode when the game ball that has entered the V winning hole passes through the second route 8156 and shifts to the jackpot game state. When transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 8151 during the small winning gaming state is considered as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the first big winning opening 8131 is opened. A jackpot game state is started.

Further, when the game ball that enters the second big winning hole 8151 opened during the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning hole 8156, the big winning gaming state will not be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, if the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbols corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is essentially not executed.

As shown in FIG. 328, according to the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the first jackpot opening 8131 is opened depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function. The patterns are configured such that the OP waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) are different.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 328, the smaller the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the more the OP in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131 becomes The waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) are configured to be short.

In addition, in this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first big prize opening 8131 and Although the ED waiting times (ending times) are configured to be different, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that only the OP waiting times (opening times) or only the ED waiting times (ending times) are different. .

Furthermore, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first big prize opening 8131, the maximum opening time of each round, depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function, and the remaining number of limiters in the number limiter function. The jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the time, the closing time of each round, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

[10-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 329 is an example of a small win type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the small type determination table shown in FIG. 329 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different small winning type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function (presence or absence of a limiter activation flag, which will be described later), and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function. will be done.

The small win type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 329(a) is a small win type determination table that is referred to when the limiter number of jackpots is not set (when the limiter operation flag = 0). That is, it is a small win type determination table that is referred to at the time of the first small win (so-called initial win) in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state).

The small win type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 329(b) is a small win type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more.

The small win type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 329(c) is a small win type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 329, in the small win type determination tables 1 to 3, "opening mode of small win game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of times the second big winning hole 8151 is opened during the small winning gaming state, the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 8151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 8151 includes OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time for each number of times, closing time for each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Further, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 includes an opening waiting time, an opening time, etc. In addition, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151, multiple opening times and closing times may be defined so that the V winning opening 8156 is opened and closed multiple times. .

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 8151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are measured at the same time. .

Then, when the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to the "V small hit" are determined, the second grand prize opening 8151 opens up to 16 times, and the second grand prize opening 8151 opens for the second time. At the time of subsequent opening, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 has elapsed, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 8156 is possible (or easy). Therefore, when the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to the "V small win" are determined, the advantageous operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, the second grand prize opening 8151 opens once, and the first opening of the second grand prize opening 8151 Sometimes, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 has not elapsed, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156. Therefore, when the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbols corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the disadvantageous operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous operation mode and the disadvantageous operation mode in the opening mode of the small winning game state are determined by the opening timing of the second big winning opening 8151 (the operating timing of the second special electric solenoid 8155) and the V winning opening. 8156 (operation timing of the V-shutter solenoid 8160), but by changing the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 8156, it is possible to create an advantageous operation so that the passage rate to the V winning opening 8156 is different. A mode and a disadvantageous operating mode may be configured.

As shown in FIG. 329, according to the small winning type determination tables 1 to 3, depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function, the second big prize opening The opening waiting time (opening time), the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of V winning hole 8156 are configured to be different.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 329, the smaller the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the more the OP in the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 8151 becomes. The waiting time (opening time), the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 are configured to be short.

In addition, in this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 8151, Although the ED waiting time (ending time) and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 are configured to be different, the OP waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 8151 are different. The small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured such that at least one of the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning a prize opening 8156 is different.

Furthermore, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 8151, the maximum opening time for each number of times, depending on whether the number of limiters is set by the number of times limiter function and the remaining number of times of limiter in the number of times limiter function. Small hit type determination tables 1 to 3 are set so that at least one of the time, closing time of each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 is different. may be configured.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and The first big prize opening 8131 is opened in the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and the second big prize opening 8151 is opened in the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

[10-3-5. Game status related setting table]
FIG. 330 is an example of a gaming state related setting table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 330 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The gaming state related setting table is a table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In the eighth pachinko game machine, different game state related setting tables are referenced depending on whether or not the limiter number of times is set by the number of times limiter function (presence or absence of a limiter activation flag) and the remaining number of limiter times in the number of times limiter function. It turns out.

(Game status related setting table 1)
The gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter number of jackpots is not set (when the limiter activation flag=0). That is, at the time of the first jackpot (so-called first hit) in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state), in the gaming state related setting table that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state. be.

As shown in FIG. 330(a), the gaming state related setting table 1 is based on the gaming state when the selected special symbol is determined to be a jackpot or small hit (gaming state at the time of winning). ``Game status setting'' consisting of a ``state flag'' and ``A time saving termination condition'', a ``limiter activation flag'', and a ``limiter number of times'' are associated with each other.

The “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of gaming state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. State flag = 0 indicates "normal gaming state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state", and state flag = 2 indicates "B time saving gaming state". In addition, in this embodiment, although the C time-saving game state is not executed, when the C time-saving game state is made executable, the state flag=3 indicates the C time-saving game state.

The "A time saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time saving gaming state as a time saving gaming state, and is composed of two ending conditions: "number of small winnings" and "time saving number". When either the ending condition of the "number of small winnings" or "time saving number" is satisfied, the time saving game state A ends and the game mode shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, "A time saving end condition" is composed of two end conditions, "number of small winnings won" and "time saving number", but only "number of small winnings winning" or "time saving" is configured. It may also be composed of only the number of times. This also applies to "B time saving termination condition" which will be described later.

"Number of small wins" indicates the number of times small wins were won in the time-saving gaming mode, and is counted without distinguishing between the "V small wins" and "falling small wins" mentioned above. If you win a "small hit", it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and you can move to the jackpot gaming state, but if you win a "falling small win" , it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the number of small winnings is subtracted without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, which triggers the end of the time-saving gaming state. .

For example, if the number of small winnings is set to 1, if the "falling small winning" is won before the "V small winning", it is impossible for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156. (or difficult), and the time-saving gaming state ends without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of small winnings = 255 is set, the "V small winning" (about 1/48.2) is more likely than the "falling small winning (about 1/152.6)". Since the probability of winning is higher and it is possible to win at least the "V small win" by the time the small win is won 255 times, it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state without ending the time saving gaming state, This means that you are virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state when the number of small winnings = 1 or 2 is set as the first time-saving ending condition is referred to as a "general time-saving gaming state", and the second time-saving ending condition is The time-saving game state when the number of small winnings is set to 255 is called a "special time-saving game state."

Further, when setting the number of small winnings = 255, the main CPU 201 sets the special time saving flag = 1 (special time saving flag on) in order to identify the special time saving gaming state. Similarly, when setting the number of small winnings = 1 or 2, the main CPU 201 sets the special time saving flag = 0 (turning off the special time saving flag) in order to identify the general time saving gaming state. ).

The "time saving number of times" indicates the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the time saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the status flag = 1 (A time-saving game state) is set, the number of time-savings is set to 10,000 times, and the end condition for the "number of time-savings" cannot be substantially satisfied. Although the number of times is set, it is also possible to set the number of times that the end condition for the "time saving number" can be satisfied, such as the number of time saving times = 100 times.

The "limiter activation flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not the number of continuous jackpots that have transitioned from the time-saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state due to the number of times limiter function is being counted, and when the limiter activation flag = 1, the number of jackpots that have been made by the number of times limiter function is counted. This indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots is being counted, and the limiter activation flag = 0 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the number limiter function is not being counted. In addition, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the state flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is set to 1, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to 0. is set, the limiter activation flag=0 is set.

The "limiter number of times" indicates the number of times set at the time of the first jackpot in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state). When the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the limiter count is subtracted every time the time-saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 and the limiter count = 0, the number of times limiter function is activated, and the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 330(d), which will be described later, is referred to.

According to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the first special symbol is drawn by lottery. If the result is a jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1", the status flag = 1, the number of small winnings = 255, the number of time reductions = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1, limiter number of times = 98 times, when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z2", status flag = 1, number of small winnings = 1 time, time saving When the number of times = 10000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1, the limiter number of times = 100 times, and the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z3", the status flag = 0 and the limiter activation flag = 0 are set. .

Furthermore, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. If the lottery result is a jackpot or a small win, after the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win) ends, the selected symbol of the second special symbol will be "z4" or "z5". and "z6", the status flag = 1, number of small winnings = 1, time saving number = 10000, limiter activation flag = 1, limiter number = 90, and the second special When the selected symbol is "z7", the status flag = 1, the number of small winnings = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1, and the number of limiter times = 1 time are set.

Furthermore, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. If the lottery result is a jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1", the status flag = 1, the number of small winnings won = 255, When time saving number = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1, limiter number = 97 times are set, and the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z2" or "z3", status flag = 1, small hit winning The number of times = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1, and the number of limiter times = 99 times are set.

Furthermore, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. If the lottery result is a jackpot or a small win, after the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win) ends, the selected symbol of the second special symbol will be "z4" or "z5". and "z6", the status flag = 1, number of small winnings = 1, time saving number = 10000, limiter activation flag = 1, limiter number = 96, and the second special When the selected symbol is "z7", the status flag = 1, the number of small winnings = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1, and the number of limiter times = 1 time are set.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. In this case, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the setting of the game state, limiter activation flag, and limiter count cannot be performed without transitioning to the jackpot game state. This means that you will not be able to do so. This also applies to gaming state related setting tables 2 to 4, which will be described later.

Next, when we organize the special symbol lottery situation in each game state where the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. The state is limited to the B time-saving game state, which is not triggered by a jackpot and is shifted to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value. That is, "the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state" in the gaming state-related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a) means that the gaming state at the time of winning is "B-time-saving gaming state".

Here, when in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the first starting port 8120, and the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 8140. Have difficulty. In addition, when in the time-saving gaming state (B-time saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is performed as a regular gaming mode, a game ball can enter the second starting port 8140, and a game ball can enter the first starting port 8120. It is difficult to enter the ball.

Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later. In the first normal game state, this corresponds to when the first special symbol is determined to be the first jackpot.

In addition, when in the normal gaming state, it is originally possible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 8140, but in the time-saving gaming state. Immediately after the end of the game and the transition to the normal gaming state, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving gaming state is used up.

Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win. In a second normal game state to be described later, a jackpot or small win is determined by drawing a second special symbol immediately after the end of the time-saving game state, and this corresponds to pulling back the jackpot or small win.

In addition, when in the B time-saving game state, it is originally possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 8140, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting port 8120; Immediately after transitioning from the state to the time-saving gaming state, the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal gaming state may be used up, or even though it is in the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), As an irregular game mode, left-handed hitting is performed, and a game ball may enter the first starting port 8120.

Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. The case is the B time saving game state where the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state has been used up, or the B time saving game state where the player is left-handed as an irregular game mode, and the first special symbol This corresponds to when the first jackpot is determined by the lottery.

In addition, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small hit. The case corresponds to the time when it is determined that the first jackpot has been won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the B time-saving game state where the player is playing right-handed.

(Characteristics of limiter times)
Next, the characteristics of the limiter number of times set by the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a) will be explained.

In the first normal game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (98 or 100) is set depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol. will be set.

In the second normal game state, when a jackpot or small hit is determined by the drawing of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state, and a limiter number is set, the limiter number varies depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. (1 time or 90 times) will be set.

B In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (97 or 99) is set depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol. That will happen.

B In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (96 times or 1 time) is set depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. That will happen.

In this way, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), it is configured such that different "limiter times" are set depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. There is.

In particular, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), after the jackpot gaming state by drawing a special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state by drawing a special symbol in the normal gaming state ends. It is possible to set a limiter number (97 times, 99 times, or 96 times) that is different from the limiter number (98 times, 100 times, or 90 times) that is set after the end.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot or small hit is determined by the second special symbol lottery in the second normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state, and the limiter number is set (big hit or small win) ), when it is determined to be the first jackpot by drawing the first special symbol in the first normal gaming state, and when it is determined to be the first jackpot by drawing the special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state. The game state related setting table 1 is configured so that a smaller limiter number (90 times) is set than the above. In particular, the limiter number set when a jackpot or small hit is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in the second normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state is set in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 (described later). (See Figure 341) corresponds to the remaining number of jackpot limiter times determined, and if the jackpot game state is returned to the general time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol will end more quickly (see Figure 341). ) It is possible to adopt a variation pattern table of special symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the original In this case, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game state etc. are not set without transitioning to the jackpot game state. However, if a game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 due to fraud or irregularity, and the state shifts to a jackpot game state, the number limiter function will be activated immediately (at the next jackpot) after the jackpot game state ends. In order to operate, the limiter number of times (0 times) is set smaller than the number of times (90 times or 96 times) set when the selected symbol "z4-6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small hit" is selected. The gaming state related setting table 1 is configured so that

In addition, in this embodiment, the limiter number is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it is arranged so that the same limiter number is set for all (for example, 100 times). may be configured.

(Characteristics of the number of small winnings)
According to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), the "number of small winnings" in the A time-saving ending condition is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. ing. Note that the gaming state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the "number of small winnings" in the A time-saving end condition differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning or the selected symbol of the special symbol.

In addition, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), it is possible to set the number of small winnings = 255 times according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol by lottery of the first special symbol. 1. It is possible to shift from the lottery of special symbols to a special time-saving game state. However, the gaming state related setting table 1 is configured so that the number of small winnings = 255 can be set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol by the lottery of the second special symbol. It may also be possible to make a transition from the lottery to a special time-saving gaming state. However, if it is possible to set the number of small winnings = 255 according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol, the number of small winnings = 255 will be set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol. It is desirable that the selection rate is lower than the selection rate where the number of small winnings = 255 is set according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), two types of number of small winnings, 1 or 255, are set depending on the selected special symbol. However, as shown in the gaming state related setting table 2 to be described later, it may be configured so that three or more types of the number of small winnings are set, such as 1, 2, or 255. . However, it is desirable that the number of small winnings = 255 is set when the first special symbol is selected by the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of small winnings" in the A time-saving ending condition is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. It may also be configured such that "number of times" is set.

(Game status related setting table 2)
The gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 330(b) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. In addition, since the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. This is a gaming state related setting table to be referred to. This also applies to the gaming state related setting table 3 and gaming state related setting table 4, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 330(b), the gaming state related setting table 2 includes "gaming state setting", "limiter activation flag", and "limiter count subtraction value" for the selected special symbol. ” are associated with each other.

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 330(b), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot game state After the completion of , "gaming state setting" and "limiter activation flag" are set similarly to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), but when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1" Or, when it is "z2", 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

As mentioned above, the limiter activation flag also corresponds to the status flag, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the status flag = 1 indicating the A time saving gaming state is set. In the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and although it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, the time-saving game In this situation, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120 by hitting left-handed as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot in the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. This corresponds to when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and is determined to be a jackpot. This also applies when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c) is a jackpot.

Furthermore, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 330(b), when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, , After the end of the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win), if the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z4", the state flag = 1, the number of wins of the small win = 2 times , Time saving number = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1 is set, 3 is subtracted from the limiter number, and when the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z5", status flag = 1, number of small winnings won = 2 times, time saving number = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1 is set, 2 is subtracted from the limiter number, and when the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag = 1. The number of small winnings = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10,000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1 are set, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter number of times.

In this way, according to the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. are configured to have different values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table 2 is set so that the "number of small winnings" and "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving ending condition are different depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. However, the gaming state related setting table 2 is configured so that only the "number of small winnings" or "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving ending condition differs depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. You may.

Furthermore, the gaming state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the "limiter count subtraction value" differs depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table is set so that the same value of "limiter count subtraction value (for example, all 1)" is subtracted regardless of the selected symbol of the second special symbol (selected symbol of the first special symbol). 2 may be configured.

(Game status related setting table 3)
The gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 1 to 90. .

As shown in FIG. 330(c), similar to the gaming state related setting table 2, the gaming state related setting table 3 includes "gaming state setting" and "limiter activation" for the selected special symbol. ``flag'' and ``limiter count subtraction value'' are associated.

According to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c), when a game ball enters the first starting port 8120 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot game state After completion of , the "setting of gaming state" and the "limiter activation flag" setting, and the subtraction of the limiter count are performed in the same way as in the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 330(b).

Furthermore, according to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c), when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, , After the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win) ends, no matter which second special symbol is selected, the state flag = 1, the number of small winnings = 1, time saving The number of times = 10,000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter number of times.

In this way, according to the gaming state related setting table 2 in FIG. 330(b) and the gaming state related setting table 3 in FIG. 330(c), depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter times, " The number of small winnings" and the "subtraction value of the limiter number of times" are configured to be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of small winnings" and the "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the time-saving ending condition A are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiters, but the jackpot limiter Depending on the remaining number of times, only the "number of small winnings" or "subtraction value of the limiter number of times" in the A time-saving end condition may be configured to differ.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that the "number of small winnings" and "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving termination condition do not differ depending on the remaining number of limiter numbers of jackpots. In this case, the gaming state related setting table 2 in FIG. 330(b) is deleted and the gaming state related setting table 3 in FIG. 330(c) is set with the limiter activation flag = 1. , the game state related setting table may be referred to when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is not 0 (jackpot limiter number≠0).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as "first switching number"), the gaming state related setting table of FIG. 330(b) Although the setting table 2 is configured to switch (reference) to the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c), the design of the first switching number can be changed as appropriate.

(Game status related setting table 4)
The game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 330(d) is a game referenced when the number limiter function is activated (the limiter activation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times = 0). This is a state-related setting table.

As shown in FIG. 330(d), the gaming state related setting table 4 includes "state flag = 0" which sets the normal gaming state as the gaming state setting for all selected special symbols. are associated.

In this way, according to the gaming state related setting table 4 in FIG. 330(d), when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is forcibly entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be regulated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table 4 is configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the game state is forcibly shifted to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, when the number of successive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the gaming state related setting table 4 may be configured to forcibly shift to the game disallowed state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, except for the gaming state related setting table 4 that is referred to when the number of times limiter function is activated, according to the gaming state related setting tables 1 to 3, the jackpot game is based on the lottery of the first special symbol. After the state ends, it is configured to shift to a "special time-saving gaming state", "general time-saving gaming state", or "normal gaming state", and after the end of the jackpot gaming state by drawing the second special symbol, the "special time-saving gaming state" It is configured so that the game only shifts to the "general time-saving gaming state" without shifting to the "time-saving gaming state" or the "general time-saving gaming state."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, the system is configured to shift to the "special time-saving game state", "general time-saving game state", or "normal game state". , After the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, (a) only "special time saving game state", (b) "special time saving game state" or "general time saving game state", (c) "special time saving game state" It may be configured to shift to either a "gaming state" or a "normal gaming state." Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot gaming state by drawing the second special symbol, the system is configured to shift only to the "general time-saving gaming state"; however, (a) "general time-saving gaming state" or "special time-saving gaming state" , (b) "general time-saving gaming state" or "normal gaming state", (c) "general time-saving gaming state", "special time-saving gaming state", or "normal gaming state".

In addition, in this embodiment, except for the gaming state related setting table 4 that is referred to when the number of times limiter function is activated, according to the gaming state related setting tables 1 to 3, the jackpot game is based on the lottery of the first special symbol. After the end of the state, the system is configured to shift to the "special time saving game state" at a relatively higher first rate than after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the second special symbol. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the transition to the "general time saving gaming state" is made at a relatively higher second rate than after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. It is configured as follows. Note that the above-mentioned first ratio and second ratio do not exclude the meaning that the ratios to be compared are 0% and 100%.

[10-3-6. Special pattern variation pattern table]
331 and 332 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 331 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table. Note that the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 331 and 332 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table that determines the "special symbol variation pattern" and the "special symbol variation display time" as the variation mode of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in either FIG. 331 or FIG. 332 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. Based on the result of the determination process, the selected special symbol, etc., a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation display time are determined.

Furthermore, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 8120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 8140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 331(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 331(a), the special symbol variation pattern table T1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the random number value for reach determination. , the random number value for performance selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, so originally it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, and the second starting port 8140 It is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the ball, but immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the transition to the normal game state, the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is Digestion will take place.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal gaming state in detail, the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the start information of the first special symbol is referred to as the "first normal gaming state". Immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends and transitioning to the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state in which the pending number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving gaming state is being used up (playing based on the start information of the second special symbol) The normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol that is displayed is referred to as the "second normal gaming state".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 331(a), in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the Therefore, the variation patterns of different special symbols can be determined. However, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. The same variation pattern (00H) for executing the normal variation can be determined in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss and the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. Although the same variation pattern is determined in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss and the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, different variation patterns may be determined. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the same variation pattern (which executes the normal variation) It may be configured such that the same variation pattern (0AH) for executing the door opening effect (loss) can be determined without determining 00H).

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in special time-saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the special time saving game state. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b) is set to the A time-saving game state where the number of small winnings = 255 is set as the second time-saving end condition, or the second time-saving end condition. It is also a variation pattern table of special symbols determined in the B time-saving game state in which the number of small winnings = 255 is set as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 331(b), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the random number value for performance selection. , the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation display time are associated with each other.

As mentioned above, in the special time saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120. However, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120 by hitting the ball to the left as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table S1 in FIG. It corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the ball enters the ball. This also applies to the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3 shown in FIG. 331, which are determined in the general time-saving gaming state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b), in the special time-saving gaming state, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the special symbol variation is much shorter than in the normal gaming state. A special symbol variation pattern (10H) consisting of a display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be determined. As a result, in the special time saving game state, the variable display of the special symbols can be finished (expired) much faster than in the normal game state.

Further, according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b), the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" '' is determined, it is treated as a loss and the same fluctuation pattern (10H) as the fluctuation pattern determined when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss is determined. This is because in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of small winnings under A time-saving ending condition is set to 255, and the "falling small winning" will not substantially end the time-saving gaming state. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of small winnings under the A time-saving ending condition is set to 255, the time-saving gaming state will not actually end due to a "falling small winning", but for insurance reasons. , when the number of small wins is the 255th falling small hit (the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined) , when the remaining number of small winnings = 1), a variation pattern for executing an effect in which the time-saving gaming state ends (for example, a variation pattern 43H for executing a card effect to be described later) is determined. You may.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in general time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables in the general time-saving gaming state include a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a), a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(b), and a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(c). ) is provided with three variation pattern tables including the special symbol variation pattern table J3. In addition, the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the general time-saving gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one, or may be two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a) is for the general time saving game state, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols to be determined.

As shown in FIG. 332(a), the special symbol variation pattern table J1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and "A as a time saving end condition. The remaining number of small winnings, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for performance selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated.

According to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, , a special symbol variation pattern (11H) consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (for example, 3.0 seconds) than in the normal gaming state is configured to be determinable. Thereby, in the general time-saving game state, the variable display of special symbols can be finished (expired) faster than in the normal game state.

Also, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. , and when the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small hit" are decided, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the common The special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which the "battle performance" is executed can be determined. As a result, when the "Battle Effect" is executed, the "V It can give you the expectation of winning a small prize.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. , and when the selected symbol "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small hit" or the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to "falling small hit" is determined. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, a special symbol variation pattern (30H, 31H, 32H, 3FH) in which a common "card performance" is executed can be determined. As a result, when the "card performance" is executed, it is possible to determine whether the player has won a "falling small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving gaming state, or a "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to create interest in whether it is a failure or a ``loss''.

In this way, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, This makes it possible to perform various performances and further improve the interest of the game, compared to the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown is 90 or less.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(b) is for the general time saving game state, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 1 to 90. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols determined by.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and "A as a time saving end condition. The remaining number of small winnings, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for performance selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated.

According to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(b), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, , a special symbol fluctuation pattern consisting of a shorter special symbol fluctuation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) than the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more is configured to be determinable. There is. Thereby, in the general time-saving game state, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times decreases, the variable display of special symbols can be finished (expired) more quickly.

Also, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(b), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, the special symbol shown in FIG. 332(a) Unlike the variation pattern table J1, a special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a "battle performance" in which a special symbol has a long variation display time is not determined. As a result, in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining limiter number of jackpots is 90 or less, the special symbol fluctuation pattern consisting of a long special symbol fluctuation display time is not determined, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less. The variable display of the special symbols can be finished (digested) more quickly than in the general time-saving game state when the number of times is 91 or more.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as "second switching number"), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table changes to the special symbol shown in FIG. 332(a). Although the structure is configured such that the variation pattern table J1 of 1 is switched (determined) to the variation pattern table J2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 332(b), the design of the second switching number can be changed as appropriate. In particular, if the second switching number is designed to be the number of times less than 10% (1 to 10 times) is subtracted from the limiter number (100 times) set at the time of the first jackpot, the special symbol can be changed more quickly. Since it becomes possible to switch to the special symbol variation pattern table whose display is finished (digested) at an early timing, the interest of the game is further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second switching number of times the special symbol fluctuation pattern table switches is set to the same number (90) as the first switching number of times the gaming state related setting table switches; The number of times of switching may be set to be different from the second number of switching times.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 332(c) is determined when the general time saving game state is in place, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times = 0. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols. That is, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 332(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when the number of times limiter function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 332(c), the special symbol variation pattern table J3 includes the type of the special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the "A time saving end condition". The remaining number of small winnings, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 332(c), in the general time-saving gaming state when the number of times limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or small hit, the number of times limiter function is activated. It is configured so that different special symbol variation patterns (50H, 51H) are determined compared to the general time saving game state (special symbol variation pattern tables J1, J2) when the function is not activated. Thereby, in the general time-saving game state when the number of times limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a special exclusive performance (ending success reach) can be executed.

[10-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 333 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "pre-reading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 8120 or the second starting port 8140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 333(a) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the game state as special symbol pre-reading related data.

As shown in FIG. 333(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 333(b) is an example of the structure of a pre-read command as the analyzed information by analyzing the starting information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 333(b), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

“Parameter 1” is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or loss based on the random number value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 333(c) is an example of the setting table for parameter 1. It is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information obtained by analyzing in advance the special symbol (selected symbol) when stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value. This is an example of a setting table.

"Parameter 3" is the fluctuation information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. This is an example of the setting table No. 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[10-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 334 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 334 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is based on the random value for normal symbol hit determination obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in Fig. 334, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination corresponds to the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). It is specified and specified. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 334, and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 334, and if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 1 and 65535, it is determined as a "normal symbol hit". It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol loss" and determines the winning determination value data of the normal symbol as "normal symbol losing determination value data". do.

In this way, in this embodiment, "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and "normal symbol hit" is determined more easily than "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. In addition, it is desirable that the configuration is such that "normal symbol winning" is determined more easily than "normal symbol losing" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal symbol winning" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00. do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but as will be described later. By changing the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 according to the game state, the profit level given to the player is varied according to the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" may be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state between A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, or special time-saving game state and general time-saving game state.

[10-3-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 335 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 335 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "normal symbol selection symbol".

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 335 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”), the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. are defined in association with each other. Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 335, and determines the selected symbol of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol per determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 335, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol for the normal symbol is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49, and selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol. If the symbol random number value is between 50 and 99, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting a selected symbol of a normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (in the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process) is used regardless of the game state. The selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected based on the result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that the selection symbol of the normal symbol is selected depending on the gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 334) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 335), the selected symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[10-3-10. Opening pattern determination table for ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 336 is an example of the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory in the eighth pachinko game machine. Note that the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 336 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory is determined according to the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process (in the case of a normal symbol hit). This is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 8146.

In the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 336, the game state, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 are defined in association with each other.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146" is the "first opening time" in the first open state of the second starting port 8140, and the "first opening time" in the first closed state of the second starting port 8140. "first wait time" in the second open state of the second starting port 8140, "second open time" in the second open state of the second starting port 8140, "second wait time" in the second closed state of the second starting port 8140, 2. It consists of an "ending time" in which the starting port 8140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric accessory 8146 is ended. Note that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be configured so that the open state and closed state can be repeated three or more times, or it can be configured to be open only once. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, an "opening time" for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 8140 may be provided before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 336 and determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 based on the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146, it transmits an opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to have a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Furthermore, according to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H02H) of 8146 is configured such that the first opening time is 5400 ms, the first waiting time is 120 ms, the second opening time is 72 ms, and the ending time is 12 ms.

As described above, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 differs depending on the gaming state, and when the normal symbol is won in the normal gaming state, the game ball enters the second starting port 8140. ``An unfavorable opening mode (also referred to as ``short opening'')'' in which it is difficult to open is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving gaming state, a ``disadvantageous opening mode'' in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 8140 is determined. An advantageous opening mode (also referred to as "long opening") is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 is activated, the specified number of ordinary electric accessories is set to one, and while the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 is activated ( When one game ball enters the second starting port 8140 (while the second starting port 8140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 ends (when the second starting port 8140 is closed). ). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second starting port 8140 for one normal symbol, and even if there is a remaining opening time of 5400 ms in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting Port 8140 will be closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the same normal electric accessory 8146 is determined as the same time-saving game state regardless of the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B, or the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 8146 between the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, or the special time saving game state and the general time saving game state.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 may be varied depending on the selected normal symbol. However, in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the normal gaming state, it becomes a group of "unfavorable opening modes" than the case of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state, and in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state, in the normal gaming state. It is desirable that the group be in an "advantageous opening mode" group compared to the case of normal symbols.

[10-3-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 337 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 337 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 337, the gaming state, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 337, in the normal game state, the normal symbol fluctuation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation display time is determined to be 408 ms. It is configured. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol confirmation time for the normal symbols is determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the gaming state or the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbols are all determined to be the same, but the time varies depending on the selected symbol of the normal symbols. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of the same normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol are determined, but depending on the selected symbol of the normal symbol, different normal symbols are displayed. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol are determined. Furthermore, it may be configured such that different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol symbol confirmation times are determined between the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state, or the special time saving gaming state and the general time saving gaming state. good.

[10-4. Main control processing]
In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing and normal symbol control performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although some of the processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the system timer interrupt process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[10-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 338, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S8001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S8001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S8001.

In S8002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S8001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S8008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S8003.

In S8003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S8004, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S8005. Move.

In S8004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S8007, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8006. Move to.

In S8005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) to the second special The starting information stored in the symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S8006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special The starting information stored in the symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S8007, the main CPU 201 stores special symbol startup information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol startup storage area and second special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S8008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 339. After executing the process of S8003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S8001 to S8008) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 8120 or the second It may also be a sequential variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the order of winnings (order of balls entered) into the starting hole 8140.

[10-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 338) will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 339 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S8011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is 0 or not. The waiting time of this special symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the special symbol management process, and will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 338), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If determined, the process moves to S8012.

In S8012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S8012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S8013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S8012.

In S8013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S8013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 340. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8014.

In S8014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S8014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 342. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8015.

In S8015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S8015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 344. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8016.

In S8016, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game closed processing. This process of S8016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 347. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8017.

In S8017, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S8017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 348. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8018.

In S8018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S8018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 349. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8019.

In S8019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S8019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8020.

In S8020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S8020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

After completing the processing of S8013 to S8020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 338). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[10-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 340, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "0", the process moves to S8022.

In S8022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a hit determination of the special symbol is performed, and win/loss determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process in S8022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8023.

In S8023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol and symbol designation command of the special symbol are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process in S8023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8024.

In S8024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if it is a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process, based on the limiter activation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 to be described later), One of the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 328 is determined. In addition, in the case of a small hit in the special symbol hit determination process, based on the limiter activation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (limiter number counter), the small hit type determination table 1 to 1 shown in FIG. 3. Determine one of the small winning type determination tables. Furthermore, in order to set the gaming state etc. based on the gaming state at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state data at the time of winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win is stored in the main RAM 203. Set in the game state storage area at the time of winning. After executing the process in S8024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025.

In S8025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 331 and 332 is determined according to the gaming state, and the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table is referred to. A special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol of the special symbol, etc. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After executing the process in S8025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8026.

In S8026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process that sets a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S8025 is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S8026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8027.

In S8027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 339) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S8027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8028.

In S8028, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8029.

In S8029, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S8023 is performed. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S8025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8025-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether the current gaming status is the normal gaming status. That is, it is determined whether the status flag indicating the normal gaming status is 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process moves to S8025-2, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). Then, the process moves to S8025-3.

In S8025-2, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 331(a). After executing the process in S8025-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-3, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether the current gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is the B-time-saving gaming state. That is, it is determined whether or not the status flag indicating the B time saving gaming status is 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8025-4, and determines that the current gaming state is not the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the A time-saving gaming state). If it is determined, the process moves to S8025-5.

In S8025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b) when the current gaming state is the B time saving gaming state. After executing the process in S8025-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-5, the main CPU 201 refers to the special time saving flag and determines whether the current gaming state (A time saving gaming state) is a special time saving gaming state. That is, it is determined whether the special time saving flag indicating the special time saving gaming state is 1 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the special time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8025-6, and determines that the current gaming state is not the special time-saving gaming state (that is, the general time-saving gaming state). If determined, the process moves to S8025-7.

In S8025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 331(b) when the current gaming state is the special time saving gaming state. After executing the process in S8025-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-7, if the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines whether the remaining limiter number of jackpots ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 to be described later) is 91 or more. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining limiter count of jackpots is 91 or more, the process moves to S8025-8, and the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-8, and determines that the remaining limiter count of jackpots is not 91 or more (that is, the remaining limiter count of jackpots is 91 or more). If it is determined that the number of times is 90 or less), the process moves to S8025-9.

In S8025-8, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 332(a). After executing the process in S8025-8, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the remaining limiter number of jackpots ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203, which will be described later) is between 1 and 90 in the general time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is between 1 and 90, it moves the process to S8025-10, and the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-10, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is not 1 to 90 (that is, the jackpot limiter number If it is determined that the remaining number of times = 0), the process moves to S8025-11.

In S8025-10, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 332(b). After executing the process in S8025-10, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-11, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 332(c). After executing the process in S8025-11, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-12, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S8022, and the special symbol. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the selected symbol, a random value for reach determination, a random value for performance selection, etc. as starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process in S8025-12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-13.

In S8025-13, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table and determines a special symbol fluctuation pattern command based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. After executing the process of S8025-13, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process and moves the process to S8026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 340).

[10-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 342, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S8042.

In S8042, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol symbol determination time setting processing that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol confirmation time setting process, the special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S8042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S8043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. The eighth pachinko game machine includes a "time saving number counter" for counting the number of time saving times as a condition for ending the time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, and a special symbol that transitions to the B time saving gaming state. A process is performed to update a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of variable displays. Furthermore, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 343. After executing the process in S8043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8044.

In S8044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S8015 in FIG. 339) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S8044, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8045.

In S8045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8045, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8046.

In S8046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S8046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

[10-4-6. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display termination process (see FIG. 342) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving number counter updating process to update the time saving number counter. In this time saving number counter update process, if the time saving gaming state is set (when the status flag = 1 or 2 is set), 1 is subtracted from the "time saving number counter" in the main RAM 203 and updated. do. After executing the process in S8043-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-2.

In S8043-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving number counter=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S8043-3, and if it determines that the time-saving counter is not equal to 0, the process proceeds to S8043-4.

In S8043-3, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and causes the time saving gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state. Here, to clear the time saving information, the status flag, special time saving flag, time saving number counter, and small winning winning number counter to be described later are cleared (set to 0). After executing the process in S8043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-4.

In S8043-4, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter updating process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S8043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-5.

In S8043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=the ceiling value (for example, 999 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter = the ceiling value, the process moves to S8043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter does not = the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process in S8043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-7.

In S8043-7, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving gaming state setting processing for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, and the number of small winnings is set as the "B time-saving end condition" to transition to the "special time-saving game state". = 255 times, and the number of time saving times = 10,000 times. Then, the special time saving flag=1 is set so that the special time saving game state can be identified. In addition, in the B time-saving game state setting process, the number of small winnings = 1, the number of time-savings = 10,000, and the special time-saving flag = 0 may be set so as to shift to the "general time-saving game state". After executing the process in S8043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-8.

In S8043-8, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the time saving transition command when starting the B time saving gaming state. Note that the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8043-8, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-9, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S8043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display termination process (see FIG. 342).

[10-4-7. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process moves to S8052.

In S8052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbols corresponding to the jackpot. When the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S8054, and when it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S8061.

In S8054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this external signal processing of the jackpot, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and when a jackpot occurs, the external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 is "a jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol. ” generate. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S8054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8055.

In S8055, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 328 determined in S8024 above. The maximum number of rounds is set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 328 determined in S8024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time ) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8056.

In S8056, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process of S8056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8057.

In S8057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, special time saving flag, time saving number counter, and small winning winning number counter. After executing the process in S8057, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8058.

In S8058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8059.

In S8059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big prize opening preparation process (see S8018 in FIG. 339) will be performed. . After executing the process of S8059, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8059.

In S8060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S8060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In S8061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Determine whether it exists or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small hit, the process moves to S8063, and if it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, a loss), it moves the process to S8071.

In S8063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In the external signal processing for this small hit, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to, and when the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "V small win" are determined, the external terminal board 184 is activated. A "small hit signal" is generated as an external signal to be output to the hall computer 186 via the hall computer 186. Thereafter, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal board 184. In addition, in this embodiment, when the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "falling small hit" is determined, the "small hit signal" is not generated. It may be configured to generate a "small hit signal" even when the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to is determined. After executing the process in S8063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8064.

In S8064, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning start preparation setting process. In this small hit start preparation setting process, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol" by referring to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. 329 determined in S8024 above, and the determined maximum number of openings. is set to the upper limit of the number of small winning openings in the main RAM 203. Next, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 329 determined in S8024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selection symbol". ) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 329 determined in S8024 above, the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156. The time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning a prize control process regarding the V shutter solenoid 8160 which opens and closes the V winning a prize opening 8156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (FIGS. 355 and 356) described later. After executing the process in S8064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8066.

In S8065, the main CPU 201 performs small win status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing the process in S8065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8066.

In S8066, the main CPU 201 counts the number of small winning wins as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state, and performs a small winning winning number updating process to update the "small winning winning number counter" indicating the remaining number of small winning winnings. I do. The details of this small winning number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 345. After executing the process in S8066, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8067.

In S8067, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8068.

In S8068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small hit game closed process (see S8016 in FIG. 339) will be performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process in S8068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8069.

In S8069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S8069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In S8071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S8051 to S8071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-8. Small hit number of winnings update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 345, a description will be given of the small winning number update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344). FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of updating the number of small winnings in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8066-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, that is, whether the state flag=1 or 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8066-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not a time-saving gaming state, it performs a small winning number update process. is finished, and the process is moved to S8067 of special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344).

In S8066-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "small winning winnings counter" in the main RAM 203 and updates it. After executing the process in S8066-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8066-3.

In S8066-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the small winning number counter = 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the small hit winning number counter = 0, it moves the process to S8066-4, and if it determines that the small winning winning number counter = not 0, it executes the small winning winning number updating process. The process ends and the process moves to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344).

In S8066-4, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and causes the time saving gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state. Here, to clear the time saving information, the status flag, special time saving flag, time saving number counter, and small winning winning number counter are cleared (set to 0). After executing the process of S8066-4, the main CPU 201 ends the small hit winning number update process and moves the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344).

[10-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 346, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344) will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S8072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8073.

In S8073, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the start information stored in the special symbol determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process in S8073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8074.

In S8074, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 344).

[10-4-10. Small hit game closed processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing an example of the small winning game closed process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "3", the process moves to S8082.

In S8082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small hit opening number counter value". “Small hit opening number counter” is a counter that counts the number of small winning openings. Note that the count value of the small hit opening number counter (small winning opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8083.

In S8083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small hit opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the number of small winning openings. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the number of openings for a small hit, it moves the process to S8089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit for the number of openings for a small hit, it moves the process to S8084.

In S8084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 8151 (number of winnings in the second big winning hole 8151) is not the maximum number of winning balls in the small winning game state. In this process, whether the value of the second big winning hole counter counted by the second big winning hole count switch 8152 is the predefined value of the maximum number of winnings of the second big winning hole 8151 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 8151 is not the maximum number of prizes, it moves the process to S8085, and determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 8151 is the maximum number of prizes. If so, the process moves to S8089.

In S8085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process in S8085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8086.

In S8086, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening setting process to open the second big winning opening 8151. In this second big winning opening opening setting process, the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 8151 of this time is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole opening control data for opening the second big winning hole 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155. After executing the process in S8086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8087.

In S8087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the small winning game opening process (see FIG. 348) will be performed after the small winning game closing process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S8087, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8088.

In S8088, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S8088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In S8089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 8156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 8157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S8090, and if it determines that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8098.

In S8090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S8090, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8101.

In S8091, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, first, the jackpot type shown in FIG. 328 is determined based on the limiter activation flag and the remaining limiter number in the number limiter function ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 to be described later). One of the jackpot type determination tables from Tables 1 to 3 is determined. Then, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to . Furthermore, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the waiting time of special symbols in RAM203. After executing the process in S8101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8092.

In S8092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route will start from the second round game. After executing the process in S8092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8093.

In S8093, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process in S8093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8094.

In S8094, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, special time saving flag, time saving number counter, and small winning winning number counter. After executing the process in S8094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8095.

In S8095, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8095, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8096.

In S8096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (FIG. 339) will be performed after the small winning game closed process is completed. After executing the process in S8096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8097.

In S8097, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S8097, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In S8098, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 329 determined in S8024 above. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8099.

In S8099, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing the process of S8099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8100.

In S8100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 346 is performed. After executing the process of S8100, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

[10-4-11. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 348, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during opening of the small winning game in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small winning game opening process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "4", the process moves to S8102.

In S8102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 8151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the second big prize opening opening setting process (see S8086 in FIG. 347) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 8151 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339). In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 8151 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8103.

In S8103, the main CPU 201 performs a second grand prize opening closing setting process to close the second grand prize opening 8151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the current closing time of the second big prize opening 8151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155. After executing the process in S8103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8104.

In S8104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small winning game closing process (see Figure 347) will be performed after the small winning game opening process is completed. Become. After executing the process of S8104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

[10-4-12. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 349, the grand winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "5", the process moves to S8112.

In S8112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8113.

In S8113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it moves the process to S8114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it moves the process to S8118.

In S8114, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 328 determined in S8024 or S8101 above. , the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8115.

In S8115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 339) is performed after the big winning opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process in S8115, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8116.

In S8116, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8116, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8117.

In S8117, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8117, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

In S8118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S8118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8119.

In S8119, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning hole opening setting process to open the first big winning hole 8131. In this first jackpot opening setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. ), the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8131 in this round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 8131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 8135. After executing the process in S8119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8120.

In S8120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the big winning hole opening control process (see Figure 339) will be performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. Become. After executing the process in S8120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8121.

In S8121, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8122.

In S8122, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8122, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

[10-4-13. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process moves to S8132.

In S8132, when the first grand prize opening 8131 is opened, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning number of game balls that entered the first grand prize opening 8131 in one round is the maximum winning number. do. In this process, whether the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 8132 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the first big winning hole 8131 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 8131 is not the maximum number of winnings, the process moves to S8133, and in S8132, the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 8131 is the maximum number of winnings. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S8134.

In S8133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see S8119 in FIG. 349) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 8131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8131 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8134.

In S8134, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning opening closing setting process to close the first big winning opening 8131. In this first jackpot closing setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. ), the closing time of the first big prize opening 8131 in this round is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole closing control data for closing the first big winning hole 8131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 8135. After executing the process in S8134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8135.

In S8135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see FIG. 349) is performed again. That will happen. After executing the process in S8135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8136.

In S8136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8137.

In S8137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339).

[10-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339) will be described. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state ending process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 339), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process moves to S8142.

In S8142, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing the process in S8142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8143.

In S8143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot end state setting processing to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, based on the remaining jackpot limiter number (value of a "limiter number counter" to be described later), one of the game state settings tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 330 is selected. Determine the state-related setting table, refer to the determined gaming state-related setting table, and set the gaming state (state flag, number of small winnings, number of time-savings, special Set the time saving flag). After executing the process in S8143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8145.

In this embodiment, first, the limiter activation flag is referred to, and if the limiter activation flag=0, the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a) is determined. In addition, when the limiter activation flag = 1, when the "limiter number counter" is 91 or more (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more), the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 330 (b) 2, and when the "limiter number counter" is 1 to 90 (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is 1 to 90), the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 330(c) is determined, and " When the "limiter number counter" is 0 (when the remaining number of limiter number of jackpots is 0), the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 330(d) is determined. Then, with reference to the determined game state related setting table, the game state (status flag, number of small winnings, number of time savers, special time saver flag) is set based on the selected special symbol.

In this embodiment, when the limiter number counter = 0 and the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 330(d) is determined, the normal game "Status flag = 0" is set to set the state, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the game is forcibly shifted to the normal game state.

In S8144, the main CPU 201 sets and updates, as limiter information, a "limiter activation flag" and a "limiter counter" for counting the number of consecutive jackpots in the time-saving gaming state, corresponding to the remaining limiter number of jackpots. Performs limiter information update processing. Details of this limiter information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 352. After executing the process in S8144, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8145.

In S8145, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 346 is performed. After executing the process of S8145, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-15. Limiter information update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the limiter information update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 351) will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing an example of limiter information update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8144-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected symbol of the special symbol that ends the jackpot gaming state is the selected symbol of the special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the selected symbol is a special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to S8144-4, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a selected symbol that is a special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 processes the symbol. is moved to S8144-2.

In S8144-2, the main CPU 201 clears the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203 (sets the limiter number counter=0). After executing the process in S8144-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8144-3.

In S8144-3, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=0. After executing the process of S8144-3, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 351).

In S8144-4, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state is being counted, that is, whether the limiter activation flag is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8144-7, and counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state from the time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that counting is not in progress, the process moves to S8144-5.

In S8144-5, if the main CPU 201 is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state (if the limiter activation flag = 0), the main CPU 201 stores the limiter number in the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203. Performs limiter count setting processing. In this limiter count setting process, the limiter count is determined based on the selected special symbol by referring to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 330(a), and the determined limiter count is set in the limiter count counter. . After executing the process in S8144-5, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8144-6.

In S8144-6, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=1 when the limiter count is newly set. After executing the process of S8144-6, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 351).

In S8144-7, if the main CPU 201 is counting the number of successive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state (if the limiter activation flag=1), it performs a process of subtracting the limiter number of times. In this limiter count subtraction process, one of the game status related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. A setting table is determined, the determined game state related setting table is referred to, and a subtraction value for the limiter count is determined based on the selected special symbol. Then, the determined limiter count subtraction value is subtracted from the limiter count counter in the main RAM 203 and updated. After executing the process of S8144-7, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 351).

[10-6-16. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 353, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 353 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S8200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21), and sets the waiting time for normal symbols to 0. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S8201.

In S8201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S8201, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8210. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S8210 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S8201.

In S8210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S8210 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 354. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8220.

In S8220, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S8220 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S8230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S8230 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8240.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss) of the stopped and displayed normal symbols. Then, when the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 8146 is performed and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 8146.

In the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 8146, the opening pattern determination table for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. The opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S8240, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S8240 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8250.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second starting port 8140 in accordance with the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S8230, and When a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enters the second starting port 8140, or when all opening patterns of the normal electric accessories 8146 are completed, the second starting port 8140 is closed. When the opening process of the normal electric accessory 8146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S8250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S8250 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and transfers the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Return to

In this normal symbol winning termination process, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S8210 to S8240 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S8200 to S8250) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-6-17. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 353) will be described with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 354, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S8211).

If it is determined in S8211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 353). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8212.

In S8212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S8212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8213.

In S8213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol miss”). After executing the process in S8213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8214.

In S8214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is determined. After executing the process in S8214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8215.

In S8215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 337 and determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time based on the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. decide. After executing the process in S8215, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8216.

In S8216, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time determined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (S8215) is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. After executing the process in S8216, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8217.

In S8217, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 353) is performed. (see S8220) will be performed. After executing the process in S8217, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8218.

In S8218, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-6-18. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 355 and 356, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. 355 and 356 are flowcharts showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8311, the main CPU 201 performs protection register saving processing. After executing the process in S8311, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8312.

In S8312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, a power outage is not detected). If so, the process moves to S8313.

In S8313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process in S8313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8314.

In S8314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process in S8314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8315.

In S8315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As explained for the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game not permitted state) as the startup state when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored and the RAM is cleared. The game permission flag is also set to ON (=game permission state) after the RAM is cleared after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S8317, and if it determines that the game is not allowed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332.

In S8317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S8317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8318.

In S8318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process in S8318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8319.

In S8319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for jackpot determination of a random number value for jackpot determination, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process in S8319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8320.

In S8320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 357. After executing the process in S8320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8321.

In S8321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process in S8321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8322.

In S8322, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 8156 when the V operation flag is on. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. 329 determined in S8024 above is used. , determine the opening time as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special symbol", set the determined opening time to the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning opening control data for opening the V winning opening 8156 is output to the shutter solenoid 8160. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process in S8322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8323.

In S8323, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot balls counter" that counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state per day, and determines that the cumulative jackpot balls counter ≧99900. Determine whether or not. When the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter is ≧99900, the process proceeds to S8324, and when it determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter does not exceed 99900, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8328.

Here, the "cumulative jackpot ball counter" is a counter in the work area of the main RAM 203, and is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on (starts from 0 when the power is turned on). Note that the "cumulative jackpot ball counter" is not initialized when the power is turned on, but is initialized every time the corresponding number of game balls fired or out (for example, 3000 balls) is counted per day. It may be configured so that

In S8324, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a "gaming disallowed state preparation command" for causing the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. to notify that the state will soon shift to the disallowed gaming state. After executing the process in S8324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8325.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the cumulative number of jackpot balls issued, which is the condition for transitioning to the gaming disallowed state, is 99,900 or more, which is 100 less than 100,000 (100,000 balls), the gaming disallowed state preparation command is issued. However, if the total number of jackpot balls (100,000) is smaller than the cumulative number of jackpot balls (100,000) that is a condition for transitioning to a gaming disallowed state, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls (100,000) that is a condition for shifting to a gaming disallowed state. Any number greater than or equal to the number of balls (for example, 98,500 to 99,999) that is calculated by subtracting the maximum number of balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 10R x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 1500 balls) from It may be configured such that a game disallowed state preparation command is transmitted at this time.

In S8325, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot ball number counter" and determines whether the cumulative jackpot ball number counter≧100000. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter is ≧100000, it moves the process to S8326, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter ≧100,000, it moves the process to S8328.

In S8326, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a gaming disallowed state to shift to a gaming disallowed state as an operation of the payout limiter function. In this game disallowance state setting process, the game permission flag is turned off (=0), the cumulative jackpot ball output counter is set to 0, and the special symbol control state number is set to end the special symbol game. Set to 0. Further, game disallowance information is output to the payout/shooting control circuit 400 in order to stop the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 6 and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. Note that by clearing the RAM, the game-disallowed state will then transition to a game-permitted state. After executing the process in S8326, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8327.

In S8327, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a "gaming disallowed state command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that the state has shifted to the gaming disallowed state. After executing the process in S8327, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8328.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day reaches the number of balls that have been put out (for example, 100,000 balls), the jackpot game state is activated. It is possible to forcibly shift the state to a game-disallowed state, thereby partially regulating the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reached the stop number of balls, the jackpot gaming state is forcibly shifted to the game disallowed state. When the number of balls to be put out is reached, the system may be configured to forcibly shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is not permitted, various switches through which the game ball enters or passes (excluding the backup clear switch 176, etc.) are disabled, and the game ball is ejected from the firing device 6. Although the configuration is configured to prohibit the disabling of game balls from the payout device 82, it is possible to at least disable various switches, prohibit the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6, and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The configuration may be such that either one of these is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the cumulative number of jackpot balls issued is 100,000 (100,000 balls) or more, the system is configured to shift to the game disallowed state. The design can be changed as appropriate.

In S8328, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S8328, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8329.

In S8329, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process in S8329, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8330.

In S8330, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process in S8330, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8331.

In S8331, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S8329. After executing the process in S8331, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332.

In S8332, the main CPU 201 performs processing to restore the protection register saved in S8311, and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[10-4-19. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 355) will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine has an additional structure of a first big winning opening count switch 8132, a second big winning opening counting switch 8152, and a V winning opening switch 8157 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S8401, the main CPU 201 executes a first starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S8401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8402.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 8121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first starting port 8120. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A random number value for symbols, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for performance selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one first special symbol determination area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting opening 8120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S8402, the main CPU 201 executes a second starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S8402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8403.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 8141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 8140. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one second special symbol determination area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the second starting opening 8140 and the pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S8403, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S8403, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8404.

In S8404, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 8132 detects that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, the main CPU 201 responds to the first big winning hole 8131. At the same time, 1 is added to the first grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winning game balls entered into the first grand prize opening 8131 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when in the jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol = 5 or 6), the "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" of the main RAM 203 is set to the first jackpot opening 8131. is updated by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 15) of the game balls that are paid out when the balls are entered. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first big winning hole winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning hole 8131 is performed. The first large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8405.

In S8405, the main CPU 201 performs second grand prize opening passage detection processing. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 8152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 8151, the main CPU 201 responds to the second big winning hole 8151. At the same time, the second grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the second grand prize opening 8151 is updated by adding one. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls of game balls that are paid out when the ball enters the second big prize opening 8151 (for example, 15 ) is added and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the second big winning opening 8151 is performed. The second major winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8405, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8406.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is in effect, a ball is paid out to the "cumulative jackpot payout number counter" in the main RAM 203 when a ball enters the first jackpot opening 8131 and the second jackpot opening 8151. Although it is configured to add the number of prize balls of the game balls, in addition to when it is in the jackpot game state, the number It may be configured such that the number of prize balls of game balls paid out when the ball enters the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151 is added. Furthermore, when it is in a jackpot gaming state (when the special symbol control state number = 5, 6), or when it is in a jackpot gaming state including a small winning gaming state (the special symbol control state number = 3 to 6). ), the number of game balls paid out when the balls enter the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151 is stored in the "cumulative jackpot balls counter" in the main RAM 203, as well as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151. It may be configured to add the number of prize balls of game balls paid out when the balls enter the opening 8120, the second starting opening 8140, and the general winning opening 122.

In S8406, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 8156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 8157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passing flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 8156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process in S8406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8407.

In S8407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S8407, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8408.

In this gate passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126 is detected by the passage gate switch 8127, the main CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to the normal symbol starting storage area (4) are free. Determine whether there is an area. If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S8408, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S8408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the current first starting opening winning detection process or second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 333. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. 333, in the time saving gaming state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state, the prefetching command (second special Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 355) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-5. Sub control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained.

[10-5-1. Time-saving game state preview performance pattern determination table]
First, details of the preview performance pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIG. 358. FIG. 358 is an example of a preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 358, the notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 and the type of the time-saving gaming state (special time-saving gaming state or general time-saving gaming state). , the selection rate (first random number), and the preview presentation pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "performance pattern" refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect buttons 54, and the like. Further, the "notice performance pattern" refers to performance information that suggests in advance the special symbol lottery result and the performance content to be executed, among the performance patterns. In addition to the preview performance pattern, various performances such as a symbol performance pattern to be described later can be executed in a superimposed manner.

In addition, "selection rate (first random number value)" corresponds to the fact that the obtained second random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the second random number value consisting of the second random number range. However, for convenience of explanation, this is replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include "Notice performance pattern A" which suggests a "falling small hit" in advance, and "Notice performance pattern B1" which suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a "V small hit". ", and a "notice performance pattern B2" which is developed from the preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that the "battle performance" is highly likely to be executed. In this embodiment, only three types of preview performance patterns are provided, but the content to be previewed may be subdivided into four or more types of display modes.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the advance notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The preview performance pattern is determined based on the first random number).

According to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 358, the probability of a "V small hit" is higher in the order of "Notice performance pattern A" < "Notice performance pattern B1" < "Notice performance pattern B2". As shown, the selection rate (first random value) is associated with the preview performance pattern.

Further, according to the notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 358, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss in the special time-saving game state, the notice performance pattern is not determined (executed). It is configured.

Furthermore, according to the advance notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 358, in the special time-saving game state, the "notice performance pattern A" that suggests a "falling small hit" in advance is not determined (executed). It is configured.

Further, according to the advance notice effect pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 358, the "notice effect pattern B2" is determined (executed) only when a special symbol variation pattern command for executing a battle effect is received. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in the notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 358, the "notice performance pattern A" that suggests "falling small hit" in advance is a special symbol variation pattern command or card performance that executes a battle performance. It is configured to be determined (executed) when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command to execute a card effect, but only when a special symbol variation pattern command to execute a card effect is received, the ``notice effect pattern'' is determined (executed). A'' may be determined (executed).

[10-5-2. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 359, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 359, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S8500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S8500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S8510 to S8580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S8510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the production button 54 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. Furthermore, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information, and inputs the operation information according to the current situation such as the production. Set the reception time to allow the input operation information, the validity period to invalidate the input operation information, and the invalidation period to invalidate the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8520.

In S8520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S8510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8530.

In S8530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8540.

In S8540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8550.

In S8550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8560.

In S8560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8570.

In S8570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8580.

In S8580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[10-5-3. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 360, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 359) will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this production pattern determination process, based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the display production mode displayed on the display device 7, the sound production mode output from the speaker 32, and the operation mode of the production button 54 are determined. Decide on a production pattern that specifies etc. Specifically, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command", a "symbol performance pattern" is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command" when in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is A "notice presentation pattern" is determined based on the variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value). In addition, performance patterns are determined according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8532.

In S8532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8533.

In S8533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S8532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8534.

In S8534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8535.

In S8535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8536.

In S8536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S8531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8537.

In S8537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and shifts the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 359).

[10-6. Game state transition diagram]
The gaming states transferred through the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained using a gaming state transition diagram. FIG. 361 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states include a normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state), a time-saving gaming state (a special time-saving gaming state, a general time-saving gaming state), and a game not permitted. It has a state.

As mentioned above, the "first normal gaming state" is the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, and left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode. This is the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the first normal gaming state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 8140.

The "second normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state. Immediately after, the normal game state is in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being used up. Here, the second normal game state is defined as left-handed play as a regular game mode, but while the reserved number of second special symbols is used up, the withdrawal rate is changed to the general time-saving game state again. Since this is high, right-handed hitting may be specified as a regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-handed play or right-handed play, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 displays information as a normal game mode. It is desirable to have the display device 7 notify left-handed hitting as a normal gaming mode when the second normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state without causing the second normal gaming state to occur.

"Special time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of small winnings = 255 is set as the second time-saving ending condition, and "V Small hit (approximately 1/48.2)" has a higher winning probability, and by the time the small hit is won 255 times, it is possible to win at least the V small hit, so it is practically the time until the next jackpot. It is a guaranteed time-saving gaming state. Further, the special time-saving game state becomes the A-time-saving game state when transferred after the end of the jackpot game state, and also becomes the B-time-saving game state when transferred after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value.

The "general time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the first time-saving end condition is set as the number of small wins = 1 or 2 times, and if all the small wins that have been won are falling small wins, the jackpot is reached. Since the time-saving gaming state ends without transitioning to the gaming state, it is a time-saving gaming state in which the next jackpot is not guaranteed.

In both the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, while it is difficult to enter the second starting port 8120. It is easy for a game ball to enter 8140.

The "gaming disallowed state" is a gaming state in which the player is not allowed to play, and as mentioned above, the various switches through which the game ball enters or passes are disabled, and the firing of the game ball from the firing device 6 is prohibited. And the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 is prohibited.

(First normal gaming state transition control)
As shown in FIG. 361, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 326), when a "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, the "special time saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 20% according to the selected symbol of the special symbol. With a selection rate of 40%, the game will transition to the "general time-saving gaming state", and with a selection rate of 40%, it will transition to the "normal gaming state" (see FIGS. 327 and 330).

Furthermore, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 999, the normal game state shifts to the ``special time-saving game state''.

(Special time-saving game state transition control)
In the special time saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, a "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 326), When a "big hit" is determined, a transition is made to a jackpot gaming state, and when a "small win" is determined, a transition is made to a small winning gaming state. In particular, in this embodiment, when a small win game state as a V small win is performed, it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game ball can pass through the V winning hole 8156. As a result, a transition is made to the jackpot gaming state from the second route.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the actual probability of winning that will transition to the jackpot gaming state via the first route or the second route is approximately 1/41.9. (See FIG. 327).

Then, in the special time-saving gaming state, after a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and shifting to the jackpot gaming state, everything shifts to the general time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 330). In addition, as mentioned above, in the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and transitioning to the jackpot game state, it is configured to shift to the special time-saving game state again at a predetermined rate. You may.

(Transition control of general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 326), When a "big hit" is determined, a transition is made to a jackpot gaming state, and when a "small win" is determined, a transition is made to a small winning gaming state.

In the general time-saving gaming state, the "number of small wins" is subtracted as the A time-saving ending condition without distinguishing between V small wins and falling small wins, but all small wins that are won are falling small wins. Then, the player cannot shift to the jackpot gaming state, and instead shifts from the general time-saving gaming state to the second normal gaming state. In addition, if the won small win is a V small win, a small win game state is performed as a V small win in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 8156. When the ball passes, a transition is made to a jackpot game state from the second route.

In the general time-saving gaming state, after transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the first route or the second route, if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the number limiter function has not reached the limiter number, the general time-saving gaming state is resumed. When the game state is shifted to, and the number of successive jackpots due to the number limiter function reaches the limiter number, the state is shifted to the second normal game state (see FIG. 330). In addition, as mentioned above, in the general time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and transitioning to the jackpot game state, it is configured to shift to the special time-saving game state again at a predetermined rate. You may.

(Second normal gaming state transition control)
In the second normal game state, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol stored during the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 326). When a "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot game state, and when a "small win" is determined, the game shifts to a small win game state. If the won small win is a V small win, a small win game state is performed as a V small win in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 8156. By passing the route, a transition will be made to the jackpot game state from the second route.

Then, in the second normal gaming state, after shifting to the jackpot gaming state via the first route or the second route, the state shifts again to the general time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 330).

In addition, in the second normal game state, the starting information of all the second special symbols stored during the general time-saving game state is determined to be a "loss" or "falling small hit", and the state is changed to the general time-saving game state. When the stored number of reserved second special symbols is all consumed, the second normal game state ends and the game shifts to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of gaming disallowed state)
Regardless of the current game state, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls that are paid out in the jackpot game state (for example, 100,000 balls), the jackpot game state will stop. The game will be forcibly shifted to a gaming disallowed state. If the RAM is cleared or a setting change process is performed, this game-disallowed state is shifted to a first normal game state, which is a game-permitted state. Furthermore, the transition to the gaming disallowed state is executed as the highest priority process in the transition control in each gaming state.

[10-7. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc. will be explained using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 362 is an example of the production flow of the gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the eighth pachinko game machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., and a display effect that is output from the speaker 32. A sound effect, a lamp effect emitted from the LED group 46, a performance accessory effect that drives the performance accessory group 58, a change effect in the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of three main patterns: a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and a sub pattern that is much smaller than the main pattern. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to these.

In the embodiment, the performance based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the first special symbol", and the performance based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the second special symbol".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", "super super reach", and "full rotation reach" can be executed as "first special symbol production". has been done.

"Normal fluctuation" is a fluctuating performance in which all the decorative symbols are disjointed, start fluctuating at high speed, and stop displaying in order, and can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. It's a performance.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. "Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it will be a loss, and if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it will be a jackpot. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the medium symbol may not be stopped and displayed and may develop into "Super Reach", and the system is configured so that "Super Reach" can further develop into "Super Super Reach". There is.

"Full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combinations of multiple decorative symbols that notify a jackpot are all set and fluctuate at a low speed, and in this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, This is an effect that is executed only when the selected symbol "z1" of the first special symbol to be transferred to the special time-saving gaming state is determined.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 331(a), the expectation level of transition to the jackpot game state in the order of "normal reach" < "super reach" < "super super reach" < "full rotation reach" The random number value for performance selection is set so that the number is high.

In addition, in the first normal game state, it may be configured such that "card performance" and "battle performance", which will be described later, are executed at a predetermined rate. When executing a "card performance" or "battle performance" in the first normal game state, the random number value for performance selection, etc. is set so that the degree of expectation for transition to the jackpot game state is high.

(Production in special time-saving game state)
In the special time-saving game state, at least "super shortening fluctuation", "immediate winning performance", and "battle performance" are configured to be executable as "second special symbol performance."

"Super-shortened variation" is a variation in which all the decorative symbols begin to display variations at high speed, and in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all the decorative symbols stop and display different types of symbols. This is a presentation of the form, and is a presentation that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. In addition, in the special time saving game state, in the "super shortening variation", the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. It is configured to be executable even when the program is executed (see FIG. 331(b)).

"Immediate win effect" is a variation mode in which all the decorative patterns start to be displayed randomly and at high speed, and in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all the decorative patterns stop and display as the same type of pattern. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the selected symbol "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small win" This is a performance that can be executed when the

"Battle production" is when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, or when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z5" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small win" is used. , z6'' is determined. The "battle performance" does not suggest that you have won the "falling small win" that is the trigger for the end of the general time-saving gaming state, but rather whether you have won the "V small win" that is the trigger to move to the jackpot gaming state. This is a performance that suggests that you are losing. For example, an enemy character appears and the main character and enemy character face off against each other. When the main character wins, a V small win is announced, and the main character This is a performance that announces that you have lost if you are defeated.

(Production in general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving game state, different effects can be performed depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiters.

Specifically, when the remaining number of jackpot limiters in the general time-saving gaming state is 91 or more (hereinafter also referred to as the "first half of the number limiter"), "shortening fluctuation", "immediate winning performance", "card performance" ” and “battle production” are configured to be executable. In addition, when the remaining number of jackpot limiters in the general time-saving gaming state is 90 or less (hereinafter also referred to as the "second half of the number limiter"), "super shortening fluctuation", "immediate winning effect", and "card effect" are activated. Configured to be executable. In addition, when the remaining number of jackpot limiters in the general time-saving gaming state is 0 (hereinafter also referred to as "when the number limiter is activated"), "super shortening fluctuation" and "ending effect" are configured to be executable. There is.

"Short variation" is a special effect for the "first half of the number limiter" in the general time-saving gaming state, in which all the decorative symbols are disjointed and begin to fluctuate at high speed, and are shorter than normal variations, and are extremely shortened variations. This is a performance in a fluctuating manner in which all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as different types of symbols in a short time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than that, and it is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a loss. In addition, in the "second half of the number limiter" and "when the number limiter is activated" in the general time-saving gaming state, the "shortening variation" will be switched to the "super shortening variation" described above.

"Card performance" is a special performance for the "first half of the number limiter" and "second half of the number limiter" in the general time-saving gaming state, and is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss. . "Card performance" is a "lose" whether you have won a "falling small hit" which is the trigger to end the general time saving gaming state, or whether you have won the "V small win" which is the trigger to move to the jackpot gaming state. For example, a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly reversed, characters indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed. .

The "ending performance" is a special performance "when the number of times limiter is activated" in the general time-saving game state, and is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a small win. The "ending effect" is based on whether you have won a "jackpot" that will transition to the jackpot gaming state, whether you have won a "V small win" that will trigger the transition to the jackpot gaming state, or whether you have won the "V small win" that will trigger the transition to the jackpot gaming state, or whether you have won the "V small win" that will trigger the transition to the jackpot gaming state. This is a production that suggests whether or not you have won a "falling jackpot". For example, a predetermined story is displayed, and when the story is completed, a jackpot or V jackpot is announced, and when the story ends midway, a falling jackpot is announced. It's a performance.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "door opening effect" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol effect."

"Normal fluctuation" is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as described above in the performance in the first normal gaming state, but in the second normal gaming state, the second special It is also configured to be executable when the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined (see FIG. 331(a)). .

"Door opening performance" is a special performance for the second normal game state, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, and corresponds to "V small win". This is a performance that can be executed when the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" is determined or when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss. An example of the "door opening effect" is a display where a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, and when there is a jackpot or V-small win, the door is completely closed. is carried out, and in case of a failure, an indication that the door was not completely closed is displayed.

In this embodiment, in the second normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. Although the configuration is configured so that the "normal variation" can be executed when the system is opened, the configuration may also be configured so that the "door opening effect" can be executed. In the second normal game state, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the "door opening effect" is executed. When executing, the same effect as when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss may be performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "door opening effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect in the second normal game state, but instead of the "door opening effect", the above-mentioned "battle effect" is configured to be executable. You may.

[10-8. Display contents]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, sub-control circuit 300, etc. described above will be explained using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Battle production)
First, with reference to FIG. 363, a battle effect that can be executed in the first half of the number limiter in the special time-saving game state or the general time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 363 is an example of a display image explaining a battle performance in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The battle performance shown in FIG. 363 is based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern for executing the battle performance, as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1 in FIG. 331(b) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 in FIG. 332(a). This is an effect based on a symbol effect pattern executed based on commands (31H, 32H).

FIG. 363(a) is an example of a display image when a battle effect is started. As shown in FIG. 363(a), when a battle performance is started, a performance is performed in which a main character and a rival character appear and compete against each other. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the battle performance.

FIG. 363(b-1) is an example of a display image of a battle performance performed when the second special symbol lottery result is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 31H). As shown in FIG. 363(b-1), as a result of the battle performance, a performance is performed in which the confrontation is concluded and the main character wins. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area are all temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern. Thereafter, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified of the V small win.

FIG. 363(b-2) is an example of a display image of a battle effect performed when the second special symbol lottery result is a loss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 32H). As shown in FIG. 363(b-2), as a result of the battle performance, a performance is performed in which the confrontation is concluded and the main character is defeated. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area are stopped and displayed so that they are not all the same.

In this way, according to the battle effect executed in the general time-saving gaming state in this embodiment, it is not executed when there is a "falling small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving gaming state, so the general time-saving gaming state continues. While giving the user a sense of security that the game will be played, it also gives a sense of anticipation that the player has won the V small prize, thereby making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Card performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 364, card effects that can be executed in the general time-saving game state will be explained. FIG. 364 is an example of a display image illustrating card performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The card effect shown in FIG. 364 is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern commands (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) that execute the card effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 and J2 of FIG. 332. This is a production based on a design production pattern.

FIG. 364(a) is an example of a display image when the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 364(a), when the card effect is started, there is a "win" indicating a V hit, a "mode continuation" indicating a loss, a continuation of the general time-saving gaming state, a small win, and a general A chance card with the words "end of mode" indicating the end of the time-saving game state is displayed, and an effect is performed in which the chance card is turned over and shuffled. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player, so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 364(b) is an example of a common display image from the start of the card effect to the time when the lottery result of the second special symbol is suggested. As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the chance cards are turned over and shuffled, an effect is performed in which one of the chance cards is selected.

FIG. 364 (c-1) is an example of a display image of a card performance performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H). As shown in Figure 363 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the words "Win" written on it is displayed. . In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area are all temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern. Thereafter, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified of the V small win.

FIG. 364 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a card effect performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a falling small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 42H or 43H). . As shown in Figure 363 (c-2), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the words "end of mode" written on it is displayed. be exposed. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area are stopped and displayed so that they are not all the same.

Although not shown, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is A chance card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words ``Continue Mode'' written on it is displayed.

Figure 364 (d-2) is when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a falling small hit and the remaining number of small winnings is 2 or more (when the special symbol fluctuation pattern command is 42H) 364(c-2) is an example of a display image of the card performance that is performed subsequent to FIG. 364(c-2). As shown in FIG. 363(d-2), after a chance card with the words "end of mode" written on it is displayed, a female character is displayed and an effect indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state is performed.

In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), as shown in FIG. 363 (c-2) and FIG. 363 (d-2), After the chance card with the words "end of mode" written on it is once displayed, a female character may be displayed and an effect indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state may be executed at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is 41H), a chance card with the words "End mode" or "Continue mode" written on it is displayed. After being displayed, a specific character may be displayed and a resurrection effect that notifies you of a V hit may be executed at a predetermined rate.

In this way, according to the card performance executed in the general time-saving game state in this embodiment, whether it is a "falling small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving game state or a "loss" that causes the general time-saving game state to continue. '' or a ``V small hit'' that triggers the transition to a jackpot gaming state, or a ``falling small hit'', but it also adds interest to the ``loss'', making the game even more interesting. It is possible to improve the

(Ending performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 365, an ending performance that can be executed when the number of times limiter is activated in the general time saving game state will be explained. FIG. 365 is an example of a display image explaining the ending effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The ending effect shown in FIG. 365 is a symbol effect pattern that is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern command (50H, 51H, 52H) that executes the ending effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 of FIG. 332. This is a production by

FIG. 365(a) is an example of a display image when the ending effect is started. As shown in FIG. 365(a), when the ending effect is started, a predetermined story is displayed. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player, so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

Figure 365 (b-1) shows the ending performance (successful ending performance) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a V-small win (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 51H or 52H). This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 365(b-1), the story is completed, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area, are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol.

FIG. 365(c-1) is an example of a display image of the ending effect that is performed subsequent to FIG. 365(b-1). As shown in Figure 365 (c-1), after the story is completed, all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are displayed as the same symbol in a large stop in the center of the display area, and the player receives a jackpot. Or, you will be notified that you have won a small hit.

Figure 365 (b-2) shows the display image of the ending performance (ending failure performance) that is performed when the second special symbol lottery result is a falling small hit (when the special symbol fluctuation pattern command is 50H). This is an example. As shown in FIG. 365(b-2), the display screen is broken and the story ends midway.

FIG. 365(c-2) is an example of a display image of the ending effect that is performed subsequent to FIG. 365(b-2). As shown in Figure 365 (c-2), after the story ends midway, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a large stop in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. . Then, the words "Mode End" are displayed to indicate that the general time-saving game state has ended.

As described above, according to the ending performance executed in the general time-saving gaming state in this embodiment, the number of times limiter function in the general time-saving gaming state restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state is transitioned after the end of the jackpot gaming state (normal gaming state In addition to being able to recognize whether the player has won a jackpot, a V-small win or a falling win, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Door opening effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 366, a door opening effect that can be executed in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 366 is an example of a display image illustrating a door opening effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The door opening effect shown in FIG. 366 is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern commands (08H, 09H, 0AH) that execute the door opening effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in FIG. 331(a). This is a performance based on a design performance pattern.

FIG. 366(a) is an example of a display image when the door opening effect is started. As shown in FIG. 366(a), when the door opening effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and a display is performed in which the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area have been reduced to the bottom right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player so that they do not interfere with the door opening effect. Is displayed.

Figure 366 (b-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a V-small win (when the special symbol fluctuation pattern command is 08H or 09H). It is. As shown in FIG. 366(b-1), after a display indicating that the half-open door is rattling for a predetermined period of time, a display indicating that the door is completely closed is displayed.

FIG. 366(c-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect performed subsequent to FIG. 366(b-1). As shown in Figure 366 (c-1), after the door is completely closed, the door is opened again and all the decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the display area with the same pattern. is displayed in a large stop at the center of the screen, and the player is informed that he or she has won a jackpot or a V-small win.

FIG. 366(b-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening performance performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 0AH). As shown in FIG. 366(b-2), after a display indicating that the half-open door is rattling for a predetermined period of time, a display indicating that the door is not completely closed is displayed.

FIG. 366(c-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect performed subsequent to FIG. 366(b-2). As shown in Figure 366 (c-2), after the door is not completely closed, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are placed in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same. A large stop is displayed.

In this way, according to the door opening effect executed in the second normal game state in this embodiment, after the general time-saving game state ends, a jackpot or a V-small win occurs, and it is impossible to return to the general time-saving game state again. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and further improve the interest in the game.

(Preview performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 367, a preview effect that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 367 is an example of a display image explaining a preview performance in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in the preview performance pattern determination table of FIG. 358, the preview effects shown in FIG. 367 include "Notice Effect Pattern A" which suggests a falling small hit in advance, and ``Previous Effect Pattern A'' which suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a V small win. This is a performance based on a "notice performance pattern B1" that advances from the notice performance pattern B1 and a "notice performance pattern B2" that suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed.

FIG. 367(a) is an example of a display image before the preview effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 367(a), decorative patterns including a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display area.

FIG. 367(b-1) is an example of a display image when the preview performance according to the preview performance pattern A is executed. As shown in FIG. 367(b-1), the word "DANGER" is displayed to indicate in advance that there is a possibility of a small hit.

FIG. 367(b-2) is an example of a display image when the preview performance based on the preview performance pattern B1 and the preview performance pattern B2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 367(b-2), in order to suggest in advance that there is a possibility of a V small win, a male character is displayed from the window and the word "CHANCE" is displayed.

FIG. 367(c-2) is an example of a display image when the preview performance according to the preview performance pattern B2, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 367(b-2), is executed. As shown in Figure 367 (c-2), in order to suggest in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, the window becomes larger, a female character is displayed from the enlarged window, and " The words "BATTLE" are displayed.

In this way, according to the preview performance executed in the time-saving gaming state in this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol and the content of the performance to be executed can be guessed based on the content suggested by the preview performance, thereby making the game more interesting. You can improve your performance.

In this way, the eighth pachinko gaming machine allows transitions to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the general time-saving gaming state, and allows the transition to an appropriate time-saving gaming state according to each gaming state. Since the performance is performed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the number of small winnings = 255 is set as a time-saving ending condition, and a "special time-saving gaming state" in which the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed, and a small winning number as a time-saving ending condition. By providing a "general time-saving gaming state" in which the number of winnings is set to 1 or 2 and the next jackpot is not guaranteed, it creates an unprecedented gaming experience and increases the interest of the game. You can improve your performance.

<Modified example of the eighth pachinko game machine>
In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the "ball output limiter function" counts the cumulative number of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state "per day", and the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out "per day" is " When a predetermined number of balls are reached (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state to which the game state shifts after the end of the jackpot game state is partially regulated. However, as a "ball limiter function", like a "number of times limiter function", the total number of jackpot balls paid out in a jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls is calculated. When the number of balls put out reaches a "predetermined number of balls put out in consecutive games (for example, 50,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state is transferred after the end of the jackpot game state may be partially regulated.

As a "ball output limiter function", the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls is the number of consecutive balls that are rolled out. If the game state to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state is partially regulated when the state is reached, the processing may be changed as follows.
First, in S8325 of the system timer interrupt process (FIG. 355), the "cumulative jackpot balls counter" in the main RAM 203 is referenced, and the value of the cumulative jackpot balls counter is determined to be "a predetermined number of consecutive jackpot balls (for example, 50,000 pieces)" or more. If it is determined that the value of the cumulative number of jackpot balls counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of consecutive jackpot balls", the process of S8326 may be moved to set the game disallowed state. In addition, in S8323 of the system timer interrupt process (FIG. 355), it may be determined whether the value is smaller than a predetermined number of consecutive winning balls (for example, 49,000 balls). As a result, the total number of jackpot balls that are put out per day can be switched from "a predetermined number of balls that hit the jackpot (for example, 100,000 balls)" to "a predetermined number of consecutive jackpot balls".
Next, in the post-jackpot end state setting process of S8323 in the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 351), check whether the selected symbol of the special symbol that ends the jackpot game state is the selected symbol of the special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state. Determine whether or not. Then, when the selected symbol is not a special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state (when it is a selected symbol that is a special symbol that transitions to the normal gaming state), the cumulative jackpot number counter is cleared (cumulative jackpot balls counter = (set to 0). As a result, after the jackpot gaming state that transitions to the normal gaming state ends, the cumulative jackpot ball number counter is cleared, and the cumulative jackpot ball payout in the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state) is cleared. You can count the number of balls.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 201 counts the total number of jackpot balls as a "ball output limiter function" as shown in S8325 and S8326 of the system timer interrupt process (FIG. 355), and controls the main CPU 201. Although the circuit 200 and the payout/fire control circuit 400 are configured to perform control regarding the "ball limiter function," the payout/fire control circuit 400 counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls, and only the payout/fire control circuit 400 counts the total number of jackpot balls. It may be configured to perform control regarding the "ball output limiter function".

In addition, the eighth pachinko game machine is equipped with two functions, a "number of times limiter function" and a "ball output limiter function", as a function to partially regulate the game state to which the jackpot game state transitions after the end of the jackpot game state. , it may be configured to have only the "number of times limiter function" or only the "ball output limiter function".

Furthermore, the technology described in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various performances executed in the eighth pachinko game machine may be replaced with performances by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming states (special time-saving gaming state, general time-saving gaming state) include replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying is improved, and assist time (AT It may be replaced with either state) or assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, jackpots and small hits (V small winnings, falling small winnings) include winning a specific combination, a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed (a specific symbol combination winning a prize), and RT status. It may be replaced with any one of winning a rush win, winning a rush win in an AT state, or winning a rush win in an ART state. In addition, the number of times limiter function can be used to control the number of games that can be played in any of the RT, AT, and ART states, and the ball output limiter function can be used under certain conditions (predetermined small winnings and the operation content of the stop button can be notified). It may be replaced by the number of payouts of game media (medals/game balls) in the section).

(others)
In the eighth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the eighth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[11. 9th pachinko machine]
Next, a ninth pachinko game machine will be explained. The ninth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The ninth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of playability, production contents, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

In particular, compared to the third pachinko gaming machine, the ninth pachinko gaming machine is configured with a gameplay mainly consisting of fluctuating display of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state, and has a time-saving ending in the time-saving gaming state. The difference is that the condition is not the number of variable displays of special symbols but the number of variable displays of normal symbols.

Note that, like the third pachinko game machine, the ninth pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second special symbol is lower than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of special symbols are established with priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the ninth pachinko game machine, the same components as the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[11-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 368, a game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 9010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 368 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 9010 includes a game panel 9100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 9100, and a game area 105 on the front side of the game panel 9100 where a fired game ball can roll and flow down. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 368, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine mainly has a normal pattern operation area 9126 that replaces the passage gate, and a second start The configuration and arrangement of the mouth 9140, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the first special electric accessory unit 9130, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 9120 located in the gaming area 105 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 9140, it will be explained again using a different reference numeral from the first pachinko gaming machine.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 9120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 9120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 9121 (see FIG. 369 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 9120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 9140 is located below (downstream side) of a first special electric accessory unit 9130 (described later) in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) of the normal figure operation area 9126 and the second special electric accessory unit 9150. It is arranged in a normal electric accessory unit 9145 which will be described later, and allows a game ball hit to the right to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 9140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 9141 that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting port (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 9140 will be described in detail later.

(General figure operating area)
The normal figure operation area 9126 is different from the passing gate of the first pachinko game machine, and the game balls that have passed through the normal figure operating area 9126 are collected by the game machine without returning to the gaming area 105 (right side area 107). , consists of a prize opening (also referred to as a "normal pattern operation opening") through which a prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the normal pattern operation area is paid out. The normal figure operation area 9126 is arranged below (downstream side) of a first special electric accessory unit 9130, a normal electric accessory unit 9145, and a second special electric accessory unit 9150, which will be described later in the right side area 107. , a game ball hit to the right can pass through (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to pass through).

Therefore, the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 are the first big prize opening 9131 of the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the second starting opening 9140 of the normal electric accessory unit 9145, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150. When the ball does not enter any of the second big prize openings 9151, it is possible to pass to the normal pattern operation area 9126. As a result, when a right hand is being played in the jackpot game state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 enters the first big prize opening 9131 by the operation of the first special electric accessory unit 9130 arranged above. Since the number of game balls passing through the normal pattern operation area 9126 is reduced, the normal electric accessory unit 9145 is activated by the passing of the game ball into the normal pattern operation area 9126, and the game performance is not designed to be affected. It is possible to prevent game balls from unexpectedly entering the second starting port 9140. In addition, when a right hand is played as an irregular game mode in the normal game state, the normal pattern operating area 9126 is not a passing gate but also a normal pattern operating opening (winning opening), so the passing of the normal pattern operating area 9126 The played game ball will never enter the second starting port 9140.

Further, the normal figure operating area 9126 is provided with a normal figure operating switch 9127 (see FIG. 369 described later) that detects passage of the game ball to the normal figure operating area 9126. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126, the passing of the game ball to the normal pattern operating area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern operating switch 9127, and the prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the normal pattern operating area is activated. A payout is performed, and a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and a variable display of the normal symbols are performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal figure operation area 9126 is constituted by a common figure operation opening, but it may be constituted by a passage gate like the first pachinko game machine.

Further, the passage of the game ball to the normal figure actuation area 9126 may function as a trigger for actuating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (the special symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed), when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126, the accessory continuous operating device is activated, and the jackpot is achieved. It may be possible to shift to a gaming state.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 9145 is located below (downstream side) a first special electric accessory unit 9130 (described later) in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the ordinary figure operation area 9126 and the second special electric accessory unit 9150. It is placed so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric utility unit 9145 includes a second starting port 9140, a second starting port switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140, and a two-stage upper and lower switch that can move forward and backward. It is a unit body that integrates a general power shutter 9147 and a general power solenoid 9148 (see FIG. 369 described later) that operates the general power shutter 9147.

The general-purpose power shutter 9147 retreats rearward by the operation of the general-purpose power solenoid 9148, and enters the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 9140 or easily, and advances forward and enters the second starting state. It is configured to be able to be moved to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 9140.

Specifically, the general electricity shutter 9147 has a substantially U-shape in cross-sectional view from the front and rear directions, and has an upper surface plate 9147U on which the game ball can roll, and an upper surface plate 9147U on which the game ball can roll. It is configured to include a lower bottom plate 9147D and a support plate that connects and supports the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D. Further, the upper surface plate 9147U and lower surface plate 9147D of the general electricity shutter 9147 are configured to be gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the center line perpendicular to the left-right direction of the game area 105.

When the general power shutter 9147 advances forward and is in the closed state, the upper surface plate 9147U and the lower surface plate 9147D protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the second starting port 9140 is closed by the protruded lower surface plate 9147D, It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 to enter the second starting port 9140. In addition, when the general power shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the upper surface plate 9147U is in the downstream general prize opening 122, the second special electric accessory unit 9150, or the general figure operation area. The game ball guided to 9126 and rolling on the bottom plate 9147D is configured to be guided to the second special electric accessory unit 9150 or the normal figure operation area 9126 on the downstream side.

Here, in the game panel 9100, when the general electricity shutter 9147 is in a closed state due to a game nail or the like, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is basically not guided onto the bottom plate 9147D, It is configured to be guided above the top plate 9147U.

Further, when the general power shutter 9147 is in the open state by retreating backward, the upper surface plate 9147U and the lower surface plate 9147D are recessed into the game panel 9100, and the second starting port 9140 is opened.

When the general electricity shutter 9147 is open for an open time longer than a predetermined time, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 passes through the upper surface plate 9147U and the lower surface plate 9147D, and The game ball that was rolling on the bottom plate 9147D falls toward the bottom plate 9147D, or the game ball that was rolling on the bottom plate 9147D falls toward the second starting port 9140. A game ball can enter the starting port 9140.

On the other hand, when the general power shutter 9147 is open for a shorter opening time than the predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), the game ball rolling on the top plate 9147U is moved to the bottom plate 9147D. Even if the ball falls towards the target, the opening time ends immediately and the lower plate 9147D protrudes from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the game ball that has fallen from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (the lower plate 9147D Therefore, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 9140. Note that the game ball rolling on the bottom plate 9147D falls toward the second starting port 9140, so that the game ball can enter the second starting port 9140, but as described above, When the general electricity shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided by the bottom plate 9147D, and basically the game ball is not rolling on the bottom plate 9147D, so the general electricity shutter 9147 is closed. If 9147 is only displaced to the open state once over a short opening time, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 9140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route R1 of the game ball launched from the launch device 6 (see FIG. 369 described later) until it reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is as shown in FIG. 368. As shown by the one-dot chain line, it is determined in advance by the configuration of the game board unit 9010. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the firing device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) depends on the firing intensity of the firing device 6. It is possible to calculate that the average time is 5 seconds (approximately 4 to 6 seconds). It goes without saying that depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010, the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the firing device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is variable. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the general power shutter 9147 is configured as a two-stage shutter equipped with an upper surface plate 9147U and a lower surface plate 9147D that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions. The normal power shutter 9147 may be configured with a one-stage shutter including a bottom plate 9147D that opens and closes the starting port 9140. Furthermore, instead of a shutter that can move back and forth in the front-rear direction, the normal electricity shutter 9147 may be configured with a movable member called a so-called electric chew that can move in the left-right direction.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 9130 is arranged above (upstream side) than the normal figure operation area 9126, the ordinary electric accessory unit 9145, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150, which will be described later, in the right side area 107.

The first special electric accessory unit 9130 includes a first big winning hole 9131 and a first big winning hole count switch 9132 (see FIG. 369 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 9131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 9134 that is movable in the left-right direction and a first special electric solenoid 9135 (see FIG. 369 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 9134.

The first big winning hole 9131 is a big winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 9131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 10) are specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 9131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first big prize opening 9131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. , A game in which the second grand prize opening 9151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and the player enters the opened second major prize opening 9151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 9156 inside the second big winning hole 9151.

The first special electric shutter 9134 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 9131 by operating the first special electric solenoid 9135. It is configured to be able to be displaced to a closed state in which entry of the ball is impossible or difficult.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 9134 has a substantially fan shape when viewed from the front, is pivoted at the bottom, and is composed of a blade member that is movable in the left and right directions.

When the first special electric shutter 9134 moves rightward and is in the open state, the first big prize opening 9131 opens and receives the game ball flowing down into the right area 107, and the received game ball is transferred to the first You will be guided to the grand prize opening 9131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 9134 moves to the left and is in the closed state, the first big prize opening 9131 is closed, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 9131. becomes. In addition, in place of the first special electric shutter 9134, a door member that can be displaced approximately parallel and approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 9100, or a protruding plate that can move forward and backward with respect to the surface of the game panel 9100 can be used. You may adopt the member.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 9150 is arranged below (downstream side) of the first special electric accessory unit 9130 and the normal electric accessory unit 9145 in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the normal figure operation area 9126. It is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through.

The second special electric accessory unit 9150 includes a second big winning hole 9151, a second big winning hole count switch 9152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151, and a second big winning hole 9151. A second special electric shutter 9154 that can be opened and closed, and a second special electric solenoid 9155 that operates the second special electric shutter 9154 to open and close the second big prize opening 9151 (see FIG. 369 described later). A V winning hole 9156 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 9151 can pass, a V winning hole switch 9157 that detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156 (see FIG. 369 described later), A normal opening 9158 through which game balls that have entered the two major winning openings 9151 and which have not entered the V winning opening 9156 can pass through, a V shutter 9159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 9156, and operating this V shutter 9159. It is a unit body that is integrated with a V shutter solenoid 9160 (see FIG. 369 described later) that opens and closes the V winning opening 9156.

The second big winning hole 9151 is a big winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 9151 in one small winning. is stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 9151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 9154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and when the second special electric solenoid 9155 is activated, the second special electric shutter 9154 advances forward to win the second grand prize. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 9151, and a closed state in which it is possible or easy to allow a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 9151 by moving the second special electric shutter 9154 backward. It is configured to be able to be displaced between states.

The V winning hole 9156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 9159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot gaming state through the above-mentioned second route when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 9151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 9156 After passing (second round and onwards), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 9131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled through the second route, the second jackpot 9151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 9156 (from the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 9131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 9131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 9131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The normal opening 9158 is configured such that game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 9151 but have not passed through the V winning opening 9156 enter (pass through). In addition, during the small winning game state, if all the game balls that entered the opened second large prize opening 9151 passed through the normal opening 9158 and no game balls passed through the V winning opening 9156, the small winning occurred. There will be no transition from the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state.

The V-shutter 9159 has a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning port 9156 and a closed state in which the game ball can pass through the V-winning port 9156 (or It is configured so that it can be easily displaced into an open state.

In particular, in the ninth pachinko game machine, when the small winning game state is entered, the V-shutter solenoid 9160 is operated to open the V-winning port 9156, and the game ball that has entered the second large-winning port 9151 is almost It is configured so that it can pass through the prize opening 9156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route for the game balls launched from the launch device 6 to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 is predetermined similarly to the route R1, and The average arrival time for the game ball to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 can be calculated to be 6 seconds on average (approximately 5 to 7 seconds), although it depends on the firing intensity of the firing device 6. . It goes without saying that depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010, the average arrival time for the game balls fired from the firing device 6 to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 can be varied.

In addition, the arrangement relationship of the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the second special electric accessory unit 9150, and the general figure operation area 9126 arranged in the right side area 107 can be changed in design as appropriate. It is.

[11-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 369, the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 369 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 369, like the first pachinko game machine, the ninth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the ninth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[11-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 9148, a first special electric solenoid 9135, a second special electric solenoid 9155, and a V-shutter solenoid 9160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko game machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 9121, second starting port switch 9141, normal pattern operation switch 9127, first large winning port count switch 9132, second large winning port counting switch 9152, and V winning port switch 9157 are partially different. ing.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 9148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 9147. When the normal power solenoid 9148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 9147 is moved backward to open the second starting port 9140, and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid 9148. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 9147 is moved forward to close the second starting port 9140.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 9135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 9134. When the first special electric solenoid 9135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the right to open the first big prize opening 9131, and the main CPU 201 If energization is not performed (OFF), the first special electric shutter 9134 is moved to the left to close the first big prize opening 9131.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 9155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 9154. When the second special electric solenoid 9155 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the second special electric shutter 9154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 9151, and the second special electric solenoid 9155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (if it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 9154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 9151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 9160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 9159. When the V-shutter solenoid 9160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-shutter 9159 is moved backward and the V-winning port 9156 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 9159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 9156.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 9121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120 is detected by the first starting port switch 9121, the main CPU 201 determines that the first starting condition has been met, and the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of first special symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". (in order from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4)), and the starting conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, If it is established that the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 9121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 9141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140.

When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140 is detected by the second starting port switch 9141, the main CPU 201 determines that the second starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the second special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired second special symbol starting information is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of second special symbols (for example, 2 pieces)". (in order from the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2)), and the starting conditions for the second special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, If it is established that the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the second starting port switch 9141 detects that a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process of a prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the second starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(General figure operation switch)
The normal pattern activation switch 9127 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the normal pattern activation area 9126.

When the normal pattern activation switch 9127 detects the passing of the game ball to the normal pattern activation area 9126, the main CPU 201 acquires the normal pattern start information (normal pattern hit determination random value, normal pattern random number value, etc.) . The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning (judgment processing) and variable display of normal symbols. Furthermore, when the passage of a game ball to the normal pattern activation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern activation switch 9127, the main CPU 201 executes the payout process for the prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the general pattern activation area. - Instruct the launch control circuit 400.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 9132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 9131. When the first big winning hole count switch 9132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 9131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first big winning hole 9131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 9152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151. When the second big winning hole count switch 9152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 9151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 9151, and also counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 9151. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the two major winning openings.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 9157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156. When the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state. Incidentally, even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 9157, the prize ball is not paid out.

[11-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[11-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 370 to 381. Note that the ninth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed, and the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this ninth pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In addition, in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, as will be described later, as a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving generation conditions), "A time-saving gaming" that is triggered by a jackpot and transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state and a ``B time-saving game state'' which is not triggered by a jackpot and is shifted to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value. In addition, "A time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode (operation pattern of the general electricity shutter 9147) during the time-saving game state, and is the "first time-saving game state". , a "second time-saving gaming state" in which it is easier to transition to the next jackpot gaming state than the first time-saving gaming state, and a "third time-saving gaming state" in which transition to the next jackpot gaming state is virtually guaranteed. It consists of either. In addition, in this embodiment, when any of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state and the third working time saving gaming state are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as the "time saving gaming state". say.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a general normal gaming state (first normal gaming state described later), left-handed playing is, in principle, the legal gaming mode, and in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode. Ru. The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is considered to be a normal game mode.

[11-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 370 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 370 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

The special symbol hit determination table includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 9120, and includes a jackpot that is determined to be a "jackpot" or "loss". The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 9140, the data used for the jackpot determination determined as "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is used. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 370, when a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/231.6, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 selects the second special symbol based on the second special symbol's hit determination process using the second special symbol's jackpot determination random value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as a "big hit" with a selection rate of approximately 1/231.6, a "small hit" with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.004, and a "loss" in all other cases. do.

Note that the range (width) of random numbers determined as a "big hit" or "small hit", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate. In particular, in the second special symbol hit determination process, it may be configured such that "loss" is not determined. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it may be configured so that either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if a "small hit" is determined, the first It is possible to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, the "time-saving hit" which directly shifts to the time-saving gaming state (C-time saving gaming state) without shifting to the jackpot gaming state ” may be determined.

Further, when the ninth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the ninth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or the small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 9156 for each setting value, the V winning opening 9156 It is also possible to change the passing rate of the game, or change the time-saving end conditions (number of small winnings, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 9156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 9154), the opening time, and the time-saving termination condition. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[11-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 371 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 371 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 or the second starting hole 9140. is defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 371, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 0 to 9, The main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 10 to 54, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 55 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, regardless of which value the symbol random number value of the special symbol is. Then, "zA4" is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects " z5" is determined, and "zA5" is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 10 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 20 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol, the special symbol is The selected symbols are configured so that the relational expression of selection rate of "z1"<"z2"="z3" holds true. In addition, the selection symbols of the special symbol determined when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol are composed of only two types, "z1" and "z2", and "z1" It may be configured such that the selection rate relational expression ``<z2'' holds true.

In addition, when small hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process, the selected symbol is selected as the special symbol according to the symbol random value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , "z5+z6"<"z7" is configured so that the relational expression of selection rate holds true. In addition, the selection rate relational expression of "z5" < "z6" < "z7" may be established as the selected special symbol.

Although the description is omitted in the ninth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 369) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to the selected symbol. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[11-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 372 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 372 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state."

As shown in FIG. 372, in the jackpot type determination table, "opening mode of jackpot game state" is associated with the selected symbol of the special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first jackpot 9131 to be opened during the jackpot gaming state and the opening pattern of the first jackpot 9131. The opening pattern of the first big prize opening 9131 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. is stipulated. In addition, as the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131, the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be defined as being different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state" corresponding to the "selected symbols z5 to 7 of the special symbols" determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained is the opening mode of the small winning gaming state. This is the opening mode when the game ball that enters the second big winning hole 9151 which is opened at the time passes through the second route through the V winning hole 9156 and shifts to the jackpot game state. When transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 9151 during the small winning gaming state is considered as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the first big winning opening 9131 is opened. A jackpot game state is started. Incidentally, when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 9151 opened during the small winning gaming state does not pass through the V winning opening 9156, the jackpot gaming state will not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 372, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the "special symbol selection symbols z1 to 3" are determined when the jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is All are configured so that the first number of rounds (8 rounds) is determined. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a different maximum number of rounds is determined depending on the "selected special symbols z1 to z3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 372, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the special symbol selection symbols z5 to 7 are determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, the special It is configured such that a third number of rounds (10 rounds) or a fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) smaller than the third number of rounds is determined as the maximum number of rounds depending on the selected symbol. . In particular, according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. This means that the fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) is more easily determined than the third number of rounds (10 rounds).

In addition, when selecting "special symbols z5 to 7", a different number of rounds other than "10 rounds" or "4 rounds" may be determined, or the same maximum round may be determined for all. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131 may be configured to be different depending on the selected special symbol.

[11-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 373 is an example of a small winning type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the small type determination table shown in FIG. 373 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 373, in the small win type determination table, "opening mode of small win game state" is associated with the selected symbol of the special symbol.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of openings of the second large winning hole 9151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, the opening pattern of the second large winning hole 9151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second big prize opening 9151 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the small winning game state, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, and the ED waiting time (ending time). etc. are stipulated. Further, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 includes an opening waiting time, an opening time, etc.

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 9151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 are measured simultaneously, and the second When the big winning hole 9151 is open, the V winning hole 9156 is also opened. Therefore, when the small winning game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156. In addition, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 9151, multiple opening times and closing times may be defined so that the V winning opening 9156 is opened and closed multiple times. .

In addition, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 9151, the maximum opening time of each number of times, the closing time of each number of times, the ED waiting time (ending time), The small win type determination table may be configured such that at least one of the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 is different.

In particular, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 is varied depending on the selected special symbol, and an advantageous operating mode that allows (or facilitates) passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156, and a The small hit type determination table may be configured such that a disadvantageous operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass is determined.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and In the case, the first big prize opening 9131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 9151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said that

[11-3-5. Game status related setting table]
FIG. 374 is an example of a gaming state related setting table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 374 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The gaming state related setting table is a table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 374, the gaming state related setting table includes "status ``flag'', ``general power operation pattern'', and ``game state setting'' consisting of ``A time-saving termination condition'' are associated with each other.

The “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of gaming state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. State flag = 0 indicates "normal gaming state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state", and state flag = 2 indicates "B time saving gaming state". In addition, in this embodiment, although the C time-saving game state is not executed, when the C time-saving game state is made executable, the state flag=3 will indicate the "C time-saving game state".

The “normal power operation pattern” is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. General voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" described later is difficult to determine, and the "short open pattern" described below is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates a state where the "long open pattern" and " When the normal voltage operation pattern = 02, the ``long release pattern'' is more likely to be determined than when the general voltage operation pattern = 01, and the ``short release pattern'' is determined. It shows a difficult situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "general power operation pattern" has a correspondence relationship with the "state flag (gaming state)", and when the state flag indicating the normal gaming state = 0, the general power operation pattern = 00. When the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set, the general power operation pattern = 01 or 02 is set, and when the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is 2, the general power operation pattern = 02 is set. It is configured to

The "A time saving end condition" is the end condition for ending the A time saving gaming state which is the time saving gaming state, and the "variable number of normal symbol display times" is set as the ending condition as the number of time saving times. When the termination condition of this "variable number of times of normal symbol display" is satisfied, the A time-saving game state is ended and a transition is made to the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed is set as the A time saving end condition, but in addition to the end condition of the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed," the "number of small winnings" and "special symbol number" are set. It may be configured such that "A time-saving end condition" is set from a plurality of end conditions of "variable number of display times", and when any of the end conditions is met, the A time-saving gaming state ends and the game transitions to the normal gaming state. . This also applies to the B time-saving termination condition described later.

In addition, when setting the end condition of "variable number of special symbols to be displayed" in addition to the "variable number of times of display of normal symbols" as the A time saving end condition or the time saving end condition B, "variable display of special symbols" is set. It is preferable that the end condition for "number of times" is set to a smaller number of variable displays than the end condition for "variable display times of normal symbols". For example, if the end condition for the "variable number of times a normal symbol is displayed" is set to 50 times, the end condition for the "variable number of times a special symbol is displayed" is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The termination condition is when either the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol = 5 times or the number of variable display times of the second special symbol = 5 times is satisfied. It is desirable to set it as

According to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 374, when 100 times, which is the "first time saving number", is set as the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time saving end condition according to the selected special symbol, It is configured so that the status flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 01 are set, and the variable display number of the normal symbol in the A time saving end condition is 120 times which is the "second time saving number" or the "third time saving number". When a certain number of 10,000 times is set, the state flag=1 and the general power operation pattern=02 are set.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1, the general power operation pattern = 01, and the first time-saving number of times (100 times) are set is referred to as a "first time-saving game state." In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, general power operation pattern = 02, and the second time-saving number of times (120 times) is set is set to the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state. "Time-saving game state." In addition, the "3rd time saving game state" in which the status flag = 1, general power operation pattern = 02, and the 3rd time saving number of times (10000 times) are set, is virtually guaranteed to be transferred to the next jackpot game state. "Time-saving game state."

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times of time saving (variable number of times of normal symbol display) of the A time saving end condition in the first time saving game state is configured such that 100 times is set as the first number of time saving. The design of the first time saving number can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the variable display frequency of the normal symbol of the A time saving end condition in the second time saving game state is configured such that 120 times is set as the second time saving number of times, but in the first time saving game state, the normal pattern is displayed. = 01 is set, and as long as the general power operation pattern = 02 is set in the second time saving game state, the design of the second time saving number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is equal to or greater than the first time saving number. Furthermore, the variable display number of normal symbols of the A time saving end condition in the third time saving game state is configured such that 10,000 times is set as the third time saving number, but the third time saving number is set to 10,000 times. As long as the number of transitions to the state is substantially guaranteed, the design can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is provided with the normal power operation pattern, but without the general power operation pattern, the first You may configure so that a time-saving game state, a 2nd time-saving game state, and a 3rd time-saving game state are comprised. In this case, the first number of time reductions (for example, 50 times)<the second number of time reductions (for example, 100 times)<the third number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times) may be satisfied.

According to the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 374, after the jackpot gaming state by drawing the first special symbol ends, the "first time saving gaming state" or "second time saving gaming state" is selected depending on the selected special symbol. After the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the system shifts to the "second time saving gaming state" or "third time saving gaming state" depending on the selected special symbol. ”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game state due to the second special symbol lottery ends, the “second It is configured to shift to a "time-saving gaming state". Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the transition to the "third time saving gaming state" occurs at a relatively higher second rate than after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. is configured to do so. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by drawing the second special symbol ends, the system is configured to shift to the "second time-saving game state" at a third rate that is relatively higher than the "third time-saving game state". There is. Note that the above-mentioned first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio do not exclude the meaning that the ratios to be compared are 0% and 100%.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, the system is configured to shift to the "first time-saving game state" or "second time-saving game state". After the jackpot game state based on the symbol lottery ends, (a) only the "first time saving game state", (b) "first time saving game state" or "normal game state", (c) "first time saving game state" ” or “third time-saving gaming state”, (d) “first time-saving gaming state”, “normal gaming state” or “second time-saving gaming state”, (e) “first time-saving gaming state”, “normal gaming state” ” or “Third Time Saving Game State”, (f) “First Time Saving Game State”, “Second Time Saving Game State” or “Third Time Saving Game State”, (g) “First Time Saving Game State”, “Normal It may be configured to shift to a "game state", a "second time-saving game state", or a "third time-saving game state".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the second special symbol, the transition is made to the "second time-saving game state" or the "third time-saving game state," but (a ) "Second Time Saving Game State" only, (b) "Second Time Saving Game State" or "Normal Game State", (c) "Second Time Saving Game State" or "First Time Saving Game State", (d) " ``Second time-saving gaming state'', ``Normal gaming state'' or ``First time-saving gaming state'', (e) ``Second time-saving gaming state'', ``Normal gaming state'' or ``Third time-saving gaming state'', (f) `` (g) "Second Time Saving Game State", "Normal Game State", "First Time Saving Game State", or "Second Time Saving Game State", "First Time Saving Game State", or "Third Time Saving Game State"; It may be configured to shift to a ``3-hour saving gaming state''. However, even if it is possible to shift to various gaming states as described above, it is desirable to maintain the relationships among the first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state depending on when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state" and when "the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state". Although the subsequent gaming states are configured to be set in the same way, the gaming states after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

[11-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
375 and 376 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 375 is an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the normal gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 376 is an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 375 and 376 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table that determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation display time. "Special symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the special symbol, and at least the variation display time of the special symbol is determined.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in either of FIGS. 375 and 376 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the determination process and the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation display time based on the determined special symbol variation pattern.

Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 9120, or a gaming ball entering the second starting port 9140. When distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second Also called special symbol variation pattern command.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 375 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

Here, in the normal game state, since left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, it is originally possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 9120, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 9140. Although it is impossible (or difficult) for the ball to enter, immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the transition to the normal game state, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is used up. something will be done.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal gaming state in detail, the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the start information of the first special symbol is referred to as the "first normal gaming state". Yes, during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, the normal game state (in the time-saving game state, when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number, the normal symbol The second starting port 9140 is opened based on the lottery, and the normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, is referred to as a "second normal gaming state". That's what it means.

As shown in FIG. 375, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1, in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol and the selected symbol of the special symbol , a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for performance selection, a special symbol variation pattern, and a special symbol variation display time are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In addition, when in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the second special symbol when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. The number of pending pieces, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other, and when the second normal game state (second special symbol) is in effect, the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied. The variable pattern of different special symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols can be determined depending on the number of second special symbols held at the time of the second special symbol.

Here, the "second special symbol start condition" specifically means that at least the special electric accessory is not operating (not in the jackpot game state or small win game state), and the second special symbol is not in operation. Under conditions where variable display is not performed, the second special symbol is stored in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203. This means that the starting information of the special symbol is stored.

And, "the number of second special symbols reserved when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" is the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2) of the main RAM 203. It refers to the pending number of second special symbols immediately before the start information of the second special symbols stored in is shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0).

For example, if three game balls enter the second starting port 9140 in a row under conditions where the second special symbol is not displayed in a jackpot game state or a small win game state, the second The starting information of the second special symbol based on the first game ball that entered the starting hole 9140 is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), and the starting condition of the second special symbol is immediately established. The number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied is 0. Further, the starting information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball that entered the second starting port 9140 is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1), and the starting information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball that entered the second starting port 9140 is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1). The starting information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball played is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2). Then, when the second special symbol start condition is satisfied for the second special symbol start information based on the second game ball, the second special symbol starts up to the second special symbol start storage area (2). Since the starting information is stored, the number of pending second special symbols immediately before being shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0) is two, and "When the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" The number of second special symbols reserved = 2. In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied for the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball, the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1). Since the starting information is stored, the number of pending second special symbols immediately before being shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0) is one, and "when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" The number of reserved second special symbols is 1.

In this embodiment, in the case of the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied. When the number of pending second special symbols = 0, it is possible to determine the "first special symbol fluctuation pattern (0AH)" in which the "BONUS entry effect" that notifies entry into the BONUS state, which will be described later, is executed. If the pending number of the second special symbol is > 0 when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the BONUS performance performed in the jackpot game state and the small win game state continues. The ``second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)'' in which the ``BONUS continuation performance'' is executed is configured to be determinable.

In addition, the "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" associated with the first special symbol variation pattern (0AH) in which the BONUS rush effect is executed is the game ball fired from the firing device 6. It is set longer than the average arrival time (for example, 5 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "ordinary electric average arrival time") until it reaches the ordinary electric accessories unit 9145 (second starting port 9140).
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" is the average until the game ball launched from the launch device 6 reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 (second big prize opening 9151). It is set longer than the arrival time (for example, 6 seconds).

In addition, the "second fluctuation display time (for example, 1 second)" associated with the second special symbol fluctuation pattern (1AH) in which the BONUS continuous performance is executed is longer than the "average arrival time of ordinary electricity". It is set short.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second variable display time (for example, 1 second)" is set so that it appears that multiple jackpot game states or small win game states are continuing, so the variable display time of the special symbol is different from the jackpot game state. The time is set to be less than or equal to the OP waiting time (opening time, for example, 2 seconds) and the OP waiting time (opening time, for example, 2 seconds) of the small winning game state.

In this way, when the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of pending second special symbols = 0, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the "average arrival time of ordinary electricity", When the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of pending symbols of the second special symbol is > 0, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the "average arrival time", so 2. Depending on the number of reserved 2nd special symbols when the start condition of the 2nd special symbol is met, the game ball fired from the firing device 6 enters the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140). It becomes possible to vary the pitching rate and provide the player with a ball output according to the designed value.

In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of pending symbols of the second special symbol is > 0, by setting the variable display time of the second special symbol to be short, multiple times (maximum When three jackpot game states are executed consecutively, the variable display time of the second special symbol executed between the plurality of jackpot game states is shortened, and the plural jackpot game states are seamlessly executed (a group of (like a jackpot game state).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 376 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 376, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the start condition for the second special symbol. The number of reserved second special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the variable display time of the special symbols are associated with each other.

Here, in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and although it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first starting port 9120, It is possible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 9120 by hitting the ball to the left as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) in the game state. Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. It corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the ball is hit.

Also in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 376, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied as in the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 375. ``First special symbol variation pattern (0AH)'' and "Second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)" can be determined by referring to the number of reserved second special symbols when

[11-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 377 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "pre-reading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 9120 or the second starting port 9140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 377(a) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the game state as pre-reading related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 377(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 377(b) is an example of the structure of a pre-read command as the analyzed information by analyzing the starting information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 377(b), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

“Parameter 1” is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or loss based on the random number value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 377(c) is an example of the setting table for parameter 1. It is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information obtained by analyzing in advance the special symbol (selected symbol) when stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value, and FIG. This is an example of a setting table.

"Parameter 3" is the fluctuation information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. This is an example of the setting table No. 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[11-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 378 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 378 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is based on the random number value for normal symbol hit determination that is obtained when the game ball passes through the regular symbol activation area 9126. This is a table that is referred to when determining "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 378 includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 378, and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 378, and if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 0 and 956, it is determined as a "normal symbol hit". It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of approximately 1/68.5. In addition, if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 957 and 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol loss", and converts the winning determination value data of the normal symbol into "normal symbol loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, the range (width) of the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol that is determined as "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. By varying the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 depending on the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the degree of profit given to the player is varied depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" may be varied depending on the type of A time saving gaming state and B time saving gaming state.

[11-3-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 379 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 379 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation area 9126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a determined "normal symbol selection symbol".

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 379 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit determination value data” or “normal symbol loss determination value data”), the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, Normal symbols and selected symbols are defined in association with each other. Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 379, and determines the selected symbol of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 379, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49, and selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol. If the symbol random number value is between 50 and 99, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

Note that the range (width) of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol from which the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is selected, that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting a selected symbol of a normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (in the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process) is used regardless of the game state. The selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected based on the result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that the selection symbol of the normal symbol is selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 378) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then the selected symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 379), but this is not limited to this. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[11-3-10. Second starting port opening pattern determination table]
FIG. 380 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for the second starting port in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 380 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The opening pattern determination table for the second starting port determines the operation mode of the shutter 9147 for normal electricity according to the gaming state (normal electricity operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal pattern when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit. It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140.

In the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 380, the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern for the second starting port 9140 are defined in association with each other. ing.

In addition, the "opening pattern of the second starting port" is the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 9140, and the "first weight" in the first closing state of the second starting port 9140. "second opening time" when the second starting port 9140 is in the second open state, "second wait time" when the second starting port 9140 is closed for the second time, and closing the second starting port 9140 and an "ending time" for ending the operation of the general power shutter 9147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide. Note that, upon determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 transmits a second starting port opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, there is an unfavorable "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is long. There are two types of open patterns: "Open pattern (91H02H)". Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port may include three or more types of opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is the same even if the game ball rolling on the upper surface plate 9147U of the general electricity shutter 9147 falls toward the lower surface plate 9147D. , the lower plate 9147D immediately protrudes, and the game ball that has fallen from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (caught by the lower plate 9147D) for an extremely short time (for example, 0.072 seconds). It is set. For this reason, even if it is determined that the symbol has hit normally, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140, It is structured so that it is essentially treated as a loss.

In addition, the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is such that even if the game ball that was rolling on the top plate 9147U of the general electricity shutter 9147 falls toward the bottom plate 9147D, the bottom plate 9147D A long time (for example, 5.4 seconds) is set for the game ball to pass through the bottom plate 9147D without protruding and enter the second starting port 9140.

According to the opening pattern determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 380, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the normal gaming state = 00, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1" In addition, even when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port ("long opening pattern ( 91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, when the general power operation pattern associated with the first normal gaming state is 01, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the opening pattern of the second starting port is "short opening pattern". (91H01H)" is determined, and when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting opening.

In addition, if the normal power operation pattern associated with the second normal game state and the third normal game state is 02, the selection of the normal symbol also applies when the selection symbol of the normal symbol is "f1". Even when the symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port.

Therefore, the normal voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short open pattern" is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates the state in which the "long open pattern" and the "short open pattern" are easily determined. When the normal voltage operation pattern = 02, the ``long open pattern'' is easier to determine and the ``short open pattern'' is difficult to determine than when the general voltage operation pattern = 01. It shows the status.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in Figure 380, there are "Random value for normal symbol hit determination (see Figure 378)" and "Random value for normal symbol (see Figure 379)". The "long open probability" calculated by summing up the "long open pattern" is shown as a reference. In this embodiment, when the normal power activation pattern = 00, although the normal pattern per symbol is approximately 1/68.5, a long open pattern is never determined, so the "long open probability" is It is 0. In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the selection rate per normal symbol is approximately 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected symbol "f2" of the normal symbol that determines the long open pattern is 51/101. For this reason, the "long open probability" is approximately 1/135.6. In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the number per normal symbol is approximately 1/68.5, and the long open pattern is determined by all the selected symbols of the normal symbols (101/101). The "long open probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for general electric power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second starting ports is determined and the second starting port 9140 is opened, the second starting port 9140 is opened. When three game balls enter the opening 9140, the opening pattern of the second starting opening ends (the second starting opening 9140 closes). In other words, for one normal symbol, only three game balls can enter the second starting port 9140, and even if there is a remaining open time of 5400 ms in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting Port 9140 will be closed.

[11-3-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 381 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 381 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the normal symbol, and at least the variation display time of the normal symbol is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table and determines the gaming state, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second starting opening, the previous opening pattern of the second starting opening, and the normal symbol. A variation pattern of normal symbols is determined based on the random number value for performance and the number of reserved normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbols based on the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols. Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 381 includes the gaming state, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second starting port, the previous opening pattern of the second starting port, and the production of the normal symbol. The random number value, the number of reserved normal symbols, the variation pattern of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols are associated with each other. In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is common to A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state without distinction.

According to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 381, in the normal gaming state, the performance related to the normal symbol is not executed, and the normal symbol is associated with a relatively longer variable display time than in the time-saving gaming state. The symbol variation pattern (01H or 02H) is configured to be determinable. However, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) associated with the longest normal symbol fluctuation display time (for example, 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal gaming state is the longest normal symbol that can be determined in the time-saving gaming state. This is a normal symbol variation pattern associated with a shorter normal symbol variable display time than the normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a variable display time (for example, 60 seconds).

Also, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. When the opening pattern of the second starting port is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol variation pattern ( 13H to 16H) are determined. In addition, even if the selected symbol (f1, f2) is a normal symbol that is determined at the time of a normal symbol, if the opening pattern of the second starting port this time is "short opening pattern (91H01H)", it will save time. It is configured such that a normal symbol variation pattern (11H, 12H) in which a losing performance is executed in a gaming state is determined.

According to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 381, in the time-saving gaming state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is the selected symbol (f1, f2) of the normal symbol determined when the normal symbol is hit, The fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is relatively longer when the opening pattern of the second starting port is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" than when the opening pattern is the "short opening pattern (91H01H)". (For example, 40 seconds, 60 seconds) is configured to be able to determine a normal pattern variation pattern (13H, 15H or 16H) associated with it.

In this way, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is relatively longer in the "long opening pattern" than in the "short opening pattern", so the player is given the "long opening pattern". It becomes possible to perform a performance that makes people look forward to something new, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a time-saving game state.

Also, according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 381, in the time-saving gaming state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is the selected symbol (f1, f2) of the normal symbol determined when the normal symbol is hit, , when the previous opening pattern of the second starting port is "no opening" or "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the third variable display time (for example, 15 seconds, 12 seconds, 40 seconds) is configured to be able to be determined, and when the previous opening pattern of the second starting port is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the fluctuation pattern (13H to 15H) of the normal symbol associated with A normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a fourth variation display time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the third variation display time is configured to be determinable.

In this way, in the time-saving gaming state, when the "long opening pattern" is performed continuously, the fluctuating display time of the normal symbol is relatively long, so the "long opening pattern" is continuously performed in a short period of time. By performing this, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second starting port 9140 more than expected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, and the third working time saving gaming state are all set as a common time saving gaming state without distinguishing them. It may be configured such that different normal symbol fluctuation patterns are determined in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the third time saving gaming state.

[11-4. Main control processing]
In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing and normal symbol control performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although some of the processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the system timer interrupt process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[11-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 382, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S9001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S9001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S9001.

In S9002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S9001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S9008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S9003.

In S9003, the main CPU 201 determines whether the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether there is a pending number of second special symbols. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S9004, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S9005. Move.

In S9004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S9007, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9006. Move to.

In S9005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted. The starting information will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1). In addition, in this embodiment, the number of pending second special symbols before shifting the start information is temporarily stored in the main RAM 203 as "the number of pending second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied". to be memorized.

In S9006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first The starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S9007, the main CPU 201 stores special symbol startup information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol startup storage area and second special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S9008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 383. After executing the process of S9003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S9001 to S9008) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is stored as the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 9120 or the second It is also possible to use a sequential variation machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting hole 9140.

[11-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 383, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 382) will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 383 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S9011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is 0 or not. The waiting time of this special symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the special symbol management process, and will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 382), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If determined, the process moves to S9012.

In S9012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S9012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processing from S9013 onwards based on the control state number read in the processing at S9012.

In S9013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S9013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 384. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9014.

In S9014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S9014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 385. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9015.

In S9015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S9015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 387. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9016.

In S9016, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game closed processing. This process of S9016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 389. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9017.

In S9017, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S9017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 390. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9018.

In S9018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S9018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 391. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9019.

In S9019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S9019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 392. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9020.

In S9020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S9020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

After completing the processing of S9013 to S9020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 382). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[11-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 384, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "0", the process moves to S9022.

In S9022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a hit determination of the special symbol is performed, and win/loss determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process in S9022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9023.

In S9023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol and symbol designation command of the special symbol are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process in S9023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9024.

In S9024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 372 is determined, and if the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The small hit type determination table shown in is determined. Furthermore, in order to set the gaming state etc. based on the gaming state at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state data at the time of winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win is stored in the main RAM 203. Set in the game state storage area at the time of winning. After executing the process in S9024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9025.

In S9025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 375 and 376 is determined according to the gaming state, and the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table is referred to. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol are based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol of the special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, etc. The fluctuation pattern command is determined. Specifically, when the state is in the normal gaming state by referring to the status flag, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Based on this, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined. Also, when the state flag is referred to and it is the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation of the special symbol based on the result of the hit judgment process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Determine the pattern command. After executing the process in S9025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9026.

In S9026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process that sets a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S9025 is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S9026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9027.

In S9027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 383) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S9027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9028.

In S9028, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9029.

In S9029, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the symbol designation command transmission reservation processing, the symbol designation command transmission reservation processing determined in S9023 is performed. Further, as the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S9025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 385, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S9042.

In S9042, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol symbol determination time setting processing that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol confirmation time setting process, the special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S9042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S9043, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving game state transition determination processing. In the ninth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of variable displays of the special symbols that shifts to the B time-saving gaming state is updated, and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. When reaching the B time saving gaming state, control is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. Details of this B time-saving game state transition determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 386. After executing the process in S9043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9044.

In S9044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S9015 in FIG. 383) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S9044, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9045.

In S9045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9045, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9046.

In S9046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S9046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

[11-4-5. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 386, the B time saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 385) will be described. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing an example of B time-saving game state transition determination processing in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9043-4, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter updating process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S9043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-5.

In S9043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=the ceiling value (for example, 600 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, the process moves to S9043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter does not equal the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-9.

In S9043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process in S9043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-7.

In S9043-7, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving gaming state setting processing for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display number of normal symbols is set to 600 as the "B time-saving end condition". Set the number of times to the time saving number counter. In addition, in the B time saving game state setting process, you may set the normal power operation pattern = 01, or you may set the normal pattern variable display number = 100 times, 120 times, 10000 times, etc. as the "B time saving end condition". You may also set a number of times. After executing the process in S9043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-8.

In S9043-8, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the time saving transition command when starting the B time saving gaming state. Note that the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9043-8, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-9.

In S9043-9, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S9043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 385).

[11-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process moves to S9052.

In S9052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbols corresponding to the jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S9054, and if it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S9061.

In S9054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the jackpot game state is "the signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol". "Jackpot signal" is generated. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S9054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9055.

In S9055, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 372 determined in S9024 above. The maximum number of rounds is set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. ) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9056.

In S9056, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process in S9056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9057.

In S9057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time saving counter. After executing the process in S9057, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9058.

In S9058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9059.

In S9059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big prize opening preparation process (see S9018 in FIG. 383) will be performed. . After executing the process of S9059, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9059.

In S9060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S9060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In S9061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether it is a small hit or not, that is, the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Determine whether it exists or not. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a small hit, the process moves to S9063, and when it determines that there is no small hit (that is, a loss), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9071.

In S9063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In this external signal processing of the small hit, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the small winning game state is "the selected symbol of the special symbol. Generates a corresponding small hit signal. Thereafter, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S9063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9064.

In S9064, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning start preparation setting process. In this small hit start preparation setting process, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol" by referring to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. 373 determined in S9024 above, and the determined maximum number of openings. is set to the upper limit of the number of small winning openings in the main RAM 203. Next, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. ) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small hit start preparation setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. The time is determined, and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning a prize control process regarding the V shutter solenoid 9160 which opens and closes the V winning a prize opening 9156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 397) which will be described later. After executing the process in S9064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9066.

In S9065, the main CPU 201 performs small win status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing the process in S9065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9067.

In S9067, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9068.

In S9068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small hit game closed process (see S9016 in FIG. 383) will be performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process in S9068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9069.

In S9069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S9069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In S9071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 388. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S9051 to S9071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-7. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 388, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 387) will be described. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S9072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9073.

In S9073, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the start information stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process in S9073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9074.

In S9074, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 387).

[11-4-8. Small hit game closed processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 389, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 389 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small winning game closing process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "3", the process moves to S9082.

In S9082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small hit opening number counter value". “Small hit opening number counter” is a counter that counts the number of small winning openings. Note that the count value of the small hit opening number counter (small winning opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9083.

In S9083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small hit opening number counter value is the upper limit of the number of small winning openings. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the number of openings for small winnings, it moves the process to S9089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit for the number of openings for small winnings, it moves the process to S9084.

In S9084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 9151 (number of winnings in the second big winning hole 9151) is not the maximum number of winning balls in the small winning game state. In this process, whether the value of the second big winning hole counter counted by the second big winning hole count switch 9152 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the second big winning hole 9151 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 9151 is not the maximum number of prizes, it moves the process to S9085, and determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 9151 is the maximum number of prizes. If so, the process moves to S9089.

In S9085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process in S9085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9086.

In S9086, the main CPU 201 performs a second grand prize opening setting process to open the second grand prize opening 9151. In the opening setting process of the second big winning opening, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 9151 of this time is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole opening control data for opening the second big winning hole 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. As a result, the second big prize opening 9151 will be opened. After executing the process in S9086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9087.

In S9087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the small winning game opening process (see FIG. 390) will be performed after the small winning game closing process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S9087, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9088.

In S9088, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S9088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In S9089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 9156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 9157). When the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S9090, and when it determines that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9098.

In S9090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S9090, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9101.

In S9091, the main CPU 201 performs second route jackpot start preparation setting processing. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol. After executing the process in S9101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9092.

In S9092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route will start from the second round game. After executing the process in S9092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9093.

In S9093, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing the process in S9093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9094.

In S9094, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time saving counter. After executing the process in S9094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9095.

In S9095, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9095, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9096.

In S9096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (FIG. 383) will be performed after the small winning game closed process is completed. After executing the process in S9096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9097.

In S9097, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S9097, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In S9098, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 373 determined in S9024 above. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9099.

In S9099, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing the process in S9099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9100.

In S9100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 388 is performed. After executing the process of S9100, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

[11-4-9. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 390, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 390 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during opening of a small winning game in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small winning game opening process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "4", the process moves to S9102.

In S9102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 9151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the second big prize opening opening setting process (see S9086 in FIG. 389) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 9151 has not elapsed, it ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383). Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 9151 has elapsed, the process advances to S9103.

In S9103, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning hole closing setting process to close the second big winning hole 9151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the current closing time of the second big winning hole 9151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. As a result, the second grand prize opening 9151 will be closed. After executing the process in S9103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9104.

In S9104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small winning game closing process (see Figure 389) will be performed after the small winning game opening process is completed. Become. After executing the process of S9104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

[11-4-10. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "5", the process moves to S9112.

In S9112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9113.

In S9113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, the process moves to S9114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9118.

In S9114, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 372 determined in S9024 or S9101 above. , the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9115.

In S9115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 383) is performed after the big winning opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process in S9115, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9116.

In S9116, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9116, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9117.

In S9117, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9117, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

In S9118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S9118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9119.

In S9119, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning hole opening setting process to open the first big winning hole 9131. In this first jackpot opening setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 in the round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 9131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 9135. As a result, the first big prize opening 9131 will be opened. After executing the process in S9119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9120.

In S9120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see Figure 383) will be performed. Become. After executing the process in S9120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9121.

In S9121, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9122.

In S9122, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9122, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

[11-4-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the special winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process moves to S9132.

In S9132, when the first grand prize opening 9131 is opened, the main CPU 201 determines whether the winning number of game balls that entered the first grand prize opening 9131 in one round is the maximum winning number. do. In this process, whether the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 9132 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the first big winning hole 9131 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 9131 is not the maximum number of winnings, the process moves to S9133, and in S9132, the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 9131 is the maximum number of winnings. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S9134.

In S9133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see S9119 in FIG. 391) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 9131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383). . In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9134.

In S9134, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning opening closing setting process to close the first big winning opening 9131. In this first big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The closing time of the first big prize opening 9131 in the round is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole closing control data for closing the first big winning hole 9131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 9135. As a result, the first big prize opening 9131 will be closed. After executing the process in S9134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9135.

In S9135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see FIG. 391) is performed again. That will happen. After executing the process in S9135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9136.

In S9136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9137.

In S9137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383).

[11-4-12. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383) will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state termination process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 383), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process moves to S9142.

In S9142, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing the process in S9142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9143.

In S9143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot end state setting processing to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. Set the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed. After executing the process in S9143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9144.

In this embodiment, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z1", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the normal symbol is variable. Set the display count = 120 times in the time saving count counter. In addition, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, and the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and the normal symbol is variable. Set the display count = 100 times in the time saving count counter. In addition, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z4", "z6" or "z7", the state flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is set to 1, and the general power operation pattern is set to 02, Set the variable display number of normal symbols = 120 times to the time saving number counter. In addition, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z5", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of variable display times of the normal symbol is set to 10,000. Set the number of times to the time saving number counter.

In S9144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 388 is performed. After executing the process of S9144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 218).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-13. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 394, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 394 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S9200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21), and sets the waiting time for normal symbols to 0. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S9201.

In S9201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S9201, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9210. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S9210 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S9201.

In S9210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S9210 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol determination processing, second starting port opening pattern determination processing, normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing, etc. are performed, but for details, This will be described later with reference to FIG. 395. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9220.

In S9220, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S9220 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S9230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S9230 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9240.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss) of the stopped and displayed normal symbols. If the main CPU 201 determines that the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol hit, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3" and determines that the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss. If it is determined that it corresponds to , the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In S9240, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S9240 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9250.

In this normal electric accessory release process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. According to the operation of the opening pattern of the second starting port, the normal power shutter 9147 is operated to open and close the second starting port 9140. Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls for general electricity use enter the second starting port 9140, or when all the operations of the determined opening pattern of the second starting port are completed, the second starting port 9140 is opened. It is brought into the closed state, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4", and the normal electric accessory opening process is completed.

In S9250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S9250 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol winning termination process, updating of the number of time reductions, determination of completion of the number of time reductions, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S9200 to S9250) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-14. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 395, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 395, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S9211).

If it is determined in S9211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9212.

In S9212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S9212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9213.

In S9213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). After executing the process in S9213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9214.

In S9214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is determined. After executing the process in S9214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9215.

In S9215, the main CPU 201 performs a second starting port opening pattern determination process. After executing the process in S9215, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9216.

In the second starting port opening pattern determination process, the main CPU 201 first imports data of the second starting port opening pattern stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203 into the starting port opening pattern storage area (0). Shift to 1). Note that the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (1) will be overwritten and erased by shifting the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port. As a result, the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in this starting port opening pattern storage area (0) corresponds to "the opening pattern of the second starting port determined this time", and the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in this starting port opening pattern storage area (0) corresponds to the "opening pattern of the second starting port determined this time", The data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in step 1) corresponds to the "previously determined opening pattern of the second starting port".

In addition, in the process of determining the opening pattern of the second starting opening, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the data of the opening pattern of the second starting opening, and then selects the second opening pattern shown in FIG. 380. Referring to the opening pattern determination table of the starting opening, the opening pattern of the second starting opening is determined based on the gaming state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the second starting opening determined this time is The opening pattern is stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203.

In S9216, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the opening pattern of the starting opening, the previous opening pattern of the second starting opening stored in the starting opening opening pattern storage area (1), the random value for production of the normal symbol, and the number of reserved ordinary symbols, Determine the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 381 and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing the process in S9216, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9217.

In S9217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time determined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (S9216) is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. After executing the process in S9217, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9218.

In S9218, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 394) (see S9220) will be performed. After executing the process in S9218, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9219.

In S9219, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9219, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394).

[11-4-15. Normal symbol per end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 396, details of the normal symbol per end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394) will be described. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol winning termination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol hit end process, returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394), and changes the control state of the normal symbol. If it is determined that the number is "4", the process moves to S9252.

In S9252, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving number counter updating process to update the time saving number counter. In this time saving number counter update process, if the time saving gaming state is set (when the status flag = 1 or 2 is set), 1 is subtracted from the "time saving number counter" in the main RAM 203 and updated. do. Thereby, the number of variable display times of normal symbols can be counted as the number of time saving times. After executing the process in S9252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9253.

In S9253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving number counter=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is 0, the process proceeds to S9254, and if it determines that the time-saving counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S9255.

In S9254, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and causes the time saving gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state. Here, to clear the time saving information, the status flag, normal power operation pattern, and time saving number counter are cleared (set to 0). After executing the process in S9254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9255.

In S9255, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9255, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9256.

In S9256, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", the normal symbol variable display start process (see S9210 in FIG. 394) is performed after the normal symbol per end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S9256, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 394).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal symbol per end processing, the time saving number counter update processing as shown in S9252 to S9254 above and the end determination of the time saving number of times are performed, but the normal symbol variable display end processing ( It may be configured to perform in step S9220) in FIG. 394.

[11-4-16. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 397, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9311, the main CPU 201 performs protection register saving processing. After executing the process in S9311, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9312.

In S9312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9344, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, a power outage is not detected). If so, the process moves to S9313.

In S9313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process in S9313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9314.

In S9314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process in S9314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9315.

In S9315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As explained for the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game not permitted state) as the startup state when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored and the RAM is cleared. The game permission flag is also set to ON (=game permission state) after the RAM is cleared after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S9317, and when it determines that the game is not allowed, the process moves to S9344.

In S9317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S9317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9318.

In S9318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process in S9318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9319.

In S9319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for jackpot determination of a random number value for jackpot determination, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process in S9319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9320.

In S9320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 398. After executing the process in S9320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9330.

In S9330, if the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 9156. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, and the determined opening time is set in the V winning opening opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the opening time is set in the V shutter solenoid 9160. On the other hand, V winning a prize opening control data for opening the V winning a prize mouth 9156 is output. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process in S9330, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9340.

In S9340, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S9340, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9341.

In S9341, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process in S9341, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9342.

In S9342, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process in S9342, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9343.

In S9343, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S9341. After executing the process in S9343, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9344.

In S9344, the main CPU 201 performs processing to restore the protection register saved in S9311, and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[11-4-17. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 397) will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko gaming machine, the ninth pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a first big winning opening count switch 9132, a second big winning opening counting switch 9152, and a V winning opening switch 9157. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S9401, the main CPU 201 executes a first starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S9401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9402.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 9121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first starting port 9120. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). If it is determined that there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the first special symbol start information is Acquire various random values (for example, random values for jackpot determination, random symbol values, random values for reach determination, random values for performance selection, etc.), and convert the acquired various random values into 1 in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Stored in one storage area. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting opening 9120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S9402, the main CPU 201 executes a second starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S9402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9403.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 9141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 9140. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2). If it is determined that there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2), the information is used as the start information of the second special symbol. Various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, pattern random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one storage area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a winning command for a second special symbol indicating a winning to the second starting opening 9140 and the number of reserved second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S9403, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S9403, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9404.

In S9404, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 9132 detects that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 9131, the main CPU 201 responds to the first big winning hole 9131. At the same time, 1 is added to the first grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the first grand prize opening 9131 to update it. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first big winning hole winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning hole 9131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9405.

In S9405, the main CPU 201 performs second grand prize opening passage detection processing. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 9152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 9151, the main CPU 201 responds to the second big winning hole 9151. At the same time, the second grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the second grand prize opening 9151 is updated by adding one. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the second great winning opening 9151 is performed. The second large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9405, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9406.

In S9406, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 9157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passing flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process in S9406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9407.

In S9407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S9407, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern activation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern activation switch 9127, the main CPU 201 controls the normal pattern starting storage area (1) to the normal pattern starting storage area (4). ) is available. If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S9408, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S9408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the current first starting opening winning detection process or second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 377. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data of FIG. Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 397) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[11-5. Sub control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300, which performs control based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200, will be explained.

[11-5-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 399, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 399, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S9500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S9500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S9510 to S9580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S9510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the production button 54 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. Furthermore, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information, and inputs the operation information according to the current situation such as the production. Set the reception time to allow the input operation information, the validity period to invalidate the input operation information, and the invalidation period to invalidate the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9520.

In S9520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S9510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9530.

In this command analysis process, if the read command is a winning command of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 stores the winning command of the first special symbol in the "sub-side first special symbol pending number counter" of the work RAM 303. If it is a winning command of the second special symbol, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command of the second special symbol is set in the "sub-side second special symbol reservation number counter" of the work RAM 303. Further, if the read command is a gaming state designation command, information on the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state designation command is set in the "sub-side gaming state area" of the work RAM 303.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the read command is a variable pattern command of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 first sets and holds (ON) the BONUS flag in the "BONUS status flag area" of the work RAM 303. do. Subsequently, in order to count the number of consecutive small win game states and jackpot game states in the BONUS state, which will be described later, 1 is added to the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303. In addition, the "BONUS flag" and "consecutive number counter" are set when the last jackpot game state in the BONUS state ends (when the read command is the jackpot end display command, the sub-side second special symbol pending number counter = 0), the stored information is cleared (OFF or set to 0).

In addition, when the read command is the first grand prize opening command or the second grand prize opening command, the sub CPU 301 counts and displays the game balls in the acquired game ball number image, which will be described later. , the payout information (the number of game balls paid out) according to the first grand prize opening command or the second grand prize opening command is added to the "obtained game ball number counter" in the work RAM 303. In addition, the "acquired game ball number counter" is determined by the sub CPU 301 when the gaming state information in the "sub side gaming state area" is the normal gaming state, and the "sub side second special symbol pending number counter" = 0. It is cleared when it is determined that

In S9530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 400. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9540.

In S9540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9550.

In S9550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9560.

In S9560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9570.

In S9570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9580.

In S9580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[11-5-2. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 400, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 399) will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this production pattern determination process, based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the mode of display production such as characters displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound production output from the speaker 32, the mode of production button 54, etc. Decide on a performance pattern that defines the operation mode, etc. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9532.

Here, the "production pattern" refers to information that defines the display production of characters, voice production, operation mode of the production button 54, etc., as described above, but the "design production pattern" refers to the production pattern Among them, during the variable display of special symbols or normal symbols, at least a predetermined decorative pattern is variably displayed in a predetermined variable manner (variable display and stop display) on the display device 7, and depending on the stop mode of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. , refers to the information on the "variable performance" that notifies the predetermined lottery results. In addition, the predetermined decorative patterns include a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" that is displayed in a large size that is easy for the player to recognize, and a "second decorative pattern (secondary pattern)" that is displayed in a small size that is difficult for the player to recognize. There are 2 types: ``Design)''. Note that, depending on the type of symbol production pattern, information for displaying a predetermined character in addition to variable display of a predetermined decorative pattern may also be included.

In addition, the "small hit performance pattern" refers to the information on the performance performed during the small win gaming state among the performance patterns, and the "jackpot performance pattern" refers to the information on the performance performed during the jackpot gaming state among the performance patterns. Refers to information about the performance that will be performed. In addition, various performance patterns etc. are provided in addition to the symbol performance pattern, the small hit performance pattern, and the jackpot performance pattern, and the performances of various performance patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

(An example of production pattern determination processing when receiving the first special symbol variation pattern command)
In this embodiment, in the performance pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a first special symbol variation pattern command, in the normal gaming state, " A ``first symbol presentation pattern'' for variably displaying a first decorative pattern (main symbol) and a second decorative symbol (secondary symbol) is determined so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks column" are executed. In addition, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the first special symbol variation pattern command and the time-saving gaming state is in effect, the production content shown in the "remarks column" of the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in FIG. 376 is In order to be executed, a ``second pattern production pattern'' is determined in which a second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed without displaying the first decorative pattern (main pattern).

In this way, when in the time-saving gaming state, as a variable effect regarding the lottery result of the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol (sub-design) is variably displayed without displaying the first decorative symbol (main symbol). Since the "second symbol presentation pattern" is determined, the presentation using the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not performed, and the variable presentation regarding the lottery result of the first special symbol is changed to the sixth symbol presentation pattern described later. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance regarding the lottery results of the normal symbols from being inhibited.

(Example of performance pattern determination process when receiving the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command)
In addition, in the performance pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a second special symbol variation pattern command, when it corresponds to the "first special symbol variation pattern (0AH)", the command shown in FIG. 375 is used. , a BONUS entry effect that notifies entry into the BONUS state, which will be described later, is executed, and a "second decorative pattern" is executed that variably displays a second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) without displaying the first decorative pattern (main pattern). 3.Determine the ``design production pattern''. In addition, when corresponding to the "second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)", as shown in FIG. 375, the BONUS continuous performance is executed, and the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is A "fourth pattern production pattern" for variably displaying the second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, in an extremely rare case (1/65536), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern (00H) corresponding to a loss, the first decorative symbol (main symbol ) is not displayed, and a ``fifth pattern rendering pattern'' is determined in which a second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed.

In this way, the third symbol performance pattern (BONUS entry performance) or the fourth symbol performance pattern (BONUS continuous performance) is determined as a variable performance when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or small hit, As shown in FIG. 403, which will be described later, performances related to the "small win performance pattern" and the "jackpot performance pattern" are executed, so the fluctuation performance regarding the lottery result of the second special symbol and the win performed in the small win game state are executed. The performance and the winning performance carried out in the jackpot game state can be made to look like a series of winning performances (BONUS performance), and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(An example of production pattern determination processing when receiving a normal symbol fluctuation pattern command)
In addition, in the production pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a normal symbol variation pattern command, the production related to the normal symbol (the production of the first decorative symbol) is not executed during the normal gaming state. Although the performance pattern is not determined in the time-saving gaming state, the performance contents shown in the "remarks column" of the normal symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 381 are executed based on the received normal symbol variation pattern command. As such, a "sixth symbol presentation pattern" for variably displaying the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is determined.

In this way, when in the normal game state, the variable performance regarding the normal symbols is not executed, but when in the time-saving gaming state, the sixth symbol performance pattern is determined as the variable performance regarding the lottery result of the normal symbols. A performance will be performed using the decorative pattern (main pattern).

Furthermore, when in the time-saving gaming state, the third symbol performance pattern or the fourth symbol performance pattern is determined as a variable performance when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, so that regarding the normal symbol. Both the variable performance and the variable performance related to the lottery result of the second special symbol can be executed, and the interest of the game in the time-saving game state can be further improved.

(Example of performance pattern determination process when receiving small hit start display command)
In addition, in the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a small hit start display command, the "continuous number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the "small win performance pattern" in which the first BONUS performance is executed is ” is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number of times counter" = 1 (when the first small winning game state is entered from the BONUS state), the "first BONUS performance (initial )" is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" is equal to or greater than 2 (in the second or subsequent small winning game state from the BONUS state), the "first small winning performance pattern" to be executed is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" is equal to or more than 2 (in the second or subsequent small winning game state from the BONUS state), the "first small winning effect pattern" to be executed is shown in FIG. 403 described later. A "second small winning effect pattern" in which the "first BONUS effect (second and subsequent times)" as shown in (f) is executed is determined.

Further, as described above, in the small winning gaming state, when the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected, the main CPU 201 sends a V passing command to the sub control circuit 300. In the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V passing command, the sub CPU 301 determines a "V passing notification effect pattern" in which the V passing notification effect is executed. In addition, in this production pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V passing command, the "continuous number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (from the BONUS state In the first small winning game state), the "V passing notification performance pattern" is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (in the second and subsequent small winning gaming state from the BONUS state), , it is desirable not to determine the "V passing notification effect pattern".

(Example of performance pattern determination process when receiving jackpot start display command)
In addition, in the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a jackpot start display command, the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the "jackpot performance pattern" in which the second BONUS performance is executed is determined. It is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number of times counter" = 1 (in the first jackpot game state from the BONUS state), the "second BONUS" as shown in FIGS. 403(c) and (d) described later is The "first jackpot performance pattern" in which the "performance (at the start)" and "second BONUS performance (during release)" are executed is determined, and when the "consecutive number of times counter" = 2 or more (the second and subsequent jackpots from the BONUS state In the gaming state), a "second jackpot effect pattern" in which a "second BONUS effect (opening)" as shown in FIG. 403(d), which will be described later, is executed is determined.

In S9532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9533.

In S9533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S9532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9534.

In S9534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9535.

In S9535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9536.

In S9536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9537.

In S9537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S9531 above. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and shifts the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 399).

[11-6. Game state transition diagram]
The gaming states transferred through the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained using a gaming state transition diagram. FIG. 401 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which the gaming nature is mainly related to the lottery of the first special symbol, and a time-saving gaming state which is mainly the gaming nature related to the lottery of the normal symbol as the gaming state. .

When distinguishing the normal gaming states in detail, the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol is referred to as the "first normal gaming state", and the second special symbol The normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information is referred to as the "second normal gaming state".

As mentioned above, the "first normal gaming state" is the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, and left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode. This is the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the first normal gaming state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first starting port 9120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 9140.

The "second normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and the number of variable display times of the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state is the final one. When the number of times is shortened, the second starting port 9140 is opened based on the drawing of the normal symbol, and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140. It is. Here, in the second normal game state, left-handed play is prescribed as a regular game mode, but when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the pull back is shifted to the time-saving game state again. Since the percentage is extremely high, right-handed playing may be specified as a regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-handed play or right-handed play, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 displays information as a normal game mode. It is desirable to have the display device 7 notify left-handed hitting as a normal gaming mode when the second normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state without causing the second normal gaming state to occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "BONUS state", and the "BONUS state" is 2 normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, a jackpot gaming state, and a small winning gaming state. .

As mentioned above, the time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition conditions (time-saving generation conditions), and is the "A time-saving gaming state" that is triggered by a jackpot and shifts to after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the "A time-saving gaming state" that is triggered by a jackpot. The game is provided with a ``B time-saving game state'' in which the game changes after the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the ceiling value without using this as a trigger. In addition, "A time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode (operation pattern of the general electricity shutter 9147) during the time-saving game state, and is the "first time-saving game state". , a "second time-saving gaming state" in which it is easier to transition to the next jackpot gaming state than the first time-saving gaming state, and a "third time-saving gaming state" in which transition to the next jackpot gaming state is virtually guaranteed. It consists of either.

In the "first time saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 01 are set, and the first time saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 100 times) is set as the number of time saving times of the A time saving end condition. This is a set time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is a regular gaming mode. In the first time-saving game state, by setting the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, and the second starting opening pattern determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern determination process") shown in FIG. The first long opening probability at which the long opening pattern is executed based on the symbol lottery etc. is set to approximately 1/135.6 (see FIG. 380). As mentioned above, even if the short opening pattern is executed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the second starting port 9140, and even if it is determined that the symbol has hit normally. , it is structured so that it is essentially treated as a loss.

In the "second time saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the second time saving number (the variable display number of normal symbols = 120 times) is set as the number of time saving times of the A time saving end condition. This is a set time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is a regular gaming mode. In the second time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the normal symbol lottery etc. is set to about 1/68.5. In addition, in the second time saving game state, a second long opening probability is set which is higher than the first long opening probability in the first time saving gaming state, and the second time saving game state is set to have a second long opening probability higher than the first time saving number of times in the first time saving gaming state. Since the number of times is set, this is a time-saving gaming state in which it is easier to transition to the next jackpot gaming state than in the first time-saving gaming state.

In the "third time saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the third time saving number (the variable display number of normal symbols = 10,000 times) is set as the number of time saving times in the A time saving end condition. This is a set time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is a regular gaming mode. In the third time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the normal symbol lottery etc. is set to about 1/68.5. In the third time saving game state, the third time saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 10000 times) is set as the number of time saving times, which practically guarantees the transition to the next jackpot game state. This is a time-saving gaming state in which transition to a jackpot gaming state is virtually guaranteed.

In the "B time saving game state", the state flag = 2 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the fourth time saving number (the variable display number of normal symbols = 600 times) is set as the number of time saving times in the B time saving end condition. This is a time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode. In the B time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the normal symbol lottery etc. is set to about 1/68.5.

(First normal gaming state transition control)
As shown in FIG. 401, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 370), when a "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, the "first time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 90% according to the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, with a selection rate of 10%, the game will move to the "second time-saving game state" (see FIG. 374).

Further, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 600, the normal game state shifts to the "B time saving game state".

(Transition control of first time-saving game state)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126 and wins the first long opening probability (approximately 1/135.6) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol is acquired, and the acquired starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol starting It is stored in either the storage area (1) or the second special symbol start storage area (2) in FIFO format. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it is possible to store the starting information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times, including the fluctuation amount and the number of reserved second special symbols (2 pieces). It becomes. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the "first time-saving game state" shifts to the "BONUS state".

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when the variable display of the normal symbol of the first time-saving number ends without a game ball entering the second starting port 9140, the change from the "first time-saving game state" to the "first time-saving game state" is completed. The game will then transition to the normal gaming state.

(Second time saving game state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the "second time-saving game state" is changed to the "BONUS state". will be transferred.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, when the variable display of the normal symbol for the second time-saving number ends without a game ball entering the second starting port 9140, the change from the "second time-saving game state" to the "first time-saving game state" The game will then transition to the normal gaming state.

(Transition control of third time-saving game state)
In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" is changed to the "BONUS state". will be transferred.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 10,000 times) is the number of times that is practically guaranteed to move to the next jackpot game state, There is no substantial transition from the "time-saving gaming state" to the "first normal gaming state."

(Transition control of B time-saving gaming state)
In the B time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern activation area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 opens. It is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, similarly to the first time-saving game state, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, and the "B time-saving game state" shifts to the "BONUS state". I will do it.

In addition, even in the B time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 600 times) is the number of times that is practically guaranteed to move to the next jackpot game state, and the "B time-saving game There is no substantial transition from the "state" to the "first normal gaming state."

(BONUS state transition control)
In the BONUS state, a second special symbol lottery is first performed based on the start information of the second special symbol.

Here, in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/231.6, but the small win probability is set to about 1/1.004, and the total probability is 65535/65536. A jackpot or a small win is determined with a probability of (see FIG. 370). In this embodiment, when a small winning game state is performed due to a small winning winning, the game ball that enters the second large winning opening 9151 is configured so that it can almost pass through the V winning opening 9156. (See FIGS. 368 and 373) When the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, the state shifts to the jackpot game state from the second route.

For this reason, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it is configured so that the transition to the jackpot game state is possible at approximately 1/1 (65535/65536), and the second special The game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information of the symbol is made to correspond to the BONUS state in the same way as the jackpot game state and the small win game state.

In the BONUS state, after the second special symbol is drawn, a jackpot game state from the first route triggered by a jackpot or a jackpot game state from the second route triggered by a small win is executed. will be done. In addition, in the BONUS state, the start information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times is stored, so that a maximum of three jackpot game states can be executed consecutively.

In the BONUS state, when all the jackpot game states triggered by the start information of the second special symbol are completed, the "second time-saving game state" is activated with a selection rate of 90% according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol. ”, and with a selection rate of 10%, the state shifts to the “third time-saving game state” (see FIG. 374).

In this way, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first game feature aims at the jackpot gaming state by drawing the first special symbol, and in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting hole is created by drawing the normal symbol. Since it is composed of a second game feature that aims for the long opening of 9140, it not only mixes the so-called 1 type pachinko game machine and the so-called 2 type pachinko game machine, but also provides unprecedented game play. It is possible to create new games and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the long opening probability differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of time-saving gaming states with different long opening probabilities, thereby further improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In particular, in this embodiment, by drawing the second special symbol (the game ball enters the second starting port 9140), it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state substantially (approximately 1/1). Therefore, when in the time-saving gaming state, the second game feature aims to open the second starting port 9140 long by drawing a normal symbol, and the result of transition to a plurality of time-saving gaming states , it is possible to provide even more interest and to further improve the interest of the game.

[11-7. Display contents]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, sub-control circuit 300, etc. described above will be explained using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, with reference to FIG. 402, the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described. FIG. 402 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the ninth pachinko game machine. FIG. 402(a) is the basic structure of the display image in the first normal gaming state, and FIG. 402(b) is the basic structure of the display image in the time-saving gaming state excluding the BONUS state.

(Basic configuration of display image in first normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 402(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state is that the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is placed on the left side of the center side of the display area of the display device 7. A pattern 9071L, a middle pattern 9071C, and a right pattern 9071R are configured to be displayable.

Also, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 9072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 9072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A sub-symbol 9073 and a third sub-symbol 9075 as a sub-symbol of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the first normal game state, in addition to variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 9071L, middle symbol 9071C, and right symbol 9071R, Variable display of the first sub-symbol 9072 will also be performed. In addition, when the normal symbol is variablely displayed during the first normal game state, only the third sub-symbol 9075 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. become. In addition, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, only the second sub-symbol 9073 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as described later in the BONUS state production. will not be displayed.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of first special symbols can be displayed, and the first special symbol starting storage area ( A first pending image 9074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), a second pending image 9074b indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2), and a first special symbol. A third pending image 9074c indicating that starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth pending image 9074d indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Configured so that it can be displayed. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 9075 indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, although the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols is not displayed in the first normal game state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols is configured to be displayable. Good too.

(Basic configuration of display image in time-saving gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 402(b), the basic structure of the display image in the time saving game state except the BONUS state is that the left symbol is placed in the center of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol. 9076L, a middle pattern 9076C, and a right pattern 9076R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 9072 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second sub-symbol 9072 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed, as in the first normal game state. A symbol 9073 and a third sub-design 9075 corresponding to the normal symbol are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed during the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbol of the left symbol 9076L, the middle symbol 9076C, and the right symbol 9076R, the third sub symbol 9075 is Variable display will also be performed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the time-saving game state, only the first sub-symbol 9072 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. It will not be done.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of normal symbols can be displayed, and starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) according to the pending number of normal symbols. The first pending image 9077a indicates that the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (2), the second pending image 9077b indicates that the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (3), and the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (3). A third pending image 9077c indicating that the starting information is stored, and a fourth pending image 9077d indicating that starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (4) are configured to be displayable. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 9078 indicating that a variable display of normal symbols is being displayed is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed, but the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. may be configured to be displayable.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 7, a right-handed instruction image 9079 that instructs the player to play right-handed as a regular game mode is configured to be displayable.

At the upper left of the display area of the display device 7, a time saving number image 9080 indicating the remaining number of time saving times under the time saving end condition is configured to be displayable. In addition, in the third time saving game state, if the third time saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 10000 times) is set, the time saving number image 9080 is guaranteed to move to the next jackpot game state. An infinity symbol "∞" will be displayed to indicate that.

In this way, in the first normal game state, the main symbol and the reserved image of the decorative symbols are the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is drawn to make it easier to recognize the first game feature that aims for a jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol. When in the time-saving game state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the reserved image are normal symbols so that it is easy to recognize the second game feature that aims to open the second starting port 9140 long by drawing the normal symbol. It corresponds to Then, in the time-saving game state, a variation effect of the main symbols (left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R) of the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbol will be performed. That is, the first decorative pattern (main pattern) becomes a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the normal game state, and is replaced with a pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the time-saving game state.

(BONUS state production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the BONUS state including the gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, the jackpot gaming state, and the small winning gaming state I will explain the performance.

In addition, in the performance of the BONUS state, the first sub-symbol 9072, second sub-symbol 9073, third sub-symbol 9075, and right hit instruction image 9079 explained in FIG. 402 are displayed small and do not interfere with the explanation of the performance content. Since there is a possibility that this may occur, illustration of the reference numerals is omitted. In addition, the first sub-symbol 9072, second sub-symbol 9073, and third sub-symbol 9075 are used to control the gaming state (second normal game) during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol. In the state and time-saving game state), it is configured so that it can always be displayed, but in the jackpot game state and the small win game state, it is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 403(a) shows that when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140 and the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the number of reserved second special symbols = 0, the "first special symbol" This is an example of a display image of a "BONUS entry performance" which can be executed during the initial variable display of the second special symbol after the "variation pattern (0AH)" has been determined.

As shown in FIG. 403(a), in the "BONUS entry effect", for example, a right hit instruction image 9079 and a blessing image notifying entry into the BONUS state are displayed in the display area. ing. This "BONUS entry effect" is based on the "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" and "symbol confirmation time (for example, 540ms)" that are associated with the first special symbol variation pattern (0AH). It is possible to carry out over a period of time. In addition, in the "BONUS entry effect", only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed variably as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is It is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 403(b) is an example of a display image of the "first BONUS effect (first time)" performed when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the BONUS state is shifted to the first small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 403(b), in the "first BONUS effect (first time)", as an example, a right-handed batting instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a right-handed batting instruction image are displayed in the display area. In addition, a V instruction image such as "Aim for V!", which instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 in the second big winning hole 9151, is displayed. Although not shown, in the "1st BONUS effect (first time)", when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, a V passing notification effect is also executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156. It is possible.

FIG. 403(c) shows the "2nd BONUS" that is performed at the start of the first jackpot game state (opening time of the first jackpot game state) after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 in the first small win game state. This is an example of a display image of ``Performance (at start)''.

As shown in FIG. 403(c), in the "second BONUS effect (at the start)", for example, a right-handed hitting instruction image 9079 is displayed in the display area, and a "4500 BONUS" regarding the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state is displayed. !!” is displayed.

As mentioned above, when transitioning to the BONUS state, a maximum of three jackpot game states can be executed consecutively, but the image of the number of game balls expected to be acquired in this embodiment is a maximum of three jackpot game states ( The number of game balls (4,500 = 1,500 x 3 times) that the player can obtain is displayed (including the number of game balls that can be obtained in the small winning game state).

The image of the expected number of game balls to be acquired displayed in this manner is configured to be able to display as an image the number of game balls expected to be acquired for all combinations corresponding to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states. ing. For example, in the case where the second special symbol shown in Fig. 374 has a winning distribution of 1500 shots per 10R and 600 shots per 4R, the image corresponds to 4500 shots, which is three times per 10R. , an image corresponding to 3600 shots for 2 shots per 10R and 1 shot per 4R, an image corresponding to 2700 shots for 1 shot per 10R and 2 shots per 4R, and an image corresponding to 1800 shots for 3 shots per 4R. , are configured so that they can be displayed respectively.

In addition, if the player is unable to place the game ball into the second starting slot 9140 up to three times due to a cause such as ball clogging, an image corresponding to one hit (corresponding to 1500 shots) It may be configured to display images corresponding to 600 shots) or images corresponding to two hits (images corresponding to 3000 shots, images corresponding to 2100 shots, images corresponding to 1200 shots). . In this case, players may lose interest because they are not awarded the maximum amount of jackpots, but this can be prevented by accurately displaying the number of balls expected to be acquired. It is possible to achieve the effect of

In addition, in this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls to be acquired is configured to be displayed in the "second BONUS effect (at the start)" at the start of the first jackpot gaming state, but it is not displayed in the first small winning gaming state. It may be configured such that it is displayed in the "first BONUS effect (first time)" after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 at a certain time.

FIG. 403(d) is an example of a display image of the "2nd BONUS performance (opening)" performed in the jackpot game state after the opening time of the first jackpot game state has elapsed (during the round of the jackpot game state). .

As shown in FIG. 403(d), in the "second BONUS effect (open)", for example, a right-handed hitting instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and the first large It is configured to display an acquired game ball number image that displays the cumulative number of game balls that the player has acquired by entering the game balls into the winning hole 9131 and the second large winning hole 9151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the acquired game ball number image is the number of game balls acquired by the player in the small hit game state and the jackpot game state, and the game balls are displayed in the first big winning hole 9131 and the second big winning hole 9151. Although the configuration is configured to display the cumulative number of game balls that the player has acquired by entering the ball, the number of game balls that the player has acquired in the jackpot game state is displayed when the game ball enters the first jackpot 9131. It may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls that the player has acquired by hitting the balls. Furthermore, the acquired game balls number image displays the cumulative number of game balls that the player has acquired by entering the game balls into the first grand prize opening 9131, the second grand prize opening 9151, and the general prize opening 122. It may be configured to do so.

FIG. 403(e) shows a case where the pending number of second special symbols>0 when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied after the jackpot game state ends (that is, the second special symbol start storage area (1 ) or when the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2)), the "fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (1AH)" is determined, and the 2 is an example of a display image of a "BONUS continuation effect" that can be executed during variable display of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 403(e), in the "BONUS continuation effect", for example, a right-handed batting instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an acquired game ball number image are displayed in the display area. is displayed, and the BONUS performance performed in the jackpot game state or the small win game state is continued. This "BONUS continuous performance" is based on the "second variable display time (for example, 1 second)" and "symbol confirmation time (for example, 540ms)" that are associated with the second special symbol variation pattern (1AH). It is possible to carry out over a period of time. In addition, in the "BONUS continuous performance", only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed variably as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is It is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 403(f) is an example of a display image of the "first BONUS performance (second and subsequent times)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the state shifts to the second and subsequent small hit game state. .

As shown in FIG. 403(f), in the "first BONUS performance (second and subsequent times)", for example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a V instruction image, and an acquired game are displayed in the display area. It is configured so that a pitch count image is displayed. In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 403(b) is displayed, the V passage notification effect can be executed, but when FIG. 403(f) is displayed Even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, it is desirable not to perform the V passing notification effect. When the V passing notification performance is not executed, a plurality of jackpot game states can be seamlessly shown to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the V passing notification effect may be executed when FIG. 403(f) is displayed, but when executing the V passing notification effect while FIG. 403(f) is being displayed, It is desirable to execute the V passing notification effect in a shorter execution time than the execution time of the V passing notification effect that is executed when 403(b) is displayed.

After the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 in the second and subsequent small winning gaming states, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state, but at the start of the second and subsequent jackpot gaming states, as shown in FIG. 403(c) Even during the opening time of the jackpot game state, the "second BONUS performance (during release)" as shown in FIG. 403(d) will be performed without the "second BONUS performance (at the start)" .

In this way, as a performance in the BONUS state, a "BONUS entry performance" or a "BONUS continuation performance" is executed as a variable performance during the variable display of the second special symbol, and a "first BONUS performance" is performed in the small winning game state. The system is configured such that a "second BONUS performance" is executed when the game is in a jackpot game state. Since the contents of the "BONUS entry performance", "1st BONUS performance", "2nd BONUS performance", and "BONUS continuation performance" are related, they can be grouped together as a single BONUS state performance. A cohesive performance can be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

In particular, during the variable display of the second special symbol from the second time onward, in the small hit game state, and in the jackpot game state, the special effects shown in FIGS. 403(a) to 403(c) are not performed. Since a performance similar to the "second BONUS performance (opening)" in the jackpot gaming state shown in d) is performed, multiple jackpot gaming states can be made to appear seamlessly (like a group of jackpot gaming states). This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time, in the small hit game state, and in the jackpot game state, special performances as shown in FIGS. In addition, the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state can be notified in advance, increasing the player's joy and making the game more interesting.

<Modified example of the ninth pachinko game machine>
Note that the technology described in the ninth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various performances executed in the ninth pachinko game machine may be replaced with performances by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming states (A time-saving gaming state, B-time saving gaming state, first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state, and third time-saving gaming state) are replay times (RT state) where the replay probability of replaying is improved. , an assist time (AT state) that notifies a predetermined small role or the operation details of the stop button, and an assist replay time (ART state) where the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, jackpots and small wins include winning a specific combination, stopping and displaying a specific combination of symbols (a specific combination of symbols winning a prize), winning a rush win in RT state, and winning in AT state. It is only necessary to replace it with either winning a rush win in the ART state or winning a rush win in the ART state.

(others)
In the above-described ninth pachinko game machine, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the ninth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the ninth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[12. 10th pachinko game machine]
Next, a tenth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. The tenth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The tenth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of playability, production content, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

Note that, like the third pachinko game machine, the tenth pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second special symbol is displayed more favorably than the first special symbol. This is a priority variable machine that gives priority to the variable display of special symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in describing the tenth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

Furthermore, "paying out" game balls is not limited to actually paying out game balls to players, but in the case of gaming machines (so-called smart pachinko) that play games by circulating enclosed game balls. This concept includes storing the number of game balls to be paid out (prize ball data) in a storage area of a gaming machine or an electronic storage medium (game card).

[12-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 404, the game board unit 10010 included in the tenth pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 10010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 404 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10010 included in the tenth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 10010 includes a game panel 10100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 10100, and a game area 105 on the front side of the game panel 10100 where a fired game ball can roll and flow down. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 404, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10010 included in the tenth pachinko game machine mainly includes a first passage gate 10126R, a second passage gate 10126L, and a second passage gate 10126L. The configuration and arrangement of the second starting port 10140, the normal electric accessory unit 10145, the first special electric accessory unit 10130, and the second special electric accessory unit 10150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 10120 located in the gaming area 105 of the tenth pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 10140, it will be explained again using a different code from the first pachinko gaming machine.

(passing gate)
The tenth pachinko game machine includes two passing gates, a first passing gate 10126R arranged in the right side area 107 and a second passing gate 10126L arranged in the left side area 106.

The first passage gate 10126R is composed of a gate through which game balls can pass, and is placed above (upstream side) the normal electric accessory unit 10145, and the game balls that have passed through the first passage gate 10126R are normally electric It is possible to enter the accessory unit 10145. Further, since the first passing gate 10126R is arranged in the right side area 107, a game ball hit to the right can pass through it (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to pass through).

In addition, the second passage gate 10126L is composed of a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located on the left side of the center accessory 115 and above (upstream side) the first starting port 10120, and The game ball that has passed through the gate 10126L can enter the first starting port 10120. Further, since the second passing gate 10126L is arranged in the left side area 106, a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to pass through).

Note that the second passage gate 10126L may be arranged directly above the first starting port 10120, or the chance entrance 119 provided on the stage 118 may be used as the second passage gate 10126L.

When the game ball passes through the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L, it is used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L, the prize ball is not paid out, but the first passage gate 10126R and the second passage gate 10126L are used as the prize opening (ordinary). It may be configured so that a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out as the picture operation opening).

Further, the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L may function as a trigger for operating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (the special symbol that becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed), the accessory continuous operation device is triggered when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L. may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the game area 105 in both the right side area 107 and the left side area 106 is provided with two passage gates, but only the right side area 107 may be provided with a passage gate. In other words, the second passage gate 10126L disposed in the left region 106 may not be provided, but only the first pass gate 10126R disposed in the right region 107 may be provided.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 10120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 10120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 10121 (see FIG. 405 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 10120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 10120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 10140 is located in the right area 107 and below the first passage gate 10126R (downstream side), and is provided in a normal electric accessories unit 10145, which will be described later, and is provided with a game ball that is hit right. is allowed to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 10140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 10141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 10140.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting port 10140 is arranged on the lower (downstream side) side of the first passage gate 10126R, the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 10126R is When the electric accessory 10146 is operating, a game ball can enter the second starting port 10140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 10140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting portal (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 10140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 10145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream side) of the first passage gate 10126R, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 10145 is a unit body that integrates a second starting port 10140, a second starting port switch 10141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 10140, and a normal electric accessory 10146. It is.

The ordinary electric accessory 10146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 10147 that can move forward and backward in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 10148 (see FIG. 405 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 10147. The normal electric accessory 10146, that is, the shutter 10147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 10140, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 10140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general power shutter 10147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 10140 and a flat ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 10140. It consists of When the general power shutter 10147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 10140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 10140. , the flat plate-shaped entering ball guide part is buried in the surface of the game panel 10100 and allows the game ball to flow downward without receiving the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the general power shutter 10147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting port 10140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 10140. Without being obstructed, the flat plate-like entering ball guide portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 10100, receives the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received game balls to the second starting port 10140. Note that instead of the above-described shutter for general electricity use 10147 that can move forward and backward in the front-rear direction, the shutter for general electricity use 10147 may be configured with a movable member called a so-called electric chew that can be moved in the left-right direction.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 10146 enters the prescribed number of normal electric game balls (for example, 1 ball) while the second starting port 10140 is in the open state, the open time has not elapsed. In both cases, the second starting port 10140 is closed.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 10130 is arranged below (downstream side) in the right side area 107 than the first passage gate 10126R, the normal electric accessory unit 10145, and the second special electric accessory unit 10150, which will be described later. Note that the first special electric accessory unit 10130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the first passage gate 10126R, the normal electric accessory unit 10145, and the second special electric accessory unit 10150 described later. However, it may be provided in the left side area 106.

The first special electric accessory unit 10130 includes a first big winning hole 10131 and a first big winning hole count switch 10132 (see FIG. 405 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 10131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 10134 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a first special electric solenoid 10135 (see FIG. 405 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 10134.

The first big winning hole 10131 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 10131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 10 ) is specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 10131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first big prize opening 10131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. , A game in which the second grand prize opening 10151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and the player enters the opened second major prize opening 10151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 10156 in the second big winning hole 10151.

The first special electric shutter 10134 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 10131, and a first large winning opening by the operation of a first special electric solenoid 10135 (see FIG. 405 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 10131.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 10134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the first special electric shutter 10134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the first big prize opening 10131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the 1st big winning opening 10131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 10134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the first big winning hole 10131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 10131. Become.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 10150 is provided below (downstream side) the first passage gate 10126R and the normal electric accessory unit 10145 in the right side area 107. Note that the second special electric accessory unit 10150 may be provided upstream of at least either the first passage gate 10126R or the normal electric accessory unit 10145, or may be provided in the left area 106. good.

The second special electric accessory unit 10150 has a second grand prize opening 10151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter into the second special electric accessory unit 10150, and a second grand prize opening 10151 that allows a game ball to enter the second special electric accessory unit 10150. A second big winning hole count switch 10152 that detects the entry of balls, a second special electric shutter 10154 that can open and close the second big winning hole 10151, and a second special electric shutter 10154 that operates to win the second big prize. A second special electric solenoid 10155 that opens and closes the winning opening 10151 (see FIG. 405 described later), a V winning opening 10156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 10151 can pass, and a game ball entering the V winning opening 10156. A V winning a prize opening switch 10157 that detects passing, a normal opening 10158 through which game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 10151 but have not entered the V winning a prize opening 10156 can pass, and a V winning a prize opening 10156. It is a unit body that integrates a V-shutter 10159 that opens and closes, and a V-shutter solenoid 10160 (see FIG. 405 described later) that operates this V-shutter 10159 to open and close the V-winning port 10156.

The second big winning hole 10151 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 10151 in one small winning is limited to the second big winning hole 10151. stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 10151, prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the second big winning hole are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 10154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the second special electric shutter 10154 is moved forward by the operation of the second special electric solenoid 10155 (see FIG. 405 described later). A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to advance and enter the second grand prize opening 10151, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 10151 by moving the second special electric shutter 10154 backward. The ball is configured to be able to transition between a possible or easy open state.

The V winning hole 10156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 10159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot game state via the above-mentioned second route when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 10151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 10156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 10156 After passing (second round and onward), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 10131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled through the second route, the second jackpot 10151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 10156 (from the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 10131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 10131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 10131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The normal opening 10158 is configured such that game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 10151 but have not passed through the V winning opening 10156 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the normal port 10158 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the second big prize opening 10151 pass through the normal opening 10158 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 10156, the jackpot game state will not be controlled.

The V shutter 10159 is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning hole 10156 and in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning hole 10156 by the operation of a V shutter solenoid 10160 (see FIG. 405 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between an open state and an open state through which a ball can pass (or easily).

In addition, the arrangement relationship of the first special electric accessory unit 10130, the normal electric accessory unit 10145, the second special electric accessory unit 10150, and the first passage gate 10126R arranged in the right side area 107 can be changed in design as appropriate. It is.

[12-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the control circuit of the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 405 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 405, the tenth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the tenth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[12-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 10148, a first special electric solenoid 10135, a second special electric solenoid 10155, and a V-shutter solenoid 10160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 10121, second starting port switch 10141, passing gate switch 10127, first big winning port count switch 10132, second big winning port counting switch 10152, and V winning port switch 10157 are partially different. There is.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 10148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 10147. When the normal power solenoid 10148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 10147 is moved forward to open the second starting port 10140, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 10147 is moved backward and the second starting port 10140 is closed.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 10135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 10134, which is an opening/closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 10135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the first special electric shutter 10134 is tilted forward, the first big prize opening 10131 is opened, and the first special electric solenoid 10135 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not done (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 10134 is inverted backward and the first big prize opening 10131 is closed.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 10155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 10154. When the second special electric solenoid 10155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 10154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 10151, and the second special electric solenoid 10155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 10154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 10151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 10160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 10159. When the V-shutter solenoid 10160 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the V-shutter 10159 is moved backward to open the V-winning port 10156, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 10159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 10156.

Further, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 10160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 10151, and opens the V winning opening 10156. That is, the V winning hole 10156 is in an open state from the time when the second big winning hole 10151 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 10151, it also passes through the V winning hole 10156 in principle.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 10121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 10120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 10120 is detected by the first starting port switch 10121, the main CPU 201 determines that the first acquisition condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first The judgment start conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 10121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 10120, the main CPU 201 performs a process of paying out prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 10141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 10140.

When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 10140 is detected by the second starting port switch 10141, the main CPU 201 determines that the second acquisition condition has been met, and the second special symbol starting information (jackpot determination (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (second special symbol starting storage area (1) to second special symbol starting storage area (1) to The judgment start conditions for the second special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) If this is established, it will be used for the second special symbol hit determination process and the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the second starting port switch 10141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 10140, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for the prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the second starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 10127 is provided in each of the first passage gate 10126R and the second passage gate 10126L, and is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L. It is.

When the passage gate switch 10127 detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L, the main CPU 201 displays the normal symbol without distinguishing between the first passage gate 10126R and the second passage gate 10126L. Obtain starting information (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value for normal symbols, etc.). The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning (judgment processing) and variable display of normal symbols.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 10132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 10131. When the first big winning hole count switch 10132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 10131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the first big winning hole 10131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 10152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 10151. When the second big winning hole count switch 10152 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 10151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the second big winning hole 10151, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the big prize opening.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning a prize opening switch 10157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning a prize opening 10156. When the V winning hole switch 10157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 10156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state.

(Game ball collection switch)
The game ball collection switch 10179 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the game ball fired from the firing device 6 into the game area 105. The game ball collection switch 10179 is located on the back side of the game board unit 10010, and is connected to the out port 178, various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 10120, the second starting port 10140, the first large winning port 10131, and the second large winning port). It is arranged in a collection channel through which game balls that enter the winning opening 10151, general winning opening 122, etc.) pass, and not only the game balls that enter the out opening 178, but also the game balls that enter the various winning openings. This detects balls without distinction. When the entry of a game ball is detected by the game ball collection switch 10179, the main CPU 201 counts the number of fired game balls that have been fired (counts the number of fired game balls counter described later).

[12-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

In particular, in this embodiment, the effect button 54 includes multiple types of buttons (determination button, left/right button, up/down button), and different operation information is output depending on the type of effect button 54. Specifically, when an operation signal is input from the production button 54 corresponding to the enter button, first operation information is output to the sub CPU 301, and when an operation signal is input from the production button 54 corresponding to the left and right buttons, the sub When the second operation information is output to the CPU 301 and an operation signal from the effect button 54 corresponding to the up and down buttons is input, the third operation information is output to the sub CPU 301.

[12-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout/launch of game balls, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 has a circuit that can pay out game balls. A payout device 82, a firing device 6 capable of firing game balls, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

Furthermore, when the payout/launch control circuit 400 in the tenth pachinko game machine receives a game stop signal from the main control circuit 200 indicating that the game is being stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the firing device 6, the firing of the game ball is stopped (the supply of power to the firing solenoid is stopped). Note that even if the main control circuit 200 stops the game based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 can stop the game even if the firing device 6 does not stop firing the game balls. good.

[12-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 406 to 418. Note that the tenth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the tenth pachinko gaming machine, there are prepared a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this tenth pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, as will be described later, as a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving generation conditions), "A time-saving gaming" that is triggered by a jackpot and transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state "B Time Saving Game State" which is not triggered by a jackpot and shifts to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value, and "C Time Saving Game State" which is triggered by a time saving hit and shifts to after the variable display of special symbols ends. "Game state". Furthermore, "A time-saving game state" and "C-time-saving game state" are time-saving game states that are distinguished from the viewpoint of the operation mode (operation pattern of the general electricity shutter 10147, etc.) during the time-saving game state, and are multiple time-saving game states. It is classified into various states, which will be explained in detail later.

[12-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 406 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 406 is a table for determining “big hit,” “small hit,” “time-saving hit,” or “loss,” and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200. .

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 406, the special symbol hit determination table is a special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 406(a) and a special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 406(b). It is equipped with a special symbol hit determination table.

The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. value data) are associated with each other. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "time-saving hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, loss determination value data). In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data).

That is, according to the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. ” is determined, but “small hit” is not determined, and in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “loss” is determined, but “time-saving hit” is not determined. become.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol. , a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "jackpot", a selection rate of approximately 1/49.9 is determined to be a "time-saving hit", and any other selection rate is determined to be a "loss". In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol by about 1, based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol. A selection rate of /319.7 is determined to be a "big hit," a selection rate of about 1/3.0 is determined to be a "small hit," and anything else is determined to be a "loss."

In the special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is are associated. In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data).

That is, according to the special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 406(b), in the time-saving game state, either the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process However, a "time-saving hit" is not determined, and a "big hit" or "loss" is determined in the first special symbol's hit determination process, but a "small hit" is not determined, and a "small hit" is not determined in the second special symbol's hit determination process. , "big hit," "small hit," or "loss."

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120 in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol. , a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "jackpot", and otherwise is determined to be a "loss". In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol by about 1, based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol. A selection rate of /319.7 is determined to be a "big hit," a selection rate of about 1/3.0 is determined to be a "small hit," and anything else is determined to be a "loss."

In this way, in this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. The configuration is such that when a game ball enters the starting port 10140, it is more likely to be determined as a "small hit".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, "time-saving hit" is not determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol, but even in the time-saving game state, "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol. may be determined. If the configuration is such that a "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol even in the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving gaming state is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the hit determination process for one special symbol is configured so that a "time-saving hit" is determined with a relatively low selection rate. Furthermore, a "time-saving hit" may be determined in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, but the hit determination process of the second special symbol is relatively more accurate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It is preferable to configure the system so that "time saving" is determined with a low selection rate.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, a ``time-saving hit'' is determined by the special symbol hit determination process, but even if a ``time-saving hit'' is determined in the time-saving game state, it is treated as a ``loss'' and the loss is not lost. It may be controlled so that the stop symbols of the corresponding special symbols are stopped and displayed. That is, even if a "time-saving win" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, control may be performed so as to ignore the "time-saving winning" in the time-saving gaming state.

Also, in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. If configured to be determined, a relatively low selection is made so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It is preferable to determine the "small hit" based on the percentage.

The above-mentioned range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "big hit", range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "small hit", range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "time-saving hit", The range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a loss, that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the tenth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of the jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the tenth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 10156 may be changed for each setting value. It is also possible to change the rate of passage to, or change the number of time saving continuations for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 10156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 10154), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving is continued. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[12-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 407 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. remembered.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 or the second starting hole 10140. is defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 407, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 59, The main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 69, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol of the special symbol. "z10" is determined as the symbol designation command, and "zA10" is determined as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 70 to 84, the main CPU 201 determines "z20" as the selected special symbol and "zA20" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 85 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z30" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA30" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, regardless of which value the symbol random number value of the special symbol is. Then, "zA4" is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 selects " z5" is determined, and "zA5" is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 80 to 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The symbols are configured so that the selection rate relational expressions of "z10">"z20" and "z10">"z30" hold true. Note that the relational expression between "z20" and "z30" is not limited to the selection rate of "z20" = "z30", but may be the selection rate of "z20" > "z30", or "z20" < The selection rate of "z30" may also be used.

As will be described in detail later, when time-saving hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, and "z10" is determined as the selected symbol for the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is After the end, the state shifts to the "first time saving game state", and when "z20" is determined as the selected symbol of the special symbol, after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the state shifts to the "second time saving game state", and the special symbol When "z30" is determined as the selected symbol, a transition will be made to the "third time-saving game state" after the end of the variable display of the special symbol. It is desirable that the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol "z20" which is a condition for transition to the "second time saving gaming state" is 20% or less.

In addition, when time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol without providing the "third time saving gaming state" described later, the "first time saving gaming state" or "second time saving gaming state" is selected. It may be configured to shift to either one of the "gaming states". In addition, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it is configured to shift to either the "first time-saving gaming state" or the "second time-saving gaming state". In this case, the selection symbols of the special symbol determined when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol are composed of only two types, "z10" and "z20". , the relational expression of selectivity of "z10">"z20" may be established. Also at this time, it is desirable that the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol "z20" which is a condition for transition to the "second time saving gaming state" is 20% or less.

Although the description is omitted in the tenth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table sets the stop mode of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the "selected symbol of the special symbol". This table is referred to when making decisions accordingly. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display a stop mode for a jackpot, a stop mode for a small hit, a stop mode for a time-saving hit, or a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The stopping mode is displayed. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[12-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 408 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 408 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state."

As shown in FIG. 408, in the jackpot type determination table, "opening mode of jackpot game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of jackpot gaming state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first jackpot 10131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state and the opening pattern of the first jackpot 10131. The opening pattern of the first big prize opening 10131 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. is stipulated. In addition, as the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 10131, the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be defined as being different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state" corresponding to the "selected symbols z5 to 7 of the special symbols" determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained is the opening mode of the small winning gaming state. This is the opening mode when the game ball enters the second jackpot opening 10151, which is opened at the time, passes through the V winning opening 10156 through the second route and shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 10151 during the small winning gaming state is considered as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the first big winning opening 10131 is opened. A jackpot game state is started. Incidentally, when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 10151 opened during the small winning gaming state does not pass through the V winning opening 10156, the jackpot gaming state will not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 408, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the "special symbol selection symbol z1" is determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the first special symbol is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. (10R) is determined, and when the "selected symbols z2, z3 of special symbols" are selected, 4 rounds (4R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. In addition, when the "selected symbols z1 to 3 of the special symbols" are determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the first special symbol is obtained, the same number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. It may be configured so that

In addition, when the "special symbol selection symbol z7" is determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, 10 rounds (10R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. . When the "special symbol selection symbols z5 to 7" are determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, 10 rounds (10R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds in all cases. ing. It should be noted that a different number of rounds may be determined depending on the "selected special symbols z5 to 7" determined when the small hit determination value data of the second special symbol is obtained.

Further, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 10131 may be configured to be different depending on the selected special symbol.

[12-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 409 is an example of a small winning type determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the small type determination table shown in FIG. 409 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 409, the small hit type determination table includes information for the "special symbol selection symbol (z5 to 7)" that is determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained. , and "opening mode of small winning game state" are associated with each other.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of openings of the second big winning hole 10151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 10151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second big prize opening 10151 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the small winning game state, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, and the ED waiting time (ending time). etc. are stipulated. Further, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156 includes an opening waiting time, an opening time, etc.

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 10151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156 are measured simultaneously, and When the big winning hole 10151 is open, the V winning hole 10156 is also opened. Therefore, when a small winning game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 10156. In addition, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156, like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 10151, multiple opening times and closing times may be defined so that the V winning opening 10156 is opened and closed multiple times. .

In addition, depending on the selected special symbol, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 10151, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156 is different.

In particular, the opening pattern of the V-winning hole 10156 is varied depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, and an advantageous operating mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 10156, and a The small hit type determination table may be configured such that a disadvantageous operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass is determined.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 4R x 10 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 600) The total number of game balls that can be paid out in the winning game state (for example, one small hit x 10 balls (second prescribed number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 150) is set to be smaller, and the jackpot It can be said that the gaming state is a "first special gaming state" which is advantageous, and the small winning gaming state is a "second special gaming state" where the profit is lower than the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and In this case, the first big prize opening 10131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 10151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said that

[12-3-5. Game status related setting table]
FIG. 410 is an example of a gaming state related setting table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 410 is a table for setting the gaming state, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 410, the gaming state related setting tables include a gaming state related setting table 1 that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 410(a), and a gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 410(b). A gaming state related setting table 2 that is referenced after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, and a gaming state related setting table 3 that is referenced after the variable display number of special symbols shown in FIG. 410(c) reaches the ceiling value. It is equipped with

As shown in FIG. 410, in the gaming state related setting table, "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "time saving end condition" are associated with each other as "gaming state setting".

The “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of gaming state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. State flag = 0 indicates "normal gaming state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state", state flag = 2 indicates "B working time saving gaming state", state flag = 3 indicates "C time saving gaming state". indicates the status.

The “normal power operation pattern” is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. General voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" described later is difficult to determine, and the "short open pattern" described below is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" described later is easy to determine. ” and the “short release pattern” are determined, and the general power operation pattern = 02 indicates that the “long open pattern” is higher than the general power operation pattern = 00 and the general power operation pattern = 01. This shows a state in which the pattern is easy to determine, and the "short open pattern" is difficult to determine.
That is, the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140 is as follows:
It operates in the order of general power operation pattern = 00 < general power operation pattern = 01 < general power operation pattern = 02 so as to be advantageous to the player.

The "time-saving end condition" is the end condition for ending the time-saving game state, and the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" is set as the end condition. This "variable display number of special symbols" indicates the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Furthermore, although not shown, transitioning to a jackpot gaming state is also set as a time-saving termination condition. When any one of these time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state is ended and a transition is made to the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set is referred to as the "first time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set. The time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern=01 is set is referred to as the "second time-saving game state" and the "third time-saving game state".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which the general electricity operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as a "fourth time-saving game state".

In addition, in the A time-saving game state (status flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set. The state is called the "sixth time-saving game state."

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (state flag = 1 to 3), the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set are collectively referred to as "RUSH game state". '', and the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the sixth time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 or 01 is set are also collectively referred to as the "general game state."

In this "normal game state" and "general game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, and sixth time-saving game state)", left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the first special symbol lottery is It is possible, and the game consists mainly of a variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the "RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state, fourth time-saving gaming state, and fifth time-saving gaming state)", right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and the normal symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are This is possible, and the game consists mainly of variable display of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, by drawing the second special symbol, it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state in about 1/3 from the first route triggered by a jackpot and the second route triggered by a small win. (See Figure 406).

As shown in FIG. 410(a), the gaming state related setting table 1 that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state includes "status flags", A "general power operation pattern" and a "time saving termination condition" are associated with each other.

According to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 410(a), the state flag = 1 indicating the A time saving gaming state is set for all "selected symbols of special symbols". Further, when the selected symbols z1, z4, z5 of the special symbols are selected, the general power operation pattern=02 and the variable display number of special symbols=10000 times are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, when "selected special symbols z2, z3, z6, z7", the general power operation pattern = 00, and the variable display number of special symbols = 10000 times is set as the time saving end condition.

Further, when the selected symbol z1 is a special symbol, the number of switching times = 1 is set, and when the selected symbols z4 and z5 are special symbols, the number of switching times = 5 is set. Although described in detail later, the "number of switching times" is the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed at which the "fifth time-saving game state" to be described later switches to the "sixth time-saving game state".

In this way, in this embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the system is configured to shift to the "fifth time-saving gaming state" or "sixth time-saving gaming state" depending on the selected special symbol. There is.
Here, after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, the "sixth time-saving game state" is entered at the first transition rate (40%) depending on the selection rate of the selected special symbol (see Figure 407). The state shifts to the "fifth time-saving gaming state" at the second shift rate (60%). Alternatively, in the second special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the third transition rate ( 100%), it moves to the "5th time saving gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state from the second route triggered by the small winning ends, depending on the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol (see Figure 407), At the fourth transition rate (80%), the game shifts to the "fifth time-saving gaming state", and at the fifth transition rate (20%), it shifts to the "sixth time-saving gaming state".

In addition, when transitioning to the "6th time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state (when the general power operation pattern = 00 is determined), the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition is It is possible to set 10,000 times, which is the number of shortening times per hour.

In addition, when transitioning to the "fifth time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state (when the normal power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition is set. 10,000 times, which is the number of 2-hour reductions, can be set.

The above-mentioned first time saving number and second time saving number of variable display times of the special symbol = 10,000 times are the number of times that cannot be realized in one day's game, and correspond to a substantially infinite number of times. Therefore, when the state shifts to the "fifth time-saving game state" or the "sixth time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state is not ended except by shifting to the jackpot game state. Therefore, after the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state of the fifth time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state are endlessly looped unless the RAM is cleared. That is, after the first jackpot gaming state, the system is configured such that the normal gaming state does not occur except during the jackpot gaming state. Note that the first number of time reductions and the second number of time reductions are not limited to 10,000, as long as they are substantially equivalent to an infinite number of times, and the first number of time reductions and the second number of time reductions may be different. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 410(b), the game state related setting table 2 that is referred to after the end of the variable display of the special symbols per time saver includes a "status flag" for the selected symbol (time saver symbol) of the special symbol. , "normal power operation pattern" and "time-saving termination condition" are associated with each other.

According to the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 410(b), the state flag = 3 indicating the C time-saving gaming state is set for all "selected symbols of special symbols". Further, when the "selected special symbol z10" is selected, the normal power operation pattern = 00 and the variable display number of special symbols = 950 times are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, in the case of "special symbol selection symbol z20", the general power operation pattern = 02 and the variable display number of special symbols = 950 times are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, when "special symbol selection symbol z30" is selected, the general power operation pattern = 01 and the variable display number of special symbols = 950 times are set as the time saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, the "first time saving game state", "second time saving game state", or "first time saving game state" is selected depending on the selected special symbol. 3. It is configured to shift to a "3-hour saving gaming state".
Here, after the end of the variable display of the special symbols per time saving, the transition to the "first time saving game state" is made at the sixth transition rate (70%) depending on the selection rate of the selected special symbol (see Figure 407). , at the seventh transition rate (15%), it transitions to the "second time-saving gaming state", and at the eighth transition rate (15%), it shifts to the "third time-saving gaming state".

In addition, when transitioning to the "first time saving gaming state" after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 00 is determined), the "variable display of special symbols" of the time saving end condition 950 times, which is the third time saving number, can be set as "number of times".

In addition, when transitioning to the "second time saving gaming state" after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable display of special symbols" of the time saving end condition 950 times, which is the fourth time saving number, can be set as "number of times".

In addition, when transitioning to the "3rd time saving gaming state" after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 01 is determined), the "variable display of special symbols" of the time saving end condition 950 times, which is the fifth time saving number, can be set as "number of times".

The above-mentioned third time saving number, fourth time saving number, and fifth time saving number of variable display times of the special symbol = 950 times are from C time saving gaming state (1st to 3rd working time saving gaming state) to B working time saving gaming state (4th time saving gaming state). The number of times that the game can be shifted to (time-saving gaming state) is set. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), the C time-saving game state is not ended except by transitioning to the jackpot game state or transitioning to the B time-saving game state. Furthermore, as will be described later, when the game shifts to the B time-saving gaming state, it is guaranteed that the game will essentially shift to the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, after shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, it is configured so that it does not return to the normal gaming state again.

Further, the fourth time saving number in the second time saving gaming state is also set to the number of times at which transition to the jackpot gaming state is guaranteed. Note that the fourth time saving number is not limited to 950 as long as it is a number that is guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 410(c), the game state related setting table 3 that is referred to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value includes "state flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "time saving end condition". are associated.

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 410(c), when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value (950 times), the state flag indicating B time saving game state = 2, normal power operation pattern = 02 , the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed = 950 times is set as the time saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the ceiling value, it is configured to shift to the "fourth time-saving game state". The variable number of times the special symbol is displayed here can be set to 950 times, which is the sixth time saving number.

The above-mentioned sixth time saving number is set to a number that is guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, it is virtually guaranteed that the player will shift to the jackpot gaming state. Note that the sixth time saving number is not limited to 950, as long as it is a number that is guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state.

The design of the first to eighth transition rates in each time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate by changing the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 407.
However, after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, the 7th transition rate to transition to the "second time saving gaming state" may be lower than the 6th transition rate to transition to the "first time saving gaming state". desirable.

Further, the number of times set as the "time saving end condition" from the first time reduction number to the sixth time reduction number can be freely changed in design as appropriate.
However, the first time saving number and the second time saving number are substantially equivalent to an infinite number of times, and the third time saving number and the fifth time saving number are transitions to the B time saving game state (fourth time saving game state). It is desirable that the number of times is possible, and that the fourth time saving number and the sixth time saving number are numbers that are guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" is set as the "time-saving end condition", but in addition to the above-mentioned end conditions, "the variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" or "the number of small winnings" may also be set as a time-saving termination condition.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is provided with three types of normal power operation patterns (00, 01, 02) of low, medium, and high, but when configured without the "third time-saving game state", , the general voltage operation pattern=00 and the general voltage operation pattern=02 may be configured. In this case, the "special symbol selection symbol z30" that triggers the setting of the general power activation pattern = 01 changes the gaming state in the same way as the "special symbol selection symbol z10" or "special symbol selection symbol z20". Just set it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table sets the gaming state regardless of the "gaming state at the time of winning", but the gaming state can be set according to the "gaming state at the time of winning". It may be configured to do so. When setting the gaming state according to the "gaming state at the time of winning", if the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state", it is better than when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state". It is also desirable to set the game state so that it is easy for the player to shift to an advantageous gaming state. For example, in the gaming state related setting table that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state, when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving gaming state", the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 410(a) , Although the general power activation pattern = 00 or 02 is set according to the "selected special symbol", if the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state", all "selected special symbols" In contrast, it is desirable to set the normal power operation pattern = 02 (advantageous).

[12-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
411 and 412 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the tenth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 411 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state and normal gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 412 is a variation pattern of special symbols in the RUSH gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a table. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 411 and 412 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table that determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation display time. "Special symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the special symbol, and at least the variation display time of the special symbol is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. , the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 411 and 412 shows the contents of the performance, etc. for the sake of clarity.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in either FIG. 411 or FIG. 412 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. Based on the result of the determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation display time are determined.

Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main CPU 201. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 10120, or a gaming ball entering the second starting port 10140. It is configured such that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern of the second special symbol triggered by this. Here, when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, they are also referred to as a first special symbol variation pattern command or a second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T shown in FIG. 411(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

As mentioned above, this embodiment is configured so that "time saving hit" can be determined only in the normal gaming state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 411(a) is When the result of the symbol hit determination process (win or loss) is a "time-saving hit", a dedicated special symbol fluctuation pattern (C1H to C4H) different from the "jackpot" is configured to be determined.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 411(a) shifts to the first time-saving game state when the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit". "Special symbol selection symbol z10" which is the trigger, "special symbol selection symbol z20" which is the trigger to move to the second time-saving gaming state, and "special symbol selection symbol which is the trigger to shift to the third time-saving gaming state" It is configured such that different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on the symbol z30.

In the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol (C1H to C4H) dedicated to when there is a "time-saving hit" can be used as a "card performance" or "RUSH" as a special performance when there is a "time-saving hit". It is possible to perform a "rushing effect". Furthermore, since the fluctuation pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" when it is a "time-saving hit", the transition pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" when it is a "time-saving hit". It is possible to perform a performance corresponding to the game state to be played.

In addition, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The pattern is configured to be determinable.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 411(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 411(b) shows that when the type of special symbol is the second special symbol, a special symbol variation pattern different from the first special symbol in the normal gaming state Constructed to be decidable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table J1 is configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state as the general game state, but the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state Different fluctuation pattern tables may be configured for the gaming state and the fifth time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving hit is not won in the general gaming state, but if the time-saving winning can be won even in the general gaming state, when it is the time-saving winning, a dedicated special symbol different from the jackpot changes. It is only necessary to configure the pattern so that it can be determined. Then, when there is a time-saving hit, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of special symbols that is different between the normal gaming state and the general gaming state, and as a special performance when there is a time-saving winning, a different production between the normal gaming state and the general gaming state. It is desirable to do so.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in RUSH gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 412(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when the RUSH gaming state is "the second time saving gaming state or the fourth time saving gaming state". The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 412(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined in the "fifth time-saving gaming state" as the RUSH gaming state.

Between the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 412(a) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 412(b), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 412(b) is When the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss) is a "lose", the special symbol variation pattern associated with the short special symbol variation display time can be determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the same fluctuation pattern table J2 was constructed in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state, different fluctuation patterns are created in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. A table may also be configured. Furthermore, the fifth time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table, or the fifth time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table. good.

[12-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 413 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "pre-reading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 10120 or the second starting port 10140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random number for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 413(a) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the gaming state as special symbol pre-reading related data.

As shown in FIG. 413(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 413(b) is an example of the structure of a pre-read command as the analyzed information by analyzing the starting information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 413(b), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

"Parameter 1" is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small win, time-saving win, or loss based on the random value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 413(c) shows the settings of parameter 1. This is an example of a table.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information that is obtained by analyzing the selected symbol of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value, and FIG. 413(d) is the setting table for parameter 2. This is an example.

"Parameter 3" is the fluctuation information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. This is an example of the setting table No. 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[12-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 414 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 414 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is used to determine the hit of the normal symbols obtained when the game ball passes through the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L. This is a table that is referred to when determining ``normal symbol win'' or ``normal symbol loss'' by lottery based on random numbers.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in Figure 414, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination corresponds to the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). It is specified and specified. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 414, and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 414, and if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 0 and 16383, "normal symbol hit" is determined. It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is “losing judgment value data” when the random number value for winning judgment of the acquired normal symbol is one of 16384 to 65535. ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and "normal symbol hit" is determined more easily than "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. In addition, it is desirable that the configuration is such that "normal symbol winning" is determined more easily than "normal symbol losing" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal symbol winning" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00. do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but as will be described later. By varying the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140 according to the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the degree of profit given to the player is varied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different between A time saving gaming state and B time saving gaming state depending on the type of time saving gaming state.

[12-3-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 415 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 415 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the winning/losing determination value data of the above-mentioned normal symbols and the symbol random number value of the normal symbols obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "normal symbol selection symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the regular symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 415 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”), the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. are defined in association with each other. Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 415, and determines the selected symbol of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 415, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 98, and selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol. If the symbol random number value is either 99 or 100, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

Note that the range (width) of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol from which the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is selected, that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting a selected symbol of a normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (in the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process) is used regardless of the game state. The selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected based on the result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that a symbol for normal symbol selection is selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 414) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 415), the selection symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[12-3-10. Second starting port opening pattern determination table]
FIG. 416 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for the second starting port in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 416 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The opening pattern determination table for the second starting port determines the operation mode of the shutter 10147 for normal electricity according to the gaming state (normal electricity activation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal pattern when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit. It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140.

In the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 416, the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern for the second starting port 10140 are defined in association with each other. ing.

In addition, the "opening pattern of the second starting port" is the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 10140, and the "first wait time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 10140. "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 10140, "second wait time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 10140, closing the second starting port 10140 and an "ending time" for ending the operation of the general power shutter 10147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide. Note that, upon determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140, the main CPU 201 transmits a second starting port opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second starting port 10140 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, there is an unfavorable "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 10140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 10140 is long. There are two types of open patterns: "Open pattern (91H02H)". Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port may include three or more types of opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.072 seconds). For this reason, even if it is determined that the symbol has hit normally, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 10140, It is structured so that it is essentially treated as a loss.

Further, the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (for example, 5.4 seconds) that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 10140.

According to the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 416, in the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the sixth time-saving game state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1" In addition, even when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port ("long opening pattern ( 91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, in the case of the third time saving game state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting hole, and the selection of the normal symbol When the symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port.

In addition, in the second time saving game state, the fourth time saving game state and the fifth time saving game state, even when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2". The configuration is such that, even at certain times, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port.

Therefore, the normal voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short open pattern" is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates the state in which the "long open pattern" and the "short open pattern" are easily determined. When the normal voltage operation pattern = 02, the ``long open pattern'' is easier to determine and the ``short open pattern'' is difficult to determine than when the general voltage operation pattern = 01. It shows the status.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in Figure 416, there are "Random value for normal symbol hit determination (see Figure 414)" and "Random value for normal symbol (see Figure 415)". The "long open probability" calculated by summing up the "long open pattern" is shown as a reference. In this embodiment, when the normal operation pattern = 00, although the normal symbol hit is 1/4, the long open pattern is never determined, so the "long open probability" is 0. . In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the selection rate per normal symbol is 1/4.0, and the selection rate of the selected symbol "f2" of the normal symbol that determines the long open pattern is 2/101. Therefore, the "long open probability" is approximately 1/202.0. In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the number per normal symbol is 1/4.0, and the long opening pattern is determined by all the selected symbols of the normal symbols (101/101). The "long open probability" is 1/4.0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for general electric power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second starting ports is determined, and the second starting port 10140 is opened, the second starting port 10140 is opened. When three game balls enter the opening 10140, the opening pattern of the second starting opening ends (the second starting opening 10140 is closed).

[12-3-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 417 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 417 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the normal symbol, and at least the variation display time of the normal symbol is determined.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 417, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the random value for production of the normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 417 shows the content of the performance, etc. for the sake of clarity.

FIG. 417(a) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state,
FIG. 417(b) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state in the general game state,
FIG. 417(c) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state,
FIG. 417(d) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state,
FIG. 417(e) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving gaming state in the RUSH gaming state.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the normal symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIG. 417 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined normal symbol variation pattern table, and changes the normal symbol variation based on the selected symbol of the normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol are determined. After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 417(a) has the longest normal symbol than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern tables F2 to F5 shown in FIGS. 417(b) to 417(e). It is configured to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern (00H, 01H) of the normal symbol associated with the fluctuation display time of.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state and the sixth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(b) has the following values than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 417(a). It is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (10H, 11H) associated with short normal symbol fluctuation display times.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(c) is based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state and the sixth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(b). is also configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (20H, 21H, 22H, 23H) associated with short normal symbol fluctuation display times.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(d) is based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(c). is also configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (30H, 31H, 32H, 33H) associated with short normal symbol fluctuation display times.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(e) is based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 417(d). is also configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) associated with short normal symbol fluctuation display times.

That is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state and the sixth time-saving gaming state, the regular symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state, the second The average fluctuation display time of the normal symbols becomes relatively shorter in the order of the normal symbol variation pattern table F4 in the time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the normal symbol variation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving gaming state. , a variation pattern table of normal symbols is constructed.

In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The variation pattern (23H) of the normal symbol in which the ``telop effect'' is executed is configured to be determinable. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 includes a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selected symbol f1" is selected. Although it is configured to be determinable, it may also be configured such that the variation pattern of the normal symbols in which the "telop effect" is executed can be determined only when the "selected symbol f2 of the normal symbols" is selected. Furthermore, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 is configured to be able to determine the normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection symbol f3" is selected. It's okay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols in the RUSH gaming state is combined with the fluctuation pattern table F4 of normal symbols in the second time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols in the fifth time-saving gaming state. Although configured separately from the pattern table F5, the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state may be configured with a common normal symbol variation pattern table.

[12-3-12. Game stop command determination table]
FIG. 418 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 418 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000 pieces), the game will be stopped in principle. However, if the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value during a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state, the game will be stopped after the small winning gaming state or jackpot gaming state ends. Become.

In addition, the "game stop command" is a command that transmits information regarding the stop of the game according to the increased number of game balls (MY) to the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub-control circuit 300 uses the game stop command By receiving this, it becomes possible to issue a "game stop notice" to the effect that the game will be stopped or a "game stop notification" to the effect that the game is in a stopped state in advance on the display device 7 or the like.

In the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 418, "game stop function operation management phase", "game stop notice start condition", and "game stop command" are associated.

Here, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is set based on the increased number (MY) of game balls, and the game is stopped. This is information indicating the status of the function.

As will be described later, in this "game stop function activation management phase", when the increased number of game balls (MY) is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is set to 00H. is in the "first counting range (85000-89999)" from the initial boundary value or more to less than the first boundary value, "01H" is set, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first boundary value. When the count is in the "second counting range (90000 to 94999)" from above the regulation value to below the regulation value, "02H" is set. In addition, if the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the "third counting range (95000~)" that is greater than the regulation value, when the game is in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state (before the game stop state). is set to "03H", and when the game is not in a small win game state or a jackpot game state (during a game stop state), "04H" is set.

In addition, the "increased number of game balls (MY)" is calculated by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls). It is a number. Although details will be described later, the "increased number of game balls (MY)" corresponds to the "difference ball number counter" (increase in the number of game balls (MY) = value of the difference ball number counter).

In this way, the increased number of game balls (MY) is determined by the "initial counting range (84,999 or less)," the "first counting range (85,000 to 89,999)," and the "second counting range (90,000 to 94,999)." )" and "third counting range (95000~)", which can be identified by the game stop function operation management phase. Note that the values of the initial boundary value, the first boundary value, and the regulation value can be changed in design as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 418, the game stop command determination table indicates that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the initial count range (84999 or less), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 00H, the game The configuration is such that a stop command is not determined and no notification regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) is made.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 418 shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the first counting range (85000 to 89999), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 01H, If the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as "first game stop notice start condition") in the first counting range is satisfied, the game stop command = 01H that can execute the first game stop notice is executed. configured to be determined.

The first game stop notice based on the game stop command=01H will be continuously executed until the "first game stop notice end condition" described later is satisfied.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 418 shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the second counting range (90000 to 94999), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 02H, If the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as "second game stop notice start condition") in the second counting range is satisfied, the game stop command = 02H that can execute the second game stop notice is executed. configured to be determined.

The second game stop notice based on the game stop command = 02H has a notification mode that is partially different from the first game stop notice, and is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value. become.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the first game stop notice and the second game stop notice are given in different notification modes, they may be in a common notification mode. The notification mode of the game stop notice will be described in detail later.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. When the function operation management phase=03H, the game stop command=03H that can execute the third game stop notice is determined.

The third game stop notice based on the game stop command = 03H has a notification mode that is partially different from the first game stop notice and the second game stop notice. will continue to run until the end of the process).

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. When the operation management phase=04H, the game stop command=04H that can execute the game stop notification is determined.

The game stop notification based on the game stop command=04H is in a notification mode different from the game stop notice, and will be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared by the backup clear switch 176.

Here, as shown in FIG. 418, the "first game stop notice start condition" in the first counting range is a jackpot game state of the selected symbol z4 of the special symbol during a jackpot game state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol. During the jackpot game state of the special symbol selection symbol z5, either the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), the fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state). It is set to be in the gaming state.

The second time-saving gaming state, the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the fifth time-saving gaming state are all RUSH gaming states, and when the player shifts to the RUSH gaming state, it becomes easier to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the player can earn a large amount of gaming value ( This is a game state in which you can expect to win a game ball. During the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol, during the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z4 of the special symbol, and during the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z5 of the special symbol, the fifth time-saving game is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the player can expect to obtain a large amount of gaming value (game balls).
Therefore, the "first game stop notice start condition" in the first counting range sets a gaming state in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of gaming value (gaming balls). Therefore, when the game state is such that the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), execution of the game stop notice can be started in advance of the second count range.

The "second game stop notice start condition" in the second counting range is first branched by the executed flag. This "executed flag" is a flag for determining whether or not the first game stop notice has been executed, and the executed flag = 0 indicates that the first game stop notice has not been executed. The executed flag=1 indicates that the first game stop notice has already been executed.

Then, as the "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range, when the executed flag = 0, the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the first boundary value of 90000. That is set.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has not been executed, the number of game balls will increase as game balls enter the first starting port 10120, general winning port 122, etc. and predetermined prize balls are paid out. Even when the number (MY) reaches the first boundary value, execution of the game stop notice will be started.

In addition, as the "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range, when the executed flag = 1, during all jackpot game states not limited to the selected symbols of special symbols, the second time-saving game state (RUSH gaming state), a fourth time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state), and a fifth time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will start when the player enters a gaming state in which he or she can expect to obtain a predetermined gaming value (gaming balls). will be done.

On the other hand, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the number of game balls will increase as the game balls enter the first starting port 10120, the general prize winning port 122, etc., and the predetermined prize balls are paid out. Even when (MY) reaches the first boundary value, execution of the game stop notice is not started. For this reason, although game balls enter the first starting port 10120, general winning port 122, etc., a predetermined prize ball is paid out, and the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value. , even if the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the first boundary value again due to the firing of game balls (such as when going back and forth between the first counting range and the second counting range), When the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice is not started, and the trouble caused by the game stop notice can be eliminated.

[12-4. Main control processing]
In the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include the main control main processing, special symbol control processing, and normal symbol control processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the system timer interrupt processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the main control main processing, the special symbol control processing, and the normal symbol control processing will be explained, and the explanation of other processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[12-4-1. Main control main processing]
Next, main processing (main control main processing) controlled by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 419 and 420. Note that FIGS. 419 and 420 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S10001). In step S10001, if the main CPU 201 determines that the power outage signal bit is "0" (YES in step S10001), the main CPU 201 determines that a power outage is being detected, and performs the determination process in step S10001. repeat.

In step S10001, if the main CPU 201 determines that the power outage signal bit is not "0" (NO in step S10001), the main CPU 201 determines that power outage is not being detected and proceeds to step S10002.

Next, in step S10002, the main CPU 201 performs stack pointer setting processing for the gaming area. Here, for example, the final address of the stack area (gaming area) +1 is set in the stack pointer. If the stack is used during the subsequent processing, after subtracting 1 from the stack pointer, store the register value etc. at that address, and from then on, similarly, move the stack area (gaming area) to the address with the larger address value. Use them in order from small to small areas.

Next, in step S10003, internal register initialization processing is performed. Here, for example, the built-in registers are initialized by referring to the built-in register initial setting data table. Further, the start address (upper side) "F0" H of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register (for example, the Q register).

Thereafter, in step S10004, state information (on/off state) of the backup clear switch 176 at startup and state information of the setting key 174 inserted into the setting key insertion slot are stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register). The status is stored so that the status can be checked later in the startup status check process.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing (step S10005). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a startup wait process on the sub control circuit 300 side. The startup waiting time (wait period) is approximately 12000 msec. Also, during this startup waiting time, the main CPU 201 performs processing for checking the generation of an interrupt request signal (XINT), processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and processing for outputting a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This processing is performed using a timeout register. Also, even when interrupts are disabled, for example, the timer counter can be controlled to be updated, and a timeout register can be used to determine with one instruction whether or not the timer counter has timed out, and the process can be branched. It is also possible to perform control such that the processing branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether or not a timer interrupt is performed.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs RAM access setting processing (step S10006). In this process, the main CPU 201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs designated area CRC inspection processing (step S10007). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a CRC check on the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 203 by calculating the CRC. Here, if it is determined that there is an abnormality (error) in the CRC check, a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality is set in a predetermined register (for example, B register), and if it is determined to be normal in the CRC check, sets a flag "0" in a predetermined register (for example, the B register) to indicate that there is no abnormality.

Note that the CRC check is, for example, a process in which data in a designated area is divided by a specific predetermined value and the remainder is used as a value for checking whether or not there is an abnormality. This check value is calculated at different times, and if they do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (an abnormality has occurred in the position or value of the data).

Next, in step S10008, the main CPU 201 performs startup state check processing. In this process, the startup state is determined depending on whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 203 according to a CRC check, the operation of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not the power is restored during a setting change. The clear range of the main RAM 203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined activation state.

Here, if it is determined that there is an abnormality (error) in the CRC check, the startup state is determined as "RAM abnormality", the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range at abnormality", and it is impossible to return to the game. Perform error handling. In the game return impossible error process, the WDT clear process and the restart process are repeated in an infinite loop, and, for example, the performance display monitor 170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and the game is stopped. Although the clear range is set as the RAM clear range during abnormality, the game may be stopped without setting this clear range (RAM clear range during abnormality).

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off", and the setting key 174 is "off", the startup state is determined as "recovery from power failure", and the RAM is The clear range is set to the "RAM clear range upon recovery from power failure" and the process is terminated.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off", and the setting key 174 is "on", the startup state is determined to be "checking settings", and the RAM The clear range is set to the "RAM clear range upon recovery from power failure" and the process is terminated.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on", and the setting key 174 is "on", the startup state is determined to be "settings changing", and the RAM is The "RAM clear range when changing settings" is set as the clear range, and the process ends.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on", and the setting key 174 is "off", the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", and the RAM is cleared. The "RAM clear range when changing settings" is set as the range, and the process ends.

Next, in step S10009, the main CPU 201 performs specified range clear processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 clears the RAM clear range set in step S10008 above.

Here, if the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared.

Further, the "RAM clear range when changing settings" includes at least a "status flag" and "normal power operation pattern" regarding information on the gaming state, and a "gaming stop function operation management phase" which will be described later.
Therefore, when the startup state is determined as "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared, and the status flag and general power operation pattern are cleared. The initial state "normal gaming state" is set. Furthermore, if the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "game stop function activation management phase" is cleared by clearing the "RAM clear range when changing settings". The game stop state based on the increased number of game balls can be canceled. That is, by "RAM clearing" by the backup clear switch 176, the initial state "normal gaming state" is set, and the gaming stop state can be canceled.

Note that the "RAM clear range when changing settings" may include "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", and "MY determination counter", which will be described later.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the common "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared. When the startup state is determined as "Settings changing", the configuration is configured so that "first RAM clear range" is cleared, and when the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", "1st RAM clear range" is cleared. The configuration may also be such that the "second RAM clear range" is cleared. Even with this configuration, when the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", the "second RAM clear range" includes "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", "game stop", etc. It is desirable that at least a "functional operation management phase" be included.

Next, in step S10010, the main CPU 201 sets the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the area outside the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register (for example, the HL register), and refers to this register. Then, data for initialization at power-on is stored in the work area.

Next, in step S10011, the main CPU 201 performs data storage processing to store data of the data table for power-on initialization in the storage target area using the address of the data table for power-on initialization set in step S10010. I do. This data storage process is similar to the data storage process (see FIG. 121) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10012, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs setting update and setting change processing when the setting key 174 is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and is in the "on" state. This setting change confirmation process is similar to the setting change confirmation process (see FIGS. 122 and 123) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10013, the main CPU 201 performs a game return process. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing upon power-off recovery according to the startup state when the gaming machine is powered on (at startup). This game return process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S10014, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. This process disables maskable interrupts. In this process, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt disabling instruction, and as a result, the value of the interrupt permission register 1 becomes "0" and the value of the interrupt permission register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disabling instruction is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S10015, the main CPU 201 performs power interruption determination processing. In this power outage determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage is detected (that is, whether or not XINT is detected), and performs a power outage setting process if a power outage is detected. In the power outage setting process, the main CPU 201 stores the power outage detection flag in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203, performs CRC calculation regarding the gaming area and out of area area of the main RAM 203, and stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, HL register). Thereafter, by transmitting a RAM access prohibition command to a predetermined register, access to the main RAM 203 is prohibited and the system waits until the power is cut off. This power cutoff setting process is similar to the power cutoff setting process (see FIGS. 125 and 126) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10016, the main CPU 201 performs initial random value update processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the initial value random number for special symbol determination.

After this, in step S10017, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total division processing. This process becomes a process for an area outside the area by being called by an outside area process call instruction. The main CPU 201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. This performance display monitor total division process is similar to the performance display monitor total division process (see FIGS. 127 and 128) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10018, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. This process enables maskable interrupts. Here, both the value of interrupt permission register 1 and the value of interrupt permission register 2 are set to "1".

Next, in step S10019, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 203 (current interrupt counter count value) is "0". Determine whether Note that the value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 every time in system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 439), which will be described later, and becomes "3" when the system cycle time elapses. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", the determination in step S10019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", the determination in step S10019 is "YES". The determination is "NO".

In step S10019, if the main CPU 201 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in step S10019), the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S10014 and performs the processes from step S10014 onwards. .

On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines in step S10019 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in step S10019), the main CPU 201 performs timer counter update processing in step S10020. In this process, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (the value of the interrupt counter) is performed three times. Through this processing, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main processing is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, a 6 msec interrupt prohibition period (processing period from step S10014 to step S10018) is provided before execution of various processing related to game control to be described later. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The value may be set to .

Next, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing (step S10021). In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs command transmission/reception processing for payout control. This main control command transmission/reception process is similar to the main control command transmission/reception process (see FIG. 129) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing (step S10022). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a control process for the special symbol game. This special symbol control process will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S10023). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. This normal symbol control process will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing (step S10024). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, second special symbol display LED, normal symbol display LED, pending display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing (step S10025). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for external terminal board pulse signals, processing for setting output data, and the like. Thereafter, in step S10026, the main CPU 201 performs a process of generating a sight-fire test signal. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing (step S10027). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting (transferring) output data to an output port and a process of outputting the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing (step S10028). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a firing position determination process (if there is a change in the firing position, performs a transmission reservation process for a firing position command), a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, performs a game abnormality detection command transmission reservation process). processing), and performs a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, performs a transmission reservation process of a payout abnormality detection command).

After the process in step S10028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S10014 and performs the process from step S10014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main processing of this embodiment, after startup and before executing the wait processing (step S10005), the state information of the backup clear switch 176 and the state information of the setting key 174 are saved (step S10004). If such processing is provided, for example, even if the setting key 174 is operated (on/off) in the setting key insertion slot during the wait period, this status information will be secured when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operating status of the backup clear switch 176 and the operating status of the setting key 174 at the time of startup can be grasped more reliably, and operations on the gaming machine can be accurately identified. Can be done.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, before executing various processing related to game control (processing after step S10020), a 6 msec interrupt prohibition period (processing period from step S10014 to step S10018) is set. ), and power outage processing (step S10015), initial value random number updating processing (step S10016), performance display monitor total division processing (step S10017), etc. are performed within the interrupt prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball payout performance of the game and values that are totaled throughout the game is performed in the interrupt-prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt-prohibited section, game management becomes easier, the processing performed by the main control circuit 200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 200 is reduced. be able to.

[12-4-2. Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the game return process performed during the main control main process will be described. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing an example of a game return process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10040, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the startup state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10041.

Here, in this embodiment, the startup state value includes five state values: "RAM abnormality", "recovery from power failure", "setting confirmation in progress", "setting in progress", and "RAM clear". There is. However, when the value of the startup state is "RAM abnormal", an infinite loop is repeated in the startup state check process of step S10008, and the process does not proceed to this process. Therefore, in this process, values for the four startup states are loaded: "recovering from power outage", "checking settings", "changing settings", and "clearing RAM".

In S10041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation state is a value indicating "recovery from power failure". If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is a value indicating "recovery from power outage", the process moves to S10042, and if it is determined that the value of the startup state does not indicate "recovery from power outage". If so, the process moves to S10043.

In S10042, the main CPU 201 performs second initial value setting processing. In this second initial value setting process, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read out, and each read data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Thereafter, the game permission flag is set to ON, the game is allowed to play, and the transmission reservation process of the "power failure recovery command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10046.

In S10043, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup state is a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked". If the main CPU 201 determines that the startup state value is a value indicating "settings changing" or "settings checking", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10044, and determines that the startup state value is "settings changing" or "settings checking". If it is determined that the value does not indicate "setting confirmation in progress" (that is, if it is determined that the value indicates RAM clearing), the process moves to S10045.

In S10044, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a "setting operation command." The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the system timer interrupt process. Also, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10046.

In S10045, the main CPU 201 performs first initial value setting processing. In this first initial value setting process, initial data is generated, and each generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Thereafter, the game permission flag is set on, the game permission state is entered, and the "initialization command" transmission reservation process is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10046.

In S10047, the main CPU 201 performs game stop function initial value setting processing. In this game stop function initial value setting process, the "game stop function activation management phase", "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", and "MY determination counter" stored in the area outside the main RAM 203 are ” and other initial settings. The details of this game stop function initial value setting process will be described in detail later. After executing the process of S10047, the main CPU 201 ends the game return process and returns the process to the main control main process.

[12-4-3. Game stop function initial value setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the game stop function initial value setting process performed during the game return process will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing an example of the game stop function initial value setting process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10047-1, the main CPU 201 performs protection register saving processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-2.

In S10047-2, the main CPU 201 clears the "number of acquired game balls" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-3.

Here, the "number of game balls acquired" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the various prize openings. This is information for temporarily storing the information and adding the stored number of prize balls to the "difference ball number counter".

In S10047-3, the main CPU 201 clears the "MY determination counter" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S10047-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-4.

Here, the "MY determination counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for determining the increased number of game balls. As described later, this "MY determination counter" corresponds to information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). For example, if the difference ball number counter is 89000 to 89999, the MY determination counter = 89, and if the difference ball number counter is 90000 to 90999, the MY determination counter = 90.

In S10047-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-5.

As mentioned above, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is set based on the increased number of game balls, and the game stop function is set based on the increased number of game balls. This is information indicating the status of.

In this "gaming stop function operation management phase", when the difference ball number counter is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, and when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set. "01H" is set when the difference ball number counter is between 90,000 and 94,999, which is less than the first boundary value and less than the regulation value (second counting range). In some cases, "02H" is set.
In addition, when the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more), "03H" is set when the small hit game state or the jackpot game state (before the game stop state), and the small win game state is set. Alternatively, when the game is not in a jackpot game state (in a game stop state), "04H" is set.

Note that the initial boundary value (85000), the first boundary value (90000), and the regulation value (95000) can be changed in design as appropriate. Furthermore, a plurality of boundary values (initial boundary value, first boundary value) may be eliminated and a single boundary value may be used. If one boundary value is used, it is desirable to use the first boundary value described above.

In S10047-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is 03H or more (03H or 04H). If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is 03H or more, it moves the process to S10047-6, and determines that the value of the "game stop function operation management phase" is not 03H or more. If it is determined, the process moves to S10047-7.

In S10047-6, the main CPU 201 clears the "game stop function operation management phase" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203 (that is, sets the "game stop function operation management phase" to 01). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-7.

In S10047-7, the main CPU 201 clears the "difference ball number counter" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10047-8.

Here, the "difference ball number counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for counting the increased number of game balls (MY). This "difference ball number counter" corresponds to the number obtained by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls). It turns out.

In S10047-8, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S10047-1, and ends the game stop function initial value setting process.

As described above, according to the game stop function initial value setting process of this embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (after the power is restored), the "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", "MY The "judgment counter" will be cleared.

In addition, if the difference ball number counter is less than the regulation value (94999 or less) after the gaming machine is powered on (after power outage recovery), the "gaming stop function activation management phase" is cleared and the difference ball number counter is regulated. When the value is higher than the value (95000 or higher), the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is held. As a result, when the difference ball number counter exceeds the regulation value (game stop function operation management phase = 03H and 04H), the game stop state will be maintained unless the "RAM is cleared" by the backup clear switch 176. become.

[12-4-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process will be explained. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 423, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S10101. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S10101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10102.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S10101.

In S10102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S10101 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S10108, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S10103.

In S10103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of second special symbols. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S10104, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S10105. Move.

In S10104, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S10107, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10106. Move to.

In S10105, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted. The starting information will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1).

In S10106, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first The starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S10107, the main CPU 201 stores the special symbol starting information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol starting storage area and the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S10108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 424. After executing the process of S10103, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S10101 to S10108) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is stored as the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 11120 or the second It may also be a sequential variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the order of winnings (order of balls entering) into the starting hole 10140.

[12-4-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 423) will be described. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 424 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S10111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is 0 or not. The waiting time of this special symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the special symbol management process, and will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 423), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If determined, the process moves to S10112.

In S10112, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S10112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10113. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S10113 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S10112.

In S10113, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S10113 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 425. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10114.

In S10114, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S10114 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 426. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10115.

In S10115, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S10115 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 430. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10116.

In S10116, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game closed processing. This process of S10116 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 432. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10117.

In S10117, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S10117 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 433. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10118.

In S10118, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S10118 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 434. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10119.

In S10119, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S10119 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 435. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10120.

In S10120, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S10120 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 436.

After completing the processing of S10113 to S10120, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 423). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[12-4-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 425, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 424) will be described. FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10121, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 424), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "0", the process moves to S10122.

In S10122, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, a time-saving hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a hit determination of the special symbol is performed, and win/loss determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process in S10122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10123.

In S10123, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol and symbol designation command of the special symbol are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process in S10123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10124.

In addition, as mentioned above, when controlling to ignore the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving gaming state, even if "time-saving winning" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol that will stop the loss will be displayed. What is necessary is to determine the selected symbol and the symbol designation command.

In S10124, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a small hit. In this hit type determination process, if the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 408 is determined, and if the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The small hit type determination table shown in is determined. In addition, when setting the gaming status etc. based on the gaming status at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming status, the gaming status data at the time of winning, which indicates the gaming status at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small hit, is used as the main. It is set in the winning game state storage area of the RAM 203. After executing the process in S10124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10125.

In S10125, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. A special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10126.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T shown in FIG. 411(a) is determined by referring to the status flag and the general power operation pattern when the normal gaming state is in effect. . Then, referring to the fluctuation pattern table T of the determined special symbol, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Based on this, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined.
Also, if the state flag and normal power operation pattern are referred to and the normal game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, sixth time-saving game state) is selected, the special symbol shown in FIG. 411(b) is displayed. A variation pattern table J1 is determined. Then, with reference to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for production selection. Based on this, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined.
Also, with reference to the state flag and the general power operation pattern, if the second time saving game state or the fourth time saving game state is selected, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 412(a) is determined, and the fifth In the case of the time saving game state, a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 412(b) is determined. Then, referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern tables J2 and J3, the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), and the selected symbol of the special symbol. Determine the special symbol variation pattern command.

In S10126, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process that sets a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S10125 above is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S10126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10127.

In S10127, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 424) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S10127, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10128.

In S10128, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S10128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10129.

In S10129, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S10123 is performed. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S10125 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[13-4-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 426, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 424) will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 424), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S10142.

In S10142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol symbol determination time setting process that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol confirmation time setting process, the special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S10142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10143.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S10143, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In this time-saving management process, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, it is determined whether the time-saving gaming state is over or whether the time-saving gaming state B or the time-saving gaming state C is to be transitioned to. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 427. After executing the process in S10143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10144.

In S10144, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S10115 in FIG. 424) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S10144, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10145.

In S10145, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. This special symbol production stop command is composed of a first special symbol production stop command corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol production stop command corresponding to the second special symbol. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S10145, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 424).

[12-4-8. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display termination process will be described. FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10151, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol time-saving counter subtraction process that subtracts the special symbol time-saving counter.

Here, in this embodiment, the "time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is constituted by a "special symbol time saving counter" corresponding to the variable display number of special symbols of the time saving end condition. This "special symbol time saving counter" is decremented every time the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends.

In this special symbol time saving counter subtraction process, when the state flag is referred to and it is the time saving game state, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the special symbol time saving counter and update it. Note that in the normal gaming state, the special symbol time saving counter is not decremented. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10152.

In S10152, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not it is in the time-saving gaming status. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S10153, and if it determines that it is not in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S10154.

In S10153, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol time saving counter=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol time saving counter is 0, the process moves to S10154, and if it determines that the time saving counter is not 0, the process moves to S10155.

In S10154, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, as the time saving information, the special symbol time saving counter, the status flag, and the general power operation pattern are cleared (=set to 0). For this reason, when the time saving information is cleared, a transition is made to the normal gaming state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10155.

In S10155, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving game state transition determination processing.
In this B time-saving game state transition determination process, a "ceiling counter" is added to count the number of variable display times of special symbols to transition to the B time-saving game state, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed. Migration control will be performed. Details of this B time-saving game state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 428. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10156.

In S10156, the main CPU 201 performs C time-saving game state transition determination processing.
In this C time-saving game state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a time-saving win, and if it is a time-saving win, the transition control to the C time-saving game state is performed based on the selected symbol (time-saving symbol) of the special symbol. will be carried out. Details of this C time-saving game state transition determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 429. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10158.

In S10157, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag, and when the status flag indicating the A time-saving gaming state is 1, performs A time-saving gaming state transition determination processing. In this A time-saving game state transition determination process, if it is in the A time-saving game state and the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, the switching number counter that stores the number of switching times is subtracted by 1 and updated. . Then, when the switching number counter=0, the normal power operation pattern=00 is set. As a result, when in the A time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible to shift from the fifth time-saving gaming state to the sixth time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to change from a right-handed game mode to a left-handed game mode. Therefore, the number of times of switching is also the number of times of switching back to left-handed hitting due to the variable number of times of displaying the second special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10158.

In S10158, the gaming state is confirmed with reference to the state flag and the general power operation pattern, and a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10159.

In this embodiment, when the status flag=1, a 0th gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state is determined. In addition, when the status flag = 3 and the general electricity operation pattern = 00, a first game state designation command indicating the first time saving gaming state is determined, and when the status flag = 3 and the general electricity operation pattern = 02 In this case, a second game state designation command indicating the second time-saving game state is determined, and when the status flag = 3 and the general power operation pattern = 01, a third game state designation command indicating the third time-saving game state is determined. Determine. Moreover, when the status flag=2, a fourth game state designation command indicating the fourth time-saving game state is determined. In addition, when the status flag = 1 and the general electricity operation pattern = 02, a fifth game state designation command indicating the fifth time-saving gaming state is determined, and when the status flag = 1 and the general electricity operation pattern = 00 In this step, a sixth game state designation command indicating the sixth time-saving game state is determined.

In S10159, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation command transmission reservation process that sets the game state designation command determined in S10158 above in the transmission buffer. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After this process, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display termination process.

[12-4-9. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the B time-saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process will be described. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing an example of B time-saving game state transition determination processing in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10155-1, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process of incrementing the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter updating process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10155-2.

In S10155-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 950 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter = the ceiling value, it moves the process to S10155-3, and if it determines that the ceiling counter does not = the ceiling value, it ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and continues the process. Return to time saving management processing.

In S10155-3, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10155-4.

In S10155-4, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving gaming state setting processing for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, refer to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. Then, the number of time reductions (for example, 950 times) is set in the "special symbol time reduction counter" as the "B time reduction end condition". In addition, in the B time-saving game state setting process, normal power operation pattern=01 or 00 may be set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process.

[12-4-10. C Time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the C time-saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process will be described. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing an example of the C time-saving game state transition determination process in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10156-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the game is in the normal gaming status. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the normal gaming state, it moves the process to S10156-2, and if it determines that it is not in the normal gaming state, it ends the C time-saving gaming state transition determination process and switches the process to time-saving management. Return to processing.

In S10156-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time saving. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving is successful, the process moves to S10156-3, and if it is determined that the time saving is not successful, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state transition determination process and shifts the process to the time saving management process. return.

In S10156-3, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-saving gaming state setting process for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state. In this C time-saving game state setting process, with reference to the game state-related setting table 2 shown in FIG. In the electric operation pattern, set the number of time reductions (for example, 950 times) in the "special symbol time reduction counter" as "C time reduction end condition". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

In this way, in this embodiment, only when it is determined that a time saving win is achieved in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when it is determined that the time saving win has been won, it may be configured to be able to shift to the C time saving gaming state.

[12-4-11. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10161, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S10162.

In S10162, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbols corresponding to the jackpot. When the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S10163, and when it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S10172.

In S10163, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the jackpot game state is "the signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol". "Jackpot signal" is generated. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10164.

In S10164, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10165.

In S10165, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10166.

In S10166, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the number of time saving times. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10167.

In S10167, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10168.

In S10168, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the later-described grand prize opening preparation process will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10169.

In S10169, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10172, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether it is a small hit or not, that is, the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Determine whether it exists or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small hit, the process moves to S10173, and if it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, a loss), it moves the process to S10181.

In S10173, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In this external signal processing of the small hit, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the small winning game state is "the selected symbol of the special symbol. Generates a corresponding small hit signal. Thereafter, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10174.

In S10174, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning start preparation setting process. In this small hit start preparation setting process, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol" with reference to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit of the number of hits. Next, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, in the small hit start preparation setting process, the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156 based on the "selected special symbol" with reference to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. The determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning prize control process regarding the V shutter solenoid 11160 which opens and closes the V winning opening 10156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 439) which will be described later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10175.

In S10175, the main CPU 201 performs small hit status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10177.

In S10177, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10178.

In S10178, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the small winning game closing process to be described later will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10179.

In S10179, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S10169, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10181, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 431. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-12. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 431, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process will be described. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10191, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10192.

In S10192, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the start information stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10193.

In S10193, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process.

[12-4-13. Small hit game closed processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 432, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small winning game closing process in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10201, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". ”, the process moves to S10202.

In S10202, the main CPU 201 loads the "small hit opening number counter value". “Small hit opening number counter” is a counter that counts the number of small winning openings. Note that the count value of the small hit opening number counter (small winning opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to SS10203.

In S10203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the number of small winning openings. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the number of openings for a small hit, it moves the process to S10209, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit for the number of openings for a small hit, it moves the process to S10204.

In S10204, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 10151 (number of winnings in the second big winning hole 10151) is not the maximum number of winning balls in the small winning game state. In this process, whether the value of the second big winning hole counter counted by the second big winning hole count switch 10152 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the second big winning hole 10151 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 10151 is not the maximum number of prizes, it moves the process to S10205, and determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 10151 is the maximum number of prizes. If so, the process moves to S10209.

In S10205, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10206.

In S10206, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening setting process to open the second big winning opening 10151. In the opening setting process of the second big winning opening, the small winning opening type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big winning hole 10151 is determined this time, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole opening control data for opening the second big winning hole 10151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 10155. As a result, the second big prize opening 10151 will be opened. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10207.

In S10207, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small winning game closing process is completed, the small winning game opening process to be described later will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10208.

In S10208, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10209, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 10156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 10157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S10210, and if it determines that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10218.

In S10210, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to SS10211.

In S10211, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10212.

In S10212, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route will start from the second round game. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10213.

In S10213, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10214.

In S10214, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time saving counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10215.

In S10215, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10216.

In S10216, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process will be performed after the small winning game closed process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10217.

In S10217, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S10197, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10218, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. The waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10219.

In S10219, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10220.

In S10220, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 431 is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-14. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 433, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during opening of the small winning game in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10221, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small winning game opening process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". ”, the process moves to S10222.

In S10222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 10151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the second big prize opening opening setting process (see FIG. 432) has elapsed. When the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 10151 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 10151 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10223.

In S10223, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening closing setting process to close the second big winning opening 10151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the current closing time of the second big prize opening 10151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 10151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 10155. As a result, the second grand prize opening 10151 will be closed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10224.

In S10224, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the above-mentioned small win game closing process will be performed after the small win game opening process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-15. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 434, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10231, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big prize opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". ”, the process moves to S10232.

In S10232, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10233.

In S10233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit value, the process moves to S10234, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit value, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10238.

In S10234, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. (Ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10235.

In S10235, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state ending process to be described later will be performed after the big winning opening preparation process is finished. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10236.

In S10236, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10237.

In S10237, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10238, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10239.

In S10239, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning hole opening setting process to open the first big winning hole 10131. In this first jackpot opening setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 408 is referred to, and the current number of rounds (round counter value) is The maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 10131 in the round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 10131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 10135. As a result, the first big prize opening 10131 will be opened. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10240.

In S10240, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the big winning hole opening control process will be performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10241.

In S10241, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10242.

In S10242, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-16. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 435, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". ”, the process moves to S10252.

In S10252, when the first grand prize opening 10131 is opened, the main CPU 201 determines whether the winning number of game balls that entered the first big prize opening 10131 in one round is the maximum winning number. do. In this process, whether the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 10132 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the first big winning hole 10131 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S10252 that the number of winnings in the first grand prize opening 10131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it moves the process to S10253, and determines that the number of winnings in the first grand prize opening 10131 is the maximum number of winnings. If so, the process moves to S10254.

In S10253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 10131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see FIG. 434) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S10133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 10131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 10131 has elapsed, the process moves to S10254.

In S10254, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning opening closing setting process to close the first big winning opening 10131. In this first big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The closing time of the first big prize opening 10131 in the round is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole closing control data for closing the first big winning hole 10131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 10135. As a result, the first big prize opening 10131 will be closed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10255.

In S10255, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process will be performed again. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10256.

In S10256, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10257.

In S10257, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-17. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 436, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state termination process in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10261, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S10262.

In S10262, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10263.

In S10263, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot state setting processing to set the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. Set the "special symbol time saving counter" corresponding to the number of times of display. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10264.

In this embodiment, the status flag is set to 1 indicating the A time-saving gaming status.
Further, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z1", the normal power operation pattern = 02, the special symbol time saving counter = 10000, and the switching number counter = 1 are set.
Further, when the selected special symbols are "z2" and "z3", the normal power operation pattern=00 and the special symbol time saving counter=10000 are set.
Further, when the selected special symbols are "z4" and "z5", the normal power operation pattern = 02, the special symbol time saving counter = 10000, and the switching number counter = 5 are set.
Further, when the selected special symbols are "z6" and "z7", the normal power operation pattern=00 and the special symbol time saving counter=10000 are set.

In S10264, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 431 is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-18. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 437, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 437, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 437 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S10300, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time of a normal symbol is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time of a normal symbol is 0. moves the process to S10301.

In S10301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S10310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S10201.

In S10310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S10210 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol determination processing, second starting port opening pattern determination processing, normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing, etc. are performed, but for details, This will be described later with reference to FIG. 438. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S10220.

In S10320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S10220 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S10230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S10330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S10330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S10340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss) of the stopped and displayed normal symbols. If the main CPU 201 determines that the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol hit, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3" and determines that the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss. If it is determined that it corresponds to , the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In S10340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S10340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S10350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. In accordance with the operation of the opening pattern of the second starting port, the normal power shutter 10147 is operated to open and close the second starting port 10140. Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls for general electricity use enter the second starting port 10140, or when all the operations of the determined opening pattern of the second starting port are completed, the second starting port 10140 is opened. It is brought into the closed state, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4", and the normal electric accessory opening process is completed.

In S10350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S10350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol winning end process, various data set in the normal electric accessory opening process of S10340 are cleared. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the process to the main control main process.

[12-4-19. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 438, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S10211).

If it is determined in S10311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10312.

In S10312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10313.

In S10313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10314.

In S10314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10315.

In S10315, the main CPU 201 performs a second starting port opening pattern determination process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10316.

In the second starting port opening pattern determination process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the second starting port is determined based on the selected pattern of the normal pattern and the normal pattern.

In S10316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Determine. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 417 and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10317.

In S10317, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time determined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process described above is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. Let it start. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10318.

In S10318, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (Figure 437) will be held. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10319.

In S10319, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

[12-4-20. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 439. This process is called when a timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) occurs, based on the PTC2 timeout interrupt entry address (program address) defined in the setting area corresponding to this interrupt. This is executed, for example, at a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle). FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing an example of stem timer interrupt processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10411, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving a protection register (for example, an AF register). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10412.

In S10412, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10470, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, a power outage is not detected). If so, the process moves to S10413.

In S10413, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10414.

In S10414, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10415.

In S10415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). The gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state) as a startup state when the power is turned on.When recovering from a power failure and clearing the RAM, the gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state), and when changing settings or checking settings, the gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state). is also a flag that is set to OFF (=game not permitted state). When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S10416, and when it determines that the game is not allowed, the process moves to S10440.

In S10415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not in a stopped state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.

Here, the "game stop state flag" is information indicating whether or not the game is stopped based on the increased number of game balls, and when the game stop state flag is on (=1), It indicates a "game stop state", and when the game stop state flag is off (=0), it indicates a "game progress state". Although details will be described later, the game stop state flag is turned on when the game stop function operation management phase=04H.

If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not in a stopped state, the process moves to S10417, and if it determines that the game is in a stopped state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450.

In S10417, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-prohibited sections during main control main processing, and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10418.

In S10418, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10419.

In S10419, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for jackpot determination of a random number value for jackpot determination, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10420.

In S10420, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 443. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10430.

In S10430, the main CPU 201 performs game LED lighting data output processing. In this game LED lighting data output process, depending on the game state etc., the normal symbol display section 161, the normal symbol reservation display section 162, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, the first special symbol This is a process of controlling the output of LED data to be displayed by lighting the LEDs of the second special symbol reservation display section 165, the second special symbol reservation display section 166, and the time saving notification display section 168. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10431.

In S10431, when the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 10156. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the V winning opening is activated based on the "special symbol selection symbol". 10156 as the opening pattern, and set the determined opening time to the V winning opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and setting the V shutter solenoid 10160 to open the V winning opening 10156. Output winning opening control data. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10451.

In S10440, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing. In this setting control process, settings are changed or confirmed. This setting control process is similar to the setting control process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) executed in the first gaming machine. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10431.

In S10450, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function setting process. In this game stop function setting process, various commands and game stop state flags related to the function of stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls are set. The game stop function setting process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10430.

In S10451, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10452.

In S10452, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. The performance display monitor control process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this performance display monitor control process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10435.

In S10460, the main CPU 201 performs game stop data update processing. The game stop data update process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this game stop data update process, the game stop function operation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the update control of the MY determination counter are performed. The game stop data update process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10470.

In S10470, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S10411, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

As described above, according to the system timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the switch input detection process is not performed when the game is in the stopped state. That is, when the game is stopped, the game ball enters or passes through the first starting hole 10120, second starting hole 10140, first big winning hole 10131, second big winning hole 10151, general winning hole 122, etc. Even if the game ball is paid out and various random numbers are not acquired (the entry or passage of the game ball into the various winning holes becomes invalid).

[12-4-21. Game stop function setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 440, the game stop function setting process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function setting process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10450-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10450-11, and if it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10450-2.

In S10450-2, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-3.

In S10450-3, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command determination process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-4.

As described above, the "gaming stop command" is a command that transmits to the sub-control circuit 300 information regarding the stopping of the game according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub control circuit 300 can issue a "game stop notice" indicating that the game will be stopped or a "game stop notification" that the game is in a stopped state on the display device 7 or the like in advance. becomes possible.

In this game stop command determination process, the game stop function operation management phase is loaded, and when the game stop function operation management phase is updated and the game stop function operation management phase ≧ 01H, the updated game stop function operation management phase is Based on the value of the function operation management phase and the "predetermined game stop notice start condition," the value of the game stop function operation management phase is determined as the game stop command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 418, when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 01H and the "first game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, the first game stop notice is issued. If 01H is determined as the executable game stop command and the updated game stop function operation management phase is 02H, if the "second game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, the second game stop is executed. 02H is determined as a game stop command that can execute a notice. Furthermore, if the updated game stop function operation management phase is 03H, 03H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the third game stop notice, and the updated game stop function operation management phase is 04H. In this case, 04H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the game stop notification.

Further, in this embodiment, when 01H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the first game stop notice, the executed flag=01H is set and it is stored that the first game stop notice has been executed.

In addition, if the updated game stop function operation management phase is 00H or if the game stop function operation management phase has not been updated, the process for determining the difference number of balls command is performed without determining the game stop command. It will end.

In S10450-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command transmission reservation process to set the game stop command determined in S10450-3 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-5.

In S10450-5, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-6.

In S10450-6, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the difference number of balls command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-7.

Here, the "difference number of balls command" is a command for transmitting information regarding the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference number of balls counter) to the sub-control circuit 300. In the sub-control circuit 300, by receiving the difference ball number command, it becomes possible to notify information regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) on the display device 7 or the like.

In this process of determining the difference number of balls command, the value of the MY determination counter is loaded, and when the MY determination counter is updated, the value of the MY determination counter is determined as the difference number of balls command.
Further, if the MY determination counter has not been updated, the process for determining the difference number command is ended without determining the difference number command.

In S10450-7, the main CPU 201 performs a difference ball number command transmission reservation process to set the difference ball number command determined in S10450-6 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-11.

In addition, in this embodiment, the difference ball number command is also sent in addition to the game stop command, but the difference ball number command is not determined and sent, but only the game stop command is determined and sent. It may be configured to do so. In such a configuration, the processes of S10450-5 to S10450-7 described above may be omitted (deleted).

In S10450-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10450-21, and if it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10450-12.

In S10450-12, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-13.

In S10450-13, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase=04H. That is, by the game stop function operation management phase=04H, it is determined that the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more) and that the game is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is 04H, the process moves to S10450-14, and when it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not 04H, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-21. .

In S10450-14, the main CPU 201 performs processing to turn on (=1) the "gaming stop state flag". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10450-21.

In this way, when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value and the game is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state, the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is in the stop state.

In S10450-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in the game stop state, it moves the process to S10450-22, and if it determines that the game is not in the game stop state, it ends the game stop function setting process.

In S10450-22, the main CPU 201 performs processing to initialize various solenoid data. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the game stop function setting process.

Through the process of S10450-22, when the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is stopped, various solenoids will not be driven. That is, when the game is stopped, the second starting opening 10140, the first big winning opening 10131, the second big winning opening 10151, etc. will not be opened.

[12-4-22. Game stop data update process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 441 and 442, the game stop data update process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described. 441 and 442 are flowcharts showing an example of the game stop data update process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10460-1, the main CPU 201 performs a save process for registers (eg, AF register, etc.). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10412.

In S10460-2, the main CPU 201 controls various prize ball switches from which game balls are paid out (first starting port switch 10121, second starting port switch 10141, first big winning port count switch 10132, second big winning port counting switch). 10152, it is determined whether or not the general winning a prize opening switch 123) has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that a prize ball switch has been detected, it moves the process to S10460-3, and if it determines that a prize ball switch has not been detected, it moves the process to S10460-11.

In S10460-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "number of prize balls" of the winning hole detected by the prize ball switch. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-4.

In S10460-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "number of acquired game balls". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-5.

In S10460-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of prize balls to the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-11.

In S10460-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10460-21, and if it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10460-12.

In S10460-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of acquired game balls=0.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of acquired game balls=0, it moves the process to S10460-15, and if it determines that the number of acquired game balls=0, it moves the process to S10460-13.

In S10460-13, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "difference ball number counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-14.

In S10460-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of acquired game balls to the difference ball number counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-15.

In S10460-15, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-16.

In S10460-16, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball collection switch 10179 has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game ball collection switch 10179 has been detected, it moves the process to S10460-17, and if it determines that the game ball collection switch 10179 has not been detected, it moves the process to S10460-21.

In S10460-17, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the difference ball number counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-18.

In S10460-18, the main CPU 201 determines whether the difference ball number counter is less than or equal to the lower limit value. Here, the lower limit value of the difference ball number counter is set to "0".
If the main CPU 201 determines that the difference ball number counter is below the lower limit value (=0), the process moves to S10460-19, and if it determines that the difference ball number counter is not below the lower limit value (=0), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S10460-21.

In S10460-19, the main CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter to 0. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-21.

When the difference ball number counter becomes 0 through the processes of S10460-18 and S10460-19, it will no longer be subtracted. Note that the processes in S10460-18 and S10460-19 may be omitted (deleted) so that the difference ball count counter is 0 or less.

In addition, through the processing from S10460-2 to S10460-19 above, the difference ball number counter is calculated from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls) to the cumulative number of fired balls fired by game balls ( This is the number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired), and corresponds to the "increased number of game balls (MY)".

In S10460-21, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-22.

In S10460-22, the main CPU 201 determines whether the MY determination counter≧95. Here, the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). Therefore, based on the MY determination counter≧95, it is determined whether the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or higher).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter ≧95, the process moves to S10460-31, and if it determines that the MY determination counter ≧95 does not, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-23.

In S10460-23, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "difference ball number counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-24.

In S10460-24, the main CPU 201 performs a division process of the difference ball number counter to divide the difference ball number counter by 1000 (“difference ball number counter”/1000). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-25.

In S10460-25, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the division result in S10460-24 above in the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-26.

Through the process of S10460-25, the value of the MY determination counter becomes a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). Note that the processes of S10460-22 to S10460-25 may be omitted (deleted) so that the value of the MY determination counter is equal to the difference ball number counter.

In S10460-31, the main CPU 201 determines whether the MY determination counter has been updated.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter has been updated, the process moves to S10460-32, and if it determines that the MY determination counter has not been updated, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-41.

In S10460-32, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, the process moves to S10460-41, and when it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S10460-33.

In S10460-33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-34.

In S10460-34, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase≧03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase ≧03H is the game stop function operation management phase = 03H or 04H, and is the value that is set when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more). .
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is ≧03H, the process moves to S10460-41, and when it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not ≧03H, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-35. .

In S10460-35, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function operation management phase setting process based on the value of the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-41.

In this game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to less than the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter (MY determination counter < 85), the game stop function activation management is performed. Set "00H" to the phase.
In addition, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to from the initial boundary value or more of the difference ball number counter to less than the first boundary value (85≦MY determination counter<90), the game stop function activation management phase Set “01H” to “01H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to a value that is greater than or equal to the first boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the regulation value (90≦MY determination counter<95), the game stop function operation management phase is set to " 02H”.
Further, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to the regulation value or more of the difference ball number counter (MY determination counter≧95), “03H” is set in the game stop function operation management phase.

In this way, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, the value of the game stop function operation management phase is updated based on the value of the MY determination counter.

In addition, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, if the game stop function operation management phase is already 03H or 04H by the process of S10460-34, it will not be updated here. That is, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, when the game stop function operation management phase is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the game stop function operation management phase is updated to 00H, 01H, 02H, or 03H. Become.

In S10460-41, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-42.

In S10460-42, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase=03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase=03H is a value that is set before the game stop state when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more). Therefore, in the game stop function operation management phase=03H, it is determined whether or not the game is not stopped although the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, it moves the process to S10460-43, and if it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not 03H, it moves the process to S10460-50. .

In S10460-43, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol control state number≧03. Here, the special symbol control state number≧03 is a value that is set when the game is in a small hit game state or a jackpot game state, as will be described later. Therefore, it is determined whether the special symbol control state number≧03 is the small hit game state or the jackpot game state.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is ≧03, it moves the process to S10460-50, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not ≧03, it moves the process to S10460-44. .

In S10460-44, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "04H" in the game stop function operation management phase. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10460-50.

In this way, when the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more), the game stop function activation management phase is updated from "03H" to "04H" when it is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state. will be done. Further, when the game stop function operation management phase is "04H", the value is held (not changed) unless "RAM is cleared" by the backup clear switch 176, as described above.

In S10460-50, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the register saved in S10460-1, and ends the game stop data update process.

As described above, according to the game stop data update process of this embodiment, when the game stop function operation management phase corresponding to the difference ball number counter being less than the regulation value is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the value of the MY determination counter is The value of the game stop function operation management phase is changed as appropriate based on (the value of the difference ball number counter), and it is possible to move down or move up.
However, when the game stop function operation management phase = 03H or 04H corresponds to the number of difference balls counter being equal to or higher than the regulation value, even if the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the number of difference balls counter) is less than the regulation value. , the value of the game stop function operation management phase cannot be moved down (changed from 03H to 02H).

[12-4-23. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 439) will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

The 10th pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a first big winning opening count switch 10132, a second big winning opening counting switch 10152, and a V winning opening switch 10157 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S10501, the main CPU 201 executes a first starting opening winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10502.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 10121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 10120, the main CPU 201 generates a prize indicating the number of payouts from the first starting port 10120. Payout information corresponding to the ball is set, and it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach judgment, a random number value for production selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various obtained random numbers are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting hole 10120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S10502, the main CPU 201 executes a second starting opening winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10503.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 10141 detects that a game ball enters the second starting port 10140, the main CPU 201 generates a prize indicating the payout number of the second starting port 10140. Payout information corresponding to the ball is set, and it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3). When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one second special symbol determination area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a winning command for a second special symbol indicating a winning to the second starting opening 10140 and a pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (3), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first special symbol has four first special symbol start storage areas, but the second special symbol does not have three first special symbol start storage areas. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. It should be noted that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed in design as appropriate, but it is desirable that they be 4 or less.

In S10503, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, payout information corresponding to the prize ball indicating the number of payouts from the general winning hole 122 is set, for example. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10504.

In S10504, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 10132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 10131, the main CPU 201 issues a payout from the first big winning hole 10131. Payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of balls is set, and the first big winning hole counter for counting the number of winning game balls into the first big winning hole 10131 is updated by adding 1. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first big winning hole winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning hole 10131 is performed. The first large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10505.

In S10505, the main CPU 201 performs second grand prize opening passage detection processing. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 10152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 10151, the main CPU 201 issues a payout from the second big winning hole 10151. Payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of balls is set, and 1 is added to the second big winning hole counter for counting the number of winning game balls into the second big winning hole 10151 to update it. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the second big winning opening 10151 is performed. The second large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10506.

In S10506, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 10156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 10157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passing flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 10156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 10156, the payout information is not set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10507.

In S10507, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10508.

In this gate passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 10126R or the second passage gate 10126L is detected by the passage gate switch 10127, the main CPU 201 controls the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to the normal symbol It is determined whether there is free space in the startup storage area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S10508, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the first starting opening winning detection process or the second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 413. , generates a read-ahead command. As shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. 413, in the time saving gaming state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state, the prefetching command (second special Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 439) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[12-5. Sub control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 444 to 451.

[12-6-1. Production mode determination table]
A performance mode determination table for determining the performance mode in the tenth pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 444 is an example of the performance mode determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "effect mode" refers to information that defines the state of various effects performed by the sub-control circuit 300.

As shown in FIG. 444, the performance mode determination table associates the gaming state, mode transition conditions, and performance mode information that defines the performance mode. Note that the gaming state is determined by the gaming state designation command received from the main control circuit 200.

Moreover, the "mode transition condition" is configured to be determined based on the presence or absence of starting information of the second special symbol.

"Production mode information" includes production mode information = 00H indicating chance production mode, production mode information = 01H indicating general production mode, production mode information = 10H indicating heaven production mode, and production indicating Sengoku time production mode. It consists of mode information=0FH.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a production mode, there are four production modes: a chance production mode, a general production mode, a heaven production mode, and a Sengoku time production mode, but there are five or more production modes. It may be configured as follows. For example, as the Sengoku time production mode, the Sengoku time production mode in A time saving game state is set as the first RUSH production mode, the Sengoku time production mode in B time saving gaming state is set as the second RUSH production mode, and the Sengoku time production mode in C time saving gaming state is set as the second RUSH production mode. The time production mode may be a second RUSH production mode, and the first RUSH production mode, the second RUSH production mode, and the third RUSH production mode may be different production modes.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 444 and determines performance mode information based on the gaming state and mode transition conditions.

[12-6-2. Design production pattern determination table]
Next, a symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a pattern presentation pattern will be explained. FIG. 445, FIG. 446, and FIG. 447 are examples of performance mode determination tables in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "performance pattern" refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect buttons 54, and the like. Further, the "symbol production pattern" is information that specifies that at least a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)", which will be described later, is to be variably displayed in a predetermined variable manner on the display device 7 during the special symbol variable display. be. Depending on the type of pattern presentation pattern, in addition to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, display effects such as background display mode and characters, audio effects, and changes in the operation mode of the presentation button 54 are also determined. Sometimes. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, display effects of various presentation patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 445, FIG. 446, or FIG. 447 to determine the pattern presentation pattern.

[Chance production mode symbol production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 445(a), the symbol production pattern determination table CZ in the chance production mode includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the look-ahead flag, and the selection rate (first random value). and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "pre-reading flag" is information that determines whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed. The pre-reading flag = 00H indicates that the pre-reading effect is not being executed, and the pre-reading flag = 01H indicates that the pre-reading effect is being executed. It shows that it is running.

In addition, "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, It has been replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the table described later. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table CZ of the chance production mode shown in FIG. 445(a), when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is a variation pattern command corresponding to "time saving hit", the specified symbol production pattern is designated as a special symbol production pattern. The symbol presentation patterns (symbol presentation patterns CZ10 to CZ15, CZ20, CZ21) can be determined. Further, even when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "loss", a specific symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern CZ22, CZ23) can be determined.
Therefore, when there is a time saving win in a special symbol lottery, a special symbol presentation can be performed.

This specific symbol presentation pattern is composed of a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "card presentation" and a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "RUSH entry presentation."

The symbol performance pattern that executes this "card performance" is a "special symbol selection symbol z10" that is the trigger to move to the first time-saving game state in the case of a time-saving win, and a trigger to move to the second time-saving game state. It is determined at the time of "special symbol selection symbol z20" which becomes the trigger and "special symbol selection symbol z30" which becomes the trigger to shift to the third time-saving gaming state.
Therefore, the "card performance" can suggest that the game state will shift to any one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is determined when the "special symbol selection symbol z20" is a time-saving win and triggers the transition to the second time-saving game state, and when there is a loss.
For this reason, the "RUSH entry effect" can perform an effect as to whether or not to move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Furthermore, "card performance" and "RUSH entry performance" are different from "weak performance (white card performance or RUSH entry performance A)" depending on the selection rate (first random value), and a second time-saving game state than the weak performance. It consists of a ``strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)'' in which the expected value of transitioning to is high.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table CZ of the chance production mode shown in FIG. B)'' symbol presentation patterns (symbol presentation patterns CZ11, CZ13, CZ15, CZ21, CZ23) are configured to be determinable.
As a result, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed in the variation, so that the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

[General production mode symbol production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 445(b), in the symbol production pattern determination table NR in the general production mode, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 and the symbol production pattern are associated.

Although the selection rate (first random value) is not associated with the symbol production pattern determination table NR of the general production mode shown in FIG. 445(b), based on the variation pattern command of one special symbol, A plurality of symbol production patterns may be associated with each other using the first random number value.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table NR of the general production mode shown in FIG. 445(b), a symbol production pattern different from that of the chance production mode can be determined even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used. . The difference in the symbol production pattern may be any difference in at least one of the display mode (symbol design) of the first decorative symbol and the background display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, different symbol production patterns can be determined in the general production mode and chance production mode, but the same symbol production pattern can also be determined in the general production mode and the chance production mode. good. In particular, it is desirable to be able to determine the same symbol performance pattern so that a common background display mode is displayed in the general performance mode and the chance performance mode when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to discern at a glance whether or not the RAM has been cleared when the gaming parlor opens, and even if the RAM has not been cleared, the machine cannot be operated from the opening of the gaming parlor. It can be promoted.

In addition, in the case where it is possible to win a time-saving win even in the normal gaming state, it is only necessary to configure so that a special symbol production pattern different from the jackpot can be determined when it is a time-saving win. Then, when there is a time saving win, it is possible to determine different symbol presentation patterns between the normal gaming state and the general gaming state, and different effects are performed between the normal gaming state and the general gaming state as a special presentation when there is a time saving winning. This is desirable.

[Heaven production mode pattern production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 446, in the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 and the symbol production pattern are associated.

Although the selection rate (first random value) is not associated with the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. 446, the selection rate (first random value) is A plurality of symbol presentation patterns may be associated with each other using numerical values.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. 446, even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used, a symbol production pattern different from the chance production mode and the general production mode can be determined. There is. The difference in the symbol production pattern may be any difference in at least one of the display mode (symbol design) of the first decorative symbol and the background display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, different symbol production patterns can be determined in the heaven production mode, general production mode, and chance production mode, but the same symbol production pattern can be determined in the heaven production mode, general production mode, and chance production mode. It may be possible to configure. In particular, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, the same pattern presentation pattern can be determined so that a common background display mode will be displayed in heaven presentation mode, general presentation mode, and chance presentation mode. desirable. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to discern at a glance whether or not the RAM has been cleared when the gaming parlor opens, and even if the RAM has not been cleared, the machine cannot be operated from the opening of the gaming parlor. It can be promoted.

[Sengoku time production mode pattern production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 447, the symbol production pattern determination table RU in the Sengoku time production mode includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern. are associated.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table RU of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. (General gaming state), when the second special symbol variation pattern command is sent (84H01H to 84H03H: see Figure 411), the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, or the fifth time-saving game It is configured to be able to determine a symbol presentation pattern that is different from the second special symbol variation pattern command (84H21H to 84H26H: see FIG. 412) transmitted when the game is in the RUSH gaming state.

In this embodiment, when the special symbol variation pattern command is the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted during the normal gaming state, a symbol production that executes a Sengoku time production in which "Character Z" appears The pattern (symbol presentation patterns RU11 to RU16) is configured to be determinable. Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern command is a second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted during the RUSH gaming state, a Sengoku time production in which "Character A" or "Character B" appears is executed. The symbol presentation patterns (symbol presentation patterns RU21 to RU26) are configured to be determinable.

This creates an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 due to long release in the normal gaming state, and a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 due to long release during the RUSH gaming state. Part of the performance (character) when the ball is played can be made different, and the performance can be performed according to the game state.

In addition, there is an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 due to long release in the normal gaming state, and a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 due to long release during the RUSH gaming state. It is also possible to share the same effect as the one shown. That is, the symbol production patterns RU11 to RU16 and the symbol production patterns RU21 to RU26 may be the same.

Furthermore, according to the symbol production pattern determination table RU of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. Constructed to be decidable. The difference in the symbol production pattern may be any difference in at least one of the display mode (symbol design) of the first decorative symbol and the background display mode.

[12-6-3. Telop production pattern determination table]
Next, a telop performance pattern determination table for determining a telop performance pattern will be explained. FIG. 448 is an example of a telop effect pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "telop performance pattern" refers to information that defines a caption performance that suggests in advance that the second starting port 10140 will be opened long. This "telop effect pattern" suggests that the second starting port 10140 is long open, and the "telop effect pattern K01" that notifies the long open, and the "telop effect pattern K01" that indicates that the second starting port 10140 is long open. , and a ``telop effect pattern K02'' that informs that the long release is not possible.

As shown in FIG. 448, the telop effect pattern determination table associates the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random value), and the telop effect pattern. .

Further, the normal symbol variation pattern command associated with the telop production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 448 is the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 during the third time-saving gaming state ( (See Figure 417).
Therefore, the telop effect based on the telop effect pattern can be executed in the third time-saving game state which is the normal game state.

In addition, when in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state, which are general gaming states, the second starting port 10140 does not open long, but when in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state It may be configured such that the "telop performance pattern K02" that informs that the long release will not be determined can be determined by a normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the telop effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 448 and determines the telop effect pattern.

[12-6-4. Look-ahead performance pattern determination table]
Next, a pre-read effect pattern determination table for determining a pre-read effect pattern will be explained. FIG. 449 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, FIG. 449(a) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 449(b) is the first time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state, and the sixth time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming state. This is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 in a time-saving gaming state.

Here, the "pre-read effect pattern" refers to information that defines a pre-read effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in advance when the game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 or the second starting hole 10140. .

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 449 and determines the prefetch effect pattern.

[Normal gaming state look-ahead effect pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 449(a), the look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shows the correspondence between the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random value), and the look-ahead effect pattern. It is attached.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 449(a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command that corresponds to “jackpot or loss” and “super reach, super super reach, or RUSH entry performance” Or, when the pre-reading command is a pre-reading command corresponding to "time saving hit" and "special symbol selection symbol z20", a pre-reading effect pattern (pre-reading effect pattern Z01) for executing the "expectation UP zone" can be determined. has been done.
Therefore, the "expectation UP zone" can suggest in advance that a predetermined performance will be performed and that the game will move to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Further, according to the pre-read effect pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. Sometimes, a pre-read effect pattern (pre-read effect pattern Z02) for executing a "mode transition zone" is configured to be determined as a pre-read effect pattern.
For this reason, the "mode transition zone" lets you know in advance that you are in a time-saving game and that you will be transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state. can be suggested.

Further, according to the pre-read performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. When the command is a prefetch command corresponding to a "loss", a prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect pattern Z03) for executing the "RUSH expectation zone" is configured to be determinable.
For this reason, it is possible to suggest in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) using the "RUSH expectation zone".

[Look-ahead performance pattern determination table for normal gaming state]
As shown in FIG. 449(b), the prefetch effect pattern determination table Z2 in the normal gaming state has correspondence between the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random value), and the prefetch effect pattern. It is attached.

According to the look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 449(b), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or loss" and "super reach, super super reach", the "expectation UP zone" is executed. A pre-read effect pattern (pre-read effect pattern Z01) to be determined can be determined.

Comparing the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. 449(a) and the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. The prefetch performance pattern for executing the "expectation UP zone" is configured to be easily determined.
Therefore, the "Expectation UP Zone" is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and the interest of the game in the normal gaming state (chance presentation mode) can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a look-ahead effect pattern, three types of look-ahead effect patterns are provided to execute the "expectation UP zone", "mode transition zone", and "RUSH expectation zone", but the suggested content is It may be divided into four or more types of pre-read effect patterns, or it may be configured to have two or less types of pre-read effect patterns by integrating (or omitting) the suggested contents.

Furthermore, the pre-read performance pattern may be determined also in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are the RUSH game state.

[12-6-5. Pre-reading effect prohibition condition setting table]
A pre-read effect prohibition condition setting table for determining whether or not to execute a pre-read effect (expected UP zone, mode transition zone, RUSH expected zone) will be described. FIG. 450 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 450, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead effect for each of the expected UP zone, mode transition zone, and RUSH expectation zone, and the mode transition A "specific prohibition condition" is set that prohibits the look-ahead presentation of both the zone and the RUSH expectation zone.

As the common prohibition conditions, three prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 3, are set. "Common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a pending number of second special symbols, and "common prohibition condition 2" is established when the second special symbol is being controlled (during variable display of the second special symbol). The "common prohibition condition 3" is satisfied when the prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any of these common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect pattern will not be determined and any look-ahead effects in the Expected UP Zone, Mode Transition Zone, and RUSH Expected Zone will not be executed. .

Two unique prohibition conditions, unique prohibition condition 1 and unique prohibition condition 2, are set. "Unique prohibition condition 1" is established when the game ball enters the first starting port 10120 or the second starting port 10140, and starting information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous pending memory. However, "unique prohibition condition 2" is that when the game ball enters the first starting port 10120 or the second starting port 10140, the selection symbol z20 of the time-saving hit and special symbol is determined in the previously held memory. This is true when the start information is stored.

If either of these unique prohibition conditions 1 and 2 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect of the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone will not be executed, but the look-ahead effect of the expectation UP zone can be executed. It is composed of

In this way, as the "unique prohibition condition 1" that prohibits the look-ahead performance of both the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone, it is set that the starting information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous pending memory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content suggested by the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone from changing based on the transition of the jackpot game state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[12-6-6. 1st game stop notice end determination table]
The first game stop notice end determination table for ending the execution of the first game stop notice started when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range will be described. FIG. 451 is an example of the first game stop notice end determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 451, four ending conditions 1 to 4 are set as "first game stop notice ending conditions" for ending the execution of the first game stop notice.

"End condition 1" is satisfied when the game is in the normal gaming state. However, "termination condition 1" does not hold during the normal gaming state during the jackpot gaming state. In addition, "termination condition 2" is satisfied when the first time-saving game state is established, "termination condition 3" is satisfied when the third time-saving game state is present, and "termination condition 4" is satisfied when the time-saving game state is the third time-saving game state. This is true when the game is in a gaming state. That is, the first game stop notice ends when the game shifts to the normal game state or the general game state.

Then, when the first game stop notice is being executed, if any of the conditions of the above-mentioned "first game stop notice end condition" is satisfied, the execution of the first game stop notice ends.

[12-7-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 452, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S10600). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10610.

In S10610, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, a process of inputting a command from the command input port 308 and inputting operation information by the player detected by the production button 54 is performed. Details of this data input processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 458.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10620.

In S10620, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command input in the process of S10610 is analyzed.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10630.

In S10630, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 453.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10640.

In S10640, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10650.

In S10650, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10660.

In S10660, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10670.

In S10670, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10680.

In S10680, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10690.

In S10690, sub CPU 301 executes presentation progress processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs processing to update an effect timer counter for advancing the execution of various effects, a forced notification timer, etc. to be described later.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 returns the process to S10610.

[12-7-2. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 453, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 452) will be described. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10631, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing for determining a performance pattern only when a game stop flag, which will be described later, is off (=00H). In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, the mode of display effects displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound effects output from the speaker 32, the mode of operation of the effect button 54, etc. are determined. A pattern is determined. Note that when the game stop flag is on (=01H), the performance pattern determination process is not executed. Details of this performance pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 454 to 457.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10632.

In S10632, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S10631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10633.

In S10633, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S10632.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10634.

In S10634, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S10631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10635.

In S10635, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S10631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10636.

In S10636, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S10631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10637.

In S10637, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S10631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10638.

In S10638, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a special request related to stopping the game only when the game stopping flag, which will be described later, is on (=01H).

In this game stop-related special request generation process, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time described below has not elapsed, a drawing is made to execute the game stop notification in the first notification mode. Generate requests, sound requests, lamp requests. Further, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request to execute the game stop notification in the second notification mode are generated.
Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 452).

[12-7-3. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 454 to 456, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 453) will be described. FIGS. 454 to 456 are flowcharts showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10631-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S10631-1 that it is a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-3.

In S10631-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol pending number addition processing, such as adding the pending number of special symbols.

In this special symbol pending number addition process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol winning command" or "second special symbol winning command", and if it is a "first special symbol winning command", then , 1 is added to the number of pending first special symbols in the work RAM 303 (first special symbol pending number counter), and when it is a "second special symbol winning command", the number of pending second special symbols in the work RAM 303 is added. 1 is added to (second special symbol pending number counter).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S10631-3 that the command is a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-10.

In S10631-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process to store the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol pre-read command" or "second special symbol pre-read command", and various parameters of the pre-read command (see FIG. 413) are stored in the main RAM 203. The decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern starting storage area, and the second decorative pattern starting storage area of the work RAM 303 correspond to the special pattern determining area, the first special symbol starting storage area, and the second special pattern starting storage area. Remember. That is, the information corresponding to the special symbol starting information stored in the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 is also stored in the work RAM 303 of the sub control circuit 300.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-5.

In S10631-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect determination process to determine a prefetch effect pattern for executing the prefetch effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 457.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S10631-10 that it is a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-20.

In S10631-11, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine the type of decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

In this decorative pattern determination process, a stop pattern of the decorative pattern is determined based on the content of the pattern designation command, and the determined stop pattern is stored in the stop pattern storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S10631-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-30.

In S10631-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a special symbol pending number subtraction process, such as subtracting the pending number of special symbols.

In this process of subtracting the number of reserved special symbols, it is determined whether it is the "first special symbol variation pattern command" or "second special symbol variation pattern command", and then the "first special symbol variation pattern command" is determined. When , 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when it is a "second special symbol fluctuation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. do. Furthermore, a pending shift display pattern is determined to shift and display the pending image on the display device 7 with respect to the pending image of the special symbol subtracted this time. Furthermore, various information stored in the decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the work RAM 303 are transferred to the special pattern determination area, the first special pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the main RAM 203. 2 Shift in the same way as the special symbol start storage area.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-22.

In S10631-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the production mode information stored in the production mode information storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a symbol production table determination process to determine a symbol production pattern determination table.

In this symbol production table determination process, when the chance production mode is selected, the symbol production pattern determination table CZ shown in FIG. 445(a) is determined, and when the general production mode is selected, the symbol production pattern determination table CZ shown in FIG. Determine table NR. Further, when it is the heaven performance mode, the symbol performance pattern determination table TE shown in FIG. 446 is determined, and when it is the Sengoku time performance mode, the symbol performance pattern determination table RU shown in FIG. 447 is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-23.

In S10631-23, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol presentation pattern determination processing to determine a symbol presentation pattern.

In this symbol production pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol production pattern determination table determined in the symbol production table determination process is referred to, and based on various information associated with the symbol production pattern determination table. to determine the symbol production pattern.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-24.

In S10631-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine a preview performance pattern.

In this advance notice performance pattern determination process, after obtaining a predetermined random number value, referring to a notice performance pattern determination table (not shown), based on the received special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the obtained second random number value, etc. A preview effect pattern to be executed based on the variation is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S10631-30 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-40.

In S10631-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation end process to end the symbol presentation.

In this symbol performance termination process, symbol performance execution end data for terminating the execution of the symbol performance based on the symbol performance pattern is created. In addition, in the pattern presentation end process, pattern stop display data is created to stop and display the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determined in the decorative pattern determination process.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-32.

In S10631-32, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) etc. stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a number counter updating process of updating various counters.

In this frequency counter updating process, in the case of the normal gaming state, 1 is added to the "normal variation counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the normal gaming state. Moreover, when it is a time-saving game state and the first special symbol performance stop command, 1 is subtracted from the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of time-saving special symbols in the time-saving game state and updated.

Furthermore, in the case of the fifth time-saving game state, 1 is subtracted from the "sub-switching number counter" of the work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is switched in the fifth time-saving game state, and updated.

In addition, in the number counter updating process, when the prefetch flag indicating that the prefetch effect is being executed is on, the "prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 and updated.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-33.

In S10631-33, the sub CPU 301 performs production mode transition processing for shifting the production mode etc.

In this performance mode transition processing, when in the time-saving gaming state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is referred to, and when the sub-special symbol time-saving counter = 0, the state information of the normal gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303. Remember.

In addition, in the production mode transition processing, when the prefetch flag indicating that the prefetch production is being executed is on, the "prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referred to, and if the prefetch number counter = 0, the prefetch flag is set. Turn it off (=00H).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S10631-40 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-42.

In S10631-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win start performance determination process that determines a small win start performance pattern for performing a small win start performance.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-42, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "V passing command".

If it is determined in S10631-42 that the command is a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-44.

In S10631-43, the sub CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process to determine a V passing effect pattern for performing the V passing effect.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-44, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command".

If it is determined in S10631-44 that it is a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-50.

In S10631-45, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the small win end performance.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command".

If it is determined in S10631-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-52.

In S10631-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot start performance. In this jackpot start performance determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the performance pattern of the jackpot start performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-52, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command".

If it is determined in S10631-52 that it is a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-60.

In S10631-53, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot end performance. In this jackpot end performance determination process, the performance pattern of the jackpot end performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-54.

In S10631-54, the sub CPU 301 performs a number counter setting process of setting various counters at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this number of times counter setting process, the stopped symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the stopped symbol (winning symbol) is one that transitions to the time-saving gaming state, the "special symbol variable" of the time-saving ending condition in the time-saving gaming state is The number of times (see FIG. 410(a)) corresponding to the "number of times of display" is set in the "sub special symbol time saving counter" of the work RAM 303.

In addition, when the stop symbol (winning symbol) is one that moves to the fifth time-saving game state, the number of times (see FIG. 410(a)) corresponding to the "switching frequency" of the stopping symbol (winning symbol) is stored in the work RAM 303. Set to "Sub switching number counter".

For example, as shown in FIG. 410(a), when the "selected special symbol z1" is selected, the sub-special The symbol time saving counter = 10000 times and the sub switching number counter = 1 time are set.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S10631-60 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-70.

In S10631-61, the sub CPU 301 performs a telop effect pattern determination process to determine a telop effect pattern.

In this telop performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, the telop performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on the performance pattern.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S10631-70 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-80.

In S10631-71, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the current gaming state from the gaming state designation command received this time, and determines whether the analyzed current gaming state is different from the state information stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303. That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been updated.

If it is determined in S10631-71 that the gaming state has been updated, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-72. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state has not been updated (the gaming state is maintained), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-80.

In S10631-72, the sub CPU 301 performs a status information update process of updating and storing the status information indicating the current gaming status analyzed in S10631-71 in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-73.

In S10631-73, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information updated in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and selects the B time saving gaming state (fourth working time saving gaming state) or the C working time saving gaming state (the first working time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state). 2 time-saving game state, 3rd time-saving game state), BC time-saving game state setting processing is performed.

In this BC time-saving game state setting process, when the current game state is updated to the B-time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state), the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition in the fourth time-saving game state ” (see FIG. 410(c)) is set in the “sub special symbol time saving counter” of the work RAM 303. For example, in the fourth time-saving game state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.

In addition, when the current gaming state is updated to the C time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state, third time-saving gaming state), depending on the gaming state, the time-saving end condition " The number of times corresponding to the variable display number of special symbols (see FIG. 410(b)) is set in the sub special symbol time saving counter of the work RAM 303. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-74.

In S10631-74, the sub CPU 301 performs performance mode setting processing to set the performance mode.

In this performance mode setting process, performance mode information is determined based on the current gaming state with reference to the performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 444, and the determined performance mode information is stored in the performance mode information storage area of the work RAM 303. do.

Here, when the current game state is updated to the third time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state, the second special symbol is When the information corresponding to the start information is stored, production mode information (0FH) indicating the Sengoku time production mode is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-75.

In S10631-75, the sub CPU 301 performs a first game stop notice end determination process to determine whether or not to end the execution of the first game stop notice.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, with reference to the first game stop notice end determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the termination condition is met, and if any of the termination conditions is satisfied, the execution of the first game stop notice is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S10631-80 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-90.

In S10631-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display performance pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display performance pattern for performing the performance during standby of the game.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-90, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "difference number of balls command".

If it is determined in S10631-90 that the command is a "difference number of balls command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-91. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "difference number of balls command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-92.

In S10631-92, the sub CPU 301 performs difference ball number storage processing to store the difference number of balls.

In this difference ball number storage process, the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference ball number counter) corresponding to the received difference ball number command is stored in the sub difference ball number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-92, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming stop command".

If it is determined in S10631-92 that the command is a "gaming stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-99.

In S10631-93, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop notification process that provides notification in accordance with the received game stop command.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, when the game stop command = 01H, the execution of the first game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command = 02H, the execution of the second game stop notice is started, and the game When the stop command is 03H, execution of the third game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command is 04H, the execution of the game stop notification is started.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10631-94.

In S10631-94, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop setting process to set a game stop flag and the like.

In this game stop flag setting process, when the received game stop command is the game stop command=04H, the game stop flag in the work RAM 303 is turned on (=01H). Further, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, a predetermined counter (for example, 5 minutes) corresponding to the forced notification time is set in the forced notification timer.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10631-99, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands received from the main CPU 201, and updates other counters. For example, the cumulative payout information of game balls may be updated in response to reception of the first grand prize opening winning command or the second grand winning opening winning command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).
[12-7-4. Ahead production decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 457, details of the look-ahead performance determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 454) will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-read effect determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10701, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch effect prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 450 and determines whether any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied.

If it is determined in S10701 that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10702. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is shifted to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10702, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current gaming state) stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a prefetch effect table determination process to determine a prefetch effect table.

In this pre-read effect table determination process, when in the normal gaming state, the pre-read effect pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. 6. When in the time-saving gaming state, a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 449(b) is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10703.

In S10703, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect pattern determination process to determine a prefetch effect pattern.

In this prefetch effect pattern determination process, after obtaining the third random value, the prefetch effect pattern determination table determined in the above prefetch effect table determination process is referred to, and the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 and the third random A look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the numerical value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10704.

In S10704, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch number counter setting process to set a prefetch number counter.

In this prefetch number counter setting process, when a prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect pattern Z01 to Z03) is determined, the prefetch flag is turned on (=01H) and the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the pre-reading number counter of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10705.

In S10705, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a specific prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect patterns Z02, Z03) for executing the mode transition zone or the RUSH expectation zone has been determined.

If it is determined in S10705 that a specific prefetch effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific prefetch effect pattern has not been determined, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In S10706, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch performance prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 450 and determines whether either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied.

If it is determined in S10706 that either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the unique prohibition condition 1 nor the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the current look-ahead effect determination process is terminated, and the process is shifted to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 453). .

In S10707, the sub CPU 301 performs processing to clear a specific prefetch effect pattern, prefetch flag, and prefetch number counter. That is, the specific prefetch effect pattern is discarded, the prefetch flag is turned off (=00H), and the prefetch number counter is set to 0.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current prefetch effect determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 453).

In this way, when any one of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, no pre-read performance in the expected UP zone, mode transition zone, or RUSH expected zone will be executed. In addition, when either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect of the expected UP zone can be executed, but the look-ahead effect of the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone is not executed. It turns out.
[12-7-5. Data input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 458, details of the data input process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 452) will be described. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10611, the sub CPU 301 performs command reading processing to read a command from the command input port 308.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10612.

In S10612, the sub CPU 301 determines, for each of the plurality of performance buttons 54 (determination button, left/right button, up/down button), an operation enable button to enable input of operation information by the player, based on various performance conditions, etc. Performance button permission setting processing is performed to set a period and an operation invalidation period for invalidating the input of operation information by the player.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has not elapsed, an operation invalidation time is set for all the effect buttons 54. Further, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, an operation valid period is set for some of the performance buttons 54 (left and right buttons, up and down buttons).
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10613.

In S10613, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not operation information for any of the plurality of effect buttons 54 has been input within the operation validity period.

In S10613, if it is determined that the operation information for any of the plurality of effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10614. On the other hand, if it is determined that no operation information has been input for any of the plurality of performance buttons 54 within the valid operation period, the current data input process is ended and the process is shifted to command analysis process (see FIG. 452).

In S10614, when the sub CPU 301 is executing the effect based on the symbol effect pattern and inputs the first operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the determination button, the sub CPU 301 performs the changing button setting process.

In this fluctuating button setting process, settings are made to execute a fluctuating button performance (for example, button cut-in performance) based on the content of the symbol performance pattern being executed and the special symbol lottery result.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10615.

In S10615, when the first operation information corresponding to the production button 54 of the determination button is input when the production based on the symbol production pattern is not being executed, various production adjustment menus and QR codes (registered trademarks) are displayed. Performs standby menu setting processing.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10616.

In S10616, when the second operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the left and right buttons is input, the sub CPU 301 performs a volume adjustment process to adjust the volume of the volume output from the speaker 32. Specifically, when the second operation information L corresponding to the production button 54 of the left button is input, the volume is adjusted down by one level, and the second operation corresponding to the production button 54 of the right button is input. When information R is input, the volume is adjusted to increase by one level.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S10617.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment process is performed by operating the production button 54, but the volume can be adjusted automatically when the adjustment conditions are met, regardless of the operation of the production button 54. You may. For example, when the forced notification time has elapsed as the adjustment condition is met by the above-described game stop related special request generation process (see FIG. 453), the volume may be automatically adjusted to lower.

In S10617, when the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, the sub CPU 301 performs a light amount adjustment process to adjust the brightness of the emitted LED. Specifically, when the third operation information D corresponding to the production button 54 of the lower button is input, the brightness is adjusted down by one level, and the second operation corresponding to the production button 54 of the upper button is performed. When information U is input, the brightness is adjusted to increase by one level.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current data input process and shifts the process to command analysis process (see FIG. 452).

In the present embodiment, the light amount adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the light amount can be adjusted automatically when the adjustment conditions are met, regardless of the operation of the effect button 54. You may. For example, in the above-described game stop related special request generation process (see FIG. 453), when the forced notification time has elapsed as the adjustment condition is met, the amount of light may be automatically adjusted to be lowered.

[12-8. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the transition of the gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 459 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the tenth pachinko game machine.

As mentioned above, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set. The time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern=01 is set is referred to as the "second time-saving game state" and the "third time-saving game state". In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which the general electricity operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as a "fourth time-saving game state". In addition, in the A time-saving game state (status flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set. The state is called the "sixth time-saving game state."

(Normal gaming state transition control)
In the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port 10120 and also to pass through the second passage gate 10126L.

As shown in FIG. 459, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120, a "jackpot", "time-saving hit", or "loss" is determined by drawing the first special symbol (see FIG. 406). Incidentally, regardless of the gaming state, a "small hit" is never determined in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the normal gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the game mode changes according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol. 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving game state, and 40% shifts to the sixth time-saving game state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, when a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, C of any of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state Shift to time-saving gaming state. Here, when a "time saving hit" is determined, 70% shifts to the first time saving game state, 15% shifts to the second time saving game state, and 15% shifts to the third time saving game state, depending on the selected special symbol. Transition to the time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In particular, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" is configured to be determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 406). Therefore, it is possible to shift only from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state, which is the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, and the third time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal operation pattern = 00, the long The "long open probability" for which the open pattern is determined is "0" (see FIG. 416). That is, in the normal gaming state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 10140.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the state shifts from the normal game state to the fourth time-saving game state of B-time-saving game state.

For this reason, from the normal gaming state, a transition is made to a jackpot gaming state, a first time-saving gaming state, a second time-saving gaming state, a third time-saving gaming state, and a fourth time-saving gaming state.

(Transition control of first time-saving game state)
In the first time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port 10120 and also to pass through the second passage gate 10126L. .

In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 406). In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol in all the time-saving game states, a "time-saving hit" is never determined.

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the first time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the selected symbol of the first special symbol Accordingly, 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the sixth time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal operation pattern = 00. , the "long open probability" for determining the long open pattern is "0" (see FIG. 416). That is, in the first time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 10140.

In addition, the first time-saving gaming state has the same "long opening probability" as the normal gaming state, and unlike the normal gaming state, "time-saving winning" is not derived, so the jackpot gaming state is more likely than the normal gaming state. This results in an unfavorable gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to a jackpot game state, the first time-saving game state shifts to a fourth time-saving game state of B-time saving game state.

Here, when shifting to the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 410). However, in the first time saving game form, before the third time saving number is counted, the variable display number of special symbols has reached the ceiling value (950 times).
Therefore, from the first time-saving gaming state, it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state.

(Transition control of third time-saving game state)
In the third time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port 10120 and also to pass through the second passage gate 10126L. .

In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 406).

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the third time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the selected symbol of the first special symbol Accordingly, 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the sixth time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal symbol operation pattern = 01. , the "long open probability" at which the long open pattern is determined is "approximately 1/202" (see FIG. 416). That is, in the third time-saving game state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 10140 with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/202).

Here, when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140, it is determined as a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/3 regardless of the gaming state (see FIG. 406), and the second start from the small winning gaming state is determined. The game is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot gaming state via route 2.
Therefore, when the game is in the third time-saving game state, it becomes an advantageous game state in which it is easier to shift to the jackpot game state than when it is in the first time-saving game state.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the third time-saving game state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state of the B-time saving game state.

Here, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 410). However, in the third time saving game form, before the fifth time saving number is counted, the number of variable display times of the special symbol has reached the ceiling value (950 times).
Therefore, from the third time-saving gaming state, it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state.

(Transition control of the 6th time-saving game state)
In the sixth time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port 10120 and also to pass through the second passage gate 10126L. .

In the sixth time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 10120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 406).

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the sixth time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the first special symbol is selected. Accordingly, 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the sixth time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, in the sixth time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passage gate 10126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal operation pattern = 00. , the "long open probability" for which the long open pattern is determined is "0" (see FIG. 416). That is, in the sixth time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 10140.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the sixth time-saving game state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state of the B time-saving game state.

Here, when shifting to the sixth time-saving game state, the first time-saving number of times, 10,000, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 410). However, the second time saving number of times, 10,000 times, is a number of times that cannot be achieved in one day's game, and corresponds to a substantially infinite number of times.
Therefore, from the sixth time-saving gaming state, it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state.

(RUSH gaming state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are the RUSH game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the game ball can pass through the first passage gate 10126R, and the normal symbol The game ball is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 10140 by long opening the second starting port 10140 by the lottery.

In the RUSH gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined by drawing a second special symbol (see FIG. 406). Particularly, in this embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that a "small hit" is determined with a high probability of about 1/3.

When a "small hit" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the game shifts to the small winning gaming state, and in the small winning gaming state, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 10156 provided inside the second big winning opening 10151, The game will move to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, in the small winning game state, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 10151, the game ball is configured so that it also passes through the V winning hole 10156 in principle.
After the jackpot game state from the second route triggered by the small hit ends, 80% shifts to the 5th time-saving game state and 20% shifts to the 6th time-saving game state according to the selected symbol of the special symbol. (See FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, when a "jackpot" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. 100% shifts to the fifth time-saving game state (see FIGS. 407 and 410).

In addition, in the RUSH gaming state, when a game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal pattern = 02, the long The "long open probability" for which the open pattern is determined is "1/4" (see FIG. 416). That is, in the RUSH gaming state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 10140 with a predetermined probability (1/4).

Further, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the second time saving game state, the fourth time saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time saving end condition (see FIG. 410). This fourth time saving number is the number of times in which a shift to the jackpot game state is guaranteed, since the "small win" is determined to be about 1/3 by the lottery of the second special symbol.
For this reason, the second time saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state, the sixth time-saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 410). This sixth time saving number is the number of times in which a transition to a jackpot game state is guaranteed, since the "small win" is determined to be approximately 1/3 by the lottery of the second special symbol.
For this reason, the fourth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the fifth time-saving game state, the second time-saving number of 10,000 times is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition, and the time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 times, and The number of switching times, 1 or 5, is set (see FIG. 410). Then, when the special symbol is variably displayed one or five times, which is the switching number, without shifting to the jackpot game state, the fifth time-saving game state shifts to the sixth time-saving game state.
Therefore, from the fifth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state, it will shift to the jackpot gaming state or the sixth time-saving gaming state.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "time saving win" is determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the second time saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state. Further, from the second time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state, a transition will be made to the jackpot gaming state.
Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the transition rate to the jackpot gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Since the normal gaming state is also the initial gaming state after the RAM is cleared, in the state after the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the first time-saving gaming state, which is the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machines after the opening of the gaming parlor.

In particular, in this embodiment, from the general gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, third time-saving gaming state, sixth time-saving gaming state), it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state or the fourth time-saving gaming state; From the 4-hour saving gaming state, it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the fifth time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state is not ended except by shifting to the jackpot game state.
Therefore, after the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state of the fifth time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state are endlessly looped unless the RAM is cleared. That is, after the first jackpot gaming state, the system is configured such that the normal gaming state does not occur except during the jackpot gaming state.
As a result, it is possible to transition to the normal gaming state only by clearing the RAM, and it is possible to suppress the gambling nature (balls played) during normal business hours without clearing the RAM, or to clear the RAM during special events. It is also possible to shift to a normal gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the long opening probability differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of time-saving gaming states with different long opening probabilities, thereby further improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the third time-saving game state which is the general game state, it is easier to open the long game and shift to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous game than in the first time-saving game state which is the general game state. It is in a state.
As a result, even if a "time saving win" is determined in the normal gaming state but the transition to the RUSH gaming state is not made, the interest in the game can be maintained by creating expectations that the normal gaming state will be in the third time saving gaming state. can be achieved.

[12-9. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the tenth pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 460 is an example of the performance flow of the performance mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are four performance modes: a chance performance mode, a general performance mode, a heaven performance mode, and a Sengoku time performance mode.

Then, based on each performance mode, a symbol performance consisting of a fluctuating display of a predetermined decorative pattern in the fluctuation, a preview performance that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in advance in the fluctuation, and a lottery result of the normal symbol in the fluctuation in advance. The system is configured to be able to carry out performances such as a telop performance that suggests the lottery result of a special symbol in advance, and a look-ahead performance that suggests the lottery result of a special symbol in advance.

In this embodiment, the performance based on the first special symbol lottery is also referred to as the "first special symbol performance", and the performance based on the second special symbol lottery is also referred to as the "second special symbol performance".

(Chance production mode)
The chance production mode can be executed during the normal gaming state. This chance presentation mode can suggest that the normal game state is more advantageous than the first time-saving game state.

In the chance presentation mode, presentations such as a pattern presentation, a preview presentation, and a look-ahead presentation based on the chance presentation mode are configured to be executable. Note that in the chance effect mode, the second starting port 10140 is never opened long, so the telop effect cannot be executed.

Furthermore, in the chance performance mode, at least "card performance" and "RUSH entry performance" can be executed as pattern performances.

As mentioned above, the "card performance" is a performance that suggests a transition to any one of the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state in the variation. Moreover, the "RUSH entry performance" is a performance that suggests whether or not to shift to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) in the variation.

Furthermore, in the chance production mode, at least a "mode transition zone", "expectation UP zone", and "RUSH expectation zone" are executable as pre-read productions.

As mentioned above, the "mode transition zone" is a time saving game state in the advance variation, and the game state is changed from the normal gaming state to any of the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, or the third time saving gaming state. This is a performance that hints in advance that a transition will occur. In addition, the "Expectation UP Zone" is a performance that suggests in advance that a predetermined performance (Super Reach) will be performed in advance fluctuations, and that a transition to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur. be. In addition, the "RUSH expectation zone" is a performance that suggests in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) in the advance variation.

In the chance performance mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the chance production mode, if you win a time saving game, when you move to the first time saving game state, you move to the general production mode, when you move to the second time saving game state, you move to the Sengoku time performance mode, and when you move to the 3rd time saving game state, you move to the Sengoku time production mode. When transitioning to the state, it transitions to heaven production mode. In addition, in the chance production mode, when the time saving game is won, when moving to the third time saving game state, it may be configured to shift to the heaven production mode or the general production mode.

In the chance performance mode, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the chance performance mode is shifted to the Sengoku time performance mode.

(General production mode)
The general performance mode can be executed in the first time saving game state or the sixth time saving game state in the general game state. This general performance mode can suggest that the game is in a disadvantageous general gaming state.

In the general presentation mode, presentations such as a symbol presentation, a preview presentation, and a look-ahead presentation based on the general presentation mode are configured to be executable. Note that in the general performance mode, the second starting port 10140 is not opened long, so the telop performance cannot be performed, but the telop performance may be made possible in the general performance mode.

Also, in the general production mode, the "Expectation UP Zone" can be executed as a look-ahead production, but the "Mode Transition Zone" and "RUSH Expectation Zone" cannot be executed because the time saving hit will not be won. It becomes.

In the general performance mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the general performance mode, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the general performance mode is shifted to the Sengoku time performance mode.

(Heaven production mode)
The heaven performance mode can be executed in the third time-saving game state in the normal game state. This heaven performance mode can suggest an advantageous general gaming state (third time-saving gaming state).

In the heaven presentation mode, presentations such as a pattern presentation, a notice presentation, a look-ahead presentation, and a telop presentation based on the heaven presentation mode are configured to be executable.

In the heaven effect mode, if a jackpot is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot effect can be executed.

In the heaven presentation mode, when the second starting port 10140 is opened long and a game ball enters the second starting port 10140, the heaven presentation mode is shifted to the Sengoku time presentation mode.

In the heaven performance mode, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to a jackpot game state, the heaven performance mode is shifted to the Sengoku time performance mode.

As mentioned above, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine the same pattern production pattern so that the common background display mode will be displayed in the heaven production mode, general production mode, and chance production mode. In this case, it is desirable to start from a common performance mode (for example, chance performance mode) when the power is turned on.

(Sengoku time production mode)
The Sengoku time performance mode can be executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 in the heaven performance mode during the second short game state, fourth short game state, and fifth short game state in the RUSH game state. It becomes. This Sengoku time performance mode can suggest that the state is likely to shift to a jackpot game state.

In the Sengoku time production mode, it is configured to be able to perform effects such as a pattern effect, a preview effect, and a look-ahead effect based on the Sengoku time effect mode.

In the Sengoku time performance mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the Sengoku time production mode, if a game ball enters the second starting port 10140 during the heaven production mode, when the start information of the second special symbol disappears, the transition from the Sengoku time production mode to the heaven production mode ( return).

In the Sengoku time production mode, if the 5th time saving game state is displayed, the variable display of the special symbol 1 or 5 times, which is the number of switching times, without transitioning to the jackpot game state, will cause the Sengoku time production mode to change. Shifts to general performance mode.

[12-10. Game stop notice time chart]
Next, an outline of the game stop notice performed in the tenth pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 461 is an example of a time chart of a game stop notice based on a game stop command in the tenth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 461 shows the "game status", "notification device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46)", "game stop flag" indicating the stop of the game, and "increased number of game balls (MY)". are shown above and below.

FIG. 461(a) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first count range (85000 to 89999) and the first game stop notice start condition is met, the first game stop notice is issued. This is an example of a time chart 1 for executing.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 461(a), when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device 1. Execution of game stop notice is started. Here, as an example of the establishment of the first game stop notice start condition, it is established during the jackpot game state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol (see FIG. 418). Note that an example of the notification mode of the first game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 461(a), the increased number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range. In this case, the first game stop notice termination condition is satisfied, and the execution of the first game stop notice ends in the notification device. Here, as an example of the fulfillment of the first game stop notice end condition, it is established that the gaming state has shifted to the sixth time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 451).

As described above, according to the time chart 1 shown in FIG. 461(a), when the player is in a gaming state where he or she can expect to acquire a large amount of gaming value (game balls), the second count range is Also, execution of the first game stop notice can be started in advance. Then, when the increased number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range due to the gaming state, the execution of the first game stop notice can be ended.

FIG. 461(b) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90000 to 94999) after the execution of the first game stop notice is completed, the second game stop notice, This is an example of a time chart 2 for executing game stop notification.

The timings (a) and (b) shown in FIG. 461(b) are the same as the timings (a) and (b) shown in FIG. 461(a) described above. That is, when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, execution of the first game stop notice is started when the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the first game stop notice end condition is met. With the establishment of , the execution of the first game stop notice ends.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 461(b), the small winning gaming state, the jackpot gaming state, and the RUSH gaming state are not being executed, and the game ball enters the first starting opening 10120, the general winning opening 122, etc. The increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90000 to 94999) by throwing the ball and paying out a predetermined prize ball.
At this time, since the first game stop notice has already been executed, the second game stop notice start condition is not satisfied and the second game stop notice is not executed (see FIG. 418).

At the timing (d) shown in FIG. 461(b), the jackpot game state is executed, so the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice. be done. This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000). Note that an example of the notification mode of the second game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (E) shown in FIG. 461(b), the small hit game state or the jackpot game state is not being executed, and the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulation value (95000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as the game stop notification.

At the timing (f) shown in FIG. 461(b), the forced notification time has elapsed after the game stop flag was turned on.
At this time, as the game stop notification, a second game stop notification different from the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device. Further, when the second game stop notification is being executed, the input of operation information of the predetermined performance button 54 becomes valid, and the volume adjustment and the light intensity adjustment become possible. Note that an example of the notification mode of the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

In this way, according to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 461(b), if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the player can expect to obtain a predetermined game value (game balls). When a gaming state (such as a jackpot gaming state) is reached, execution of the second game stop notice can be started.

In addition, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the number of game balls will increase as the game balls enter the first starting port 10120, the general prize winning port 122, etc. and the predetermined prize balls are paid out. Even when (MY) reaches the second counting range, execution of the second game stop notice will not start (periods (c) to (e)).
As a result, game balls enter the first starting hole 10120, general winning hole 122, etc., a predetermined prize ball is paid out, and the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range. , even if the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the second counting range due to the firing of game balls (such as when it is around the first boundary value of 90,000 balls), a game stop notice will be issued. There is no need to run or terminate the game, and the annoyance caused by a game stop notice can be eliminated.

Furthermore, as the game stop notification, the first game stop notification is executed initially when the game stop flag is turned on, and the second game stop notification is executed after the forced notification time has elapsed, so the progress after the game stop notification is executed. Appropriate notifications can be made depending on the time.

FIG. 461(c) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90000 to 94999) without executing the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the game This is an example of a time chart 3 for executing stop notification.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 461(c), the small winning gaming state, the jackpot gaming state, and the RUSH gaming state are not being executed, and the game ball enters the first starting opening 10120, the general winning opening 122, etc. The increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90000 to 94999) by throwing the ball and paying out a predetermined prize ball.
At this time, since the first game stop notice was not executed, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 418). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).

Then, at the timings (E) and (F) shown in FIG. 461(c), the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification are issued in the notification device, similarly to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 461(b). executed.

In this way, according to the time chart 3 shown in FIG. 461(c), when the first game stop notice is not executed and the increased number of game balls (MY) approaches the regulation value (95000), the first game stop notice is quickly executed. 2. It is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped by executing a game stop notice.

FIG. 461(d) is an example of the time chart 4 for executing the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the third game stop notice, and the game stop notification.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 461(d), when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device 1. Execution of game stop notice is started.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 461(d), the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90000 to 94999) in the RUSH gaming state.
At this time, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 418). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).

At the timing (g) shown in FIG. 461(d), the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulation value (95000) while the jackpot game state is being executed.
At this time, the game is not stopped and the game stop flag is kept off, and during the jackpot game state, execution of the third game stop notice is started in the notification device (see FIG. 418). Note that an example of the notification mode of the third game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (h) shown in FIG. 461(d), the jackpot game state has ended after the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as the game stop notification.

Then, at the timing (F) shown in FIG. 461(d), the second game stop notification is executed in the notification device similarly to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 461(b).

In this way, according to the time chart 4 shown in FIG. 461(d), when the game stops after the end of the jackpot game state, the third game stop notice during the jackpot game state specifies the specific game stop content. (For example, "The game will stop after this jackpot game state ends.") can be notified.

[12-11. Performance contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the tenth pachinko game machine. FIG. 462(a) is the basic structure of the display image in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state, and FIG. 462(b) is the basic structure of the display image in the RUSH gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 462, the decorative symbols include a "main symbol" as a first decorative symbol that is displayed in a large size that is easy for the player to recognize in the display area of the display device 7, and a "main symbol" that is displayed in a small size that is difficult for the player to recognize. It consists of two types: a "sub-design" as a second decorative design. Note that the type of decorative pattern is not limited to this.

(Basic configuration of display images in normal gaming state and general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 462(a), the basic structure of the display image in the normal game state and the general game state is that a left symbol 10071L is placed in the center of the display area of the display device 7 as a main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. , a middle pattern 10071C, and a right pattern 10071R are configured to be displayable. Note that the number of main symbols is not limited to three types.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 10072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 10072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A sub-symbol 10073 and a third sub-symbol 10075 as a sub-symbol of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the normal gaming state or the general gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 10071L, middle symbol 10071C, and right symbol 10071R, A variable display of the first sub-symbol 10072 will also be performed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is variably displayed during the normal game state or the general game state, only the second sub-symbol 10073 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern will not be displayed. In addition, when a variable display of the normal symbol is performed during the normal game state or the general game state, only the third sub-symbol 10075 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. It turns out.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of first special symbols can be displayed, and the first special symbol starting storage area ( A first pending image 10074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), a second pending image 10074b indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2), and a first special symbol. A third pending image 10074c indicating that starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth pending image 10074d indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Configured so that it can be displayed. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 10074z indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols is not displayed, but the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols may be configured to be displayable.

(Basic configuration of display image in RUSH gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 462(b), the basic configuration of the display image in the RUSH gaming state is that the left symbol 10076L as the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is placed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7; A middle pattern 10076C and a right pattern 10076R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 10072 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second sub-symbol 10072 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed, as in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. A sub-symbol 10073 and a third sub-symbol 10075 corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be small and displayable.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol is variably displayed during the RUSH gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 10076L, middle symbol 10076C, and right symbol 10076R, the second sub symbol A variable display of 10073 will also be performed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the RUSH gaming state, only the first sub-symbol 10072 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. It will not be done. In addition, when the normal symbol is variablely displayed during the RUSH gaming state, only the third sub-symbol 10075 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed. Become.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of second special symbols can be displayed, and a second special symbol starting storage area ( A first pending image 10077a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), a second pending image 10077b indicating that starting information is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol. A third pending image 10077c indicating that starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth pending image 10077d indicating that starting information is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (4). Configured so that it can be displayed. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 10077z indicating that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, in the RUSH gaming state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed, but the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. may be configured to be displayable.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 7, a right-handed instruction image 10079 that instructs the player to play right-handed as a regular game mode is configured to be displayable.

In this way, in the normal game state and the general game state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the reserved image are set in the first special so that it is easy to recognize the first game nature that aims at the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol. When in the RUSH gaming state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the pending image are made so that it is easy to recognize the second game nature that aims for a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state by drawing a second special symbol. corresponds to the second special symbol. That is, the first decorative symbol (main symbol) becomes a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol when in the normal game state and general game state, and is replaced by a symbol corresponding to the second special symbol when in the RUSH gaming state. It turns out.

(Card performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 463, card presentation in the chance presentation mode will be described. FIG. 463 is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the chance performance mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in the explanation of the card effects, the symbols added in FIG. 462 are omitted because the letters are small and lack visibility, and there is a risk that it will get in the way of explaining the contents of the effect. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 10072, second sub-symbol 10073, and third sub-symbol 10075, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described in FIGS. 463 to 468.

FIG. 463(a) is an example of a display image before starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the chance production mode.

FIG. 463(b) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol won in the short time is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 463(b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 445) for performing the card presentation is determined and the card presentation is started, "general presentation mode", "heaven presentation mode", "Sengoku time Chance cards with the words "Production Mode" written on them are turned over and shuffled, and a production is performed in which one of the cards is selected. Here, there are two types of card effects: a white card effect in which a white card is displayed, and a red card effect in which a red card is displayed.The red card effect is better than the white card effect. The expected value of shifting to the mode (second time saving game state) is set high. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 463(c) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the performance result of the card performance is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 463(c), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the words "general performance mode" written on it is displayed. .

FIG. 463(d) is an example of a display image that notifies that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the mode has shifted to the general production mode.

As shown in FIG. 463(d), when a chance card with the words "general performance mode" written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area. is displayed as a large stop in the center of the display area. Thereafter, the display mode of the background changes, and it is notified that the mode has shifted to the general production mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the background in the chance production mode and the display mode of the background in the general production mode are configured to be different, but they may be displayed in a common background display mode.

In this way, the card performance can suggest that the game state will shift to any one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, thereby further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

(RUSH rush performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 464, the RUSH entry effect in the chance effect mode will be described. FIG. 464 is an example of a display image illustrating the RUSH entry effect in the chance effect mode in the tenth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 464(a) is an example of a display image before starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the chance production mode.

FIG. 464(b) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol won in the short time is displayed in a variable manner and the RUSH rush effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 464(b), when the symbol performance pattern (see FIG. 445) for executing the RUSH entry performance is determined and the RUSH entry performance is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and the predetermined Over a period of time, a performance that appears to make a half-open door rattle shut is performed.

FIG. 464(c) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the RUSH entry performance is successful.

As shown in FIG. 464(c), when the RUSH entry performance is successful, a door closing performance is performed and all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Note that if the RUSH entry performance fails, a performance is performed in which the door opens instead of closing.

FIG. 464(d) is an example of a display image that notifies that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the mode has shifted to the Sengoku time production mode.

As shown in FIG. 463(d), when the completely closed door is opened, the display mode of the background changes to notify that the mode has shifted to the Sengoku time performance mode.

In this way, the RUSH entry effect allows execution of an effect as to whether or not to move to the RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), thereby making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Telop production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the telop presentation in the heaven presentation mode will be described. FIG. 465 is an example of a display image explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the tenth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 465(a) is an example of a display image before starting variable display of the first special symbol and the normal symbol in the heaven production mode.

FIG. 465(b) is an example of a display image when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the telop effect is started by the lottery of the normal symbol. In addition, in FIG. 465(b), although the first special symbol is also displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol may or may not be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 465(b), when the telop effect pattern (see FIG. 448) for executing the telop effect is determined and the telop effect is started, the second starting port 10140 is opened long at the top of the display area. The words ``Emergency alert: Opportunity is about to open...'' are displayed, indicating that this is the case.

FIG. 464(c) is an example of a display image of a telop effect when the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends and the second starting port 10140 is opened long.

As shown in FIG. 464(c), when the second starting port 10140 opens long, the game ball is instructed to hit the right so that it enters the second starting port 10140, and a "chance port" is displayed at the top of the display area. The message "Aim for" will be displayed. In addition, in the telop effect, when the second starting port 10140 does not open long, the words "Chance port did not open..." are displayed at the top of the display area.

In this way, the telop effect suggests that the second starting port 10140 will be opened long, and the game ball can be caused to enter the second starting port 10140.

In addition, the above-mentioned telop effect will interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol, such as the lower left of the display area, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is desirable to display it in an area that is not used. Furthermore, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the telop production is performed so as not to interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. may also be displayed on the back (back layer, etc.).

(Pre-reading performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 466, a look-ahead effect performed in advance variation will be described. FIG. 466 is an example of a display image illustrating a look-ahead effect in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 466(a) is an example of a display image when the "expectation UP zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in the advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 466(a), when the "Expected UP Zone" is executed, bands with the characters "Expected UP Zone" attached are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area.

This "Expectation UP Zone" can suggest in advance that a predetermined performance will be performed and that the transition to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the anticipation of the transition to the state or the RUSH gaming state, and further improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 466(b) is an example of a display image when the "mode transition zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 466(b), when the "mode transition zone" is executed, a band with the characters "mode transition zone" attached is displayed at the top of the display area.

This "mode transition zone" suggests in advance that it is a time saving game and that the game state will be shifted from the normal gaming state to any of the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, or the third time saving gaming state. This can increase the expectation of transition to the gaming state and further improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 466(c) is an example of a display image when the "RUSH expectation zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in the advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 466(c), when the "RUSH expectation zone" is executed, the background display mode of the chance production mode is switched to a special background display mode. Further, by switching to a special background display mode, the size of the main pattern also changes to a small value.

This "RUSH expectation zone" makes it possible to suggest in advance that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur, increasing expectations for the transition to the RUSH gaming state and further improving the interest in gaming. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined image is additionally displayed or the background display mode is changed as a look-ahead effect performed in the advance variation, but the display mode of the reserved image is changed in the advance variation. A look-ahead effect may be executed by doing so.

(Game suspension notice)
Next, with reference to FIG. 467, the notification contents of the game stop notice will be explained. FIG. 467 is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the tenth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 467(a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 467(a), when the first game stop notice is executed, the words "Game is coming to a stop" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The text "The game is coming to a stop" continues to be displayed until the first game stop notice end condition is satisfied.

With this first game stop notice, it is possible to know in advance that the game is about to stop due to the increase in the number of game balls (MY).

FIG. 467(b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 467(b), when the second game stop notice is executed, the words "Approximately XX00 shots until the game stops" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The text "Approximately XX00 shots until the game stops" is displayed continuously until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000), and "Approximately XX00 shots" is the sub-difference of the work RAM 303. Based on the value stored in the ball number counter, the display is updated in the following order: approximately 5,000 shots → approximately 4,000 shots → approximately 3,000 shots → approximately 2,000 shots → approximately 1,000 shots.

With this second game stop notice, it is possible to concretely grasp the increase in the number of game balls until the game is stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the increase in the number of game balls until the game stops is notified by the characters "approximately XX00 shots", but it is not necessary to notify the increase in the number of game balls until the game stops. Good too.

FIG. 467(c) is an example of a display image when the third game stop notice is being executed.

As mentioned above, the third game stop notice is executed when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000) during the jackpot gaming state, and the game stops after the jackpot gaming state ends. be done.

As shown in FIG. 467(c), when the third game stop notice is executed, the words "The game will stop after this jackpot game ends" are displayed in the center of the display area.

The text "The game will stop after this jackpot game ends" continues to be displayed until after the jackpot game state ends.

This third game stop notice allows the player to know that the game will stop after the jackpot game state ends.

(Stop notification)
Next, with reference to FIG. 468, the content of the game stop notification will be explained. FIG. 468 is an example of a display image of game stop notification in the tenth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 468(a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 468(a), when the first game stop notification is executed, only the words "Game has stopped. Today's game is over" are displayed in the display area, indicating that the game has stopped. . Further, when the first game stop notification is being executed, decorative patterns and other information are not displayed, and input of operation information for all performance buttons 54 is also disabled.

This first game stop notification allows the player to clearly understand that the game has been stopped.

FIG. 468(b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notification is started after the first game stop notification is executed and the forced notification time has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 468(b), when the second game stop notification is executed, the display image of the first game stop notification is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area. Then, on the back side of the reduced display image of the first game stop notification, a demo image corresponding to when the game is stopped is displayed.

In the demo image, a predetermined character is displayed, or a QR code is displayed by operating the production button 54 of the determination button. Note that the QR code may be configured to be automatically displayed without depending on the operation of the production button 54 of the determination button.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the demo image shown in FIG. 468(b) is a demo image dedicated to when the game is stopped, but it may also be used in common with the demo image when the game is in progress. .

After it is clearly understood that the game has been stopped by this second game stop notification (after the forced notification time has elapsed), even though the game continues to be notified that the game has been stopped, Demo images can be displayed decoratively until the store closes.

FIG. 468(c) is an example of a display image of the volume adjustment performed when the second operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the left and right buttons is input when the second game stop notification is executed. .

As shown in FIG. 468(c), when the volume is adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the demo image is switched to an adjustment image for volume adjustment. When the effect button 54 of the left button is operated, the volume is adjusted down by one level, and when the effect button 54 of the right button is operated, the volume is adjusted to be increased by one level.

In this way, since the volume can be adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the demo image when the game is stopped.

Although not shown, when the second game stop notification is executed and the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, the light amount adjustment is displayed in the same way as the volume adjustment. The image is displayed. Furthermore, since the light amount can be adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the light amount can be adjusted in accordance with the demo image when the game is stopped.

In this way, the tenth pachinko game machine has a normal game state in which a time-saving prize can be won, and a plurality of time-saving game states (the first time-saving game state ~ 6th time-saving game state), further changes the game state, and performs production according to the new game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, in the tenth pachinko game machine, when left-handed playing is the regular game mode, the normal gaming state, first time-saving gaming state, third time-saving gaming state, or sixth time-saving gaming state is controlled, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode. In the game mode, the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, or the fifth time-saving game state is controlled, so that the game state is further changed in each game mode to further improve the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the tenth pachinko game machine, it is possible to win a time-saving win only in the normal game state, and it is configured to be able to shift from the time-saving win to the second time-saving game state of the RUSH gaming state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the rate of transition to the jackpot gaming state via the RUSH gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Since the normal gaming state is also the initial gaming state after the RAM is cleared, in the state after the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started from the normal gaming state in which the time saving prize can be won, and the game It is possible to improve the operation of gaming machines after the store opens.

In particular, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, after the first jackpot gaming state, there is no transition to the normal gaming state except during the jackpot gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to enter the normal gaming state only by clearing the RAM, and without clearing the RAM, you can suppress the gambling nature (balls played) during normal business hours, or clear the RAM during special events. It is also possible to shift to a normal gaming state.

Furthermore, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, in the pre-read performance, as explained in FIG. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, when a look-ahead effect is executed, a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed in the fluctuation, so expectations for the RUSH game state are high. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by increasing the amount of interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the tenth pachinko game machine, the game can be stopped when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a regulation value (for example, 95,000 pieces), so the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed. be able to.

Then, before the game is stopped, a game stop notice can be given according to the counting range of the increased number of game balls (MY), so it is possible to give an appropriate notice according to the counting range of the increased number of game balls (MY). It is possible to notify the contents. Furthermore, even after the game is stopped, it is possible to appropriately notify the game stop using the forced notification time.

<Modified example of the 10th pachinko game machine>
In the tenth pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 (main Although the CPU 201) is configured to perform this, it may also be configured to be performed by the payout/emission control circuit 400.

Note that the technology described in the tenth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various performances performed in the tenth pachinko game machine may be replaced with performances by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming states (first time-saving gaming state to sixth time-saving gaming state) include replay time (RT state) where the probability of replaying is improved, and assist time where predetermined small roles and operation details of the stop button are announced. (AT state) or assist replay time (ART state) in which replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, jackpots, short-time wins, and small wins include winning a specific combination, stopping and displaying a specific symbol combination (a specific symbol combination winning a prize), and winning an RT state rush win. It may be replaced with either , winning in the AT state rush winning, or winning the rush winning in the ART state.

(others)
In the above-described tenth pachinko game machine, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the tenth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended Example] can be applied to the tenth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[13. 11th pachinko game machine]
Next, the eleventh pachinko game machine will be explained. The eleventh pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The eleventh pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of game performance, production contents, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

In particular, compared to the third pachinko game machine, the 11th pachinko game machine has a game feature mainly consisting of a fluctuating display of normal symbols in a specific time-saving game state (RUSH game state to be described later). The difference is that the time-saving end condition of a specific time-saving game state is constituted by the number of variable displays of normal symbols instead of the number of variable displays of special symbols.

Note that, like the third pachinko game machine, the eleventh pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second special symbol is displayed more favorably than the first special symbol. This is a priority variable machine that gives priority to the variable display of special symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in describing the eleventh pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

Furthermore, "paying out" game balls is not limited to actually paying out game balls to players, but in the case of gaming machines (so-called smart pachinko) that play games by circulating enclosed game balls. This concept includes storing the number of game balls to be paid out (prize ball data) in a storage area of a gaming machine or an electronic storage medium (game card).

[13-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 469, the game board unit 11010 included in the eleventh pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 11010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 469 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 11010 included in the eleventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 11010 includes a game panel 11100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 11100, and on the front side of the game panel 11100, a game area 105 where a fired game ball can roll and flow down is provided. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 469, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 11010 included in the eleventh pachinko game machine mainly includes a first passage gate 11126R, a second passage gate 11126L, and a second passage gate 11126L. The configuration and arrangement of the second starting port 11140, the normal electric accessory unit 11145, the first special electric accessory unit 11130, and the second special electric accessory unit 11150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 11120 located in the gaming area 105 of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 11140, it will be explained again using a different code from the first pachinko gaming machine.

(passing gate)
The eleventh pachinko game machine includes two passing gates: a first passing gate 11126R arranged in the right side area 107 and a second passing gate 11126L arranged in the left side area 106.

The first passage gate 11126R is configured of a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located below the first special electric accessory unit 11130, the normal electric accessory unit 11145, and the second special electric accessory unit 11150, which will be described later in the right side area 107. (downstream side). Further, since the first passing gate 11126R is arranged in the right side area 107, a game ball hit to the right can pass through it (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to pass through).

Therefore, the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 are the first big prize opening 11131 of the first special electric accessory unit 11130, the second starting opening 11140 of the normal electric accessory unit 11145, and the second special electric accessory unit 11150. When the ball does not enter any of the second big prize openings 11151, it is possible to pass through the first passage gate 11126R. As a result, when a right hit is being made in the jackpot game state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 enters the first big prize opening 11131 by the operation of the first special electric accessory unit 11130 arranged above. This reduces the number of game balls that pass through the first passing gate 11126R, so when the game balls pass through the first passing gate 11126R, the normal electric accessory unit 11145 is activated, which causes undesigned playability. It is possible to prevent game balls from unexpectedly entering the second starting port 11140.

In addition, a general prize opening 122 is arranged directly below the first passage gate 11126R, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage gate 11126L can enter the general prize opening 122 very easily. It is possible to pay out prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the general winning hole. In addition, it is not necessary to arrange the general winning a prize opening 122 directly under the first passage gate 11126R.

The second passage gate 11126L is configured with a gate through which game balls can pass, and is arranged directly above the first starting port 11120. Further, since the second passing gate 11126L is arranged in the left side area 106, a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to pass through).

Since the first starting port 11120 is arranged directly below the second passing gate 11126L, the game ball that has passed through the second passing gate 11126L can enter the first starting port 11120 very easily. Therefore, it is possible to receive both the "first special symbol lottery" and the "normal symbol lottery" which will be described later. However, the second passage gate 11126L and the first starting port 11120 are separated by a distance of approximately one game ball, and although it is extremely rare, the game ball that has passed through the second passage gate 11126L is separated from the first starting port 11120. The ball may not enter the first starting port 11120.

Note that the second passage gate 11126L may be arranged on the left side of the center accessory 115, or the chance entrance 119 provided on the stage 118 may be used as the second passage gate 11126L.

When the game ball passes through the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L, a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and a variable display of the normal symbol are performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L, the prize ball is not paid out, but the first passage gate 11126R and the second passage gate 11126L are used as the prize opening (ordinary). It may be configured so that a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out as the picture operation opening).

Moreover, the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L may function as a trigger for operating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (the special symbol that becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed), the accessory continuous operation device is activated when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L. may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the game area 105 in both the right side area 107 and the left side area 106 is provided with two passage gates, but only the right side area 107 may be provided with a passage gate. That is, the configuration may be such that only the first passage gate 11126R arranged in the right region 107 is provided without the second passage gate 11126L arranged in the left region 106.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 11120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 11120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 11121 (see FIG. 470 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 11120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 11140 is located below (downstream side) a first special electric accessory unit 11130 (described later) in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) a first passage gate 11126R and a second special electric accessory unit 11150. It is arranged in a normal electric accessory unit 11145 which will be described later, and allows a game ball hit to the right to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 11140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 11141 (see FIG. 470 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 11140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 11140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 11145 is located below (downstream side) a first special electric accessory unit 11130 (described later) in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) a first passage gate 11126R and a second special electric accessory unit 11150. It is placed so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric utility unit 11145 includes a second starting port 11140, a second starting port switch 11141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 11140, and a normal electric shutter 11147 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction. It is a unit body that integrates a general power solenoid 11148 (see FIG. 470 described later) that operates the general power shutter 11147.

The general power shutter 11147 is operated by the general power solenoid 11148 to move backward and enter the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 11140 or easily, and to move forward and enter the second starting port. It is configured to be able to be moved to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth 11140. Note that instead of the shutter that can move back and forth in the front-rear direction, the normal electricity shutter 11147 may be configured with a movable member called a so-called electric chew that can move in the left-right direction.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 11130 is arranged above (upstream side) than the first passage gate 11126R, the normal electric accessory unit 11145, and the second special electric accessory unit 11150, which will be described later, in the right side area 107.

The first special electric accessory unit 11130 includes a first big winning hole 11131 and a first big winning hole count switch 11132 (see FIG. 470 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 11131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 11134 that is movable in the left-right direction and a first special electric solenoid 11135 (see FIG. 470 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 11134.

The first big winning hole 11131 is a big winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 11131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 10) are specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 11131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first big prize opening 11131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. , A game in which the second grand prize opening 11151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and the player enters the opened second major prize opening 11151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 11156 inside the second big winning hole 11151.

The first special electric shutter 11134 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 11131 by operating the first special electric solenoid 11135. It is configured to be able to be displaced to a closed state in which entry of the ball is impossible or difficult.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 11134 has a substantially fan shape when viewed from the front, is pivoted at the bottom, and is composed of a blade member that is movable in the left and right directions.

When the first special electric shutter 11134 moves to the right and is in the open state, the first big prize opening 11131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the grand prize opening 11131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 11134 moves to the left and is in the closed state, the first big prize opening 11131 is closed, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 11131. becomes. In addition, instead of the wing member movable in the left and right direction, a door member that can be displaced substantially parallel and substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 11100, and a protruding plate that can move forward and backward with respect to the surface of the game panel 11100 can be used. The first special electric shutter 11134 may be constructed of members.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 11150 is arranged below (downstream side) of the first special electric accessory unit 11130 and the normal electric accessory unit 11145 in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the first passage gate 11126R. It is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through.

The second special electric accessory unit 11150 includes a second big winning hole 11151, a second big winning hole count switch 11152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 11151, and a second big winning hole 11151. A second special electric shutter 11154 that can be opened and closed; and a second special electric solenoid 11155 that operates the second special electric shutter 11154 to open and close the second big prize opening 11151 (see FIG. 470 described later); A V winning hole 11156 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 11151 can pass, a V winning hole switch 11157 (see FIG. 470 described later) that detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole 11156, A normal opening 11158 through which game balls that have entered the two major winning openings 11151 and which have not entered the V winning opening 11156 can pass through, a V shutter 11159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 11156, and operating this V shutter 11159. It is a unit body that is integrated with a V shutter solenoid 11160 (see FIG. 470 described later) that opens and closes the V winning opening 11156.

The second big winning hole 11151 is a big winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 11151 in one small winning. is stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 11151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 11154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and when the second special electric solenoid 11155 is operated, the second special electric shutter 11154 advances forward and wins the second grand prize. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 11151, and a closed state in which it is possible or easy to allow a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 11151 by moving the second special electric shutter 11154 backward. It is configured to be able to be displaced between states.

The V winning opening 11156 is a winning opening that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 11159, and is a winning opening that is triggered to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the above-mentioned second route when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 11151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 11156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 11156 After passing (from the second round), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 11131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled through the second route, the second jackpot 11151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 11156 (from the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 11131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 11131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 11131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The normal opening 11158 is configured so that game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 11151 but have not passed through the V winning opening 11156 enter (pass through). In addition, during the small winning game state, if all the game balls that entered the opened second large prize opening 11151 pass through the normal opening 11158 and no game balls passed through the V winning opening 11156, the small winning occurs. There will be no transition from the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state.

The V-shutter 11159 has a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning port 11156 and a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the game ball into the V-winning port 11156 by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 11160. It is configured so that it can be easily displaced into an open state.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, when the small winning game state is entered, the V winning opening 11156 is opened by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 11160, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 11151 is almost It is configured so that it can pass through the prize opening 11156.

In addition, the arrangement relationship of the first special electric accessory unit 11130, the normal electric accessory unit 11145, the second special electric accessory unit 11150, and the first passage gate 11126R arranged in the right side area 107 can be changed in design as appropriate. It is.

[13-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 470, the control circuit of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 470 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 470, the eleventh pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the eleventh pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[13-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 11148, a first special electric solenoid 11135, a second special electric solenoid 11155, and a V-shutter solenoid 11160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 11121, the second starting port switch 11141, the normal pattern operation switch 11127, the first big winning port counting switch 11132, the second big winning port counting switch 11152, and the V winning port switch 11157 are partially different. ing.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 11148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 11147. When the normal power solenoid 11148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 11147 is moved backward to open the second starting port 11140, and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid 11148. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 11147 is moved forward to close the second starting port 11140.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 11135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 11134. When the first special electric solenoid 11135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 11134 to the right to open the first big prize opening 11131, and the main CPU 201 When the electricity is not applied (OFF), the first special electric shutter 11134 is moved to the left to close the first big prize opening 11131.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 11155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 11154. When the second special electric solenoid 11155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 11154 is moved backward to open the second big prize opening 11151, and the second special electric solenoid 11155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 11154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 11151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 11160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 11159. When the V-shutter solenoid 11160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V-shutter 11159 backward to open the V-winning port 11156, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 ( OFF), the V shutter 11159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 11156.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 11121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11120 is detected by the first starting port switch 11121, the main CPU 201 determines that the first acquisition condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of first special symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". (in order from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4)), and the starting conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, If it is established that the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 11121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 11120, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 11141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 11140.

When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 11140 is detected by the second starting port switch 11141, the main CPU 201 determines that the second starting condition has been met, and outputs the starting information of the second special symbol (jackpot determination). (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired second special symbol starting information is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of second special symbols (for example, 2 pieces)". (in order from the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2)), and the starting conditions for the second special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, If it is established that the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when the second starting port switch 11141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 11140, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for the prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the second starting port. is instructed to the payout/firing control circuit 400.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(General figure operation switch)
The normal figure activation switch 11127 is provided in each of the first passage gate 11126R and the second passage gate 11126L, and is a penetrating type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L. It's a switch.

When the normal figure activation switch 11127 detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L, the main CPU 201 operates normally without distinguishing between the first passage gate 11126R and the second passage gate 11126L. The symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random value, normal symbol random symbol value, etc.) is acquired. The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (the normal symbol It will be used for the hit determination process) and the variable display of normal symbols.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 11132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 11131. When the first big prize opening count switch 11132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening 11131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big prize opening 11131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 11152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 11151. When the second big winning hole count switch 11152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 11151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 11151, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the two major winning openings.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning a prize opening switch 11157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning a prize opening 11156. When the V winning opening switch 11157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 11156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot gaming state. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 11156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 11157, the prize ball is not paid out.

(Game ball collection switch)
The game ball collection switch 11179 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the game ball fired from the firing device 6 into the game area 105. The game ball recovery switch 11179 is located on the back side of the game board unit 11010, and is connected to the out port 178, various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 11120, the second starting port 11140, the first large winning port 11131, and the second large winning port). It is arranged in a collecting flow path through which game balls that enter the winning opening 11151, general winning opening 122, etc. It detects balls without distinction. When the entry of a game ball is detected by the game ball collection switch 11179, the main CPU 201 counts the number of fired game balls that have been fired (counts the number of fired game balls counter described later).

[13-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

In particular, in this embodiment, the effect button 54 includes multiple types of buttons (determination button, left/right button, up/down button), and different operation information is output depending on the type of effect button 54. Specifically, when an operation signal is input from the production button 54 corresponding to the enter button, first operation information is output to the sub CPU 301, and when an operation signal is input from the production button 54 corresponding to the left and right buttons, the sub When the second operation information is output to the CPU 301 and an operation signal from the effect button 54 corresponding to the up and down buttons is input, the third operation information is output to the sub CPU 301.

[13-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout/launch of game balls, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 has a circuit that can pay out game balls. A payout device 82, a firing device 6 capable of firing game balls, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

Further, when the payout/launch control circuit 400 in the eleventh pachinko game machine receives a game stop signal from the main control circuit 200 indicating that the game is being stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the firing device 6, the firing of the game ball is stopped (the supply of power to the firing solenoid is stopped). Note that even if the main control circuit 200 stops the game based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 can stop the game even if the firing device 6 does not stop firing the game balls. good.

[13-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 471 to 484. Note that the eleventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to proceed with the game. Note that in this eleventh pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, as will be described later, as a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving generation conditions), "A time-saving gaming" that is triggered by a jackpot and transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "B Time Saving Game State" which is not triggered by a jackpot and shifts to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value, and "C Time Saving Game State" which is triggered by a time saving hit and shifts to after the variable display of special symbols ends. "Game state". Furthermore, "A time-saving game state" and "C-time-saving game state" are time-saving game states that are distinguished from the viewpoint of the operation mode (operation pattern of the general electricity shutter 11147, etc.) during the time-saving game state, and are multiple time-saving game states. It is classified into various states, which will be explained in detail later.

[13-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 471 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 471 is a table for determining “big hit,” “small hit,” “time-saving hit,” or “loss,” and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200. .

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 471, the special symbol hit determination table is a special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 471(a) and a special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 471(b). It is equipped with a special symbol hit determination table.

The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. value data) are associated with each other. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "time-saving hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, loss determination value data). In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data).

That is, according to the special symbol hit determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. ” is determined, but “small hit” is not determined, and in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “loss” is determined, but “time-saving hit” is not determined. become.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11120 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol. , a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "jackpot", a selection rate of approximately 1/49.9 is determined to be a "time-saving hit", and any other selection rate is determined to be a "loss". In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol by about 1, based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol. A selection rate of /319.7 is determined to be a "big hit," a selection rate of about 1/1.004 is determined to be a "small hit," and anything else is determined to be a "loss."

The special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 471(b) includes " The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is are associated. In addition, the special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. , the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data).

That is, according to the special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 471(b), in the time-saving game state, either the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process However, a "time-saving hit" is not determined, and a "big hit" or "loss" is determined in the first special symbol's hit determination process, but a "small hit" is not determined, and a "small hit" is not determined in the second special symbol's hit determination process. , "big hit," "small hit," or "loss."

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11120 in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol. , a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "jackpot", and otherwise is determined to be a "loss". In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140 in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol by about 1, based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol. A selection rate of /319.7 is determined to be a "big hit," a selection rate of about 1/1.004 is determined to be a "small hit," and anything else is determined to be a "loss."

In this way, in this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. The configuration is such that when a game ball enters the starting port 11140, it is more likely to be determined as a "small hit". In addition, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 471 shows that when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140 in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state, it is more likely to be a "big hit" or a "small hit" than a "loss". It is configured so that it is easy to determine that it is a hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, "time-saving hit" is not determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol, but even in the time-saving game state, "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol. may be determined. If the configuration is such that a "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol even in the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving gaming state is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the hit determination process for one special symbol is configured so that a "time-saving hit" is determined with a relatively low selection rate. Furthermore, a "time-saving hit" may be determined in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, but the hit determination process of the second special symbol is relatively more accurate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It is preferable to configure the system so that "time saving" is determined with a low selection rate.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, a ``time-saving hit'' is determined by the special symbol hit determination process, but even if a ``time-saving hit'' is determined in the time-saving game state, it is treated as a ``loss'' and the loss is not lost. It may be controlled so that the stop symbols of the corresponding special symbols are stopped and displayed. That is, even if a "time-saving win" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, control may be performed so as to ignore the "time-saving winning" in the time-saving gaming state.

Also, in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. If configured to be determined, a relatively low selection is made so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It is preferable to determine the "small hit" based on the percentage.

In addition, in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state, the second special symbol hit determination process may be configured so that a "loss" is not determined. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" may be determined.

The above-mentioned range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "big hit", range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "small hit", range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "time-saving hit", The range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a loss, that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the eleventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the eleventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, the V winning opening 11156 can be changed by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 11156 for each setting value. It is also possible to change the passing rate of the game, or change the time-saving end conditions (number of small winnings, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 11156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 11154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[13-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 472 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 472 is a table that determines the “special symbol selection symbol” and “symbol designation command” that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200. remembered.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table contains the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 or the second starting hole 11140. is defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 472, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 59, The main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 29, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol of the special symbol. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 30 and 49, the main CPU 201 determines "z11" as the selected symbol of the special symbol. At the same time, the main CPU 201 determines "zA11" as the symbol designation command, and when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 50 and 69, the main CPU 201 determines "z12" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, and , "zA12" is determined as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 70 to 84, the main CPU 201 determines "z20" as the selected special symbol and "zA20" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 85 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z30" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA30" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, regardless of which value the symbol random number value of the special symbol is. Then, "zA4" is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 selects " z5" is determined, and "zA5" is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 80 to 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The symbols are configured so that the following relational expressions are established: ``total selection rate of z10 to 12''>``z20'' and ``total selection rate of z10 to 12''>``z30''. Note that the relational expression between "z20" and "z30" is not limited to the selection rate of "z20" = "z30", but may be the selection rate of "z20" > "z30", or "z20" < The selection rate of "z30" may also be used.

As will be described in detail later, when time-saving hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, when "z10 to 12" is determined as the selected symbol for the special symbol, the variable of the special symbol After the display ends, the state shifts to the "first time-saving game state", and when "z20" is determined as the selected symbol of the special symbol, after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the state shifts to the "second time-saving game state", and the special When "z30" is determined as the selected symbol, a transition is made to the "third time-saving game state" after the end of the variable display of the special symbol. It is desirable that the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol "z20" which is a condition for transition to the "second time saving gaming state" is 20% or less.

In addition, when time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol without providing the "third time saving gaming state" described later, the "first time saving gaming state" or "second time saving gaming state" is selected. It may be configured to shift to either one of the "gaming states". In addition, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it is configured to shift to either the "first time-saving gaming state" or the "second time-saving gaming state". In this case, the selection symbol "z30" of the special symbol that triggers the transition to the "third time-saving gaming state" is made undeterminable, and the relational expression of "total selection rate of z10 to 12" > selection rate of "z20" is It is only necessary to configure it so that it is true. Also at this time, it is desirable that the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol "z20" which is a condition for transition to the "second time saving gaming state" is 20% or less.

Although the explanation is omitted in the eleventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table sets the stop mode of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the "selected symbol of the special symbol". This table is referred to when making decisions accordingly. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display a stop mode for a jackpot, a stop mode for a small hit, a stop mode for a time-saving hit, or a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The stopping mode is displayed. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[13-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 473 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 473 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state."

As shown in FIG. 473, in the jackpot type determination table, "opening mode of jackpot game state" is associated with the selected symbol of the special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first jackpot 11131 opened during the jackpot gaming state and the opening pattern of the first jackpot 11131. The opening pattern of the first big prize opening 11131 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. is stipulated. In addition, as the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 11131, the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be defined as being different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state" corresponding to the "selected symbols z5 to 7 of the special symbols" determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained is the opening mode of the small winning gaming state. This is the opening mode when the game ball that enters the second jackpot opening 11151, which is opened at the time, passes through the V winning opening 11156 through the second route and shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When transitioning to the jackpot game state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 11151 during the small winning gaming state is the first round, and from the second round onwards, the first big winning opening 11131 is opened. A jackpot game state is started. Incidentally, when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 11151 opened during the small winning gaming state does not pass through the V winning opening 11156, the jackpot gaming state will not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 473, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the "special symbol selection symbol z1" is determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the first special symbol is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. (10R) is determined, and when the "selected symbols z2, z3 of special symbols" are selected, 4 rounds (4R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. In addition, when the "selected symbols z1 to 3 of the special symbols" are determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the first special symbol is obtained, the same number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. It may be configured so that

In addition, when the "special symbol selection symbol z7" is determined when the jackpot judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, 10 rounds (10R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds. . When the "special symbol selection symbols z5 to 7" are determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, 10 rounds (10R) is determined as the maximum number of rounds in all cases. ing. It should be noted that a different number of rounds may be determined depending on the "selected special symbols z5 to 7" determined when the small hit determination value data of the second special symbol is obtained.

Further, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 11131 may be configured to be different depending on the selected special symbol.

[13-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 474 is an example of a small winning type determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the small type determination table shown in FIG. 474 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 474, the small hit type determination table includes information for the "selected special symbol (z5 to 7)" that is determined when the small hit judgment value data for the second special symbol is obtained. , and "opening mode of small winning game state" are associated with each other.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of openings of the second large winning hole 11151, the opening pattern of the second large winning hole 11151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156 that are opened during the small winning gaming state. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second big prize opening 11151 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the small winning game state, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, and the ED waiting time (ending time). etc. are stipulated. Moreover, the opening waiting time, opening time, etc. are defined in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156.

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 11151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156 are measured simultaneously, and When the big winning hole 11151 is open, the V winning hole 11156 is also opened. Therefore, when the small winning game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 11156. In addition, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156, like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 11151, multiple opening times and closing times may be defined so that the V winning opening 11156 is opened and closed multiple times. .

In addition, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 11151, the maximum opening time of each number of times, the closing time of each number of times, the ED waiting time (ending time), The small win type determination table may be configured such that at least one of the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156 is different.

In particular, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156 is varied depending on the selected special symbol, and an advantageous operating mode that allows (or facilitates) passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 11156, and The small hit type determination table may be configured such that a disadvantageous operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass is determined.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 4R x 10 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 600) The total number of game balls that can be paid out in the winning game state (for example, one small hit x 10 balls (second prescribed number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 150) is set to be smaller, and the jackpot It can be said that the gaming state is a "first special gaming state" which is advantageous, and the small winning gaming state is a "second special gaming state" where the profit is lower than the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and In the case, the first big prize opening 11131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 11151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said that

[13-3-5. Game status related setting table]
FIG. 475 is an example of a gaming state related setting table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 475 is a table for setting the gaming state, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 475, the gaming state related setting tables include gaming state related setting table 1, which is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 475(a), and gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 475(b). A gaming state related setting table 2 that is referred to after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, and a gaming state related setting table 3 that is referenced after the variable display number of special symbols shown in FIG. 475(c) reaches the ceiling value. It is equipped with

As shown in FIG. 475, in the gaming state related setting table, "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "time saving termination condition" are associated as "gaming state setting".

The “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of gaming state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. State flag = 0 indicates "normal gaming state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state", state flag = 2 indicates "B working time saving gaming state", state flag = 3 indicates "C time saving gaming state". indicates the status.

The “normal power operation pattern” is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 11140, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. General voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" described later is difficult to determine, and the "short open pattern" described below is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates a state where the "long open pattern" and " When the general voltage operation pattern = 02, the ``long opening pattern'' is determined more easily than when the general voltage operation pattern = 00 and the general voltage operation pattern = 01. This indicates a state in which it is difficult to determine a short-circuit open pattern. That is, the opening pattern of the second starting port 11140 operates in the order of normal power operation pattern=00<normal power operation pattern=01<normal power operation pattern=02 so as to be advantageous to the player.

The "time-saving end condition" is the end condition for ending the time-saving game state, and the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" and/or "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" are set as the end conditions. This "variable display number of special symbols" indicates the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Furthermore, although not shown, transitioning to a jackpot gaming state is also set as a time-saving termination condition. When any one of these time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state is ended and a transition is made to the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set is referred to as the "first time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set. The time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern=01 is set is referred to as the "second time-saving game state" and the "third time-saving game state".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which the general electricity operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as a "fourth time-saving game state".

In addition, in the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as the "fifth time-saving game state".

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (state flag = 1 to 3), the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set are collectively referred to as "RUSH game state". '', and the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 or 01 is set are also collectively referred to as the "general game state."

In this "normal game state" and "general game state (first time-saving game state and third time-saving game state)", left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol can be drawn, and the first The game consists mainly of a variable display of special symbols.

In addition, in the "RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state, fourth time-saving gaming state, and fifth time-saving gaming state)", right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and the normal symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are It is possible, and the gameplay consists mainly of fluctuating display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the second starting port 11140 is long opened at approximately 1/68.5 by drawing a normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second starting port 11140, the second special symbol is drawn. It is possible to shift to the jackpot game state at about 1/1 from the first route triggered by a jackpot by lottery and the second route triggered by a small win (see FIG. 471).

As shown in FIG. 475(a), the gaming state related setting table 1 that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state includes "status flags", A "general power operation pattern" and a "time saving termination condition" are associated with each other. Further, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 475(a), "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" and "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" are set as "time saving end conditions".

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 475(a), when "selected symbols z1, z4, z5 of special symbols", the state flag indicating the A time saving gaming state = 1, the general power operation pattern = 02, As the time saving end conditions, the variable number of special symbols to be displayed = 10,000 times and the variable number of times to display normal symbols = 120 times are set. Further, when the selected symbols z2, z3, z6, z7 of the special symbols are selected, the state flag indicating the normal game state = 0, the normal power operation pattern = 00 are set, and the time saving end condition is not set.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, it is configured to shift to the "normal game state" or the "fifth time-saving game state" depending on the selected special symbol.

Here, after the end of the jackpot game state due to the lottery of the first special symbol, the transition to the "normal game state" occurs at the first transition rate (40%) depending on the selection rate of the selected special symbol (see Figure 472). , transition to the "fifth time-saving gaming state" at the second transition rate (60%). Alternatively, in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the third transition rate ( 100%), it moves to the "5th time saving gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state from the second route triggered by the small winning ends, depending on the selection rate of the special symbol selection symbol (see Figure 472), At the fourth transition rate (80%), the game shifts to the "fifth time-saving gaming state", and at the fifth transition rate (20%), it shifts to the "normal gaming state".

In addition, when transitioning to the "5th time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state (when the normal power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable display of normal symbols" "number of times" is set. The variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed here can be set to 120 times, which is the sixth time saving number.

After transitioning to the "fifth time-saving gaming state" after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the time-saving ending condition is satisfied, the fifth time-saving gaming state will shift to the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 475(b), the game state related setting table 2 that is referred to after the end of the variable display of the special symbols per time saver includes a "status flag" for the selected symbol (time saver symbol) of the special symbol. , "normal power operation pattern" and "time-saving termination condition" are associated with each other. In addition, in the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 475(b), a "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" or "a variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" are set as "time saving end conditions".

According to the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 475(b), the state flag = 3 indicating the C time-saving gaming state is set for all "selected symbols of special symbols". In addition, when the selected symbol z10 to 12 of the special symbol is selected, the general power operation pattern = 00 is set, and as a time saving end condition, when the selected symbol z10 of the special symbol is selected, the variable display number of special symbols = 50 times. When the selected symbol z11 of the special symbol is set, the variable display number of the special symbol is set to 100 times, and when the special symbol is the selected symbol z12, the variable display number of the special symbol is set to 150 times. Further, when the "special symbol selection symbol z20" is selected, the normal power operation pattern = 02 and the variable display frequency of the normal symbol = 950 times are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, when "special symbol selection symbol z30" is selected, the general power operation pattern = 01 and the variable display number of special symbols = 950 times are set as the time saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, the "first time saving game state", "second time saving game state", or "first time saving game state" is selected depending on the selected special symbol. 3. It is configured to shift to a "3-hour saving gaming state".
Here, after the end of the variable display of the special symbols per time saving, the transition to the "first time saving game state" is made at the sixth transition rate (70%) depending on the selection rate of the selected special symbol (see Figure 472). , at the seventh transition rate (15%), it transitions to the "second time-saving gaming state", and at the eighth transition rate (15%), it shifts to the "third time-saving gaming state".

In addition, when transitioning to the "first time saving game state" after the end of the variable display of the special symbol per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 00 is determined), the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied as " ``Variable number of times special symbols are displayed'' is set. The variable display number of special symbols here can be set to 50 times, which is the minimum number of first time reductions, 100 times, which is the second number of time reductions, and 150 times, which is the third number of time reductions. The number of times and the third time saving number are set to integral multiples of the minimum first time saving number.
When the time saving game state is shifted to the ``first time saving game state'' after the end of the variable display of the special symbols per time saving, when the time saving end condition is satisfied (at every predetermined period), the game state is shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, when transitioning to the "second time saving game state" after the end of the variable display of the special symbol per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the condition for easily satisfying the time saving end condition is " A variable display number of normal symbols is set. The variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed here can be set to 950 times, which is the fourth time saving number.
Further, the fourth time saving number is set to the number of times that is virtually guaranteed to shift to the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the second time-saving gaming state is entered, it is virtually guaranteed that the player will enter the jackpot gaming state. Note that the fourth time saving number is not limited to 950 as long as it is a number that is guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when transitioning to the "third time saving gaming state" after the end of the variable display of the special symbol per time saving (when the general power operation pattern = 01 is determined), the condition for easily satisfying the time saving end condition is " ``Variable number of times special symbols are displayed'' is set. The variable number of times the special symbol is displayed here can be set to 950 times, which is the fifth time saving number.
Further, the fifth time saving number of times is set to the number of times that can be transferred from the third time saving gaming state to the B working time saving gaming state (fourth time saving gaming state). Therefore, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state is not ended except by transitioning to the jackpot game state or transitioning to the B time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 475(c), the game state related setting table 3 that is referred to after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value includes "state flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "time saving end condition". are associated. Further, in the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 475(c), the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is set as the "time saving end condition".

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 475(c), when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value (950 times), the state flag indicating B time saving game state = 2, normal power operation pattern = 02 , the variable number of normal symbol display times = 950 is set as the time saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the ceiling value, it is configured to shift to the "fourth time-saving game state". The variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed here can be set to 950 times, which is the seventh time saving number.

The seventh time saving number mentioned above is set to the number of times that is guaranteed to substantially shift to the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, it is virtually guaranteed that the player will shift to the jackpot gaming state. Note that the seventh time saving number is not limited to 950 as long as it is a number that is guaranteed to substantially shift to a jackpot gaming state.

Note that the design of the first to eighth transition rates in each time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate by changing the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. However, after the end of the variable display of special symbols per time saving, the 7th transition rate to transition to the "second time saving gaming state" may be lower than the 6th transition rate to transition to the "first time saving gaming state". desirable.

Further, the number of times set as the "time saving end condition" from the first number of time reductions to the seventh number of time reductions can be freely changed in design as appropriate. However, it is desirable that the second number of time reductions and the third number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state are integral multiples of the first time reduction number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" and/or the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" are set as "time-saving end conditions"; "number of times" may also be set as a time-saving termination condition.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is provided with three types of normal power operation patterns (00, 01, 02) of low, medium, and high, but when configured without the "third time-saving game state", , the general voltage operation pattern=00 and the general voltage operation pattern=02 may be configured. In this case, the "special symbol selection symbol z30" that triggers the setting of the general power activation pattern = 01 is the same as the "special symbol selection symbol z10-12" or the "special symbol selection symbol z20". Just set the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table sets the gaming state regardless of the "gaming state at the time of winning", but the gaming state can be set according to the "gaming state at the time of winning". It may be configured to do so. When setting the gaming state according to the "gaming state at the time of winning", if the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state", it is better than when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state". It is also desirable to set the game state so that it is easy for the player to shift to an advantageous gaming state. For example, in the gaming state related setting table that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state, when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving gaming state", the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 475(a) Although the state flag = 0 or state flag = 1 is set depending on the "selected special symbol", if the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state", all "selected special symbols" It is desirable to set the status flag = 1 and the general power operation pattern = 02 (advantageous) for the current condition.

[13-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
476, 477, and 478 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 476 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the 11th pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 477 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the 11th pachinko gaming machine. Yes, and FIG. 478 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the RUSH gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 476, 477, and 478 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table that determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation display time. "Special symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the special symbol, and at least the variation display time of the special symbol is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 476, 477, and 478, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random number value for reach determination, and the performance selection. The random number value, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 476, 477, and 478 shows the contents of the performance, etc. for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 476, FIG. 477, or FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the symbol hit determination process and the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation display time based on the determined special symbol variation pattern.

Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 11120, or a gaming ball entering the second starting port 11140. It is configured such that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern of the second special symbol triggered by this. Here, when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, they are also referred to as a first special symbol variation pattern command or a second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T shown in FIG. 476 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

As mentioned above, this embodiment is configured so that a "time saving hit" can be determined only in the normal gaming state, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. When the result of the determination process (win or loss) is a "time saving win", a dedicated special symbol fluctuation pattern different from a "jackpot" is configured to be determined.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 476 provides an opportunity to shift to the first time-saving game state when the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit". “Special symbol selection symbols z10 to 12”, “Special symbol selection symbol z20” that triggers the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and “Special symbol selection symbol z20” that triggers the transition to the third time-saving gaming state z30'', different variation patterns (C1H to C4H) can be determined.

In the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol (C1H to C4H) dedicated to when there is a "time-saving hit" can be used as a "card performance" or "RUSH" as a special performance when there is a "time-saving hit". It is possible to perform a "rushing effect". Furthermore, since the fluctuation pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" when it is a "time-saving hit", the transition pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" when it is a "time-saving hit". It is possible to perform a performance corresponding to the game state to be played.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 476 is configured such that when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, a variation pattern of the special symbol different from the first special symbol can be determined. ing.

As mentioned above, in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to transition to the jackpot game state at about 1/1 from the first route triggered by a jackpot and the second route triggered by a small win. (See Figure 471). Therefore, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol in which the ``jackpot notification performance'' for notifying the transition to the jackpot game state is executed can be determined.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 477 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 477, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(a) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(b) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the normal gaming state. It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table J2 and a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c). The main CPU 201 performs the operations shown in FIGS. 477(a), 477(b), and 477() based on "the number of variable display times N of the first special symbol" which is subtracted each time the first special symbol is displayed variablely. c) One of the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3 will be determined.

The above-mentioned "variable display number N of the first special symbol" is initially set when starting the general gaming state, and after that, the general gaming state continues even if the variable display number N of the first special symbol reaches 0. This will be newly set when the

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when "the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N>10" in the normal gaming state.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 477(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined when "0<the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N≦10" in the normal gaming state. .

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when "the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N=0" in the normal gaming state.

Also, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(a), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 477(b), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c) are , When the result (win or loss) of the first special symbol is a "loss", it is possible to determine the special symbol variation pattern (00H, 10H, 11H) that is associated with the variation display time of different special symbols. It is configured.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(a), when the result (win or loss) of the first special symbol's hit determination process is "loss", the normal special symbol variation pattern 00H can be determined. It is composed of

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. The special symbol variation pattern 10H is configured to be determinable.

This suggestion special symbol variation pattern 10H is associated with a longer special symbol variation display time (15 seconds) than the normal special symbol variation pattern 00H.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c), when the result of the hit determination process (win or loss) for the first special symbol is "lose", as a dedicated special symbol variation pattern, A variation pattern 11H of special symbols for determination is configured to be determinable.

This special symbol variation pattern 11H for judgment is associated with a longer special symbol variation display time (20 seconds) than the special symbol variation pattern 10H for suggestion.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process (win or loss) for the first special symbol is a "loss", as the "variable display number N of the first special symbol" approaches 0 (the variable display number N of the first special symbol (as N is counted), a predetermined performance can be performed for a long time.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 477(b) has a shorter special symbol variation display time than the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 477(a). The variation pattern may be configured to be determinable. Moreover, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c) is a special symbol with a shorter special symbol fluctuation display time than the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 477(b). The variation pattern may be configured to be determinable.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 477(c) displays a dedicated special symbol variation pattern (11H) when the result of the hit determination process (win or loss) for the first special symbol is a "loss". Constructed to be decidable.
Thereby, when "the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N=0", a dedicated performance can be performed based on the dedicated special symbol variation pattern (11H).

As will be described later, when the general gaming state is the first time saving game state, "50", which is the same as the minimum first time saving number of times in the first time saving game state, is initially set. Thereafter, even when the number of variable display times of the first special symbol reaches N=0, when the normal gaming state continues, "50" is newly set and the process is repeated. Here, when the general game state is the first time-saving game state, the "variable number of special symbol display times" as the time-saving end condition is set to 50, 100, or 150 times, and the time-saving end condition is If established, the state shifts to the normal gaming state.
For this reason, in the first time-saving game state as the general game state, one cycle is defined as the variable display number of the first special symbol being displayed 50 times, and the special symbol variation pattern table J1, the special symbol variation pattern table J2, The special symbol fluctuation pattern table switches in the order of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3, and whether or not to shift to the normal gaming state based on the dedicated special symbol fluctuation pattern (11H) of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3. You can perform a special performance.

Further, when the general game state is the third time saving game state, "50 times" is set, which is the same as the minimum first time saving number of times in the first time saving game state. Thereafter, when the normal gaming state is continued even when the number of variable display times of the first special symbol reaches N=0, "900 times" is newly set.
Here, when the general game state is the third time-saving game state, the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" as the time-saving end condition is set to 950 times.
Therefore, in the third time-saving game state as the general game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table switches in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1, special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2, and special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3. Based on the dedicated special symbol variation pattern (11H) of the special symbol variation pattern table J3, a dedicated performance can be performed to notify that the third time-saving game state is in place.

In addition, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3 in FIGS. Similar to the state special symbol variation pattern table T, it is configured such that a special symbol variation pattern different from the first special symbol can be determined, and the special symbol variation pattern in which the "jackpot notification performance" is executed is determined. configured to be possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, three variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for special symbols in the normal gaming state, but the number of variation pattern tables J1 to J3 for special symbols in the normal gaming state is limited to three. It may be one, or two or more.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state as the general game state, but the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state Different fluctuation pattern tables may be configured depending on the state and the fifth time-saving game state.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in RUSH gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 478(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when the RUSH gaming state is the "second time saving gaming state or the fourth time saving gaming state". The special symbol variation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 478(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined in the "fifth time-saving gaming state" as the RUSH gaming state.

Between the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 478(a) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 478(b), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 478(b) is When the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol, a variation pattern of the special symbol associated with a short variation display time of the special symbol can be determined.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 478(a) and the special symbol variation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 478(b) are different from each other in FIG. 476 when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similar to the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The pattern is configured to be determinable.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the same fluctuation pattern table J2 was constructed in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state, different fluctuation patterns are created in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. A table may also be configured. Furthermore, the fifth time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table, or the fifth time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table. good.

[13-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 479 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prereading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 11120 or the second starting port 11140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 479(a) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the gaming state as pre-reading related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 479(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 479(b) is an example of the structure of a pre-read command as the analyzed information by analyzing the starting information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 479(b), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

"Parameter 1" is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small win, time-saving win, or loss based on the random value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 479(c) shows the settings of parameter 1. This is an example of a table.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the selected symbol of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value, and FIG. 479(d) is the setting table for parameter 2. This is an example.

"Parameter 3" is the fluctuation information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for production selection. This is an example of the setting table No. 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[13-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 480 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the eleventh pachinko game machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 480 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is used to determine the hit of the normal symbols obtained when the game ball passes through the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L. This is a table that is referred to when determining ``normal symbol win'' or ``normal symbol loss'' by lottery based on random numbers.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 480 includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 480, and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/68.5. In addition, if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 957 and 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol loss", and converts the winning determination value data of the normal symbol into "normal symbol loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, the range (width) of the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol that is determined as "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. By varying the opening pattern of the second starting port 11140 according to the gaming state (normal operation pattern), the degree of profit given to the player is varied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" may be varied depending on the type of A time saving gaming state and B time saving gaming state.

[13-3-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 481 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 481 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "normal symbol selection symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the regular symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 481 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit determination value data” or “normal symbol loss determination value data”), the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, Normal symbols and selected symbols are defined in association with each other. Note that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 481 and determines the selected symbol for the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 481, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 75, and selects "f1" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol. If the symbol random number value is between 76 and 100, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

Note that the range (width) of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol from which the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is selected, that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting a selected symbol of a normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (in the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process) is used regardless of the game state. The selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected based on the result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that the selection symbol of the normal symbol is selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 480) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 481), the selected symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[13-3-10. Second starting port opening pattern determination table]
FIG. 482 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for the second starting port in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 482 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The opening pattern determination table for the second starting port determines the operation mode of the shutter for normal electricity 11147 according to the gaming state (normal electricity operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal pattern when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit. It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 11140.

The second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. ing.

In addition, the "opening pattern of the second starting port" is the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 11140, and the "first wait time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 11140. "second opening time" when the second starting port 11140 is in the second open state, "second wait time" when the second starting port 11140 is closed for the second time, and closing the second starting port 11140 and an "ending time" for ending the operation of the general power shutter 11147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. decide. Note that, upon determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 11140, the main CPU 201 transmits a second starting port opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second starting port 11140 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, there is an unfavorable "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 11140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 11140 is long. There are two types of open patterns: "Open pattern (91H02H)". Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port may include three or more types of opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.072 seconds). Therefore, even if it is determined that the symbol has hit normally, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 11140, It is structured so that it is essentially treated as a loss.

Further, the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (for example, 5.4 seconds) that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 11140.

According to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. Even when the selected symbol is "f2", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined). ).

In addition, in the case of the third time saving game state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting hole, and the selection of the normal symbol When the symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port.

In addition, in the second time saving game state, the fourth time saving game state and the fifth time saving game state, even when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2". The configuration is such that, even at certain times, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port.

Therefore, the normal voltage operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short open pattern" is easy to determine, and the general voltage operation pattern = 01 indicates the state in which the "long open pattern" and the "short open pattern" are easily determined. When the normal voltage operation pattern = 02, the ``long open pattern'' is easier to determine and the ``short open pattern'' is difficult to determine than when the general voltage operation pattern = 01. It shows the status.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in Figure 482, there are "Random value for normal symbol hit determination (see Figure 480)" and "Random value for normal symbol (see Figure 481)". The "long open probability" calculated by summing up the "long open pattern" is shown as a reference. In this embodiment, when the normal power activation pattern = 00, although the normal pattern per symbol is approximately 1/68.5, a long open pattern is never determined, so the "long open probability" is It is 0. In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the selection rate per normal symbol is approximately 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected symbol "f2" of the normal symbol that determines the long open pattern is 35/101. For this reason, the "long open probability" is approximately 1/197.6. In addition, when the normal operation pattern = 01, the number per normal symbol is approximately 1/68.5, and the long open pattern is determined by all the selected symbols of the normal symbols (101/101). The "long open probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for general electric power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second starting ports is determined, and the second starting port 11140 is opened, the second starting port 11140 is opened. When three game balls enter the opening 11140, the opening pattern of the second starting opening ends (the second starting opening 11140 closes).

[13-3-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 483 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 483 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the normal symbol, and at least the variation display time of the normal symbol is determined.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 483, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the random value for production of the normal symbol, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 483 shows the content of the performance, etc. for the sake of clarity.

FIG. 483(a) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state,
FIG. 483(b) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state,
FIG. 483(c) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state,
FIG. 483(d) is an example of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state,
FIG. 483(e) is an example of the normal symbol variation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving gaming state in the RUSH gaming state.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the normal symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIG. 483 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined normal symbol variation pattern table, and changes the normal symbol variation based on the selected symbol of the normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol are determined. After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 483(a) has the longest normal symbol than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern tables F2 to F5 shown in FIGS. 483(b) to 483(e). It is configured to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern (00H, 01H) of the normal symbol associated with the fluctuation display time of.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 483(b) has a shorter normal symbol fluctuation display than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 483(a). It is configured to be able to determine fluctuation patterns (10H, 11H) of normal symbols associated with time.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 483(c) has shorter normal symbols than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 483(b). It is configured to be able to determine fluctuation patterns (20H, 21H, 22H, 23H) of normal symbols associated with fluctuation display times.

The fluctuation pattern table F4 of the normal symbols in the second time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. It is configured such that a normal symbol variation pattern (30H) associated with a shorter normal symbol variation display time can be determined than the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time saving game state shown in c).

When the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the variation pattern table F5 of the normal symbols in the fifth time-saving game state shown in FIG. 483(e) is changed to the second pattern shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (40H) associated with a shorter normal symbol variation display time than the normal symbol variation pattern table F4 in the time saving game state and the fourth time saving game state.

That is, the normal symbol variation pattern table F1 in the normal gaming state, the normal symbol variation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the fourth The fluctuation pattern of normal symbols is changed so that the average fluctuation display time of the normal symbols becomes relatively short in the order of the fluctuation pattern table F4 of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state and the fluctuation pattern table F5 of normal symbols in the fifth time-saving gaming state. The table is configured.

In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. The variation pattern (23H) of the normal symbol in which the ``telop effect'' is executed is configured to be determinable. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 includes a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selected symbol f1" is selected. Although it is configured to be determinable, it may also be configured such that the variation pattern of the normal symbols in which the "telop effect" is executed can be determined only when the "selected symbol f2 of the normal symbols" is selected. Furthermore, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 is configured to be able to determine the normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection symbol f3" is selected. It's okay.

As mentioned above, in the RUSH gaming state (the second time saving gaming state, the fourth time saving gaming state, and the fifth time saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and the gameplay is mainly based on the fluctuating display of normal symbols. It consists of Therefore, the fluctuation pattern tables F4 and F5 of normal symbols in the RUSH gaming state shown in FIGS. The variation patterns (30H, 31H, 32H, 33H, 34H, 35H, 40H) are configured to be determinable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols in the RUSH gaming state is combined with the fluctuation pattern table F4 of normal symbols in the second time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols in the fifth time-saving gaming state. Although configured separately from the pattern table F5, the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state may be configured with a common normal symbol variation pattern table.

[13-3-12. Game stop command determination table]
FIG. 484 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. Note that the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 484 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000 pieces), the game will be stopped in principle. However, if the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value during a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state, the game will be stopped after the small winning gaming state or jackpot gaming state ends. Become.

In addition, the "game stop command" is a command that transmits information regarding the stop of the game according to the increased number of game balls (MY) to the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub-control circuit 300 uses the game stop command By receiving this, it becomes possible to issue a "game stop notice" to the effect that the game will be stopped or a "game stop notification" to the effect that the game is in a stopped state in advance on the display device 7 or the like.

In the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 484, "game stop function operation management phase", "game stop notice start condition", and "game stop command" are associated.

Here, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is set based on the increased number (MY) of game balls, and the game is stopped. This is information indicating the status of the function.

As will be described later, in this "game stop function activation management phase", when the increased number of game balls (MY) is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is set to 00H. is in the "first counting range (85000-89999)" from the initial boundary value or more to less than the first boundary value, "01H" is set, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first boundary value. When the count is in the "second counting range (90000 to 94999)" from above the regulation value to below the regulation value, "02H" is set. In addition, if the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the "third counting range (95000~)" that is greater than the regulation value, when the game is in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state (before the game stop state). is set to "03H", and when the game is not in a small win game state or a jackpot game state (during a game stop state), "04H" is set.

In addition, the "increased number of game balls (MY)" is calculated by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls). It is a number. Although details will be described later, the "increased number of game balls (MY)" corresponds to the "difference ball number counter" (increase in the number of game balls (MY) = value of the difference ball number counter).

In this way, the increased number of game balls (MY) is determined by the "initial counting range (84,999 or less)," the "first counting range (85,000 to 89,999)," and the "second counting range (90,000 to 94,999)." )" and "third counting range (95000~)", which can be identified by the game stop function operation management phase. Note that the values of the initial boundary value, the first boundary value, and the regulation value can be changed in design as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 484, the game stop command determination table indicates that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the initial count range (84999 or less), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 00H, the game The configuration is such that a stop command is not determined and no notification regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) is made.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 484 shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the first counting range (85000 to 89999), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 01H, If the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as "first game stop notice start condition") in the first counting range is satisfied, the game stop command = 01H that can execute the first game stop notice is executed. configured to be determined.

The first game stop notice based on the game stop command=01H will be continuously executed until the "first game stop notice end condition" described later is satisfied.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 484 shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the second counting range (90000 to 94999), that is, when the game stop function operation management phase = 02H, If the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as "second game stop notice start condition") in the second counting range is satisfied, the game stop command = 02H that can execute the second game stop notice is executed. configured to be determined.

The second game stop notice based on the game stop command = 02H has a notification mode that is partially different from the first game stop notice, and is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value. become.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the first game stop notice and the second game stop notice are given in different notification modes, they may be in a common notification mode. The notification mode of the game stop notice will be described in detail later.

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. When the function operation management phase=03H, the game stop command=03H that can execute the third game stop notice is determined.

The third game stop notice based on the game stop command = 02H has a notification mode that is partially different from the first game stop notice and the second game stop notice. will continue to run until the end of the process).

In addition, the game stop command determination table shown in FIG. When the operation management phase=04H, the game stop command=04H that can execute the game stop notification is determined.

The game stop notification based on the game stop command=04H is in a notification mode different from the game stop notice, and will be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared by the backup clear switch 176.

Here, as shown in FIG. 484, the "first game stop notice start condition" in the first counting range is a jackpot game state of the selected symbol z4 of the special symbol during a jackpot game state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol. During the jackpot game state of the special symbol selection symbol z5, either the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), the fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state). It is set to be in the gaming state.

The second time-saving gaming state, the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the fifth time-saving gaming state are all RUSH gaming states, and when the player shifts to the RUSH gaming state, it becomes easier to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the player can earn a large amount of gaming value ( This is a game state in which you can expect to win a game ball. During the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol, during the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z4 of the special symbol, and during the jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z5 of the special symbol, the fifth time-saving game is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the player can expect to obtain a large amount of gaming value (game balls).
Therefore, the "first game stop notice start condition" in the first counting range sets a gaming state in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of gaming value (gaming balls). Therefore, when the game state is such that the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), execution of the game stop notice can be started in advance of the second count range.

The "second game stop notice start condition" in the second counting range is first branched by the executed flag. This "executed flag" is a flag for determining whether or not the first game stop notice has already been executed, and the executed flag = 0 indicates that the first game stop notice has not been executed. The executed flag=1 indicates that the first game stop notice has already been executed.

Then, as the "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range, when the executed flag = 0, the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the first boundary value of 90000. That is set.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has not been executed, the number of game balls will increase as game balls enter the first starting hole 11120, general winning hole 122, etc. and predetermined prize balls are paid out. Even when the number (MY) reaches the first boundary value, execution of the game stop notice will be started.

In addition, as the "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range, when the executed flag = 1, during all jackpot game states not limited to the selected symbols of special symbols, the second time-saving game state (RUSH gaming state), a fourth time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state), and a fifth time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will start when the player enters a gaming state in which he or she can expect to obtain a predetermined gaming value (gaming balls). will be done.

On the other hand, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the number of game balls will increase as the game balls enter the first starting hole 11120, the general winning hole 122, etc. and the prescribed prize balls are paid out. Even when (MY) reaches the first boundary value, execution of the game stop notice is not started. For this reason, although game balls enter the first starting port 11120, general prize winning port 122, etc., a predetermined prize ball is paid out, and the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value. , even if the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the first boundary value again due to the firing of game balls (such as when going back and forth between the first counting range and the second counting range), When the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice is not started, and the trouble caused by the game stop notice can be eliminated.

[13-4. Main control processing]
In the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include main control main processing, special symbol control processing, and normal symbol control processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the system timer interrupt processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the main control main processing, special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and system timer interrupt processing will be explained, and the explanation of other processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[13-4-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) controlled by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486. Note that FIGS. 485 and 486 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S11001). In step S11001, if the main CPU 201 determines that the power outage signal bit is "0" (YES in step S11001), the main CPU 201 determines that a power outage is being detected, and performs the determination process in step S11001. repeat.

In step S11001, if the main CPU 201 determines that the power outage signal bit is not "0" (NO in step S11001), the main CPU 201 determines that power outage is not being detected and proceeds to step S11002.

Next, in step S11002, the main CPU 201 performs a stack pointer setting process related to the gaming area. Here, for example, the final address of the stack area (gaming area) +1 is set in the stack pointer. If the stack is used during the subsequent processing, after subtracting 1 from the stack pointer, store the register value etc. at that address, and from then on, similarly, move the stack area (gaming area) to the address with the larger address value. Use them in order from small to small areas.

Next, in step S11003, internal register initialization processing is performed. Here, for example, the built-in registers are initialized by referring to the built-in register initial setting data table. Further, the start address (upper side) "F0" H of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register (for example, the Q register).

After that, in step S11004, the state information (on/off state) of the backup clear switch 176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 174 inserted into the setting key insertion slot are stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register). The status is stored so that the status can be checked later in the startup status check process.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing (step S11005). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a startup wait process on the sub control circuit 300 side. The startup waiting time (wait period) is approximately 12000 msec. Also, during this startup waiting time, the main CPU 201 performs processing for checking the generation of an interrupt request signal (XINT), processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and processing for outputting a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This processing is performed using a timeout register. Also, even when interrupts are disabled, for example, the timer counter can be controlled to be updated, and a timeout register can be used to determine with one instruction whether or not the timer counter has timed out, and the process can be branched. It is also possible to perform control such that the processing branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether or not a timer interrupt is performed.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs RAM access setting processing (step S11006). In this process, the main CPU 201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs designated area CRC inspection processing (step S11007). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a CRC check on the gaming area and the outside area of the main RAM 203 by calculating the CRC. Here, if it is determined that there is an abnormality (error) in the CRC check, a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality is set in a predetermined register (for example, B register), and if it is determined to be normal in the CRC check, sets a flag "0" in a predetermined register (for example, the B register) to indicate that there is no abnormality.

Note that the CRC check is, for example, a process in which data in a designated area is divided by a specific predetermined value and the remainder is used as a value for checking whether or not there is an abnormality. This check value is calculated at different times, and if they do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (an abnormality has occurred in the position or value of the data).

Next, in step S11008, the main CPU 201 performs startup state check processing. In this process, the startup state is determined depending on whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 203 according to a CRC check, the operation of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not the power is restored during a setting change. The clear range of the main RAM 203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined activation state.

Here, if it is determined that there is an abnormality (error) in the CRC check, the startup state is determined as "RAM abnormality", the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range at abnormality", and it is impossible to return to the game. Perform error handling. In the game return impossible error process, the WDT clear process and the restart process are repeated in an infinite loop, and, for example, the performance display monitor 170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and the game is stopped. Although the clear range is set as the RAM clear range during abnormality, the game may be stopped without setting this clear range (RAM clear range during abnormality).

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off", and the setting key 174 is "off", the startup state is determined as "recovery from power failure", and the RAM is The clear range is set to the "RAM clear range upon recovery from power failure" and the process is terminated.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off", and the setting key 174 is "on", the startup state is determined to be "checking settings", and the RAM The clear range is set to the "RAM clear range upon recovery from power failure" and the process is terminated.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on", and the setting key 174 is "on", the startup state is determined to be "settings changing", and the RAM is The "RAM clear range when changing settings" is set as the clear range, and the process ends.

Further, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on", and the setting key 174 is "off", the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", and the RAM is cleared. The "RAM clear range when changing settings" is set as the range, and the process ends.

Next, in step S11009, the main CPU 201 performs specified range clear processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 clears the RAM clear range set in step S11008 above.

Here, if the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared.

Further, the "RAM clear range when changing settings" includes at least a "status flag" and "normal power operation pattern" regarding information on the gaming state, and a "gaming stop function operation management phase" which will be described later.
Therefore, when the startup state is determined as "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared, and the status flag and general power operation pattern are cleared. The initial state "normal gaming state" is set. Furthermore, if the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the "game stop function activation management phase" is cleared by clearing the "RAM clear range when changing settings". The game stop state based on the increased number of game balls can be canceled. That is, by "RAM clearing" by the backup clear switch 176, the initial state "normal gaming state" is set, and the gaming stop state can be canceled.

Note that the "RAM clear range when changing settings" may include "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", and "MY determination counter", which will be described later.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM clear", the common "RAM clear range when changing settings" is cleared. When the startup state is determined as "Settings changing", the configuration is configured so that "first RAM clear range" is cleared, and when the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", "1st RAM clear range" is cleared. The configuration may also be such that the "second RAM clear range" is cleared. Even with this configuration, when the startup state is determined as "RAM clear", the "second RAM clear range" includes "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", "game stop", etc. It is desirable that at least a "functional operation management phase" be included.

Next, in step S11010, the main CPU 201 sets the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the area outside the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register (for example, the HL register), and refers to this register. Then, data for initialization at power-on is stored in the work area.

Next, in step S11011, the main CPU 201 uses the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S11010 to perform data storage processing to store the data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area. I do. This data storage process is similar to the data storage process (see FIG. 121) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11012, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs setting update and setting change processing when the setting key 174 is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and is in the "on" state. This setting change confirmation process is similar to the setting change confirmation process (see FIGS. 122 and 123) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11013, the main CPU 201 performs a game return process. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing upon power-off recovery according to the startup state when the gaming machine is powered on (at startup). This game return process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S11014, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. This process disables maskable interrupts. In this process, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt disabling instruction, and as a result, the value of the interrupt permission register 1 becomes "0" and the value of the interrupt permission register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disabling instruction is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S11015, the main CPU 201 performs power outage determination processing. In this power outage determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage is detected (that is, whether or not XINT is detected), and performs a power outage setting process if a power outage is detected. In the power outage setting process, the main CPU 201 stores the power outage detection flag in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203, performs CRC calculation regarding the gaming area and out of area area of the main RAM 203, and stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, HL register). Thereafter, by transmitting a RAM access prohibition command to a predetermined register, access to the main RAM 203 is prohibited and the system waits until the power is cut off. This power cutoff setting process is similar to the power cutoff setting process (see FIGS. 125 and 126) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11016, the main CPU 201 performs initial random value update processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the initial value random number for special symbol determination.

After this, in step S11017, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total division processing. This process becomes a process for an area outside the area by being called by an outside area process call instruction. The main CPU 201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. This performance display monitor total division process is similar to the performance display monitor total division process (see FIGS. 127 and 128) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11018, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. This process enables maskable interrupts. Here, both the value of interrupt permission register 1 and the value of interrupt permission register 2 are set to "1".

Next, in step S11019, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area of the work area (gaming area) of the main RAM 203 (current interrupt counter count value) is "0". Determine whether Note that the value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 every time in system timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", the determination in step S11019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", the determination in step S11019 is "YES". The determination is "NO".

In step S11019, if the main CPU 201 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in step S11019), the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S11014 and performs the processes from step S11014 onwards. .

On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines in step S11019 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in step S11019), the main CPU 201 performs timer counter update processing in step S11020. In this process, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (the value of the interrupt counter) is performed three times. Through this processing, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main processing is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, an interrupt prohibition period of 6 msec (processing period from step S11014 to step S11018) is provided before execution of various processing related to game control to be described later. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The value may be set to .

Next, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing (step S11021). In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs command transmission/reception processing for payout control. This main control command transmission/reception process is similar to the main control command transmission/reception process (see FIG. 129) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing (step S11022). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a control process for the special symbol game. This special symbol control process will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S11023). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. This normal symbol control process will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process (step S11024). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, second special symbol display LED, normal symbol display LED, pending display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing (step S11025). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for external terminal board pulse signals, processing for setting output data, and the like. Thereafter, in step S11026, the main CPU 201 performs a process of generating a sight-fire test signal. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing (step S11027). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting (transferring) output data to an output port and a process of outputting the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing (step S11028). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a firing position determination process (if there is a change in the firing position, performs a transmission reservation process for a firing position command), a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, performs a game abnormality detection command transmission reservation process). processing), and performs a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, performs a transmission reservation process of a payout abnormality detection command).

After the process in step S11028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S11014, and performs the process from step S11014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main processing of this embodiment, after startup and before executing the wait processing (step S11005), the state information of the backup clear switch 176 and the state information of the setting key 174 are saved (step S11005). S11004). If such processing is provided, for example, even if the setting key 174 is operated (on/off) in the setting key insertion slot during the wait period, this status information will be secured when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operating status of the backup clear switch 176 and the operating status of the setting key 174 at the time of startup can be grasped more reliably, and operations on the gaming machine can be accurately identified. I can do it.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, before executing various processing related to game control (processing after step S11020), a 6 msec interrupt prohibition period (processing period from step S11014 to step S11018) is set. ), and power outage processing (step S11015), initial value random number updating processing (step S11016), performance display monitor total division processing (step S11017), etc. are performed within the interrupt prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball payout performance of the game and values that are totaled throughout the game is performed in the interrupt-prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt-prohibited section, game management becomes easier, the processing performed by the main control circuit 200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 200 is reduced. be able to.

[13-4-2. Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 487, the game return process performed during the main control main process will be described. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing an example of a game return process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11040, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the startup state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11041.

Here, in this embodiment, the startup state value includes five state values: "RAM abnormality", "recovery from power failure", "setting confirmation in progress", "setting in progress", and "RAM clear". There is. However, when the value of the startup state is "RAM abnormal", an infinite loop is repeated in the startup state check process in step S11008, and the process does not proceed to this process. Therefore, in this process, values for the four startup states are loaded: "recovering from power outage", "checking settings", "changing settings", and "clearing RAM".

In S11041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup state is a value indicating "recovery from power failure". If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is a value indicating "recovery from power outage", the process moves to S11042, and if it is determined that the value of the startup state does not indicate "recovery from power outage". If so, the process moves to S11043.

In S11042, the main CPU 201 performs second initial value setting processing. In this second initial value setting process, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read out, and each read data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Thereafter, the game permission flag is set to ON, the game is allowed to play, and the transmission reservation process of the "power failure recovery command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11046.

In S11043, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup state is a value indicating "settings changing" or "settings checking". If the main CPU 201 determines that the startup state value is a value indicating "settings changing" or "settings checking", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11044, and determines that the startup state value is "settings changing" or "settings checking". If it is determined that the value does not indicate "setting confirmation in progress" (that is, if it is determined that the value indicates RAM clearing), the process moves to S11045.

In S11044, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a "setting operation command." The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the system timer interrupt process. Also, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11046.

In S11045, the main CPU 201 performs first initial value setting processing. In this first initial value setting process, initial data is generated, and each generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Thereafter, the game permission flag is set on, the game permission state is entered, and the "initialization command" transmission reservation process is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11046.

In S11047, the main CPU 201 performs game stop function initial value setting processing. In this game stop function initial value setting process, the "game stop function activation management phase", "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", and "MY determination counter" stored in the area outside the main RAM 203 are ” and other initial settings. The details of this game stop function initial value setting process will be described in detail later. After executing the process of S11047, the main CPU 201 ends the game return process and returns the process to the main control main process.

[13-4-3. Game stop function initial value setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 488, the game stop function initial value setting process performed during the game return process will be described. FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function initial value setting process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11047-1, the main CPU 201 performs protection register saving processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-2.

In S11047-2, the main CPU 201 clears the "number of acquired game balls" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-3.

Here, the "number of game balls acquired" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the various prize openings. This is information for temporarily storing the information and adding the stored number of prize balls to the "difference ball number counter".

In S11047-3, the main CPU 201 clears the "MY determination counter" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S11047-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-4.

Here, the "MY determination counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for determining the increased number of game balls. As described later, this "MY determination counter" corresponds to information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). For example, if the difference ball number counter is 89000 to 89999, the MY determination counter = 89, and if the difference ball number counter is 90000 to 90999, the MY determination counter = 90.

In S11047-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-5.

As mentioned above, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is set based on the increased number of game balls, and the game stop function is set based on the increased number of game balls. This is information indicating the status of.

In this "gaming stop function operation management phase", when the difference ball number counter is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, and when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set. "01H" is set when the difference ball number counter is between 90,000 and 94,999, which is less than the first boundary value and less than the regulation value (second counting range). In some cases, "02H" is set.
In addition, when the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more), "03H" is set when the small hit game state or the jackpot game state (before the game stop state), and the small win game state is set. Alternatively, when the game is not in a jackpot game state (in a game stop state), "04H" is set.

Note that the initial boundary value (85000), the first boundary value (90000), and the regulation value (95000) can be changed in design as appropriate. Furthermore, a plurality of boundary values (initial boundary value, first boundary value) may be eliminated and a single boundary value may be used. If one boundary value is used, it is desirable to use the first boundary value described above.

In S11047-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is 03H or more (03H or 04H). If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is 03H or more, it moves the process to S11047-6, and determines that the value of the "game stop function operation management phase" is not 03H or more. If it is determined, the process moves to S11047-7.

In S11047-6, the main CPU 201 clears the "game stop function operation management phase" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203 (that is, sets the "game stop function operation management phase" to 01). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-7.

In S11047-7, the main CPU 201 clears the "difference ball number counter" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11047-8.

Here, the "difference ball number counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for counting the increased number of game balls (MY). This "difference ball number counter" corresponds to the number obtained by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls). It turns out.

In S11047-8, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S11047-1, and ends the game stop function initial value setting process.

As described above, according to the game stop function initial value setting process of this embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (after the power is restored), the "number of acquired game balls", "difference ball number counter", "MY The "judgment counter" will be cleared.

In addition, if the difference ball number counter is less than the regulation value (94999 or less) after the gaming machine is powered on (after power outage recovery), the "gaming stop function activation management phase" is cleared and the difference ball number counter is regulated. When the value is higher than the value (95000 or higher), the "gaming stop function operation management phase" is held. As a result, when the difference ball number counter exceeds the regulation value (game stop function operation management phase = 03H and 04H), the game stop state will be maintained unless the "RAM is cleared" by the backup clear switch 176. become.

[13-4-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 489, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process will be explained. FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 489, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S11101. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S11101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11102.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S11101.

In S11102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S11101 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S11108, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S11103.

In S11103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S11104, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S11105. Move.

In S11104, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S11107, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11106. Move to.

In S11105, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted. The starting information will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1).

In S11106, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first The starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S11107, the main CPU 201 stores special symbol startup information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol startup storage area and second special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S11108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 490. After executing the process of S11103, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S11101 to S11108) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 11120 or the second It may be a sequential variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting hole 11140.

[13-4-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 490, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 489) will be described. FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 490 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S11111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is 0 or not. The waiting time of this special symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the special symbol management process, and will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 489), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If determined, the process moves to S11112.

In S11112, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S11112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11113. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S11113 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S11112.

In S11113, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S11113 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 491. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11114.

In S11114, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S11114 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 492. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11115.

In S11115, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S11115 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 496. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11116.

In S11116, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game closed processing. This process of S11116 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 498. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11117.

In S11117, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S11117 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 499. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11118.

In S11118, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S11118 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 500. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11119.

In S11119, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S11119 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 501. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11120.

In S11120, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S11120 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 502.

After completing the processing of S11113 to S11120, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 489). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[13-4-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 491, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 490) will be described. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11121, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 490), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "0", the process moves to S11122.

In S11122, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a hit determination of the special symbol is performed, and win/loss determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process in S11122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11123.

In S11123, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol and symbol designation command of the special symbol are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process in S11123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11124.

In addition, as mentioned above, when controlling to ignore the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving gaming state, even if "time-saving winning" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol that will stop the loss will be displayed. What is necessary is to determine the selected symbol and the symbol designation command.

In S11124, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a small hit. In this hit type determination process, if the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 473 is determined, and if the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The small hit type determination table shown in is determined. In addition, when setting the gaming status etc. based on the gaming status at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming status, the gaming status data at the time of winning, which indicates the gaming status at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small hit, is used as the main. It is set in the winning game state storage area of the RAM 203. After executing the process in S11124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11125.

In S11125, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 476, FIG. 477, and FIG. 478 is determined according to the gaming state, etc., and the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table is referred to. The special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11126.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination process of this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 476 is determined in the case of the normal gaming state by referring to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern. Then, with reference to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Based on this, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined.
In addition, when the state flag and the general power operation pattern are referred to and the normal game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is selected, if the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N>10, the special A symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 is determined, and if the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N>10, a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 is determined, and if the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N=0, the special symbol is A symbol variation pattern table J3 is determined. Then, referring to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J3, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number for production selection. Based on the numerical values, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined.
Also, with reference to the state flag and the general power operation pattern, if the second time-saving game state or the fourth time-saving game state is selected, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 is determined, and if the fifth time-saving game state is determines the special symbol variation pattern table J5. Then, referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern tables J4 and J5, the special symbol variation pattern and Determine the special symbol variation pattern command.

In S11126, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process that sets a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S11125 is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S11126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11127.

In S11127, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 490) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S11127, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11128.

In S11128, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S11128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11129.

In S11129, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process of the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process of the symbol designation command determined in S11123 is performed. In addition, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S11125 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[13-4-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 492, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 490) will be described. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 490), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S11142.

In S11142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol symbol determination time setting process that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol confirmation time setting process, the special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S11142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11143.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S11143, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In this time-saving management process, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, it is determined whether the time-saving gaming state is over or whether the time-saving gaming state B or the time-saving gaming state C is to be transitioned to. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 493. After executing the process in S11143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11144.

In S11144, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S11115 in FIG. 490) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S11144, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11145.

In S11145, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. This special symbol production stop command is composed of a first special symbol production stop command corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol production stop command corresponding to the second special symbol. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S11145, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 490).

[13-4-8. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 493, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process will be described. FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11151, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol time-saving counter subtraction process that subtracts the special symbol time-saving counter.

Here, in this embodiment, the "time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is a "special symbol time saving counter" corresponding to the variable display number of special symbols for the time saving end condition, and a "special symbol time saving counter" corresponding to the variable display number of the normal symbol for the time saving end condition. It consists of two types: a corresponding "normal symbol time saving counter". This "special symbol time saving counter" is decremented every time the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. In addition, the "normal symbol time saving counter" is not subtracted here, but will be subtracted in the normal symbol per end processing (see FIG. 505) which will be described later.

In this special symbol time saving counter subtraction process, when the state flag is referred to and it is the time saving game state, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the special symbol time saving counter and update it. Note that in the normal gaming state, the special symbol time saving counter is not decremented. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11152.

In S11152, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the game is in a time-saving gaming status. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the process moves to S11153, and if it determines that the game is not in a time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S11154.

In S11153, the main CPU 201 determines whether either the "special symbol time-saving counter" or the "normal symbol time-saving counter" is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that any of the time-saving counters is 0, it moves the process to S11154, and if it determines that the time-saving counters are not 0, it moves the process to S11155.

In S11154, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, as the time-saving information, the special symbol time-saving counter, the normal symbol time-saving counter, the status flag, and the normal power operation pattern are cleared (=set to 0). For this reason, when the time saving information is cleared, a transition is made to the normal gaming state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11155.

In S11155, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving game state transition determination processing.
In this B time-saving game state transition determination process, a "ceiling counter" is added to count the number of variable display times of special symbols to transition to the B time-saving game state, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed. Migration control will be performed. Details of this B time-saving game state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 494. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11156.

In S11156, the main CPU 201 performs C time-saving game state transition determination processing.
In this C time-saving game state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a time-saving win, and if it is a time-saving win, the transition control to the C time-saving game state is performed based on the selected symbol (time-saving symbol) of the special symbol. will be carried out. Details of this C time-saving game state transition determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 495. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11157.

In S11157, the game status is confirmed with reference to the status flag and the normal power operation pattern, and a game status designation command indicating the current gaming status is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11158.

In this embodiment, when the status flag=1, a 0th gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state is determined. In addition, when the status flag = 3 and the general electricity operation pattern = 00, a first game state designation command indicating the first time saving gaming state is determined, and when the status flag = 3 and the general electricity operation pattern = 02 In this case, a second game state designation command indicating the second time-saving game state is determined, and when the status flag = 3 and the general power operation pattern = 01, a third game state designation command indicating the third time-saving game state is determined. Determine. Moreover, when the status flag=2, a fourth game state designation command indicating the fourth time-saving game state is determined. Moreover, when the state flag=1 and the general power operation pattern=02, a fifth game state designation command indicating the fifth time-saving game state is determined.

In S11158, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation command transmission reservation process that sets the game state designation command determined in S11157 above in the transmission buffer. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S11158, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process.

[13-4-9. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 494, the B time-saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process will be described. FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing an example of B time-saving game state transition determination processing in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11155-1, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process of incrementing the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter updating process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11155-2.

In S11155-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 950 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value, it moves the process to S11155-3, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value, it ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process and continues the process. Return to time saving management processing.

In S11155-3, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11155-4.

In S11155-4, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving gaming state setting processing for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, refer to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. Then, the number of time reductions (for example, 950 times) is set in the "normal symbol time reduction counter" as the "B time reduction end condition". In addition, in the B time-saving game state setting process, normal power operation pattern=01 or 00 may be set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process.

[13-4-10. C Time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 495, the C time-saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process will be described. FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing an example of the C time-saving game state transition determination process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11156-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the game is in the normal gaming status. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the normal gaming state, it moves the process to S11156-2, and if it determines that it is not in the normal gaming state, it ends the C time-saving gaming state transition determination process and switches the process to time-saving management. Return to processing.

In S11156-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time saving. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving is successful, the process moves to S11156-3, and if it is determined that the time saving is not successful, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state transition determination process and shifts the process to the time saving management process. return.

In S11156-3, the main CPU 201 performs a C time saving gaming state setting process for shifting to the C time saving gaming state. In this C time-saving game state setting process, with reference to the game state-related setting table 2 shown in FIG. In the electric operation pattern, a predetermined number of times is set in the "special symbol time-saving counter" or "normal symbol time-saving counter" as "C time-saving end condition". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process.

In this way, in this embodiment, only when it is determined that a time saving win is achieved in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when it is determined that the time saving win has been won, it may be configured to be able to shift to the C time saving gaming state.

[13-4-11. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 496, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11161, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S11162.

In S11162, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbols corresponding to the jackpot. When the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S11163, and when it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S11172.

In S11163, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the jackpot game state is "the signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol". "Jackpot signal" is generated. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11164.

In S11164, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11165.

In S11165, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11166.

In S11166, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the number of time saving times. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11167.

In S11167, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11168.

In S11168, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the later-described grand prize opening preparation process will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11169.

In S11169, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11172, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether it is a small hit or not, that is, the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Determine whether it exists or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small hit, the process moves to S11173, and if it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, a loss), it moves the process to S11181.

In S11173, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In this external signal processing of the small hit, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the small winning game state is "the selected symbol of the special symbol. Generates a corresponding small hit signal. Thereafter, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11174.

In S11174, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning start preparation setting process. In this small hit start preparation setting process, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol" with reference to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit of the number of hits. Next, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, in the small hit start preparation setting process, with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. The determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning a prize control process regarding the V shutter solenoid 11160 which opens and closes the V winning a prize opening 11156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 506) which will be described later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11175.

In S11175, the main CPU 201 performs small hit status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11177.

In S11177, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11178.

In S11178, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the small winning game closing process to be described later will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11179.

In S11179, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S11169, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11181, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-12. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 497, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process will be described. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11191, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11192.

In S11192, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the start information stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11193.

In S11193, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11194.

In S11194, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is N=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the variable display number N of the first special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S11195, and if it determines that the variable display number N of the first special symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11195. Move to S11196.

In S11195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting the variable display number N of the first special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11196.

In this process of resetting the variable display number N of the first special symbol, the variable display number N of the first special symbol is reset to "50", which is the same as the minimum first time saving number of times in the first time saving game state.

In S11196, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the variable display number N of the first special symbol. In this process, 1 is subtracted from the variable display number N of the first special symbol to update it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process.

[13-4-13. Small hit game closed processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 498, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing an example of the small winning game closing process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11201, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". ”, the process moves to S11202.

In S11202, the main CPU 201 loads the "small hit opening number counter value". “Small hit opening number counter” is a counter that counts the number of small winning openings. Note that the count value of the small hit opening number counter (small winning opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to SS11203.

In S11203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit value of the small hit opening number. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the number of openings for small winnings, it moves the process to S11209, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit for the number of openings for small winnings, it moves the process to S11204.

In S11204, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 11151 (number of winnings in the second big winning hole 11151) is not the maximum number of winning balls in the small winning game state. In this process, whether the value of the second big winning hole counter counted by the second big winning hole count switch 11152 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the second big winning hole 11151 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 11151 is not the maximum number of prizes, it moves the process to S11205, and determines that the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 11151 is the maximum number of prizes. If so, the process moves to S11209.

In S11205, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11206.

In S11206, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening setting process to open the second big winning opening 11151. In the process of opening the second big winning opening, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 11151 is determined this time, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole opening control data for opening the second big winning hole 11151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 11155. As a result, the second big prize opening 11151 will be opened. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11207.

In S11207, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small winning game closing process is completed, the small winning game opening process to be described later will be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11208.

In S11208, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11209, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 11156 within the specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 11157). When the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S11210, and when it determines that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11218.

In S11210, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to SS11211.

In S11211, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set it to the waiting time of the special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11212.

In S11212, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route will start from the second round game. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11213.

In S11213, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot status display processing. In this jackpot status display processing, round display LED data is set in accordance with the maximum number of rounds determined as described above, and right-handed hitting instruction data is set to inform the player to instruct the player to play right-handed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11214.

In S11214, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time saving counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11215.

In S11215, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11216.

In S11216, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process will be performed after the small winning game closed process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11217.

In S11217, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S11197, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11218, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. The waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11219.

In S11219, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11220.

In S11220, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 497 is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-14. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 499, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during opening of the small winning game in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11221, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small winning game opening process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". ”, the process moves to S11222.

In S11222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 11151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the second big prize opening opening setting process (see FIG. 498) has elapsed. When the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 11151 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 11151 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11223.

In S11223, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening closing setting process to close the second big winning opening 11151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the current closing time of the second big prize opening 11151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 11151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 11155. As a result, the second big prize opening 11151 will be closed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11224.

In S11224, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the above-mentioned small win game closing process will be performed after the small win game opening process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-15. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 500, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing an example of the grand winning opening preparation process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11231, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big prize opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". ”, the process moves to S11232.

In S11232, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11233.

In S11233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it moves the process to S11234, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it moves the process to S11238.

In S11234, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. (Ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11235.

In S11235, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state ending process to be described later will be performed after the big winning opening preparation process is finished. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11236.

In S11236, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11237.

In S11237, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11238, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11239.

In S11239, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning hole opening setting process to open the first big winning hole 11131. In this first jackpot opening setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 11131 in the round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 11131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 11135. As a result, the first big prize opening 11131 will be opened. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11240.

In S11240, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the big winning hole opening control process will be performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11241.

In S11241, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11242.

In S11242, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-16. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". ”, the process moves to S11252.

In S11252, when the first grand prize opening 11131 is opened, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning number of game balls that entered the first grand prize opening 11131 in one round is the maximum winning number. do. In this process, whether the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 11132 is the predetermined value of the maximum number of winnings of the first big winning hole 11131 (for example, 10 pieces). It is determined whether or not.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S11252 that the number of winnings in the first grand prize opening 11131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it moves the process to S11253, and determines that the number of winnings in the first grand prize opening 11131 is the maximum number of winnings. If so, the process moves to S11254.

In S11253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 11131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see FIG. 500) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S11133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 11131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 11131 has elapsed, the process moves to S11254.

In S11254, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning opening closing setting process to close the first big winning opening 11131. In this first big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The closing time of the first big prize opening 11131 in the round is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole closing control data for closing the first big winning hole 11131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 11135. As a result, the first big prize opening 11131 will be closed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11255.

In S11255, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process will be performed again. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11256.

In S11256, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11257.

In S11257, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-17. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 502, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state termination process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11261, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process, returns the process to the special symbol management process, and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S11262.

In S11262, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11263.

In S11263, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot end state setting processing to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, with reference to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. A ``special symbol time-saving counter'' corresponding to the number of display times and a ``normal symbol time-saving counter'' corresponding to the variable display frequency of normal symbols are set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11264.

In this embodiment, the status flags include, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z1", the status flag indicating A time-saving game state = 1, the general power operation pattern = 02, the special symbol time-saving counter = 10000 , set the normal symbol time saving counter = 120.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the status flag indicating the normal gaming state = 0, the normal power operation pattern = 00, the special symbol time saving counter = 0, the normal symbol time saving counter = Set to 0.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z4" or "z5", the status flag indicating A time-saving game state = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, special symbol time-saving counter = 10000, normal symbol time-saving counter =120.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag indicating the normal gaming state = 0, the normal power operation pattern = 00, the special symbol time saving counter = 0, the normal symbol time saving counter = Set to 0.

In S11264, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 497 is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-18. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 503, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 503, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 503 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S11300, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time of a normal symbol is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time of a normal symbol is 0. moves the process to S11301.

In S11301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S11310 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S11201.

In S11310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S11210 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol determination processing, second starting port opening pattern determination processing, normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing, etc. are performed, but for details, This will be described later with reference to FIG. 504. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S11220.

In S11320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S11220 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S11230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S11330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S11330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S11340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss) of the stopped and displayed normal symbols. If the main CPU 201 determines that the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol hit, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3" and determines that the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss. If it is determined that it corresponds to , the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In S11340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S11340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the process to S11350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. In accordance with the operation of the opening pattern of the second starting port, the normal power shutter 11147 is operated to open and close the second starting port 11140. Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls for general electricity use enter the second starting port 11140, or when all the operations of the determined opening pattern of the second starting port are completed, the second starting port 11140 is opened. It is brought into the closed state, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4", and the normal electric accessory opening process is completed.

In S11350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S11350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol winning termination process, updating of the number of time reductions, determination of completion of the number of time reductions, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 505. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the process to the main control main process.

[13-4-19. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 504, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S11211).

If it is determined in S11311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11312.

In S11312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11313.

In S11313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11314.

In S11314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11315.

In S11315, the main CPU 201 performs a second starting port opening pattern determination process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11316.

In the second starting port opening pattern determination process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the second starting port is determined based on the selected pattern of the normal pattern and the normal pattern.

In S11316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Determine. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 483 and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11317.

In S11317, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time determined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process described above is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. Let it start. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11318.

In S11318, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (Figure 503) will be held. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11319.

In S11319, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

[13-4-20. Normal symbol per end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 505, details of the normal symbol per end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control processing will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal symbol winning termination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11351, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", it ends the normal symbol hit end processing and returns the process to the normal symbol control processing, and sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "4". If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S11352.

In S11352, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol time saving number counter subtraction process of subtracting the normal symbol time saving counter. In this normal symbol time saving counter subtraction process, if the state flag is referred to and the time saving game state is present, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the normal symbol time saving counter and update it. Thereby, the number of variable display times of normal symbols can be counted as the number of time saving times. In addition, in the case of the normal game state, the subtraction of the normal symbol time saving counter is not performed.
After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11253.

In S11353, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving number counter of the normal symbol is 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter for normal symbols is 0, it moves the process to S11354, and if it determines that the time-saving counter for normal symbols is not 0, it moves the process to S11355.

In S11354, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, as the time-saving information, the special symbol time-saving counter, the normal symbol time-saving counter, the status flag, and the normal power operation pattern are cleared (=set to 0). For this reason, when the time saving information is cleared, a transition is made to the normal gaming state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11355.

In S11355, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11356.

In S11356, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", the normal symbol variable display start process (see Figure 503) will be performed after the normal symbol per end process is completed. . After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the end processing per normal symbol, the normal symbol time saving number counter update processing as shown in S11352 to SS11354 above and the end determination of the time saving number of normal symbols are performed. It may be configured to be performed in the symbol variable display end processing (S11320 in FIG. 503).

[13-4-21. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 506. This process is called when a timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) occurs, based on the PTC2 timeout interrupt entry address (program address) defined in the setting area corresponding to this interrupt. This is executed, for example, at a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle). FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing an example of stem timer interrupt processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11411, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving a protection register (for example, an AF register). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11412.

In S11412, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11470, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, a power outage is not detected). If so, the process moves to S11413.

In S11413, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11414.

In S11414, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11415.

In S11415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). The gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state) as a startup state when the power is turned on.When recovering from a power failure and clearing the RAM, the gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state), and when changing settings or checking settings, the gaming permission flag is set to ON (=gaming permission state). is also a flag that is set to OFF (=game not permitted state). When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S11416, and when it determines that the game is not allowed, the process moves to S11440.

In S11415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not in a stopped state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.

Here, the "game stop state flag" is information indicating whether or not the game is stopped based on the increased number of game balls, and when the game stop state flag is on (=1), It indicates a "game stop state", and when the game stop state flag is off (=0), it indicates a "game progress state". Although details will be described later, the game stop state flag is turned on when the game stop function operation management phase=04H.

When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not in a stopped state, the process moves to S11417, and when it determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11450.

In S11417, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-prohibited sections during main control main processing, and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11418.

In S11418, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11419.

In S11419, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for jackpot determination of a random number value for jackpot determination, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11420.

In S11420, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 510. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11430.

In S11430, the main CPU 201 performs game LED lighting data output processing. In this game LED lighting data output process, depending on the game state etc., the normal symbol display section 161, the normal symbol reservation display section 162, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, the first special symbol This is a process of controlling the output of LED data to be displayed by lighting the LEDs of the second special symbol reservation display section 165, the second special symbol reservation display section 166, and the time saving notification display section 168. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11431.

In S11431, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 11156 when the V operation flag is on. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the V winning opening is activated based on the "special symbol selection symbol". 11156 as the opening pattern, and set the determined opening time to the V winning opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and also setting the V shutter solenoid 11160 to open the V winning opening 11156. Output winning opening control data. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11451.

In S11440, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing. In this setting control process, settings are changed or confirmed. This setting control process is similar to the setting control process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) executed in the first gaming machine. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11431.

In S11450, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function setting process. In this game stop function setting process, various commands and game stop state flags related to the function of stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls are set. The game stop function setting process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11430.

In S11451, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11452.

In S11452, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. The performance display monitor control process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this performance display monitor control process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11435.

In S11460, the main CPU 201 performs game stop data update processing. The game stop data update process is performed using the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this game stop data update process, the game stop function operation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the update control of the MY determination counter are performed. The game stop data update process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11470.

In S11470, the main CPU 201 performs processing to restore the protection register saved in S11411, and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

As described above, according to the system timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the switch input detection process is not performed when the game is in the stopped state. That is, when the game is stopped, the game ball enters or passes through the first starting hole 11120, second starting hole 11140, first big winning hole 11131, second big winning hole 11151, general winning hole 122, etc. Even if the game ball is paid out and various random numbers are not acquired (the entry or passage of the game ball into the various winning holes becomes invalid).

[13-4-22. Game stop function setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 507, the game stop function setting process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function setting process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11450-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11450-11, and if it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11450-2.

In S11450-2, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-3.

In S11450-3, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command determination process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-4.

As described above, the "gaming stop command" is a command that transmits to the sub-control circuit 300 information regarding the stopping of the game according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub control circuit 300 can issue a "game stop notice" indicating that the game will be stopped or a "game stop notification" that the game is in a stopped state on the display device 7 or the like in advance. becomes possible.

In this game stop command determination process, the game stop function operation management phase is loaded, and when the game stop function operation management phase is updated and the game stop function operation management phase ≧ 01H, the updated game stop function operation management phase is Based on the value of the function operation management phase and the "predetermined game stop notice start condition," the value of the game stop function operation management phase is determined as the game stop command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 484, if the updated game stop function operation management phase is 01H and the "first game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, the first game stop notice is issued. If 01H is determined as the executable game stop command and the updated game stop function operation management phase is 02H, if the "second game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, the second game stop is executed. 02H is determined as a game stop command that can execute a notice. Furthermore, if the updated game stop function operation management phase is 03H, 03H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the third game stop notice, and the updated game stop function operation management phase is 04H. In this case, 04H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the game stop notification.

Further, in this embodiment, when 01H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the first game stop notice, the executed flag=01H is set and it is stored that the first game stop notice has been executed.

In addition, if the updated game stop function operation management phase is 00H or if the game stop function operation management phase has not been updated, the process for determining the difference number of balls command is performed without determining the game stop command. It will end.

In S11450-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command transmission reservation process that sets the game stop command determined in S11450-3 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-5.

In S11450-5, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-6.

In S11450-6, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the difference number of balls command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-7.

Here, the "difference number of balls command" is a command for transmitting information regarding the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference number of balls counter) to the sub-control circuit 300. In the sub-control circuit 300, by receiving the difference ball number command, it becomes possible to notify information regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) on the display device 7 or the like.

In this process of determining the difference number of balls command, the value of the MY determination counter is loaded, and when the MY determination counter is updated, the value of the MY determination counter is determined as the difference number of balls command.
Further, if the MY determination counter has not been updated, the process for determining the difference number command is ended without determining the difference number command.

In S11450-7, the main CPU 201 performs a difference ball number command transmission reservation process to set the difference ball number command determined in S11450-6 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-11.

In addition, in this embodiment, the difference ball number command is also sent in addition to the game stop command, but the difference ball number command is not determined and sent, but only the game stop command is determined and sent. It may be configured to do so. In such a configuration, the processes of S11450-5 to S11450-7 described above may be omitted (deleted).

In S11450-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a stopped state based on the game stopped state flag.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, the process moves to S11450-21, and when it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11450-12.

In S11450-12, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-13.

In S11450-13, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase=04H. That is, by the game stop function operation management phase=04H, it is determined that the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more) and that the game is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is 04H, the process moves to S11450-14, and when it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not 04H, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-21. .

In S11450-14, the main CPU 201 performs processing to turn on (=1) the "gaming stop state flag". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11450-21.

In this way, when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value and the game is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state, the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is in the stop state.

In S11450-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in the game stop state, it moves the process to S11450-22, and if it determines that the game is not in the game stop state, it ends the game stop function setting process.

In S11450-22, the main CPU 201 performs processing to initialize various solenoid data. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the game stop function setting process.

Through the process of S11450-22, when the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is in a stop state, various solenoids are no longer driven. That is, when the game is stopped, the second starting opening 11140, the first big winning opening 11131, the second big winning opening 11151, etc. will not be opened.

[13-4-23. Game stop data update process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 508 and 509, the game stop data update process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described. 508 and 509 are flowcharts showing an example of the game stop data update process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11460-1, the main CPU 201 performs a save process for registers (eg, AF register, etc.). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11412.

In S11460-2, the main CPU 201 controls various prize ball switches from which game balls are paid out (first starting opening switch 11121, second starting opening switch 11141, first big winning opening count switch 11132, second big winning opening counting switch). 11152, it is determined whether or not the general winning a prize opening switch 123) has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that a prize ball switch has been detected, the process moves to S11460-3, and if it determines that a prize ball switch has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-11.

In S11460-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "number of prize balls" of the winning hole detected by the prize ball switch. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-4.

In S11460-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "number of acquired game balls". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-5.

In S11460-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of prize balls to the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-11.

In S11460-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, the process moves to S11460-21, and when it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11460-12.

In S11460-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of acquired game balls=0.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of acquired game balls = 0, it moves the process to S11460-15, and if it determines that the number of acquired game balls = 0, it moves the process to S11460-13.

In S11460-13, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "difference ball number counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-14.

In S11460-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of acquired game balls to the difference ball number counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-15.

In S11460-15, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-16.

In S11460-16, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball collection switch 11179 has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game ball collection switch 11179 has been detected, it moves the process to S11460-17, and if it determines that the game ball collection switch 11179 has not been detected, it moves the process to S11460-21.

In S11460-17, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the difference ball number counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-18.

In S11460-18, the main CPU 201 determines whether the difference ball number counter is less than or equal to the lower limit value. Here, the lower limit value of the difference ball number counter is set to "0".
If the main CPU 201 determines that the difference ball number counter is below the lower limit value (=0), the process moves to S11460-19, and if it determines that the difference ball number counter is not below the lower limit value (=0), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S11460-21.

In S11460-19, the main CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter to 0. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-21.

When the difference ball number counter becomes 0 through the processes of S11460-18 and S11460-19, it will no longer be subtracted. Note that the processes in S11460-18 and S11460-19 may be omitted (deleted) so that the difference ball count counter is 0 or less.

In addition, through the processing from S11460-2 to S11460-19 above, the difference ball number counter is calculated from the cumulative number of game balls that have been paid out (number of paid game balls) to the cumulative number of fired balls that have been fired by game balls ( This is the number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired), and corresponds to the "increased number of game balls (MY)".

In S11460-21, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-22.

In S11460-22, the main CPU 201 determines whether the MY determination counter≧95. Here, the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). Therefore, based on the MY determination counter≧95, it is determined whether the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or higher).
When the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter ≧95, the process moves to S11460-31, and when it determines that the MY determination counter ≧95, it moves the process to S11460-23.

In S11460-23, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "difference ball number counter". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-24.

In S11460-24, the main CPU 201 performs a division process of the difference ball number counter to divide the difference ball number counter by 1000 (“difference ball number counter”/1000). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-25.

In S11460-25, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the division result of S11460-24 above in the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-26.

Through the process of S11460-25, the value of the MY determination counter becomes a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference ball number counter" by 1000 ("difference ball number counter"/1000). Note that the processes of S11460-22 to S11460-25 may be omitted (deleted) so that the value of the MY determination counter is equal to the difference ball number counter.

In S11460-31, the main CPU 201 determines whether the MY determination counter has been updated.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter has been updated, the process moves to S11460-32, and if it determines that the MY determination counter has not been updated, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-41.

In S11460-32, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game stop state based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11460-41, and if it determines that the game is not in a stopped state, it moves the process to S11460-33.

In S11460-33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-34.

In S11460-34, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase≧03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase ≧03H is the game stop function operation management phase = 03H or 04H, and is the value that is set when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more). .
When the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is ≧03H, the process moves to S11460-41, and when it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not 03H, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-35. .

In S11460-35, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function operation management phase setting process based on the value of the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-41.

In this game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to less than the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter (MY determination counter < 85), the game stop function activation management is performed. Set "00H" to the phase.
In addition, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to from the initial boundary value or more of the difference ball number counter to less than the first boundary value (85≦MY determination counter<90), the game stop function activation management phase Set “01H” to “01H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to a value that is greater than or equal to the first boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the regulation value (90≦MY determination counter<95), the game stop function operation management phase is set to " 02H”.
Further, when the value of the MY determination counter is a value corresponding to the regulation value or more of the difference ball number counter (MY determination counter≧95), “03H” is set in the game stop function operation management phase.

In this way, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, the value of the game stop function operation management phase is updated based on the value of the MY determination counter.

In addition, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, if the game stop function operation management phase is already at 03H or 04H by the process of S11460-34, it will not be updated here. That is, in the game stop function operation management phase setting process, when the game stop function operation management phase is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the game stop function operation management phase is updated to 00H, 01H, 02H, or 03H. Become.

In S11460-41, the main CPU 201 performs a process of loading the "gaming stop function operation management phase". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-42.

In S11460-42, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function operation management phase=03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase=03H is a value that is set before the game stop state when the difference ball number counter is equal to or higher than the regulation value (95000 or more). Therefore, in the game stop function operation management phase=03H, it is determined whether or not the game is not stopped although the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, it moves the process to S11460-43, and if it determines that the game stop function operation management phase is not 03H, it moves the process to S11460-50. .

In S11460-43, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol control state number≧03. Here, the special symbol control state number≧03 is a value that is set when the game is in a small hit game state or a jackpot game state, as will be described later. Therefore, it is determined whether the special symbol control state number≧03 is the small hit game state or the jackpot game state.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is ≧03, it moves the process to S11460-50, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not ≧03, it moves the process to S11460-44. .

In S11460-44, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "04H" in the game stop function operation management phase. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11460-50.

In this way, when the difference ball number counter is above the regulation value (95000 or more), the game stop function activation management phase is updated from "03H" to "04H" when it is not in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state. will be done. Further, when the game stop function operation management phase is "04H", the value is held (not changed) unless "RAM is cleared" by the backup clear switch 176, as described above.

In S11460-50, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the register saved in S11460-1, and ends the game stop data update process.

As described above, according to the game stop data update process of this embodiment, when the game stop function operation management phase corresponding to the difference ball number counter being less than the regulation value is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the value of the MY determination counter is The value of the game stop function operation management phase is changed as appropriate based on (the value of the difference ball number counter), and it is possible to move down or move up.
However, when the game stop function operation management phase = 03H or 04H corresponds to the number of difference balls counter being equal to or higher than the regulation value, even if the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the number of difference balls counter) is less than the regulation value. , the value of the game stop function operation management phase cannot be moved down (changed from 03H to 02H).

[13-4-24. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 506) will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

The eleventh pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a first big winning opening count switch 11132, a second big winning opening counting switch 11152, and a V winning opening switch 11157 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S11501, the main CPU 201 executes a first starting opening winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11502.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 11121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 11120, the main CPU 201 generates a prize indicating the number of payouts from the first starting port 11120. Set the payout information according to the ball, and check whether there is free space in any of the special symbol judgment storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Determine whether If it is determined that there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the first special symbol start information is Acquire various random values (for example, random values for jackpot determination, random symbol values, random values for reach determination, random values for performance selection, etc.), and convert the acquired various random values into 1 in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Stored in one storage area. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting opening 11120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S11502, the main CPU 201 executes a second starting opening winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11503.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 11141 detects that a game ball enters the second starting port 11140, the main CPU 201 generates a prize indicating the payout number of the second starting port 11140. Set the payout information according to the ball, and check whether there is free space in any of the special symbol judgment storage area (0), the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (2). Determine whether If it is determined that there is a free space in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2), the information is used as the start information of the second special symbol. Various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, pattern random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one storage area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a winning command for a second special symbol indicating a winning to the second starting opening 11140 and a pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command of the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to second special symbol starting storage area (2), the second starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol has four first special symbol start storage areas, but the second special symbol does not have two first special symbol start storage areas. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is two. It should be noted that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed in design as appropriate, but it is desirable that they be 4 or less.

In S11503, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, payout information corresponding to the prize ball indicating the number of payouts from the general winning hole 122 is set, for example. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11504.

In S11504, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 11132 detects that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 11131, the main CPU 201 performs a payout of the first big winning hole 11131. Payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of balls is set, and the first big winning hole counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big winning hole 11131 is updated by adding 1. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first big winning hole winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning hole 11131 is performed. The first large winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11505.

In S11505, the main CPU 201 performs second grand prize opening passage detection processing. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 11152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 11151, the main CPU 201 performs a payout of the second big winning hole 11151. Payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of balls is set, and the second grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the second grand prize opening 11151 is updated by adding 1. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second grand prize opening winning command indicating a winning to the second great winning opening 11151 is performed. The second major winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11506.

In S11506, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 11156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 11157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passing flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 11156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 11156, the payout information is not set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11507.

In S11507, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11508.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 11126R or the second passage gate 11126L is detected by the ordinary symbol activation switch 11127, the main CPU 201 controls the normal symbol start storage area (1) to It is determined whether there is a free space in the symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S11508, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the current first starting opening winning detection process or second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 479. , generates a read-ahead command. As shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. 479, in the time saving gaming state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state, the prefetching command (second special Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 506) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[13-5. Sub control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 511 to 518.

[13-6-1. Production mode determination table]
A performance mode determination table for determining the performance mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 511 is an example of a performance mode determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "effect mode" refers to information that defines the state of various effects performed by the sub-control circuit 300.

As shown in FIG. 511, the performance mode determination table associates the gaming state, mode transition conditions, and performance mode information that defines the performance mode. Note that the gaming state is determined by the gaming state designation command received from the main control circuit 200.

Moreover, the "mode transition condition" is configured to be determined based on the "transition flag" and the "variable number of times N of displaying the first special symbol". This "transition flag" is information that identifies whether or not the heaven production mode has been notified by the "mode transition production" (described later) (whether or not the symbol production pattern ZT12 is executed), and the transition flag = 00H is the mode transition production. The transition flag=01H indicates that the heaven production mode is not notified by the mode transition production.

"Production mode information" includes production mode information = 00H indicating the chance production mode, production mode information = 01H indicating the general production mode, production mode information = 02H indicating the omen production mode, and production mode indicating the heaven production mode. It is composed of information = 10H and production mode information = 0FH indicating the RUSH production mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a production mode, there are five production modes: a chance production mode, a general production mode, an omen production mode, a heaven production mode, and a RUSH production mode, but there are six or more production modes. It may be configured with a mode. For example, as the RUSH production mode, the RUSH production mode in the A time saving gaming state is set as the first RUSH production mode, the RUSH production mode in the B time saving gaming state is set as the second RUSH production mode, and the RUSH production mode in the C time saving gaming state is set as the RUSH production mode. The second RUSH production mode may be set, and the first RUSH production mode, the second RUSH production mode, and the third RUSH production mode may be different production modes.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 511 and determines performance mode information based on the gaming state and mode transition conditions.

[13-6-2. Design production pattern determination table]
Next, a symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a pattern presentation pattern will be explained. FIG. 512, FIG. 513, and FIG. 514 are examples of performance mode determination tables in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "performance pattern" refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect buttons 54, and the like. Furthermore, the term "symbol production pattern" refers to a method of variably displaying at least a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)", which will be described later, on the display device 7 in a predetermined variable manner during variable display of special or normal symbols. This is established information. Depending on the type of pattern presentation pattern, in addition to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, display effects such as background display mode and characters, audio effects, and changes in the operation mode of the presentation button 54 are also determined. Sometimes. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, display effects of various presentation patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 512, FIG. 513, or FIG. 514 to determine the pattern presentation pattern.

[Chance production mode symbol production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 512(a), the symbol production pattern determination table CZ in the chance production mode includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the look-ahead flag, and the selection rate (first random value). and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "pre-reading flag" is information that determines whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed. The pre-reading flag = 00H indicates that the pre-reading effect is not being executed, and the pre-reading flag = 01H indicates that the pre-reading effect is being executed. It shows that it is running.

In addition, "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, This has been replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the table described later. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table CZ of the chance production mode shown in FIG. The symbol presentation patterns (symbol presentation patterns CZ10 to CZ15, CZ20, CZ21) can be determined. Further, even when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "loss", a specific symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern CZ22, CZ23) can be determined.
Therefore, when there is a time saving win in a special symbol lottery, a special symbol presentation can be performed.

This specific symbol presentation pattern is composed of a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "card presentation" and a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "RUSH entry presentation."

The symbol performance pattern that executes this "card performance" is the "special symbol selection symbols z10 to z12" that trigger the transition to the first time-saving game state in the case of a time-saving win, and the transition to the second time-saving game state. It is determined at the time of "selection symbol z20 of the special symbol" which becomes an opportunity to do so, and "selection symbol z30 of the special symbol" which becomes an opportunity to move to the third time-saving gaming state.
Therefore, the "card performance" can suggest that the game state will shift to any one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is determined when the "special symbol selection symbol z20" is a time-saving win and triggers the transition to the second time-saving game state, and when there is a loss.
For this reason, the "RUSH entry effect" can perform an effect as to whether or not to move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Furthermore, "card performance" and "RUSH entry performance" are different from "weak performance (white card performance or RUSH entry performance A)" depending on the selection rate (first random value), and a second time-saving game state than the weak performance. It consists of a ``strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)'' in which the expected value of transitioning to is high.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table CZ of the chance production mode shown in FIG. B)'' symbol presentation patterns (symbol presentation patterns CZ11, CZ13, CZ15, CZ21, CZ23) are configured to be determinable.
As a result, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed in the variation, so that the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol production pattern determination table CZ in the chance production mode shown in FIG. Instead, it is configured such that an "announcement presentation pattern" is determined. In this "notification performance pattern", a notification performance is performed to notify the lottery result of the special symbol without performing a variable display of the first decorative symbol (main symbol). This also applies to the symbol production pattern determination table described later.

In this way, when the special symbol variation pattern command corresponds to the second special symbol, the announcement performance pattern is determined instead of the symbol performance pattern, so the announcement performance regarding the lottery result of the second special symbol, A small win performance performed in a small win game state and a jackpot performance performed in a jackpot game state can be made to look like a series of winning performances (BONUS performance), and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[General production mode symbol production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 512(b), the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR in the general presentation mode.

Although the selection rate (first random value) is not associated with the symbol production pattern determination table NR of the general production mode shown in FIG. 512(b), based on the variation pattern command of one special symbol, A plurality of symbol production patterns may be associated with each other using the first random number value.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table NR of the general production mode shown in FIG. 512(b), even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used, a symbol production pattern different from that of the chance production mode can be determined. . The difference in the symbol production pattern may be any difference in at least one of the display mode (symbol design) of the first decorative symbol and the background display mode.

[Symbol production pattern determination table for omen production mode]
As shown in FIG. 513(a), the symbol production pattern determination table ZT in the precursor production mode includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the current gaming state, and the destination gaming state. , the selection rate (first random number) and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "current gaming state" is determined by the gaming state designation command received from the main control circuit 200, and the "destination gaming state" is the current gaming state and the number of time reductions of special symbols ("sub It will be determined from the special symbol time saving counter.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table ZT of the portent production mode shown in FIG. When the pattern is (10H) (see FIG. 477(b)), a symbol presentation pattern for suggestion (symbol presentation pattern ZT09) can be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
Therefore, when the variable number of display times N of the first special symbol is between 1 and 10, a dedicated symbol performance can be performed.

This suggestive symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern ZT09) is a symbol production pattern that executes the "mode shift stimulation production."
With this "mode shift promotion effect", the first special symbol is variably displayed a predetermined number of times, thereby making it possible to suggest in advance that there is a possibility that the effect mode will change.

Further, according to the symbol production pattern determination table ZT of the precursor production mode shown in FIG. When the pattern is (11H) (see FIG. 477(c)), the symbol presentation pattern for determination (symbol presentation patterns ZT10 to ZT12) can be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
Therefore, when the number of variable display times of the first special symbol N=0, a dedicated symbol performance can be performed.

The symbol performance patterns for this determination (symbol performance patterns ZT10 to ZT12) are determined based on the current gaming state and the destination gaming state, and are symbol performance patterns for executing the "mode transition performance."
With this "mode transition performance", it is possible to notify that the transition from the omen performance mode to the general performance mode, the chance performance mode, or the heaven performance mode is to be made. Furthermore, by executing the symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern ZT12) that executes the mode transition production that notifies the transition to the heaven production mode, the above-mentioned transition flag becomes 01H (see FIG. 511).

In addition, in this embodiment, as a symbol production pattern for determination, when the current gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state, a transition to the general production mode is notified based on the selection rate (first random value). It is configured such that either the symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern ZT10) that executes the mode transition production or the symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern ZT12) that executes the mode transition production that notifies the transition to the heaven production mode can be determined. has been done.
Thereby, even if it is announced that the game will shift to the general performance mode by the mode transition performance, the expectation of being in the third time-saving game state remains, and the interest in the game can be maintained.

In addition, as a symbol production pattern for determination, when the current gaming state is the third time saving gaming state, only the symbol production pattern (symbol production pattern ZT12) that executes the mode transition production that notifies the transition to the heaven production mode is used. It may also be configured such that it is determined.

Further, according to the symbol production pattern determination table ZT of the omen production mode shown in FIG. 513(a), the special symbol variation pattern command is the special symbol variation pattern (10H) corresponding to the loss of the lottery result of the first special symbol. When this is the case (see FIG. 477(b)), a symbol presentation pattern for inciting (symbol presentation pattern ZT09) can be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
The performance using this inciting symbol performance pattern can suggest that the "mode transition performance" is about to be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, different symbol production patterns can be determined in the general production mode, omen production mode, and chance production mode, but the same symbol production pattern can be determined in the general production mode, omen production mode, and chance production mode. It may be possible to configure. In particular, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, the same symbol performance pattern can be determined so that a common background display mode will be displayed in the general performance mode, omen performance mode, and chance performance mode. desirable. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to discern at a glance whether or not the RAM has been cleared when the gaming parlor opens, and even if the RAM has not been cleared, the machine cannot be operated from the opening of the gaming parlor. It can be promoted.

[Heaven production mode pattern production pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 513(b), in the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 and the symbol production pattern are associated.

Although the selection rate (first random value) is not associated with the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. 513(b), based on the fluctuation pattern command of one special symbol, A plurality of symbol production patterns may be associated with each other using the first random number value.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. 513(b), even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used, the symbol production pattern is different from the chance production mode, the general production mode, and the omen production mode. is configured so that it can be determined. The difference in the symbol production pattern may be any difference in at least one of the display mode (symbol design) of the first decorative symbol and the background display mode.

[Symbol production pattern determination table for RUSH production mode]
As shown in FIG. 514, the symbol production pattern determination table RU in the RUSH production mode includes the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random value), and the symbol production pattern. are associated.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table RU in the RUSH production mode shown in FIG. 514, unlike the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 512 and 513, the command is not a special symbol variation pattern command, but a normal symbol variation pattern command. are associated.
As a result, in the RUSH game state (RUSH performance mode) where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, a performance using the first decorative symbol (main symbol) will be performed as a variable performance regarding the lottery result of the normal symbol. This makes it possible to clarify the gameplay mainly based on the lottery results of normal symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special symbol variation pattern command is received during the RUSH production mode, the second decorative symbol (main symbol) is changed without determining the symbol production pattern that determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol (main symbol). A sub-symbol production pattern that determines the manner of variation of decorative patterns (sub-symbols) is determined.
As a result, when in the RUSH gaming state (RUSH production mode), the second decorative symbol (sub-pattern) is variably displayed as a variable production related to the lottery result of the first special symbol, so that It is possible to prevent the fluctuating performance regarding the lottery result from interfering with the fluctuating performance regarding the lottery result of normal symbols.

[13-6-3. Telop production pattern determination table]
Next, a telop performance pattern determination table for determining a telop performance pattern will be explained. FIG. 515 is an example of a telop effect pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, the "telop performance pattern" refers to information that defines a caption performance that suggests in advance that the second starting port 11140 will be opened long. This "telop effect pattern" suggests that the second starting port 11140 will be opened for a long time, and the "ticker effect pattern K01" that indicates that the second starting port 11140 will be opened for a long time, and the "ticker effect pattern K01" that indicates that the second starting port 11140 will be opened for a long time. , and a ``telop effect pattern K02'' that informs that the long release is not possible.

As shown in FIG. 515, the telop effect pattern determination table associates the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random value), and the telop effect pattern. .

Further, the normal symbol variation pattern command associated with the telop production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 515 is the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 during the third time-saving gaming state (See Figure 483).
Therefore, the telop effect based on the telop effect pattern can be executed in the third time-saving game state which is the normal game state.

In addition, when in the first time-saving game state which is the general game state, the second starting port 11140 is not opened long, but when the normal symbol sent from the main control circuit 200 when in the first time-saving game state The variable pattern command may be configured to be able to determine the "telop effect pattern K02" that informs that the long release will not be performed.

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the telop effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 515 and determines the telop effect pattern.

[13-6-4. Look-ahead performance pattern determination table]
Next, a pre-read effect pattern determination table for determining a pre-read effect pattern will be explained. FIG. 516 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 516(a) is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 for the normal gaming state, and FIG. 516(b) is the look-ahead performance for the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, which are the normal game states. This is an example of the pattern determination table Z2.

Here, the "pre-read effect pattern" refers to information that defines a pre-read effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in advance when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 or the second starting hole 11140. .

The sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit 300 refers to the prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 516 and determines the prefetch effect pattern.

[Normal gaming state look-ahead effect pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 516(a), the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shows the correspondence between the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random value), and the look-ahead performance pattern. It is attached.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 516(a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command that corresponds to “jackpot or loss” and “super reach, super super reach, or RUSH entry performance” Or, when the pre-reading command is a pre-reading command corresponding to "time saving hit" and "special symbol selection symbol z20", a pre-reading effect pattern (pre-reading effect pattern Z01) for executing the "expectation UP zone" can be determined. has been done.
Therefore, the "expectation UP zone" can suggest in advance that a predetermined performance will be performed and that the game will move to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Further, according to the pre-read performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. Sometimes, a pre-read effect pattern (pre-read effect pattern Z02) for executing a "mode transition zone" is configured to be determined as a pre-read effect pattern.
For this reason, the "mode transition zone" lets you know in advance that you are in a time-saving game and that you will be transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state. can be suggested.

Further, according to the pre-read effect pattern determination table Z1 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. When the command is a prefetch command corresponding to a "loss", a prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect pattern Z03) for executing the "RUSH expectation zone" is configured to be determinable.
For this reason, it is possible to suggest in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) using the "RUSH expectation zone".

[Look-ahead performance pattern determination table for normal gaming state]
As shown in FIG. 516(b), the look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z2 in the normal gaming state has correspondence between the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random value), and the look-ahead effect pattern. It is attached.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 516(b), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or loss" and "super reach, super super reach", the "expectation UP zone" is executed. A pre-read effect pattern (pre-read effect pattern Z01) to be determined can be determined.

Comparing the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. 516(a) and the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. The prefetch performance pattern for executing the "expectation UP zone" is configured to be easily determined.
Therefore, the "Expectation UP Zone" is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and the interest of the game in the normal gaming state (chance presentation mode) can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a look-ahead effect pattern, three types of look-ahead effect patterns are provided to execute the "expectation UP zone", "mode transition zone", and "RUSH expectation zone", but the suggested content is It may be divided into four or more types of pre-read effect patterns, or it may be configured to have two or less types of pre-read effect patterns by integrating (or omitting) the suggested contents.

Furthermore, the pre-read performance pattern may be determined also in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are the RUSH game state.

[13-6-5. Pre-reading effect prohibition condition setting table]
A pre-read effect prohibition condition setting table for determining whether or not to execute a pre-read effect (expected UP zone, mode transition zone, RUSH expected zone) will be described. FIG. 517 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 517, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead effect for each of the expected UP zone, mode transition zone, and RUSH expectation zone, and the mode transition A "specific prohibition condition" is set that prohibits the look-ahead presentation of both the zone and the RUSH expectation zone.

As the common prohibition conditions, three prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 3, are set. "Common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a pending number of second special symbols, and "common prohibition condition 2" is established when the second special symbol is being controlled (during variable display of the second special symbol). The "common prohibition condition 3" is satisfied when the prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any of these common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect pattern will not be determined and any look-ahead effects in the Expected UP Zone, Mode Transition Zone, and RUSH Expected Zone will not be executed. .

Two unique prohibition conditions, unique prohibition condition 1 and unique prohibition condition 2, are set. "Unique prohibition condition 1" is established when the game ball enters the first starting port 11120 or the second starting port 11140, and starting information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous pending memory. However, "unique prohibition condition 2" is that when the game ball enters the first starting port 11120 or the second starting port 11140, the selected symbol z20, which is a time-saving hit and a special symbol, is determined in the previously held memory. This is true when the start information is stored.

If either of these unique prohibition conditions 1 and 2 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect of the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone will not be executed, but the look-ahead effect of the expectation UP zone can be executed. It is composed of

[12-6-6. 1st game stop notice end determination table]
The first game stop notice end determination table for ending the execution of the first game stop notice started when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range will be described. FIG. 518 is an example of the first game stop notice end determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 518, three termination conditions 1 to 3 are set as "first game suspension notice termination conditions" for terminating the execution of the first game suspension notice.

"End condition 1" is satisfied when the game is in the normal gaming state. However, "termination condition 1" does not hold during the normal gaming state during the jackpot gaming state. Further, "termination condition 2" is satisfied when the game is in the first time-saving game state, and "termination condition 3" is satisfied when it is in the third time-saving game state. That is, the first game stop notice ends when the game shifts to the normal game state or the general game state.

Then, when the first game stop notice is being executed, if any of the conditions of the above-mentioned "first game stop notice end condition" is satisfied, the execution of the first game stop notice ends.

[13-7-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 519, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 519, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S11600). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11610.

In S11610, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data. In this data input process, a process of inputting a command from the command input port 308 and inputting operation information by the player detected by the production button 54 is performed. Details of this data input processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 525.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11620.

In S11620, sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command input in the process of S11610 is analyzed.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11630.

In S11630, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11640.

In S11640, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11650.

In S11650, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11660.

In S11660, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11670.

In S11670, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11680.

In S11680, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11690.

In S11690, sub CPU 301 executes presentation progress processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs processing to update an effect timer counter for advancing the execution of various effects, a forced notification timer, etc. to be described later.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 returns the process to S11610.

[13-7-2. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 520, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 519) will be described. FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11631, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing for determining a performance pattern only when a game stop flag, which will be described later, is off (=00H). In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, the mode of display effects displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound effects output from the speaker 32, the mode of operation of the effect button 54, etc. are determined. A pattern is determined. Note that when the game stop flag is on (=01H), the performance pattern determination process is not executed. Details of this performance pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 521 to 524.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11632.

In S11632, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S11631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11633.

In S11633, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S11632.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11634.

In S11634, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S11631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11635.

In S11635, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S11631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11636.

In S11636, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S11631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11637.

In S11637, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S11631 above.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11638.

In S11638, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a special request related to stopping the game only when the game stopping flag, which will be described later, is on (=01H).

In this game stop-related special request generation process, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time described below has not elapsed, a drawing is made to execute the game stop notification in the first notification mode. Generate requests, sound requests, lamp requests. Further, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request to execute the game stop notification in the second notification mode are generated.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 519).

[13-7-3. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 521 to 523, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 520) will be described. 521 to 523 are flowcharts showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11631-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S11631-1 that it is a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-3.

In S11631-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol pending number addition processing, such as adding the pending number of special symbols.

In this special symbol pending number addition process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol winning command" or "second special symbol winning command", and if it is a "first special symbol winning command", then , 1 is added to the number of pending first special symbols in the work RAM 303 (first special symbol pending number counter), and when it is a "second special symbol winning command", the number of pending second special symbols in the work RAM 303 is added. 1 is added to (second special symbol pending number counter).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S11631-3 that the command is a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-10.

In S11631-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process to store the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol pre-read command" or "second special symbol pre-read command", and various parameters of the pre-read command (see FIG. 479) are stored in the main RAM 203. The decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern starting storage area, and the second decorative pattern starting storage area of the work RAM 303 correspond to the special pattern determining area, the first special symbol starting storage area, and the second special pattern starting storage area. Remember. That is, the information corresponding to the special symbol starting information stored in the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 is also stored in the work RAM 303 of the sub control circuit 300.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-5.

In S11631-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect determination process to determine a prefetch effect pattern for executing the prefetch effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 524.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S11631-10 that it is a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-20.

In S11631-11, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine the type of decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

In this decorative pattern determination process, a stop pattern of the decorative pattern is determined based on the content of the pattern designation command, and the determined stop pattern is stored in the stop pattern storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S11631-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-30.

In S11631-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a special symbol pending number subtraction process, such as subtracting the pending number of special symbols.

In this process of subtracting the number of reserved special symbols, it is determined whether it is the "first special symbol variation pattern command" or "second special symbol variation pattern command", and then the "first special symbol variation pattern command" is determined. When , 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when it is a "second special symbol fluctuation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the pending number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. do. Furthermore, a pending shift display pattern is determined to shift and display the pending image on the display device 7 with respect to the pending image of the special symbol subtracted this time. Furthermore, various information stored in the decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the work RAM 303 are transferred to the special pattern determination area, the first special pattern start storage area, and the second decorative pattern start storage area of the main RAM 203. 2 Shift in the same way as the special symbol start storage area.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-22.

In S11631-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the production mode information stored in the production mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 and performs a symbol production table determination process to determine a symbol production pattern determination table.

In this symbol production table determination process, when the chance production mode is selected, the symbol production pattern determination table CZ shown in FIG. 512(a) is determined, and when the general production mode is selected, the symbol production pattern determination table CZ shown in FIG. Determine table NR. Further, when in the omen performance mode, the symbol performance pattern determination table ZT shown in FIG. 513(a) is determined, and when in the heaven performance mode, the symbol performance pattern determination table TE shown in FIG. 513(b) is determined. Incidentally, when in the RUSH effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table is not determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-23.

In S11631-23, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol presentation pattern determination processing to determine a symbol presentation pattern.

In this symbol production pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol production pattern determination table determined in the symbol production table determination process is referred to, and based on various information associated with the symbol production pattern determination table. to determine the symbol production pattern. Furthermore, after determining the symbol presentation pattern, a sub-symbol presentation pattern that defines a variation mode of the second decorative pattern (sub-symbol) is also determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-24.

Here, in the symbol production pattern, with reference to the symbol production pattern determination table ZT of the precursor production mode shown in FIG. In this case, a transition flag=01H is set in the work RAM 303, and performance mode information (10H) indicating the heaven performance mode is stored in the performance mode information storage area.
As a result, in the next variable display of the first special symbol, the production mode shifts from the omen production mode to the heaven production mode, and the symbol production pattern determination table TE of the heaven production mode shown in FIG. 513(b) is referenced (determined). will be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, even if a special symbol variation pattern command is received in the RUSH production mode, the symbol production pattern determination table is not determined and the symbol production pattern is not determined, but the sub-symbol The production pattern will be determined.

In S11631-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine a preview performance pattern.

In this advance notice performance pattern determination process, after obtaining a predetermined random number value, referring to a notice performance pattern determination table (not shown), based on the received special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the obtained second random number value, etc. A preview effect pattern to be executed based on the variation is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S11631-30 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-40.

In S11631-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation end process to end the symbol presentation.

In this symbol performance termination process, symbol performance execution end data for terminating the execution of the symbol performance based on the symbol performance pattern is created. In addition, in the pattern presentation end process, pattern stop display data is created to stop and display the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determined in the decorative pattern determination process.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-32.

In S11631-32, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) etc. stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a number counter updating process of updating various counters.

In this frequency counter updating process, in the case of the normal gaming state, 1 is added to the "normal variation counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the normal gaming state. Moreover, when it is a time-saving game state and the first special symbol performance stop command, 1 is subtracted from the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of time-saving special symbols in the time-saving game state and updated.

Furthermore, if it is a time-saving gaming state and the first special symbol production stop command, the production mode information stored in the production mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and if it is the general production mode or the omen production mode, the first special symbol production stop command is issued. 1 is subtracted from the "sub variable display number N counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number N of variable display of one special symbol and updated.

In addition, in the number counter updating process, when the prefetch flag indicating that the prefetch effect is being executed is on, the "prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 and updated.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-33.

In S11631-33, the sub CPU 301 performs a production mode transition process for shifting the production mode etc.

In this performance mode transition processing, when in the time-saving gaming state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is referred to, and when the sub-special symbol time-saving counter = 0, the state information of the normal gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303. Remember.

Further, the production mode information stored in the production mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the mode is the general production mode or the omen production mode, the sub variable display number N counter is referred to, and the sub variable display number N counter = 10. If so, performance mode information (02H) indicating the precursor performance mode is stored in the performance mode information storage area. Further, if the sub variable display number N counter = 0, performance mode information (01H) indicating the general performance mode is stored in the performance mode information storage area, and the sub variable display number N = 50 is reset.

In addition, in the production mode transition processing, when the prefetch flag indicating that the prefetch production is being executed is on, the "prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referred to, and if the prefetch number counter = 0, the prefetch flag is set. Turn it off (=00H).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S11631-40 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-42.

In S11631-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win start performance determination process that determines a small win start performance pattern for performing a small win start performance.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-42, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "V passing command".

If it is determined in S11631-42 that the command is a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-44.

In S11631-43, the sub CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process to determine a V passing effect pattern for performing the V passing effect.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-44, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command".

If it is determined in S11631-44 that it is a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-50.

In S11631-45, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the small win end performance.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command".

If it is determined in S11631-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-52.

In S11631-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot start performance. In this jackpot start performance determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the performance pattern of the jackpot start performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current performance pattern determination process, and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-52, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command".

If it is determined in S11631-52 that it is a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-60.

In S11631-53, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot end performance. In this jackpot end performance determination process, the performance pattern of the jackpot end performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-54.

In S11631-54, the sub CPU 301 performs a number counter setting process of setting various counters at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this number of times counter setting process, the stopped symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the stopped symbol (winning symbol) is one that transitions to the time-saving gaming state, the "special symbol variable" of the time-saving ending condition in the time-saving gaming state is The number of times (see FIG. 475(a)) corresponding to the "number of times of display" is set in the "sub special symbol time saving counter" of the work RAM 303.

In this number of times counter setting process, the stopped symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the stopped symbol (winning symbol) is one that transitions to the time-saving gaming state, the "special symbol variable" of the time-saving ending condition in the time-saving gaming state is The number of times corresponding to the "Number of display times" and the "Number of variable display times of normal symbols" (see FIG. 475(a)) are set in the "Sub special symbol time saving counter" and "Sub normal symbol time saving counter" of the work RAM 303. For example, as shown in FIG. 475(a), in the case of "special symbol selection symbol z1", it corresponds to the variable display number of special symbols = 10,000 times and the variable display number of normal symbols = 120 times as the time saving end condition. Then, the sub special symbol time saving counter = 10000 times and the sub normal symbol time saving counter = 120 times are set.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S11631-60 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-70.

In S11631-61, the sub CPU 301 performs a telop effect pattern determination process to determine a telop effect pattern.

In this telop performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, the telop performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on the performance pattern.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-62.

In S11631-62, the sub CPU 301 performs a RUSH symbol production pattern determination process that determines a symbol production pattern when in the RUSH production mode.

In this RUSH symbol performance pattern determination process, the performance mode information stored in the performance mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and if it is the RUSH performance mode, after obtaining the second random number value, the process shown in FIG. With reference to the symbol production pattern determination table RU, a symbol production pattern is determined based on the received normal symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. In addition, if it is not the RUSH production mode, the symbol production pattern is not determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S11631-70 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-80.

In S11631-71, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the current gaming state from the gaming state designation command received this time, and determines whether the analyzed current gaming state is different from the state information stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303. That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been updated.

If it is determined in S11631-71 that the gaming state has been updated, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-72. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state has not been updated (the gaming state is maintained), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-80.

In S11631-72, the sub CPU 301 performs a status information update process to update and store the status information indicating the current gaming status analyzed in S11631-71 in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-73.

In S11631-73, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information updated in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, and selects the B time saving gaming state (fourth working time saving gaming state) or the C working time saving gaming state (the first working time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state). 2 time-saving game state, 3rd time-saving game state), BC time-saving game state setting processing is performed.

In this BC time-saving gaming state setting process, when the current gaming state is updated to the B-time-saving gaming state (fourth time-saving gaming state), the "variable display count of normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition in the fourth time-saving gaming state ” (see FIG. 475(c)) is set in the “sub normal symbol time saving counter” of the work RAM 303. For example, in the fourth time-saving game state, the sub normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.

In addition, when the current game state is updated to the C time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the stop Depending on the symbol (winning symbol), the number of times (see FIG. 475(b)) corresponding to the "variable display number of special symbols" or "variable display frequency of normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition is stored in the work RAM 303 as "sub-special symbol". Set it to the "Symbol Time Saving Counter" or "Sub Normal Symbol Time Saving Counter". For example, in the first time saving game state, when the "special symbol selection symbol z10" is selected, the sub special symbol time saving counter is set to 50 times. In addition, in the second time saving game state, the sub normal symbol time saving counter = 950 times is set, and in the third time saving game state, the sub special symbol time saving counter = 950 times is set.

Furthermore, when the current gaming state is updated to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, "50 times", which is the same as the minimum number of first time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, is stored in the work RAM 303 as "50 times". Set the sub variable display number N counter.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-74.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the current gaming state is updated to the first time saving game state or the third time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times set in the sub special symbol time saving counter is not notified to the player. In addition, it is configured to inform the player of the number of times set in the "sub variable display number N counter".

In S11631-74, the sub CPU 301 performs performance mode setting processing to set the performance mode.

In this performance mode setting process, performance mode information is determined based on the current gaming state with reference to the performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 511, and the determined performance mode information is stored in the performance mode information storage area of the work RAM 303. do.

Here, when the current gaming state is updated to the first time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, the production mode information is determined by also referring to the transition flag and the sub variable display number N counter in the work RAM 303. . In addition, in this embodiment, since the transition flag = 00H and the sub variable display number N counter = 50 at the beginning of the update to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the performance indicating the general performance mode is Mode information (01H) will be determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-75.

In S11631-75, the sub CPU 301 performs a first game stop notice end determination process to determine whether or not to end the execution of the first game stop notice.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, with reference to the first game stop notice end determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the termination condition is met, and if any of the termination conditions is satisfied, the execution of the first game stop notice is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S11631-80 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-90.

In S11631-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display effect pattern for performing an effect during standby of the game.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-90, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "difference number of balls command".

If it is determined in S11631-90 that the command is a "difference number of balls command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-91. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "difference number of balls command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-92.

In S11631-92, the sub CPU 301 performs a difference ball number storage process to store the difference ball number.

In this difference ball number storage process, the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference ball number counter) corresponding to the received difference ball number command is stored in the sub difference ball number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-92, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming stop command".

If it is determined in S11631-92 that the command is a "gaming stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-99.

In S11631-93, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop notification process that provides notification in accordance with the received game stop command.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, when the game stop command = 01H, the execution of the first game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command = 02H, the execution of the second game stop notice is started, and the game When the stop command is 03H, execution of the third game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command is 04H, the execution of the game stop notification is started.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11631-94.

In S11631-94, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop setting process to set a game stop flag and the like.

In this game stop flag setting process, when the received game stop command is the game stop command=04H, the game stop flag in the work RAM 303 is turned on (=01H). Further, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, a predetermined counter (for example, 5 minutes) corresponding to the forced notification time is set in the forced notification timer.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11631-99, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands received from the main CPU 201, and updates other counters. For example, the cumulative payout information of game balls may be updated in response to reception of the first grand prize opening winning command or the second grand winning opening winning command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).
[13-7-4. Ahead production decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 524, details of the look-ahead performance determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 521) will be described. FIG. 524 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pre-read effect determination process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11701, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch effect prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 517 and determines whether any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied.

If it is determined in S11701 that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11702. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11702, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current gaming state) etc. stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a pre-read effect table determination process to determine a pre-read effect table.

In this look-ahead effect table determination process, when in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. Sometimes, a look-ahead effect pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 516(b) is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11703.

In S11703, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect pattern determination process to determine a prefetch effect pattern.

In this prefetch effect pattern determination process, after obtaining the third random value, the prefetch effect pattern determination table determined in the above prefetch effect table determination process is referred to, and the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 and the third random A look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the numerical value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11704.

In S11704, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch number counter setting process to set a prefetch number counter.

In this prefetch number counter setting process, when a prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect pattern Z01 to Z03) is determined, the prefetch flag is turned on (=01H) and the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the pre-reading number counter of the work RAM 303.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11705.

In S11705, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a specific prefetch effect pattern (prefetch effect patterns Z02, Z03) for executing the mode transition zone or the RUSH expectation zone has been determined.

If it is determined in S11705 that a specific prefetch effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11706. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific prefetch effect pattern has not been determined, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In S11706, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch effect prohibition condition setting table shown in FIG. 517 and determines whether either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied.

If it is determined in S11706 that either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11707. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the unique prohibition condition 1 nor the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the current lookahead effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 520). .

In S11707, the sub CPU 301 performs processing to clear a specific prefetch effect pattern, prefetch flag, and prefetch number counter. That is, the specific prefetch effect pattern is discarded, the prefetch flag is turned off (=00H), and the prefetch number counter is set to 0.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current prefetch effect determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 520).

In this way, when any one of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, no pre-read performance in the expected UP zone, mode transition zone, or RUSH expected zone will be executed. In addition, when either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 is satisfied, the look-ahead effect of the expected UP zone can be executed, but the look-ahead effect of the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone is not executed. It turns out.

[13-7-5. Data input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 525, details of the data input process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 519) will be described. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11611, the sub CPU 301 performs command reading processing to read a command from the command input port 308.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11612.

In S11612, the sub CPU 301 determines, for each of the plurality of performance buttons 54 (decision button, left/right button, up/down button), an operation enable button 54 to enable input of operation information by the player, based on various performance conditions, etc. Performance button permission setting processing is performed to set a period and an operation invalidation period for invalidating the input of operation information by the player.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has not elapsed, an operation invalidation time is set for all the effect buttons 54. Further, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, an operation valid period is set for some of the performance buttons 54 (left and right buttons, up and down buttons).
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11613.

In S11613, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not operation information for any of the plurality of effect buttons 54 has been input within the operation validity period.

In S11613, if it is determined that the operation information for any of the plurality of effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11614. On the other hand, if it is determined that no operation information has been input for any of the plurality of performance buttons 54 within the valid operation period, the current data input process is ended and the process is shifted to command analysis process (see FIG. 519).

In S11614, when the sub CPU 301 is executing the effect based on the symbol effect pattern and inputs the first operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the determination button, the sub CPU 301 performs the changing button setting process.

In this fluctuating button setting process, settings are made to execute a fluctuating button performance (for example, button cut-in performance) based on the content of the symbol performance pattern being executed and the special symbol lottery result.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11615.

In S11615, when the first operation information corresponding to the production button 54 of the determination button is input when the production based on the symbol production pattern is not being executed, various production adjustment menus and QR codes (registered trademarks) are displayed. Performs standby menu setting processing.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11616.

In S11616, when the second operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the left and right buttons is input, the sub CPU 301 performs a volume adjustment process to adjust the volume of the volume output from the speaker 32. Specifically, when the second operation information L corresponding to the production button 54 of the left button is input, the volume is adjusted down by one level, and the second operation corresponding to the production button 54 of the right button is input. When information R is input, the volume is adjusted to increase by one level.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S11617.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment process is performed by operating the production button 54, but the volume can be adjusted automatically when the adjustment conditions are met, regardless of the operation of the production button 54. You may. For example, when the above-described game stop related special request generation process (see FIG. 520) causes the adjustment condition to be satisfied and the forced notification time has elapsed, the volume may be automatically adjusted to lower the volume.

In S11617, when the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, the sub CPU 301 performs a light amount adjustment process to adjust the brightness of the emitted LED. Specifically, when the third operation information D corresponding to the production button 54 of the lower button is input, the brightness is adjusted down by one level, and the second operation corresponding to the production button 54 of the upper button is performed. When information U is input, the brightness is adjusted to increase by one level.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current data input process and shifts the process to command analysis process (see FIG. 519).

In the present embodiment, the light amount adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the light amount can be adjusted automatically when the adjustment conditions are met, regardless of the operation of the effect button 54. You may. For example, in the above-described game stop related special request generation process (see FIG. 520), when the forced notification time has elapsed as the adjustment condition is met, the amount of light may be automatically adjusted to lower.

[13-8. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the transition of the gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 526 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set. The time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern=01 is set is referred to as the "second time-saving game state" and the "third time-saving game state". In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which the general electricity operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as a "fourth time-saving game state". In addition, in the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which the general power operation pattern = 02 is set is referred to as the "fifth time-saving game state".

(Normal gaming state transition control)
In the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port 11120 and also to pass through the second passage gate 11126L. In the normal game state, the game is mainly played based on the gameplay related to the lottery of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 526, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11120, a "jackpot", "time-saving hit", or "loss" is determined by drawing the first special symbol (see FIG. 471). Incidentally, regardless of the gaming state, a "small hit" is never determined in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the normal gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the game mode changes according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol. 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 472 and 475).

In addition, when a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, C of any of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state Shift to time-saving gaming state. Here, when a "time saving hit" is determined, 70% shifts to the first time saving game state, 15% shifts to the second time saving game state, and 15% shifts to the third time saving game state, depending on the selected special symbol. Transition to the time saving game state (see FIGS. 472 and 475).

In particular, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" is configured to be determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 471). Therefore, it is possible to shift only from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state, which is the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, and the third time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball passes through the second passage gate 11126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal operation pattern = 00, the long The "long open probability" for which the open pattern is determined is "0" (see FIG. 482). That is, in the normal gaming state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 11140.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the state shifts from the normal game state to the fourth time-saving game state of B-time-saving game state.

For this reason, from the normal gaming state, a transition is made to a jackpot gaming state, a first time-saving gaming state, a second time-saving gaming state, a third time-saving gaming state, and a fourth time-saving gaming state.

(Transition control of first time-saving game state)
In the first time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting port 11120, and the game ball can also pass through the second passage gate 11126L. . In the first time-saving game state, the game is played mainly with the game nature related to the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined by drawing the first special symbol (see FIG. 471). In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol in all the time-saving game states, a "time-saving hit" is never determined.

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the first time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the selected symbol of the first special symbol Accordingly, 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 472 and 475).

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passage gate 11126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal operation pattern = 00. , the "long open probability" for which the long open pattern is determined is "0" (see FIG. 482). That is, in the first time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 11140.

In addition, the first time-saving gaming state has the same "long opening probability" as the normal gaming state, and unlike the normal gaming state, "time-saving winning" is not derived, so the jackpot gaming state is more likely than the normal gaming state. This results in an unfavorable gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to a jackpot game state, the first time-saving game state shifts to a fourth time-saving game state of B-time saving game state.

Here, when transitioning to the first time saving game state, the minimum first time saving number is 50 times, the second time saving number is 100 times, and the third time saving number is set as the "variable display number of special symbols" of the time saving end condition. 150 times is set (see FIG. 475). Then, when the special symbols are variably displayed for the set number of times without shifting to the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

Therefore, from the first time-saving game state, a transition is made to a jackpot game state, a normal game state, and a fourth time-saving game state.

(Transition control of third time-saving game state)
In the third time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting port 11120, and the game ball can also pass through the second passage gate 11126L. . In the third time-saving game state, the game is mainly performed with the game nature related to the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 471).

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the third time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, the selected symbol of the first special symbol Accordingly, 60% shifts to the fifth time-saving gaming state, and 40% shifts to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 472 and 475).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passage gate 11126L, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal symbol operation pattern = 01. , the "long open probability" at which the long open pattern is determined is "approximately 1/197.6" (see FIG. 482). That is, in the third time-saving game state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 11140 with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/197.6).

Here, when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140, it is determined that it is a "small hit" with an extremely high probability of about 1/1 regardless of the gaming state (see Fig. 471), and It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot gaming state via the second route.
Therefore, when the game is in the third time-saving game state, it becomes an advantageous game state in which it is easier to shift to the jackpot game state than when it is in the first time-saving game state.

Moreover, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the third time-saving game state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state of the B-time saving game state.

Here, when moving to the third time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable number of special symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 475). However, in the third time saving game form, before the fifth time saving number is counted, the number of variable display times of the special symbol has reached the ceiling value (950 times).
Therefore, from the third time-saving gaming state, it is only possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state.

(RUSH gaming state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are the RUSH game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the game ball can pass through the first passage gate 11126R, and the normal symbol The game ball is configured to be able to enter the second starting port 11140 by long opening the second starting port 11140 by the lottery. In the RUSH game state, the game is played mainly with game features related to the lottery of normal symbols.

In the RUSH gaming state, when a game ball passes through the first passage gate 11126R, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" is determined by lottery of the normal symbols, but due to the normal power operation pattern = 02, the long open pattern The "long open probability" determined is "approximately 1/68.5" (see FIG. 482). That is, in the RUSH gaming state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 11140 with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/68.5).

Furthermore, in the RUSH gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 11140, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined by drawing the second special symbol (see FIG. 471). In particular, in this embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to determine a "small hit" with an extremely high probability of about 1/1.

When a "small hit" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the game shifts to the small winning gaming state, and in the small winning gaming state, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 11156 provided inside the second big winning opening 11151, The game will move to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, in the small winning game state, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 11151, the game ball is configured so that it also passes through the V winning hole 11156 in principle.
After the jackpot game state from the second route triggered by the small hit ends, 80% shifts to the 5th time-saving gaming state and 20% shifts to the normal gaming state depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol. (See Figures 472 and 475).

In addition, when a "jackpot" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by the jackpot ends, depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. 100% shifts to the fifth time-saving game state (see FIGS. 472 and 475).

Further, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the second time saving game state, the fourth time saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable display number of normal symbols" of the time saving end condition (see FIG. 475). This fourth time saving number is the number of times in which transition to the jackpot game state is virtually guaranteed, since the "long opening probability" by the lottery of normal symbols is "approximately 1/68.5".
For this reason, the second time saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to the jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state, the seventh time-saving number of times, 950, is set as the "variable display number of normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 475). This seventh time saving number is the number of times in which a transition to a jackpot gaming state is virtually guaranteed, since the "long release probability" by lottery of normal symbols is "approximately 1/68.5".
For this reason, the fourth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, when the RUSH gaming state shifts to the fifth time-saving game state, the sixth time-saving number of times, 120, is set as the "variable display number of normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 475).
In addition, 10,000 times is also set as the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" in the time-saving end condition, but 10,000 times is a number that cannot be achieved in one day of gaming, and the time-saving end condition of "the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" is set as 10,000 times. The termination condition is never met. Then, when the normal symbols are variably displayed for the sixth time saving number of times without shifting to the jackpot gaming state, the fifth time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.
Therefore, from the fifth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state, a transition is made to the jackpot gaming state or the normal gaming state.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first game feature aims at a jackpot gaming state by drawing the first special symbol in the normal gaming state and the general gaming state, and the first game feature aims at the jackpot gaming state by drawing the first special symbol in the RUSH gaming state. Since it is composed of a second game that aims to open the second starting port 11140 for a long time, it is not only a mixture of a so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine and a so-called type 2 type pachinko game machine, but also It is possible to create a gameplay experience that is not available before, and to further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, by drawing the second special symbol (the game ball enters the second starting port 11140), it is possible to shift to a jackpot game state substantially (approximately 1/1). Therefore, when in the RUSH gaming state, it is possible to further increase the interest in opening the second starting port 11140 for a long time by drawing a normal symbol, thereby further improving the interest of the game. .

Further, in this embodiment, when a "time saving hit" is determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, it is configured to be able to shift to the second time saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state. Further, from the second time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state, a transition will be made to the jackpot gaming state.
Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the transition rate to the jackpot gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Since the normal gaming state is also the initial gaming state after the RAM is cleared, in the state after the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the first time-saving gaming state, which is the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machines after the opening of the gaming parlor.

In addition, even if a "time saving win" is determined in the normal gaming state and the transition to the first time saving gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state, the number of time saving games set in the first time saving gaming state (50, 100, or 150 times), it becomes possible to shift from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state.
Thereby, even if the game state is shifted to the first time-saving game state which is more disadvantageous than the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state by variable display of special symbols, so that the interest in the game can be maintained.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of time savings set in the first time saving game state is not notified to the player, but any one of the plurality of time saving times is set, and the second time saving number (100 times) and The third number of time reductions (150 times) is set to an integral multiple of the minimum number of first time reductions (50 times).
Therefore, it is possible to create an expectation that the minimum number of first time-saving games (50 times) is one cycle, and the first time-saving gaming state is periodically shifted to the normal gaming state, which further improves the interest of the game. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the long opening probability differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of time-saving gaming states with different long opening probabilities, thereby further improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the third time-saving game state which is the general game state, the long opening is more likely to occur and the advantageous game is easier to shift to the jackpot game state than in the first time-saving game state which is the general game state. It is in a state.
As a result, even if a "time-saving win" is determined in the normal gaming state but the transition to the RUSH gaming state is not made, the interest in the game is maintained by creating expectations that the normal gaming state will be in the third time-saving gaming state. can be achieved.

[13-9. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the eleventh pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 527 is an example of the performance flow of the performance mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are five performance modes: chance performance mode, general performance mode, omen performance mode, heaven performance mode, and RUSH performance mode.

Then, based on each performance mode, a symbol performance consisting of a fluctuating display of a predetermined decorative pattern in the fluctuation, a preview performance that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in advance in the fluctuation, and a lottery result of the normal symbol in the fluctuation in advance. The system is configured to be able to carry out performances such as a telop performance that suggests the lottery result of a special symbol in advance, and a look-ahead performance that suggests the lottery result of a special symbol in advance.

In this embodiment, the performance based on the first special symbol lottery is also referred to as the "first special symbol performance", and the performance based on the second special symbol lottery is also referred to as the "second special symbol performance".

(Chance production mode)
The chance production mode can be executed during the normal gaming state. This chance presentation mode can suggest that the normal game state is more advantageous than the first time-saving game state.

In the chance presentation mode, presentations such as a pattern presentation, a preview presentation, and a look-ahead presentation based on the chance presentation mode are configured to be executable. In addition, in the chance effect mode, the second starting port 11140 is not opened long, so the telop effect cannot be executed.

Furthermore, in the chance performance mode, at least "card performance" and "RUSH entry performance" can be executed as pattern performances.

As mentioned above, the "card performance" is a performance that suggests a transition to any one of the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state in the variation. Moreover, the "RUSH entry performance" is a performance that suggests whether or not to shift to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) in the variation.

Furthermore, in the chance production mode, at least a "mode transition zone", "expectation UP zone", and "RUSH expectation zone" are executable as pre-read productions.

As mentioned above, the "mode transition zone" is a time saving game state in the advance variation, and the game state is changed from the normal gaming state to any of the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, or the third time saving gaming state. This is a performance that hints in advance that a transition will occur. In addition, the "Expectation UP Zone" is a performance that suggests in advance that a predetermined performance (Super Reach) will be performed in advance fluctuations, and that a transition to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur. be. In addition, the "RUSH expectation zone" is a performance that suggests in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) in the advance variation.

In the chance performance mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the chance production mode, when you win a time saving game, when you move to the first time saving gaming state or the third time saving gaming state which is the general gaming state, you move to the general production mode, and when you move to the second time saving gaming state, you press RUSH. Shift to production mode.

In the chance performance mode, after the number of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the chance performance mode is shifted to the RUSH performance mode.

(General production mode)
In the general performance mode, in the case of the first time saving game state or the third time saving game state in the general game state, when the variable display number N of the first special symbol is > 10 (1st to 39th rotation from the start of the general performance mode) It has become executable.

In the general presentation mode, presentations such as a pattern presentation, a preview presentation, a look-ahead presentation, a telop presentation, etc. based on the general presentation mode are configured to be executable.

Also, in the general production mode, the "Expectation UP Zone" can be executed as a look-ahead production, but the "Mode Transition Zone" and "RUSH Expectation Zone" cannot be executed because the time saving hit will not be won. It becomes.

In the general performance mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the general performance mode, when the number of variable displays of the first special symbol reaches N=10 (40th rotation from the start of the general performance mode) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the general performance mode is shifted to the omen performance mode.

In the general performance mode, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the general performance mode is shifted to the RUSH performance mode.

(Omen production mode)
In the omen performance mode, in the case of the first time saving game state or the third time saving game state in the general game state, the variable display number N of the first special symbol is 0 to 10 (40th to 50th rotation from the start of the general performance mode) It is executable when

In the omen effect mode, effects such as a pattern effect, a preview effect, a look-ahead effect, a telop effect, etc. based on the omen effect mode can be executed.

In addition, in the omen production mode, as a symbol production, when the variable display number N of the first special symbol is 1 to 10 (40th to 49th rotation from the start of the general production mode), a "mode transition inciting production" can be executed. Become. Further, when the variable display number N of the first special symbol is 0 (50th rotation from the start of the general performance mode), the "mode transition performance" can be executed.

As mentioned above, the "mode transition inciting effect" is an effect that indicates in advance that there is a possibility that the effect mode may change by displaying the first special symbol a predetermined number of times during the change. be. Further, the "mode transition performance" is a performance that notifies that the transition from the portent performance mode to the general performance mode, the chance performance mode, or the heaven performance mode is to be made in the change.

In the portent effect mode, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot effect can be executed.

In the foreshadowing performance mode, a mode transition performance is executed, and when the mode transition performance notifies that the mode will shift to the general performance mode, the foreshadowing performance mode is shifted to the general performance mode. Further, when it is notified that the mode transition performance will shift to the chance performance mode, the mode transition performance mode is shifted from the foreshadow performance mode to the chance performance mode. Further, when the mode transition performance informs that the mode will shift to the heaven performance mode, the foreshadow performance mode is shifted to the heaven performance mode.

In the omen performance mode, after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to a jackpot game state, the omen performance mode is shifted to the RUSH performance mode.

As mentioned above, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine the same pattern production pattern so that the common background display mode will be displayed in the general production mode, omen production mode, and chance production mode. In this case, it is desirable to start from a common performance mode (for example, chance performance mode or omen performance mode) when the power is turned on.

(Heaven production mode)
The heaven presentation mode can be executed when a shift to the heaven presentation mode is notified by "mode transition presentation" in the first time saving game state or the third time saving game state in the general game state. This heaven performance mode can suggest an advantageous general gaming state (third time-saving gaming state).

In the heaven presentation mode, presentations such as a pattern presentation, a preview presentation, a look-ahead presentation, and a telop presentation based on the heaven presentation mode are configured to be executable.

In the heaven effect mode, if a jackpot is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot effect can be executed.

In the heaven performance mode, after the number of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the heaven performance mode is shifted to the RUSH performance mode.

(RUSH production mode)
The RUSH performance mode can be executed in the second short game state, fourth short game state, and fifth short game state in the RUSH game state. This RUSH performance mode can suggest that the state is likely to shift to a jackpot gaming state.

In the RUSH performance mode, performances such as a symbol performance, a preview performance, a pre-reading performance, etc. based on the RUSH performance mode are configured to be executable.

In the RUSH effect mode, when a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state and the jackpot effect can be executed.

In the RUSH performance mode, when the variable display of normal symbols of the number of times of time saving is performed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the RUSH performance mode is shifted to the chance performance mode.
In addition, when in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state of the RUSH game state, the number of times that is virtually guaranteed to shift to the jackpot game state is set as the "variable number of normal symbol display times" of the time-saving end condition. (950 times), there is no transition from the RUSH production mode to the chance production mode, and the transition from the RUSH production mode to the chance production mode is only in the 5th time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state. It is.

[13-10. Game stop notice time chart]
Next, an outline of the game stop notice given in the eleventh pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 528 is an example of a time chart of a game stop notice based on a game stop command in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 528 shows the "game status", "notification device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46)", "game stop flag" indicating game stop, and "increased number of game balls (MY)". are shown above and below.

FIG. 528(a) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first count range (85000 to 89999) and the first game stop notice start condition is met, the first game stop notice is issued. This is an example of a time chart 1 for executing.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 528(a), when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device 1. Execution of game stop notice is started. Here, as an example of the establishment of the first game stop notice start condition, it is established during the jackpot game state of the selected symbol z1 of the special symbol (see FIG. 484). Note that an example of the notification mode of the first game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 528(a), the increased number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range, and the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range. In this case, the first game stop notice termination condition is satisfied, and the execution of the first game stop notice ends in the notification device. Here, as an example of the fulfillment of the first game stop notice end condition, it is established that the gaming state has shifted to the normal short gaming state (see FIG. 518).

As described above, according to the time chart 1 shown in FIG. 528(a), when the player is in a gaming state where he or she can expect to acquire a large amount of gaming value (game balls), the second count range is Also, execution of the first game stop notice can be started in advance. Then, when the increased number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range due to the gaming state, the execution of the first game stop notice can be ended.

FIG. 528(b) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90000 to 94999) after the execution of the first game stop notice is completed, the second game stop notice, This is an example of a time chart 2 for executing game stop notification.

The timings (a) and (b) shown in FIG. 528(b) are the same as the timings (a) and (b) shown in FIG. 528(a) described above. That is, when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, execution of the first game stop notice is started when the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the first game stop notice end condition is met. With the establishment of , the execution of the first game stop notice ends.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 528(b), the small winning gaming state, the jackpot gaming state, and the RUSH gaming state are not being executed, and the game ball enters the first starting opening 11120, the general winning opening 122, etc. The increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) by throwing the ball and paying out a predetermined prize ball.
At this time, since the first game stop notice has already been executed, the second game stop notice start condition is not satisfied and the second game stop notice is not executed (see FIG. 484).

At the timing (d) shown in FIG. 528(b), the jackpot game state is executed, so the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice. be done. This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000). Note that an example of the notification mode of the second game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (e) shown in FIG. 528(b), the small hit game state or the jackpot game state is not being executed, and the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulation value (95000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as the game stop notification.

At the timing (f) shown in FIG. 528(b), the forced notification time has elapsed after the game stop flag was turned on.
At this time, as the game stop notification, a second game stop notification different from the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device. Further, when the second game stop notification is being executed, the input of operation information of the predetermined effect button 54 becomes valid, and the volume adjustment and the light intensity adjustment become possible. Note that an example of the notification mode of the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

In this way, according to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 528(b), if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the player can expect to obtain a predetermined game value (game balls). When a gaming state (such as a jackpot gaming state) is reached, execution of the second game stop notice can be started.

In addition, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the number of game balls will increase by entering the game ball into the first starting port 11120, general prize winning port 122, etc. and paying out a predetermined prize ball. Even when (MY) reaches the second counting range, execution of the second game stop notice will not start (periods (c) to (e)).
As a result, game balls enter the first starting port 11120, general winning port 122, etc., a predetermined prize ball is paid out, and the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range. , Even if the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the second counting range due to the firing of game balls (such as when it is around the first boundary value of 90,000 balls), a game stop notice will be issued. There is no need to run or terminate the game, and the annoyance caused by a game stop notice can be eliminated.

Furthermore, as the game stop notification, the first game stop notification is executed initially when the game stop flag is turned on, and the second game stop notification is executed after the forced notification time has elapsed, so the progress after the game stop notification is executed. Appropriate notifications can be made depending on the time.

FIG. 528(c) shows that when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90000 to 94999) without executing the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the game This is an example of a time chart 3 for executing stop notification.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 528(c), the small winning gaming state, the jackpot gaming state, and the RUSH gaming state are not being executed, and game balls enter the first starting opening 11120, the general winning opening 122, etc. The increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) by throwing the ball and paying out a predetermined prize ball.
At this time, since the first game stop notice was not executed, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 484). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).

Then, at the timings (E) and (F) shown in FIG. 528(c), the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification are issued in the notification device, similarly to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 528(b). executed.

In this way, according to the time chart 3 shown in FIG. 528(c), when the first game stop notice is not executed and the increased number of game balls (MY) approaches the regulation value (95000), the first game stop notice is quickly executed. 2. It is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped by executing a game stop notice.

FIG. 528(d) is an example of the time chart 4 for executing the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the third game stop notice, and the game stop notification.

At the timing (a) shown in FIG. 528(d), when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device 1. Execution of game stop notice is started.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 528(d), the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90000 to 94999) in the RUSH gaming state.
At this time, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 484). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).

At the timing (g) shown in FIG. 528(d), the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulation value (95000) while the jackpot game state is being executed.
At this time, the game is not stopped and the game stop flag is kept off, and during the jackpot game state, execution of the third game stop notice is started in the notification device (see FIG. 484). Note that an example of the notification mode of the third game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (h) shown in FIG. 528(d), the jackpot game state has ended after the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as the game stop notification.

Then, at the timing (F) shown in FIG. 528(d), the second game stop notification is executed in the notification device similarly to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 528(b).

In this way, according to the time chart 4 shown in FIG. 528(d), when the game stops after the end of the jackpot game state, the third game stop notice during the jackpot game state specifies the specific game stop content. (For example, "The game will stop after this jackpot game state ends.") can be notified.

[13-11. Display contents]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, sub-control circuit 300, etc. described above will be explained using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, with reference to FIG. 529, the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described. FIG. 529 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the eleventh pachinko game machine. FIG. 529(a) shows the basic structure of the display image in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state, and FIG. 529(b) shows the basic structure of the display image in the RUSH gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 529, the decorative symbols include a "main symbol" as a first decorative symbol that is displayed large enough to be easily recognized by the player in the display area of the display device 7, and a "main symbol" that is displayed small that is difficult for the player to recognize. It consists of two types: a "sub-design" as a second decorative design. Note that the type of decorative pattern is not limited to this.

(Basic configuration of display images in normal gaming state and general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 529(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state is that a left symbol 11071L as a main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is placed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. , a middle pattern 11071C, and a right pattern 11071R are configured to be displayable. Note that the number of main symbols is not limited to three types.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 11072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 11072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A sub-symbol 11073 and a third sub-symbol 11075 as a sub-symbol of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal gaming state or the general gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 11071L, middle symbol 11071C, and right symbol 11071R, Variable display of the first sub-symbol 11072 will also be performed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is variably displayed during the normal game state or the general game state, only the second sub-symbol 11073 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern will not be displayed. In addition, when a variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the normal game state or the general game state, only the third sub-symbol 11075 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. It turns out.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of first special symbols can be displayed, and the first special symbol starting storage area ( A first pending image 10074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), a second pending image 10074b indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2), and a first special symbol. A third pending image 10074c indicating that starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth pending image 10074d indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Configured so that it can be displayed. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 10074z indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols is not displayed, but the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the second special symbols may be configured to be displayable.
(Basic configuration of display image in RUSH gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 529(b), the basic structure of the display image in the RUSH gaming state is that the left symbol 11076L, which is the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, and the middle symbol are placed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. 11076C and right pattern 11076R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 11072 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second sub-symbol 11072 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed, as in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. A sub-symbol 11073 and a third sub-symbol 11075 corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be small and displayable.

In this embodiment, when a variable display of the normal symbol is performed during the RUSH gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbol of the left symbol 11076L, middle symbol 11076C, and right symbol 11076R, the third sub symbol 11075 is Variable display will also be performed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the RUSH gaming state, only the first sub-symbol 11072 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. It will not be done. When the second special symbol is variably displayed during the RUSH gaming state, only the second sub-symbol 11073 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed. Become.

At the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a pending image corresponding to the pending number of normal symbols can be displayed, and starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) according to the pending number of normal symbols. The first pending image 11077a indicates that the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (2), the second pending image 11077b indicates that the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (3), and the starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (3). A third pending image 11077c indicating that the starting information is stored, and a fourth pending image 11077d indicating that starting information is stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (4) are configured to be displayable. Further, in correspondence with the pending image, a pending image 11077z indicating that a variable display of normal symbols is being displayed is configured to be displayable. In addition, in this embodiment, in the RUSH gaming state, the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed, but the pending image corresponding to the pending number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. may be configured to be displayable.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 7, a right-handed instruction image 11079 that instructs the player to play right-handed as a regular game mode is configured to be displayable.

In this way, in the normal game state and the general game state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the reserved image are set in the first special so that it is easy to recognize the first game nature that aims at the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol. When in the RUSH gaming state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the reserved image are normal so that it is easy to recognize the second game feature, which aims to open the second starting port 11140 long by drawing the normal symbol. It corresponds to the pattern. That is, the first decorative pattern (main pattern) becomes a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the normal game state, and is replaced with a pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the RUSH game state.

(Card performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 530, card presentation in the chance presentation mode will be described. FIG. 530 is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the chance performance mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in the explanation of the card effects, the symbols added in FIG. 529 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, and there is a risk that it will get in the way of the explanation of the effect contents. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 11072, second sub-symbol 11073, and third sub-symbol 11075, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described in FIGS. 530 to 536.

FIG. 530(a) is an example of a display image before starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the chance production mode.

FIG. 530(b) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol won in the short time is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 530(b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 512) for performing the card presentation is determined and the card presentation is started, the words "general presentation mode" and "RUSH presentation mode" are written. The selected chance cards are turned over, shuffled, and an effect is performed in which one of the cards is selected. Here, there are two types of card effects: a white card effect in which a white card is displayed, and a red card effect in which a red card is displayed.The red card effect is better than the white card effect in RUSH effect mode. The expected value of transitioning to the (second time-saving gaming state) is set high. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 530(c) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the performance result of the card performance is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 530(c), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed, and a performance is performed in which a chance card with the words "general performance mode" written on it is displayed. .

FIG. 530(d) is an example of a display image that notifies that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the mode has shifted to the general production mode.

As shown in FIG. 530(d), when a chance card with the words "general performance mode" written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area. is displayed as a large stop in the center of the display area. Thereafter, the display mode of the background changes, and it is notified that the mode has shifted to the general production mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the background in the chance production mode and the display mode of the background in the general production mode are configured to be different, but they may be displayed in a common background display mode.

In this way, the card performance can suggest that the game state will shift to any one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, thereby further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

(RUSH rush performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 531, the RUSH entry effect in the chance effect mode will be described. FIG. 531 is an example of a display image illustrating the RUSH entry effect in the chance effect mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 531(a) is an example of a display image before starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the chance production mode.

FIG. 531(b) is an example of a display image when the RUSH rush effect is started, in which a variable display of the first special symbol won in the time saving is performed.

As shown in FIG. 531(b), when the symbol performance pattern (see FIG. 512) for executing the RUSH entry performance is determined and the RUSH entry performance is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and a predetermined door is displayed. Over a period of time, a performance that appears to make a half-open door rattle shut is performed.

FIG. 531(c) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the RUSH entry effect is successful.

As shown in FIG. 531(c), when the RUSH entry performance is successful, a door closing performance is performed and all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Note that if the RUSH entry performance fails, a performance is performed in which the door opens instead of closing.

FIG. 531(d) is an example of a display image that notifies that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the mode has shifted to the RUSH mode.

As shown in FIG. 530(d), when the completely closed door is opened, the display mode of the background changes, and the transition to the RUSH mode is notified.

In this way, the RUSH entry effect allows execution of an effect as to whether or not to move to the RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), thereby making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Telop production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 532, the telop presentation in the heaven presentation mode will be described. FIG. 532 is an example of a display image explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 532(a) is an example of a display image before starting variable display of the first special symbol and the normal symbol in the heaven effect mode.

FIG. 532(b) is an example of a display image when a variable display of normal symbols is performed and a telop effect is started by a lottery of normal symbols. In addition, in FIG. 532(b), although the first special symbol is also displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol may or may not be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 532(b), when the telop effect pattern (see FIG. 515) for executing the telop effect is determined and the telop effect is started, the second starting port 11140 is opened long at the top of the display area. The words ``Emergency alert: Opportunity is about to open...'' are displayed, indicating that this is the case.

FIG. 531(c) is an example of a display image of the telop effect when the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends and the second starting port 11140 is opened long.

As shown in FIG. 531(c), when the second starting port 11140 opens long, the game ball is instructed to hit to the right so that it enters the second starting port 11140, and a "chance port" is displayed at the top of the display area. The message "Aim for" will be displayed. In addition, in the telop effect, when the second starting port 11140 does not open long, the words "Chance port did not open..." are displayed at the top of the display area.

In this way, the telop effect suggests that the second starting port 11140 will be opened long, and the game ball can be caused to enter the second starting port 11140.

In addition, the above-mentioned telop effect will interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol, such as the lower left of the display area, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is desirable to display it in an area that is not used. Furthermore, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the telop production is performed so as not to interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. may also be displayed on the back (back layer, etc.).

(Pre-reading performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 533, a look-ahead effect performed in advance variation will be described. FIG. 533 is an example of a display image illustrating a look-ahead effect in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 533(a) is an example of a display image when the "expectation UP zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in the advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 533(a), when the "Expected UP Zone" is executed, bands with the characters "Expected UP Zone" attached are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area.

This "Expectation UP Zone" can suggest in advance that a predetermined performance will be performed and that the transition to a jackpot gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the anticipation of the transition to the state or the RUSH gaming state, and further improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 533(b) is an example of a display image when the "mode transition zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 533(b), when the "mode transition zone" is executed, a band with the characters "mode transition zone" attached is displayed at the top of the display area.

This "mode transition zone" suggests in advance that it is a time saving game and that the game state will be shifted from the normal gaming state to any of the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state, or the third time saving gaming state. This can increase the expectation of transition to the gaming state and further improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 533(c) is an example of a display image when the "RUSH expectation zone" of the look-ahead effect is being executed in advance variation of the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 533(c), when the "RUSH expectation zone" is executed, the background display mode of the chance production mode is switched to a special background display mode. Further, by switching to a special background display mode, the size of the main pattern also changes to a small value.

This "RUSH expectation zone" makes it possible to suggest in advance that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur, increasing expectations for the transition to the RUSH gaming state and further improving the interest in gaming. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined image is additionally displayed or the background display mode is changed as a look-ahead effect performed in the advance variation, but the display mode of the reserved image is changed in the advance variation. A look-ahead effect may be executed by doing so.

(Mode transition effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 534, a mode transition effect performed in the omen effect mode will be described. FIG. 534 is an example of a display image illustrating the general effect mode, the omen effect mode, and the mode transition effect in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 534(a) is an example of a display image when the general effect mode is started.

As shown in FIG. 534(a), in the general production mode, the "number of remaining games" that counts the variable display number N of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area. This "number of remaining games" is set to "50 times" when the general production mode is started, and is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol is variablely displayed.

FIG. 534(b) shows the display image when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the general production mode and the ``number of remaining games'' reaches ``10'' and the omen production mode is started. This is an example.

As shown in FIG. 534(b), in the precursor performance mode, the "number of remaining games" is displayed at the upper left of the display area, continuing from the general performance mode. Further, when the mode shifts from the general presentation mode to the precursor presentation mode, the display mode of the background changes. In this omen effect mode, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a loss, a "mode shift inciting effect" can also be executed (see FIG. 513(a)).

FIG. 534(c) shows the display image when the mode transition effect is started when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the portent effect mode and the “number of remaining games” becomes “0”. This is an example.

As shown in FIG. 534(c), in the mode transition performance, a predetermined character is displayed to notify that the mode will shift to one of the general performance mode, chance performance mode, and heaven performance mode.

FIG. 534(d-1) is an example of a display image when a transition to the chance presentation mode is notified in the mode transition presentation. When it is notified that the mode transition effect will shift to the chance effect mode, the display image will shift to the one shown in FIG. 530(a).

FIG. 534(d-2) is an example of a display image when a transition to the general performance mode is notified in the mode transition performance. When the transition to the general performance mode is notified by the mode transition performance, the "number of remaining games" is reset to "50", and the display image returns to the one shown in FIG. 534(a).

With this "mode transition performance", the first special symbol is displayed variably a predetermined number of times, thereby indicating the transition from the omen performance mode to the general performance mode, the chance performance mode, or the heaven performance mode. It is possible to notify the player of the shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation of the transition to a more advantageous gaming state, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "remaining number of games" which counts the number of variable display times N of the first special symbol is displayed in the general production mode and the omen production mode, but the "remaining number of games" is not displayed. It may be configured so that it is not displayed.

(Game suspension notice)
Next, with reference to FIG. 535, the notification contents of the game stop notice will be explained. FIG. 535 is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 535(a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 535(a), when the first game stop notice is executed, the words "Game is coming to a stop" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The text "The game is coming to a stop" continues to be displayed until the first game stop notice end condition is satisfied.

With this first game stop notice, it is possible to know in advance that the game is about to stop due to the increase in the number of game balls (MY).

FIG. 535(b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 535(b), when the second game stop notice is executed, the words "Approximately XX00 shots until the game stops" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The text "Approximately XX00 shots until the game stops" is displayed continuously until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000), and "Approximately XX00 shots" is the sub-difference of the work RAM 303. Based on the value stored in the ball number counter, the display is updated in the following order: approximately 5,000 shots → approximately 4,000 shots → approximately 3,000 shots → approximately 2,000 shots → approximately 1,000 shots.

With this second game stop notice, it is possible to concretely grasp the increase in the number of game balls until the game is stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the increase in the number of game balls until the game stops is notified by the characters "approximately XX00 shots", but it is not necessary to notify the increase in the number of game balls until the game stops. Good too.

FIG. 535(c) is an example of a display image when the third game stop notice is being executed.

As mentioned above, the third game stop notice is executed when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95000) during the jackpot gaming state, and the game stops after the jackpot gaming state ends. be done.

As shown in FIG. 535(c), when the third game stop notice is executed, the words "The game will stop after this jackpot game ends" are displayed in the center of the display area.

The text "The game will stop after this jackpot game ends" continues to be displayed until after the jackpot game state ends.

This third game stop notice allows the player to know that the game will stop after the jackpot game state ends.

(Stop notification)
Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the content of the game stop notification will be explained. FIG. 536 is an example of a display image of game stop notification in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 536(a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 536(a), when the first game stop notification is executed, only the words "Game has stopped. Today's game is over" are displayed in the display area, indicating that the game has stopped. . Further, when the first game stop notification is being executed, decorative patterns and other information are not displayed, and input of operation information for all performance buttons 54 is also disabled.

This first game stop notification allows the player to clearly understand that the game has been stopped.

FIG. 536(b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notification is started after the first game stop notification is executed and the forced notification time has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 536(b), when the second game stop notification is executed, the display image of the first game stop notification is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area. Then, on the back side of the reduced display image of the first game stop notification, a demo image corresponding to when the game is stopped is displayed.

In the demo image, a predetermined character is displayed, or a QR code is displayed by operating the production button 54 of the determination button. Note that the QR code may be configured to be automatically displayed without depending on the operation of the production button 54 of the determination button.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the demo image shown in FIG. 536(b) is a demo image dedicated to when the game is stopped, but it may also be used in common with the demo image when the game is in progress. .

After it is clearly understood that the game has been stopped by this second game stop notification (after the forced notification time has elapsed), even though the game continues to be notified that the game has been stopped, Demo images can be displayed decoratively until the store closes.

FIG. 536(c) is an example of a display image of the volume adjustment performed when the second operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the left and right buttons is input when the second game stop notification is executed. .

As shown in FIG. 536(c), when the volume is adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the demo image is switched to an adjustment image for volume adjustment. When the effect button 54 of the left button is operated, the volume is adjusted down by one level, and when the effect button 54 of the right button is operated, the volume is adjusted to be increased by one level.

In this way, since the volume can be adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the demo image when the game is stopped.

Although not shown, when the second game stop notification is executed and the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, the light amount adjustment is displayed in the same way as the volume adjustment. The image is displayed. Furthermore, since the light amount can be adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the light amount can be adjusted in accordance with the demo image when the game is stopped.

In this way, the eleventh pachinko game machine has a normal game state in which a time-saving prize can be won, and a plurality of time-saving game states (the first time-saving game state) based on the normal power operation pattern in which the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140 is determined. ~ 5th time-saving game state), further changes the game state, and performs production according to the new game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, when playing left-handed is the normal game mode, the normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state is controlled, and when playing right-handed is the normal gaming mode, the normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state is controlled. Since the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, or the fifth time-saving game state is controlled, it is possible to further change the game state in each game mode and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, the time saving winnings can be won only in the normal gaming state, and it is configured to be able to shift from the time saving winning to the second time saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the rate of transition to the jackpot gaming state via the RUSH gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Since the normal gaming state is also the initial gaming state after the RAM is cleared, in the state after the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started from the normal gaming state in which the time saving prize can be won, and the game It is possible to improve the operation of gaming machines after the store opens.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, even if the normal game state shifts to the disadvantageous first time-saving game state due to the winning of the time-saving winnings, when the variable display of the special symbol of the set number of time-savings is performed, the first It is possible to shift from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state due to the necessity of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed, rather than the transition due to the chance of a lottery, so it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine without reducing the interest in the game. can.

Then, when moving to the first time saving game state, any one time saving number is set from among the plurality of time saving times (first time saving number to third time saving number), so when will the first time saving game state change? It is possible to further improve the interest in the game by making it interesting to see whether the normal game state will be restored.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, the minimum number of time savings in the first time saving game state is set to 50 times, which is the first number of time savings, 100 times, which is the second number of time savings, and 150 times, which is the third number of time savings. This is possible, and the second number of time reductions and the third number of time reductions are set to an integral multiple of the first minimum number of time reductions. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state, one period is defined as the variable display number of the first special symbol being displayed 50 times, which is the minimum first time-saving number, and the return to the normal game state is periodically performed. It can make you look forward to it.

Furthermore, within one cycle (within 50 rotations) of the first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table, symbol production pattern table, and production mode are switched based on the variable display number N of the first special symbol. , a special performance that suggests that the time to transition to the normal gaming state is approaching (mode transition stimulation performance), and a dedicated performance that indicates whether or not to transition to the normal gaming state (mode transition performance), so that further gaming is possible. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

Furthermore, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, the game can be stopped when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a regulation value (for example, 95,000 pieces), so the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed. be able to.

Then, before the game is stopped, a game stop notice can be given according to the counting range of the increased number of game balls (MY), so it is possible to give an appropriate notice according to the counting range of the increased number of game balls (MY). It is possible to notify the contents. Furthermore, even after the game is stopped, it is possible to appropriately notify the game stop using the forced notification time.

<Modified example of the 11th pachinko game machine>
In the 11th pachinko gaming machine, the main control circuit 200 (main Although the CPU 201) is configured to perform this, it may also be configured to be performed by the payout/emission control circuit 400.

Note that the technology described in the eleventh embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various performances performed in the eleventh pachinko game machine may be replaced with performances by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming states (first time-saving gaming state to fifth time-saving gaming state) include replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying is improved, and assist time (in which the user is notified of predetermined small roles and operation contents of the stop button). It may be replaced with either the AT state) or the assisted replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, jackpots and small wins include winning a specific combination, stopping and displaying a specific combination of symbols (a specific combination of symbols winning a prize), winning a rush win in RT state, and winning in AT state. It is only necessary to replace it with either winning a rush win in the ART state or winning a rush win in the ART state.

(others)
In the above-described eleventh pachinko game machine, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the eleventh pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

Below, the configuration of the gaming machine described above and the effects produced by the configuration will be additionally described.

<Appendix H-1>

Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine has been known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally has a gaming area in which game balls fired onto the gaming board can roll, and a starting area provided in this gaming area. , a symbol display device, and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as the game ball passing through the starting area (the game ball enters the starting hole) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to display the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, special symbols to be described later) is displayed in a variable manner on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (so-called "jackpot"). ”).

Furthermore, conventionally, a pachinko game machine is known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to separate and use ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-53443).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a gaming area that contains programs and data related to processing related to gaming, and an area outside the area that contains data related to processing other than gaming, and the RAM The game area is divided into a gaming area that includes work areas related to gaming-related processing, and an extra-area area that includes working areas related to non-gaming processing, and a ROM gaming area and RAM gaming area. The area is assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, when executing a program in a pachinko game machine, it is possible to switch banks and use the gaming area and the area outside the area. Processing can be managed individually, and gaming-related processing and non-gaming processing can be separated so that the programs and data used will not be mixed up.

However, in the conventional configuration, when banks are switched when clearing a predetermined area or setting data, etc., the interrupt prohibition and interrupt enable settings may not be retained during that time. When banks are switched, interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings are managed by turning on and off predetermined flags, and the timing and processing order of turning on and off such predetermined flags is also controlled. It was necessary to do so with this in mind.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can call a predetermined process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

A further object of the present invention is to set interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission when a predetermined process such as clearing a predetermined area or storing data is called, without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. To provide a gaming machine that can maintain normal operation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs arithmetic processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to the gaming area) and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming (e.g., , processing related to areas outside the area) (e.g., main CPU 4201),
The arithmetic processing means is
It is characterized by saving an interrupt control state (for example, an interrupt enable register) indicating whether an interrupt is disabled or an interrupt enabled state when executing a predetermined process (for example, a data storage process or a predetermined area clearing process). (For example, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and each has a first value (for example, interrupt enable register 2 value), a second value (for example, the value of interrupt permission register 1),
The first value and the second value are set to the same value by the interrupt disable instruction and the interrupt enable instruction (for example, the interrupt disable instruction disables "0", and the interrupt enable instruction disables "1"). ) is preferable.

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction,
It is preferable that the interrupt disable instruction is executed after the interrupt control state is saved (for example, after the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is stored in the flag register).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the interrupt control state at the time of the called process while setting the called process to an interrupt disabled state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
It is preferable that the first value is saved after executing the interrupt disable instruction (for example, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 stored in the flag register is saved to a stack).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the interrupt control state at the time of the called process while setting the called process to an interrupt disabled state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction, and is set to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
It is desirable that the storage device be configured to perform data storage processing or clearing processing on the specified area after saving the first value.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. .

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
After saving the first value, performing data storage processing or clearing processing on the specified area,
It is preferable that the saved first value be restored after the data storage process or the clearing process is completed.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. In addition, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing and order of processing. In addition, the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings can be maintained normally without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
After saving the first value, performing data storage processing or clearing processing on the specified area,
After the data storage process or the clearing process is completed, restoring the saved first value;
If the restored first value is a value indicating an interrupt disabled state, it is desirable that the interrupt enable instruction is not executed.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. In addition, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing and order of processing. In addition, the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings can be maintained normally without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Furthermore, if interrupts are disabled at the time of the call, duplicate interrupt disable instructions are not executed to maintain the interrupt disabled state, making the program structure simpler and smaller. .

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction, and is set to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
After saving the first value, performing data storage processing or clearing processing on the specified area,
After the data storage processing or clearing processing is completed, restoring the saved first value;
When the restored first value is a value indicating an interrupt permission state, it is preferable that an interrupt permission instruction is executed.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. In addition, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing and order of processing. In addition, the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings can be maintained normally without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
Furthermore, it includes a storage means (for example, main RAM 4203) in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means includes an area for games (for example, a game area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for games (for example, an area outside the main RAM 4203),
When the predetermined process is called from a process related to the gaming area to a process related to the non-gaming area, the first value is not used and the second value is set to a predetermined value. It is desirable that the flag be set (for example, interrupt permission register 1 is set to "0").

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. In addition, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing and order of processing. In addition, the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings can be maintained normally without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction, and is set to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
Furthermore, it comprises a storage means in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area,
After the predetermined process is called from the process related to the gaming area as a process related to the non-gaming area, when returning to the process related to the gaming area, the first value is It is desirable that the second value be set (for example, the value of interrupt permission register 2 is set to interrupt permission register 1).

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process for storing data or clearing data in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. In addition, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing and order of processing. In addition, the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings can be maintained normally without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, when a predetermined process such as clearing a predetermined area or setting data is called, the interrupt control state at the time of the call is saved, and the interrupt control state is saved in the called process. When processing is performed in the disabled state and then returns to the caller, the interrupt control state can be returned to the saved state, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing, and when called It is possible to maintain the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings normally without being aware of the interrupt control state of the interrupt control state.

Furthermore, by writing the interrupt control state control, clearing a predetermined area, and storing data in the predetermined process all in one program, management and processing efficiency can be further improved. It will be done.

<Appendix H-2>
Conventionally, a game machine called a pachinko game machine is known, and this pachinko game machine generally has a game area in which game balls fired onto the game board can roll, and a starting area provided in this game area. , a symbol display device, and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as the game ball passing through the starting area (the game ball enters the starting hole) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to display the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, special symbols to be described later) is variably displayed on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (so-called "jackpot"). ”).

Furthermore, conventionally, a pachinko game machine is known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to separate and use ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-53443).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a gaming area that contains programs and data related to processing related to gaming, and an area outside the area that contains data related to processing other than gaming, and the RAM The game area is divided into a gaming area that includes work areas related to gaming-related processing, and an extra-area area that includes working areas related to non-gaming processing, and a ROM gaming area and RAM gaming area. The area is assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In addition, some of the registers used for data calculation and storage are provided for each bank, and a stack pointer that indicates the current operation position in the stack, which is a memory area for temporarily holding data, is also provided for each bank. set for each

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, and further setting registers and stacks separately, when executing a program in a pachinko machine, you can switch banks and change the playing area. The processing to be used and the processing to use the outside area can be managed separately, and processing related to games and processing other than gaming can be separated so that the programs and data to be used are not mixed up.

However, the setting of the stack pointer in the initialization process is performed for the gaming area of RAM by the process (program) related to bank 0, and for the area outside the RAM area, the stack pointer is set by switching from bank 0 to bank 1. Although it is necessary to perform a process (program) related to this, there has been no consideration given to an efficient and concise configuration of the process of setting the stack pointer and the timing and order of bank switching. Furthermore, when clearing the RAM in the initialization process, no consideration has been given to an efficient and simple configuration for the process of determining the range.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to efficiently and simply configure the initialization processing that sets the stack pointer provided for each bank and determines the clear range of RAM. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs arithmetic processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to the gaming area) and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming (e.g., , a processing unit (for example, main CPU 4201) that performs processing related to the area outside the area);
comprising a storage means (for example, main RAM 4203) in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored;
The storage means includes an area for games (for example, a game area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for games (for example, an area outside the main RAM 4203),
Further, the stack provided in the gaming area (e.g., stack area (gaming area)) is used for processing related to the gaming area, and the stack provided in the non-gaming area (e.g., The stack area (outside area) is used for processing related to areas other than the gaming area,
The feature is that when a process related to the non-game area is called for the first time, a stack pointer of a stack provided in the non-gaming area is set (for example, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment). machine).

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to set the stack pointer provided for each bank, and the initialization process related to setting the stack area can be executed with an efficient and simple configuration. can.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The process related to the non-gaming area is called from the process related to the gaming area,
The processing related to the non-gaming area is performed after setting the stack pointer of the stack provided in the non-gaming area, and then calculating the CRC of the specified area (for example, CRC calculation regarding the gaming area of the main RAM 4203 and the area outside the area). CRC calculation).

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to set the stack pointer provided for each bank, and the initialization process related to setting the stack area can be executed with an efficient and simple configuration. It is desirable to be able to do so.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed.
The device is configured to perform a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation when the power is turned on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the specified area at the time of power cut before the power is turned on. This is desirable.

According to the configuration of the present invention, an abnormality can be detected in the specified area of the main RAM before and after power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed.
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the specified area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
It is desirable that the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC calculation at the time of power-off are configured to be a common process.

According to the configuration of the present invention, an abnormality can be detected in the specified area of the main RAM before and after power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
When the power is turned on, a clearing range in the storage means (for example, a range for clearing data in the main RAM 4203) is set according to the startup state (for example, recovery from power failure, setting confirmation, clearing the main RAM 4203, and changing settings). ,
As a result of the comparison process, if the CRC values do not match, and if a setting change is instructed when the power is turned on, the start address of the clear range set in the event of an abnormality (for example, , the start address of the RAM clear range at the time of abnormality).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed.
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the specified area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
The clear range determination data that determines the clear range (for example, the lower 1 byte of the clear range start address related to the gaming area of the main RAM 4203) is set in the processing related to the gaming area,
It is preferable that the processing related to the non-gaming area is configured to determine a clear range for the non-gaming area based on the clear range determination data.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted according to the startup state when the power is turned on, and further, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted based on a part of the clear range determined for the gaming area. By determining the clearing range of the out-of-area area, processing can be made more efficient and the size of the program can be reduced.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
Furthermore, it includes a first input means (for example, a setting key insertion port 4174) and a second input means (for example, a RAM clear switch 4176) for instructing a setting change when the power is turned on;
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
As a result of the comparison process, if the CRC values match, and if the recovery is from a power failure during a setting change, the state information of the first input means and the second input means at the time of power-on this time includes: It is preferable to set the previous state information of the first input means and the second input means.

According to the configuration of the present invention, even if a power outage occurred during the previous setting change, the setting can be changed continuously when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
Furthermore, it includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
When the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and when the first input means and the second input means are off when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is recovery from power failure), It is desirable that the start address of the clear range set at the time of recovery from power failure be set as the start address of the clear range.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the specified area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
Furthermore, it includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
If the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and the first input means is on when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is setting confirmation or setting change), the clearing is performed. It is desirable that the start address of the range is not set to the start address of the clear range that is set at the time of recovery from a power failure.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed.
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
Furthermore, it includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
If the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and the first input means and the second input means are on when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is a setting change), the Set the start address of the clear range that is set when changing the settings to the start address of the clear range,
As a result of the comparison process, the CRC values match, and when the first input means is off and the second input means is on when the power is turned on (for example, if the startup state is when the main RAM 4203 is cleared) (if any), set the start address of the clear range that is set when changing the settings to the start address of the clear range,
When the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and when the first input means and the second input means are off when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is recovery from power failure), Set the start address of the clear range to be set at the time of recovery from power outage to the start address of the clear range,
The storage area for storing the start address of the clear range set at the time of the setting change and the storage area (for example, a register) for storing the start address of the clear range set at the time of recovery from the power outage are configured to be the same. It is desirable that

According to the configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted according to the startup state when the power is turned on, and by storing the clear range in the same storage area, the area of the main RAM 4203 can be adjusted. When determining the clearing range of the outer area, it is only necessary to refer to one storage area, which simplifies and improves the efficiency of processing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, initialization processing such as setting of the stack pointer provided for each bank and bank switching for that purpose can be executed with an efficient and simple configuration.

<Appendix H-3>
Conventionally, a game machine called a pachinko game machine is known, and this pachinko game machine generally has a game area in which game balls fired onto the game board can roll, and a starting area provided in this game area. , a symbol display device, and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as the game ball passing through the starting area (the game ball enters the starting hole) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to display the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, special symbols to be described later) is displayed in a variable manner on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (so-called "jackpot"). ”).

Furthermore, conventionally, a pachinko game machine is known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to separate and use ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-53443).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a gaming area that contains programs and data related to processing related to gaming, and an area outside the area that contains data related to processing other than gaming, and the RAM The game area is divided into a gaming area that includes work areas related to gaming-related processing, and an extra-area area that includes working areas related to non-gaming processing, and a ROM gaming area and RAM gaming area. The area is assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In addition, some of the registers used for data calculation and storage are provided for each bank, and a stack pointer that indicates the current operation position in the stack, which is a memory area for temporarily holding data, is also provided for each bank. set for each

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, and further setting registers and stacks separately, when executing a program in a pachinko machine, you can switch banks and change the playing area. The processing to be used and the processing to use the outside area can be managed separately, and processing related to games and processing other than gaming can be separated so that the programs and data to be used are not mixed up.

In such a gaming machine in which a gaming area and an outside area are set, clearing processing for the gaming area and clearing processing for the outside area must be performed separately during the initialization process. It is necessary to adjust the RAM clear range depending on the startup situation.

In addition, in conventional configurations, when banks are switched when performing predetermined processing, interrupt prohibition and interrupt enable settings may not be retained during that time. , it is necessary to manage interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings by turning on and off predetermined flags, and also to turn on and off such predetermined flags with consideration to timing and processing order. Ta.

However, with regard to such RAM clearing processing, there is no consideration given to effectively setting information about the clearing range of the gaming area and the area outside the area, and there is no consideration given to the interrupt control state at the time of being called. There is no configuration that allows a predetermined process to be called without having to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and relates to RAM clearing processing, effectively setting information about the clearing range of the gaming area and the area outside the area, and also making it possible to call a predetermined processing. To provide a game machine that can normally maintain settings for interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission without being aware of the interrupt control state when called.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs arithmetic processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to the gaming area) and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming (e.g., , a processing unit (for example, main CPU 4201) that performs processing related to the area outside the area,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 4203) in which information necessary for execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means includes an area for games (for example, a game area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for games (for example, an area outside the main RAM 4203),
When the power is turned on, clearing control is executed to clear at least part of the gaming area and the non-gaming area,
The clear control is
When clearing an area other than the gaming area, the clearing range is defined as the clearing range of the gaming area (information that specifies the clearing range of the gaming area, for example, the clearing range of the gaming area. (for example, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, information regarding the clearing range of the gaming area and the area outside the area can be effectively set regarding the RAM clearing process, thereby increasing the efficiency of the clearing process. Furthermore, the structure of the program can be simplified and the size of the program can be reduced.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The clear control is
In order to protect the return address stored in the gaming area when the startup state when the power is turned on is not recovery from a power failure, the clearing range is adjusted (for example, the stack pointer SP of the stack area (gaming area) It is desirable that the configuration be such that several bytes from the initial setting address are excluded from the clearing range).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the called program can normally return to the return address, and normal clear processing is ensured.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The clear control is performed when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage means,
Clear the corresponding clear range of the non-gaming area,
Once again, the setting values for controlling the performance display monitor are stored in an area other than the gaming area (for example, the performance monitor control initial table is stored in the work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203). It is desirable that

According to the configuration of the present invention, even if all areas other than those for gaming have been cleared, the initial values for controlling the performance display monitor (for example, initial values for LED settings, etc.) remain unchanged. Since the value is set, after the power is turned on, control of the performance display monitor can be started based on the initial value.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The clear control is performed when it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in the storage means,
Setting values for controlling the performance display monitor are not stored in the storage means,
It is configured to store initialization setting values at power-on in an area other than the gaming area (for example, store initialization data at power-on in a work area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203). This is desirable.

According to the configuration of the present invention, even if a part of the area other than the gaming area is cleared, the initialization setting values (for example, setting values related to LED settings, etc.) at power-on are maintained. Since the settings are stored, control can be started based on the set values after the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The clear control is
Adjusting the clear range in order to protect the return address stored in the gaming area when the startup state when the power is turned on is not recovery from power failure,
Thereafter, the game area is configured to be cleared based on the adjusted clear range.

According to the configuration of the present invention, regarding the RAM clearing process, it is desirable that the RAM clearing range can be effectively divided according to the startup state at the time of power-on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The clear control is
The clear range of the non-game area can be set according to determination data (for example, RAM clear range determination data) associated with the clear range of the game area,
It is preferable that the clearing range of the non-gaming area is cleared after the determination data is saved in an area (for example, a predetermined register) different from the non-gaming area.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the determination data that can identify the cleared range of the gaming area and the cleared range of the non-gaming area can be used even after the clearing range of the non-gaming area is cleared. This eliminates the need to be aware of the timing when judgment data is available.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When executing a predetermined process (for example, data storage processing or clearing of a predetermined area), it is configured to save an interrupt control state (for example, an interrupt enable register) indicating whether an interrupt is disabled or an interrupt enabled state. This is desirable.

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When executing a predetermined process, the interrupt control state indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved,
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and each has a first value (for example, interrupt enable register 2 value), a second value (for example, the value of interrupt permission register 1),
The first value and the second value are set to the same value by the interrupt disable instruction and the interrupt enable instruction (for example, the interrupt disable instruction disables "0", and the interrupt enable instruction disables "1"). ) is preferable.

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When executing a predetermined process, the interrupt control state indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved,
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction,
It is preferable that the interrupt disable instruction is executed after the interrupt control state is saved (for example, after the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is stored in the flag register).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the interrupt control state at the time of the called process while setting the called process to an interrupt disabled state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When executing a predetermined process, the interrupt control state indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved,
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction, and is set to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can respectively identify whether the interrupt is disabled or the interrupt enabled state. is,
It is preferable that the first value be saved (for example, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 stored in the flag register is saved to a stack) after executing the interrupt disable instruction.

According to the configuration of the present invention, a predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the interrupt control state at the time of the called process while setting the called process to an interrupt disabled state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, information regarding the clearing range of the gaming area and the area outside the area can be effectively set regarding the RAM clearing process, thereby improving the efficiency of the clearing process. Furthermore, the program structure can be simplified and the program size can be reduced. Further, when a predetermined process is called, the interrupt control state at the time of being called is saved, so the predetermined process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of being called.

<Appendix H-4>
Conventionally, a game machine called a pachinko game machine is known, and this pachinko game machine generally has a game area in which game balls fired onto the game board can roll, and a starting area provided in this game area. , a symbol display device, and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as the game ball passing through the starting area (the game ball enters the starting hole) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to display the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, special symbols to be described later) is variably displayed on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (so-called "jackpot"). ”).

Furthermore, there is conventionally known a pachinko game machine in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to execute interrupt processing in response to an external interrupt request that occurs when the pachinko game machine loses power. For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-53443).

In the interrupt processing of such a pachinko game machine, the state of the input port is read and if it is determined that a power outage signal is being detected, a predetermined flag is set to on, and other processing is performed by setting the predetermined flag to on. The device is configured to perform a predetermined power-off process when the device is in the state of .

However, in the configuration of such a pachinko machine, if another interrupt factor occurs after interrupt processing has started, the program must be created assuming such a situation, which makes the program complicated and , there is a problem that its size becomes large. Furthermore, the problems of programs becoming more complex and larger are not limited to those related to interrupts as described above.

In addition, since it is assumed that another interrupt factor occurs after interrupt processing has started, a problem arises in that it is not possible to immediately execute interrupt processing related to a power outage, and each interrupt factor Regarding interrupt processing corresponding to , it is necessary to consider the execution timing and processing order.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs. Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve the problem of programs becoming more complex and larger due to interrupt processing and other factors.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs arithmetic processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to the gaming area) and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming (e.g., , processing related to an area outside the area) (e.g., main CPU 4201),
The arithmetic processing means is
When an interrupt whose interrupt factor is a power outage is detected, executes interrupt processing related to the power outage (for example, external maskable interrupt processing shown in FIG. 131);
In the interrupt processing related to the power outage, the interrupt processing in which the interrupt factor is a timer counter (for example, timer counter PTC2) (for example, the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 132) is set not to be executed. For example, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the generation of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by the configuration using an interrupt factor mask, so that processing that assumes the other interrupts can be performed. There is no need to write branch instructions in the program, and as a result, the program structure can be simplified and the size can be reduced. In addition, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the configuration using an interrupt factor mask makes it possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so that the power can be immediately interrupted after a power outage is detected. It is possible to execute the process related to the interrupt, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or process order with respect to the process due to the other interrupt.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Furthermore, it includes a storage means (for example, main RAM 4203) in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means stores a setting area having an entry address corresponding to the interrupt factor (for example, a start address of a corresponding interrupt process),
It is preferable that the arithmetic processing means is configured to, when an interrupt is detected, execute an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause of the interrupt.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the corresponding interrupt processing is executed depending on the interrupt factor, and individual processing for each interrupt factor can be executed by simply writing the interrupt processing in the corresponding entry address. can be set.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Furthermore, it comprises a storage means in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means stores a setting area having an entry address corresponding to the interrupt factor,
When the arithmetic processing means detects an interrupt, the arithmetic processing means executes an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause of the interrupt,
The setting area includes the entry address and the priority of the corresponding interrupt processing for each interrupt cause,
It is preferable that the entry address and the priority are separated by predetermined data (for example, bit "0").

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to perform a corresponding interrupt process in accordance with an interrupt factor, and to set the priority order of the interrupt factors.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
further comprising a storage means for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means;
The storage means stores a setting area having an entry address corresponding to the interrupt factor,
When the arithmetic processing means detects an interrupt, the arithmetic processing means executes an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause of the interrupt,
The setting area includes, as the interrupt factors, multiple timer counter interrupts (for example, timer counters PTC0 to PTC2), multiple asynchronous serial transmission/reception reception interrupts (for example, asynchronous serial transmission/reception RX0, RX1), and at least external terminals. It is desirable to be configured to be able to include entry addresses and priorities related to external interrupts input from (XINT).

According to the configuration of the present invention, corresponding interrupt processing can be set for a plurality of different interrupt factors.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
In the interrupt processing related to the power outage, mask data is stored in a dedicated register (e.g., interrupt factor mask register) in order to set the interrupt processing in which the interrupt factor is a timer counter not to be executed. update the interrupt mask register with ),
It is preferable that each bit of the mask data is configured to be used to determine whether or not to execute a corresponding interrupt process when an interrupt factor corresponding to the bit occurs.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, by adjusting the contents of the mask data, it is possible to control whether or not to execute an interrupt process corresponding to a specific interrupt factor.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Furthermore, it comprises a storage means in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area,
The arithmetic processing means is
When an interrupt whose interrupt source is a timer counter (for example, timer counter PTC2) is detected, executes interrupt processing related to the timer counter,
It is preferable that the interrupt processing related to the timer counter is configured to execute an abnormal state monitoring process (for example, the abnormal state monitoring process (outside area) shown in FIG. 135) regarding the area other than the gaming area.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the generation of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by the configuration using the interrupt factor mask, so that even when processing interrupts related to the timer counter, There is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, increasing the degree of freedom in design, and allowing various processing such as monitoring abnormal conditions to be written in simple programs. be able to.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When an interrupt whose interrupt factor is a timer counter is detected, executes interrupt processing related to the timer counter,
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process (for example, the game LED lighting data output process in FIG. 136) that outputs LED lighting data,
The lighting data output process performs an update process related to LED common data related to gaming LEDs for displaying symbols in one command,
In the update process, when 1 is added to the LED common data,
If the result of the addition is greater than or equal to the specified maximum value, set 0 in the first calculation result area and also set 0 in the second calculation result area,
If the result of the addition is less than the specified maximum value, the result of the addition is set in the first calculation result area, and the result of the addition is also set in the second calculation result area (for example, in FIG. The process shown in step S4482) is desirably configured as follows.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the generation of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by the configuration using the interrupt factor mask, so that even when processing interrupts related to the timer counter, There is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, increasing the degree of freedom in design, and allowing various processing such as monitoring abnormal conditions to be written in simple programs. be able to. In addition, the process of updating LED common data related to game LEDs for displaying symbols, and setting a value in the second calculation result area according to conditions, can be performed with one command, and the program The description can be concise.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When an interrupt whose interrupt factor is a timer counter is detected, executes interrupt processing related to the timer counter,
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process that outputs LED lighting data,
The lighting data output process performs an update process related to LED common data related to gaming LEDs for displaying symbols in one command,
In the update process, when 1 is added to the LED common data,
If the result of the addition is greater than or equal to the specified maximum value, set 0 in the first calculation result area and also set 0 in the second calculation result area,
If the result of the addition is less than a specified maximum value, the result of the addition is set in a first calculation result area, and the result of the addition is also set in a second calculation result area,
Divide the value set in the second calculation result area by the number of areas for storing LED data of the game LED, set the quotient in the second calculation result area, and set the remainder in the third calculation result area. It is desirable that the configuration is such that (for example, the process shown in step S4483 in FIG. 136).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the generation of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by the configuration using the interrupt factor mask, so that even when processing interrupts related to the timer counter, There is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, increasing the degree of freedom in design, and allowing various processing such as monitoring abnormal conditions to be written in simple programs. be able to. In addition, the process of updating LED common data related to game LEDs for displaying symbols, and setting a value in the second calculation result area according to conditions, can be performed with one command, and the program The description can be concise.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
When an interrupt whose interrupt factor is a timer counter is detected, executes interrupt processing related to the timer counter,
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process that outputs LED lighting data,
It is preferable that the lighting data output process is configured to use a constant (for example, a bit string "10000000") as an initial value of common data for dynamically lighting the LED.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the generation of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by the configuration using the interrupt factor mask, so that even when processing interrupts related to the timer counter, There is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, increasing the degree of freedom in design, and allowing various processing such as monitoring abnormal conditions to be written in simple programs. be able to.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The arithmetic processing means is
Execute a gaming state information update process (for example, the gaming state information update process shown in FIG. 137) to update information related to the gaming state,
The game status information update process includes:
A command generation process for generating a 2-byte command based on 1-byte data stored in a specified area (for example, a 2-byte register) is executed in one instruction (for example, the process shown in step S4513 in FIG. 137),
The command generation process distributes the 1-byte data at specified bit positions, sets 0 to the upper bit of each to create 1-byte data, and combines these 1-bytes to generate a 2-byte data command. It is preferable that it be configured.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the process of generating a 2-byte command based on 1-byte data stored in a 2-byte register can be performed with one instruction, thereby simplifying the program description. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, the configuration using the interrupt factor mask makes it possible to restrict the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so branching is performed for processing assuming the other interrupts. There is no need to write instructions, and as a result, the program structure can be simplified and its size can be reduced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the configuration using an interrupt factor mask makes it possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so that the power can be immediately interrupted after a power outage is detected. It is possible to execute the process related to the interrupt, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or process order with respect to the process due to the other interrupt.

Furthermore, in processing other interrupts, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

Furthermore, it is possible to solve not only problems related to interrupt factors, but also problems such as the complexity and size of the program.
<Additional note: Fourth pachinko machine>
Conventionally, special symbols are displayed variably on a symbol display device when a game ball enters the starting hole, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode ( A so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) or a movable member of a variable winning device (big winning hole) is changed from a state where it is difficult for game balls to win a prize to a state where it is easy to win a prize based on the ball entering the game machine into the starting hole. , a gaming machine is known in which the jackpot game state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area provided in the variable winning device (so-called two-type gaming machine). ).

In addition to the above-mentioned big prize opening and start opening, the gaming area is provided with a passage gate that operates a normal symbol, and when a game ball passes through the passage gate, a lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed. If you win this normal symbol lottery, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting port opens.
In order to increase the interest of the game, most of the gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is easy to release per unit time, and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is difficult to release per unit time. and a gaming state (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-273866).

However, regarding the operation of the movable member provided at a specific starting port, whether the game ball passes through the passing gate when in the time-saving gaming state or the gaming ball passes through the passing gate when in the non-time-saving gaming state. The players were only interested in passing the game, and further improvements were needed to make the game more interesting.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming panels 3100, 4100) in which a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, and a starting area ( For example, a starting area detection means (for example, a first starting opening switch 3121) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 3120), and a passing area (first passing gate 3126A) provided in the gaming area. a passage area detection means (for example, a first passage gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of a game ball; and a variable start device that is provided in the game area and can change between an open state where it is easy to accept game balls and a closed state where it is difficult to accept them. Opening/closing determination of whether or not to change the start variable prize winning device from a closed state to an open state on the condition that a winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 3146) and a game ball are detected by the passage area detection means. A normal game determining means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs the above, and a control that causes the normal symbol display device to start variable display of the normal symbols, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, causes the normal symbol display device to stop displaying the normal symbols. a normal symbol display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that performs normal symbol display; When a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display control means, opening/closing control is performed to change the start variable prize winning device between the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determining means. By establishing a special condition triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting opening/closing control means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the starting area detection means (for example, the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed), A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that shifts to a predetermined gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and controls the shifted gaming state,
The normal game determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means, and the opening mode determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means. The opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable start winning device detection means (for example, a second start opening switch 3141) that detects entry of a game ball into the variable start winning device, and a start area detection means. When the first transition condition (for example, when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established in response to the detection of a game ball, control of a special game advantageous to the player is performed. The second transition condition (for example, when a game ball enters the V attacker 3152 a second special game control means (for example, main CPU 201) that controls the special game when the following is established:
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set more easily than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game determination for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player on the condition that a game ball is detected by the starting area detection means. means (for example, the main CPU 201), and a special symbol display control that causes the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, controls the special symbol display device to stop displaying the special symbol. means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means determines that the special game is not controlled by the special game determination means, and when the special symbol display control means stops displaying a specific special symbol (for example, C time-saving symbol, etc.). , it is desirable to be able to control the specific gaming state by transitioning to a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state consisting of the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the regular symbol, and the second variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the regular symbol. At least a plurality of variable time tables (for example, the special symbols shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 The fluctuation time table is changed according to the fluctuation time table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) that stores the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern table of Variable time table determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines one variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables stored in the storage means, and special symbol variable time determining means that determines the variable display time of the special symbol. (for example, main CPU 201);
It is preferable that the special symbol fluctuation time determining means is capable of determining the variable display time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation time table determined by the fluctuation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special symbol determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the determination result by the special game determining means. , comprising:
The special symbol determining means selects a first special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) when it is determined by the special game determining means to control a first special game that can provide a first profit. ), and when it is determined that a second special game that can give a second profit with a lower profit rate than the first profit is to be controlled, a second special special symbol (e.g. , the symbol of "accessory opening per" corresponding to the small winning symbol switching information), and the variable time table determining means causes the special symbol display control means to stop displaying the second special special symbol. Then, when determining the variable display time of the special symbols from the next time onward, a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means (for example, the normal game state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)) are used. It is possible to determine a special fluctuation time table from among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3). This is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game number counting means (for example, main CPU 201) that counts the number of times the special game is controlled under specific conditions (A time-saving game state). ,
The game state control means is capable of shifting to a normal game state which is disadvantageous for the player when the special game number counting means counts a specific number of times (for example, a limiter number of times), and the variable time table determining means is configured to , when a specific number of games is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (for example, special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 shown in FIG. 116) that has a high execution rate.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means changes the specific gaming state ( For example, the time-saving gaming state is made up of the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, mainly the C-time-saving gaming state), and after the first ending condition is satisfied (for example, one special symbol When the control of the specific gaming state is finished and the first special special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the specific gaming state (variable display of , A time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, mainly A-time-saving gaming state), and after the second ending condition is satisfied (for example, 100 special symbols (variable display), the control of the specific gaming state is terminated, and the first termination condition and the second termination condition are preferably different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the game machine according to the present invention, the game board is provided in the game area so that the starting area is in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the passing area, and is close to the passing area. It is desirable that the game ball that has passed through the passage area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note: Fifth pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (so-called two-type gaming machine). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the jackpot, and A prize ball corresponding to the entered game ball is paid out, and the player can win the game ball.

In addition to the above-mentioned big prize opening and start opening, the gaming area is provided with a passage opening that activates a normal symbol, and when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed. If you win this normal symbol lottery, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting port opens. In order to increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members operate in a time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is easy to open per unit time, and in a non-time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is difficult to release per unit time. In the time-saving game state, the chances of drawing special symbols are increased (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-273866).

However, even with a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving gaming state as in Patent Document 1, if the opportunity for players to acquire game balls is limited to special symbol drawings, the gameplay becomes monotonous. Therefore, further improvements were needed to increase the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (e.g., gaming panel 5100) in which a gaming area in which game balls flow down, and a normal area (eg, , a first passage opening 5126A, a second passage opening 5126B) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the gaming area (for example, a first passage opening switch 5127A, a second passage opening switch 5127B); a first variable prize winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 5146) that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy to accept game balls and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept; A second variable winning device (for example, a special electric accessory 5133) that can change to an unacceptable closed state, and the first variable winning device is opened on the condition that a game ball is detected by the normal area detection means. A normal opening/closing determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to change the state to the open/close state, and a first variable winning device detection means (for example, the start-up mouth switch 5141), a special benefit (for example, a small win) that causes the second variable winning device to be opened on the condition that a game ball is detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and the second Whether to grant any one of multiple types of benefits, including a state benefit that allows control of a predetermined gaming state (for example, time saving win) without making the variable winning device open. A profit granting determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines a normal gaming state in which the first variable winning device is unlikely to be in the open state, or a specific gaming state in which the first variable winning device is likely to be in the open state (for example, A game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that performs control to execute a time-saving game state),
The benefit grant determination means is easier to determine to grant either the special benefit or the state benefit than to determine not to grant either the special benefit or the state benefit, and the gaming state control The means is characterized in that when it is determined by the benefit award determining means that the state benefit is to be awarded, the specific gaming state can be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit granting determination means performs a first special game (for example, A second special game (for example, a jackpot game state) in which the second variable winning device is changed between an open state and a closed state by a second opening mode that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first opening mode (for example, a small jackpot game state). It is determined whether or not to grant any of the profits from among multiple types of profits including the winning game state) and the state profit, and the second special game is selected from the second special game rather than the first special game. It is desirable that it is easy to judge by adding .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the profit award determining means makes a predetermined number of determinations (for example, one time saving number) in the specific gaming state, the normal game is changed from the specific gaming state. If the state is executable and the profit grant determining means determines that the state profit is to be given before the predetermined number of determinations are made, the specific gaming state is executed until the predetermined number of determinations are made again. It is desirable that it be practicable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state A that can be executed after the profit award determining means determines to award the special profit). ), and a second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the state benefit is determined to be provided by the profit award determining means, and the first specific gaming state is This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, the number of time savings is greater) than the second specific gaming state, and the gaming state control means, when executing the first specific gaming state, When it is determined that the state benefit is to be given, it is desirable that the first specific gaming state can be executed continuously without executing the second specific gaming state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes presentation means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) for performing a predetermined presentation,
The performance means is capable of performing a common special performance (for example, a bonus time basic performance or a bonus time specialized performance) that can be executed across a plurality of special benefits when the special benefit is granted. When it is determined by the benefit provision determination means that the state benefit is to be provided, it is possible to perform a continuation special performance (for example, a rewind performance) that suggests that the special performance will be continued for a further extension. This is desirable.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note: 6th pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (so-called two-type gaming machine). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the jackpot, and It is configured such that a prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the results of the special symbol lottery, in order to improve the interest of the game, after performing the first reach effect (long reach, SP reach), the second reach effect (SPSP reach) is performed. ) is known (see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-236850).

However, it has been desired to further improve the interest of the game by increasing the relevance of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, etc., and further improving the effects such as the reach effect.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can display a variable identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Effect execution means (for example, a sub for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the effect accessory group 58, and the effect button device 6310) that performs a predetermined effect when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed control circuit 300, sub CPU 301),
The performance execution means executes a second performance (for example, when a first performance execution condition (for example, acquisition of a path to the final battle icon) is established by performing a first performance (for example, cherry blossom accumulation notice)). The road to the ultimate battle) can be performed, and by performing a third performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) that is different from the first performance, the second performance execution condition (for example, 5 character icons) can be executed. display) is established, a fourth production (for example, the road to the decisive battle) can be performed, and the second production and the fourth production are the same specific production (for example, 10 characters). It is characterized by being able to perform a performance that aims to collect icons.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means may execute, as the first performance, a staged performance in which the performance progresses in stages (for example, a cherry blossom accumulation notice) and predetermined development information (for example, 1st development display effect that can display character icons (for example, displaying a text image indicating the number of character icons such as "One person gathering", etc., and icon display images lighting up in the Western Army icon display area, etc.) It is desirable that it be possible to do this with a display effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means temporarily stops displaying the identification symbol that is being variably displayed as the third performance, and displays the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped. A second development in which it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance multiple times in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner again, and it is possible to display predetermined development information (for example, a character icon) each time the pseudo-continuous performance is performed. It is desirable to be able to perform a display effect (for example, a effect in which one or more character icons are displayed in a stopped state, or an icon display image is displayed in a lit state on a Western army icon display section, etc.).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a first performance operation section 6311 and a second performance operation section 6312 included in the performance button device 6310) through which the player can perform operations regarding the performance. and,
The performance execution means is configured to perform an operation performance that causes the player to operate the performance operation section a predetermined number of times as the specific performance (for example, a one-time operation performance on the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle). ), and it is desirable that the number of operations of the operation performance in the second performance is greater than the number of operations of the operation performance in the fourth performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means satisfies a third performance execution condition (for example, less than 10 character icons) by performing the second performance or the fourth performance. If established, a fifth effect (for example, confrontation reach) can be executed, and as the specific effect, a development progress effect (for example, It is possible to carry out a performance in which the aim is to collect 10 character icons), and as the fifth performance, a development performance related to the development information progressed and displayed in the development progress performance (for example, support It is desirable that it be possible to perform (direction using icons).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a starting information acquisition means (e.g., main CPU 201) that acquires starting information when the predetermined starting condition is met, and a starting information acquisition means based on the starting information acquired by the starting information obtaining means. a first special game determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines whether to control a first special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; A second special game determining means (for example, a second special game determining means) that determines whether to control a second special game (for example, a small winning game) that has a lower profit than the first special game based on the starting information that has been obtained. , main CPU 201), the first special game is controlled on the condition that the first special game determining means determines that the first special game is to be controlled, and the second special game determining means controls the first special game. special game control means (for example, main CPU 201) that controls the second special game on the condition that it is determined that the second special game is to be controlled; the first special game determination means; and the second special game. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied in a state where the determining means cannot make a determination, a reservation storage means (for example, a special Before the main RAM 203) having a symbol start storage area and the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination, the A predetermined means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining whether to control the first special game or the second special game; A preliminary performance execution means (for example, controls the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310) that can perform a preliminary performance (for example, lotus flower preview) over the performance period a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301),
The preliminary performance execution means is capable of continuously performing the preliminary performance even if the second special game is controlled by the special game control means during the predetermined performance period. It is desirable that

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a starting information acquisition means (e.g., main CPU 201) that acquires starting information when a first starting condition or a second starting condition is satisfied; A special game determining means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player based on the starting information provided, and the special game determining means cannot make a determination. When the first starting condition is satisfied in the state, first holding storage means (for example, first special symbol starting memory) capable of storing starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means up to a first holding number. If the second starting condition is satisfied in a state where the special game determining means cannot make a determination, the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means A second reservation storage means (for example, a main RAM 203 having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2)) capable of storing up to a second reservation number, and the special game determination means make a determination. advance determination means capable of determining whether or not to control the special game based on starting information stored in the first suspension storage means or the second suspension storage means before the special game is played; (for example, the main CPU 201), and a preliminary effect execution means (for example, the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the production accessories group 58, and the production button device 6310, and a sub-CPU 301),
The preliminary performance execution means is configured to execute a pre-production performance based on the start information stored in the first hold storage means when a predetermined number of hold start information (for example, 2 pieces) is stored in the second hold storage means. It is desirable that it be possible to perform a pre-hold performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a first performance operation section 6311 and a second performance operation section 6312 included in the performance button device 6310) through which the player can perform operations regarding the performance. and an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the production operation part (for example, the first to third operation part detection switches included in the production button device 6310), and a function that determines whether the operation detected by the operation detection means is valid or invalid. further comprising an operation determining means (for example, sub CPU 301) for determining whether there is a
The operation determining means is configured to disable the operation on the performance operation unit during a start preparation period set at the opening time of the reception time when there is a reception time during which multiple operations on the performance operation unit can be accepted. The end preparation period set at the end of the reception time is determined to be invalid, and the operation valid period is set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period. determines that the operation on the production operation section is valid, but it is possible to set an operation invalid period from when the operation detected during the operation valid period is determined to be valid until the next operation is determined to be valid. Preferably, the operation invalidation period is set to a different period depending on an effect based on an operation determined to be valid during the operation validity period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations on a performance and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes, and the performance operation section Operation display performance execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, performance accessory group 58, and performance button A sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301) that control the device 6310,
It is desirable that the operation display performance execution means performs the operation display performance according to a change in the operation mode of the performance operation section to be operated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations on a performance and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes, and When a predetermined condition including that a predetermined period of time has passed since the game was played, an operation mode restoration means (for example, button control circuit 310, sub control It is desirable to include a circuit 300 and a sub CPU 301).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the first notification symbol (for example, the first special symbol) starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the first A first notification pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that stops and displays the notification pattern in a predetermined stop mode, and when a second starting condition is satisfied, a variable display of the second notification pattern (for example, the second special pattern). is started, and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, a second notification pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) stops and displays the second notification pattern in a predetermined stop mode, and the first notification pattern display control means specifies the When the first notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop mode, or when the second notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification symbol display control means, a specific game state is controlled from a normal game state. Comprising a game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) and an external information output means (for example, external terminal board 184) for outputting external information regarding the game to a predetermined external device,
The variable display of the first notification pattern by the first notification pattern display control means and the variable display of the second notification pattern by the second notification pattern display control device can be executed in parallel, and the gaming state control device In the specific gaming state, when the first notification symbol and the second notification symbol are stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times, the external information output means controls the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state, and the external information output means controls the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state. In addition to continuously outputting specific external information (for example, external information 3) during the output period from when the specific gaming state is controlled by the state control means until the normal gaming state is controlled, When the state is controlled and the first notification pattern display control means starts variable display of the first notification pattern, a first additional period until the stop display of the first notification pattern is performed; If the second notification symbol display control means starts variable display of the second notification symbol when the specific gaming state is controlled, a second addition is performed until the second notification symbol is stopped and displayed. It is desirable to continuously output the specific external information even during the period.

In addition, "development information" is information that is displayed as the game or performance progresses, including textual information that indicates the content of the performance that will proceed from now on, character icon information that displays a predetermined character, Information such as number information that displays the number of character icons, number information that displays the number of pseudo-sequences that have already been performed, and time information until the next production progresses. It means something.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 1)>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals, etc. and operating the start lever, multiple reels are rotated, and based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed, a specific number of medals, bonus games, etc. A gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine called a so-called slot machine) that provides benefits is also known.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines have different gaming states (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of game states are provided, such as a game state (a time-saving game state, a non-time-saving game state), etc. (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-59682).

Furthermore, it has been desired to provide an appropriate performance according to the gaming state of the gaming machine, the gaming situation, etc., and to further improve the interest of the gaming.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the seventh pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification symbols.
A production execution means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) that executes a predetermined production, shifts the gaming state, and controls the shifted gaming state. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means is configured to set a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state or a small win game state) in which an advantageous benefit can be given to the player when the execution result of the variable display of the identification symbol satisfies a special condition. A normal gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state It is possible to control at least the gaming states (for example, the first to third time-saving gaming states and the second normal gaming state), and the performance executing means is configured to execute a plurality of types of normal performances in the normal gaming state. It is possible to execute one of the normal performances (for example, a performance such as a normal reach performed when hitting the left hand), and in the specific game state, one of the specific performances among the plurality of types of special performances (for example, a performance such as a normal reach performed when hitting the right hand) is possible. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform boss battle effects, Sengoku time effects, battle effects, etc. that are performed during times of war.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of normal effects are a plurality of types of normal effects that can be executed with a variable display of the identification symbol that satisfies the special condition (for example, a window preview in the variation). , normal reach, etc.), and multiple types of advance normal performances that can be executed in the variable display of the identification symbol before the variable display of the identification symbol that satisfies the special conditions (for example, a look-ahead performance in advance variation). It is desirable to include at least .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of advance normal effects include a first advance normal effect (for example, a flash notice when winning a prize at the starting slot, etc.) and a second advance normal effect (for example, a flash notice at the time of winning a prize at the starting slot). If a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start time of the advance normal performance (for example, when winning a prize in the starting slot), the performance execution means executes the It is desirable to be able to execute the second advance normal performance while not executing the first advance normal performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance executing means is configured to meet a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, a common prohibition condition 1 "second special symbol") at the start time of the advance normal performance. When there is a pending number of items, etc.), it is desirable that neither the first advance normal performance nor the second advance normal performance be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state (for example, the second time-saving gaming state) is a normal display state (for example, a male character stage or a female character stage) and the normal display state. This is a game state in which a special display state with a different display state (for example, a premier stage indicating the number of reserved consecutive stock items) can be executed, and the specific performance is a first specific performance (for example, according to the background display mode of the male character stage). and a second specific performance (for example, a performance based on a background display mode using a female character stage), and the performance execution means is configured to perform the first specific performance or the second specific performance in the normal display state. While any of the effects can be performed, it is desirable that neither the first specific effect nor the second specific effect be executed in the special display state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the end of the special gaming state, and a first specific gaming state. a second specific game state (for example, a second normal game state) different from the state, and the performance execution means executes a performance mode that executes one of a plurality of types of performance modes that define the performance state. and performance mode selection means for selecting the performance mode to be executed by the performance mode execution means, and the performance mode execution means selects at least the first specific performance mode in the first specific gaming state. (for example, a male character stage) and a second specific presentation mode different from the first mode (for example, a female character stage). The performance mode selection means allows the player to select at least one of the first specific performance mode and the second specific performance mode when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined selection condition is such that when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the second specific gaming state, the special condition is satisfied. A special game that can be realized in the special game state to which the transition was made based on the special condition, and if the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the first specific game state, the special game to which the transition was made based on the special condition. It is desirable that the condition cannot be established in any state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the first specific game state, the performance mode execution means executes the special condition. It is desirable that the performance mode that is being executed when the above is satisfied is continued to be executed in the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a method that determines whether the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means satisfies the special condition. a special condition determining means for determining the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means for a predetermined number of pieces when the variable display of the identification symbol has already been executed or the variable display of the identification symbol cannot be executed; a retention storage means capable of storing up to
In the special game state, the performance execution means executes a special performance (for example, displaying the number of consecutive stock items on hold based on a V passing performance pattern) when starting information that satisfies the special condition is stored in the suspension storage unit. If the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the first specific gaming state, the special performance can be executed in the special gaming state to which the transition is based on the special condition. On the other hand, if the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the second specific gaming state, in the special gaming state shifted based on the special condition, Even if starting information that satisfies the special conditions is stored, it is desirable that the special effect is not executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pattern in which the predetermined condition can be satisfied can be established in accordance with the execution state of the variable display of the identification symbol that is being executed at the start time of the advance normal performance. A first predetermined condition fulfillment pattern (for example, the first prohibition condition 3, ``When a prize is entered in the first starting slot within 500ms from the start of variable display of the first special symbol'') and the start of the preliminary normal performance. A second predetermined condition fulfillment pattern that can be established when the variable display of the identification symbol is not executed at the time (for example, the first prohibition condition 4 is "when a prize is won in the first starting slot during the demonstration display") It is desirable to include at least the following.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, and then the first identification symbol is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner. A first identification symbol variable display control means to be displayed, and switching to one of the fluctuation pattern tables from among a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables in which a plurality of fluctuation patterns for determining the fluctuation time of at least the first identification symbol are defined. a fluctuation pattern table switching means, and a fluctuation time determination for determining a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern table switched by the fluctuation pattern table switching means, and determining a fluctuation time of the first identification symbol based on the determined fluctuation pattern. equipped with the means and
As a pattern under which the specific condition can be satisfied, a first specific condition that can be satisfied when a predetermined normal performance is executed with the variable display of the identification symbol being executed at the start time of the preliminary normal performance. The established pattern (for example, common prohibition conditions 4 and 5 "while the full rotation effect is being displayed, the same look-ahead effect is already being executed", etc.) and the variable pattern table switching means at the start time of the advance normal effect. A second specific condition fulfillment pattern that can be established after or before a predetermined number of times when the fluctuation pattern table is switched by It is desirable to include "When the fluctuation is within the indicated range").

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, and then the first identification symbol is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner. A first identification symbol variable display control means for displaying a first identification symbol; and after displaying the second identification symbol variably for a predetermined variation time, the second identification symbol is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner as execution of the variable display of the second identification symbol. a second identification pattern variable display control means for displaying;
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be satisfied, the variable display of the identification symbol being executed at the start time of the advance normal performance is such that the variable display of the second identification symbol is performed by the second identification symbol variable display control means. A third specific condition establishment pattern that can be established when It is desirable to include.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 2)>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals, etc. and operating the start lever, multiple reels are rotated, and based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed, a specific number of medals, bonus games, etc. A gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine called a so-called slot machine) that provides benefits is also known.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines have different gaming states (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of game states are provided, such as a game state (a time-saving game state, a non-time-saving game state), etc. (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-59682).

It has been desired to maintain and improve the gaming performance by setting an appropriate gaming state and performing appropriate processing according to the gaming performance of the gaming machine.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain and improve gaming performance.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes at least one of a first identification pattern (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification symbol (for example, a second special symbol). identification symbol variable display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that stops and displays the identification symbol in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying it for a predetermined variable time; and effect execution means (e.g., display) that executes a predetermined effect. A sub-control circuit 300 that controls the device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and a gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that shifts the gaming state and controls the shifted gaming state. Prepare,
The gaming state control means is capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when a stopping mode of at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol satisfies a special condition. The game states in which it is possible to transition to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state or a small win game state) and in which the variable display of the identification symbols can be executed include a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) and the normal game state. The game state includes at least a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (for example, a first normal game state). and a second normal gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state) different from the first normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving game). a second specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state; and a third specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. state (for example, a third time-saving gaming state), and the gaming state control means controls the normal state when the number of fluctuations in which the identification symbol is displayed reaches a predetermined specific number of times. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift from the gaming state to the third specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the first identification symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is mainly displayed. A gaming state in which the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and at least one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner. It is desirable that there be.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of shifting to the second normal gaming state after the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state ends; It is desirable to be able to shift to the first normal gaming state after the second normal gaming state ends.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means determines that the stopping manner of the first identification symbol does not satisfy the special condition (for example, a loss) in the first specific game state. When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner, the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a first variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition. When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner (for example, in the case of a jackpot or small win), the first identification symbol is When displaying the second identification symbol in a variable manner so that the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a jackpot or small hit), the first variation time It is desirable that the second identification symbol can be displayed in a variable manner for a variable time (for example, 0.2 seconds) that is equal to or less than the second variable time.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means is configured such that the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a jackpot or a small win) in the second specific gaming state. When displaying the second identification symbol in a variable manner (in case of a hit), a third variable time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variable time longer than the third variable time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds) are displayed. It is possible to cause the second identification symbol to be displayed in a variable manner according to any variable time including (seconds), and the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a jackpot or a small hit). When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner, it is possible to display the first identification symbol in a variable manner by the third variation time, while the first identification symbol may be displayed in a variable manner by the fourth variation time. The effect execution means does not display the symbols in a variable manner, and when the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the third variable time and when the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the fourth variable time. , it is desirable to be able to perform the same effect (for example, a normal variable mode effect as a decorative pattern effect).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means is configured to display the second identification symbol in a variable manner when the number of fluctuations reaches the specific number of times. It is possible to cause the second identification symbol to be displayed in a variable manner by the same fifth variable time (for example, 15 seconds) regardless of the stopping mode, and the effect execution means is configured to cause the number of changes to reach the specific number of times. When the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner, when the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the fifth variation time, the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition. It is desirable to be able to perform different performances (for example, card performance or door opening performance) depending on when the special conditions are to be met and when the special conditions are not satisfied.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the special condition is set based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned identification symbols are satisfied; A reservation storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of reservations,
In the second normal game state, the performance pattern determining means determines a different performance according to the number of pieces of starting information that satisfies the special conditions stored in the suspension storage means and the determination result by the special condition determining means. It is desirable to be able to determine the pattern.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a door opening performance) in which the end time of the performance is not specified.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the special condition is set based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned identification symbols are satisfied; A reservation storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of reservations,
The performance execution means is configured such that the game state control means controls at least one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the performance execution means controls the first specific game state or the second specific game state that is being controlled. 2. When the first identification symbol is variably displayed when the end condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied, if the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is stored in the suspension storage means, the second normal If the first transition performance (for example, continuous battle entry performance) for transitioning to the gaming state is executed, and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is not stored in the suspension storage means, the first It is desirable to execute the special effect (for example, door opening effect) without executing the transition effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means is such that the game state control means controls the third specific gaming state, and the ending condition of the third specific gaming state being controlled is When the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the first identification symbol is established, the special performance can be executed at the start of the variable display of the first identification symbol, and the special performance is It is desirable to end the execution of the performance.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the special condition is set based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned identification symbol is satisfied; A reservation storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of reservations,
The performance execution means is configured to execute a game when a specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when the player does not pass through the V winning opening) while the special game state (for example, small winning game state) is being controlled. , when the special performance is executable and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is stored in the suspension storage means, the second normal game state is executed after the special performance ends. If the first transition performance (for example, a continuous battle entry performance) is executed and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is not stored in the suspension storage means, the first normal game state is entered after the special performance ends. It is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for the transition.

According to the present invention, it is possible to maintain and improve the gameplay.

<Additional note: 8th pachinko game machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there are also so-called 1-type and 2-type pachinko game machines, which are a combination of a so-called 1-type pachinko game machine and a so-called 2-type pachinko game machine. This is known (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-178259).

However, it is desired not only to mix the so-called type 1 pachinko machine and the so-called two-type pachinko machine, but also to create unprecedented gameplay and further improve the interest of the game. Ta.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the eighth pachinko gaming machine) has a main control means (e.g., main control circuit 200, main CPU 201) that can execute control related to the progress of the game. and a performance control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to the performance,
The main control means includes a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, a special condition determination means that determines whether or not an execution result of the game satisfies a special condition; A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and a game state in which the game is executed. Game execution mode determination that determines a game execution mode (for example, a variation pattern of special symbols) to be executed based on a controllable game state control means and the game execution means and to notify the execution result of the game. equipped with the means and
The performance control means can execute any one of a plurality of performances on a predetermined performance execution means, and the game state control means can control a normal gaming state and a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that it can be controlled to any gaming state including at least a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) and a gaming value given to the player is higher than the predetermined special gaming state. A relatively high specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and the specific special gaming state includes a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1); It is desirable to include a second specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) that is different from the first specific special gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of times the special gaming state has been executed (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values given to the player (for example, the total number of jackpot balls issued) is a threshold determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined threshold has been reached; and a limiting means capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the normal gaming state based on the determination by the threshold determining means. For example, it is desirable to include a main control circuit 200) that controls the number of times limiter function or the ball output limiter function.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of controlling a gaming disabling state (for example, a gaming disallowed state) that disables the player from playing, and the special gaming state is not executed. a threshold determining means capable of determining whether the number of times the game has been played (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values given to the player (for example, the total number of jackpot balls issued) has reached a predetermined threshold; Limiting means capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the non-gaming state based on the determination of the threshold value determining means (for example, a main control circuit 200 that controls a number limiter function or a ball output limiter function) It is desirable to have the following.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance control means does not provide notification regarding the threshold value before the threshold value determination means determines that the predetermined threshold value has been reached; When the determination means determines that the threshold value has been reached, it is desirable that a predetermined performance execution means notifies that the predetermined threshold value has been reached (eg, executes an ending performance).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table J1) in which the game execution mode is associated with a second table (for example, a second table different from the first table). , a special symbol variation pattern table J2), and table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) for storing a table including at least
The game execution mode determining means is capable of determining an execution mode including the execution time of the game as the game execution mode using any table stored in the table storage means, and the second table is It is desirable that the table be associated with an execution mode (for example, special symbol variation pattern 10H) that includes a relatively shorter execution time of the game than the first table.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold value (for example, the remaining number of jackpot limiter times) until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a predetermined value, the game execution mode determining means: The execution mode of the game can be determined using the first table, and if the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the second table can be used to determine the execution mode of the game. It is desirable to be able to determine how the game will be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first specific special gaming state is executed, the threshold value determining means determines that the predetermined threshold value is a first threshold value (for example, the limiter count is 98). times), and when the second specific special game state is executed, a second threshold value different from the first threshold value (for example, the limiter number of times is 100 times) can be set as the predetermined threshold value. Preferably configurable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means controls the predetermined special gaming state for a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of small winnings won) when the specific gaming state is controlled. 1 time or 255 times, etc.), the gaming state can be controlled to the normal gaming state after the end of the predetermined special gaming state, and the threshold value determining means determines whether the transition to the predetermined special gaming state has occurred. After executing a process of counting a predetermined count value (for example, a value subtracted from the number of limiters) to the threshold value based on the above, it is possible to determine whether or not the counted threshold value has reached the predetermined threshold value. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined special game state is a first predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state of selected symbol z5) and a first predetermined special game state. includes a different second predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state of the selected symbol z6), and the threshold value determining means is configured to determine that when the transition to the first predetermined special game state occurs, the predetermined special game state A first counted value (for example, the subtracted value of the limiter count is 2) is counted to the threshold value, and when the second predetermined special gaming state is entered, the first counted value is a different value from the first counted value. It is desirable to count a certain second count value (for example, the subtraction value of the limiter count is 1) to the threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a predetermined value, the gaming state control means sets a first predetermined number of times as the predetermined predetermined number of times ( For example, if the number of small winnings is set as 1) and the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the first number of wins is set as the predetermined number of wins. It is desirable to set a second specified number of times that is larger than the specified number of times (for example, the number of small winnings is two).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the end of the special gaming state, and the special gaming state. a second specific gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state) that can be executed without interruption; If the first hit) is a special gaming state transitioned from the normal gaming state, a third threshold (for example, the limiter number is 98 or 100 times) can be set as the predetermined threshold, and the first If the special gaming state to which the first transition is made from a gaming state other than the specific gaming state is a special gaming state to which the transition is made from the second specific gaming state, a fourth threshold different from the third threshold is set as the predetermined threshold. It is desirable to be able to set a threshold value (for example, the limiter count is 99 times).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, A time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the end of the special gaming state, and the special gaming state. a second specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state) that can be executed without interruption, and the game execution mode determining means determines the threshold determined by the threshold determining means during execution of the first specific gaming state The execution mode of the game (for example, the variation pattern of special symbols based on the variation pattern tables J1 to J4 of special symbols) can be determined based on the above, while the threshold value determination means It is desirable that the execution mode of the game (for example, the special symbol fluctuation pattern based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1) can be determined regardless of the threshold value determined by.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game control mode determining means for determining the control mode of the special gaming state (for example, the opening mode of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state),
It is desirable that the special game control mode determining means be able to determine the control mode of the special game state based on the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold.

In addition, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the eighth pachinko gaming machine) has main control means (for example, the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200, A gaming machine comprising a CPU 201) and a performance control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) that can execute control related to the performance executed by the performance execution means,
The main control means includes a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, a special condition determination means that determines whether or not an execution result of the game satisfies a special condition; A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state in which the game is executed. controllable game state control means;
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and The specific gaming state includes a normal specific gaming state (for example, a general time-saving gaming state) that can be ended when a first ending condition (for example, the number of small winnings is 1) is met, and the first ending condition. It is characterized by including at least a special specific gaming state (for example, a special time-saving gaming state) that can be ended when a second ending condition different from the above (for example, the number of small winnings is 255) is met. .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) that can be transitioned to when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special condition. a specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the game is established, and in which the gaming value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special gaming state; The special gaming states include a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special gaming state that is different from the first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1). jackpot gaming state), and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal specific gaming state after the end of the first specific special gaming state, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal specific gaming state after the end of the first specific special gaming state, and It is desirable that the gaming state can be controlled to the special specific gaming state after the end.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first termination condition is a termination condition that has a relatively higher probability of being satisfied than the second termination condition.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) that can be transitioned to when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special condition. a specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the game is established, and in which the gaming value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special gaming state; The special gaming states include a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special gaming state that is different from the first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1). (a jackpot game state), and the first termination condition is that the predetermined special game state is held a first prescribed number of times (for example, the number of small winnings won is 1) during the execution of the normal specific game state. The second end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the special game state is executed, and the second end condition is that the predetermined special game state is executed a second prescribed number of times (for example, , the number of small winnings is 255).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means does not meet either the first ending condition or the second ending condition during execution of the normal specific gaming state or the special specific gaming state. When a different third ending condition (for example, the number of time reductions is 10,000 times) is satisfied, it is desirable that either the normal specific gaming state or the special specific gaming state in progress can be ended.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the third termination condition is an termination condition that is satisfied at a relatively lower rate than the first termination condition is satisfied during execution of the normal specific gaming state. It is desirable that

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game execution means executes the first game (for example, a first special symbol lottery) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied. possible first game execution means, and when a second starting condition different from the first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied, a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a lottery of special symbols;
A relatively higher rate of transition to the special gaming state based on the execution result of the first game execution means than a transition to the special gaming state based on the execution result of the second game execution means. It is desirable that the special specified gaming state is entered after the special gaming state ends.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game execution means executes the first game (for example, lottery of the first special symbol) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied. possible first game execution means, and when a second starting condition different from the first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied, a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a lottery of special symbols;
A relatively higher rate of transition to the special gaming state based on the execution result of the second game execution means than a transition to the special gaming state based on the execution result of the first game execution means. It is desirable that after the special gaming state ends, the normal specific gaming state is entered.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game execution means executes the first game (for example, a first special symbol lottery) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied. possible first game execution means, and when a second starting condition different from the first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is satisfied, a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a lottery of special symbols;
When transitioning to the special gaming state based on the execution result of the first game execution means, after the end of the special gaming state, the normal gaming state, the normal specific gaming state, and the special specific gaming state are selected. While the transition is possible at a predetermined rate, if the transition to the special game state is based on the execution result of the second game execution means, the normal game state and the special specific game after the special game state ends. It is desirable to transition to the normal specific gaming state without transitioning to the normal specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) that can be transitioned to when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special condition. a specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the game is established, and in which the gaming value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special gaming state; The special gaming states include a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special gaming state that is different from the first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1). jackpot game state), and the predetermined special game state is a first predetermined state that can be transitioned to when a first predetermined condition (for example, a falling small win of selected symbol z7) is satisfied among the predetermined special conditions. A special gaming state (for example, a small winning game state of a falling small winning), and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition among the predetermined special conditions (for example, a V small winning of selected symbols z5, 6) a second predetermined special game state (for example, a small win game state of V small win) that can be transitioned to when the above is established and is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined special game state; The performance control means includes a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition (for example, a continuation end performance based on a card performance) when the first predetermined condition is satisfied; and a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition (for example, a victory performance by a battle performance or a door opening performance) when the condition is satisfied, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance when the second predetermined condition can be satisfied in either the normal specific gaming state or the special specific gaming state; The predetermined effect can be executed when the first predetermined condition can be satisfied in the normal specific gaming state, while the predetermined effect is not executed when the first predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special specific gaming state. This is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the normal gaming state is controlled. Preferably, the predetermined performance execution means is capable of not executing the predetermined performance if the first predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled in the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance control means selects a special performance that has a relatively high degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (for example, a preview performance based on a preview performance pattern B1 or a preview performance pattern B2). Equipped with a special performance execution means that can execute
The special performance execution means is capable of executing the special performance in any game, a game in which the special condition is satisfied and a game in which the special condition is not satisfied, when controlled to the normal specific game state, When controlled to the special specific game state, the special performance can be executed in a game where the special condition is met, while it is desirable that the special performance is not executed in a game where the special condition is not met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means controls a game execution time that can determine the execution time (for example, the variable display time of special symbols) of the game executed based on the game execution means. Equipped with decision means,
It is preferable that the game execution time determining means is capable of determining a game in which the normal specific gaming state has a relatively longer variable time than the special specific gaming state in a game in which the special condition is not satisfied.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note: 9th pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there are also so-called 1-type and 2-type pachinko game machines, which are a combination of a so-called 1-type pachinko game machine and a so-called 2-type pachinko game machine. known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178259).

However, it is desired not only to mix the so-called type 1 pachinko machine and the so-called two-type pachinko machine, but also to create unprecedented gameplay and further improve the interest of the game. Ta.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) provides a system for passing gaming media into the starting area (e.g., the first starting port 9120 or the second starting port 9140). a starting variation display game execution means (for example, main control circuit 200, sub control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a starting variation display game (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols) based on the starting variation display game; A specific variable display game that can execute a specific variable display game (for example, variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols) based on the passage of a game ball to a specific area (for example, the normal symbol operating area 9126) Execution means (for example, main control circuit 200 and sub-control circuit 300, etc.), special determination means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing lottery of special symbols) for determining whether or not the starting variation display game satisfies the special result. , a specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific variation display game satisfies a predetermined result (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a lottery of normal symbols); and a specific determination means for determining whether the specific variation display game satisfies a predetermined result; If it is determined that the execution result satisfies the special result, the first displacement device (for example, the first special electric accessory unit 9130 or the second special electric accessory unit 9150) provided in the game area is moved to the game medium. a first displacement device operation control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of displacing the player from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize, and execution of the specific fluctuation display game based on the determination result of the specific determination means When it is determined that the result satisfies the predetermined result, a second displacement device (for example, a normal electric accessory unit 9145) provided in the gaming area is displaced from a state where it is difficult to win a prize to a state where it is easy to win a prize. a second displacement device operation control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the game state; and a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the game state;
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The special result includes at least a first special result (e.g., a jackpot) and a second special result (e.g., a small win) that provides relatively less gaming value to the player than the first special result. and the predetermined result includes a first predetermined result (for example, short-circuit opening of the second starting port 9140), and a second predetermined result that takes a relatively longer time to make the second displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result. The method is characterized in that it includes at least a predetermined result (for example, long opening of the second starting port 9140).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means changes the normal gaming state on the condition that the specific variable display game has been executed a specific number of times while being controlled to the specific gaming state. It is desirable to be able to control the

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) and the second predetermined gaming state is determined by the specific determining means to be higher than the first specific gaming state. It is desirable to include at least a second specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state) in which the rate of determination as a result is relatively high.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a suspending means (for example, a main RAM 203 having a special symbol starting storage area) capable of suspending execution of the starting variation display game for a predetermined number of times, and a holding means (for example, a main RAM 203 having a special symbol starting storage area); The starting variation display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining the variation display mode (for example, the variation pattern of special symbols) of
The starting fluctuation display mode determining means determines the starting fluctuation display mode for a first period of time (for example, 10 seconds) if the starting fluctuation display game is not put on hold by the holding means when the starting condition for the starting fluctuation display game is satisfied. A first variation display mode (for example, a first special symbol variation pattern 0AH) that can be varied over a period of time is determined, and when the starting condition for the starting variation display game is satisfied, the starting variation display is set by the holding means. When the game is on hold, a second variable display mode (for example, a second special symbol variation) that can vary over a second time period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first time period is displayed. It is desirable to be able to determine pattern 1AH).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first time is the average time taken for the game medium fired from the firing device to reach the second displacement device (for example, the average arrival time of a general electric current). (for example, 10 seconds of the first variable display time), and the second time is the time required for the game medium fired from the firing device to reach the second displacement device. It is desirable that the time be shorter than the average time (for example, 1 second of the second variable display time).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second displacement device is provided downstream of the first displacement device and upstream of the specific area, and the specific area The first displacement device and the second displacement device are provided below the gaming area, and when the first displacement device or the second displacement device enters the winning easy state, the frequency of passing to the specific area is relatively It is desirable that it be lower.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes specific variable display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode (for example, a normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variable display game, and The specific variation display mode determining means satisfies the second predetermined result based on the determination result of the specific determination means than when it is determined that the first predetermined result is satisfied based on the determination result of the specific determination means. When it is determined that, a variation display mode (for example, normal symbol variation pattern 13H, 15H or 16H) that can fluctuate over a relatively long time (for example, 15 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds) is determined. It is desirable that this is possible.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes specific variable display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode (for example, a normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variable display game, and When the execution result of the specific variation display game that changed last time is a loss result that does not satisfy the predetermined result or the first predetermined result, the specific variation display mode determining means determines the specific variation display mode for a third time (for example, 15 seconds, 12 seconds). It is possible to determine a third variation display mode (for example, variation patterns 13H to 15H of normal symbols) that can vary over a period of 2 seconds or 40 seconds, and the execution result of the specific variation display game that varied last time is determined by the second predetermined In the case of a result, a fourth variation display mode (for example, normal symbol variation pattern 16H) that can vary over a fourth time (for example, 60 seconds) that is longer than the third time. It is desirable to be able to determine

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes specific variable display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode (for example, a normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variable display game, and The specific variable display mode determining means determines the variable display mode (which can vary over a relatively shorter variation time (for example, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) in the specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state. For example, it is possible to determine the fluctuation patterns of normal symbols (10H, 11H, etc.), and the fluctuation display mode (for example, The normal symbol fluctuation pattern 01H) is faster than the fluctuation display mode (for example, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern 16H) that can fluctuate over the longest fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) that can be determined in the specific gaming state. It is desirable to have a variation display mode with a short variation time.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a performance execution means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) capable of executing a predetermined performance, and The performance execution means is capable of executing a performance related to the variable display of the starting variable display game in the normal gaming state, but does not execute a performance related to the variable display of the specific variable display game, and executes the performance related to the variable display of the specific variable display game in the specific gaming state. It is desirable that an effect related to the variable display of the game can be executed, and when the execution result of the specific variable display game becomes the predetermined result, an effect related to the variable display of the starting variable display game can also be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46), and It is equipped with a suspension means (for example, main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of suspending the execution of the variable display game for a predetermined number of times, and the effect execution means is such that the starting variable display game satisfies the special result. and if the starting fluctuation display game is not suspended by the holding means when the starting condition for the starting fluctuation display game is satisfied, a first performance (for example, a BONUS entry performance) is executed. , when the start fluctuation display game satisfies the special result, and the start fluctuation display game is suspended by the suspension means when the start condition for the start fluctuation display game is satisfied, the It is desirable to perform a second performance (for example, a BONUS continuation performance) that is different from the first performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46), and The starting variable display game executed by the holding means (for example, the main RAM 203 having a special symbol starting storage area) capable of suspending the execution of the variable display game for a predetermined number of times and the starting variable display game execution means has a special result. If the above is satisfied, a special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a predetermined number of gaming values can be awarded to the player after the special result is established; and the effect executing means is configured to control the starting fluctuation display game when the special result is satisfied and the starting fluctuation display game is not suspended by the suspending means when a start condition for the starting fluctuation display game is satisfied. If the special result is satisfied, it is possible to display the number of game media to be acquired (for example, display an image of the number of game balls to be acquired) in relation to the number of game values that the player can acquire at the start of the special gaming state. If the starting fluctuation display game is suspended by the holding means when the starting condition for the starting fluctuation display game is satisfied, the starting fluctuation display game is held by the suspending means when the starting fluctuation display game is executed last time at the start of the special gaming state. It is desirable to be able to display a number of acquired game media (for example, a display of an image of the number of acquired game balls) regarding the number of game values acquired in the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start fluctuation display game execution means executes the first start fluctuation display game ( For example, a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc. A second starting variable display game execution means capable of executing a second starting variable display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium. The performance execution means executes the second start by the holding means when the second start fluctuation display game satisfies the special result and the start condition of the second start fluctuation display game is satisfied. If the variable display game is not on hold, the first effect is executed, the second starting variable display game satisfies the special result, and the starting conditions for the second starting variable display game are If the second starting variable display game is put on hold by the holding means when the second starting variation display game is established, it is desirable to execute a second effect different from the first effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start fluctuation display game execution means executes the first start fluctuation display game ( For example, a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc. A second starting variable display game execution means capable of executing a second starting variable display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium. The special determination means is a first special determination means (for example, a first special symbol lottery) that determines whether the first starting variation display game satisfies the special result or is a loss that does not satisfy the special result. a second special determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for a second special symbol) that determines whether the second starting variable display game satisfies the special result or is a loss; The first special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining the loss than the probability of determining that the special result is satisfied, and the second special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining the loss than of determining that the special result is satisfied. It is desirable that the probability of determining that the special result is satisfied is relatively high.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second time is set to a time (for example, 2 seconds) or less in which the first displacement device becomes in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: 10th Pachinko Game Machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area.

In order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko machines have different gaming states (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of game states are provided, such as a game state (a time-saving game state, a non-time-saving game state), etc. (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-59682).

However, it has been desired to further improve the interest of the game by making further changes to the game state and performing effects in accordance with the new game state, thereby creating a game experience that has never existed before.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the tenth pachinko gaming machine)
a starting information acquisition means for acquiring starting information when an acquisition condition is met; a holding means capable of holding a predetermined number of pieces of starting information acquired by the starting information obtaining means; A symbol variation execution means capable of executing a symbol variation based on the starting information, a determination means for determining an execution result of the symbol variation, and a determination means capable of determining the execution result of the symbol variation prior to the determination by the determination means. an advance determination means, a game state control means capable of controlling a gaming state, and a performance executable based on the determination result of the determination means or a advance performance executable based on the determination result of the advance determination means (for example, A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing any one of the following:
The determination result determined by the determination means or the advance determination means includes at least a specific result (for example, a time-saving symbol) and a special result different from the particular result (for example, a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol),
The gaming state control means is configured to control a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the specific result is derived as a judgment result of the judgment means, and a controllable to any gaming state that includes at least a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the special result is derived and that can give a predetermined gaming value;
The specific result includes a first specific result (for example, time-saving symbol 10) and a second specific result (for example, time-saving symbol 20) different from the first specific result,
The specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the first specific result is derived, and a first specific gaming state that can be transitioned to when the second specific result is derived. and a second specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The determining means allows the specific result to be derived if the specific result is derived when the gaming state control means is controlling the normal gaming state; When the specific result is derived while being controlled to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, it is desirable that the specific result is not allowed to be derived.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
a firing operation means that fires game media according to a firing operation by a player to advance the game, and when the normal game state or the first specific game state is controlled, the first firing operation (for example, It is desirable that the game progresses with the left-handed strike as the normal mode, and when the second specific game state is controlled, the game progresses as the second firing operation (for example, right-handed strike) as the normal mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first specific gaming state is preferably a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state or has the same advantage as the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the rate at which the first specific result is derived in the normal gaming state is greater than the rate at which the second specific result is derived in the specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The determining means is capable of deriving the special result with a first probability as a rate at which the special result is derived, and a second probability higher than the first probability as a rate at which the specific result is derived. It is desirable that the specific result can be derived using

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The gaming state control means is configured to perform a specific game on the condition that the number of variations in the symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, a ceiling value of 950 times) when the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state. When the conditions are met, it is possible to control to a third specific gaming state (for example, a fourth time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than at least the first specific gaming state;
It is desirable that the specific condition is satisfied when the game is controlled to the first specific gaming state at a relatively higher rate than when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling a fourth specific gaming state (for example, a fifth time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state after the special gaming state is controlled. Yes, and in the fourth specific game state, the game proceeds with the second firing operation as a regular mode until the number of variations in the symbol variation is executed a specific number of times (for example, the switching number of times 1 or 5). On the other hand, if the number of variations in the symbol variation exceeds the specific number, it is desirable to proceed with the game by making the first firing operation a normal mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the previous starting information held in the holding unit is for deriving the special result, the effect executing means is configured to perform the effect execution means in such a manner that the subsequent starting information held after the previous starting information is the one that derives the special result. It is desirable that it is possible not to execute a preceding effect related to derivation of the specific result, regardless of whether the specific result is the first specific result or the second specific result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The preceding effect includes at least a specific preceding effect (for example, an expected UP zone, a RUSH expected zone) that suggests that the specific result may be derived,
The specific preceding performance is a performance that can be executed on the starting information from which the second specific result is derived when the holding means has the starting information from which the second specific result is derived; It is desirable that the effect is not executed for the starting information from which the first specific result is derived when the starting information from which the first specific result is derived exists.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the previous starting information held in the holding unit is for deriving the second specific result, the effect executing means is configured to display subsequent starting information held after the previous starting information. While it is possible to not cause the preceding performance to be executed, if the previous starting information held in the holding means is the one that derives the first specific result, the subsequent starting information It is desirable to be able to perform the preceding effect for.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The performance includes a specific performance (for example, a card performance) that suggests that the first specific result or the second specific result may be derived, and the preceding performance is based on the first specific result. Or, it includes a specific preceding effect (for example, an expectation UP zone, a mode transition zone, a RUSH expectation zone) that suggests that the second specific result may be derived, and the specific effect is a first effect mode. (for example, a white card effect); and a second effect mode in which the second specific result is derived at a relatively higher rate than the first effect mode (for example, a red card effect). It can be executed in the production mode of
When the specific preceding effect is executed in the previous symbol variation, the effect execution means executes the first effect at a relatively higher rate than in the case where the specific preceding effect is not executed in the previous symbol variation. It is desirable that the specific performance can be executed in the second performance mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The preceding performance includes at least a special preceding performance (for example, an expectation UP zone) that can be executed even if the variation result of the symbol variation determined by the preceding determination means is either the special result or the specific result. , the special advance performance is a performance that can be executed at least in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the special advance performance at a relatively higher rate when controlled to the normal gaming state than when controlled to the first specific gaming state. desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the first specific result or the second specific result is determined by the determining device, the performance execution means determines whether the normal gaming state is controlled by the gaming state control device or the gaming state. It is desirable that the performance can be executed differently depending on when the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state is controlled by the control means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A game board (for example, a game panel 10100) in which a game area is formed where game balls flow down;
A starting area (e.g., first starting port 10120) and a specific area (e.g., second passage gate 10126L) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter; Provided with an auxiliary variable winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 10146) that can change between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, on the condition that the ball has entered,
In the first specific gaming state, it is relatively easier for game balls to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than in the disadvantageous first specific gaming state (for example, the first time-saving gaming state) and the disadvantageous first specific gaming state. an advantageous first specific gaming state (for example, a third time-saving gaming state);
The starting information acquisition means acquires first starting information (for example, first special when a game ball enters the auxiliary variable winning device, acquires second starting information (for example, starting information of a second special symbol);
The determining means more easily determines the execution result of the symbol variation based on the second starting information as the special result than the execution result of the symbol variation based on the first starting information,
It is desirable that the starting region is provided downstream of the specific region.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note: 11th pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area.

In order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko machines have different gaming states (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of game states are provided, such as a game state (a time-saving game state, a non-time-saving game state), etc. (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-59682).

However, it has been desired to further improve the interest of the game by making further changes to the game state and performing effects in accordance with the new game state, thereby creating a game experience that has never existed before.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine)
A variable display execution means capable of performing a variable display of identification symbols; a special condition determination means for determining whether the execution result of the variable display of the identification symbols satisfies a special condition; and a first When it is determined that a special condition (for example, a jackpot or a small win) is met, a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot) in which a predetermined gaming value can be awarded to the player after the variable display of the identification symbol ends. A special game state control means capable of controlling a winning game state (win game state), and a non-winning easy state (for example, a normal winning game state) in which it is not easy for a game ball to enter a predetermined area as a game state in which the variable display of the identification symbol is executed. any gaming state that includes at least a winning easy state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which it is relatively easier for the game ball to enter the predetermined area than the non-winning easy state (gaming state); In a gaming machine equipped with a controllable game state control means and a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The prize entry easy state can be entered when the special condition determining means determines that the first special condition is satisfied (for example, the fifth time-saving game state); A normal winning easy state that can be transitioned to when it is determined that a second special condition different from the special condition (for example, time saving win) is satisfied,
The normal winning easy state includes a first normal winning easy state (for example, a first time-saving game state) and a second normal winning easy state (for example, including at least a second time-saving gaming state);
The special condition determining means can determine that the second special condition is satisfied when the non-winning easy state is controlled by the gaming state controlling means, When the state is controlled, it is not determined that the second special condition is satisfied, or it is more difficult to determine that the second special condition is satisfied than when the non-winning easy state is controlled,
The gaming state control means, in the first normal winning easy state, when the variable display of the identification symbol executed by the variable display execution means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, a first time saving number to a third time saving number), It is possible to shift to the non-winning easy state,
In the first normal winning easy state, the performance execution means executes a general performance (for example, a performance in the general performance mode and a portent performance mode) based on the number of times the variable display execution unit performs the variable display of the identification symbol. It is characterized by being executable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A firing operation means for firing game media according to a firing operation by a player to advance the game,
When the non-winning easy state or the first normal winning easy state is controlled by the game state control means, the game progresses with the first firing operation (for example, hitting left) as a normal mode, and the second normal When the easy-to-win state is controlled, it is desirable to proceed with the game with the second firing operation (for example, hitting right) as a normal mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
In the first normal winning easy state, when the number of times the variable display of the identification symbol is executed is a first number of times that is less than the prescribed number of times (for example, when the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is 1 to 39), a first general performance (for example, a general performance mode performance) can be performed, and the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is less than the specified number of times, and the first execution number (For example, when the variable display number of the first special symbol is 40 to 49), a second general performance different from the first general performance (for example, a portent performance mode) is executed. It is desirable to be able to execute the mode transition (inciting effect).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is the predetermined number of times, the performance execution means executes a specific general performance different from the first general performance and the second general performance (for example, in a portent performance mode). mode transition effect) can be executed,
It is desirable that the specific general presentation indicates the normal winning easy state or the first normal winning easy state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
comprising a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a gaming state;
In the first normal winning easy state, the variation pattern determining means selects a first variation pattern (for example, a normal special symbol variation pattern) when the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is the first number of executions. 00H), and when the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is the second execution number, a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern (for example, variation of a special symbol for suggestion) can be determined. pattern 10H) can be determined,
It is preferable that the variable display execution means is able to execute variable display of the identification symbol based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
comprising a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a gaming state;
In the first normal winning easy state, when the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is the predetermined number of times, the variation pattern determining means selects a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern 11H of a special symbol for determination). ) is desirably determinable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
comprising a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a gaming state;
The fluctuation pattern determining means is capable of determining different fluctuation patterns between the first normal winning easy state and the second normal winning easy state,
It is preferable that the variable display execution means is able to execute variable display of the identification symbol based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The fluctuation pattern determining means is capable of determining the fluctuation pattern that is different between the second normal winning easy state and the special winning easy state, and when in the special winning easy state, when in the second normal winning easy state, It is desirable to be able to determine a shortening variation pattern that is associated with a variable display time of the identification symbol that is shorter than .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
comprising a prescribed number of times determining means for determining any one prescribed number of times (for example, a first time saving number to a third time saving number of times) from among a plurality of prescribed times when transitioning to the first normal winning easy state;
The plurality of predetermined times include a predetermined predetermined number of times (for example, the first time saving number of times, 50 times) and a specific predetermined number of times that is greater than the predetermined predetermined number of times (for example, the second time saving number of times, 100 times or 150 times of the third time saving number).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the specific prescribed number of times is determined by the prescribed number of times determining means, the first number of times of execution is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 1 to 39); The second execution number may be set to be less than a predetermined number of times and exceed the first execution number (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 40 to 49),
In the first normal easy-to-win state, the performance execution means is configured to perform a third execution number (for example, a third execution number) in which the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is greater than the first number of executions and/or the second number of executions. When the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is 51 to 89), the first general effect can be executed, and the number of times the variable display of the identification symbol is displayed is the second number of times or/and the third It is desirable that the second general effect can be executed when the fourth execution count is greater than the execution count (for example, when the variable display count of the first special symbol is 90 to 99).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the specific prescribed number of times is determined by the prescribed number of times determining means, the performance execution means determines that the number of executions of the variable display of the identification symbol is equal to or equal to the predetermined number of times in the first normal winning easy state. / and when the specified specified number of times is reached, a specific general performance different from the first general performance and the second general performance can be executed;
It is desirable that the specific general presentation indicates the normal winning easy state or the first normal winning easy state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first normal winning easy state includes a disadvantageous first normal winning easy state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) and an advantageous first normal winning easy state that is relatively more advantageous than the disadvantageous first normal winning easy state ( For example, a third time-saving game state),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific general performance (for example, a mode transition performance) that suggests the normal winning easy state, the disadvantageous first normal winning easy state, or the advantageous first normal winning easy state. It is desirable that there be.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A game board (for example, a game panel 11100) in which a game area into which a game ball flows is formed, a starting area (for example, a first starting opening 11120) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and a specific area ( For example, a second passage gate 11126L) is provided in the gaming area, and on the condition that a gaming ball enters the specific area, it can be in an open state where a gaming ball can enter and a closed state where it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter. A variable auxiliary variable prize winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 11146),
The first normal winning easy state includes a disadvantageous first normal winning easy state and an advantageous first normal winning easy state that is relatively more advantageous than the disadvantageous first normal winning easy state, and the first normal winning easy state has an advantageous first normal winning easy state. In the winning easy state, it is relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than in the second normal winning easy state, but it is relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than in the disadvantageous first normal winning easy state. Game balls can easily enter,
The variable display execution means is capable of variably displaying a first identification symbol (for example, a first special symbol) when a game ball enters the starting area, and when the game ball enters the auxiliary variable winning device. When the second identification symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is displayed variably,
The special condition determining means is configured to more easily determine that the execution result of the variable display of the second identification symbol satisfies the first special condition than the execution result of the variable display of the first identification symbol; It is easier to determine that the execution result of the variable display of the identification symbol No. 2 satisfies the first special condition rather than a loss;
It is desirable that the starting region is provided downstream of the specific region.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
In the advantageous first normal winning easy state, the performance execution means opens an opening that indicates that the game ball can enter the auxiliary variable winning device when it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device. It is desirable to be able to execute suggestive effects (for example, subtitle effects).

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: 10th Pachinko Game Machine and 11th Pachinko Game Machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. A gaming machine (so-called pachinko gaming machine) is known that controls the jackpot gaming state when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals, etc. and operating the start lever, multiple reels are rotated, and based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed, a specific number of medals, bonus games, etc. A gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine also referred to as a so-called slot machine) that provides benefits is also known.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines have different gaming states (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of game states are provided, such as a game state (a time-saving game state, a non-time-saving game state), etc. (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-59682).

In such pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state in a short period of time in this high probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state, and the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value (gaming balls). .

However, as the cumulative gaming value acquired by players increases (the so-called increased number of balls played), there is a risk that the gambling nature of the game will increase, and it is necessary to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of the game. Ta.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately suppresses the gambling nature of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the 10th pachinko gaming machine or the 11th pachinko gaming machine)
A game execution means capable of executing a game, and a game state in which the game is performed are a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal game state or a general game state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an advantageous game state (for example, a normal game state or a general game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, a game state control means capable of controlling any game state including at least a jackpot game state, a RUSH game state), and a game that grants a predetermined number of game values to a player according to the execution result of the game. a value imparting means; a counting means capable of counting the cumulative increase in the gaming value given to the player (for example, an increase in the number of game balls (MY)); and a regulation value as the cumulative increase by the counting means. (for example, 95,000 pieces), a game stopping means capable of stopping the game on the condition that the game has been counted; comprising a notification means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, etc.) that provides notification regarding a stop notice (for example, a first game stop notice, a second game stop notice, and a third game stop notice);
The notifying means is capable of notifying the game stop notice when a notice start condition is met when the cumulative increase number is within a predetermined count range (for example, 85,000 to 94,999) below the regulation value. It is characterized by

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined counting range includes a first counting range below the first boundary value (for example, 85,000 to 89,999 pieces) and a second counting range from the first boundary value or more to less than the regulation value (for example, 90,000 to 94,999 pieces),
When the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the first counting range, the notification means is configured to meet a first advance notice start condition (for example, during a specific jackpot gaming state transitioning to a RUSH gaming state, RUSH When the gaming state) is established, notification regarding the game stop notice can be made, and when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the second counting range, the second notice start condition (for example, jackpot) is established. When a gaming state (such as a gaming state) is established, it is desirable to be able to notify the game stop notice.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The advantageous gaming state includes a plurality of advantageous gaming states (for example, a jackpot gaming state) with different degrees of advantageousness, and the establishment of the first notice start condition means that a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, a RUSH gaming state) is established. It is preferable that the second advance notice start condition is satisfied by transitioning to one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The notification means is capable of terminating the game stop notice started when the count is within the first count range based on the game state controlled by the game state control means; It is desirable that the game stop notice started when the second counting range is within the second count range can be continued until the regulation value is counted by the counting means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The notification means is configured to cause the game state control means to notify the game stop notice that is started when the cumulative increase number is within the first counting range, when the cumulative increase number is within the first counting range. When the gaming state is started, the game stop notice is ended, and when the cumulative increase number reaches the second counting range, the game stop notice is continued until the regulation value is counted by the counting means. It is desirable that it be possible to do so.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
comprising a notice history storage unit that stores executed information indicating that a notice regarding the game stop notice has been given when the count is within the first counting range;
The notification means is configured such that the cumulative increase number counted by the counting means reaches the second counting range from the first counting range when the disadvantageous gaming state is controlled by the gaming state control means. In this case, if the executed information is not stored in the advance notice history storage section, the second notice start condition is assumed to have been met, and a notification regarding the game stop notice is issued, and the executed information is stored in the notice history storage section. is stored, it is desirable that the notification regarding the game stop notice be not made.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The notification means is capable of giving notification regarding a first game stop notice when the first notice start condition is satisfied when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the first counting range; When the cumulative increase number counted by the counting means is within the second counting range, when the second notice start condition is met, a notice regarding a second game stop notice different from the first game stop notice is issued. It is desirable that this is possible.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can provide a gaming value to the player when the execution result of the game satisfies a special condition,
The game stop means controls the special advantageous game state by the game state control means, and when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means exceeds the regulation value, the game stop means stops the special advantageous game state. It is possible to stop the game after the advantageous gaming state ends,
The notification means controls the special advantageous game state by the game state control means, and when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means exceeds the regulation value, the notification means controls the first game. It is desirable to be able to provide notification regarding a third game stop notice that is different from the stop notice and the second game stop notice.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the game is stopped by the game stop means, the notification means issues a game stop notification in connection with the game being stopped, until a change condition (for example, a forced notification time elapses) is satisfied. It is desirable that the game stop notification is performed in a first notification mode, and when the change condition is satisfied, the game stop notification is performed in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The notification means includes at least an image display means for displaying a regulation image as the game stop notification,
The image display means displays a first regulation image until the change condition is met, and when the change condition is met, displays a second regulation image that is different in size from the first regulation image. It is desirable to display the information.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
demo performance means for performing a demonstration performance performed when the game is not being executed; When the first regulation image is being displayed, the demonstration effect cannot be executed, and when the second regulation image is being displayed by the image display means, the demonstration effect can be executed. It is desirable that

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A performance operation means for accepting performance operations from a player,
When displaying the second regulation image, the image display means displays a special image (for example, a QR code image) according to the player's operation, when the performance operation is received by the performance operation means. It is desirable that it be possible to do so.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
and a volume adjustment means for adjusting the volume related to the notification means,
When the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the volume adjusting means cannot adjust the volume until the changing condition is satisfied, and can adjust the volume when the changing condition is satisfied. desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
and a light amount adjusting means for adjusting the light amount regarding the notification means,
When the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the light amount adjusting means cannot adjust the light amount until the changing condition is satisfied, and can adjust the light amount when the changing condition is satisfied. desirable.

According to the present invention, the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed.

6 Launch device 7 Display device 54 Production button 200 Main control circuit 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
300 Sub control circuit 301 Sub CPU
303 Work RAM
310 button control circuit

Claims (1)

arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing for controlling gaming operations and arithmetic processing for performing processing other than gaming;
storage means for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means;
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area,
Further, the stack provided in the gaming area is used for processing related to the gaming area, and the stack provided in the non-gaming area is used for processing related to the non-gaming area,
When a process related to the non-gaming area is called for the first time, setting a stack pointer of a stack provided in the non-gaming area;
When the power is turned on, CRC calculation of the specified area is performed,
Comparing the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power-off before the power-on,
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means is set according to the startup state,
If the CRC values do not match as a result of the comparison process, and if a setting change is instructed when the power is turned on, set the first address of the clear range to be set in the event of an abnormality to the first address of the clear range. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images